PIC18F47J13 Family Data Sheet 28/44-Pin, High-Performance Microcontrollers with nanoWatt XLP Technology 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. • Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. • There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. • Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PIC32 logo, rfPIC and UNI/O are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. FilterLab, Hampshire, HI-TECH C, Linear Active Thermistor, MXDEV, MXLAB, SEEVAL and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, HI-TIDE, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, mTouch, Octopus, Omniscient Code Generation, PICC, PICC-18, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit, PICtail, REAL ICE, rfLAB, Select Mode, Total Endurance, TSHARC, UniWinDriver, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2010, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. ISBN: 978-1-60932-304-2 Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. DS39974A-page 2 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY PIC18F47J13 Family 28/44-Pin, High-Performance Microcontrollers with nanoWatt XLP Technology Power Management Features with nanoWatt XLP for Extreme Low Power: • Deep Sleep mode: CPU Off, Peripherals Off, SRAM Off, Currents Down to 9 nA and 700 nA with RTCC: - Able to wake-up on external triggers, programmable WDT or RTCC alarm - Ultra Low-Power Wake-up (ULPWU) • Sleep mode: CPU Off, Peripherals Off, SRAM On, Fast Wake-up, Currents Down to 0.2 A, 2V Typical • Idle: CPU Off, SRAM On, Currents Down to 1.7 A Typical • Run: CPU On, SRAM On, Currents Down to 5.8 A Typical • Timer1 Oscillator w/RTCC: 0.7 A, 32 kHz Typical • Watchdog Timer: 0.33 A, 2V Typical Flexible Oscillator Structure: • • • • • • • • Two External Clock modes, Up to 48 MHz (12 MIPS) Integrated Crystal/Resonator Driver Low-Power 31 kHz Internal RC Oscillator Tunable Internal Oscillator (31 kHz to 8 MHz, ±0.15% Typical, ±1% Max.) Precision 48 MHz PLL or 4x PLL Options Low-Power Secondary Oscillator using Timer1 @ 32 kHz Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM): - Allows for safe shutdown if any clock stops Programmable Reference Clock Output Generator Peripheral Highlights: • Peripheral Pin Select: - Allows independent I/O mapping of many peripherals - Continuous hardware integrity checking and safety interlocks prevent unintentional configuration changes • Hardware Real-Time Clock/Calendar (RTCC): - Provides clock, calendar and alarm functions • High-Current Sink/Source 25 mA/25mA (PORTB and PORTC) • Four Programmable External Interrupts • Four Input Change Interrupts • Three Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) modules: - One, two or four PWM outputs - Selectable polarity - Programmable dead time - Auto-shutdown and auto-restart - Pulse steering control 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Peripheral Highlights (cont.): • Seven Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) modules • Two Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) modules featuring: - 3-wire SPI (all 4 modes) - SPI Direct Memory Access (DMA) channel w/1024 byte count - I2C™ Master and Slave modes • 8-Bit Parallel Master Port/Enhanced Parallel Slave Port • Three Analog Comparators with Input Multiplexing • 12-Bit Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter module: - Up to 13 input channels - Auto-acquisition capability - 10-bit mode for 100 ksps conversion speed - Conversion available during Sleep • High/Low-Voltage Detect module • Charge Time Measurement Unit (CTMU): - Provides a precise resolution time measurement for both flow measurement and simple temperature sensing - Supports capacitive touch sensing for touch screens and capacitive switches • Two Enhanced USART modules: - Supports RS-485, RS-232 and LIN/J2602 - Auto-wake-up on Start bit - Auto-Baud Detect (ABD) Special Microcontroller Features: • • • • • • • • • • • • 5.5V Tolerant Inputs (digital only pins) Low-Power, High-Speed CMOS Flash Technology C Compiler Optimized Architecture for Re-Entrant Code Priority Levels for Interrupts Self-Programmable under Software Control 8 x 8 Single-Cycle Hardware Multiplier Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT): - Programmable period from 4 ms to 131s Single-Supply In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) via Two Pins In-Circuit Debug (ICD) with 3 Breakpoints via Two Pins Operating Voltage Range of 2.0V to 3.6V On-Chip 2.5V Regulator Flash Program Memory of 10,000 Erase/Write Cycles Minimum and 20-Year Data Retention Preliminary DS39974A-page 3 Pins Program Memory (bytes) SRAM (bytes) Remappable Pins Timers 8/16-Bit ECCP/CCP EUSART SPI w/DMA I2C™ 12-Bit A/D (ch) Comparators Deep Sleep PMP/PSP CTMU RTCC PIC18F47J13 FAMILY PIC18F26J13 28 64K 3760 19 4/4 3/7 2 2 Y Y 10 3 Y N Y Y PIC18F27J13 28 128K 3760 19 4/4 3/7 2 2 Y Y 10 3 Y N Y Y PIC18F46J13 44 64K 3760 25 4/4 3/7 2 2 Y Y 13 3 Y Y Y Y PIC18F47J13 44 128K 3760 25 4/4 3/7 2 2 Y Y 13 3 Y Y Y Y PIC18LF26J13 28 64K 3760 19 4/4 3/7 2 2 Y Y 10 3 N N Y Y PIC18LF27J13 28 128K 3760 19 4/4 3/7 2 2 Y Y 10 3 N N Y Y PIC18LF46J13 44 64K 3760 25 4/4 3/7 2 2 Y Y 13 3 N Y Y Y PIC18LF47J13 44 128K 3760 25 4/4 3/7 2 2 Y Y 13 3 N Y Y Y PIC18F Device DS39974A-page 4 MSSP Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY Pin Diagrams 44-Pin TQFP 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 RC6/CCP9/PMA5/TX1/CK1/RP17 RC5/SDO1/RP16 RC4/SDI1/SDA1/RP15 RD3/PMD3/RP20 RD2/PMD2/RP19 RD1/PMD1/SDA2 RD0/PMD0/SCL2 RC3/SCK1/SCL1/RP14 RC2/AN11/C2IND/CTPLS/RP13 RC1/CCP8/T1OSI/RP12 NC = Pins are up to 5.5V tolerant PIC18F4XJ13 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 NC RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI/RP11 OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 VSS2 VDD2 RE2/AN7/PMCS RE1/AN6/PMWR RE0/AN5/PMRD RA5/AN4/C1INC/SS1/HLVDIN/RP2 VDDCORE/VCAP NC NC RB4/CCP4/PMA1/KBI0/RP7 RB5/CCP5/PMA0/KBI1/RP8 RB6/CCP6/KBI2/PGC/RP9 RB7/CCP7/KBI3/PGD/RP10 MCLR RA0/AN0/C1INA/ULPWU/PMA6/RP0 RA1/AN1/C2INA/VBG/CTDIN/PMA7/RP1 RA2/AN2/C2INB/C1IND/C3INB/VREF-/CVREF RA3/AN3/C1INB/VREF+ RC7/CCP10/PMA4/RX1/DT1/RP18 RD4/PMD4/RP21 RD5/PMD5/RP22 RD6/PMD6/RP23 RD7/PMD7/RP24 VSS1 VDD1 RB0/AN12/C3IND/INT0/RP3 RB1/AN10/C3INC/PMBE/RTCC/RP4 RB2/AN8/C2INC/CTED1/PMA3/REFO/RP5 RB3/AN9/C3INA/CTED2/PMA2/RP6 Legend: RPn represents remappable pins.Some input and output functions are routed through the Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) module and can be dynamically assigned to any of the RPn pins. For a list of the input and output functions, see Table 10-13 and Table 10-14, respectively. For details on configuring the PPS module, see Section 10.7 “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS)”. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 5 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY Pin Diagrams (Continued) 44-Pin QFN 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 RC6/CCP9/PMA5/TX1/CK1/RP17 RC5/SDO1/RP16 RC4/SDI1/SDA1/RP15 RD3/PMD3/RP20 RD2/PMD2/RP1 RD1/PMD1/SDA2 RD0/PMD0/SCL2 RC3/SCK1/SCL1/RP14 RC2/AN11/C2IND/CTPLS/RP13 RC1/CCP8/T1OSI/RP12 RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI/RP11 = Pins are up to 5.5V tolerant PIC18F4XJ13 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 VSS2 AVSS1 VDD2 AVDD2 RE2/AN7/PMCS RE1/AN6/PMWR RE0/AN5/PMRD RA5/AN4/C1INC/SS1/HLVDIN/RP2 VDDCORE/VCAP RB3/AN9/C3INA/CTED2/PMA2/RP6 NC RB4/CCP4/PMA1/KBI0/RP7 RB5/CCP5/PMA0/KBI1/RP8 RB6/CCP6/KBI2/PGC/RP9 RB7/CCP7/KBI3/PGD/RP10 MCLR RA0/AN0/C1INA/ULPWU/PMA6/RP0 RA1/AN1/C2INA/VBG/CTDIN/PMA7/RP1 RA2/AN2/C2INB/C1IND/C3INB/VREF-/CVREF RA3/AN3/C1INB/VREF+ RC7/CCP10/PMA4/RX1/DT1/RP18 RD4/PMD4/RP21 RD5/PMD5/RP22 RD6/PMD6/RP23 RD7/PMD7/RP24 VSS1 AVDD1 VDD1 RB0/AN12/C3IND/INT0/RP3 RB1/AN10/C3INC/PMBE/RTCC/RP4 RB2/AN8/C2INC/CTED1/PMA3/REFO/RP5 Legend: RPn represents remappable pins.Some input and output functions are routed through the Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) module and can be dynamically assigned to any of the RPn pins. For a list of the input and output functions, see Table 10-13 and Table 10-14, respectively. For details on configuring the PPS module, see Section 10.7 “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS)”. Note: For the QFN package, it is recommended that the bottom pad be connected to VSS. DS39974A-page 6 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY Pin Diagrams (Continued) = Pins are up to 5.5V tolerant MCLR RA0/AN0/C1INA/ULPWU/RP0 RA1/AN1/C2INA/VBG/CTDIN/RP1 RA2/AN2/C2INB/C1IND/C3INB/VREF-/CVREF RA3/AN3/C1INB/VREF+ VDDCORE/VCAP RA5/AN4/C1INC/SS1/HLVDIN/RP2 VSS1 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 OSC2/CLKO/RA6 RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI/RP11 RC1/CCP8/T1OSI/RP12 RC2/AN11/C2IND/CTPLS/RP13 RC3/SCK1/SCL1/RP14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 RB7/CCP7/KBI3/PGD/RP10 RB6/CCP6/KBI2/PGC/RP9 RB5/CCP5/KBI1/SDA2/RP8 RB4/CCP4/KBI0/SCL2/RP7 RB3/AN9/C3INA/CTED2/RP6 RB2/AN8/C2INC/CTED1/REFO/RP5 RB1/AN10/C3INC/RTCC/RP4 RB0/AN12/C3IND/INT0/RP3 VDD VSS2 RC7/CCP10/RX1/DT1/RP18 RC6/CCP9/TX1/CK1/RP17 RC5/SDO1/RP16 RC4/SDI1/SDA1/RP15 RA1/AN1/C2INA/VBG/CTDIN/RP1 RA0/AN0/C1INA/ULPWU/RP0 MCLR RB7/CCP7/KBI3/PGD/RP10 RB6/CCP6/KBI2/PGC/RP9 RB5/CCP5/KBI1/SDA2/RP8 RB4/CCP4/KBI0/SCL2/RP7 28-Pin QFN PIC18F2XJ13 28-Pin SPDIP/SOIC/SSOP 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PIC18F2XJ13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 RB3/AN9/C3INA/CTED2/RP6 RB2/AN8/C2INC/CTED1/REFO/RP5 RB1/AN10/C3INC/RTCC/RP4 RB0/AN12/C3IND/INT0/RP3 VDD VSS2 RC7/CCP10/RX1/DT1/RP18 RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI/RP11 RC1/CCP8/T1OSI/RP12 RC2/AN11/C2IND/CTPLS/RP13 RC3/SCK1/SCL1/RP14 RC4/SDI1/SDA1/RP15 RC5/SDO1/RP16 RC6/CCP9/TX1/CK1/RP17 RA2/AN2/C1INB/C1IND/C3INB/VREF-/CVREF RA3/AN3/C1INB/VREF+ VDDCORE/VCAP RA5/AN4/C1INC/SS1/HLVDIN/RP2 VSS1 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 OSC2/CLKO/RA6 Legend: RPn represents remappable pins.Some input and output functions are routed through the Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) module and can be dynamically assigned to any of the RPn pins. For a list of the input and output functions, see Table 10-13 and Table 10-14, respectively. For details on configuring the PPS module, see Section 10.7 “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS)”. Note: For the QFN package, it is recommended that the bottom pad be connected to VSS. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 7 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY Table of Contents 1.0 Device Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 11 2.0 Guidelines for Getting Started with PIC18FJ Microcontrollers ................................................................................................... 31 3.0 Oscillator Configurations ............................................................................................................................................................ 35 4.0 Low-Power Modes...................................................................................................................................................................... 47 5.0 Reset .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 65 6.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 81 7.0 Flash Program Memory ............................................................................................................................................................ 107 8.0 8 x 8 Hardware Multiplier.......................................................................................................................................................... 117 9.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................. 119 10.0 I/O Ports ................................................................................................................................................................................... 139 11.0 Parallel Master Port (PMP)....................................................................................................................................................... 179 12.0 Timer0 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 205 13.0 Timer1 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 209 14.0 Timer2 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 219 15.0 Timer3/5 Module ...................................................................................................................................................................... 221 16.0 Timer4/6/8 Module ................................................................................................................................................................... 233 17.0 Real-Time Clock and Calendar (RTCC) ................................................................................................................................... 237 18.0 Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) Modules ................................................................................................................................. 257 19.0 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) Module................................................................................................................ 269 20.0 Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) Module .................................................................................................................... 291 21.0 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) ............................................................... 345 22.0 10/12-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (A/D) Module ................................................................................................................. 367 23.0 Comparator Module.................................................................................................................................................................. 379 24.0 Comparator Voltage Reference Module ................................................................................................................................... 387 25.0 High/Low Voltage Detect (HLVD) ............................................................................................................................................. 391 26.0 Charge Time Measurement Unit (CTMU) ................................................................................................................................ 397 27.0 Special Features of the CPU .................................................................................................................................................... 415 28.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 433 29.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 483 30.0 Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................................................................................................... 487 31.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 529 Appendix A: Revision History............................................................................................................................................................. 541 Appendix B: Migration From PIC18F46J11 to PIC18F47J13............................................................................................................. 541 The Microchip Web Site ..................................................................................................................................................................... 555 Customer Change Notification Service .............................................................................................................................................. 555 Customer Support .............................................................................................................................................................................. 555 Reader Response .............................................................................................................................................................................. 556 Product Identification System............................................................................................................................................................. 557 DS39974A-page 8 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at [email protected] or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: • Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com • Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) When contacting a sales office, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com to receive the most current information on all of our products. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 9 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 10 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 1.0 1.1.2 DEVICE OVERVIEW This document contains device-specific information for the following devices: • PIC18F26J13 • PIC18LF26J13 • PIC18F27J13 • PIC18LF27J13 • PIC18F46J13 • PIC18LF46J13 • PIC18F47J13 • PIC18LF47J13 1.1 1.1.1 Core Features nanoWatt XLP TECHNOLOGY All of the devices in the PIC18F47J13 family incorporate a range of features that can significantly reduce power consumption during operation. Key features are: • Alternate Run Modes: By clocking the controller from the Timer1 source or the internal RC oscillator, power consumption during code execution can be reduced by as much as 90%. • Multiple Idle Modes: The controller can also run with its CPU core disabled but the peripherals still active. In these states, power consumption can be reduced even further, to as little as 4% of normal operational requirements. • On-the-Fly Mode Switching: The power-managed modes are invoked by user code during operation, allowing the users to incorporate power-saving ideas into their application’s software design. • Deep Sleep: The 2.5V internal core voltage regulator on F parts can be shutdown to cut power consumption to as low as 15 nA (typical). Certain features can remain operating during Deep Sleep, such as the Real-Time Clock Calendar. • Ultra Low Power Wake-Up: Waking from Sleep or Deep Sleep modes after a period of time can be done without an oscillator/clock source, saving power for applications requiring periodic activity. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. OSCILLATOR OPTIONS AND FEATURES All of the devices in the PIC18F47J13 family offer five different oscillator options, allowing users a range of choices in developing application hardware. These include: • Two Crystal modes, using crystals or ceramic resonators. • Two External Clock modes, offering the option of a divide-by-4 clock output. • An internal oscillator block, which provides an 8 MHz clock and an INTRC source (approximately 31 kHz, stable over temperature and VDD), as well as a range of six user selectable clock frequencies, between 125 kHz to 4 MHz, for a total of eight clock frequencies. This option frees an oscillator pin for use as an additional general purpose I/O. • A Phase Lock Loop (PLL) frequency multiplier available to the high-speed crystal, and external and internal oscillators, providing a clock speed up to 48 MHz. The internal oscillator block provides a stable reference source that gives the PIC18F47J13 family additional features for robust operation: • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: This option constantly monitors the main clock source against a reference signal provided by the internal oscillator. If a clock failure occurs, the controller is switched to the internal oscillator, allowing for continued low-speed operation or a safe application shutdown. • Two-Speed Start-up: This option allows the internal oscillator to serve as the clock source from Power-on Reset (POR), or wake-up from Sleep mode, until the primary clock source is available. Preliminary DS39974A-page 11 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 1.1.3 EXPANDED MEMORY The PIC18F47J13 family provides ample room for application code, from 64 Kbytes to 128 Kbytes of code space. The Flash cells for program memory are rated to last in excess of 10000 erase/write cycles. Data retention without refresh is conservatively estimated to be greater than 20 years. The Flash program memory is readable and writable during normal operation. The PIC18F47J13 family also provides plenty of room for dynamic application data with up to 3.8 Kbytes of data RAM. 1.1.4 1.3 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET The PIC18F47J13 family implements the optional extension to the PIC18 instruction set, adding eight new instructions and an Indexed Addressing mode. Enabled as a device configuration option, the extension has been specifically designed to optimize re-entrant application code originally developed in high-level languages, such as C. 1.1.5 EASY MIGRATION Regardless of the memory size, all devices share the same rich set of peripherals, allowing for a smooth migration path as applications grow and evolve. The consistent pinout scheme used throughout the entire family also aids in migrating to the next larger device. The PIC18F47J13 family is also pin compatible with other PIC18 families, such as the PIC18F4550, PIC18F2450 and PIC18F46J50. This allows a new dimension to the evolution of applications, allowing developers to select different price points within Microchip’s PIC18 portfolio, while maintaining the same feature set. 1.2 Other Special Features • Communications: The PIC18F47J13 family incorporates a range of serial and parallel communication peripherals. This device includes two independent Enhanced USARTs and two Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) modules, capable of both Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) and I2C™ (Master and Slave) modes of operation. The device also has a parallel port and can be configured to serve as either a Parallel Master Port (PMP) or as a Parallel Slave Port (PSP). • CCP/ECCP Modules: All devices in the family incorporate seven Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) modules and three Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) modules to maximize flexibility in control applications. ECCPs offer up to four PWM output signals each. The ECCPs also offer many beneficial features, including polarity selection, programmable dead time, auto-shutdown and restart and Half-Bridge and Full-Bridge Output modes. DS39974A-page 12 • 10/12-Bit A/D Converter: This module incorporates programmable acquisition time, allowing for a channel to be selected and a conversion to be initiated without waiting for a sampling period, and thus, reducing code overhead. • Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT): This enhanced version incorporates a 16-bit prescaler, allowing an extended time-out range that is stable across operating voltage and temperature. See Section 30.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for time-out periods. Details on Individual Family Devices Devices in the PIC18F47J13 family are available in 28-pin and 44-pin packages. Block diagrams for the two groups are shown in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2. The devices are differentiated from each other in two ways: • Flash program memory (two sizes: 64 Kbytes for the PIC18FX6J13 and 128 Kbytes for PIC18FX7J13) • I/O ports (three bidirectional ports on 28-pin devices, five bidirectional ports on 44-pin devices) All other features for devices in this family are identical. These are summarized in Table 1-1 and Table 1-2. The pinouts for the PIC18F2XJ13 devices are listed in Table 1-3. The pinouts for the PIC18F4XJ13 devices are shown in Table 1-4. The PIC18F47J13 family of devices provides an on-chip voltage regulator to supply the correct voltage levels to the core. Parts designated with an “F” part number (such as PIC18F47J13) have the voltage regulator enabled. These parts can run from 2.15V-3.6V on VDD, but should have the VDDCORE pin connected to VSS through a low-ESR capacitor. Parts designated with an “LF” part number (such as PIC18LF47J13) do not enable the voltage regulator nor support Deep Sleep mode. For “LF” parts, an external supply of 2.0V-2.7V has to be supplied to the VDDCORE pin while 2.0V-3.6V can be supplied to VDD (VDDCORE should never exceed VDD). For more details about the internal voltage regulator, see Section 27.3 “On-Chip Voltage Regulator”. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-1: DEVICE FEATURES FOR THE PIC18F2XJ13 (28-PIN DEVICES) Features Operating Frequency Program Memory (Kbytes) Program Memory (Instructions) Data Memory (Kbytes) PIC18F26J13 PIC18F27J13 DC – 48 MHz DC – 48 MHz 64 128 32,768 65,536 3.8 3.8 Interrupt Sources 30 I/O Ports Ports A, B, C Timers 8 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM Modules 3 ECCP and 7 CCP Serial Communications MSSP (2), Enhanced USART (2) Parallel Communications (PMP/PSP) No 10/12-Bit Analog-to-Digital Module Resets (and Delays) Instruction Set 75 Instructions, 83 with Extended Instruction Set Enabled Packages TABLE 1-2: 10 Input Channels POR, BOR, RESET Instruction, Stack Full, Stack Underflow, MCLR, WDT (PWRT, OST) 28-Pin QFN, SOIC, SSOP and SPDIP (300 mil) DEVICE FEATURES FOR THE PIC18F4XJ13 (44-PIN DEVICES) Features Operating Frequency Program Memory (Kbytes) Program Memory (Instructions) Data Memory (Kbytes) PIC18F46J13 PIC18F47J13 DC – 48 MHz DC – 48 MHz 64 128 32,768 65,536 3.8 3.8 Interrupt Sources 30 I/O Ports Ports A, B, C, D, E Timers 8 Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM Modules Serial Communications 3 ECCP and 7 CCP MSSP (2), Enhanced USART (2) Parallel Communications (PMP/PSP) Yes 10/12-Bit Analog-to-Digital Module Resets (and Delays) Instruction Set 13 Input Channels POR, BOR, RESET Instruction, Stack Full, Stack Underflow, MCLR, WDT (PWRT, OST) 75 Instructions, 83 with Extended Instruction Set Enabled Packages 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 44-Pin QFN and TQFP Preliminary DS39974A-page 13 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 1-1: PIC18F2XJ13 (28-PIN) BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus<8> Table Pointer<21> 20 Address Latch PCU PCH PCL Program Counter 12 Data Address<12> 31-Level Stack 4 BSR Address Latch STKPTR Program Memory PORTB RB0:RB7(1) 4 Access Bank 12 FSR0 FSR1 FSR2 Data Latch 8 RA0:RA7(1) Data Memory (3.8 Kbytes) PCLATU PCLATH 21 PORTA Data Latch 8 8 inc/dec logic 12 PORTC RC0:RC7(1) inc/dec logic Table Latch Address Decode ROM Latch Instruction Bus <16> IR Instruction Decode and Control OSC2/CLKO OSC1/CLKI Timing Generation PRODH PRODL 3 Power-up Timer 8 MHz INTOSC Watchdog Timer Voltage Regulator Brown-out Reset(2) VDDCORE/VCAP RTCC CTMU HLVD ADC Timer0 VDD, VSS Timer1 ECCP1 ECCP2 ECCP3 CCP4 CCP5 Note 1: 2: Timer2 8 W 8 8 8 8 Power-on Reset Precision Band Gap Reference 8 x 8 Multiply BITOP Oscillator Start-up Timer INTRC Oscillator 8 State Machine Control Signals 8 ALU<8> 8 MCLR Timer3 Timer4 Timer5 Timer6 Timer8 Comparators CCP6 CCP7 CCP8 CCP9 CCP10 EUSART1 EUSART2 MSSP1 MSSP2 See Table 1-3 for I/O port pin descriptions. BOR functionality is provided when the on-board voltage regulator is enabled. DS39974A-page 14 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 1-2: PIC18F4XJ13 (44-PIN) BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus<8> Table Pointer<21> inc/dec logic 21 Address Latch PCU PCH PCL Program Counter 31-Level Stack System Bus Interface PORTB RB0:RB7(1) 12 Data Address<12> 4 Address Latch 4 12 BSR STKPTR Program Memory RA0:RA7(1) Data Memory (3.8 Kbytes) PCLATU PCLATH 20 PORTA Data Latch 8 8 FSR0 FSR1 FSR2 Data Latch PORTC Access Bank RC0:RC7(1) 12 inc/dec logic 8 Table Latch PORTD RD0:RD7(1) Address Decode ROM Latch Instruction Bus <16> PORTE IR RE0:RE2(1) AD<15:0>, A<19:16> (Multiplexed with PORTD and PORTE) 8 Timing Generation OSC2/CLKO OSC1/CLKI 8 MHz INTOSC ADC Timer0 Note 1: 2: 8 Voltage Regulator Brown-out Reset(2) VDD,VSS Timer2 Timer3 8 8 ALU<8> 8 Power-on Reset Watchdog Timer CTMU ECCP1 ECCP2 ECCP3 CCP4 CCP5 W BITOP 8 8 Precision Band Gap Reference Timer1 8 Oscillator Start-up Timer VDDCORE/VCAP HLVD 8 x 8 Multiply 3 Power-up Timer INTRC Oscillator RTCC PRODH PRODL Instruction Decode and Control State Machine Control Signals MCLR Timer4 Timer5 Timer6 Timer8 Comparators CCP6 CCP7 CCP8 CCP9 CCP10 EUSART1 EUSART2 MSSP1 MSSP2 See Table 1-3 for I/O port pin descriptions. The on-chip voltage regulator is always enabled by default. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 15 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F2XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS Pin Number Pin Name MCLR OSC1/CLKI/RA7 OSC1 Pin Buffer 28-SPDIP/ SSOP/ 28-QFN Type Type SOIC 1(2) 26(2) 9 6 I I CLKI RA7(1) OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC2 I I/O 10 7 O CLKO O RA6(1) I/O ST Description Master Clear (Reset) input. This pin is an active-low Reset to the device. Oscillator crystal or external clock input. Oscillator crystal input or external clock source input. ST buffer when configured in RC mode; CMOS otherwise. Main oscillator input connection. CMOS External clock source input; always associated with pin function, OSC1 (see related OSC1/CLKI pins). TTL/DIG Digital I/O. ST Oscillator crystal or clock output. Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. DIG Main oscillator feedback output connection. In RC mode, OSC2 pin outputs CLKO, which has 1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction cycle rate. TTL/DIG Digital I/O. — Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) = Open-Drain, I2C specific DIG = Digital output I2C™ Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: 5.5V tolerant. DS39974A-page 16 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F2XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 28-SPDIP/ SSOP/ 28-QFN Type Type SOIC Description PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port. RA0/AN0/C1INA/ULPWU/RP0 RA0 AN0 C1INA ULPWU RP0 2 RA1/AN1/C2INA/VBG/CTDIN/ RP1 RA1 AN1 C2INA VBG CTDIN RP1 3 RA2/AN2/C2INB/C1IND/ C3INB/VREF-/CVREF RA2 AN2 C2INB C1IND C3INB VREFCVREF 4 RA3/AN3/C1INB/VREF+ RA3 AN3 C1INB VREF+ 5 RA5/AN4/C1INC/SS1/ HLVDIN/RP2 RA5 AN4 C1INC SS1 HLVDIN RP2 7 27 I/O I I I I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog Analog ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 0. Comparator 1 Input A. Ultra low-power wake-up input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 0 input/output. I/O O I O I I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog Analog ST ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 1. Comparator 2 Input A. Band Gap Reference Voltage (VBG) output. CTMU pulse delay input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 1 input/output. I/O I I I I O I TTL/DIG Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog Input 2. Comparator 2 Input B. Comparator 1 Input D. Comparator 3 Input B. A/D reference voltage (low) input. Comparator reference voltage output. I/O I I I TTL/DIG Analog Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog Input 3. Comparator 1 Input B. A/D reference voltage (high) input. I/O I I I I I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog TTL Analog ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 4. Comparator 1 Input C. SPI slave select input. High/Low-Voltage Detect input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 2 input/output. 28 1 2 4 RA6(1) RA7(1) See the OSC2/CLKO/RA6 pin. See the OSC1/CLKI/RA7 pin. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) = Open-Drain, I2C specific DIG = Digital output I2C™ Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: 5.5V tolerant. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 17 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F2XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 28-SPDIP/ SSOP/ 28-QFN Type Type SOIC Description PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. PORTB can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs. RB0/AN12/C3IND/INT0/RP3 RB0 AN12 C3IND INT0 RP3 21 RB1/AN10/C3INC/RTCC/RP4 RB1 AN10 C3INC RTCC RP4 22 RB2/AN8/C2INC/CTED1/ REFO/RP5 RB2 AN8 C2INC CTED1 REFO RP5 23 RB3/AN9/C3INA/CTED2/ RP6 RB3 AN9 C3INA CTED2 RP6 24 18 I/O I I I I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog ST ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 12. Comparator 3 Input D. External Interrupt 0. Remappable Peripheral Pin 3 input/output. I/O I I O I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 10. Comparator 3 input. Real-Time Clock Calendar output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 4 input/output. I/O I I I O I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog ST DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 8. Comparator 2 Input C. CTMU Edge 1 input. Reference output clock. Remappable Peripheral Pin 5 input/output. I/O I I I I TTL/DIG Analog Analog ST ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 9. Comparator 3 Input A. CTMU edge 2 Input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 6 input/output. 19 20 21 Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) = Open-Drain, I2C specific DIG = Digital output I2C™ Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: 5.5V tolerant. DS39974A-page 18 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F2XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 28-SPDIP/ SSOP/ 28-QFN Type Type SOIC Description PORTB (continued) RB4/CCP4/KBI0/SCL2/RP7 RB4 CCP4 KBI0 SCL2 RP7 25(2) RB5/CCP5/KBI1/SDA2/RP8 RB5 CCP5 KBI1 SDA2 RP8 26(2) RB6/CCP6/KBI2/PGC/RP9 RB6 CCP6 KBI2 PGC RP9 27(2) RB7/CCP7/KBI3/PGD/RP10 RB7 CCP7 KBI3 PGD 28(2) RP10 (2) 22 I/O I/O I I/O I/O TTL/DIG ST/DIG TTL I2C™ ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Interrupt-on-change pin. I2C clock input/output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 7 input/output. I/O I/O I I/O I/O TTL/DIG ST/DIG TTL I2C ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Interrupt-on-change pin. I2C data input/output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 8 input/output. I/O I/O I I I/O TTL/DIG ST/DIG TTL ST ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Interrupt-on-change pin. ICSP™ clock input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 9 input/output. I/O I/O I I/O TTL/DIG ST/DIG TTL ST/DIG I/O ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Interrupt-on-change pin. In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP programming data pin. Remappable Peripheral Pin 10 input/output. 23(2) 24(2) 25(2) Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) DIG = Digital output I2C™ = Open-Drain, I2C specific Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: 5.5V tolerant. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 19 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F2XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 28-SPDIP/ SSOP/ 28-QFN Type Type SOIC Description PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port. RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI/RP11 RC0 T1OSO T1CKI RP11 11 RC1/CCP8/T1OSI/RP12 RC1 CCP8 T1OSI RP12 12 RC2/AN11/C2IND/CTPLS/RP13 RC2 AN11 C2IND CTPLS RP13 13 RC3/SCK1/SCL1/RP14 RC3 SCK1 SCL1 RP14 14 RC4/SDI1/SDA1/RP15 RC4 SDI1 SDA1 RP15 15 RC5/SDO1/RP16 RC5 SDO1 RP16 16 RC6/CCP9/TX1/CK1/RP17 RC6 CCP9 TX1 CK1 17(2) 8 RC7/CCP10/RX1/DT1/RP18 RC7 CCP10 RX1 DT1 RP18 18 ST/DIG Analog ST ST/DIG Digital I/O. Timer1 oscillator output. Timer1 external digital clock input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 11 input/output. I/O I/O I I/O ST/DIG ST/DIG Analog ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Timer1 oscillator input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 12 input/output. I/O I I O I/O ST/DIG Analog Analog DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 11. Comparator 2 Input D. CTMU pulse generator output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 13 input/output. I/O I/O I/O I/O ST/DIG ST/DIG I2C ST/DIG Digital I/O. SPI clock input/output. I2C clock input/output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 14 input/output. I/O I I/O I/O ST/DIG ST I2C™ ST/DIG Digital I/O. SPI data input. I2C data input/output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 15 input/output. I/O O I/O ST/DIG DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. SPI data output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 16 input/output. I/O I/O O I/O ST/DIG ST/DIG DIG ST/DIG I/O ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. EUSART1 asynchronous transmit. EUSART1 synchronous clock (see related RX1/DT1). Remappable Peripheral Pin 17 input/output. I/O I/O I I/O I/O ST/DIG ST/DIG ST ST/DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Asynchronous serial receive data input. Synchronous serial data output/input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 18 input/output. 9 10 11 12 13 14(2) RP17 (2) I/O O I I/O (2) 15 Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) = Open-Drain, I2C specific DIG = Digital output I2C™ Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: 5.5V tolerant. DS39974A-page 20 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-3: PIC18F2XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 28-SPDIP/ SSOP/ 28-QFN Type Type SOIC Description VSS1 8 5 P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. VSS2 19 16 — — VDD 20 17 P — Positive supply for peripheral digital logic and I/O pins. VDDCORE/VCAP 6 3 — — VDDCORE P — VCAP P — Core logic power or external filter capacitor connection. Positive supply for microcontroller core logic (regulator disabled). External filter capacitor connection (regulator enabled). Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) = Open-Drain, I2C specific DIG = Digital output I2C™ Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: 5.5V tolerant. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 21 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F4XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS Pin Number Pin Name MCLR OSC1/CLKI/RA7 OSC1 Pin Buffer 44- 44- Type Type QFN TQFP 18(3) 18 32 30 I I CLKI RA7(1) OSC2/CLKO/RA6 OSC2 I I/O 33 31 O CLKO O RA6(1) I/O ST Description Master Clear (Reset) input; this is an active-low Reset to the device. Oscillator crystal or external clock input. Oscillator crystal input or external clock source input. ST buffer when configured in RC mode; otherwise CMOS. Main oscillator input connection. CMOS External clock source input; always associated with pin function, OSC1 (see related OSC1/CLKI pins). TTL/DIG Digital I/O. ST Oscillator crystal or clock output. Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode. — Main oscillator feedback output connection in RC mode, OSC2 pin outputs CLKO, which has 1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction cycle rate. TTL/DIG Digital I/O. — Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) DIG = Digital output I2C™ = Open-Drain, I2C specific Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: Available only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 3: 5.5V tolerant. DS39974A-page 22 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F4XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 44- 44- Type Type QFN TQFP Description PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port. RA0/AN0/C1INA/ULPWU/PMA6/ RP0 RA0 AN0 C1INA ULPWU PMA6 19 19 I/O I I I I/O 20 Digital I/O. Analog Input 1. Comparator 2 Input A. Band Gap Reference Voltage (VBG) output. CTMU pulse delay input. Parallel Master Port digital I/O. I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog Analog ST ST/TTL/ DIG ST/DIG I/O I I I I I I TTL/DIG Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog Input 2. Comparator 2 Input B. Comparator 1 Input D. Comparator 3 Input B. A/D reference voltage (low) input. Comparator reference voltage output. I/O I I I TTL/DIG Analog Analog Analog Digital I/O. Analog Input 3. Comparator 1 Input B. A/D reference voltage (high) input. I/O I I I I I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog TTL Analog ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 4. SPI slave select input. Comparator 1 Input C. High/Low-Voltage Detect input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 2 input/output. I/O O I O I I/O RA2/AN2/C2INB/C1IND/C3INB/ VREF-/CVREF RA2 AN2 C2INB C1IND C3INB VREFCVREF 21 RA3/AN3/C1INB/VREF+ RA3 AN3 C1INB VREF+ 22 RA5/AN4/C1INC/SS1/HLVDIN/RP2 RA5 AN4 C1INC SS1 HLVDIN RP2 24 Remappable Peripheral Pin 0 input/output. 20 RP1 RA6(1) RA7(1) Digital I/O. Analog Input 0. Comparator 1 Input A. Ultra low-power wake-up input. Parallel Master Port digital I/O. I/O RP0 RA1/AN1/C2INA/VBG/CTDIN/ PMA7/RP1 RA1 AN1 C2INA VBG CTDIN PMA7 TTL/DIG Analog Analog Analog ST/TTL/ DIG ST/DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 1 input/output. 21 22 24 See the OSC2/CLKO/RA6 pin. See the OSC1/CLKI/RA7 pin. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) DIG = Digital output I2C™ = Open-Drain, I2C specific Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: Available only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 3: 5.5V tolerant. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 23 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F4XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 44- 44- Type Type QFN TQFP Description PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. PORTB can be software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs. RB0/AN12/C3IND/INT0/RP3 RB0 AN12 C3IND INT0 RP3 9 RB1/AN10/C3INC/PMBE/RTCC/ RP4 RB1 AN10 C3INC PMBE(2) RTCC RP4 10 RB2/AN8/C2INC/CTED1/PMA3/ REFO/RP5 RB2 AN8 C2INC CTED1 PMA3(2) REFO RP5 11 RB3/AN9/C3INA/CTED2/PMA2/ RP6 RB3 AN9 C3INA CTED2 PMA2(2) RP6 12 8 I/O I I I I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog ST ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 12. Comparator 3 Input D. External Interrupt 0. Remappable Peripheral Pin 3 input/output. I/O I I O O I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog DIG DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 10. Comparator 3 Input C. Parallel Master Port byte enable. Asynchronous serial transmit data output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 4 input/output. I/O I I I O O I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog ST DIG DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 8. Comparator 2 Input C. CTMU Edge 1 input. Parallel Master Port address. Reference output clock. Remappable Peripheral Pin 5 input/output. I/O I I I O I/O TTL/DIG Analog Analog ST DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 9. Comparator 3 Input A. CTMU Edge 2 input. Parallel Master Port address. Remappable Peripheral Pin 6 input/output. 9 10 11 Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) = Open-Drain, I2C specific DIG = Digital output I2C™ Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: Available only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 3: 5.5V tolerant. DS39974A-page 24 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F4XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 44- 44- Type Type QFN TQFP Description PORTB (continued) RB4/CCP4/PMA1/KBI0/RP7 RB4 CCP4(2) PMA1(2) 14 (3) 14 (3) I/O I/O I/O Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Parallel Master Port address. I I/O TTL/DIG ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG TTL ST/DIG I/O I/O I I I/O TTL/DIG ST/DIG TTL ST ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Interrupt-on-change pin. ICSP™ clock input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 9 input/output. I/O I/O I I/O TTL/DIG ST/DIG TTL ST/DIG I/O ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Interrupt-on-change pin. In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP programming data pin. Remappable Peripheral Pin 10 input/output. Interrupt-on-change pin. Remappable Peripheral Pin 7 input/output. 15(3) 15(3) I/O I/O I/O KBI1 RP8 RB6/CCP6/KBI2/PGC/RP9 RB6 CCP6 KBI2 PGC RP9 16(3) 16(3) RB7/CCP7/KBI3/PGD/RP10 RB7 CCP7 KBI3 PGD 17(3) 17(3) RP10 Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Parallel Master Port address. I I/O KBI0 RP7 RB5/CCP5/PMA0/KBI1/RP8 RB5 CCP5 PMA0(2) TTL/DIG ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG TTL ST/DIG Interrupt-on-change pin. Remappable Peripheral Pin 8 input/output. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) = Open-Drain, I2C specific DIG = Digital output I2C™ Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: Available only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 3: 5.5V tolerant. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 25 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F4XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 44- 44- Type Type QFN TQFP Description PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port. RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI/RP11 RC0 T1OSO T1CKI RP11 34 RC1/CCP8/T1OSI/RP12 RC1 CCP8 T1OSI RP12 35 RC2/AN11/C2IND/CTPLS/RP13 RC2 AN11 C2IND CTPLS RP13 36 RC3/SCK1/SCL1/RP14 RC3 SCK1 SCL1 RP14 37 RC4/SDI1/SDA1/RP15 RC4 SDI1 SDA1 RP15 42 RC5/SDO1/RP16 RC5 SDO1 RP16 43 32 I/O O I I/O STDIG Analog ST ST/DIG Digital I/O. Timer1 oscillator output. Timer1/Timer3 external clock input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 11 input/output. I/O I/O I I/O ST/DIG ST/DIG Analog ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Timer1 oscillator input. Remappable Peripheral Pin 12 input/output. I/O I I O I/O ST/DIG Analog Analog DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 11. Comparator 2 Input D. CTMU pulse generator output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 13 input/output. I/O I/O I/O I/O ST/DIG ST/DIG I2C ST/DIG Digital I/O. SPI clock input/output. I2C clock input/output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 14 input/output. I/O I I/O I/O ST/DIG ST I2C™ ST/DIG Digital I/O. SPI data input. I2C data input/output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 15 input/output. I/O O I/O ST/DIG DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. SPI data output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 16 input/output. 35 36 37 42 43 Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) = Open-Drain, I2C specific DIG = Digital output I2C™ Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: Available only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 3: 5.5V tolerant. DS39974A-page 26 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F4XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 44- 44- Type Type QFN TQFP Description PORTC (continued) RC6/CCP9/PMA5/TX1/CK1/RP17 RC6 CCP9 PMA5 TX1 44 (3) 44 (3) I/O I/O I/O O CK1 RP17 (3) RC7/CCP10/PMA4/RX1/DT1/RP18 1 RC7 CCP10 PMA4 I/O ST/DIG ST/DIG DIG ST/TTL/ DIG ST/DIG I/O ST/DIG I/O I/O I/O Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Parallel Master Port address. EUSART1 asynchronous transmit. EUSART1 synchronous clock (see related RX1/DT1). Remappable Peripheral Pin 17 input/output. 1(3) RX1 DT1 I I/O ST/DIG ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG ST ST/DIG RP18 I/O ST/DIG Digital I/O. Capture/Compare/PWM input/output. Parallel Master Port address. EUSART1 asynchronous receive. EUSART Synchronous data (see related TX1/CK1). Remappable Peripheral Pin 18 input/output. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) DIG = Digital output I2C™ = Open-Drain, I2C specific Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: Available only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 3: 5.5V tolerant. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 27 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F4XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 44- 44- Type Type QFN TQFP Description PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port. RD0/PMD0/SCL2 RD0 PMD0 38(3) 38 (3) I/O I/O SCL2 RD1/PMD1/SDA2 RD1 PMD1 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O 41(3) I/O I/O I/O 2(3) I/O I/O I/O 3(3) I/O I/O I/O 4(3) RP24 ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. 4 I/O I/O I/O 5(3) ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG ST/DIG Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. Remappable Peripheral Pin 19 input/output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 20 input/output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 21 input/output. Remappable Peripheral Pin 22 input/output. (3) RP23 RD7/PMD7/RP24 RD7 PMD7 Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. 3(3) RP22 RD6/PMD6/RP23 RD6 PMD6 ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG ST/DIG I2C data input/output. 2(3) RP21 RD5/PMD5/RP22 RD5 PMD5 Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. 41(3) RP20 RD4/PMD4/RP21 RD4 PMD4 ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG I2C I2C™ data input/output. 40(3) 40(3) RP19 RD3/PMD3/RP20 RD3 PMD3 Digital I/O. Parallel Master Port data. 39(3) 39(3) SDA2 RD2/PMD2/RP19 RD2 PMD2 ST/DIG ST/TTL/ DIG I2C Remappable Peripheral Pin 23 input/output. 5(3) I/O I/O I/O Remappable Peripheral Pin 24 input/output. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) = Open-Drain, I2C specific DIG = Digital output I2C™ Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: Available only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 3: 5.5V tolerant. DS39974A-page 28 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 1-4: PIC18F4XJ13 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED) Pin Number Pin Name Pin Buffer 44- 44- Type Type QFN TQFP Description PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port. RE0/AN5/PMRD RE0 AN5 PMRD 25 RE1/AN6/PMWR RE1 AN6 PMWR 26 RE2/AN7/PMCS RE2 AN7 PMCS 27 VSS1 6 VSS2 AVSS1 25 I/O I I/O ST/DIG Analog ST/TTL/ DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 5. Parallel Master Port input/output. I/O I I/O ST/DIG Analog ST/TTL/ DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 6. Parallel Master Port write strobe. I/O I O ST/DIG Analog DIG Digital I/O. Analog Input 7. Parallel Master Port byte enable. 6 P — Ground reference for logic and I/O pins. 31 29 — — 30 — P — Ground reference for analog modules. Positive supply for peripheral digital logic and I/O pins. 26 27 VDD1 8 7 P — VDD2 29 28 P — VDDCORE/VCAP 23 23 VDDCORE P — VCAP P — Core logic power or external filter capacitor connection. Positive supply for microcontroller core logic (regulator disabled). External filter capacitor connection (regulator enabled). AVDD1 7 — P — Positive supply for analog modules. AVDD2 28 — — — Positive supply for analog modules. Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels Analog = Analog input I = Input O = Output P = Power OD = Open-Drain (no P diode to VDD) = Open-Drain, I2C specific DIG = Digital output I2C™ Note 1: RA7 and RA6 will be disabled if OSC1 and OSC2 are used for the clock function. 2: Available only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 3: 5.5V tolerant. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 29 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 30 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 2.0 GUIDELINES FOR GETTING STARTED WITH PIC18FJ MICROCONTROLLERS FIGURE 2-1: RECOMMENDED MINIMUM CONNECTIONS C2(2) Getting started with the PIC18F47J13 family of 8-bit microcontrollers requires attention to a minimal set of device pin connections before proceeding with development. R1 R2 VSS VDD VDD Basic Connection Requirements VCAP/VDDCORE C1 The following pins must always be connected: C7 PIC18FXXJXX VSS VDD VDD VSS C3(2) C5(2) VSS VDD C6(2) AVSS • All VDD and VSS pins (see Section 2.2 “Power Supply Pins”) • All AVDD and AVSS pins, regardless of whether or not the analog device features are used (see Section 2.2 “Power Supply Pins”) • MCLR pin (see Section 2.3 “Master Clear (MCLR) Pin”) • VCAP/VDDCORE pins (see Section 2.4 “Voltage Regulator Pins (VCAP/VDDCORE)”) C4(2) These pins must also be connected if they are being used in the end application: Key (all values are recommendations): • PGC/PGD pins used for In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) and debugging purposes (see Section 2.5 “ICSP Pins”) • OSCI and OSCO pins when an external oscillator source is used (see Section 2.6 “External Oscillator Pins”) C7: 10 F, 6.3V or greater, tantalum or ceramic C1 through C6: 0.1 F, 20V ceramic R1: 10 kΩ R2: 100Ω to 470Ω Note 1: Additionally, the following pins may be required: 2: • VREF+/VREF- pins are used when external voltage reference for analog modules is implemented Note: (1) MCLR AVDD 2.1 On 44-pin QFN packages, the AVDD and AVSS pins must always be connected, regardless of whether any of the analog modules are being used. On other package types, the AVDD and AVSS pins are internally connected to the VDD/VSS pins. See Section 2.4 “Voltage Regulator Pins (VCAP/VDDCORE)” for explanation of VCAP/VDDCORE connections. The example shown is for a PIC18F device with five VDD/VSS and AVDD/AVSS pairs. Other devices may have more or less pairs; adjust the number of decoupling capacitors appropriately. The minimum mandatory connections are shown in Figure 2-1. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 31 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 2.2 2.2.1 Power Supply Pins 2.3 DECOUPLING CAPACITORS The use of decoupling capacitors on every pair of power supply pins, such as VDD, VSS, AVDD and AVSS, is required. Consider the following criteria when using decoupling capacitors: • Value and type of capacitor: A 0.1 F (100 nF), 10-20V capacitor is recommended. The capacitor should be a low-ESR device, with a resonance frequency in the range of 200 MHz and higher. Ceramic capacitors are recommended. • Placement on the printed circuit board: The decoupling capacitors should be placed as close to the pins as possible. It is recommended to place the capacitors on the same side of the board as the device. If space is constricted, the capacitor can be placed on another layer on the PCB using a via; however, ensure that the trace length from the pin to the capacitor is no greater than 0.25 inch (6 mm). • Handling high-frequency noise: If the board is experiencing high-frequency noise (upward of tens of MHz), add a second ceramic type capacitor in parallel to the above described decoupling capacitor. The value of the second capacitor can be in the range of 0.01 F to 0.001 F. Place this second capacitor next to each primary decoupling capacitor. In high-speed circuit designs, consider implementing a decade pair of capacitances as close to the power and ground pins as possible (e.g., 0.1 F in parallel with 0.001 F). • Maximizing performance: On the board layout from the power supply circuit, run the power and return traces to the decoupling capacitors first, and then to the device pins. This ensures that the decoupling capacitors are first in the power chain. Equally important is to keep the trace length between the capacitor and the power pins to a minimum, thereby reducing PCB trace inductance. 2.2.2 TANK CAPACITORS The MCLR pin provides two specific device functions: Device Reset, and Device Programming and Debugging. If programming and debugging are not required in the end application, a direct connection to VDD may be all that is required. The addition of other components, to help increase the application’s resistance to spurious Resets from voltage sags, may be beneficial. A typical configuration is shown in Figure 2-1. Other circuit designs may be implemented, depending on the application’s requirements. During programming and debugging, the resistance and capacitance that can be added to the pin must be considered. Device programmers and debuggers drive the MCLR pin. Consequently, specific voltage levels (VIH and VIL) and fast signal transitions must not be adversely affected. Therefore, specific values of R1 and C1 will need to be adjusted based on the application and PCB requirements. For example, it is recommended that the capacitor, C1, be isolated from the MCLR pin during programming and debugging operations by using a jumper (Figure 2-2). The jumper is replaced for normal run-time operations. Any components associated with the MCLR pin should be placed within 0.25 inch (6 mm) of the pin. FIGURE 2-2: EXAMPLE OF MCLR PIN CONNECTIONS VDD R1 R2 JP MCLR PIC18FXXJXX C1 Note 1: R1 10 k is recommended. A suggested starting value is 10 k. Ensure that the MCLR pin VIH and VIL specifications are met. 2: R2 470 will limit any current flowing into MCLR from the external capacitor, C, in the event of MCLR pin breakdown, due to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) or Electrical Overstress (EOS). Ensure that the MCLR pin VIH and VIL specifications are met. On boards with power traces running longer than six inches in length, it is suggested to use a tank capacitor for integrated circuits, including microcontrollers, to supply a local power source. The value of the tank capacitor should be determined based on the trace resistance that connects the power supply source to the device, and the maximum current drawn by the device in the application. In other words, select the tank capacitor so that it meets the acceptable voltage sag at the device. Typical values range from 4.7 F to 47 F. DS39974A-page 32 Master Clear (MCLR) Pin Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 2.4 Voltage Regulator Pins (VCAP/VDDCORE) 2.5 On “F” devices, a low-ESR (< 5Ω) capacitor is required on the VCAP/VDDCORE pin to stabilize the voltage regulator output voltage. The VCAP/VDDCORE pin must not be connected to VDD and must use a capacitor of 10 F connected to ground. The type can be ceramic or tantalum. A suitable example is the Murata GRM21BF50J106ZE01 (10 F, 6.3V) or equivalent. Designers may use Figure 2-3 to evaluate ESR equivalence of candidate devices. It is recommended that the trace length not exceed 0.25 inch (6 mm). Refer to Section 30.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for additional information. On “LF” devices, the VCAP/VDDCORE pin must be tied to a voltage supply at the VDDCORE level. Refer to Section 30.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for information on VDD and VDDCORE. Note that the “LF” versions of these devices are provided with the voltage regulator permanently disabled; they must always be provided with a supply voltage on the VDDCORE pin. FIGURE 2-3: FREQUENCY vs. ESR PERFORMANCE FOR SUGGESTED VCAP ICSP Pins The PGC and PGD pins are used for In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) and debugging purposes. It is recommended to keep the trace length between the ICSP connector and the ICSP pins on the device as short as possible. If the ICSP connector is expected to experience an ESD event, a series resistor is recommended, with the value in the range of a few tens of ohms, not to exceed 100Ω. Pull-up resistors, series diodes, and capacitors on the PGC and PGD pins are not recommended as they will interfere with the programmer/debugger communications to the device. If such discrete components are an application requirement, they should be removed from the circuit during programming and debugging. Alternatively, refer to the AC/DC characteristics and timing requirements information in the respective device Flash programming specification for information on capacitive loading limits, and pin input voltage high (VIH) and input low (VIL) requirements. For device emulation, ensure that the “Communication Channel Select” (i.e., PGCx/PGDx pins) programmed into the device matches the physical connections for the ICSP to the Microchip debugger/emulator tool. For more information on available Microchip development tools connection requirements, refer to Section 29.0 “Development Support”. 10 ESR () 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.01 Note: 0.1 1 10 100 Frequency (MHz) 1000 10,000 Data for Murata GRM21BF50J106ZE01 shown. Measurements at 25°C, 0V DC bias. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 33 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 2.6 FIGURE 2-4: External Oscillator Pins Many microcontrollers have options for at least two oscillators: a high-frequency primary oscillator and a low-frequency secondary oscillator (refer to Section 3.0 “Oscillator Configurations” for details). Single-Sided and In-Line Layouts: Copper Pour (tied to ground) The oscillator circuit should be placed on the same side of the board as the device. Place the oscillator circuit close to the respective oscillator pins with no more than 0.5 inch (12 mm) between the circuit components and the pins. The load capacitors should be placed next to the oscillator itself, on the same side of the board. Use a grounded copper pour around the oscillator circuit to isolate it from surrounding circuits. The grounded copper pour should be routed directly to the MCU ground. Do not run any signal traces or power traces inside the ground pour. Also, if using a two-sided board, avoid any traces on the other side of the board where the crystal is placed. Primary Oscillator OSC1 C1 ` OSC2 GND C2 ` T1OSO T1OS I Timer1 Oscillator Crystal ` T1 Oscillator: C1 T1 Oscillator: C2 Fine-Pitch (Dual-Sided) Layouts: Top Layer Copper Pour (tied to ground) Bottom Layer Copper Pour (tied to ground) For additional information and design guidance on oscillator circuits, please refer to these Microchip Application Notes, available at the corporate web site (www.microchip.com): • AN826, “Crystal Oscillator Basics and Crystal Selection for rfPIC™ and PICmicro® Devices” • AN849, “Basic PICmicro® Oscillator Design” • AN943, “Practical PICmicro® Oscillator Analysis and Design” • AN949, “Making Your Oscillator Work” 2.7 Primary Oscillator Crystal DEVICE PINS Layout suggestions are shown in Figure 2-4. In-line packages may be handled with a single-sided layout that completely encompasses the oscillator pins. With fine-pitch packages, it is not always possible to completely surround the pins and components. A suitable solution is to tie the broken guard sections to a mirrored ground layer. In all cases, the guard trace(s) must be returned to ground. In planning the application’s routing and I/O assignments, ensure that adjacent port pins and other signals in close proximity to the oscillator are benign (i.e., free of high frequencies, short rise and fall times, and other similar noise). SUGGESTED PLACEMENT OF THE OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT OSCO C2 Oscillator Crystal GND C1 OSCI Unused I/Os DEVICE PINS Unused I/O pins should be configured as outputs and driven to a logic low state. Alternatively, connect a 1 kΩ to 10 kΩ resistor to VSS on unused pins and drive the output to logic low. DS39974A-page 34 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 3.0 3.1 OSCILLATOR CONFIGURATIONS TABLE 3-1: Overview Mode Description ECPLL External Clock Input mode, the PLL can be enabled or disabled in software, CLKO on RA6, apply external clock signal to RA7. Devices in the PIC18F47J13 family incorporate a different oscillator and microcontroller clock system than general purpose PIC18F devices. The PIC18F47J13 family has additional prescalers and postscalers, which have been added to accommodate a wide range of oscillator frequencies. The PIC18F47J13 provides two PLL circuits: a 4x multiplier PLL and a 96 MHz PLL enabling 48 MHz operation from the 8 MHz internal oscillator. Figure 3-1 provides an overview of the oscillator structure. Other oscillator features used in PIC18 enhanced microcontrollers, such as the internal oscillator block and clock switching, remain the same. They are discussed later in this chapter. 3.1.1 OSCILLATOR CONTROL The operation of the oscillator in PIC18F47J13 family devices is controlled through three Configuration registers and two control registers. Configuration registers, CONFIG1L, CONFIG1H and CONFIG2L, select the oscillator mode, PLL prescaler and CPU divider options. As Configuration bits, these are set when the device is programmed and left in that configuration until the device is reprogrammed. The OSCCON register (Register 3-2) selects the Active Clock mode. It is primarily used in controlling clock switching in power-managed modes. Its use is discussed in Section 3.3.1 “Oscillator Control Register”. The OSCTUNE register (Register 3-1) is used to trim the INTOSC frequency source and select the low-frequency clock source that drives several special features. The OSCTUNE register is also used to activate or disable the Phase Locked Loop (PLL). Its use is described in Section 3.2.5.1 “OSCTUNE Register”. 3.2 Oscillator Types PIC18F47J13 family devices can be operated in eight distinct oscillator modes. Users can program the FOSC<2:0> Configuration bits to select one of the modes listed in Table 3-1. For oscillator modes which produce a clock output (CLKO) on pin, RA6, the output frequency will be one fourth of the peripheral clock frequency. The clock output stops when in Sleep mode, but will continue during Idle mode (see Figure 3-1). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. OSCILLATOR MODES EC External Clock Input mode, the PLL is always disabled, CLKO on RA6, apply external clock signal to RA7. HSPLL High-Speed Crystal/Resonator mode, PLL can be enabled or disabled in software, crystal/resonator connected between RA6 and RA7. HS High-Speed Crystal/Resonator mode, PLL always disabled, crystal/resonator connected between RA6 and RA7. INTOSCPLLO Internal Oscillator mode, PLL can be enabled or disabled in software, CLKO on RA6, port function on RA7, the internal oscillator block is used to derive both the primary clock source and the postscaled internal clock. INTOSCPLL Internal Oscillator mode, PLL can be enabled or disabled in software, port function on RA6 and RA7, the internal oscillator block is used to derive both the primary clock source and the postscaled internal clock. INTOSCO Internal Oscillator mode, PLL is always disabled, CLKO on RA6, port function on RA7, the output of the INTOSC postscaler serves as both the postscaled internal clock and the primary clock source. INTOSC Internal Oscillator mode, PLL is always disabled, port function on RA6 and RA7, the output of the INTOSC postscaler serves as both the postscaled internal clock and the primary clock source. 3.2.1 OSCILLATOR MODES A network of MUXes, clock dividers and two PLL circuits have been provided, which can be used to derive various microcontroller frequencies. Figure 3-1 helps in understanding the oscillator structure of the PIC18F47J13 family of devices. Preliminary DS39974A-page 35 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 3-1: PIC18F47J13 FAMILY CLOCK DIAGRAM PLL Prescaler PLLDIV<2:0> Primary Oscillator OSC2 FOSC<2> OSC1 1 1 0 0 12 10 6 5 4 3 2 1 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 4 MHz 96 MHz PLL(1) 2 48 MHz 0 1 FOSC<2> 1 PLLEN FOSC<2:1> CFGPLLEN Other PLLSEL 4x PLL(2) 0 Primary Clock Source CPU 00 Secondary Oscillator 00 Timer1 Clock(3) T1OSO OSCCON<6:4> T1OSI Internal Oscillator Block INTRC 31 kHz 8 MHz INTOSC Postscaler 8 MHz 8 MHz 111 4 MHz 110 2 MHz 101 1 MHz 100 500 kHz 011 250 kHz 010 125 kHz 001 1 31 kHz 000 0 OSCTUNE<7> Note 1: 2: 3: IDLE Postscaled Internal Clock 01 Peripherals RA6 11 4 OSCCON<1:0> CLKO Enabled Modes WDT, PWRT, FSCM and Two-Speed Start-up The 96 MHz PLL requires a 4 MHz input and it produces a 96 MHz output. The 96 MHz PLL prescaler enables source clocks of 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 40 or 48 MHz to provide the 4 MHz input. The 4x PLL requires an input clock source between 4 and 12 MHz. When using INTOSC to provide the 4x PLL input, the INTOSC postscaler must be set to either 8 MHz or 4 MHz. Selecting other INTOSC postscaler settings will operate the PLL outside of the specification. Selecting the Timer1 clock or postscaled internal clock will turn off the primary oscillator (unless required by the reference clock of Section 3.4 “Reference Clock Output”) and PLL. DS39974A-page 36 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 3.2.2 CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR/CERAMIC RESONATORS In HS and HSPLL Oscillator modes, a crystal or ceramic resonator is connected to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins to establish oscillation. Figure 3-2 displays the pin connections. TABLE 3-3: Osc Type HS The oscillator design requires the use of a parallel resonant crystal. Use of a series resonant crystal may give a frequency out of the crystal manufacturer’s specifications. Note: FIGURE 3-2: C1(1) CRYSTAL/CERAMIC RESONATOR OPERATION (HS OR HSPLL CONFIGURATION) OSC1 To Internal Logic XTAL C2(1) Note 1: 2: C1 C2 4 MHz 27 pF 27 pF 8 MHz 22 pF 22 pF 16 MHz 18 pF 18 pF Different capacitor values may be required to produce acceptable oscillator operation. The user should test the performance of the oscillator over the expected VDD and temperature range for the application. See the notes following this table for additional information. Crystals Used: 4 MHz 8 MHz 16 MHz See Table 3-2 and Table 3-3 for initial values of C1 and C2. RS may be required to avoid overdriving crystals with low drive level specifications. TABLE 3-2: Typical Capacitor Values Tested: These capacitors were tested with the crystals listed below for basic start-up and operation. These values are not optimized. PIC18F47J13 OSC2 Crystal Freq Capacitor values are for design guidance only. Sleep RS(2) CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR Note 1: Higher capacitance not only increases the stability of oscillator, but also increases the start-up time. 2: Since each resonator/crystal has its own characteristics, the user should consult the resonator/crystal manufacturer for appropriate values of external components. CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR CERAMIC RESONATORS Typical Capacitor Values Used: Mode Freq OSC1 OSC2 HS 8.0 MHz 16.0 MHz 27 pF 22 pF 27 pF 22 pF 3: Rs may be required to avoid overdriving crystals with low drive level specification. 4: Always verify oscillator performance over the VDD and temperature range that is expected for the application. Capacitor values are for design guidance only. These capacitors were tested with the resonators listed below for basic start-up and operation. These values are not optimized. Different capacitor values may be required to produce acceptable oscillator operation. The user should test the performance of the oscillator over the expected VDD and temperature range for the application. An internal postscaler allows users to select a clock frequency other than that of the crystal or resonator. Frequency division is determined by the CPDIV Configuration bits. Users may select a clock frequency of the oscillator frequency, or 1/2, 1/3 or 1/6 of the frequency. See the notes following Table 3-3 for additional information. Resonators Used: 4.0 MHz 8.0 MHz 16.0 MHz 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 37 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 3.2.3 EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT The EC and ECPLL Oscillator modes require an external clock source to be connected to the OSC1 pin. There is no oscillator start-up time required after a Power-on Reset (POR) or after an exit from Sleep mode. The 4x PLL is designed to produce variable reference clocks of 16 to 48 MHz from any input clock between 4 and 12 MHz. The PLLSEL (CONFIG3H<2>) Configuration bit is used to select which PLL circuit will be used by the application. In the EC Oscillator mode, the oscillator frequency, divided by 4, is available on the OSC2 pin. In the ECPLL Oscillator mode, the PLL output, divided by 4, is available on the OSC2 pin. This signal may be used for test purposes or to synchronize other logic. Figure 3-3 displays the pin connections for the EC Oscillator mode. 3.2.5 FIGURE 3-3: The main output (INTOSC) is an 8 MHz clock source which can be used to directly drive the device clock. It also drives the INTOSC postscaler which can provide a range of clock frequencies from 31 kHz to 8 MHz. Additionally, the INTOSC may be used in conjunction with a PLL to generate clock frequencies up to 48 MHz. OSC1/CLKI Clock from Ext. System PIC18F47J13 FOSC/4 3.2.4 EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT OPERATION (EC AND ECPLL CONFIGURATION) INTERNAL OSCILLATOR BLOCK The PIC18F47J13 family devices include an internal oscillator block which generates two different clock signals; either can be used as the microcontroller’s clock source. The internal oscillator may eliminate the need for external oscillator circuits on the OSC1 and/or OSC2 pins. The other clock source is the internal RC oscillator (INTRC) which provides a nominal 31 kHz output. INTRC is enabled if it is selected as the device clock source. It is also enabled automatically when any of the following are enabled: OSC2/CLKO PLL FREQUENCY MULTIPLIER A Phase Locked Loop (PLL) circuit provides an option for users who want to use a low-frequency oscillator circuit or clock the device up to its highest rated frequency from a crystal oscillator. This may be useful for customers who are concerned with EMI due to high-frequency crystals or users who require higher clock speeds from the internal oscillator. PIC18F47J13 family devices include two PLL circuits: a 4x PLL and a 96 MHz PLL. Either PLL can be enabled in HSPLL, ECPLL, INTOSCPLL and INTOSCPLLO Oscillator modes by setting the PLLEN bit (OSCTUNE<6>) or by clearing the CFGPLLEN bit (CONFIG1L<4>). • • • • Power-up Timer Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Watchdog Timer Two-Speed Start-up These features are discussed in larger detail in Section 27.0 “Special Features of the CPU”. The clock source frequency (INTOSC direct, INTRC direct or INTOSC postscaler) is selected by configuring the IRCF bits of the OSCCON register (page 42). The 96 MHz PLL is designed to produce a fixed 96 MHz reference clock from a fixed 4 MHz input. The output can then be divided and used for producing a 48 MHz microcontroller core clock. Because the PLL has a fixed frequency input and output, there are eight prescaling options to match the oscillator input frequency to the PLL. This prescaler allows the PLL to be used with crystals, resonators and external clocks, which are integer multiple frequencies of 4 MHz. For example, a 12 MHz crystal could be used in a prescaler Divide-by-Three mode to drive the 96 MHz PLL. DS39974A-page 38 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 3.2.5.1 OSCTUNE Register 3.2.5.3 The internal oscillator’s output has been calibrated at the factory but can be adjusted in the user’s application. This is done by writing to the OSCTUNE register (Register 3-1). When the OSCTUNE register is modified, the INTOSC frequency will begin shifting to the new frequency. The INTOSC clock will typically stabilize within 1 s. Code execution continues during this shift. There is no indication that the shift has occurred. The OSCTUNE register also contains the INTSRC bit. The INTSRC bit allows users to select which internal oscillator provides the clock source when the 31 kHz frequency option is selected. This is covered in larger detail in Section 3.3.1 “Oscillator Control Register”. The PLLEN bit, contained in the OSCTUNE register, can be used to enable or disable the internal PLL when running in one of the PLL type oscillator modes (e.g., INTOSCPLL). Oscillator modes that do not contain “PLL” in their name cannot be used with the PLL. In these modes, the PLL is always disabled regardless of the setting of the PLLEN bit. When configured for one of the PLL enabled modes, setting the PLLEN bit does not immediately switch the device clock to the PLL output. The PLL requires up to electrical parameter, trc, to start-up and lock, during which time, the device continues to be clocked. Once the PLL output is ready, the microcontroller core will automatically switch to the PLL derived frequency. 3.2.5.2 Internal Oscillator Output Frequency and Drift The internal oscillator block is calibrated at the factory to produce an INTOSC output frequency of 8.0 MHz. However, this frequency may drift as VDD or temperature changes, which can affect the controller operation in a variety of ways. The low-frequency INTRC oscillator operates independently of the INTOSC source. Any changes in INTOSC across voltage and temperature are not necessarily reflected by changes in INTRC and vice versa. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Compensating for INTOSC Drift It is possible to adjust the INTOSC frequency by modifying the value in the OSCTUNE register. This has no effect on the INTRC clock source frequency. Tuning the INTOSC source requires knowing when to make the adjustment, in which direction it should be made, and in some cases, how large a change is needed. When using the EUSART, for example, an adjustment may be required when it begins to generate framing errors or receives data with errors while in Asynchronous mode. Framing errors indicate that the device clock frequency is too high; to adjust for this, decrement the value in OSCTUNE to reduce the clock frequency. On the other hand, errors in data may suggest that the clock speed is too low; to compensate, increment OSCTUNE to increase the clock frequency. It is also possible to verify device clock speed against a reference clock. Two timers may be used: one timer is clocked by the peripheral clock, while the other is clocked by a fixed reference source, such as the Timer1 oscillator. Both timers are cleared, but the timer clocked by the reference generates interrupts. When an interrupt occurs, the internally clocked timer is read and both timers are cleared. If the internally clocked timer value is greater than expected, then the internal oscillator block is running too fast. To adjust for this, decrement the OSCTUNE register. Finally, an ECCP module can use free-running Timer1 (or Timer3), clocked by the internal oscillator block and an external event with a known period (i.e., AC power frequency). The time of the first event is captured in the CCPRxH:CCPRxL registers and is recorded for use later. When the second event causes a capture, the time of the first event is subtracted from the time of the second event. Since the period of the external event is known, the time difference between events can be calculated. If the measured time is greater than the calculated time, the internal oscillator block is running too fast; to compensate, decrement the OSCTUNE register. If the measured time is less than the calculated time, the internal oscillator block is running too slow; to compensate, increment the OSCTUNE register. Preliminary DS39974A-page 39 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 3-1: OSCTUNE: OSCILLATOR TUNING REGISTER (ACCESS F9Bh) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 INTSRC PLLEN(1) TUN5 TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 INTSRC: Internal Oscillator Low-Frequency Source Select bit 1 = 31.25 kHz device clock derived from 8 MHz INTOSC source (divide-by-256 enabled) 0 = 31 kHz device clock derived directly from INTRC internal oscillator bit 6 PLLEN: Frequency Multiplier Enable bit(1) 1 = PLL is enabled 0 = PLL is disabled bit 5-0 TUN<5:0>: Frequency Tuning bits 011111 = Maximum frequency 011110 • • • 000001 000000 = Center frequency; oscillator module is running at the calibrated frequency 111111 • • • 100000 = Minimum frequency Note 1: When the CFGPLLEN Configuration bit is used to enable the PLL, clearing OSCTUNE<6> will not disable the PLL. DS39974A-page 40 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 3.3 3.3.1 Clock Sources and Oscillator Switching Like previous PIC18 enhanced devices, the PIC18F47J13 family includes a feature that allows the device clock source to be switched from the main oscillator to an alternate, low-frequency clock source. PIC18F47J13 family devices offer two alternate clock sources. When an alternate clock source is enabled, the various power-managed operating modes are available. Essentially, there are three clock sources for these devices: • Primary Oscillators • Secondary Oscillators • Internal Oscillator Block The Primary Oscillators include the External Crystal and Resonator modes, the External Clock modes and the internal oscillator block. The particular mode is defined by the FOSC<2:0> Configuration bits. The details of these modes are covered earlier in this chapter. The Secondary Oscillators are external sources that are not connected to the OSC1 or OSC2 pins. These sources may continue to operate even after the controller is placed in a power-managed mode. PIC18F47J13 family devices offer the Timer1 oscillator as a secondary oscillator. This oscillator, in all power-managed modes, is often the time base for functions such as a Real-Time Clock (RTC). Most often, a 32.768 kHz watch crystal is connected between the RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI/RP11 and RC1/CCP8/T1OSI/RP12 pins. Like the HS Oscillator mode circuits, loading capacitors are also connected from each pin to ground. The Timer1 oscillator is discussed in larger detail in Section 13.5 “Timer1 Oscillator”. In addition to being a primary clock source, the postscaled internal clock is available as a power-managed mode clock source. The INTRC source is also used as the clock source for several special features, such as the WDT and Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM). OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER The OSCCON register (Register 3-2) controls several aspects of the device clock’s operation, both in full-power operation and in power-managed modes. The System Clock Select bits, SCS<1:0>, select the clock source. The available clock sources are the primary clock (defined by the FOSC<2:0> Configuration bits), the secondary clock (Timer1 oscillator) and the postscaled internal clock.The clock source changes immediately, after one or more of the bits is written to, following a brief clock transition interval. The SCS bits are cleared on all forms of Reset. The Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits, IRCF<2:0>, select the frequency output provided on the postscaled internal clock line. The choices are the INTRC source, the INTOSC source (8 MHz) or one of the frequencies derived from the INTOSC postscaler (31 kHz to 4 MHz). If the postscaled internal clock is supplying the device clock, changing the states of these bits will have an immediate change on the internal oscillator’s output. On device Resets, the default output frequency of the INTOSC postscaler is set at 4 MHz. When an output frequency of 31 kHz is selected (IRCF<2:0> = 000), users may choose the internal oscillator, which acts as the source. This is done with the INTSRC bit in the OSCTUNE register (OSCTUNE<7>). Setting this bit selects INTOSC as a 31.25 kHz clock source by enabling the divide-by-256 output of the INTOSC postscaler. Clearing INTSRC selects INTRC (nominally 31 kHz) as the clock source. This option allows users to select the tunable and more precise INTOSC as a clock source, while maintaining power savings with a very low clock speed. Regardless of the setting of INTSRC, INTRC always remains the clock source for features such as the WDT and the FSCM. The OSTS and SOSCRUN bits indicate which clock source is currently providing the device clock. The OSTS bit indicates that the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has timed out and the primary clock is providing the device clock in primary clock modes. The SOSCRUN bit (OSCCON2<6>) indicates when the Timer1 oscillator is providing the device clock in secondary clock modes. In power-managed modes, only one of these bits will be set at any time. If none of these bits are set, the INTRC is providing the clock or the internal oscillator block has just started and is not yet stable. The IDLEN bit determines if the device goes into Sleep mode, or one of the Idle modes, when the SLEEP instruction is executed. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 41 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY The use of the flag and control bits in the OSCCON register is discussed in more detail in Section 4.0 “Low-Power Modes”. Note 1: The Timer1 crystal driver is enabled by setting the T1OSCEN bit in the Timer1 Control register (T1CON<3>). If the Timer1 oscillator is not enabled, then any attempt to select the Timer1 clock source will be ignored, unless the CONFIG2L register’s SOSCSEL<1:0> bits are set to Digital mode. 3.3.2 OSCILLATOR TRANSITIONS PIC18F47J13 family devices contain circuitry to prevent clock “glitches” when switching between clock sources. A short pause in the device clock occurs during the clock switch. The length of this pause is the sum of two cycles of the old clock source and three to four cycles of the new clock source. This formula assumes that the new clock source is stable. Clock transitions are discussed in more detail in Section 4.1.2 “Entering Power-Managed Modes”. 2: If Timer1 is driving a crystal, it is recommended that the Timer1 oscillator be operating and stable prior to switching to it as the clock source; otherwise, a very long delay may occur while the Timer1 oscillator starts. REGISTER 3-2: OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS FD3h) R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-0 R-1(1) U-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 IDLEN IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS — SCS1 SCS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IDLEN: Idle Enable bit 1 = Device enters Idle mode on SLEEP instruction 0 = Device enters Sleep mode on SLEEP instruction bit 6-4 IRCF<2:0>: Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits When using INTOSC to drive the 4x PLL, select 8 MHz or 4 MHz only to avoid operating the 4x PLL outside of specification. 111 = 8 MHz (INTOSC drives clock directly) 110 = 4 MHz(2) 101 = 2 MHz 100 = 1 MHz 011 = 500 kHz 010 = 250 kHz 001 = 125 kHz 000 = 31 kHz (from either INTOSC/256 or INTRC directly)(3) bit 3 OSTS: Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status bit(1) 1 = Oscillator Start-up Timer time-out has expired; primary oscillator is running 0 = Oscillator Start-up Timer time-out is running; primary oscillator is not ready bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘1’ bit 1-0 SCS<1:0>: System Clock Select bits 11 = Postscaled internal clock (INTRC/INTOSC derived) 10 = Reserved 01 = Timer1 oscillator 00 = Primary clock source (INTOSC postscaler output when FOSC<2:0> = 001 or 000) 00 = Primary clock source (CPU divider output for other values of FOSC<2:0>) Note 1: 2: 3: Reset value is ‘0’ when Two-Speed Start-up is enabled and ‘1’ if disabled. Default output frequency of INTOSC on Reset (4 MHz). Source selected by the INTSRC bit (OSCTUNE<7>). DS39974A-page 42 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 3-3: OSCCON2: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER 2 (ACCESS F87h) U-0 R-0(2) — SOSCRUN U-0 — R/W-1 R/W-0(2) SOSCDRV SOSCGO(3) R/W-1 U-0 U-0 — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 SOSCRUN: SOSC Run Status bit 1 = System clock comes from secondary SOSC 0 = System clock comes from an oscillator other than SOSC bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 SOSCDRV: SOSC Drive Control bit 1 = T1OSC/SOSC oscillator drive circuit is selected by Configuration bits, CONFIG2L<4:3> 0 = Low-power T1OSC/SOSC circuit is selected bit 3 SOSCGO: Oscillator Start Control bit(3) 1 = Turns on the oscillator, even if no peripherals are requesting it 0 = Oscillator is shut off unless peripherals are requesting it bit 2 Reserved: Maintain as ‘1’ bit 1-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: 2: 3: Reset value is ‘0’ when Two-Speed Start-up is enabled and ‘1’ if disabled. Default output frequency of INTOSC on Reset (4 MHz). When the SOSC is selected to run from a digital clock input, rather than an external crystal, this bit has no effect. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 43 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 3.4 Reference Clock Output In addition to the peripheral clock/4 output in certain oscillator modes, the device clock in the PIC18F47J13 family can also be configured to provide a reference clock output signal to a port pin. This feature is available in all oscillator configurations and allows the user to select a greater range of clock submultiples to drive external devices in the application. This reference clock output is controlled by the REFOCON register (Register 3-4). Setting the ROON bit (REFOCON<7>) makes the clock signal available on the REFO (RB2) pin. The RODIV<3:0> bits enable the selection of 16 different clock divider options. REGISTER 3-4: The ROSSLP and ROSEL bits (REFOCON<5:4>) control the availability of the reference output during Sleep mode. The ROSEL bit determines if the oscillator is on OSC1 and OSC2, or the current system clock source is used for the reference clock output. The ROSSLP bit determines if the reference source is available on RB2 when the device is in Sleep mode. To use the reference clock output in Sleep mode, both the ROSSLP and ROSEL bits must be set. The device clock must also be configured for an EC or HS mode; otherwise, the oscillator on OSC1 and OSC2 will be powered down when the device enters Sleep mode. Clearing the ROSEL bit allows the reference output frequency to change as the system clock changes during any clock switches. REFOCON: REFERENCE OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER (BANKED F3Dh) R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ROON — ROSSLP ROSEL RODIV3 RODIV2 RODIV1 RODIV0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ROON: Reference Oscillator Output Enable bit 1 = Reference oscillator is enabled on REFO pin 0 = Reference oscillator is disabled bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 ROSSLP: Reference Oscillator Output Stop in Sleep bit 1 = Reference oscillator continues to run in Sleep 0 = Reference oscillator is disabled in Sleep bit 4 ROSEL: Reference Oscillator Source Select bit 1 = Primary oscillator crystal/resonator is used as the base clock(1) 0 = System clock (FOSC) is used as the base clock; the base clock reflects any clock switching of the device bit 3-0 RODIV<3:0>: Reference Oscillator Divisor Select bits 1111 = Base clock value divided by 32,768 1110 = Base clock value divided by 16,384 1101 = Base clock value divided by 8,192 1100 = Base clock value divided by 4,096 1011 = Base clock value divided by 2,048 1010 = Base clock value divided by 1,024 1001 = Base clock value divided by 512 1000 = Base clock value divided by 256 0111 = Base clock value divided by 128 0110 = Base clock value divided by 64 0101 = Base clock value divided by 32 0100 = Base clock value divided by 16 0011 = Base clock value divided by 8 0010 = Base clock value divided by 4 0001 = Base clock value divided by 2 0000 = Base clock value Note 1: The crystal oscillator must be enabled using the FOSC<2:0> bits; the crystal maintains the operation in Sleep mode. DS39974A-page 44 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 3.5 Effects of Power-Managed Modes on Various Clock Sources When the PRI_IDLE mode is selected, the designated primary oscillator continues to run without interruption. For all other power-managed modes, the oscillator using the OSC1 pin is disabled. In secondary clock modes (SEC_RUN and SEC_IDLE), the Timer1 oscillator is operating and providing the device clock. The Timer1 oscillator may also run in all power-managed modes if required to clock Timer1, Timer3 or Timer5. In internal oscillator modes (RC_RUN and RC_IDLE), the internal oscillator block provides the device clock source. The 31 kHz INTRC output can be used directly to provide the clock and may be enabled to support various special features regardless of the power-managed mode (see Section 27.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)”, Section 27.4 “Two-Speed Start-up” and Section 27.5 “Fail-Safe Clock Monitor” for more information on WDT, FSCM and Two-Speed Start-up). The INTOSC output at 8 MHz may be used directly to clock the device or may be divided down by the postscaler. The INTOSC output is disabled if the clock is provided directly from the INTRC output. 3.6 Power-up Delays Power-up delays are controlled by two timers so that no external Reset circuitry is required for most applications. The delays ensure that the device is kept in Reset until the device power supply is stable under normal circumstances and the primary clock is operating and stable. For additional information on power-up delays, see Section 5.6 “Power-up Timer (PWRT)”. The first timer is the Power-up Timer (PWRT), which provides a fixed delay on power-up (parameter 33, Table 30-14). The second timer is the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST), intended to keep the chip in Reset until the crystal oscillator is stable (HS mode). The OST does this by counting 1024 oscillator cycles before allowing the oscillator to clock the device. There is a delay of interval, TCSD (parameter 38, Table 30-14), following POR, while the controller becomes ready to execute instructions. This delay runs concurrently with any other delays. This may be the only delay that occurs when any of the internal oscillator or EC modes are used as the primary clock source. If Sleep mode is selected, all clock sources which are no longer required are stopped. Since all the transistor switching currents have been stopped, Sleep mode achieves the lowest current consumption of the device (only leakage currents) outside of Deep Sleep. Enabling any on-chip feature that will operate during Sleep mode increases the current consumed during Sleep mode. The INTRC is required to support WDT operation. The Timer1 oscillator may be operating to support an RTC. Other features may be operating that do not require a device clock source (i.e., MSSP slave, PMP, INTx pins, etc.). Peripherals that may add significant current consumption are listed in Section 30.2 “DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F47J13 Family (Industrial)”. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 45 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 46 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.0 LOW-POWER MODES The IDLEN bit (OSCCON<7>) controls CPU clocking and the SCS<1:0> bits (OSCCON<1:0>) select the clock source. The individual modes, bit settings, clock sources and affected modules are summarized in Table 4-1. The PIC18F47J13 family devices can manage power consumption through clocking to the CPU and the peripherals. In general, reducing the clock frequency and number of circuits being clocked reduces power consumption. 4.1.1 For managing power in an application, the primary modes of operation are: The SCS<1:0> bits allow the selection of one of three clock sources for power-managed modes. They are: • • • • • Primary clock source – Defined by the FOSC<2:0> Configuration bits • Timer1 clock – Provided by the secondary oscillator • Postscaled internal clock – Derived from the internal oscillator block Run Mode Idle Mode Sleep Mode Deep Sleep Mode Additionally, there is an Ultra Low-Power Wake-up (ULPWU) mode for generating an interrupt-on-change on RA0. These modes define which portions of the device are clocked and at what speed. • The Run and Idle modes can use any of the three available clock sources (primary, secondary or internal oscillator blocks). • The Sleep mode does not use a clock source. The ULPWU mode on RA0 allows a slow falling voltage to generate an interrupt-on-change on RA0 without excess current consumption. See Section 4.7 “Ultra Low-Power Wake-up”. The power-managed modes include several power-saving features offered on previous PIC® devices, such as clock switching, ULPWU and Sleep mode. In addition, the PIC18F47J13 family devices have added a new power-managed Deep Sleep mode. 4.1 Selecting Power-Managed Modes Selecting a power-managed mode requires these decisions: • Will the CPU be clocked? • If so, which clock source will be used? 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 4.1.2 CLOCK SOURCES ENTERING POWER-MANAGED MODES Switching from one clock source to another begins by loading the OSCCON register. The SCS<1:0> bits select the clock source. Changing these bits causes an immediate switch to the new clock source, assuming that it is running. The switch also may be subject to clock transition delays. These delays are discussed in Section 4.1.3 “Clock Transitions and Status Indicators” and subsequent sections. Entry to the power-managed Idle or Sleep modes is triggered by the execution of a SLEEP instruction. The actual mode that results depends on the status of the IDLEN bit. Depending on the current mode and the mode being switched to, a change to a power-managed mode does not always require setting all of these bits. Many transitions may be done by changing the oscillator select bits, the IDLEN bit or the DSEN bit prior to issuing a SLEEP instruction. If the IDLEN and DSEN bits are already configured correctly, it may only be necessary to perform a SLEEP instruction to switch to the desired mode. Preliminary DS39974A-page 47 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 4-1: Mode LOW-POWER MODES DSCONH<7> OSCCON<7,1:0> DSEN(1) IDLEN(1) SCS<1:0> Module Clocking Available Clock and Oscillator Source CPU Peripherals Off Sleep 0 0 N/A Off Deep Sleep(3) 1 0 N/A Powered off(2) PRI_RUN 0 N/A 00 Clocked Timer1 oscillator and/or RTCC may optionally be enabled Powered off RTCC can run uninterrupted using the Timer1 or internal low-power RC oscillator Clocked The normal, full-power execution mode; primary clock source (defined by FOSC<2:0>) SEC_RUN 0 N/A 01 Clocked Clocked Secondary – Timer1 oscillator RC_RUN 0 N/A 11 Clocked Clocked Postscaled internal clock PRI_IDLE 0 1 00 Off Clocked Primary clock source (defined by FOSC<2:0>) SEC_IDLE 0 1 01 Off Clocked Secondary – Timer1 oscillator RC_IDLE 0 1 11 Off Clocked Postscaled internal clock Note 1: 2: 3: 4.1.3 IDLEN and DSEN reflect their values when the SLEEP instruction is executed. Deep Sleep turns off the internal core voltage regulator to power down core logic. See Section 4.6 “Deep Sleep Mode” for more information. Deep Sleep mode is only available on “F” devices, not “LF” devices. CLOCK TRANSITIONS AND STATUS INDICATORS The length of the transition between clock sources is the sum of two cycles of the old clock source and three to four cycles of the new clock source. This formula assumes that the new clock source is stable. Two bits indicate the current clock source and its status: OSTS (OSCCON<3>) and SOSCRUN (OSCCON2<6>). In general, only one of these bits will be set in a given power-managed mode. When the OSTS bit is set, the primary clock would be providing the device clock. When the SOSCRUN bit is set, the Timer1 oscillator would be providing the clock. If neither of these bits is set, INTRC would be clocking the device. Note: 4.1.4 MULTIPLE SLEEP COMMANDS The power-managed mode that is invoked with the SLEEP instruction is determined by the setting of the IDLEN and DSEN bits at the time the instruction is executed. If another SLEEP instruction is executed, the device will enter the power-managed mode specified by IDLEN and DSEN at that time. If IDLEN or DSEN have changed, the device will enter the new power-managed mode specified by the new setting. Executing a SLEEP instruction does not necessarily place the device into Sleep mode. It acts as the trigger to place the controller into either the Sleep or Deep Sleep mode, or one of the Idle modes, depending on the setting of the IDLEN bit. DS39974A-page 48 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.2 Run Modes The Timer1 oscillator should already be running prior to entering SEC_RUN mode. If the T1OSCEN bit is not set when the SCS<1:0> bits are set to ‘01’, entry to SEC_RUN mode will not occur. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, but not yet running, device clocks will be delayed until the oscillator has started. In such situations, initial oscillator operation is far from stable and unpredictable operation may result. Note: In the Run modes, clocks to both the core and peripherals are active. The difference between these modes is the clock source. 4.2.1 PRI_RUN MODE The PRI_RUN mode is the normal, full-power execution mode of the microcontroller. This is also the default mode upon a device Reset unless Two-Speed Start-up is enabled (see Section 27.4 “Two-Speed Start-up” for details). In this mode, the OSTS bit is set (see Section 3.3.1 “Oscillator Control Register”). 4.2.2 On transitions from SEC_RUN mode to PRI_RUN mode, the peripherals and CPU continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator while the primary clock is started. When the primary clock becomes ready, a clock switch back to the primary clock occurs (see Figure 4-2). When the clock switch is complete, the SOSCRUN bit is cleared, the OSTS bit is set and the primary clock would be providing the clock. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up; the Timer1 oscillator continues to run. SEC_RUN MODE The SEC_RUN mode is the compatible mode to the “clock switching” feature offered in other PIC18 devices. In this mode, the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. This gives users the option of low-power consumption while still using a high-accuracy clock source. SEC_RUN mode is entered by setting the SCS<1:0> bits to ‘01’. The device clock source is switched to the Timer1 oscillator (see Figure 4-1), the primary oscillator is shut down, the SOSCRUN bit (OSCCON2<6>) is set and the OSTS bit is cleared. FIGURE 4-1: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SEC_RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 1 T1OSI 2 3 n-1 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 n Clock Transition OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC FIGURE 4-2: PC + 2 PC + 4 TRANSITION TIMING FROM SEC_RUN MODE TO PRI_RUN MODE (HSPLL) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 T1OSI OSC1 TOST(1) TPLL(1) 1 PLL Clock Output n-1 n Clock Transition CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC + 2 PC SCS<1:0> Bits Changed Note 1: 2 PC + 4 OSTS Bit Set TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 49 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.2.3 RC_RUN MODE On transitions from RC_RUN mode to PRI_RUN mode, the device continues to be clocked from the INTOSC block while the primary clock is started. When the primary clock becomes ready, a clock switch to the primary clock occurs (see Figure 4-4). When the clock switch is complete, the OSTS bit is set and the primary clock is providing the device clock. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the switch. The INTRC clock source will continue to run if either the WDT or the FSCM is enabled. In RC_RUN mode, the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the internal oscillator; the primary clock is shut down. This mode provides the best power conservation of all the Run modes while still executing code. It works well for user applications, which are not highly timing-sensitive or do not require high-speed clocks at all times. This mode is entered by setting the SCS<1:0> bits (OSCCON<1:0>) to ‘11’. When the clock source is switched to the internal oscillator block (see Figure 4-3), the primary oscillator is shut down and the OSTS bit is cleared. FIGURE 4-3: TRANSITION TIMING TO RC_RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 1 INTRC 2 3 n-1 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 n Clock Transition OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC FIGURE 4-4: PC + 2 PC + 4 TRANSITION TIMING FROM RC_RUN MODE TO PRI_RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q1 INTRC OSC1 TOST(1) TPLL(1) 1 PLL Clock Output 2 n-1 n Clock Transition CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter SCS<1:0> Bits Changed Note 1: DS39974A-page 50 PC + 2 PC PC + 4 OSTS Bit Set TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.3 When a wake event occurs in Sleep mode (by interrupt, Reset or WDT time-out), the device will not be clocked until the clock source selected by the SCS<1:0> bits becomes ready (see Figure 4-6), or it will be clocked from the internal oscillator if either the Two-Speed Start-up or the FSCM is enabled (see Section 27.0 “Special Features of the CPU”). In either case, the OSTS bit is set when the primary clock is providing the device clocks. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. Sleep Mode The power-managed Sleep mode is identical to the legacy Sleep mode offered in all other PIC devices. It is entered by clearing the IDLEN bit (the default state on device Reset) and executing the SLEEP instruction. This shuts down the selected oscillator (Figure 4-5). All clock source status bits are cleared. Entering the Sleep mode from any other mode does not require a clock switch. This is because no clocks are needed once the controller has entered Sleep mode. If the WDT is selected, the INTRC source will continue to operate. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, it will also continue to run. FIGURE 4-5: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SLEEP MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Sleep Program Counter PC FIGURE 4-6: PC + 2 TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM SLEEP (HSPLL) Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 OSC1 TOST(1) PLL Clock Output TPLL(1) CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter Wake Event Note 1: PC + 2 PC PC + 4 PC + 6 OSTS Bit Set TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 51 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.4 Idle Modes The Idle modes allow the controller’s CPU to be selectively shut down while the peripherals continue to operate. Selecting a particular Idle mode allows users to further manage power consumption. If the IDLEN bit is set to ‘1’ when a SLEEP instruction is executed, the peripherals will be clocked from the clock source selected using the SCS<1:0> bits; however, the CPU will not be clocked. The clock source status bits are not affected. Setting IDLEN and executing a SLEEP instruction provides a quick method of switching from a given Run mode to its corresponding Idle mode. If the WDT is selected, the INTRC source will continue to operate. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, it will also continue to run. Since the CPU is not executing instructions, the only exits from any of the Idle modes are by interrupt, WDT time-out or a Reset. When a wake event occurs, CPU execution is delayed by an interval of TCSD (parameter 38, Table 30-14) while it becomes ready to execute code. When the CPU begins executing code, it resumes with the same clock source for the current Idle mode. For example, when waking from RC_IDLE mode, the internal oscillator block will clock the CPU and peripherals (in other words, RC_RUN mode). The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. When a wake event occurs, the CPU is clocked from the primary clock source. A delay of interval, TCSD, is required between the wake event and when code execution starts. This is required to allow the CPU to become ready to execute instructions. After the wake-up, the OSTS bit remains set. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up (see Figure 4-8). 4.4.2 In SEC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the peripherals continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. This mode is entered from SEC_RUN by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, set IDLEN first, then set SCS<1:0> to ‘01’ and execute SLEEP. When the clock source is switched to the Timer1 oscillator, the primary oscillator is shut down, the OSTS bit is cleared and the SOSCRUN bit is set. When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. After an interval of TCSD following the wake event, the CPU begins executing code being clocked by the Timer1 oscillator. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up; the Timer1 oscillator continues to run (see Figure 4-8). Note: While in any Idle or Sleep mode, a WDT time-out will result in a WDT wake-up to the Run mode currently specified by the SCS<1:0> bits. 4.4.1 SEC_IDLE MODE PRI_IDLE MODE This mode is unique among the three low-power Idle modes, in that it does not disable the primary device clock. For timing-sensitive applications, this allows for the fastest resumption of device operation with its more accurate primary clock source, since the clock source does not have to “warm up” or transition from another oscillator. The Timer1 oscillator should already be running prior to entering SEC_IDLE mode. If the T1OSCEN bit is not set when the SLEEP instruction is executed, the SLEEP instruction will be ignored and entry to SEC_IDLE mode will not occur. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, but not yet running, peripheral clocks will be delayed until the oscillator has started. In such situations, initial oscillator operation is far from stable and unpredictable operation may result. PRI_IDLE mode is entered from PRI_RUN mode by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, set IDLEN first, then set the SCS bits to ‘00’ and execute SLEEP. Although the CPU is disabled, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the primary clock source specified by the FOSC<1:0> Configuration bits. The OSTS bit remains set (see Figure 4-7). DS39974A-page 52 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 4-7: TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO IDLE MODE Q1 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 OSC1 CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter FIGURE 4-8: PC PC + 2 TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM IDLE TO RUN MODE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 TCSD CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC Wake Event 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 53 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.4.3 RC_IDLE MODE In RC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the peripherals continue to be clocked from the internal oscillator block. This mode allows for controllable power conservation during Idle periods. From RC_RUN, this mode is entered by setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, first set IDLEN, then clear the SCS bits and execute SLEEP. When the clock source is switched to the INTOSC block, the primary oscillator is shut down and the OSTS bit is cleared. When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to be clocked from the internal oscillator block. After a delay of TCSD, following the wake event, the CPU begins executing code being clocked by the INTRC. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up. The INTRC source will continue to run if either the WDT or the FSCM is enabled. 4.5 Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes An exit from Sleep mode, or any of the Idle modes, is triggered by an interrupt, a Reset or a WDT time-out. This section discusses the triggers that cause exits from power-managed modes. The clocking subsystem actions are discussed in each of the power-managed modes sections (see Section 4.2 “Run Modes”, Section 4.3 “Sleep Mode” and Section 4.4 “Idle Modes”). 4.5.1 EXIT BY INTERRUPT Any of the available interrupt sources can cause the device to exit from an Idle mode, or the Sleep mode, to a Run mode. To enable this functionality, an interrupt source must be enabled by setting its enable bit in one of the INTCON or PIE registers. The exit sequence is initiated when the corresponding interrupt flag bit is set. DS39974A-page 54 On all exits from Idle or Sleep modes by interrupt, code execution branches to the interrupt vector if the GIE/GIEH bit (INTCON<7>) is set. Otherwise, code execution continues or resumes without branching (see Section 9.0 “Interrupts”). A fixed delay of interval, TCSD, following the wake event, is required when leaving Sleep mode. This delay is required for the CPU to prepare for execution. Instruction execution resumes on the first clock cycle following this delay. 4.5.2 EXIT BY WDT TIME-OUT A WDT time-out will cause different actions depending on which power-managed mode the device is, when the time-out occurs. If the device is not executing code (all Idle modes and Sleep mode), the time-out will result in an exit from the power-managed mode (see Section 4.2 “Run Modes” and Section 4.3 “Sleep Mode”). If the device is executing code (all Run modes), the time-out will result in a WDT Reset (see Section 27.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)”). The WDT and postscaler are cleared by one of the following events: • Executing a SLEEP or CLRWDT instruction • The loss of a currently selected clock source (if the FSCM is enabled) 4.5.3 EXIT BY RESET Exiting an Idle or Sleep mode by Reset automatically forces the device to run from the INTRC. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.5.4 EXIT WITHOUT AN OSCILLATOR START-UP DELAY Certain exits from power-managed modes do not invoke the OST at all. There are two cases: • PRI_IDLE mode (where the primary clock source is not stopped) and the primary clock source is the EC mode • PRI_IDLE mode and the primary clock source is the ECPLL mode In these instances, the primary clock source either does not require an oscillator start-up delay, since it is already running (PRI_IDLE), or normally does not require an oscillator start-up delay (EC). However, a fixed delay of interval, TCSD, following the wake event, is still required when leaving Sleep and Idle modes to allow the CPU to prepare for execution. Instruction execution resumes on the first clock cycle following this delay. 4.6 Deep Sleep Mode Deep Sleep mode brings the device into its lowest power consumption state without requiring the use of external switches to remove power from the device. During Deep Sleep, the on-chip VDDCORE voltage regulator is powered down, effectively disconnecting power to the core logic of the microcontroller. Note: Since Deep Sleep mode powers down the microcontroller by turning off the on-chip VDDCORE voltage regulator, Deep Sleep capability is available only on PIC18FXXJ members in the device family. The on-chip voltage regulator is not available in PIC18LFXXJ members of the device family, and therefore, they do not support Deep Sleep. On devices that support it, the Deep Sleep mode is entered by: • • • • • • Setting the REGSLP (WDTCON<7>) bit Clearing the IDLEN bit Clearing the GIE bit Setting the DSEN bit (DSCONH<7>) Executing one single-cycle NOP instruction Executing the SLEEP instruction immediately after setting DSEN and the single NOP (no interrupts in between) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. In order to minimize the possibility of inadvertently entering Deep Sleep, the DSEN bit is cleared in hardware two instruction cycles after having been set. Therefore, in order to enter Deep Sleep, the SLEEP instruction must be executed in the immediate instruction cycle after setting DSEN. If DSEN is not set when SLEEP is executed, the device will enter conventional Sleep mode instead. During Deep Sleep, the core logic circuitry of the microcontroller is powered down to reduce leakage current. Therefore, most peripherals and functions of the microcontroller become unavailable during Deep Sleep. However, a few specific peripherals and functions are powered directly from the VDD supply rail of the microcontroller, and therefore, can continue to function in Deep Sleep. Entering Deep Sleep mode clears the DSWAKEL register. However, if the Real-Time Clock and Calendar (RTCC) is enabled prior to entering Deep Sleep, it will continue to operate uninterrupted. The device has a dedicated Brown-out Reset (DSBOR) and Watchdog Timer Reset (DSWDT) for monitoring voltage and time-out events in Deep Sleep. The DSBOR and DSWDT are independent of the standard BOR and WDT used with other power-managed modes (Run, Idle and Sleep). When a wake event occurs in Deep Sleep mode (by MCLR Reset, RTCC alarm, INT0 interrupt, ULPWU or DSWDT), the device will exit Deep Sleep mode and perform a Power-on Reset (POR). When the device is released from Reset, code execution will resume at the device’s Reset vector. 4.6.1 PREPARING FOR DEEP SLEEP Because VDDCORE could fall below the SRAM retention voltage while in Deep Sleep mode, SRAM data could be lost in Deep Sleep. Exiting Deep Sleep mode causes a POR; as a result, most Special Function Registers will reset to their default POR values. Applications needing to save a small amount of data throughout a Deep Sleep cycle can save the data to the general purpose DSGPR0 and DSGPR1 registers. The contents of these registers are preserved while the device is in Deep Sleep, and will remain valid throughout an entire Deep Sleep entry and wake-up sequence. Preliminary DS39974A-page 55 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.6.2 I/O PINS DURING DEEP SLEEP 4.6.3 During Deep Sleep, the general purpose I/O pins will retain their previous states. DEEP SLEEP WAKE-UP SOURCES Pins that are configured as inputs (TRISx bit set) prior to entry into Deep Sleep will remain high-impedance during Deep Sleep. The device can be awakened from Deep Sleep mode by a MCLR, POR, RTCC, INT0 I/O pin interrupt, DSWDT or ULPWU event. After waking, the device performs a POR. When the device is released from Reset, code execution will begin at the device’s Reset vector. Pins that are configured as outputs (TRISx bit clear) prior to entry into Deep Sleep will remain as output pins during Deep Sleep. While in this mode, they will drive the output level determined by their corresponding LAT bit at the time of entry into Deep Sleep. The software can determine if the wake-up was caused from an exit from Deep Sleep mode by reading the DS bit (WDTCON<3>). If this bit is set, the POR was caused by a Deep Sleep exit. The DS bit must be manually cleared by the software. When the device wakes back up, the I/O pin behavior depends on the type of wake up source. The software can determine the wake event source by reading the DSWAKEH and DSWAKEL registers. When the application firmware is done using the DSWAKEH and DSWAKEL status registers, individual bits do not need to be manually cleared before entering Deep Sleep again. When entering Deep Sleep mode, these registers are automatically cleared. If the device wakes back up by an RTCC alarm, INT0 interrupt, DSWDT or ULPWU event, all I/O pins will continue to maintain their previous states, even after the device has finished the POR sequence and is executing application code again. Pins configured as inputs during Deep Sleep will remain high-impedance, and pins configured as outputs will continue to drive their previous value. After waking up, the TRIS and LAT registers will be reset, but the I/O pins will still maintain their previous states. If firmware modifies the TRIS and LAT values for the I/O pins, they will not immediately go to the newly configured states. Once the firmware clears the RELEASE bit (DSCONL<0>), the I/O pins will be “released”. This causes the I/O pins to take the states configured by their respective TRIS and LAT bit values. If the Deep Sleep BOR (DSBOR) circuit is enabled, and VDD drops below the DSBOR and VDD rail POR thresholds, the I/O pins will be immediately released similar to clearing the RELEASE bit. All previous state information will be lost, including the general purpose DSGPR0 and DSGPR1 contents. See Section 4.6.5 “Deep Sleep Brown-out Reset (DSBOR)” for additional details regarding this scenario. If a MCLR Reset event occurs during Deep Sleep, the I/O pins will also be released automatically, but in this case, the DSGPR0 and DSGPR1 contents will remain valid. In all other Deep Sleep wake-up cases, application firmware needs to clear the RELEASE bit in order to reconfigure the I/O pins. 4.6.3.1 Wake-up Event Considerations Deep Sleep wake-up events are only monitored while the processor is fully in Deep Sleep mode. If a wake-up event occurs before Deep Sleep mode is entered, the event status will not be reflected in the DSWAKE registers. If the wake-up source asserts prior to entering Deep Sleep, the CPU will either go to the interrupt vector (if the wake source has an interrupt bit and the interrupt is fully enabled) or will abort the Deep Sleep entry sequence by executing past the SLEEP instruction, if the interrupt was not enabled. In this case, a wake-up event handler should be placed after the SLEEP instruction to process the event and re-attempt entry into Deep Sleep if desired. When the device is in Deep Sleep with more than one wake-up source simultaneously enabled, only the first wake-up source to assert will be detected and logged in the DSWAKEH/DSWAKEL status registers. 4.6.4 DEEP SLEEP WATCHDOG TIMER (DSWDT) Deep Sleep has its own dedicated WDT (DSWDT) with a postscaler for time-outs of 2.1 ms to 25.7 days, configurable through the bits, DSWDTPS<3:0>. The DSWDT can be clocked from either the INTRC or the T1OSC/T1CKI input. If the T1OSC/T1CKI source will be used with a crystal, the T1OSCEN bit in the T1CON register needs to be set prior to entering Deep Sleep. The reference clock source is configured through the DSWDTOSC bit. DSWDT is enabled through the DSWDTEN bit. Entering Deep Sleep mode automatically clears the DSWDT. See Section 27.0 “Special Features of the CPU” for more information. DS39974A-page 56 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.6.5 DEEP SLEEP BROWN-OUT RESET (DSBOR) The Deep Sleep module contains a dedicated Deep Sleep BOR (DSBOR) circuit. This circuit may be optionally enabled through the DSBOREN Configuration bit. The DSBOR circuit monitors the VDD supply rail voltage. The behavior of the DSBOR circuit is described in Section 5.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”. 4.6.6 RTCC PERIPHERAL AND DEEP SLEEP The RTCC can operate uninterrupted during Deep Sleep mode. It can wake the device from Deep Sleep by configuring an alarm. The RTCC clock source is configured with the RTCOSC bit (CONFIG3L<1>). The available reference clock sources are the INTRC and T1OSC/T1CKI. If the INTRC is used, the RTCC accuracy will directly depend on the INTRC tolerance. For more information on configuring the RTCC peripheral, see Section 17.0 “Real-Time Clock and Calendar (RTCC)”. 4.6.7 TYPICAL DEEP SLEEP SEQUENCE This section gives the typical sequence for using the Deep Sleep mode. Optional steps are indicated and additional information is given in notes at the end of the procedure. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. (1) Enable DSWDT (optional). Configure the DSWDT clock source (optional).(2) Enable DSBOR (optional).(1) Enable RTCC (optional).(3) Configure the RTCC peripheral (optional).(3) Configure the ULPWU peripheral (optional).(4) Enable the INT0 Interrupt (optional). Context save SRAM data by writing to the DSGPR0 and DSGPR1 registers (optional). Set the REGSLP bit (WDTCON<7>) and clear the IDLEN bit (OSCCON<7>). If using an RTCC alarm for wake-up, wait until the RTCSYNC bit (RTCCFG<4>) is clear. Enter Deep Sleep mode by setting the DSEN bit (DSCONH<7>), execute a NOP and issue a SLEEP instruction. The SLEEP instruction must be executed within 2 instruction cycles of setting the DSEN bit. Once a wake-up event occurs, the device will perform a POR Reset sequence. Code execution resumes at the device’s Reset vector. Determine if the device exited Deep Sleep by reading the Deep Sleep bit, DS (WDTCON<3>). This bit will be set if there was an exit from Deep Sleep mode. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 14. Clear the Deep Sleep bit, DS (WDTCON<3>). 15. Determine the wake-up source by reading the DSWAKEH and DSWAKEL registers. 16. Determine if a DSBOR event occurred during Deep Sleep mode by reading the DSBOR bit (DSCONL<1>). 17. Read the DSGPR0 and DSGPR1 context save registers (optional). 18. Clear the RELEASE bit (DSCONL<0>). Note 1: DSWDT and DSBOR are enabled through the devices’ Configuration bits. For more information, see Section 27.1 “Configuration Bits”. 2: The DSWDT and RTCC clock sources are selected through the devices’ Configuration bits. For more information, see Section 27.1 “Configuration Bits”. 3: For more information, see Section 17.0 “Real-Time Clock and Calendar (RTCC)”. 4: For more information on configuring this peripheral, see Section 4.7 “Ultra Low-Power Wake-up”. 4.6.8 DEEP SLEEP FAULT DETECTION If during Deep Sleep, the device is subjected to unusual operating conditions, such as an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) event, it is possible that internal circuit states used by the Deep Sleep module could become corrupted. If this were to happen, the device may exhibit unexpected behavior, such as a failure to wake back up. In order to prevent this type of scenario from occurring, the Deep Sleep module includes automatic self-monitoring capability. During Deep Sleep, critical internal nodes are continuously monitored in order to detect possible Fault conditions (which would not ordinarily occur). If a Fault condition is detected, the circuitry will set the DSFLT status bit (DSWAKEL<7>) and automatically wake the microcontroller from Deep Sleep, causing a POR Reset. During Deep Sleep, the Fault detection circuitry is always enabled and does not require any specific configuration prior to entering Deep Sleep. Preliminary DS39974A-page 57 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.6.9 DEEP SLEEP MODE REGISTERS Deep Sleep mode registers are Register 4-1 through Register 4-6. REGISTER 4-1: R/W-0 (1) DSEN provided in DSCONH: DEEP SLEEP CONTROL HIGH BYTE REGISTER (BANKED F4Dh) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — r DSULPEN RTCWDIS bit 7 bit 0 Legend: r = Reserved bit R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 DSEN: Deep Sleep Enable bit(1) 1 = Deep Sleep mode is entered on a SLEEP command 0 = Sleep mode is entered on a SLEEP command bit 6-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 Reserved: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 1 DSULPEN: Ultra Low-Power Wake-up Module Enable bit 1 = ULPWU module is enabled in Deep Sleep 0 = ULPWU module is disabled in Deep Sleep bit 0 RTCWDIS: RTCC Wake-up Disable bit 1 = Wake-up from RTCC is disabled 0 = Wake-up from RTCC is enabled Note 1: x = Bit is unknown In order to enter Deep Sleep, Sleep must be executed within 2 instruction cycles after setting DSEN. REGISTER 4-2: DSCONL: DEEP SLEEP LOW BYTE CONTROL REGISTER (BANKED F4Ch) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0(1) R/W-0(1) — — — — — ULPWDIS DSBOR RELEASE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 ULPWDIS: Ultra Low-Power Wake-up Disable bit 1 = ULPWU wake-up source is disabled 0 = ULPWU wake-up source is enabled (must also set DSULPEN = 1) bit 1 DSBOR: Deep Sleep BOR Event Status bit 1 = DSBOREN was enabled and VDD dropped below the DSBOR arming voltage during Deep Sleep, but did not fall below VDSBOR 0 = DSBOREN was disabled or VDD did not drop below the DSBOR arming voltage during Deep Sleep bit 0 RELEASE: I/O Pin State Release bit Upon waking from Deep Sleep, the I/O pins maintain their previous states. Clearing this bit will release the I/O pins and allow their respective TRIS and LAT bits to control their states. Note 1: This is the value when VDD is initially applied. DS39974A-page 58 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 4-3: DSGPR0: DEEP SLEEP PERSISTENT GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER 0 (BANKED F4Eh) R/W-xxxx(1) Deep Sleep Persistent General Purpose bits bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown Deep Sleep Persistent General Purpose bits Contents are retained even in Deep Sleep mode. Note 1: All register bits are maintained unless VDDCORE drops below the normal BOR threshold outside of Deep Sleep, or the device is in Deep Sleep and the dedicated DSBOR is enabled and VDD drops below the DSBOR threshold, or DSBOR is enabled or disabled, but VDD is hard cycled to near VSS. REGISTER 4-4: DSGPR1: DEEP SLEEP PERSISTENT GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER 1 (BANKED F4Fh) R/W-xxxx(1) Deep Sleep Persistent General Purpose bits bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown Deep Sleep Persistent General Purpose bits Contents are retained even in Deep Sleep mode. Note 1: All register bits are maintained unless VDDCORE drops below the normal BOR threshold outside of Deep Sleep, or the device is in Deep Sleep and the dedicated DSBOR is enabled and VDD drops below the DSBOR threshold, or DSBOR is enabled or disabled, but VDD is hard cycled to near VSS. REGISTER 4-5: DSWAKEH: DEEP SLEEP WAKE HIGH BYTE REGISTER (BANKED F4Bh) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 — — — — — — — DSINT0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 DSINT0: Interrupt-on-Change bit 1 = Interrupt-on-change was asserted during Deep Sleep 0 = Interrupt-on-change was not asserted during Deep Sleep 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39974A-page 59 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 4-6: DSWAKEL: DEEP SLEEP WAKE LOW BYTE REGISTER (BANKED F4Ah) R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-1 DSFLT — DSULP DSWDT DSRTC DSMCLR — DSPOR bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 DSFLT: Deep Sleep Fault Detected bit 1 = A Deep Sleep Fault was detected during Deep Sleep 0 = A Deep Sleep Fault was not detected during Deep Sleep bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 DSULP: Ultra Low-Power Wake-up Status bit 1 = An ultra low-power wake-up event occurred during Deep Sleep 0 = An ultra low-power wake-up event did not occur during Deep Sleep bit 4 DSWDT: Deep Sleep Watchdog Timer Time-out bit 1 = The Deep Sleep Watchdog Timer timed out during Deep Sleep 0 = The Deep Sleep Watchdog Timer did not time out during Deep Sleep bit 3 DSRTC: Real-Time Clock and Calendar Alarm bit 1 = The Real-Time Clock/Calendar triggered an alarm during Deep Sleep 0 = The Real-Time Clock /Calendar did not trigger an alarm during Deep Sleep bit 2 DSMCLR: MCLR Event bit 1 = The MCLR pin was asserted during Deep Sleep 0 = The MCLR pin was not asserted during Deep Sleep bit 1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 DSPOR: Power-on Reset Event bit 1 = The VDD supply POR circuit was active and a POR event was detected(1) 0 = The VDD supply POR circuit was not active, or was active, but did not detect a POR event Note 1: Unlike the other bits in this register, this bit can be set outside of Deep Sleep. DS39974A-page 60 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 4.7 Ultra Low-Power Wake-up The Ultra Low-Power Wake-up (ULPWU) on RA0 allows a slow falling voltage to generate an interrupt-on-change without excess current consumption. Follow these steps to use this feature: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Configure a remappable output pin to output the ULPOUT signal. Map an INTx interrupt-on-change input function to the same pin as used for the ULPOUT output function. Alternatively, in Step 1, configure ULPOUT to output onto a PORTB interrupt-on-change pin. Charge the capacitor on RA0 by configuring the RA0 pin to an output and setting it to ‘1’. Enable interrupt-on-change (PIE bit) for the corresponding pin selected in Step 2. Stop charging the capacitor by configuring RA0 as an input. Discharge the capacitor by setting the ULPEN and ULPSINK bits in the WDTCON register. Configure Sleep mode. Enter Sleep mode. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. When the voltage on RA0 drops below VIL, an interrupt will be generated, which will cause the device to wake-up and execute the next instruction. This feature provides a low-power technique for periodically waking up the device from Sleep mode. The time-out is dependent on the discharge time of the RC circuit on RA0. When the ULPWU module causes the device to wake-up from Sleep mode, the ULPLVL (WDTCON<5>) bit is set. When the ULPWU module causes the device to wake-up from Deep Sleep, the DSULP (DSWAKEL<5>) bit is set. Software can check these bits upon wake-up to determine the wake-up source. Also in Sleep mode, only the remappable output function, ULPWU, will output this bit value to an RPn pin for externally detecting wake-up events. See Example 4-1 for initializing the ULPWU module. Note: Preliminary For module related bit definitions, see the WDTCON register in Section 27.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)” and the DSWAKEL register (Register 4-6). DS39974A-page 61 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY EXAMPLE 4-1: ULTRA LOW-POWER WAKE-UP INITIALIZATION //********************************************************************************* //Configure a remappable output pin with interrupt capability //for ULPWU function (RP21 => RD4/INT1 in this example) //********************************************************************************* RPOR21 = 13;// ULPWU function mapped to RP21/RD4 RPINR1 = 21;// INT1 mapped to RP21 (RD4) //*************************** //Charge the capacitor on RA0 //*************************** TRISAbits.TRISA0 = 0; PORTAbits.RA0 = 1; for(i = 0; i < 10000; i++) Nop(); //********************************** //Stop Charging the capacitor on RA0 //********************************** TRISAbits.TRISA0 = 1; //***************************************** //Enable the Ultra Low Power Wakeup module //and allow capacitor discharge //***************************************** WDTCONbits.ULPEN = 1; WDTCONbits.ULPSINK = 1; //****************************************** //Enable Interrupt for ULPW //****************************************** //For Sleep //(assign the ULPOUT signal in the PPS module to a pin //which has also been assigned an interrupt capability, //such as INT1) INTCON3bits.INT1IF = 0; INTCON3bits.INT1IE = 1; //******************** //Configure Sleep Mode //******************** //For Sleep OSCCONbits.IDLEN = 0; //For Deep Sleep OSCCONbits.IDLEN = 0; // enable deep sleep DSCONHbits.DSEN = 1; // Note: must be set just before executing Sleep(); //**************** //Enter Sleep Mode //**************** Sleep(); // for sleep, execution will resume here // for deep sleep, execution will restart at reset vector (use WDTCONbits.DS to detect) DS39974A-page 62 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY A series resistor between RA0 and the external capacitor provides overcurrent protection for the RA0/AN0/C1INA/ULPWU/RP0 pin and can allow for software calibration of the time-out (see Figure 4-9). FIGURE 4-9: SERIAL RESISTOR R1 RA0 A timer can be used to measure the charge time and discharge time of the capacitor. The charge time can then be adjusted to provide the desired interrupt delay. This technique will compensate for the affects of temperature, voltage and component accuracy. The ULPWU peripheral can also be configured as a simple Programmable Low-Voltage Detect (LVD) or temperature sensor. For more information, refer to AN879, “Using the Microchip Ultra Low-Power Wake-up Module” application note (DS00879). TABLE 4-2: Peripheral Module Disable All peripheral modules (except for I/O ports) also have a second control bit that can disable their functionality. These bits, known as the Peripheral Module Disable (PMD) bits, are generically named “xxxMD” (using “xxx” as the mnemonic version of the module’s name). These bits are located in the PMDISx special function registers. In contrast to the module enable bits (generically named “xxxEN” and located in bit position seven of the control registers), the PMD bits must be set (= 1) to disable the modules. C1 Note: 4.8 While the PMD and module enable bits both disable a peripheral’s functionality, the PMD bit completely shuts down the peripheral, effectively powering down all circuits and removing all clock sources. This has the additional effect of making any of the module’s control and buffer registers, mapped in the SFR space, unavailable for operations. Essentially, the peripheral ceases to exist until the PMD bit is cleared. This differs from using the module enable bit, which allows the peripheral to be reconfigured and buffer registers preloaded, even when the peripheral’s operations are disabled. The PMD bits are most useful in highly power-sensitive applications. In these cases, the bits can be set before the main body of the application to remove peripherals that will not be needed at all. LOW-POWER MODE REGISTERS Register Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 PMDIS3 PMDIS2 CCP10MD CCP9MD CCP8MD CCP7MD CCP6MD CCP5MD — TMR8MD — TMR6MD TMR5MD CMP3MD PMDIS1 PSPMD(1) CTMUMD RTCCMD(2) TMR4MD TMR3MD TMR2MD PMDIS0 ECCP3MD ECCP2MD ECCP1MD UART2MD UART1MD SPI2MD Note 1: 2: Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR CCP4MD — 0000 000– CMP2MD CMP1MD –0–0 0000 TMR1MD — 0000 000– SP11MD ADCMD 0000 0000 Bit 1 Not implemented on 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). To prevent accidental RTCC changes, the RTCCMD bit is normally locked. Use the following unlock sequence (with interrupts disabled) to successfully modify the RTCCMD bit: 1. Write 55h to EECON2. 2. Write 0AAh to EECON2. 3. Immediately write the modified RTCCMD setting to PMDIS1. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 63 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 64 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 5.0 RESET The PIC18F47J13 family of devices differentiates among various kinds of Reset: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) Power-on Reset (POR) MCLR Reset during normal operation MCLR Reset during power-managed modes Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset (during execution) Configuration Mismatch (CM) Brown-out Reset (BOR) RESET Instruction Stack Full Reset Stack Underflow Reset Deep Sleep Reset This section discusses Resets generated by MCLR, POR and BOR, and covers the operation of the various start-up timers. FIGURE 5-1: For information on WDT Resets, see Section 27.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)”. For Stack Reset events, see Section 6.1.4.4 “Stack Full and Underflow Resets” and for Deep Sleep mode, see Section 4.6 “Deep Sleep Mode”. Figure 5-1 provides a simplified block diagram of the on-chip Reset circuit. 5.1 RCON Register Device Reset events are tracked through the RCON register (Register 5-1). The lower five bits of the register indicate that a specific Reset event has occurred. In most cases, these bits can only be set by the event and must be cleared by the application after the event. The state of these flag bits, taken together, can be read to indicate the type of Reset that just occurred. This is described in more detail in Section 5.7 “Reset State of Registers”. The RCON register also has a control bit for setting interrupt priority (IPEN). Interrupt priority is discussed in Section 9.0 “Interrupts”. SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT RESET Instruction Configuration Word Mismatch Stack Pointer Stack Full/Underflow Reset External Reset MCLR ( )_IDLE Deep Sleep Reset Sleep WDT Time-out VDD Rise Detect POR Pulse VDD Brown-out Reset(1) VDDCORE S Brown-out Reset(2) PWRT PWRT R INTRC Q Chip_Reset F: 4-Bit Ripple Counter LF: 11-Bit Ripple Counter Note 1: The VDD monitoring BOR circuit can be enabled or disabled on “LF” devices based on the CONFIG3L<DSBOREN> Configuration bit. On “F” devices, the VDD monitoring BOR circuit is only enabled during Deep Sleep mode by CONFIG3L<DSBOREN>. 2: The VDDCORE monitoring BOR circuit is only implemented on “F” devices. It is always used, except while in Deep Sleep mode. The VDDCORE monitoring BOR circuit has a trip point threshold of VBOR (parameter D005). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 65 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 5-1: RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS FD0h) R/W-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R-1 R-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit 1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts 0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts (PIC16CXXX Compatibility mode) bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 CM: Configuration Mismatch Flag bit 1 = A Configuration Mismatch Reset has not occurred 0 = A Configuration Mismatch Reset has occurred (must be set in software after a Configuration Mismatch Reset occurs) bit 4 RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit 1 = The RESET instruction was not executed (set by firmware only) 0 = The RESET instruction was executed causing a device Reset (must be set in software after a Brown-out Reset occurs) bit 3 TO: Watchdog Time-out Flag bit 1 = Set by power-up, CLRWDT instruction or SLEEP instruction 0 = A WDT time-out occurred bit 2 PD: Power-Down Detection Flag bit 1 = Set by power-up or by the CLRWDT instruction 0 = Set by execution of the SLEEP instruction bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit 1 = A Power-on Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only) 0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs) bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit 1 = A Brown-out Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only) 0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Brown-out Reset occurs) Note 1: It is recommended that the POR bit be set after a Power-on Reset has been detected, so that subsequent Power-on Resets may be detected. 2: If the on-chip voltage regulator is disabled, BOR remains ‘0’ at all times. See Section 5.4.1 “Detecting BOR” for more information. 3: Brown-out Reset is said to have occurred when BOR is ‘0’ and POR is ‘1’ (assuming that POR was set to ‘1’ by software immediately after a Power-on Reset). DS39974A-page 66 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 5.2 Master Clear (MCLR) The Master Clear Reset (MCLR) pin provides a method for triggering a hard external Reset of the device. A Reset is generated by holding the pin low. PIC18 extended microcontroller devices have a noise filter in the MCLR Reset path, which detects and ignores small pulses. The MCLR pin is not driven low by any internal Resets, including the WDT. 5.3 Power-on Reset (POR) A POR condition is generated on-chip whenever VDD rises above a certain threshold. This allows the device to start in the initialized state when VDD is adequate for operation. To take advantage of the POR circuitry, tie the MCLR pin through a resistor (1 k to 10 k) to VDD. This will eliminate external RC components usually needed to create a POR delay. When the device starts normal operation (i.e., exits the Reset condition), device operating parameters (voltage, frequency, temperature, etc.) must be met to ensure operation. If these conditions are not met, the device must be held in Reset until the operating conditions are met. POR events are captured by the POR bit (RCON<1>). The state of the bit is set to ‘0’ whenever a Power-on Reset occurs; it does not change for any other Reset event. POR is not reset to ‘1’ by any hardware event. To capture multiple events, the user manually resets the bit to ‘1’ in software following any POR. 5.4 On “LF” devices (ex: PIC18LF47J13), the VDDCORE BOR circuit is always disabled because the internal core voltage regulator is disabled. Instead of monitoring VDDCORE, PIC18LF devices in this family can still use the VDD BOR circuit to monitor VDD excursions below the VDSBOR threshold. The VDD BOR circuit can be disabled by setting the DSBOREN bit = 0. The VDD BOR circuit is enabled when DSBOREN = 1 on “LF” devices, or on “F” devices while in Deep Sleep with DSBOREN = 1. When enabled, the VDD BOR circuit is extremely low power (typ. 200nA) during normal operation above ~2.3V on VDD. If VDD drops below this DSBOR arming level when the VDD BOR circuit is enabled, the device may begin to consume additional current (typ. 50 A) as internal features of the circuit power-up. The higher current is necessary to achieve more accurate sensing of the VDD level. However, the device will not enter Reset until VDD falls below the VDSBOR threshold. 5.4.1 Brown-out Reset (BOR) The “F” devices in the PIC18F47J13 family incorporate two types of BOR circuits: one which monitors VDDCORE and one which monitors VDD. Only one BOR circuit can be active at a time. When in normal Run mode, Idle or normal Sleep modes, the BOR circuit that monitors VDDCORE is active and will cause the device to be held in BOR if VDDCORE drops below VBOR (parameter D005). Once VDDCORE rises back above VBOR, the device will be held in Reset until the expiration of the Power-up Timer, with period, TPWRT (parameter 33). During Deep Sleep operation, the on-chip core voltage regulator is disabled and VDDCORE is allowed to drop to VSS. If the Deep Sleep BOR circuit is enabled by the DSBOREN bit (CONFIG3L<2> = 1), it will monitor VDD. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. If VDD drops below the VDSBOR threshold, the device will be held in a Reset state similar to POR. All registers will be set back to their POR Reset values and the contents of the DSGPR0 and DSGPR1 holding registers will be lost. Additionally, if any I/O pins had been configured as outputs during Deep Sleep, these pins will be tri-stated and the device will no longer be held in Deep Sleep. Once the VDD voltage recovers back above the VDSBOR threshold, and once the core voltage regulator achieves a VDDCORE voltage above VBOR, the device will begin executing code again normally, but the DS bit in the WDTCON register will not be set. The device behavior will be similar to hard cycling all power to the device. DETECTING BOR The BOR bit always resets to ‘0’ on any VDDCORE Brown-out Reset or Power-on Reset event. This makes it difficult to determine if a Brown-out Reset event has occurred just by reading the state of BOR alone. A more reliable method is to simultaneously check the state of both POR and BOR. This assumes that the POR bit is reset to ‘1’ in software immediately after any Power-on Reset event. If BOR is ‘0’ while POR is ‘1’, it can be reliably assumed that a Brown-out Reset event has occurred. If the voltage regulator is disabled (LF device), the VDDCORE BOR functionality is disabled. In this case, the BOR bit cannot be used to determine a Brown-out Reset event. The BOR bit is still cleared by a Power-on Reset event. Preliminary DS39974A-page 67 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 5.5 Configuration Mismatch (CM) 5.6 The Configuration Mismatch (CM) Reset is designed to detect, and attempt to recover from, random memory corrupting events. These include Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) events, which can cause widespread single bit changes throughout the device and result in catastrophic failure. In PIC18FXXJ Flash devices, the device Configuration registers (located in the configuration memory space) are continuously monitored during operation by comparing their values to complimentary shadow registers. If a mismatch is detected between the two sets of registers, a CM Reset automatically occurs. These events are captured by the CM bit (RCON<5>). The state of the bit is set to ‘0’ whenever a CM event occurs; it does not change for any other Reset event. A CM Reset behaves similarly to MCLR, RESET instruction, WDT time-out or Stack Event Resets. As with all hard and power Reset events, the device Configuration Words are reloaded from the Flash Configuration Words in program memory as the device restarts. FIGURE 5-2: Power-up Timer (PWRT) PIC18F47J13 family devices incorporate an on-chip PWRT to help regulate the POR process. The PWRT is always enabled. The main function is to ensure that the device voltage is stable before code is executed. The Power-up Timer (PWRT) of the PIC18F47J13 family devices is a counter which uses the INTRC source as the clock input. While the PWRT is counting, the device is held in Reset. The power-up time delay depends on the INTRC clock and will vary from chip-to-chip due to temperature and process variation. See DC parameter 33 (TPWRT) for details. 5.6.1 TIME-OUT SEQUENCE The PWRT time-out is invoked after the POR pulse has cleared. The total time-out will vary based on the status of the PWRT. Figure 5-2, Figure 5-3, Figure 5-4 and Figure 5-5 all depict time-out sequences on power-up with the PWRT. Since the time-outs occur from the POR pulse, if MCLR is kept low long enough, the PWRT will expire. Bringing MCLR high will begin execution immediately if a clock source is available (Figure 5-4). This is useful for testing purposes or to synchronize more than one PIC18F device operating in parallel. TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE < TPWRT) VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET DS39974A-page 68 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 5-3: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 1 VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 2 FIGURE 5-4: VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET FIGURE 5-5: SLOW RISE TIME (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE > TPWRT) 3.3V VDD 0V 1V MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 69 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 5.7 TO, PD, POR and BOR) are set or cleared differently in different Reset situations, as indicated in Table 5-1. These bits are used in software to determine the nature of the Reset. Reset State of Registers Most registers are unaffected by a Reset. Their status is unknown on POR and unchanged by all other Resets. The other registers are forced to a “Reset state” depending on the type of Reset that occurred. Table 5-2 describes the Reset states for all of the Special Function Registers. These are categorized by POR and BOR, MCLR and WDT Resets and WDT wake-ups. Most registers are not affected by a WDT wake-up, since this is viewed as the resumption of normal operation. Status bits from the RCON register (CM, RI, TABLE 5-1: STATUS BITS, THEIR SIGNIFICANCE AND THE INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR RCON REGISTER Condition Program Counter(1) RCON Register STKPTR Register CM RI TO PD POR BOR STKFUL STKUNF Power-on Reset 0000h 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 RESET instruction 0000h u 0 u u u u u u Brown-out Reset 0000h 1 1 1 1 u 0 u u Configuration Mismatch Reset 0000h 0 u u u u u u u MCLR Reset during power-managed Run modes 0000h u u 1 u u u u u MCLR Reset during power-managed Idle modes and Sleep mode 0000h u u 1 0 u u u u MCLR Reset during full-power execution 0000h u u u u u u u u Stack Full Reset (STVREN = 1) 0000h u u u u u u 1 u Stack Underflow Reset (STVREN = 1) 0000h u u u u u u u 1 Stack Underflow Error (not an actual Reset, STVREN = 0) 0000h u u u u u u u 1 WDT time-out during full-power or power-managed Run modes 0000h u u 0 u u u u u WDT time-out during power-managed Idle or Sleep modes PC + 2 u u 0 0 u u u u Interrupt exit from power-managed modes PC + 2 u u u 0 u u u u Legend: u = unchanged Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEH or GIEL bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). DS39974A-page 70 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 5-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, Wake From Deep Sleep MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets CM Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt TOSU PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu(1) TOSH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu(1) TOSL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu(1) STKPTR PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 00-0 0000 uu-0 0000 uu-u uuuu(1) PCLATU PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu PCLATH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PCL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 PC + 2(2) TBLPTRU PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu TBLPTRH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TBLPTRL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TABLAT PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PRODH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PRODL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu INTCON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 000x 0000 000u uuuu uuuu(3) INTCON2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu(3) INTCON3 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1100 0000 1100 0000 uuuu uuuu(3) INDF0 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A POSTINC0 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A POSTDEC0 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A N/A PREINC0 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A PLUSW0 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A FSR0H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu FSR0L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu WREG PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu INDF1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A POSTINC1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A POSTDEC1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A PREINC1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A PLUSW1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A FSR1H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu FSR1L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu BSR PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 5-1 for the Reset value for a specific condition. 5: Not implemented on PIC18F2XJ13 devices. 6: Not implemented on “LF” devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 71 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 5-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, Wake From Deep Sleep MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets CM Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt INDF2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A POSTINC2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A POSTDEC2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A PREINC2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A PLUSW2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 N/A N/A N/A FSR2H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu FSR2L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu STATUS PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---x xxxx ---u uuuu ---u uuuu TMR0H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TMR0L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T0CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu OSCCON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0110 q100 0110 q100 0110 q1uu CM1CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0001 1111 0001 1111 uuuu uuuu CM2CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0001 1111 0001 1111 uuuu uuuu RCON(4) PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0-11 11qq 0-qq qquu u-qq qquu TMR1H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR1L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T1CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PR2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu T2CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu SSP1BUF PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu SSP1ADD PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP1MSK PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu SSP1STAT PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP1CON1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP1CON2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ADRESH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ADRESL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ADCON0 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ADCON1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu WDTCON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1qq0 q000 1qq0 0000 uqqu uuuu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 5-1 for the Reset value for a specific condition. 5: Not implemented on PIC18F2XJ13 devices. 6: Not implemented on “LF” devices. DS39974A-page 72 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 5-2: Register PSTR1CON INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, Wake From Deep Sleep MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets CM Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt uu-u uuuu PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 00-0 0001 00-0 0001 ECCP1AS PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ECCP1DEL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CCPR1H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR1L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP1CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PSTR2CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 00-0 0001 00-0 0001 uu-u uuuu ECCP2AS PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ECCP2DEL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CCPR2H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR2L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP2CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CTMUCONH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0-00 0000 0-00 0000 u-uu uuuu CTMUCONL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 00xx 0000 00xx uuuu uuuu CTMUICON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SPBRG1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu RCREG1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXREG1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXSTA1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0010 0000 0010 uuuu uuuu RCSTA1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SPBRG2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu RCREG2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXREG2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXSTA2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0010 0000 0010 uuuu uuuu EECON2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- ---- EECON1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 --00 x00- --00 q00- --00 u00- IPR3 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu PIR3 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu(3) PIE3 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu IPR2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 111- 1111 111- 1111 uuu- uuuu PIR2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 000- 0000 000- 0000 uuu- uuuu(3) PIE2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 000- 0000 000- 0000 uuu- uuuu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 5-1 for the Reset value for a specific condition. 5: Not implemented on PIC18F2XJ13 devices. 6: Not implemented on “LF” devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 73 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 5-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, Wake From Deep Sleep MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets CM Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt IPR1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu PIR1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu(3) PIE1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu RCSTA2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu OSCTUNE PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu T1GCON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0x00 0000 0x00 uuuu uxuu T3GCON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0x00 uuuu uxuu uuuu uxuu (5) TRISE — PIC18F4XJ13 00-- -111 00-- -111 uu-- -uuu TRISD(5) — PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISC PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISB PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISA PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 111- 1111 111- 1111 uuu- uuuu PIE5 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu IPR4 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu PIR4 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PIE4 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu — PIC18F4XJ13 ---- -xxx ---- -uuu ---- -uuu — PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu LATE(5) LATD(5) LATC LATB PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu LATA PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxx- xxxx uuu- uuuu uuu- uuuu DMACON1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu OSCCON2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 -0-1 01-- -0-1 u1-- -u-u uu-- DMACON2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu HLVDCON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PORTE(5) — PIC18F4XJ13 ---- -xxx ---- -uuu ---- -uuu PORTD(5) — PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTC PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTB PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTA PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxx- xxxx uuu- uuuu uuu- uuuu SPBRGH1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu BAUDCON1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0100 0-00 0100 0-00 uuuu u-uu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 5-1 for the Reset value for a specific condition. 5: Not implemented on PIC18F2XJ13 devices. 6: Not implemented on “LF” devices. DS39974A-page 74 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 5-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, Wake From Deep Sleep MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets CM Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt SPBRGH2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu BAUDCON2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0100 0-00 0100 0-00 uuuu u-uu TMR3H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR3L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T3CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR4 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PR4 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu T4CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu SSP2BUF PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu SSP2ADD PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP2MSK PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu SSP2STAT PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP2CON1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu SSP2CON2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CMSTAT PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- -111 ---- -111 ---- -uuu PMADDRH — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDOUT1H(5) — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMADDRL — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDOUT1L — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDIN1H — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDIN1L — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXADDRL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu TXADDRH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu RXADDRL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu RXADDRH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu DMABCL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu DMABCH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --uu PMCONH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0--0 0000 0--0 0000 u--u uuuu PMCONL — PIC18F4XJ13 000- 0000 000- 0000 uuu- uuuu PMMODEH — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMMODEL — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDOUT2H — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu (5) Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 5-1 for the Reset value for a specific condition. 5: Not implemented on PIC18F2XJ13 devices. 6: Not implemented on “LF” devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 75 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 5-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, Wake From Deep Sleep MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets CM Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt PMDOUT2L — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDIN2H — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDIN2L — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMEH — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMEL — PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMSTATH — PIC18F4XJ13 00-- 0000 00-- 0000 uu-- uuuu PMSTATL — PIC18F4XJ13 10-- 1111 10-- 1111 uu-- uuuu CVRCON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CCPTMRS0 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPTMRS1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 00-0 -000 uu-u -uuu uu-u -uuu CCPTMRS2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 -000 ---u -uuu ---u -uuu (6) DSGPR1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu DSGPR0(6) PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu (6) DSCONH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0--- -000 0--- -uuu u--- -uuu DSCONL(6) PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- -000 ---- -u00 ---- -uuu DSWAKEH(6) PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- ---0 ---- ---0 ---- ---u DSWAKEL(6) PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0-00 00-1 0-00 00-0 u-uu uu-u ANCON1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 00-0 0000 00-0 0000 uu-u uuuu ANCON0 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ALRMCFG PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ALRMRPT PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ALRMVALH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ALRMVALL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ODCON1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ODCON2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- 0000 ---- 0000 ---- uuuu ODCON3 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0--- --00 0--- --00 u--- --uu RTCCFG PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0-00 0000 u-uu uuuu u-uu uuuu RTCCAL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu REFOCON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0-00 0000 0-00 0000 u-uu uuuu PADCFG1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- -000 ---- -000 ---- -uuu RTCVALH PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0xxx xxxx 0uuu uuuu 0uuu uuuu RTCVALL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0xxx xxxx 0uuu uuuu 0uuu uuuu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 5-1 for the Reset value for a specific condition. 5: Not implemented on PIC18F2XJ13 devices. 6: Not implemented on “LF” devices. DS39974A-page 76 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 5-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, Wake From Deep Sleep MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets CM Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt CM3CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0001 1111 0001 1111 uuuu uuuu TMR5H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR5L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T5CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T5GCON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0x00 uuuu uquu uuuu uquu TMR6 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PR6 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu T6CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu TMR8 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PR8 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu T8CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 -000 0000 -000 0000 -uuu uuuu PSTR3CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 00-0 0001 00-0 0001 uu-u uuuu ECCP3AS PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ECCP3DEL PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CCPR3H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR3L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP3CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CCPR4H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR4L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP4CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu CCPR5H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR5L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP5CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu CCPR6H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR6L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP6CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu CCPR7H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR7L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP7CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 --00 0000 --00 0000 --00 0000 CCPR8H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR8L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP8CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 5-1 for the Reset value for a specific condition. 5: Not implemented on PIC18F2XJ13 devices. 6: Not implemented on “LF” devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 77 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 5-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, Wake From Deep Sleep MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets CM Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu Applicable Devices CCPR9H PIC18F2XJ13 CCPR9L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP9CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu CCPR10H PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCPR10L PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu CCP10CON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 --00 0000 --00 0000 --uu uuuu RPINR24 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR23 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR22 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR21 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR17 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR16 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR14 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR13 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR12 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR9 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR8 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR7 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR15 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR6 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR4 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR3 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPINR1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---1 1111 ---1 1111 ---u uuuu RPOR24 — PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR23 — PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR22 — PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR21 — PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR20 — PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR19 — PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR18 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR17 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 5-1 for the Reset value for a specific condition. 5: Not implemented on PIC18F2XJ13 devices. 6: Not implemented on “LF” devices. DS39974A-page 78 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 5-2: Register INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Applicable Devices Power-on Reset, Brown-out Reset, Wake From Deep Sleep MCLR Resets WDT Reset RESET Instruction Stack Resets CM Resets Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt RPOR16 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR15 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR14 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR13 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR12 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR11 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR10 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR9 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR8 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR7 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR6 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR5 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR4 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR3 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu RPOR0 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu PPSCON PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- ---0 ---- ---0 ---- ---u PMDIS3 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PMDIS2 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 -0-0 0000 -0-0 0000 -u-u uuuu PMDIS1 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 000- 0000 000- uuuu uuu- PMDIS0 PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu ADCTRIG PIC18F2XJ13 PIC18F4XJ13 ---- --00 ---- --00 ---- --uu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition. Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the hardware stack. 2: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h). 3: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up). 4: See Table 5-1 for the Reset value for a specific condition. 5: Not implemented on PIC18F2XJ13 devices. 6: Not implemented on “LF” devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 79 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 80 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION 6.1 There are two types of memory in PIC18 Flash microcontrollers: • Program Memory • Data RAM As Harvard architecture devices, the data and program memories use separate busses; this allows for concurrent access of the two memory spaces. Section 7.0 “Flash Program Memory” provides additional information on the operation of the Flash program memory. FIGURE 6-1: Program Memory Organization PIC18 microcontrollers implement a 21-bit program counter, which is capable of addressing a 2-Mbyte program memory space. Accessing a location between the upper boundary of the physically implemented memory and the 2-Mbyte address returns all ‘0’s (a NOP instruction). The PIC18F47J13 family offers a range of on-chip Flash program memory sizes, from 64 Kbytes (up to 32,768 single-word instructions) to 128 Kbytes (65,536 single-word instructions). Figure 6-1 provides the program memory maps for individual family devices. MEMORY MAPS FOR PIC18F47J13 FAMILY DEVICES PC<20:0> CALL, CALLW, RCALL, RETURN, RETFIE, RETLW, ADDULNK, SUBULNK 21 Stack Level 1 Stack Level 31 PIC18FX7J13 On-Chip Memory Config. Words 000000h 00FFFFh Config. Words Unimplemented Unimplemented Read as ‘0’ Read as ‘0’ 01FFFFh User Memory Space PIC18FX6J13 On-Chip Memory 1FFFFFF Note: Sizes of memory areas are not to scale. Sizes of program memory areas are enhanced to show detail. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 81 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.1.1 6.1.2 HARD MEMORY VECTORS FLASH CONFIGURATION WORDS All PIC18 devices have a total of three hard-coded return vectors in their program memory space. The Reset vector address is the default value to which the program counter returns on all device Resets; it is located at 0000h. Because PIC18F47J13 family devices do not have persistent configuration memory, the top four words of on-chip program memory are reserved for configuration information. On Reset, the configuration information is copied into the Configuration registers. PIC18 devices also have two interrupt vector addresses for handling high-priority and low-priority interrupts. The high-priority interrupt vector is located at 0008h and the low-priority interrupt vector at 0018h. Figure 6-2 provides their locations in relation to the program memory map. The Configuration Words are stored in their program memory location in numerical order, starting with the lower byte of CONFIG1 at the lowest address and ending with the upper byte of CONFIG4. FIGURE 6-2: HARD VECTOR AND CONFIGURATION WORD LOCATIONS FOR PIC18F47J13 FAMILY DEVICES Reset Vector 0000h High-Priority Interrupt Vector 0008h Low-Priority Interrupt Vector 0018h Table 6-1 provides the actual addresses of the Flash Configuration Word for devices in the PIC18F47J13 family. Figure 6-2 displays their location in the memory map with other memory vectors. Additional details on the device Configuration Words are provided in Section 27.1 “Configuration Bits”. TABLE 6-1: Device PIC18F26J13 PIC18F46J13 On-Chip Program Memory Flash Configuration Words PIC18F27J13 PIC18F47J13 FLASH CONFIGURATION WORD FOR PIC18F47J13 FAMILY DEVICES Program Memory (Kbytes) Configuration Word Addresses 64 FFF8h to FFFFh 128 1FFF8h to 1FFFFh (Top of Memory-7) (Top of Memory) Read as ‘0’ 1FFFFFh Legend: (Top of Memory) represents upper boundary of on-chip program memory space (see Figure 6-1 for device-specific values). Shaded area represents unimplemented memory. Areas are not shown to scale. DS39974A-page 82 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.1.3 PROGRAM COUNTER The Program Counter (PC) specifies the address of the instruction to fetch for execution. The PC is 21 bits wide and is contained in three separate 8-bit registers. The low byte, known as the PCL register, is both readable and writable. The high byte, or PCH register, contains the PC<15:8> bits; it is not directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCH register are performed through the PCLATH register. The upper byte is called PCU. This register contains the PC<20:16> bits; it is also not directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCU register are performed through the PCLATU register. The contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are transferred to the program counter by any operation that writes to PCL. Similarly, the upper 2 bytes of the program counter are transferred to PCLATH and PCLATU by an operation that reads PCL. This is useful for computed offsets to the PC (see Section 6.1.6.1 “Computed GOTO”). The PC addresses bytes in the program memory. To prevent the PC from becoming misaligned with word instructions, the Least Significant bit (LSb) of PCL is fixed to a value of ‘0’. The PC increments by two to address sequential instructions in the program memory. The CALL, RCALL, GOTO and program branch instructions write to the program counter directly. For these instructions, the contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are not transferred to the program counter. 6.1.4 RETURN ADDRESS STACK The return address stack allows any combination of up to 31 program calls and interrupts to occur. The PC is pushed onto the stack when a CALL or RCALL instruction is executed, or an interrupt is Acknowledged. The PC value is pulled off the stack on a RETURN, RETLW or a RETFIE instruction (and on ADDULNK and SUBULNK instructions if the extended instruction set is enabled). PCLATU and PCLATH are not affected by any of the RETURN or CALL instructions. FIGURE 6-3: The stack operates as a 31-word by 21-bit RAM and a 5-bit Stack Pointer (SP), STKPTR. The stack space is not part of either program or data space. The Stack Pointer is readable and writable and the address on the top of the stack is readable and writable through the Top-of-Stack Special Function Registers (SFRs). Data can also be pushed to, or popped from, the stack using these registers. A CALL type instruction causes a push onto the stack. The Stack Pointer is first incremented and the location pointed to by the Stack Pointer is written with the contents of the PC (already pointing to the instruction following the CALL). A RETURN type instruction causes a pop from the stack. The contents of the location pointed to by the STKPTR are transferred to the PC and then the Stack Pointer is decremented. The Stack Pointer is initialized to ‘00000’ after all Resets. There is no RAM associated with the location corresponding to a Stack Pointer value of ‘00000’; this is only a Reset value. Status bits indicate if the stack is full, has overflowed or has underflowed. 6.1.4.1 Top-of-Stack Access Only the top of the return address stack (TOS) is readable and writable. A set of three registers, TOSU:TOSH:TOSL, holds the contents of the stack location pointed to by the STKPTR register (Figure 6-3). This allows users to implement a software stack if necessary. After a CALL, RCALL or interrupt (and ADDULNK and SUBULNK instructions if the extended instruction set is enabled), the software can read the pushed value by reading the TOSU:TOSH:TOSL registers. These values can be placed on a user-defined software stack. At return time, the software can return these values to TOSU:TOSH:TOSL and do a return. The user must disable the global interrupt enable bits while accessing the stack to prevent inadvertent stack corruption. RETURN ADDRESS STACK AND ASSOCIATED REGISTERS Top-of-Stack Registers TOSU 00h TOSH 1Ah Return Address Stack<20:0> 11111 11110 11101 TOSL 34h Top-of-Stack 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 001A34h 000D58h Stack Pointer STKPTR<4:0> 00010 00011 00010 00001 00000 Preliminary DS39974A-page 83 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.1.4.2 Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) The STKPTR register (Register 6-1) contains the Stack Pointer value, the STKFUL (Stack Full) and the STKUNF (Stack Underflow) status bits. The value of the Stack Pointer can be 0 through 31. The Stack Pointer increments before values are pushed onto the stack and decrements after values are popped off of the stack. On Reset, the Stack Pointer value will be zero. The user may read and write the Stack Pointer value. This feature can be used by a Real-Time Operating System (RTOS) for return stack maintenance. After the PC is pushed onto the stack 31 times (without popping any values off the stack), the STKFUL bit is set. The STKFUL bit is cleared by software or by a Power-on Reset (POR). The action that takes place when the stack becomes full depends on the state of the Stack Overflow Reset Enable (STVREN) Configuration bit. Refer to Section 27.1 “Configuration Bits” for the device Configuration bits’ description. If STVREN is set (default), the 31st push will push the (PC + 2) value onto the stack, set the STKFUL bit and reset the device. The STKFUL bit will remain set and the Stack Pointer will be set to zero. If STVREN is cleared, the STKFUL bit will be set on the 31st push and the Stack Pointer will increment to 31. Any additional pushes will not overwrite the 31st push and the STKPTR will remain at 31. REGISTER 6-1: When the stack has been popped enough times to unload the stack, the next pop will return zero to the PC and set the STKUNF bit, while the Stack Pointer remains at zero. The STKUNF bit will remain set until cleared by software or until a POR occurs. Note: 6.1.4.3 Returning a value of zero to the PC on an underflow has the effect of vectoring the program to the Reset vector, where the stack conditions can be verified and appropriate actions can be taken. This is not the same as a Reset, as the contents of the SFRs are not affected. PUSH and POP Instructions Since the Top-of-Stack (TOS) is readable and writable, the ability to push values onto the stack and pull values off of the stack, without disturbing normal program execution, is necessary. The PIC18 instruction set includes two instructions, PUSH and POP, that permit the TOS to be manipulated under software control. TOSU, TOSH and TOSL can be modified to place data or a return address on the stack. The PUSH instruction places the current PC value onto the stack. This increments the Stack Pointer and loads the current PC value onto the stack. The POP instruction discards the current TOS by decrementing the Stack Pointer. The previous value pushed onto the stack then becomes the TOS value. STKPTR: STACK POINTER REGISTER (ACCESS FFCh) R/C-0 R/C-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 STKFUL(1) STKUNF(1) — SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: C = Clearable bit R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 STKFUL: Stack Full Flag bit(1) 1 = Stack became full or overflowed 0 = Stack has not become full or overflowed bit 6 STKUNF: Stack Underflow Flag bit(1) 1 = Stack underflow occurred 0 = Stack underflow did not occur bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 SP<4:0>: Stack Pointer Location bits Note 1: x = Bit is unknown Bits 7 and 6 are cleared by user software or by a POR. DS39974A-page 84 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.1.4.4 6.1.6 Stack Full and Underflow Resets Device Resets on stack overflow and stack underflow conditions are enabled by setting the STVREN bit in Configuration Register 1L. When STVREN is set, a full or underflow condition sets the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit and then causes a device Reset. When STVREN is cleared, a full or underflow condition sets the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit, but does not cause a device Reset. The STKFUL or STKUNF bits are cleared by the user software or a POR. 6.1.5 FAST REGISTER STACK (FRS) LOOK-UP TABLES IN PROGRAM MEMORY There may be programming situations that require the creation of data structures or look-up tables in program memory. For PIC18 devices, look-up tables can be implemented in two ways: • Computed GOTO • Table Reads 6.1.6.1 Computed GOTO A computed GOTO is accomplished by adding an offset to the PC. An example is shown in Example 6-2. A Fast Register Stack (FRS) is provided for the STATUS, WREG and BSR registers to provide a “fast return” option for interrupts. This stack is only one level deep and is neither readable nor writable. It is loaded with the current value of the corresponding register when the processor vectors for an interrupt. All interrupt sources push values into the Stack registers. The values in the registers are then loaded back into the working registers if the RETFIE, FAST instruction is used to return from the interrupt. A look-up table can be formed with an ADDWF PCL instruction and a group of RETLW nn instructions. The W register is loaded with an offset into the table before executing a call to that table. The first instruction of the called routine is the ADDWF PCL instruction. The next executed instruction will be one of the RETLW nn instructions that returns the value, ‘nn’, to the calling function. If both low-priority and high-priority interrupts are enabled, the Stack registers cannot be used reliably to return from low-priority interrupts. If a high-priority interrupt occurs while servicing a low-priority interrupt, the Stack register values stored by the low-priority interrupt will be overwritten. In these cases, users must save the key registers in software during a low-priority interrupt. In this method, only one byte may be stored in each instruction location, but room on the return address stack is required. If interrupt priority is not used, all interrupts may use the FRS for returns from interrupt. If no interrupts are used, the FRS can be used to restore the STATUS, WREG and BSR registers at the end of a subroutine call. To use the Fast Register Stack for a subroutine call, a CALL label, FAST instruction must be executed to save the STATUS, WREG and BSR registers to the Fast Register Stack. A RETURN, FAST instruction is then executed to restore these registers from the FRS. Example 6-1 provides a source code example that uses the FRS during a subroutine call and return. EXAMPLE 6-1: CALL SUB1, FAST FAST REGISTER STACK CODE EXAMPLE ;STATUS, WREG, BSR ;SAVED IN FAST REGISTER ;STACK · · SUB1 · · RETURN FAST ;RESTORE VALUES SAVED ;IN FAST REGISTER STACK 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. The offset value (in WREG) specifies the number of bytes that the PC should advance and should be multiples of 2 (LSb = 0). EXAMPLE 6-2: ORG TABLE 6.1.6.2 MOVF CALL nn00h ADDWF RETLW RETLW RETLW . . . COMPUTED GOTO USING AN OFFSET VALUE OFFSET, W TABLE PCL nnh nnh nnh Table Reads A better method of storing data in program memory allows two bytes to be stored in each instruction location. Look-up table data may be stored two bytes per program word while programming. The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) specifies the byte address and the Table Latch (TABLAT) contains the data that is read from the program memory. Data is transferred from program memory, one byte at a time. Table read operation is discussed further Section 7.1 “Table Reads and Table Writes”. Preliminary in DS39974A-page 85 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.2 6.2.2 PIC18 Instruction Cycle 6.2.1 An “Instruction Cycle” consists of four Q cycles, Q1 through Q4. The instruction fetch and execute are pipelined in such a manner that a fetch takes one instruction cycle, while the decode and execute take another instruction cycle. However, due to the pipelining, each instruction effectively executes in one cycle. If an instruction causes the PC to change (e.g., GOTO), then two cycles are required to complete the instruction (Example 6-3). CLOCKING SCHEME The microcontroller clock input, whether from an internal or external source, is internally divided by four to generate four non-overlapping quadrature clocks (Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4). Internally, the PC is incremented on every Q1; the instruction is fetched from the program memory and latched into the Instruction Register (IR) during Q4. The instruction is decoded and executed during the following Q1 through Q4. Figure 6-4 illustrates the clocks and instruction execution flow. FIGURE 6-4: INSTRUCTION FLOW/PIPELINING A fetch cycle begins with the PC incrementing in Q1. In the execution cycle, the fetched instruction is latched into the IR in cycle, Q1. This instruction is then decoded and executed during the Q2, Q3 and Q4 cycles. Data memory is read during Q2 (operand read) and written during Q4 (destination write). CLOCK/INSTRUCTION CYCLE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 Q1 Q2 Internal Phase Clock Q3 Q4 PC PC PC + 2 PC + 4 OSC2/CLKO (RC mode) Execute INST (PC – 2) Fetch INST (PC) EXAMPLE 6-3: 1. MOVLW 55h TCY0 TCY1 Fetch 1 Execute 1 3. BRA SUB_1 Fetch 2 TCY2 TCY3 TCY4 TCY5 Execute 2 Fetch 3 Execute 3 Fetch 4 LATA, BIT3 (Forced NOP) Flush (NOP) Fetch SUB_1 Execute SUB_1 5. Instruction @ address SUB_1 Note: Execute INST (PC + 2) Fetch INST (PC + 4) INSTRUCTION PIPELINE FLOW 2. MOVWF LATB 4. BSF Execute INST (PC) Fetch INST (PC + 2) All instructions are single-cycle, except for any program branches. These take two cycles since the fetch instruction is “flushed” from the pipeline while the new instruction is being fetched and then executed. DS39974A-page 86 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.2.3 INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY The program memory is addressed in bytes. Instructions are stored as 2 bytes or 4 bytes in program memory. The Least Significant Byte (LSB) of an instruction word is always stored in a program memory location with an even address (LSB = 0). To maintain alignment with instruction boundaries, the PC increments in steps of 2 and the LSB will always read ‘0’ (see Section 6.1.3 “Program Counter”). Figure 6-5 provides an example of how instruction words are stored in the program memory. FIGURE 6-5: The CALL and GOTO instructions have the absolute program memory address embedded into the instruction. Since instructions are always stored on word boundaries, the data contained in the instruction is a word address. The word address is written to PC<20:1>, which accesses the desired byte address in program memory. Instruction #2 in Figure 6-5 displays how the instruction, GOTO 0006h, is encoded in the program memory. Program branch instructions, which encode a relative address offset, operate in the same manner. The offset value stored in a branch instruction represents the number of single-word instructions that the PC will be offset by. Section 28.0 “Instruction Set Summary” provides further details of the instruction set. INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY LSB = 1 LSB = 0 0Fh EFh F0h C1h F4h 55h 03h 00h 23h 56h Program Memory Byte Locations 6.2.4 Instruction 1: Instruction 2: MOVLW GOTO 055h 0006h Instruction 3: MOVFF 123h, 456h TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS The standard PIC18 instruction set has four, two-word instructions: CALL, MOVFF, GOTO and LSFR. In all cases, the second word of the instructions always has ‘1111’ as its four Most Significant bits (MSbs); the other 12 bits are literal data, usually a data memory address. The use of ‘1111’ in the 4 MSbs of an instruction specifies a special form of NOP. If the instruction is executed in proper sequence immediately after the first word, the data in the second word is accessed and EXAMPLE 6-4: Word Address 000000h 000002h 000004h 000006h 000008h 00000Ah 00000Ch 00000Eh 000010h 000012h 000014h used by the instruction sequence. If the first word is skipped for some reason, and the second word is executed by itself, a NOP is executed instead. This is necessary for cases when the two-word instruction is preceded by a conditional instruction that changes the PC. Example 6-4 illustrates how this works. Note: See Section 6.5 “Program Memory and the Extended Instruction Set” for information on two-word instructions in the extended instruction set. TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS CASE 1: Object Code Source Code 0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; No, skip this word 1111 0100 0101 0110 0010 0100 0000 0000 ; is RAM location 0? ; Execute this word as a NOP ADDWF REG3 ; continue code ; is RAM location 0? CASE 2: Object Code Source Code 0110 0110 0000 0000 TSTFSZ REG1 1100 0001 0010 0011 MOVFF REG1, REG2 ; Yes, execute this word ADDWF REG3 1111 0100 0101 0110 0010 0100 0000 0000 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. ; 2nd word of instruction ; continue code Preliminary DS39974A-page 87 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.3 Note: 6.3.1 Data Memory Organization The operation of some aspects of data memory are changed when the PIC18 extended instruction set is enabled. See Section 6.6 “Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set” for more information. The data memory in PIC18 devices is implemented as static RAM. Each register in the data memory has a 12-bit address, allowing up to 4096 bytes of data memory. The memory space is divided into as many as 16 banks that contain 256 bytes each. The PIC18F47J13 family implements all available banks and provides 3.8 Kbytes of data memory available to the user. Figure 6-6 provides the data memory organization for the devices. The data memory contains Special Function Registers (SFRs) and General Purpose Registers (GPRs). The SFRs are used for control and status of the controller and peripheral functions, while GPRs are used for data storage and scratchpad operations in the user’s application. Any read of an unimplemented location will read as ‘0’s. The instruction set and architecture allow operations across all banks. The entire data memory may be accessed by Direct, Indirect or Indexed Addressing modes. Addressing modes are discussed later in this section. To ensure that commonly used registers (select SFRs and select GPRs) can be accessed in a single cycle, PIC18 devices implement an Access Bank. This is a 256-byte memory space that provides fast access to select SFRs and the lower portion of GPR Bank 0 without using the BSR. Section 6.3.2 “Access Bank” provides a detailed description of the Access RAM. BANK SELECT REGISTER Large areas of data memory require an efficient addressing scheme to make rapid access to any address possible. Ideally, this means that an entire address does not need to be provided for each read or write operation. For PIC18 devices, this is accomplished with a RAM banking scheme. This divides the memory space into 16 contiguous banks of 256 bytes. Depending on the instruction, each location can be addressed directly by its full 12-bit address, or an 8-bit low-order address and a 4-bit Bank Pointer. Most instructions in the PIC18 instruction set make use of the Bank Pointer, known as the Bank Select Register (BSR). This SFR holds the 4 MSbs of a location’s address; the instruction itself includes the 8 LSbs. Only the four lower bits of the BSR are implemented (BSR<3:0>). The upper four bits are unused; they will always read ‘0’ and cannot be written to. The BSR can be loaded directly by using the MOVLB instruction. The value of the BSR indicates the bank in data memory. The 8 bits in the instruction show the location in the bank and can be thought of as an offset from the bank’s lower boundary. The relationship between the BSR’s value and the bank division in data memory is illustrated in Figure 6-7. Because up to 16 registers can share the same low-order address, the user must always be careful to ensure that the proper bank is selected before performing a data read or write. For example, writing what should be program data to an 8-bit address of F9h, while the BSR is 0Fh, will end up resetting the PC. While any bank can be selected, only those banks that are actually implemented can be read or written to. Writes to unimplemented banks are ignored, while reads from unimplemented banks will return ‘0’s. Even so, the STATUS register will still be affected as if the operation was successful. The data memory map in Figure 6-6 indicates which banks are implemented. In the core PIC18 instruction set, only the MOVFF instruction fully specifies the 12-bit address of the source and target registers. This instruction ignores the BSR completely when it executes. All other instructions include only the low-order address as an operand and must use either the BSR or the Access Bank to locate their target registers. DS39974A-page 88 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 6-6: DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18F47J13 FAMILY DEVICES BSR3:BSR0 00h = 0000 = 0001 = 0010 = 0011 = 0100 = 0101 = 0110 = 0111 = 1000 = 1001 = 1010 = 1011 = 1100 = 1101 = 1110 = 1111 Access RAM Bank 0 Bank 1 FFh 00h GPR GPR 1FFh 200h FFh 00h Bank 2 Bank 3 2FFh 300h GPR FFh 00h Bank 4 The remaining 160 bytes are Special Function Registers (from Bank 15). 3FFh 400h When a = 1: The BSR specifies the bank used by the instruction. 4FFh 500h FFh 00h 5FFh 600h GPR Bank 6 FFh 00h 6FFh 700h FFh 00h 7FFh 800h GPR Bank 8 FFh 00h Bank 9 FFh 00h Bank 10 GPR GPR FFh 00h GPR FFh 00h Bank 12 FFh 00h FFh 00h GPR GPR, BDT Access Bank Access RAM Low GPR Bank 7 Bank 15 The first 96 bytes are general purpose RAM (from Bank 0). GPR Bank 5 Bank 14 The BSR is ignored and the Access Bank is used. GPR FFh 00h Bank 13 When a = 0: GPR FFh 00h Bank 11 000h 05Fh 060h 0FFh 100h 00h 5Fh Access RAM High 60h (SFRs) FFh 8FFh 900h 9FFh A00h AFFh B00h BFFh C00h CFFh D00h DFFh E00h EAFh C0h EB0h Non-Access SFR(1) FFh EFFh F00h 00h Non-Access SFR(1) GPR 60h F5Fh Access SFRs FFh FFFh Note 1: Addresses, EB0h through F5Fh, are not part of the Access Bank. Either the BANKED or the MOVFF instruction should be used to access these SFRs. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 89 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 6-7: USE OF THE BANK SELECT REGISTER (DIRECT ADDRESSING) BSR(1) 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 000h Data Memory Bank 0 100h Bank 1 Bank Select(2) 7 FFh 00h 11 From Opcode(2) 11 11 11 11 11 0 1 1 11 FFh 00h 200h 300h 00h Bank 2 FFh 00h Bank 3 through Bank 13 FFh 00h E00h Bank 14 FFh 00h F00h FFFh Note 1: 2: 6.3.2 Bank 15 FFh The Access RAM bit of the instruction can be used to force an override of the selected bank (BSR<3:0>) to the registers of the Access Bank. The MOVFF instruction embeds the entire 12-bit address in the instruction. ACCESS BANK While the use of the BSR with an embedded 8-bit address allows users to address the entire range of data memory, it also means that the user must always ensure that the correct bank is selected. Otherwise, data may be read from, or written to, the wrong location. This can be disastrous if a GPR is the intended target of an operation, but an SFR is written to instead. Verifying and/or changing the BSR for each read or write to data memory can become very inefficient. To streamline access for the most commonly used data memory locations, the data memory is configured with an Access Bank, which allows users to access a mapped block of memory without specifying a BSR. The Access Bank consists of the first 96 bytes of memory (00h-5Fh) in Bank 0 and the last 160 bytes of memory (60h-FFh) in Bank 15. The lower half is known as the Access RAM and is composed of GPRs. The upper half is where the device’s SFRs are mapped. These two areas are mapped contiguously in the Access Bank and can be addressed in a linear fashion by an 8-bit address (Figure 6-6). The Access Bank is used by core PIC18 instructions that include the Access RAM bit (the ‘a’ parameter in the instruction). When ‘a’ is equal to ‘1’, the instruction uses the BSR and the 8-bit address included in the opcode for the data memory address. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, however, the instruction is forced to use the Access Bank address map; the current value of the BSR is ignored entirely. DS39974A-page 90 Using this “forced” addressing allows the instruction to operate on a data address in a single cycle without updating the BSR first. For 8-bit addresses of 60h and above, this means that users can evaluate and operate on SFRs more efficiently. The Access RAM below 60h is a good place for data values that the user might need to access rapidly, such as immediate computational results or common program variables. Access RAM also allows for faster and more code efficient context saving and switching of variables. The mapping of the Access Bank is slightly different when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). This is discussed in more detail in Section 6.6.3 “Mapping the Access Bank in Indexed Literal Offset Mode”. 6.3.3 GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER FILE PIC18 devices may have banked memory in the GPR area. This is data RAM, which is available for use by all instructions. GPRs start at the bottom of Bank 0 (address 000h) and grow upward toward the bottom of the SFR area. GPRs are not initialized by a POR and are unchanged on all other Resets. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.3.4 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS The SFRs are registers used by the CPU and peripheral modules for controlling the desired operation of the device. These registers are implemented as static RAM. SFRs start at the top of data memory (FFFh) and extend downward to occupy more than the top half of Bank 15 (F40h to FFFh). Table 6-2, Table 6-3 and Table 6-4 provide a list of these registers. ALU’s STATUS register is described later in this section. Registers related to the operation of the peripheral features are described in the chapter for that peripheral. The SFRs are typically distributed among the peripherals whose functions they control. Unused SFR locations are unimplemented and read as ‘0’s Note: The SFRs can be classified into two sets: those associated with the “core” device functionality (ALU, Resets and interrupts) and those related to the peripheral functions. The Reset and Interrupt registers are described in their corresponding chapters, while the TABLE 6-2: Address The SFRs located between EB0h and F5Fh are not part of the Access Bank. Either BANKED instructions (using BSR) or the MOVFF instruction should be used to access these locations. When programming in MPLAB® C18, the compiler will automatically use the appropriate addressing mode. ACCESS BANK SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER MAP Name Address Name (1) INDF2 Address Name Address Name Address Name FFFh TOSU FDFh FBFh PSTR1CON F9Fh IPR1 F7Fh SPBRGH1 FFEh TOSH FDEh POSTINC2(1) FBEh ECCP1AS F9Eh PIR1 F7Eh BAUDCON1 FFDh TOSL FDDh POSTDEC2(1) FBDh ECCP1DEL F9Dh PIE1 F7Dh SPBRGH2 FFCh STKPTR FDCh PREINC2(1) FBCh CCPR1H F9Ch RCSTA2 F7Ch BAUDCON2 FFBh PCLATU FDBh PLUSW2(1) FBBh CCPR1L F9Bh OSCTUNE F7Bh TMR3H FFAh PCLATH FDAh FSR2H FBAh CCP1CON F9Ah T1GCON F7Ah TMR3L FF9h PCL FD9h FSR2L FB9h PSTR2CON F99h IPR5 F79h T3CON FF8h TBLPTRU FD8h STATUS FB8h ECCP2AS F98h PIR5 F78h TMR4 FF7h TBLPTRH FD7h TMR0H FB7h ECCP2DEL F97h T3GCON F77h PR4 FF6h TBLPTRL FD6h TMR0L FB6h CCPR2H F96h TRISE F76h T4CON FF5h TABLAT FD5h T0CON FB5h CCPR2L F95h TRISD F75h SSP2BUF FF4h PRODH FD4h —(5) FB4h CCP2CON F94h TRISC F74h SSP2ADD(3) FF3h PRODL FD3h OSCCON FB3h CTMUCONH F93h TRISB F73h SSP2STAT FF2h INTCON FD2h CM1CON FB2h CTMUCONL F92h TRISA F72h SSP2CON1 SSP2CON2 FF1h INTCON2 FD1h CM2CON FB1h CTMUICON F91h PIE5 F71h FF0h INTCON3 FD0h RCON FB0h SPBRG1 F90h IPR4 F70h CMSTAT FEFh INDF0(1) FCFh TMR1H FAFh RCREG1 F8Fh PIR4 F6Fh PMADDRH(2,4) FEEh POSTINC0(1) FCEh TMR1L FAEh TXREG1 F8Eh PIE4 FEDh (1) FECh POSTDEC0 PREINC0 (1) (1) FCDh FCCh T1CON FADh TMR2 FACh TXSTA1 F8Dh RCSTA1 F8Ch LATE F6Eh PMADDRL(2,4) (2) F6Dh PMDIN1H(2) (2) F6Ch PMDIN1L(2) LATD FEBh PLUSW0 FCBh PR2 FABh SPBRG2 F8Bh LATC F6Bh TXADDRL FEAh FSR0H FCAh T2CON FAAh RCREG2 F8Ah LATB F6Ah TXADDRH FE9h FSR0L FC9h SSP1BUF FA9h TXREG2 F89h LATA F69h RXADDRL FE8h WREG FC8h SSP1ADD(3) FA8h TXSTA2 F88h DMACON1 F68h RXADDRH FE7h INDF1(1) FC7h SSP1STAT FA7h EECON2 F87h OSCCON2(5) F67h DMABCL FE6h POSTINC1 (1) FC6h SSP1CON1 FA6h EECON1 F86h DMACON2 F66h DMABCH FE5h POSTDEC1(1) FC5h SSP1CON2 FA5h IPR3 F85h HLVDCON F65h — FE4h PREINC1(1) FC4h ADRESH FA4h PIR3 F84h PORTE(2) F64h — FE3h PLUSW1(1) FC3h ADRESL FA3h PIE3 F83h PORTD(2) F63h — FE2h FSR1H FC2h ADCON0 FA2h IPR2 F82h PORTC F62h — FE1h FSR1L FC1h ADCON1 FA1h PIR2 F81h PORTB F61h — FE0h BSR FC0h WDTCON FA0h PIE2 F80h PORTA F60h — Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: This is not a physical register. This register is not available on 28-pin devices. SSPxADD and SSPxMSK share the same address. PMADDRH and PMDOUTH share the same address, and PMADDRL and PMDOUTL share the same address. PMADDRx is used in Master modes and PMDOUTx is used in Slave modes. Reserved; do not write to this location. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 91 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 6-3: Address NON-ACCESS BANK SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER MAP Name Address Name Address Name Address Name Address Name Address Name F5Fh PMCONH F3Fh RTCCFG F1Fh PR6 EFFh RPINR24 EDFh — EBFh PPSCON F5Eh PMCONL F3Eh RTCCAL F1Eh T6CON EFEh RPINR23 EDEh — EBEh — F5Dh PMMODEH F3Dh REFOCON F1Dh TMR8 EFDh RPINR22 EDDh — EBDh — F5Ch PMMODEL F3Ch PADCFG1 F1Ch PR8 EFCh RPINR21 EDCh — EBCh PMDIS3 F5Bh PMDOUT2H F3Bh RTCVALH F1Bh T8CON EFBh — EDBh — EBBh PMDIS2 F5Ah PMDOUT2L F3Ah RTCVALL F1Ah PSTR3CON EFAh — EDAh — EBAh PMDIS1 F59h PMDIN2H F39h — F19h ECCP3AS EF9h — ED9h — EB9h PMDIS0 F58h PMDIN2L F38h — F18h ECCP3DEL EF8h RPINR17 ED8h RPOR24 EB8h ADCTRIG F57h PMEH F37h — F17h CCPR3H EF7h RPINR16 ED7h RPOR23 EB7h — F56h PMEL F36h — F16h CCPR3L EF6h — ED6h RPOR22 EB6h — F55h PMSTATH F35h — F15h CCP3CON EF5h — ED5h RPOR21 EB5h — F54h PMSTATL F34h — F14h CCPR4H EF4h RPINR14 ED4h RPOR20 EB4h — F53h CVRCON F33h — F13h CCPR4L EF3h RPINR13 ED3h RPOR19 EB3h — F52h CCPTMRS0 F32h — F12h CCP4CON EF2h RPINR12 ED2h RPOR18 EB2h — F51h CCPTMRS1 F31h — F11h CCPR5H EF1h — ED1h RPOR17 EB1h — F50h CCPTMRS2 F30h — F10h CCPR5L EF0h — ED0h RPOR16 EB0h — F4Fh F2Fh — F0Fh CCP5CON EEFh — ECFh RPOR15 DSGPR1 F4Eh DSGPR0 F2Eh — F0Eh CCPR6H EEEh — ECEh RPOR14 F4Dh DSCONH F2Dh — F0Dh CCPR6L EEDh — ECDh RPOR13 F4Ch DSCONL F2Ch — F0Ch CCP6CON EECh — ECCh RPOR12 F4Bh DSWAKEH F2Bh — F0Bh CCPR7H EEBh — ECBh RPOR11 F4Ah DSWAKEL F2Ah — F0Ah CCPR7L EEAh RPINR9 ECAh RPOR10 F49h ANCON1 F29h — F09h CCP7CON EE9h RPINR8 EC9h RPOR9 F48h ANCON0 F28h — F08h CCPR8H EE8h RPINR7 EC8h RPOR8 F47h ALRMCFG F27h — F07h CCPR8L EE7h RPINR15 EC7h RPOR7 F46h ALRMRPT F26h — F06h CCP8CON EE6h RPINR6 EC6h RPOR6 F45h ALRMVALH F25h CM3CON F05h CCPR9H EE5h — EC5h RPOR5 F44h ALRMVALL F24h TMR5H F04h CCPR9L EE4h RPINR4 EC4h RPOR4 F43h — F23h TMR5L F03h CCP9CON EE3h RPINR3 EC3h RPOR3 F42h ODCON1 F22h T5CON F02h CCPR10H EE2h RPINR2 EC2h RPOR2 F41h ODCON2 F21h T5GCON F01h CCPR10L EE1h RPINR1 EC1h RPOR1 F40h ODCON3 F20h TMR6 EE0h — EC0h RPOR0 DS39974A-page 92 F00h CCP10CON Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.3.4.1 Context Defined SFRs • PMADDRH/L and PMDOUT2H/L: In this case, these named buffer pairs are actually the same physical registers. The Parallel Master Port (PMP) module’s operating mode determines what function the registers take on. See Section 11.1.2 “Data Registers” for additional details. There are several registers that share the same address in the SFR space. The register's definition and usage depends on the operating mode of its associated peripheral. These registers are: • SSPxADD and SSPxMSK: These are two separate hardware registers, accessed through a single SFR address. The operating mode of the MSSP modules determines which register is being accessed. See Section 20.5.3.4 “7-Bit Address Masking Mode” for additional details. TABLE 6-4: Addr. REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F47J13 FAMILY) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 — — — Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Top-of-Stack Upper Byte (TOS<20:16>) Value on POR, BOR FFFh TOSU FFEh TOSH Top-of-Stack High Byte (TOS<15:8>) FFDh TOSL Top-of-Stack Low Byte (TOS<7:0>) FFCh STKPTR STKFUL STKUNF — FFBh PCLATU — — — FFAh PCLATH Holding Register for PC<15:8> FF9h PCL PC Low Byte (PC<7:0>) FF8h TBLPTRU FF7h TBLPTRH Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>) 0000 0000 FF6h TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>) 0000 0000 FF5h TABLAT Program Memory Table Latch 0000 0000 FF4h PRODH Product Register High Byte xxxx xxxx FF3h PRODL Product Register Low Byte FF2h INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF 0000 000x FF1h INTCON2 RBPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 INTEDG3 TMR0IP INT3IP RBIP 1111 1111 FF0h INTCON3 INT2IP INT1IP INT3IE INT2IE INT1IE INT3IF INT2IF INT1IF 1100 0000 FEFh INDF0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 not changed (not a physical register) FEEh POSTINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A FEDh POSTDEC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A FECh PREINC0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A FEBh PLUSW0 Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR0 offset by W N/A — — ---0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0 Holding Register for PC<20:16> 00-0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 — Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>) --00 0000 xxxx xxxx N/A FEAh FSR0H FE9h FSR0L Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0 Low Byte xxxx xxxx FE8h WREG Working Register xxxx xxxx FE7h INDF1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 not changed (not a physical register) FE6h POSTINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A FE5h POSTDEC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A FE4h PREINC1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A FE3h PLUSW1 Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR1 offset by W N/A FE2h FSR1H FE1h FSR1L FE0h BSR — — — — — — — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0 High Byte N/A Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1 High Byte ---- 0000 Bank Select Register ---- 0000 Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1 Low Byte — — — — ---- 0000 xxxx xxxx FDFh INDF2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 not changed (not a physical register) FDEh POSTINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-incremented (not a physical register) N/A FDDh POSTDEC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-decremented (not a physical register) N/A FDCh PREINC2 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) N/A Note 1: 2: 3: N/A Applicable for 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). Applicable for 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). Value on POR, BOR. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 93 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 6-4: Addr. REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F47J13 FAMILY) (CONTINUED) File Name FDBh PLUSW2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) – value of FSR2 offset by W — — FDAh FSR2H FD9h FSR2L FD8h STATUS FD7h TMR0H Timer0 Register High Byte FD6h TMR0L Timer0 Register Low Byte FD5h T0CON FD3h — — Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2 High Byte Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2 Low Byte — — — Value on POR, BOR N/A ---- 0000 xxxx xxxx N OV Z DC C ---x xxxx 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS2 T0PS1 T0PS0 1111 1111 OSCCON IDLEN IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS — SCS1 SCS0 0110 q100 FD2h CM1CON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 0001 1111 FD1h CM2CON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 0001 1111 IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR 0-11 11qq FD0h RCON FCFh TMR1H Timer1 Register High Byte FCEh TMR1L Timer1 Register Low Bytes FCDh T1CON FCCh TMR2 Timer2 Register FCBh PR2 Timer2 Period Register FCAh T2CON FC9h SSP1BUF MSSP1 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register xxxx xxxx FC8h SSP1ADD MSSP1 Address Register (I2C™ Slave mode). MSSP1 Baud Rate Reload Register (I2C Master mode). 0000 0000 TMR1CS1 — xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx TMR1CS0 T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC RD16 TMR1ON 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 -000 0000 FC8h SSP1MSK MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 1111 1111 FC7h SSP1STAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 0000 0000 FC6h SSP1CON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 0000 0000 FC5h SSP1CON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN 0000 0000 FC5h SSP1CON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ADMSK5 ADMSK4 ADMSK3 ADMSK2 ADMSK1 SEN 0000 0000 FC4h ADRESH A/D Result Register High Byte FC3h ADRESL A/D Result Register Low Byte FC2h ADCON0 VCFG1 VCFG0 CHS3 CHS2 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE ADON 0000 0000 FC1h ADCON1 ADFM ADCAL ACQT2 ACQT1 ACQT0 ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 0000 0000 FC0h WDTCON REGSLP LVDSTAT ULPLVL VBGOE DS ULPEN ULPSINK SWDTEN 1qq0 q000 FBFh PSTR1CON CMPL1 CMPL0 — STRSYNC STRD STRC STRB STRA 00-0 0001 FBEh ECCP1AS PSS1AC1 PSS1AC0 PSS1BD1 PSS1BD0 0000 0000 FBDh ECCP1DEL P1DC3 P1DC2 P1DC1 P1DC0 0000 0000 FBCh CCPR1H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte FBBh CCPR1L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte FBAh CCP1CON P1M1 P1M0 DC1B1 DC1B0 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 0000 0000 FB9h PSTR2CON CMPL1 CMPL0 — STRSYNC STRD STRC STRB STRA 00-0 0001 FB8h ECCP2AS PSS2AC1 PSS2AC0 PSS2BD1 PSS2BD0 0000 0000 FB7h ECCP2DEL P2DC3 P2DC2 P2DC1 P2DC0 0000 0000 FB6h CCPR2H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 High Byte FB5h CCPR2L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 Low Byte FB4h CCP2CON FB3h ECCP1ASE P1RSEN ECCP2ASE P2RSEN xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx ECCP1AS2 ECCP1AS1 ECCP1AS0 P1DC6 P1DC5 P1DC4 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx ECCP2AS2 ECCP2AS1 ECCP2AS0 P2DC6 P2DC5 P2DC4 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx P2M1 P2M0 DC2B1 DC2B0 CCP2M3 CCP2M2 CCP2M1 CCP2M0 0000 0000 CTMUCONH CTMUEN — CTMUSIDL TGEN EDGEN EDGSEQEN IDISSEN CTTRIG 0-00 0000 FB2h CTMUCONL EDG2POL EDG1POL EDG1SEL1 EDG1SEL0 EDG2STAT FB1h CTMUICON ITRIM2 ITRIM1 ITRIM0 IRNG1 FB0h SPBRG1 EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 0000 0000 FAFh RCREG1 EUSART1 Receive Register 0000 0000 FAEh TXREG1 EUSART1 Transmit Register FADh TXSTA1 Note 1: 2: 3: ITRIM5 CSRC EDG2SEL1 EDG2SEL0 ITRIM4 TX9 ITRIM3 EDG1STAT 0000 00xx IRNG0 0000 0000 0000 0000 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 0000 0010 Applicable for 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). Applicable for 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). Value on POR, BOR. DS39974A-page 94 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 6-4: Addr. REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F47J13 FAMILY) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 0000 0000 FACh RCSTA1 FABh SPBRG2 EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte 0000 0000 FAAh RCREG2 EUSART2 Receive Register 0000 0000 FA9h TXREG2 EUSART2 Transmit Register FA8h TXSTA2 FA7h EECON2 FA6h EECON1 FA5h FA4h CSRC TX9 0000 0000 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 0000 0010 Flash Self-Program Control Register (not a physical register) ---- ---- — — WPROG FREE WRERR WREN WR — --00 x00- IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCIP 1111 1111 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF 0000 0000 FA3h PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE 0000 0000 FA2h IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP HLVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP 111- 1111 FA1h PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF 000- 0000 FA0h PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE 000- 0000 F9Fh IPR1 PMPIP(2) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP 1111 1111 F9Eh PIR1 PMPIF(2) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF 0000 0000 F9Dh PIE1 PMPIE(2) ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE 0000 0000 0000 0000 F9Ch RCSTA2 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D F9Bh OSCTUNE INTSRC PLLEN TUN5 TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 0000 0000 F9Ah T1GCON TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GTM T1GSPM T1GGO/ T1DONE T1GVAL T1GSS1 T1GSS0 0000 0x00 --11 1111 F99h IPR5 — — CM3IP TMR8IP TMR6IP TMR5IP TMR5GIP TMR1GIP F98h PIR5 — — CM3IF TMR8IF TMR6IF TMR5IF TMR5GIF TMR1GIF --00 0000 F97h T3GCON TMR3GE T3GPOL T3GTM T3GSPM T3GGO/ T3DONE T3GVAL T3GSS1 T3GSS0 0000 0x00 F96h TRISE(2) RDPU REPU — — — TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0 00-- -111 F95h TRISD(2) TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 1111 1111 F94h TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 1111 1111 F93h TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 1111 1111 F92h TRISA TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 — TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 111- 1111 F91h PIE5 — — CM3IE TMR8IE TMR6IE TMR5IE TMR5GIE TMR1GIE --00 0000 F90h IPR4 CCP10IP CCP9IP CCP8IP CCP7IP CCP6IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP 1111 1111 F8Fh PIR4 CCP10IF CCP9IF CCP8IF CCP7IF CCP6IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF 0000 0000 F8Eh PIE4 CCP10IE CCP9IE CCP8IE CCP7IE CCP6IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE 0000 0000 F8Dh LATE(2) — — — — — LATE2 LATE1 LATE0 ---- -xxx F8Ch LATD(2) LATD7 LATD6 LATD5 LATD4 LATD3 LATD2 LATD1 LATD0 xxxx xxxx F8Bh LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 xxxx xxxx F8Ah LATB LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 xxxx xxxx F89h LATA LATA7 LATA6 LATA5 — LATA3 LATA2 LATA1 LATA0 xxx- xxxx F88h DMACON1 SSCON1 SSCON0 TXINC RXINC DUPLEX1 DUPLEX0 DLYINTEN DMAEN 0000 0000 F87h OSCCON2 — SOSCRUN — SOSCDRV SOSCGO PRISD — — -0-1 01-- F86h DMACON2 DLYCYC3 DLYCYC2 DLYCYC1 DLYCYC0 INTLVL3 INTLVL2 INTLVL1 INTLVL0 0000 0000 F85h HLVDCON VDIRMAG BGVST IRVST HLVDEN HLVDL3 HLVDL2 HLVDL1 HLVDL0 0000 0000 F84h PORTE(2) — — — — — RE2 RE1 RE0 ---- -xxx F83h PORTD RD7 RD6 RD5 RD4 RD3 RD2 RD1 RD0 xxxx xxxx F82h PORTC RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 xxxx xxxx F81h PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 xxxx xxxx F80h PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 — RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 xxx- xxxx TXCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN F7Fh SPBRGH1 F7Eh BAUDCON1 Note 1: 2: 3: EUSART1 Baud Rate Generator High Byte ABDOVF RCIDL RXDTP 0000 0000 0100 0-00 Applicable for 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). Applicable for 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). Value on POR, BOR. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 95 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 6-4: Addr. REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F47J13 FAMILY) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 EUSART2 Baud Rate Generator High Byte Value on POR, BOR F7Dh SPBRGH2 F7Ch BAUDCON2 F7Bh TMR3H Timer3 Register High Byte F7Ah TMR3L Timer3 Register Low Byte F79h T3CON F78h TMR4 Timer4 Register F77h PR4 Timer4 Period Register F76H T4CON F75h SSP2BUF MSSP2 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register xxxx xxxx F74h SSP2ADD MSSP2 Address Register (I2C™ Slave mode)/MSSP2 Baud Rate Reload Register (I2C Master mode) 0000 0000 ABDOVF TMR3CS1 — RCIDL TMR3CS0 RXDTP 0000 0000 TXCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN 0100 0-00 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3OSCEN T3SYNC RD16 TMR3ON 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 T4OUTPS3 T4OUTPS2 T4OUTPS1 T4OUTPS0 TMR4ON T4CKPS1 T4CKPS0 -000 0000 F74h SSP2MSK MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 1111 1111 F73h SSP2STAT SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF 0000 0000 F72h SSP2CON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 0000 0000 F71h SSP2CON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ADMSK5 ACKEN ADMSK4 RCEN ADMSK3 PEN ADMSK2 RSEN ADMSK1 SEN 0000 0000 — — — COUT3 COUT2 COUT1 F70h CMSTAT — — F6Fh PMADDRH/ PMDOUT1H(2) — CS1 Parallel Port Out Data High Byte (Buffer 1) 0000 0000 F6Eh PMADDRL/ PMDOUT1L(2) Parallel Master Port Address Low Byte/ Parallel Port Out Data Low Byte (Buffer 1) 0000 0000 F6Dh PMDIN1H(2) Parallel Port In Data High Byte (Buffer 1) 0000 0000 F6Ch PMDIN1L(2) Parallel Port In Data Low Byte (Buffer 1) 0000 0000 F6Bh TXADDRL SPI DMA Transmit Data Pointer Low Byte F6Ah TXADDRH F69h RXADDRL F68h RXADDRH — Parallel Master Port Address High Byte — — 0000 0000 — SPI DMA Transmit Data Pointer High Byte ---- 0000 — — SPI DMA Receive Data Pointer High Byte ---- 0000 — — — — SPI DMA Receive Data Pointer Low Byte — — ---- -111 -000 0000 0000 0000 F67h DMABCL F66h DMABCH F5Fh PMCONH(2) PMPEN — — ADRMUX1 ADRMUX0 PTBEEN PTWREN PTRDEN 0--0 0000 F5Eh PMCONL(2) CSF1 CSF0 ALP — CS1P BEP WRSP RDSP 000- 0000 F5Dh PMMODEH(2) BUSY IRQM1 IRQM0 INCM1 INCM0 MODE16 MODE1 MODE0 0000 0000 F5Ch PMMODEL(2) WAITB1 WAITB0 WAITM3 WAITM2 WAITM1 WAITM0 WAITE1 WAITE0 0000 0000 F5Bh PMDOUT2H(2) Parallel Port Out Data High Byte (Buffer 2) 0000 0000 F5Ah PMDOUT2L(2) Parallel Port Out Data Low Byte (Buffer 2) 0000 0000 F59h PMDIN2H(2) Parallel Port In Data High Byte (Buffer 2) 0000 0000 F58h PMDIN2L(2) Parallel Port In Data Low Byte (Buffer 2) F57h PMEH(2) PTEN15 PTEN14 PTEN13 PTEN12 PTEN11 PTEN10 PTEN9 PTEN8 0000 0000 F56h PMEL(2) PTEN7 PTEN6 PTEN5 PTEN4 PTEN3 PTEN2 PTEN1 PTEN0 0000 0000 F55h PMSTATH(2) IBF IBOV — — IB3F IB2F IB1F IB0F 00-- 0000 F54h PMSTATL(2) OBE OBUF — — OB3E OB2E OB1E OB0E 10-- 1111 F53h CVRCON CVREN CVROE CVRR CVRSS CVR3 CVR2 CVR1 CVR0 0000 0000 F52h CCPTMRS0 C3TSEL1 C3TSEL0 C2TSEL2 C2TSEL1 C2TSEL0 C1TSEL2 C1TSEL1 C1TSEL0 0000 0000 F51h CCPTMRS1 C7TSEL1 C7TSEL0 — C6TSEL0 — C5TSEL0 C4TSEL1 C4TSEL0 00-0 -000 F50h CCPTMRS2 — — — C10TSEL0 — C9TSEL0 C8TSEL1 C8TSEL0 F4Fh DSGPR1 Deep Sleep Persistent General Purpose Register (contents retained even in Deep Sleep) F4Eh DSGPR0 Deep Sleep Persistent General Purpose Register (contents retained even in Deep Sleep) F4Dh DSCONH DSEN — — — — CFGPER2 DSULPEN RTCWDIS 0--- -000 F4Ch DSCONL — — — — — ULPWDIS DSBOR RELEASE ---- -000 Note 1: 2: 3: SPI DMA Byte Count Low Byte — — 0000 0000 SPI DMA Byte Count High Byte ---- --00 0000 0000 ---0 -000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Applicable for 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). Applicable for 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). Value on POR, BOR. DS39974A-page 96 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 6-4: Addr. REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F47J13 FAMILY) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR F4Bh DSWAKEH — — — — — — — DSINT0 ---- ---0 F4Ah DSWAKEL DSFLT — DSULP DSWDT DSRTC DSMCLR — DSPOR 0-00 00-1 F49h ANCON1 VBGEN — — PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 0--0 0000 F48h ANCON0 PCFG7(2) PCFG6(2) PCFG5(2) PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 0000 0000 F47h ALRMCFG ALRMEN CHIME AMASK3 AMASK2 AMASK1 AMASK0 ALRMPTR1 F46h ALRMRPT ARPT7 ARPT6 ARPT5 ARPT4 ARPT3 ARPT2 ARPT1 F45h ALRMVALH Alarm Value High Register Window based on ALRMPTR<1:0> F44h ALRMVALL Alarm Value Low Register Window based on ALRMPTR<1:0> F43h — — — — — ALRMPTR0 0000 0000 ARPT0 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx — — — — ---- ---- F42h ODCON1 CCP8OD CCP7OD CCP6OD CCP5OD CCP4OD ECCP3OD ECCP2OD ECCP1OD 0000 0000 F41h ODCON2 — — — — CCP10OD CCP9OD U2OD U1OD ---- 0000 F40h ODCON3 CTMUDS — — — — — SPI2OD SPI1OD 0--- --00 F3Fh RTCCFG RTCEN — RTCWREN RTCSYNC HALFSEC RTCOE RTCPTR1 RTCPTR0 0-00 0000 F3Eh RTCCAL CAL7 CAL6 CAL5 CAL4 CAL3 CAL2 CAL1 CAL0 0000 0000 F3Dh REFOCON ROON — ROSSLP ROSEL RODIV3 RODIV2 RODIV1 RODIV0 0-00 0000 F3Ch PADCFG1 — — — — — F3Bh RTCVALH RTCC Value High Register Window based on RTCPTR<1:0> F3Ah RTCVALL RTCC Value Low Register Window based on RTCPTR<1:0> F25h CM3CON F24h TMR5H Timer5 Register High Byte xxxx xxxx F23h TMR5L Timer5 Register Low Bytes xxxx xxxx F22h T5CON TMR5CS1 TMR5CS0 T5CKPS1 T5CKPS0 T5OSCEN T5SYNC RD16 TMR5ON 0000 0000 F21h T5GCON TMR5GE T5GPOL T5GTM T5GSPM T5GGO/ T5DONE T5GVAL T5GSS1 T5GSS0 0000 0x00 F20h TMR6 Timer6 Register F1Fh PR6 Timer6 Period Register F1Eh T6CON F1Dh TMR8 Timer8 Register F1Ch PR8 Timer8 Period Register F1Bh T8CON F1Ah PSTR3CON F19h ECCP3AS F18h ECCP3DEL F17h CCPR3H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 3 High Byte F16h CCPR3L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 3 Low Byte F15h CCP3CON F14h CCPR4H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 4 High Byte F13h CCPR4L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 4 Low Byte F12h CCP4CON F11h CCPR5H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 5 High Byte F10h CCPR5L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 5 Low Byte F0Fh CCP5CON F0Eh CCPR6H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 6 High Byte F0Dh CCPR6L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 6 Low Byte F0Ch CCP6CON F0Bh CCPR7H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 7 High Byte F0Ah CCPR7L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 7 Low Byte F09h CCP7CON F08h CCPR8H Note 1: 2: 3: CON — — CMPL1 ECCP3ASE P3RSEN P3M1 — — — — COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 RTSECSEL1 RTSECSEL0 PMPTTL(2) ---- -000 0xxx xxxx 0xxx xxxx CREF CCH1 CCH0 0001 1111 0000 0000 1111 1111 T6OUTPS3 T6OUTPS2 T6OUTPS1 T6OUTPS0 TMR6ON T6CKPS1 T6CKPS0 -000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 T8OUTPS3 T8OUTPS2 T8OUTPS1 T8OUTPS0 CMPL0 — STRSYNC ECCP3AS2 ECCP3AS1 ECCP3AS0 P3DC6 P3M0 — — — — P3DC5 DC3B1 DC4B1 DC5B1 DC6B1 DC7B1 P3DC4 TMR8ON T8CKPS1 T8CKPS0 -000 0000 STRD STRC STRB STRA 00-0 0001 PSS3AC1 PSS3AC0 PSS3BD1 PSS3BD0 0000 0000 P3DC3 P3DC2 P3DC1 P3DC0 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx DC3B0 CCP3M3 CCP3M2 CCP3M1 CCP3M0 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx DC4B0 CCP4M3 CCP4M2 CCP4M1 CCP4M0 --00 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx DC5B0 CCP5M3 CCP5M2 CCP5M1 CCP5M0 --00 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx DC6B0 CCP6M3 CCP6M2 CCP6M1 CCP6M0 --00 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx DC7B0 CCP7M3 CCP7M2 Capture/Compare/PWM Register 8 High Byte CCP7M1 CCP7M0 --00 0000 xxxx xxxx Applicable for 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). Applicable for 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). Value on POR, BOR. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 97 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 6-4: Addr. REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F47J13 FAMILY) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DC8B0 CCP8M3 CCP8M2 CCP8M1 CCP8M0 Capture/Compare/PWM Register 8 Low Byte Value on POR, BOR F07h CCPR8L F06h CCP8CON F05h CCPR9H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 9 High Byte F04h CCPR9L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 9 Low Byte F03h CCP9CON F02h CCPR10H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 10 High Byte F01h CCPR10L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 10 Low Byte F00h CCP10CON — — DC10B1 EFFh RPINR24 — — — PWM Fault Input (FLT0) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 — — — — DC8B1 DC9B1 xxxx xxxx --00 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx DC9B0 CCP9M3 CCP9M2 CCP9M1 CCP9M0 --00 0000 xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx DC10B0 CCP10M3 CCP10M2 CCP10M1 CCP10M0 --00 0000 EFEh RPINR23 — — — SPI2 Slave Select Input (SS2) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EFDh RPINR22 — — — SPI2 Clock Input (SCK2) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EFCh RPINR21 — — — SPI2 Data Input (SDI2) to Input Pin Mapping bits EFBh — — — — — — — — — (3) EFAh — — — — — — — — — (3) EF9h — — — — — — — — — EF8h RPINR17 — — — EUSART2 Clock Input (CK2) to Input Pin Mapping bits EF7h RPINR16 — — — EUSART2 RX2/DT2 to Input Pin Mapping bits EF6h — — — — — — — — — EF5h — — — — — — — — — EF4h RPINR14 — — — Timer5 Gate Input (T5G) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EF3h RPINR13 — — — Timer3 Gate Input (T3G) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EF2h RPINR12 — — — Timer1 Gate Input (T1G) to Input Pin Mapping bits EF1h — — — — — — — — — (3) EF0h — — — — — — — — — (3) EEFh — — — — — — — — — (3) EEEh — — — — — — — — — (3) EEDh — — — — — — — — — (3) EECh — — — — — — — — — (3) EEBh — — — — — — — — — EEAh RPINR9 — — — ECCP3 Input Capture (IC3) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EE9h RPINR8 — — — ECCP2 Input Capture (IC2) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EE8h RPINR7 — — — ECCP1 Input Capture (IC1) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EE7h RPINR15 — — — Timer5 External Clock Input (T5CKI) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EE6h RPINR6 — — — Timer3 External Clock Input (T3CKI) to Input Pin Mapping bits EE5h — — — — EE4h RPINR4 — — — Timer0 External Clock Input (T0CKI) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EE3h RPINR3 — — — External Interrupt (INT3) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EE2h RPINR2 — — — External Interrupt (INT2) to Input Pin Mapping bits ---1 1111 EE1h RPINR1 — — — External Interrupt (INT1) to Input Pin Mapping bits EE0h — — — — — — — — — (3) EDFh — — — — — — — — — (3) EDEh — — — — — — — — — (3) EDDh — — — — — — — — — (3) EDCh — — — — — — — — — (3) EDBh — — — — — — — — — (3) EDAh — — — — — — — — — (3) ED9h — — — — — — — — — — — — ---1 1111 (3) ---1 1111 ---1 1111 — (3) (3) ---1 1111 (3) ---1 1111 — (3) ---1 1111 (3) ED8h RPOR24(2) — — — Remappable Pin RP24 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ED7h RPOR23(2) — — — Remappable Pin RP23 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 Note 1: 2: 3: Applicable for 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). Applicable for 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). Value on POR, BOR. DS39974A-page 98 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 6-4: Addr. REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F47J13 FAMILY) (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR ED6h RPOR22(2) — — — Remappable Pin RP22 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ED5h (2) RPOR21 — — — Remappable Pin RP21 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ED4h RPOR20(2) — — — Remappable Pin RP20 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ED3h RPOR19(2) — — — Remappable Pin RP19 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ED2h RPOR18 — — — Remappable Pin RP18 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ED1h RPOR17 — — — Remappable Pin RP17 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ED0h RPOR16 — — — Remappable Pin RP16 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ECFh RPOR15 — — — Remappable Pin RP15 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ECEh RPOR14 — — — Remappable Pin RP14 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ECDh RPOR13 — — — Remappable Pin RP13 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ECCh RPOR12 — — — Remappable Pin RP12 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ECBh RPOR11 — — — Remappable Pin RP11 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 ECAh RPOR10 — — — Remappable Pin RP10 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 EC9h RPOR9 — — — Remappable Pin RP9 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 EC8h RPOR8 — — — Remappable Pin RP8 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 EC7h RPOR7 — — — Remappable Pin RP7 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 EC6h RPOR6 — — — Remappable Pin RP6 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 EC5h RPOR5 — — — Remappable Pin RP5 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 EC4h RPOR4 — — — Remappable Pin RP4 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 EC3h RPOR3 — — — Remappable Pin RP3 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 EC2h RPOR2 — — — Remappable Pin RP2 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 EC1h RPOR1 — — — Remappable Pin RP1 Output Signal Select bits ---0 0000 EC0h RPOR0 — — — Remappable Pin RP0 Output Signal Select bits EBFh PPSCON — — — — — — — IOLOCK ---- ---0 EBEh — — — — — — — — — (3) EBDh — — — — — — — — — (3) EBCh PMDIS3 CCP10MD CCP9MD CCP8MD CCP7MD CCP6MD CCP5MD CCP4MD — 0000 000- EBBh PMDIS2 — TMR8MD — TMR6MD TMR5MD CMP3MD CMP2MD CMP1MD -0-0 0000 EBAh PMDIS1 PSPMD(2) CTMUMD RTCCMD TMR4MD TMR3MD TMR2MD TMR1MD — 0000 000- EB9h PMDIS0 ECCP3MD ECCP2MD ECCP1MD UART2MD UART1MD SPI2MD SPI1MD ADCMD 0000 0000 EB8h ADCTRIG — — — — — — SRC1 SRC0 ---- --00 ---0 0000 EB7h — — — — — — — — — (3) EB6h — — — — — — — — — (3) EB5h — — — — — — — — — (3) EB4h — — — — — — — — — (3) EB3h — — — — — — — — — (3) EB2h — — — — — — — — — (3) EB1h — — — — — — — — — (3) EB0h — — — — — — — — — (3) Note 1: 2: 3: Applicable for 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). Applicable for 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). Value on POR, BOR. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 99 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.3.5 STATUS REGISTER The STATUS register, shown in Register 6-2, contains the arithmetic status of the ALU. The STATUS register can be the operand for any instruction, as with any other register. If the STATUS register is the destination for an instruction that affects the Z, DC, C, OV or N bits, then the write to these five bits is disabled. These bits are set or cleared according to the device logic. Therefore, the result of an instruction with the STATUS register as destination may be different than intended. For example, CLRF STATUS will set the Z bit but leave the other bits unchanged. The STATUS REGISTER 6-2: U-0 For other instructions not affecting any Status bits, see the instruction set summary in Table 28-2 and Table 28-3. Note: The C and DC bits operate as Borrow and Digit Borrow bits, respectively in subtraction. STATUS REGISTER (ACCESS FDBh) U-0 — register then reads back as ‘000u u1uu’. It is recommended, therefore, that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF, MOVFF and MOVWF instructions are used to alter the STATUS register because these instructions do not affect the Z, C, DC, OV or N bits in the STATUS register. — U-0 — R/W-x N R/W-x OV R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x Z DC(1) C(2) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 N: Negative bit This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2’s complement). It indicates whether the result was negative (ALU MSB = 1). 1 = Result was negative 0 = Result was positive bit 3 OV: Overflow bit This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2’s complement). It indicates an overflow of the 7-bit magnitude, which causes the sign bit (Bit 7) to change state. 1 = Overflow occurred for signed arithmetic (in this arithmetic operation) 0 = No overflow occurred bit 2 Z: Zero bit 1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero 0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero bit 1 DC: Digit Carry/Digit Borrow bit(1) For ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW and SUBWF instructions: 1 = A carry out from the 4th low-order bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry out from the 4th low-order bit of the result bit 0 C: Carry/Borrow bit(2) For ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW and SUBWF instructions: 1 = A carry out from the MSb of the result occurred 0 = No carry out from the MSb of the result occurred Note 1: 2: For Digit Borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the 2’s complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either bit 4 or bit 3 of the source register. For Borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the 2’s complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high or low-order bit of the source register. DS39974A-page 100 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.4 Data Addressing Modes Note: The execution of some instructions in the core PIC18 instruction set are changed when the PIC18 extended instruction set is enabled. See Section 6.6 “Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set” for more information. While the program memory can be addressed in only one way through the PC, information in the data memory space can be addressed in several ways. For most instructions, the addressing mode is fixed. Other instructions may use up to three modes, depending on which operands are used and whether or not the extended instruction set is enabled. The addressing modes are: • • • • Inherent Literal Direct Indirect An additional addressing mode, Indexed Literal Offset, is available when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). Its operation is discussed in more detail in Section 6.6.1 “Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”. 6.4.1 INHERENT AND LITERAL ADDRESSING Many PIC18 control instructions do not need any argument at all; they either perform an operation that globally affects the device, or they operate implicitly on one register. This addressing mode is known as Inherent Addressing. Examples include SLEEP, RESET and DAW. Other instructions work in a similar way, but require an additional explicit argument in the opcode. This is known as Literal Addressing mode, because they require some literal value as an argument. Examples include ADDLW and MOVLW, which respectively, add or move a literal value to the W register. Other examples include CALL and GOTO, which include a 20-bit program memory address. 6.4.2 The Access RAM bit, ‘a’, determines how the address is interpreted. When ‘a’ is ‘1’, the contents of the BSR (Section 6.3.1 “Bank Select Register”) are used with the address to determine the complete 12-bit address of the register. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, the address is interpreted as being a register in the Access Bank. Addressing that uses the Access RAM is sometimes also known as Direct Forced Addressing mode. A few instructions, such as MOVFF, include the entire 12-bit address (either source or destination) in their opcodes. In these cases, the BSR is ignored entirely. The destination of the operation’s results is determined by the destination bit, ‘d’. When ‘d’ is ‘1’, the results are stored back in the source register, overwriting its original contents. When ‘d’ is ‘0’, the results are stored in the W register. Instructions without the ‘d’ argument have a destination that is implicit in the instruction; their destination is either the target register being operated on or the W register. 6.4.3 INDIRECT ADDRESSING Indirect Addressing allows the user to access a location in data memory without giving a fixed address in the instruction. This is done by using File Select Registers (FSRs) as pointers to the locations to be read or written to. Since the FSRs are themselves located in RAM as SFRs, they can also be directly manipulated under program control. This makes FSRs very useful in implementing data structures such as tables and arrays in data memory. The registers for Indirect Addressing are also implemented with Indirect File Operands (INDFs) that permit automatic manipulation of the pointer value with auto-incrementing, auto-decrementing or offsetting with another value. This allows for efficient code using loops, such as the example of clearing an entire RAM bank in Example 6-5. It also enables users to perform Indexed Addressing and other Stack Pointer operations for program memory in data memory. EXAMPLE 6-5: DIRECT ADDRESSING Direct Addressing specifies all or part of the source and/or destination address of the operation within the opcode itself. The options are specified by the arguments accompanying the instruction. In the core PIC18 instruction set, bit-oriented and byte-oriented instructions use some version of Direct Addressing by default. All of these instructions include some 8-bit literal address as their LSB. This address specifies either a register address in one of the banks of data RAM (Section 6.3.3 “General Purpose 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Register File”) or a location in the Access Bank (Section 6.3.2 “Access Bank”) as the data source for the instruction. NEXT LFSR CLRF BTFSS BRA CONTINUE Preliminary HOW TO CLEAR RAM (BANK 1) USING INDIRECT ADDRESSING FSR0, 0x100 ; POSTINC0 ; ; ; FSR0H, 1 ; ; NEXT ; ; Clear INDF register then inc pointer All done with Bank1? NO, clear next YES, continue DS39974A-page 101 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.4.3.1 FSR Registers and the INDF Operand (INDF) SFR space but are not physically implemented. Reading or writing to a particular INDF register actually accesses its corresponding FSR register pair. A read from INDF1, for example, reads the data at the address indicated by FSR1H:FSR1L. Instructions that use the INDF registers as operands actually use the contents of their corresponding FSR as a pointer to the instruction’s target. The INDF operand is just a convenient way of using the pointer. At the core of Indirect Addressing are three sets of registers: FSR0, FSR1 and FSR2. Each represents a pair of 8-bit registers, FSRnH and FSRnL. The four upper bits of the FSRnH register are not used, so each FSR pair holds a 12-bit value. This represents a value that can address the entire range of the data memory in a linear fashion. The FSR register pairs, then, serve as pointers to data memory locations. Because Indirect Addressing uses a full 12-bit address, data RAM banking is not necessary. Thus, the current contents of the BSR and the Access RAM bit have no effect on determining the target address. Indirect Addressing is accomplished with a set of INDF operands: INDF0 through INDF2. These can be presumed as “virtual” registers; they are mapped in the FIGURE 6-8: INDIRECT ADDRESSING 000h Using an instruction with one of the Indirect Addressing registers as the operand.... Bank 0 ADDWF, INDF1, 1 100h Bank 1 200h ...uses the 12-bit address stored in the FSR pair associated with that register.... 300h FSR1H:FSR1L 7 0 x x x x 1 1 1 1 7 0 Bank 2 Bank 3 through Bank 13 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 ...to determine the data memory location to be used in that operation. E00h In this case, the FSR1 pair contains FCCh. This means the contents of location, FCCh, will be added to that of the W register and stored back in FCCh. Bank 14 F00h FFFh Bank 15 Data Memory DS39974A-page 102 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.4.3.2 FSR Registers and POSTINC, POSTDEC, PREINC and PLUSW In addition to the INDF operand, each FSR register pair also has four additional indirect operands. Like INDF, these are “virtual” registers that cannot be indirectly read or written to. Accessing these registers actually accesses the associated FSR register pair, but also performs a specific action on its stored value. They are: • POSTDEC: accesses the FSR value, then automatically decrements it by one thereafter • POSTINC: accesses the FSR value, then automatically increments it by one thereafter • PREINC: increments the FSR value by one, then uses it in the operation • PLUSW: adds the signed value of the W register (range of -128 to +127) to that of the FSR and uses the new value in the operation In this context, accessing an INDF register uses the value in the FSR registers without changing them. Similarly, accessing a PLUSW register gives the FSR value offset by the value in the W register; neither value is actually changed in the operation. Accessing the other virtual registers changes the value of the FSR registers. Operations on the FSRs with POSTDEC, POSTINC and PREINC affect the entire register pair; that is, rollovers of the FSRnL register from FFh to 00h carry over to the FSRnH register. On the other hand, results of these operations do not change the value of any flags in the STATUS register (e.g., Z, N, OV, etc.). The PLUSW register can be used to implement a form of Indexed Addressing in the data memory space. By manipulating the value in the W register, users can reach addresses that are fixed offsets from pointer addresses. In some applications, this can be used to implement some powerful program control structure, such as software stacks, inside of data memory. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 6.4.3.3 Operations by FSRs on FSRs Indirect Addressing operations that target other FSRs or virtual registers represent special cases. For example, using an FSR to point to one of the virtual registers will not result in successful operations. As a specific case, assume that FSR0H:FSR0L contains FE7h, the address of INDF1. Attempts to read the value of the INDF1, using INDF0 as an operand, will return 00h. Attempts to write to INDF1, using INDF0 as the operand, will result in a NOP. On the other hand, using the virtual registers to write to an FSR pair may not occur as planned. In these cases, the value will be written to the FSR pair but without any incrementing or decrementing. Thus, writing to INDF2 or POSTDEC2 will write the same value to the FSR2H:FSR2L. Since the FSRs are physical registers mapped in the SFR space, they can be manipulated through all direct operations. Users should proceed cautiously when working on these registers, particularly if their code uses Indirect Addressing. Similarly, operations by Indirect Addressing are generally permitted on all other SFRs. Users should exercise appropriate caution that they do not inadvertently change settings that might affect the operation of the device. 6.5 Program Memory and the Extended Instruction Set The operation of program memory is unaffected by the use of the extended instruction set. Enabling the extended instruction set adds five additional two-word commands to the existing PIC18 instruction set: ADDFSR, CALLW, MOVSF, MOVSS and SUBFSR. These instructions are executed as described in Section 6.2.4 “Two-Word Instructions”. Preliminary DS39974A-page 103 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.6 Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set (XINST Configuration bit = 1) significantly changes certain aspects of data memory and its addressing. Specifically, the use of the Access Bank for many of the core PIC18 instructions is different. This is due to the introduction of a new addressing mode for the data memory space. This mode also alters the behavior of Indirect Addressing using FSR2 and its associated operands. Under these conditions, the file address of the instruction is not interpreted as the lower byte of an address (used with the BSR in Direct Addressing) or as an 8-bit address in the Access Bank. Instead, the value is interpreted as an offset value to an Address Pointer specified by FSR2. The offset and the contents of FSR2 are added to obtain the target address of the operation. 6.6.2 INSTRUCTIONS AFFECTED BY INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE What does not change is just as important. The size of the data memory space is unchanged, as well as its linear addressing. The SFR map remains the same. Core PIC18 instructions can still operate in both Direct and Indirect Addressing mode; inherent and literal instructions do not change at all. Indirect Addressing with FSR0 and FSR1 also remains unchanged. Any of the core PIC18 instructions that can use Direct Addressing are potentially affected by the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode. This includes all byte and bit-oriented instructions, or almost one half of the standard PIC18 instruction set. Instructions that only use Inherent or Literal Addressing modes are unaffected. 6.6.1 Additionally, byte and bit-oriented instructions are not affected if they do not use the Access Bank (Access RAM bit is ‘1’) or include a file address of 60h or above. Instructions meeting these criteria will continue to execute as before. A comparison of the different possible addressing modes when the extended instruction set is enabled is provided in Figure 6-9. INDEXED ADDRESSING WITH LITERAL OFFSET Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set changes the behavior of Indirect Addressing using the FSR2 register pair and its associated file operands. Under proper conditions, instructions that use the Access Bank, that is, most bit and byte-oriented instructions, can invoke a form of Indexed Addressing using an offset specified in the instruction. This special addressing mode is known as Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset or Indexed Literal Offset mode. Those who desire to use byte or bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode should note the changes to assembler syntax for this mode. This is described in more detail in Section 28.2.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax”. When using the extended instruction set, this addressing mode requires the following: • The use of the Access Bank is forced (‘a’ = 0); and • The file address argument is less than or equal to 5Fh. DS39974A-page 104 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 6-9: COMPARING ADDRESSING OPTIONS FOR BIT-ORIENTED AND BYTE-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS (EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ENABLED) Example Instruction: ADDWF, f, d, a (Opcode: 0010 01da ffff ffff) When a = 0 and f 60h: The instruction executes in Direct Forced mode. ‘f’ is interpreted as a location in the Access RAM between 060h and FFFh. This is the same as locations, F60h to FFFh (Bank 15), of data memory. Locations below 060h are not available in this addressing mode. 000h 060h Bank 0 100h 00h Bank 1 through Bank 14 F00h 60h Valid Range for ‘f’ Access RAM FFh Bank 15 F60h SFRs FFFh When a = 0 and f 5Fh: The instruction executes in Indexed Literal Offset mode. ‘f’ is interpreted as an offset to the address value in FSR2. The two are added together to obtain the address of the target register for the instruction. The address can be anywhere in the data memory space. Note that in this mode, the correct syntax is: ADDWF [k], d where ‘k’ is the same as ‘f’. When a = 1 (all values of f): The instruction executes in Direct mode (also known as Direct Long mode). ‘f’ is interpreted as a location in one of the 16 banks of the data memory space. The bank is designated by the Bank Select Register (BSR). The address can be in any implemented bank in the data memory space. Data Memory 000h Bank 0 060h 100h 001001da ffffffff Bank 1 through Bank 14 FSR2H FSR2L F00h Bank 15 F60h SFRs FFFh Data Memory BSR 00000000 000h Bank 0 060h 100h Bank 1 through Bank 14 001001da ffffffff F00h Bank 15 F60h SFRs FFFh 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Data Memory Preliminary DS39974A-page 105 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 6.6.3 MAPPING THE ACCESS BANK IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE The use of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode effectively changes how the lower part of Access RAM (00h to 5Fh) is mapped. Rather than containing just the contents of the bottom part of Bank 0, this mode maps the contents from Bank 0 and a user-defined “window” that can be located anywhere in the data memory space. The value of FSR2 establishes the lower boundary of the addresses mapped to the window, while the upper boundary is defined by FSR2 plus 95 (5Fh). Addresses in the Access RAM above 5Fh are mapped as previously described (see Section 6.3.2 “Access Bank”). Figure 6-10 provides an example of Access Bank remapping in this addressing mode. FIGURE 6-10: Remapping of the Access Bank applies only to operations using the Indexed Literal Offset mode. Operations that use the BSR (Access RAM bit is ‘1’) will continue to use Direct Addressing as before. Any Indirect or Indexed Addressing operation that explicitly uses any of the indirect file operands (including FSR2) will continue to operate as standard Indirect Addressing. Any instruction that uses the Access Bank, but includes a register address of greater than 05Fh, will use Direct Addressing and the normal Access Bank map. 6.6.4 BSR IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE Although the Access Bank is remapped when the extended instruction set is enabled, the operation of the BSR remains unchanged. Direct Addressing, using the BSR to select the data memory bank, operates in the same manner as previously described. REMAPPING THE ACCESS BANK WITH INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET ADDRESSING Example Situation: ADDWF f, d, a FSR2H:FSR2L = 120h Locations in the region from the FSR2 Pointer (120h) to the pointer plus 05Fh (17Fh) are mapped to the bottom of the Access RAM (000h-05Fh). 000h 05Fh Bank 0 100h 120h 17Fh 200h Window 00h Bank 1 Bank 1 “Window” 5Fh 60h Special Function Registers at F60h through FFFh are mapped to 60h through FFh, as usual. Bank 0 addresses below 5Fh are not available in this mode. They can still be addressed by using the BSR. Not Accessible Bank 2 through Bank 14 SFRs FFh Access Bank F00h Bank 15 F60h FFFh SFRs Data Memory DS39974A-page 106 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 7.0 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY 7.1 Table Reads and Table Writes The Flash program memory is readable, writable and erasable during normal operation over the entire VDD range. In order to read and write program memory, there are two operations that allow the processor to move bytes between the program memory space and the data RAM: A read from program memory is executed on 1 byte at a time. A write to program memory is executed on blocks of 64 bytes at a time or 2 bytes at a time. Program memory is erased in blocks of 1024 bytes at a time. A bulk erase operation may not be issued from user code. • Table Read (TBLRD) • Table Write (TBLWT) Writing or erasing program memory will cease instruction fetches until the operation is complete. The program memory cannot be accessed during the write or erase, therefore, code cannot execute. An internal programming timer terminates program memory writes and erases. A value written to program memory does not need to be a valid instruction. Executing a program memory location that forms an invalid instruction results in a NOP. The program memory space is 16 bits wide, while the data RAM space is 8 bits wide. Table reads and table writes move data between these two memory spaces through an 8-bit register (TABLAT). Table read operations retrieve data from program memory and place it into the data RAM space. Figure 7-1 illustrates the operation of a table read with program memory and data RAM. Table write operations store data from the data memory space into holding registers in program memory. The procedure to write the contents of the holding registers into program memory is detailed in Section 7.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. Figure 7-2 illustrates the operation of a table write with program memory and data RAM. Table operations work with byte entities. A table block containing data, rather than program instructions, is not required to be word-aligned. Therefore, a table block can start and end at any byte address. If a table write is being used to write executable code into program memory, program instructions will need to be word-aligned. FIGURE 7-1: TABLE READ OPERATION Instruction: TBLRD* Program Memory Table Pointer(1) TBLPTRU TBLPTRH Table Latch (8-bit) TBLPTRL TABLAT Program Memory (TBLPTR) Note 1: The Table Pointer register points to a byte in program memory. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 107 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 7-2: TABLE WRITE OPERATION Instruction: TBLWT* Program Memory Holding Registers Table Pointer(1) TBLPTRU TBLPTRH Table Latch (8-bit) TBLPTRL TABLAT Program Memory (TBLPTR) Note 1: 7.2 The Table Pointer actually points to one of 64 holding registers, the address of which is determined by TBLPTRL<5:0>. The process for physically writing data to the program memory array is discussed in Section 7.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. Control Registers Several control registers are used in conjunction with the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. Those are: • • • • EECON1 register EECON2 register TABLAT register TBLPTR registers 7.2.1 The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation. On power-up, the WREN bit is clear. The WRERR bit is set in hardware when the WR bit is set, and cleared when the internal programming timer expires and the write operation is complete. EECON1 AND EECON2 REGISTERS The EECON1 register (Register 7-1) is the control register for memory accesses. The EECON2 register is not a physical register; it is used exclusively in the memory write and erase sequences. Reading EECON2 will read all ‘0’s. The WPROG bit, when set, will allow programming two bytes per word on the execution of the WR command. If this bit is cleared, the WR command will result in programming on a block of 64 bytes. DS39974A-page 108 The FREE bit, when set, will allow a program memory erase operation. When FREE is set, the erase operation is initiated on the next WR command. When FREE is clear, only writes are enabled. Note: During normal operation, the WRERR is read as ‘1’. This can indicate that a write operation was prematurely terminated by a Reset or a write operation was attempted improperly. The WR control bit initiates write operations. The bit cannot be cleared, only set, in software. It is cleared in hardware at the completion of the write operation. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 7-1: EECON1: EEPROM CONTROL REGISTER 1 (ACCESS FA6h) U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-x R/W-0 R/S-0 U-0 — — WPROG FREE WRERR WREN WR — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: S = Settable bit (cannot be cleared in software) R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 WPROG: One Word-Wide Program bit 1 = Program 2 bytes on the next WR command 0 = Program 64 bytes on the next WR command bit 4 FREE: Flash Erase Enable bit 1 = Perform an erase operation on the next WR command (cleared by hardware after completion of erase) 0 = Perform write-only bit 3 WRERR: Flash Program Error Flag bit 1 = A write operation is prematurely terminated (any Reset during self-timed programming in normal operation or an improper write attempt) 0 = The write operation completed bit 2 WREN: Flash Program Write Enable bit 1 = Allows write cycles to Flash program memory 0 = Inhibits write cycles to Flash program memory bit 1 WR: Write-Control bit 1 = Initiates a program memory erase cycle or write cycle (The operation is self-timed and the bit is cleared by hardware once the write is complete. The WR bit can only be set (not cleared) in software.) 0 = Write cycle is complete bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 109 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 7.2.2 TABLE LATCH REGISTER (TABLAT) 7.2.4 TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES The Table Latch (TABLAT) is an 8-bit register mapped into the Special Function Register (SFR) space. The Table Latch register is used to hold 8-bit data during data transfers between program memory and data RAM. TBLPTR is used in reads, writes and erases of the Flash program memory. 7.2.3 When a TBLWT is executed, the seven Least Significant bits (LSbs) of the Table Pointer register (TBLPTR<6:0>) determine which of the 64 program memory holding registers is written to. When the timed write to program memory begins (via the WR bit), the 12 Most Significant bits (MSbs) of the TBLPTR (TBLPTR<21:10>) determine which program memory block of 1024 bytes is written to. For more information, see Section 7.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”. When a TBLRD is executed, all 22 bits of the TBLPTR determine which byte is read from program memory into TABLAT. TABLE POINTER REGISTER (TBLPTR) The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register addresses a byte within the program memory. The TBLPTR comprises three SFR registers: Table Pointer Upper Byte, Table Pointer High Byte and Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTRU:TBLPTRH:TBLPTRL). These three registers join to form a 22-bit wide pointer. The low-order 21 bits allow the device to address up to 2 Mbytes of program memory space. The 22nd bit allows access to the Device ID, the User ID and the Configuration bits. When an erase of program memory is executed, the 12 MSbs of the Table Pointer register point to the 1024-byte block that will be erased. The LSbs are ignored. The Table Pointer register, TBLPTR, is used by the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These instructions can update the TBLPTR in one of four ways based on the table operation. Figure 7-3 illustrates the relevant boundaries of the TBLPTR based on Flash program memory operations. Table 7-1 displays these operations. On the TBLPTRT, these operations only affect the low-order 21 bits. TABLE 7-1: TABLE POINTER OPERATIONS WITH TBLRD AND TBLWT INSTRUCTIONS Example Operation on Table Pointer TBLRD* TBLWT* TBLPTR is not modified TBLRD*+ TBLWT*+ TBLPTR is incremented after the read/write TBLRD*TBLWT*- TBLPTR is decremented after the read/write TBLRD+* TBLWT+* TBLPTR is incremented before the read/write FIGURE 7-3: 21 TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES BASED ON OPERATION TBLPTRU 16 15 TBLPTRH 8 7 TBLPTRL 0 ERASE: TBLPTR<20:10> TABLE WRITE: TBLPTR<20:6> TABLE READ: TBLPTR<21:0> DS39974A-page 110 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 7.3 The TBLPTR points to a byte address in program space. Executing TBLRD places the byte pointed to into TABLAT. In addition, the TBLPTR can be modified automatically for the next table read operation. Reading the Flash Program Memory The TBLRD instruction is used to retrieve data from program memory and places it into data RAM. Table reads from program memory are performed one byte at a time. The internal program memory is typically organized by words. The LSb of the address selects between the high and low bytes of the word. Figure 7-4 illustrates the interface between the internal program memory and the TABLAT. FIGURE 7-4: READS FROM FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY Program Memory (Even Byte Address) (Odd Byte Address) TBLPTR = xxxxx1 Instruction Register (IR) EXAMPLE 7-1: FETCH TBLRD TBLPTR = xxxxx0 TABLAT Read Register READING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WORD MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW TBLPTRL ; Load TBLPTR with the base ; address of the word READ_WORD TBLRD*+ MOVF MOVWF TBLRD*+ MOVF MOVWF TABLAT, W WORD_EVEN TABLAT, W WORD_ODD 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. ; read into TABLAT and increment ; get data ; read into TABLAT and increment ; get data Preliminary DS39974A-page 111 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 7.4 Erasing Flash Program Memory The minimum erase block is 512 words or 1024 bytes. Only through the use of an external programmer, or through ICSP control, can larger blocks of program memory be bulk erased. Word erase in the Flash array is not supported. When initiating an erase sequence from the microcontroller itself, a block of 1024 bytes of program memory is erased. The Most Significant 12 bits of the TBLPTR<21:10> point to the block being erased; TBLPTR<9:0> are ignored. The EECON1 register commands the erase operation. The WREN bit must be set to enable write operations. The FREE bit is set to select an erase operation. For protection, the write initiate sequence for EECON2 must be used. 7.4.1 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY ERASE SEQUENCE The sequence of events for erasing a block of internal program memory location is: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Load Table Pointer register with address of row being erased. Set the WREN and FREE bits (EECON1<2,4>) to enable the erase operation. Disable interrupts. Write 55h to EECON2. Write 0AAh to EECON2. Set the WR bit; this will begin the erase cycle. The CPU will stall for the duration of the erase for TIE (see parameter D133B). Re-enable interrupts. A long write is necessary for erasing the internal Flash. Instruction execution is Halted while in a long write cycle. The long write will be terminated by the internal programming timer. EXAMPLE 7-2: ERASING FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW TBLPTRL ; load TBLPTR with the base ; address of the memory block BSF BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF EECON1, EECON1, INTCON, 0x55 EECON2 0xAA EECON2 EECON1, INTCON, ; enable write to memory ; enable Erase operation ; disable interrupts ERASE_ROW Required Sequence DS39974A-page 112 WREN FREE GIE ; write 55h WR GIE ; write 0AAh ; start erase (CPU stall) ; re-enable interrupts Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 7.5 The on-chip timer controls the write time. The write/erase voltages are generated by an on-chip charge pump, rated to operate over the voltage range of the device. Writing to Flash Program Memory The programming block is 32 words or 64 bytes. Programming one word or 2 bytes at a time is also supported. Note 1: Unlike previous PIC® devices, devices of the PIC18F47J13 family do not reset the holding registers after a write occurs. The holding registers must be cleared or overwritten before a programming sequence. Table writes are used internally to load the holding registers needed to program the Flash memory. There are 64 holding registers used by the table writes for programming. Since the Table Latch (TABLAT) is only a single byte, the TBLWT instruction may need to be executed 64 times for each programming operation (if WPROG = 0). All of the table write operations will essentially be short writes because only the holding registers are written. At the end of updating the 64 holding registers, the EECON1 register must be written to in order to start the programming operation with a long write. 2: To maintain the endurance of the program memory cells, each Flash byte should not be programmed more than once between erase operations. Before attempting to modify the contents of the target cell a second time, an erase of the target page, or a bulk erase of the entire memory, must be performed. The long write is necessary for programming the internal Flash. Instruction execution is Halted while in a long write cycle. The long write will be terminated by the internal programming timer. FIGURE 7-5: TABLE WRITES TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY TABLAT Write Register 8 8 TBLPTR = xxxxx0 8 TBLPTR = xxxxx2 TBLPTR = xxxxx1 Holding Register Holding Register 8 TBLPTR = xxxx3F Holding Register Holding Register Program Memory 7.5.1 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WRITE SEQUENCE The sequence of events for programming an internal program memory location should be: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Read 1024 bytes into RAM. Update data values in RAM as necessary. Load the Table Pointer register with address being erased. Execute the erase procedure. Load the Table Pointer register with the address of the first byte being written, minus 1. Write the 64 bytes into the holding registers with auto-increment. Set the WREN bit (EECON1<2>) to enable byte writes. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Disable interrupts. Write 55h to EECON2. Write 0AAh to EECON2. Set the WR bit; this will begin the write cycle. The CPU will stall for the duration of the write for TIW (see parameter D133A). 13. Re-enable interrupts. 14. Repeat Steps 6 through 13 until all 1024 bytes are written to program memory. 15. Verify the memory (table read). An example of the required code is provided in Example 7-3 on the following page. Note: Preliminary Before setting the WR bit, the Table Pointer address needs to be within the intended address range of the 64 bytes in the holding register. DS39974A-page 113 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY EXAMPLE 7-3: WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW TBLPTRL ; Load TBLPTR with the base address ; of the memory block, minus 1 BSF BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF MOVLW MOVWF EECON1, WREN EECON1, FREE INTCON, GIE 0x55 EECON2 0xAA EECON2 EECON1, WR INTCON, GIE D'16' WRITE_COUNTER ; enable write to memory ; enable Erase operation ; disable interrupts MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF D'64' COUNTER BUFFER_ADDR_HIGH FSR0H BUFFER_ADDR_LOW FSR0L ERASE_BLOCK ; write 55h ; write 0AAh ; start erase (CPU stall) ; re-enable interrupts ; Need to write 16 blocks of 64 to write ; one erase block of 1024 RESTART_BUFFER ; point to buffer FILL_BUFFER ... ; read the new data from I2C, SPI, ; PSP, USART, etc. WRITE_BUFFER MOVLW MOVWF WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS MOVFF MOVWF TBLWT+* D'64' COUNTER ; number of bytes in holding register POSTINC0, WREG TABLAT ; ; ; ; ; DECFSZ COUNTER BRA WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS get low byte of buffer data present data to table latch write data, perform a short write to internal TBLWT holding register. loop until buffers are full PROGRAM_MEMORY Required Sequence BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF BCF EECON1, INTCON, 0x55 EECON2 0xAA EECON2 EECON1, INTCON, EECON1, WREN GIE ; write 55h WR GIE WREN DECFSZ WRITE_COUNTER BRA RESTART_BUFFER DS39974A-page 114 ; enable write to memory ; disable interrupts ; ; ; ; write 0AAh start program (CPU stall) re-enable interrupts disable write to memory ; done with one write cycle ; if not done replacing the erase block Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 7.5.2 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WRITE SEQUENCE (WORD PROGRAMMING) 3. The PIC18F47J13 family of devices has a feature that allows programming a single word (two bytes). This feature is enabled when the WPROG bit is set. If the memory location is already erased, the following sequence is required to enable this feature: 1. 2. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Load the Table Pointer register with the address of the data to be written. (It must be an even address.) Write the 2 bytes into the holding registers by performing table writes. (Do not post-increment EXAMPLE 7-4: 9. on the second table write.) Set the WREN bit (EECON1<2>) to enable writes and the WPROG bit (EECON1<5>) to select Word Write mode. Disable interrupts. Write 55h to EECON2. Write 0AAh to EECON2. Set the WR bit; this will begin the write cycle. The CPU will stall for the duration of the write for TIW (see parameter D133A). Re-enable interrupts. SINGLE-WORD WRITE TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW CODE_ADDR_UPPER TBLPTRU CODE_ADDR_HIGH TBLPTRH CODE_ADDR_LOW ; Load TBLPTR with the base address MOVWF TBLPTRL MOVLW MOVWF TBLWT*+ MOVLW MOVWF TBLWT* DATA0 TABLAT ; LSB of word to be written DATA1 TABLAT ; MSB of word to be written BSF BSF BCF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF BSF BCF BCF EECON1, EECON1, INTCON, 0x55 EECON2 0xAA EECON2 EECON1, INTCON, EECON1, EECON1, ; The table pointer must be loaded with an even address ; The last table write must not increment the table pointer! The table pointer needs to point to the MSB before starting the write operation. PROGRAM_MEMORY Required Sequence 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. WPROG WREN GIE ; enable single word write ; enable write to memory ; disable interrupts ; write 55h WR GIE WPROG WREN ; ; ; ; ; write AAh start program (CPU stall) re-enable interrupts disable single word write disable write to memory Preliminary DS39974A-page 115 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 7.5.3 WRITE VERIFY Depending on the application, good programming practice may dictate that the value written to the memory should be verified against the original value. This should be used in applications where excessive writes can stress bits near the specification limit. 7.5.4 UNEXPECTED TERMINATION OF WRITE OPERATION If a write is terminated by an unplanned event, such as loss of power or an unexpected Reset, the memory location just programmed should be verified and TABLE 7-2: Name TBLPTRU reprogrammed if needed. If the write operation is interrupted by a MCLR Reset, or a WDT time-out Reset during normal operation, the user can check the WRERR bit and rewrite the location(s) as needed. 7.6 Flash Program Operation During Code Protection See Section 27.6 “Program Verification and Code Protection” for details on code protection of Flash program memory. REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 — — bit 21 Bit 4 Bit 3 Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>) TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>) TABLAT Program Memory Table Latch EECON2 EECON1 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE Bit 1 Bit 0 Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>) TBPLTRH INTCON Bit 2 INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF WREN WR — Program Memory Control Register 2 (not a physical register) — — WPROG FREE WRERR Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used during Flash program memory access. DS39974A-page 116 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 8.0 8 x 8 HARDWARE MULTIPLIER 8.1 Introduction EXAMPLE 8-1: MOVF MULWF All PIC18 devices include an 8 x 8 hardware multiplier as part of the ALU. The multiplier performs an unsigned operation and yields a 16-bit result that is stored in the product register pair, PRODH:PRODL. The multiplier’s operation does not affect any flags in the STATUS register. ARG1, W ARG2 EXAMPLE 8-2: Making multiplication a hardware operation allows it to be completed in a single instruction cycle. This has the advantages of higher computational throughput and reduced code size for multiplication algorithms and allows the PIC18 devices to be used in many applications previously reserved for digital signal processors. Table 8-1 provides a comparison of various hardware and software multiply operations, along with the savings in memory and execution time. 8.2 8 x 8 UNSIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE ; ; ARG1 * ARG2 -> ; PRODH:PRODL 8 x 8 SIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE MOVF MULWF ARG1, W ARG2 BTFSC SUBWF ARG2, SB PRODH, F MOVF BTFSC SUBWF ARG2, W ARG1, SB PRODH, F ; ; ; ; ; ARG1 * ARG2 -> PRODH:PRODL Test Sign Bit PRODH = PRODH - ARG1 ; Test Sign Bit ; PRODH = PRODH ; - ARG2 Operation Example 8-1 provides the instruction sequence for an 8 x 8 unsigned multiplication. Only one instruction is required when one of the arguments is already loaded in the WREG register. Example 8-2 provides the instruction sequence for an 8 x 8 signed multiplication. To account for the sign bits of the arguments, each argument’s Most Significant bit (MSb) is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done. TABLE 8-1: PERFORMANCE COMPARISON FOR VARIOUS MULTIPLY OPERATIONS Routine 8 x 8 unsigned 8 x 8 signed 16 x 16 unsigned 16 x 16 signed Program Memory (Words) Cycles (Max) Without hardware multiply 13 Hardware multiply 1 Without hardware multiply 33 Hardware multiply 6 Without hardware multiply Multiply Method Time @ 48 MHz @ 10 MHz @ 4 MHz 69 5.7 s 27.6 s 69 s 1 83.3 ns 400 ns 1 s 91 7.5 s 36.4 s 91 s 6 500 ns 2.4 s 6 s 21 242 20.1 s 96.8 s 242 s Hardware multiply 28 28 2.3 s 11.2 s 28 s Without hardware multiply 52 254 21.6 s 102.6 s 254 s Hardware multiply 35 40 3.3 s 16.0 s 40 s 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 117 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY Example 8-3 provides the instruction sequence for a 16 x 16 unsigned multiplication. Equation 8-1 provides the algorithm that is used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers (RES3:RES0). EQUATION 8-1: RES3:RES0 = = EXAMPLE 8-3: EQUATION 8-2: RES3:RES0 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MULTIPLICATION ALGORITHM ARG1H:ARG1L · ARG2H:ARG2L (ARG1H · ARG2H · 216) + (ARG1H · ARG2L · 28) + (ARG1L · ARG2H · 28) + (ARG1L · ARG2L) EXAMPLE 8-4: ARG1L, W ARG2L MOVFF MOVFF PRODH, RES1 PRODL, RES0 MOVF MULWF ARG1H, W ARG2H MOVFF MOVFF PRODH, RES3 PRODL, RES2 MOVF MULWF ARG1L, W ARG2H MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F MOVF MULWF ARG1H, W ARG2L MOVFF MOVFF PRODH, RES1 PRODL, RES0 MOVF MULWF ARG1H, W ARG2H MOVFF MOVFF PRODH, RES3 PRODL, RES2 MOVF MULWF ARG1L, W ARG2H MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F MOVF MULWF ARG1H, W ARG2L MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F BTFSS BRA MOVF SUBWF MOVF SUBWFB ARG2H, 7 SIGN_ARG1 ARG1L, W RES2 ARG1H, W RES3 ; ARG2H:ARG2L neg? ; no, check ARG1 ; ; ; SIGN_ARG1 BTFSS BRA MOVF SUBWF MOVF SUBWFB ARG1H, 7 CONT_CODE ARG2L, W RES2 ARG2H, W RES3 ; ARG1H:ARG1L neg? ; no, done ; ; ; ; ARG1H * ARG2H-> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ARG1L * ARG2H-> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products ARG1H * ARG2L-> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products Example 8-4 provides the sequence to do a 16 x 16 signed multiply. Equation 8-2 provides the algorithm used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers (RES3:RES0). To account for the sign bits of the arguments, the MSb for each argument pair is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done. 16 x 16 SIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE ARG1L, W ARG2L ; ARG1L * ARG2L-> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ARG1H:ARG1L · ARG2H:ARG2L (ARG1H · ARG2H · 216) + (ARG1H · ARG2L · 28) + (ARG1L · ARG2H · 28) + (ARG1L · ARG2L) + (-1 · ARG2H<7> · ARG1H:ARG1L · 216) + (-1 · ARG1H<7> · ARG2H:ARG2L · 216) MOVF MULWF 16 x 16 UNSIGNED MULTIPLY ROUTINE MOVF MULWF = = 16 x 16 SIGNED MULTIPLICATION ALGORITHM ; ARG1L * ARG2L -> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; ; ARG1H * ARG2H -> ; PRODH:PRODL ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ARG1L * ARG2H -> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products ARG1H * ARG2L -> PRODH:PRODL Add cross products CONT_CODE : DS39974A-page 118 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 9.0 INTERRUPTS Devices of the PIC18F47J13 family have multiple interrupt sources and an interrupt priority feature that allows most interrupt sources to be assigned a high-priority level or a low-priority level. The high-priority interrupt vector is at 0008h and the low-priority interrupt vector is at 0018h. High-priority interrupt events will interrupt any low-priority interrupts that may be in progress. There are 19 registers, which are used to control interrupt operation. These registers are: • • • • • • • RCON INTCON INTCON2 INTCON3 PIR1, PIR2, PIR3, PIR4, PIR5 PIE1, PIE2, PIE3, PIE4, PIE5 IPR1, IPR2, IPR3, IPR4, IPR5 It is recommended that the Microchip header files supplied with MPLAB® IDE be used for the symbolic bit names in these registers. This allows the assembler/compiler to automatically take care of the placement of these bits within the specified register. In general, interrupt sources have three bits to control their operation. They are: When an interrupt is responded to, the global interrupt enable bit is cleared to disable further interrupts. If the IPEN bit is cleared, this is the GIE bit. If interrupt priority levels are used, this will be either the GIEH or GIEL bit. High-priority interrupt sources can interrupt a low-priority interrupt. Low-priority interrupts are not processed while high-priority interrupts are in progress. The return address is pushed onto the stack and the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector address (0008h or 0018h). Once in the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR), the source(s) of the interrupt can be determined by polling the interrupt flag bits. The interrupt flag bits must be cleared in software before re-enabling interrupts to avoid recursive interrupts. The “return from interrupt” instruction, RETFIE, exits the interrupt routine and sets the GIE bit (GIEH or GIEL if priority levels are used), which re-enables interrupts. For external interrupt events, such as the INTx pins or the PORTB input change interrupt, the interrupt latency will be three to four instruction cycles. The exact latency is the same for one or two-cycle instructions. Individual interrupt flag bits are set regardless of the status of their corresponding enable bit or the GIE bit. • Flag bit to indicate that an interrupt event occurred • Enable bit that allows program execution to branch to the interrupt vector address when the flag bit is set • Priority bit to select high priority or low priority The interrupt priority feature is enabled by setting the IPEN bit (RCON<7>). When interrupt priority is enabled, there are two bits which enable interrupts globally. Setting the GIEH bit (INTCON<7>) enables all interrupts that have the priority bit set (high priority). Setting the GIEL bit (INTCON<6>) enables all interrupts that have the priority bit cleared (low priority). When the interrupt flag, enable bit and appropriate global interrupt enable bit are set, the interrupt will vector immediately to address, 0008h or 0018h, depending on the priority bit setting. Individual interrupts can be disabled through their corresponding enable bits. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. When the IPEN bit is cleared (default state), the interrupt priority feature is disabled and interrupts are compatible with PIC® mid-range devices. In Compatibility mode, the interrupt priority bits for each source have no effect. INTCON<6> is the PEIE bit, which enables/disables all peripheral interrupt sources. INTCON<7> is the GIE bit, which enables/disables all interrupt sources. All interrupts branch to address 0008h in Compatibility mode. Note: Preliminary Do not use the MOVFF instruction to modify any of the Interrupt Control registers while any interrupt is enabled. Doing so may cause erratic microcontroller behavior. DS39974A-page 119 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 9-1: PIC18F47J13 FAMILY INTERRUPT LOGIC PIR4<7:0> PIE4<7:0> IPR4<7:0> PIR5<5:0> PIE5<5:0> IPR5<5:0> INT1IF INT1IE INT1IP INT2IF INT2IE INT2IP INT3IF INT3IE INT3IP PIR1<7:0> PIE1<7:0> IPR1<7:0> PIR2<7:0> PIE2<7:0> IPR2<7:0> Wake-up if in Idle or Sleep modes TMR0IF TMR0IE TMR0IP RBIF RBIE RBIP INT0IF INT0IE Interrupt to CPU Vector to Location 0008h GIE/GIEH IPEN PIR3<7:0> PIE3<7:0> IPR3<7:0> IPEN PEIE/GIEL IPEN High-Priority Interrupt Generation Low-Priority Interrupt Generation PIR1<7:0> PIE1<7:0> IPR1<7:0> PIR2<7:0> PIE2<7:0> IPR2<7:0> PIR3<7:0> PIE3<7:0> IPR3<7:0> PIR4<7:0> PIE4<7:0> IPR4<7:0> PIR5<5:0> PIE5<5:0> IPR5<5:0> DS39974A-page 120 TMR0IF TMR0IE TMR0IP RBIF RBIE RBIP INT1IF INT1IE INT1IP INT2IF INT2IE INT2IP INT3IF INT3IE INT3IP Preliminary Interrupt to CPU Vector to Location 0018h IPEN GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 9.1 INTCON Registers Note: The INTCON registers are readable and writable registers, which contain various enable, priority and flag bits. REGISTER 9-1: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. INTCON: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS FF2h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-x GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GIE/GIEH: Global Interrupt Enable bit When IPEN = 0: 1 = Enables all unmasked interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts When IPEN = 1: 1 = Enables all high-priority interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts bit 6 PEIE/GIEL: Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit When IPEN = 0: 1 = Enables all unmasked peripheral interrupts 0 = Disables all peripheral interrupts When IPEN = 1: 1 = Enables all low-priority peripheral interrupts 0 = Disables all low-priority peripheral interrupts bit 5 TMR0IE: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR0 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR0 overflow interrupt bit 4 INT0IE: INT0 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT0 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT0 external interrupt bit 3 RBIE: RB Port Change Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the RB port change interrupt 0 = Disables the RB port change interrupt bit 2 TMR0IF: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The TMR0 register has overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = The TMR0 register did not overflow bit 1 INT0IF: INT0 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT0 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT0 external interrupt did not occur bit 0 RBIF: RB Port Change Interrupt Flag bit(1) 1 = At least one of the RB<7:4> pins changed state (must be cleared in software) 0 = None of the RB<7:4> pins have changed state Note 1: A mismatch condition will continue to set this bit. Reading PORTB and waiting 1 TCY will end the mismatch condition and allow the bit to be cleared. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 121 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-2: INTCON2: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 2 (ACCESS FF1h) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 RBPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 INTEDG3 TMR0IP INT3IP RBIP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 RBPU: PORTB Pull-up Enable bit 1 = All PORTB pull-ups are disabled 0 = PORTB pull-ups are enabled by individual port latch values bit 6 INTEDG0: External Interrupt 0 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 5 INTEDG1: External Interrupt 1 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 4 INTEDG2: External Interrupt 2 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 3 INTEDG3: External Interrupt 3 Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge 0 = Interrupt on falling edge bit 2 TMR0IP: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 INT3IP: INT3 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 RBIP: RB Port Change Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority Note: x = Bit is unknown Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. DS39974A-page 122 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-3: INTCON3: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 3 (ACCESS FF0h) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 INT2IP INT1IP INT3IE INT2IE INT1IE INT3IF INT2IF INT1IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 INT2IP: INT2 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 INT1IP: INT1 External Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 INT3IE: INT3 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT3 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT3 external interrupt bit 4 INT2IE: INT2 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT2 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT2 external interrupt bit 3 INT1IE: INT1 External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the INT1 external interrupt 0 = Disables the INT1 external interrupt bit 2 INT3IF: INT3 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT3 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT3 external interrupt did not occur bit 1 INT2IF: INT2 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT2 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT2 external interrupt did not occur bit 0 INT1IF: INT1 External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The INT1 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The INT1 external interrupt did not occur Note: x = Bit is unknown Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 123 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 9.2 PIR Registers Note 1: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the Global Interrupt Enable bit, GIE (INTCON<7>). The PIR registers contain the individual flag bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are three Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) registers (PIR1, PIR2, PIR3). REGISTER 9-4: 2: User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are cleared prior to enabling an interrupt and after servicing that interrupt. PIR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 1 (ACCESS F9Eh) R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PMPIF(1) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 PMPIF: Parallel Master Port Read/Write Interrupt Flag bit(1) 1 = A read or a write operation has taken place (must be cleared in software) 0 = No read or write has occurred bit 6 ADIF: A/D Converter Interrupt Flag bit 1 = An A/D conversion completed (must be cleared in software) 0 = The A/D conversion is not complete bit 5 RC1IF: EUSART1 Receive Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART1 receive buffer, RCREG1, is full (cleared when RCREG1 is read) 0 = The EUSART1 receive buffer is empty bit 4 TX1IF: EUSART1 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART1 transmit buffer, TXREG1, is empty (cleared when TXREG1 is written) 0 = The EUSART1 transmit buffer is full bit 3 SSP1IF: Master Synchronous Serial Port 1 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The transmission/reception is complete (must be cleared in software) 0 = Waiting to transmit/receive bit 2 CCP1IF: ECCP1 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode. bit 1 TMR2IF: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR2 to PR2 match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR2 to PR2 match occurred bit 0 TMR1IF: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR1 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = TMR1 register did not overflow Note 1: These bits are unimplemented on 28-pin devices. DS39974A-page 124 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-5: R/W-0 PIR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 2 (ACCESS FA1h) R/W-0 OSCFIF CM2IF R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CM1IF — BCL1IF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 OSCFIF: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The device oscillator failed, clock input has changed to INTOSC (must be cleared in software) 0 = The device clock operating bit 6 CM2IF: Comparator 2 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The comparator input has changed (must be cleared in software) 0 = The comparator input has not changed bit 5 CM1IF: Comparator 1 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The comparator input has changed (must be cleared in software) 0 = The comparator input has not changed bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 BCL1IF: Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit (MSSP1 module) 1 = A bus collision occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No bus collision occurred bit 2 HLVDIF: High/Low-Voltage Detect (HLVD) Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A High/Low-Voltage condition occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = An HLVD event has not occurred bit 1 TMR3IF: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The TMR3 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = The TMR3 register did not overflow bit 0 CCP2IF: ECCP2 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1/TMR3 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 125 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-6: PIR3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 3 (ACCESS FA4h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SSP2IF: Master Synchronous Serial Port 2 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The transmission/reception is complete (must be cleared in software) 0 = Waiting to transmit/receive bit 6 BCL2IF: Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit (MSSP2 module) 1 = A bus collision occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No bus collision occurred bit 5 RC2IF: EUSART2 Receive Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART2 receive buffer, RCREG2, is full (cleared when RCREG2 is read) 0 = The EUSART2 receive buffer is empty bit 4 TX2IF: EUSART2 Transmit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The EUSART2 transmit buffer, TXREG2, is empty (cleared when TXREG2 is written) 0 = The EUSART2 transmit buffer is full bit 3 TMR4IF: TMR4 to PR4 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A TMR4 to PR4 match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR4 to PR4 match occurred bit 2 CTMUIF: Charge Time Measurement Unit Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A CTMU event has occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = A CTMU event has not occurred bit 1 TMR3GIF: Timer3 Gate Event Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A Timer3 gate event completed (must be cleared in software) 0 = No Timer3 gate event completed bit 0 RTCCIF: RTCC Interrupt Flag bit 1 = An RTCC interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No RTCC interrupt occurred DS39974A-page 126 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-7: PIR4: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 4 (ACCESS F8Fh) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CCP10IF CCP9IF CCP8IF CCP7IF CCP6IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-1 CCP10IF:CCP4IF: CCP<10:4> Interrupt Flag bits Capture Mode 1 = A TMR register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR register capture occurred Compare Mode 1 = A TMR register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR register compare match occurred PWM Mode Unused in this mode. bit 0 CCP3IF: ECCP3 Interrupt Flag bit Capture Mode 1 = A TMR register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR register capture occurred Compare Mode 1 = A TMR register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR register compare match occurred PWM Mode Unused in this mode. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 127 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-8: PIR5: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 5 (ACCESS F98h) U-0 U-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — CM3IF TMR8IF TMR6IF TMR5IF TMR5GIF TMR1GIF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 CM3IF: Comparator Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Comparator 3 input has changed (must be cleared in software) 0 = Comparator 3 input has not changed bit 4 TMR8IF: TMR8 to PR8 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR8 to PR8 match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR8 to PR8 match occurred bit 3 TMR6IF: TMR6 to PR6 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR6 to PR6 match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR6 to PR6 match occurred bit 2 TMR5IF: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR3 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = TMR3 register did not overflow bit 1 TMR5GIF: TMR5 Gate Interrupt Flag bits 1 = TMR gate interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR gate interrupt occurred bit 0 TMR1GIF: TMR5 Gate Interrupt Flag bits 1 = TMR gate interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR gate interrupt occurred DS39974A-page 128 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 9.3 PIE Registers The PIE registers contain the individual enable bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are three Peripheral Interrupt Enable registers (PIE1, PIE2, PIE3). When IPEN = 0, the PEIE bit must be set to enable any of these peripheral interrupts. REGISTER 9-9: R/W-0 PIE1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 1 (ACCESS F9Dh) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE (1) PMPIE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 PMPIE: Parallel Master Port Read/Write Interrupt Enable bit(1) 1 = Enables the PMP read/write interrupt 0 = Disables the PMP read/write interrupt bit 6 ADIE: A/D Converter Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the A/D interrupt 0 = Disables the A/D interrupt bit 5 RC1IE: EUSART1 Receive Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the EUSART1 receive interrupt 0 = Disables the EUSART1 receive interrupt bit 4 TX1IE: EUSART1 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the EUSART1 transmit interrupt 0 = Disables the EUSART1 transmit interrupt bit 3 SSP1IE: Master Synchronous Serial Port 1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the MSSP1 interrupt 0 = Disables the MSSP1 interrupt bit 2 CCP1IE: ECCP1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the ECCP1 interrupt 0 = Disables the ECCP1 interrupt bit 1 TMR2IE: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt bit 0 TMR1IE: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR1 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR1 overflow interrupt Note 1: x = Bit is unknown These bits are unimplemented on 28-pin devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 129 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-10: R/W-0 PIE2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 2 (ACCESS FA0h) R/W-0 OSCFIE CM2IE R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CM1IE — BCL1IE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 OSCFIE: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 6 CM2IE: Comparator 2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 5 CM1IE: Comparator 1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 BCL1IE: Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit (MSSP1 module) 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 2 HLVDIE: High/Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 1 TMR3IE: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 0 CCP2IE: ECCP2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled DS39974A-page 130 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-11: PIE3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 3 (ACCESS FA3h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 SSP2IE: Master Synchronous Serial Port 2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 6 BCL2IE: Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit (MSSP2 module) 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 5 RC2IE: EUSART2 Receive Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 4 TX2IE: EUSART2 Transmit Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 3 TMR4IE: TMR4 to PR4 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 2 CTMUIE: Charge Time Measurement Unit (CTMU) Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 1 TMR3GIE: Timer3 Gate Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 0 RTCCIE: RTCC Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39974A-page 131 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-12: PIE4: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 4 (ACCESS F8Eh) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CCP10IE CCP9IE CCP8IE CCP7IE CCP6IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-1 CCP10IE:CCP4IE: CCP<10:4> Interrupt Enable bits 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 0 CCP3IE: ECCP3 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled REGISTER 9-13: x = Bit is unknown PIE5: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 5 (ACCESS F91h) U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — CM3IE TMR8IE TMR6IE TMR5IE TMR5GIE TMR1GIE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 CM3IE: Comparator 3 Receive Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 4 TMR8IE: TMR8 to PR8 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 3 TMR6IE: TMR6 to PR6 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 2 TMR5IE: TMR5 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 1 TMR5GIE: TMR5 Gate Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled bit 0 TMR1GIE: TMR1 Gate Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enabled 0 = Disabled DS39974A-page 132 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 9.4 IPR Registers The IPR registers contain the individual priority bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are three Peripheral Interrupt Priority registers (IPR1, IPR2, IPR3). Using the priority bits requires that the Interrupt Priority Enable (IPEN) bit be set. REGISTER 9-14: IPR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 1 (ACCESS F9Fh) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 PMPIP(1) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 PMPIP: Parallel Master Port Read/Write Interrupt Priority bit(1) 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 ADIP: A/D Converter Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 RC1IP: EUSART1 Receive Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 4 TX1IP: EUSART1 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit x = Bit is unknown 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 3 SSP1IP: Master Synchronous Serial Port Interrupt Priority bit (MSSP1 module) 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 2 CCP1IP: ECCP1 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 TMR2IP: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 TMR1IP: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority Note 1: These bits are unimplemented on 28-pin devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 133 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-15: R/W-1 IPR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 2 (ACCESS FA2h) R/W-1 OSCFIP CM2IP R/W-1 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 CM1IP — BCL1IP HLVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 OSCFIP: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 CM2IP: Comparator 2 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 C12IP: Comparator 1 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 BCL1IP: Bus Collision Interrupt Priority bit (MSSP1 module) 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 2 HLVDIP: High/Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 TMR3IP: TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 CCP2IP: ECCP2 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority DS39974A-page 134 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-16: IPR3: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 3 (ACCESS FA5h) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCIP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 SSP2IP: Master Synchronous Serial Port 2 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 6 BCL2IP: Bus Collision Interrupt Priority bit (MSSP2 module) 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 5 RC2IP: EUSART2 Receive Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 4 TX2IP: EUSART2 Transmit Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 3 TMR4IE: TMR4 to PR4 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 2 CTMUIP: Charge Time Measurement Unit (CTMU) Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 TMR3GIP: Timer3 Gate Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 RTCCIP: RTCC Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39974A-page 135 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 9-17: IPR4: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 4 (ACCESS F90h) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 CCP10IP CCP9IP CCP8IP CCP7IP CCP6IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-1 CCP10IP:CCP4IP: CCP<10:4> Interrupt Priority bits 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 CCP3IP: ECCP3 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority REGISTER 9-18: x = Bit is unknown IPR5: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 5 (ACCESS F99h) U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — CM3IP TMR8IP TMR6IP TMR5IP TMR5GIP TMR1GIP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 CM3IP: Comparator 3 Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 4 TMR8IP: TMR8 to PR8 Match Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 3 TMR6IP: TMR6 to PR6 Match Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 2 TMR5IP: TMR5 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 1 TMR5GIP: TMR5 Gate Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority bit 0 TMR1GIP: TMR1 Gate Interrupt Priority bit 1 = High priority 0 = Low priority DS39974A-page 136 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 9.5 RCON Register The RCON register contains bits used to determine the cause of the last Reset or wake-up from Idle or Sleep mode. RCON also contains the bit that enables interrupt priorities (IPEN). REGISTER 9-19: RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS FD0h) R/W-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R-1 R-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit 1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts 0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts (PIC16CXXX Compatibility mode) bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 CM: Configuration Mismatch Flag bit For details on bit operation, see Register 5-1. bit 4 RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit For details on bit operation, see Register 5-1. bit 3 TO: Watchdog Timer Time-out Flag bit For details on bit operation, see Register 5-1. bit 2 PD: Power-Down Detection Flag bit For details on bit operation, see Register 5-1. bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit For details on bit operation, see Register 5-1. bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit For details on bit operation, see Register 5-1. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39974A-page 137 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 9.6 INTx Pin Interrupts External interrupts on the INT0, INT1, INT2 and INT3 pins are edge-triggered. If the corresponding INTEDGx bit in the INTCON2 register is set (= 1), the interrupt is triggered by a rising edge; if the bit is clear, the trigger is on the falling edge. When a valid edge appears on the INTx pin, the corresponding flag bit and INTxIF are set. This interrupt can be disabled by clearing the corresponding enable bit, INTxIE. Flag bit, INTxIF, must be cleared in software in the Interrupt Service Routine before re-enabling the interrupt. All external interrupts (INT0, INT1, INT2 and INT3) can wake up the processor from the Sleep and Idle modes if bit, INTxIE, was set prior to going into the power-managed modes. Deep Sleep mode can wake up from INT0, but the processor will start execution from the Power-on Reset vector rather than branch to the interrupt vector. Interrupt priority for INT1, INT2 and INT3 is determined by the value contained in the Interrupt Priority bits, INT1IP (INTCON3<6>), INT2IP (INTCON3<7>) and INT3IP (INTCON2<1>). There is no priority bit associated with INT0; It is always a high-priority interrupt source. 9.7 TMR0 Interrupt In 8-bit mode (which is the default), an overflow in the TMR0 register (FFh 00h) will set flag bit, TMR0IF. In 16-bit mode, an overflow in the TMR0H:TMR0L register EXAMPLE 9-1: MOVWF MOVFF MOVFF ; ; USER ; MOVFF MOVF MOVFF pair (FFFFh 0000h) will set TMR0IF. The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, TMR0IE (INTCON<5>). Interrupt priority for Timer0 is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bit, TMR0IP (INTCON2<2>). See Section 12.0 “Timer0 Module” for further details on the Timer0 module. 9.8 PORTB Interrupt-on-Change An input change on PORTB<7:4> sets flag bit, RBIF (INTCON<0>). The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, RBIE (INTCON<3>). Interrupt priority for PORTB interrupt-on-change is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bit, RBIP (INTCON2<0>). 9.9 Context Saving During Interrupts During interrupts, the return PC address is saved on the stack. Additionally, the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers are saved on the Fast Return Stack. If a fast return from interrupt is not used (see Section 6.3 “Data Memory Organization”), the user may need to save the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers on entry to the Interrupt Service Routine. Depending on the user’s application, other registers may also need to be saved. Example 9-1 saves and restores the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers during an Interrupt Service Routine (ISR). SAVING STATUS, WREG AND BSR REGISTERS IN RAM W_TEMP STATUS, STATUS_TEMP BSR, BSR_TEMP ; W_TEMP is in virtual bank ; STATUS_TEMP located anywhere ; BSR_TMEP located anywhere ISR CODE BSR_TEMP, BSR W_TEMP, W STATUS_TEMP, STATUS DS39974A-page 138 ; Restore BSR ; Restore WREG ; Restore STATUS Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.0 I/O PORTS 10.1 I/O Port Pin Capabilities Depending on the device selected and features enabled, there are up to five ports available. Some pins of the I/O ports are multiplexed with an alternate function from the peripheral features on the device. In general, when a peripheral is enabled, that pin may not be used as a general purpose I/O pin. When developing an application, the capabilities of the port pins must be considered. Outputs on some pins have higher output drive strength than others. Similarly, some pins can tolerate higher than VDD input levels. Each port has three registers for its operation. These registers are: The output pin drive strengths vary for groups of pins intended to meet the needs for a variety of applications. PORTB and PORTC are designed to drive higher loads, such as LEDs. All other ports are designed for small loads, typically indication only. Table 10-1 summarizes the output capabilities. Refer to Section 30.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for more details. • TRIS register (Data Direction register) • PORT register (reads the levels on the pins of the device) • LAT register (Data Latch) The Data Latch (LAT register) is useful for read-modifywrite operations on the value that the I/O pins are driving. 10.1.1 TABLE 10-1: Port Figure 10-1 displays a simplified model of a generic I/O port, without the interfaces to other peripherals. PORTA FIGURE 10-1: PORTE GENERIC I/O PORT OPERATION PIN OUTPUT DRIVE PORTD Drive High PORTC Data Bus WR LAT or PORT 10.1.2 D Q I/O Pin(1) CK Data Latch D WR TRIS Q CK TRIS Latch Input Buffer RD TRIS The voltage tolerance of pins used as device inputs is dependent on the pin’s input function. Pins that are used as digital only inputs are able to handle DC voltages up to 5.5V; a level typical for digital logic circuits. In contrast, pins that also have analog input functions of any kind can only tolerate voltages up to VDD. Voltage excursions beyond VDD on these pins should be avoided. Table 10-2 summarizes the input capabilities. Refer to Section 30.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for more details. D Port or Pin ENEN RD PORT I/O pins have diode protection to VDD and VSS. INPUT VOLTAGE LEVELS Tolerated Input PORTC<2:0> VDD Only VDD input levels are tolerated. 5.5V Tolerates input levels above VDD, useful for most standard logic. PORTE<2:0> PORTB<7:4> PORTC<7:3> PORTD<7:0> 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Description PORTA<7:0> PORTB<3:0> Note 1: Suitable for direct LED drive levels. INPUT PINS AND VOLTAGE CONSIDERATIONS TABLE 10-2: Q Description Minimum Intended for indication. PORTB RD LAT OUTPUT DRIVE LEVELS Preliminary DS39974A-page 139 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.1.3 INTERFACING TO A 5V SYSTEM Though the VDDMAX of the PIC18F47J13 family is 3.6V, these devices are still capable of interfacing with 5V systems, even if the VIH of the target system is above 3.6V. This is accomplished by adding a pull-up resistor to the port pin (Figure 10-2), clearing the LAT bit for that pin and manipulating the corresponding TRISx bit (Figure 10-1) to either allow the line to be pulled high or to drive the pin low. Only port pins that are tolerant of voltages up to 5.5V can be used for this type of interface (refer to Section 10.1.2 “Input Pins and Voltage Considerations”). FIGURE 10-2: +5V SYSTEM HARDWARE INTERFACE PIC18F47J13 +5V the ECCP modules. It is selectively enabled by setting the open-drain control bit for the corresponding module in the ODCON registers (Register 10-1, Register 10-2 and Register 10-3). Their configuration is discussed in more detail with the individual port where these peripherals are multiplexed. Output functions that are routed through the PPS module may also use the open-drain option. The open-drain functionality will follow the I/O pin assignment in the PPS module. When the open-drain option is required, the output pin must also be tied through an external pull-up resistor provided by the user to a higher voltage level, up to 5.5V (Figure 10-3). When a digital logic high signal is output, it is pulled up to the higher voltage level. FIGURE 10-3: +5V Device USING THE OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT (USART SHOWN AS EXAMPLE) +5V 3.3V PIC18F47J13 RD7 VDD EXAMPLE 10-1: BCF LATD, 7 BCF BSF TRISD, 7 TRISD, 7 10.1.4 5V COMMUNICATING WITH THE +5V SYSTEM ; ; ; ; ; set up LAT register so changing TRIS bit will drive line low send a 0 to the 5V system send a 1 to the 5V system OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUTS The output pins for several peripherals are also equipped with a configurable, open-drain output option. This allows the peripherals to communicate with external digital logic operating at a higher voltage level, without the use of level translators. The open-drain option is implemented on port pins specifically associated with the data and clock outputs of the EUSARTs, the MSSP modules (in SPI mode) and DS39974A-page 140 TXX (at logic ‘1’) 10.1.5 TTL INPUT BUFFER OPTION Many of the digital I/O ports use Schmitt Trigger (ST) input buffers. While this form of buffering works well with many types of input, some applications may require TTL level signals to interface with external logic devices. This is particularly true for the Parallel Master Port (PMP), which is likely to be interfaced to TTL level logic or memory devices. The inputs for the PMP can be optionally configured for TTL buffers with the PMPTTL bit in the PADCFG1 register (Register 10-4). Setting this bit configures all data and control input pins for the PMP to use TTL buffers. By default, these PMP inputs use the port’s ST buffers. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-1: ODCON1: PERIPHERAL OPEN-DRAIN CONTROL REGISTER 1 (BANKED F42h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CCP8OD CCP7OD CCP6OD CCP5OD CCP4OD ECCP3OD ECCP2OD ECCP1OD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 CCP8OD: CCP8 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 6 CCP7OD: CCP7 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 5 CCP6OD: CCP6 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 4 CCP5OD: CCP5 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 3 CCP4OD: CCP4 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 2 ECCP3OD: ECCP3 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 1 ECCP2OD: ECCP2 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 0 ECCP1OD: ECCP1 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39974A-page 141 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-2: ODCON2: PERIPHERAL OPEN-DRAIN CONTROL REGISTER 2 (BANKED F41h) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — CCP10OD CCP9OD U2OD U1OD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 CCP10OD: CCP10 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 2 CCP9OD: CCP9 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 1 U2OD: USART2 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 0 U1OD: USART1 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled REGISTER 10-3: x = Bit is unknown ODCON3: PERIPHERAL OPEN-DRAIN CONTROL REGISTER 3 (BANKED F40h) R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CTMUDS — — — — — SPI2OD SPI1OD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 CTMUDS: CTMU Pulse Delay Enable bit 1 = Pulse delay input for CTMU enabled on pin, RA1 bit 6-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 SPI2OD: SPI2 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 0 SPI1OD: SPI1 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled DS39974A-page 142 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-4: PADCFG1: PAD CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTER 1 (BANKED F3Ch) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 RTSECSEL1(1) RTSECSEL0(1) PMPTTL bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-1 RTSECSEL<1:0>: RTCC Seconds Clock Output Select bits(1) 11 = Reserved; do not use 10 = RTCC source clock is selected for the RTCC pin (can be INTRC, T1OSC or T1CKI depending upon the RTCOSC (CONFIG3L<1>) and T1OSCEN (T1CON<3>) bit settings) 01 = RTCC seconds clock is selected for the RTCC pin 00 = RTCC alarm pulse is selected for the RTCC pin bit 0 PMPTTL: PMP Module TTL Input Buffer Select bit 1 = PMP module uses TTL input buffers 0 = PMP module uses Schmitt Trigger input buffers Note 1: 10.2 To enable the actual RTCC output, the RTCOE (RTCCFG<2>) bit needs to be set. PORTA, TRISA and LATA Registers PORTA is a 7-bit wide, bidirectional port. It may function as a 5-bit port, depending on the oscillator mode selected. Setting a TRISA bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTA pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISA bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTA pin an output (i.e., put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). Reading the PORTA register reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it, will write to the port latch. The Data Latch (LATA) register is also memory mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATA register read and write the latched output value for PORTA. The other PORTA pins are multiplexed with analog inputs, the analog VREF+ and VREF- inputs and the comparator voltage reference output. The operation of pins, RA<3:0> and RA5, as A/D Converter inputs is selected by clearing or setting the control bits in the ANCON0 register (A/D Port Configuration Register 0). All PORTA pins have TTL input levels and full CMOS output drivers. The TRISA register controls the direction of the PORTA pins, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user must ensure the bits in the TRISA register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. EXAMPLE 10-2: CLRF CLRF MOVLB MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF The RAx pins may also be used as comparator inputs by setting the appropriate bits in the CMxCON registers. To use RAx as digital inputs, it is necessary to turn off the comparators. Note: PORTA ; ; ; LATA ; ; ; 0x0F ; ; 0x0F ; ANCON0 ; 0xCF ; ; ; TRISA ; ; INITIALIZING PORTA Initialize PORTA by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches ANCONx register not in Access Bank Configure A/D for digital inputs Value used to initialize data direction Set RA<3:0> as inputs RA<5:4> as outputs On a Power-on Reset (POR), RA5 and RA<3:0> are configured as analog inputs and read as ‘0’. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 143 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 10-3: PORTA I/O SUMMARY Pin Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type Description RA0/AN0/C1INA/ ULPWU/PMA6/ RP0 RA0 1 I TTL PORTA<0> data input; disabled when analog input is enabled. 0 O DIG LATA<0> data output; not affected by analog input. AN0 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 0 and Comparator C1- input. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. C1INA 1 I ANA Comparator 1 Input A. ULPWU 1 I ANA Ultra low-power wake-up input. (1) x I/O PMA6 RP0 RA1/AN1/C2INA/ VBG/CTDIN/ PMA7/RP1 RA2/AN2/C2INB/ C1IND/C3INB/ VREF-/CVREF RA3/AN3/C1INB/ VREF+ RA1 ST/TTL/ Parallel Master Port digital I/O. DIG 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 0 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 0 output. 1 I TTL PORTA<1> data input; disabled when analog input is enabled. 0 O DIG LATA<1> data output; not affected by analog input. AN1 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 1 and Comparator C2- input. Default input configuration on POR; does not affect digital output. C2INA 1 I ANA Comparator 1 Input A. VBG x O ANA Band Gap Voltage Reference output. (Enabled by setting the VBGOE bit (WDTCON<4>.) CTDIN 1 I PMA7(1) 1 I ST CTMU pulse delay input. ST/TTL Parallel Master Port (io_addr_in[7]). 0 O DIG Parallel Master Port address. RP1 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 1 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 1 output RA2 0 O DIG LATA<2> data output; not affected by analog input. Disabled when CVREF output is enabled. 1 I TTL PORTA<2> data input. Disabled when analog functions are enabled; disabled when CVREF output is enabled. AN2 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 2 and Comparator C2+ input. Default input configuration on POR; not affected by analog output. C2INB 1 I ANA Comparator 2 Input B. 0 O ANA CTMU pulse generator charger for the C2INB comparator input. C1IND 1 I ANA Comparator 1 Input D. C3INB 1 I ANA Comparator 3 Input B. VREF- 1 I ANA A/D and comparator voltage reference low input. CVREF x O ANA Comparator voltage reference output. Enabling this feature disables digital I/O. RA3 AN3 0 O DIG LATA<3> data output; not affected by analog input. 1 I TTL PORTA<3> data input; disabled when analog input is enabled. 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 3 and Comparator C1+ input. Default input configuration on POR. C1INB 1 I ANA Comparator 1 Input B VREF+ 1 I ANA A/D and comparator voltage reference high input. Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; x = Don’t care (TRISx bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option) Note 1: This bit is only available on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). DS39974A-page 144 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 10-3: PORTA I/O SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Pin Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RA5/AN4/C1INC/ SS1/HLVDIN/ RP2 RA5 0 O DIG 1 I TTL PORTA<5> data input; disabled when analog input is enabled. AN4 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 4. Default configuration on POR. C1INC 0 O DIG Comparator 1 Input C. OSC2/CLKO/ RA6 OSC1/CLKI/RA7 Description LATA<5> data output; not affected by analog input. SS1 1 I TTL Slave select input for MSSP1. HLVDIN 1 I ANA High/Low-Voltage Detect external trip point reference input. RP2 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 2 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 2 output. OSC2 x O ANA Main oscillator feedback output connection (HS mode). CLKO x O DIG System cycle clock output (FOSC/4) in RC and EC Oscillator modes. RA6 1 I TTL PORTA<6> data input. 0 O DIG LATA<6> data output. OSC1 1 I ANA Main oscillator input connection. CLKI 1 I ANA Main clock input connection. RA7 1 I TTL PORTA<6> data input. 0 O DIG LATA<6> data output. Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; x = Don’t care (TRISx bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option) Note 1: This bit is only available on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). TABLE 10-4: Name SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTA Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 — RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 LATA LAT7 LAT6 LAT5 — LAT3 LAT2 LAT1 LAT0 TRISA TRIS7 TRIS6 TRISA5 — TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 PCFG7(1) PCFG6(1) PCFG5(1) PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 ANCON0 CMxCON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 CVRCON CVREN CVROE CVRR CVRSS CVR3 CVR2 CVR1 CVR0 WDTCON REGSLP LVDSTAT ULPLVL VBGOE DS ULPEN ULPSINK SWDTEN HLVDCON VDIRMAG BGVST IRVST HLVDEN HLVDL3 HLVDL2 HLVDL1 HLVDL0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTA. Note 1: These bits are only available in 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 145 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.3 PORTB, TRISB and LATB Registers PORTB is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction register is TRISB. Setting a TRISB bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTB pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISB bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTB pin an output (i.e., put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). The Data Latch register (LATB) is also memory mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATB register read and write the latched output value for PORTB. EXAMPLE 10-3: CLRF PORTB CLRF LATB MOVLB 0x0F MOVLW MOVWF 0x17 ANCON1 MOVLW 0xCF MOVWF TRISB Four of the PORTB pins (RB<7:4>) have an interrupton-change feature. Only pins configured as inputs can cause this interrupt to occur (i.e., any RB<7:4> pin configured as an output is excluded from the interrupton-change comparison). The input pins (of RB<7:4>) are compared with the old value latched on the last read of PORTB. The “mismatch” outputs of RB<7:4> are ORed together to generate the RB Port Change Interrupt with Flag bit, RBIF (INTCON<0>). This interrupt can wake the device from Sleep mode or any of the Idle modes. Application software can clear the interrupt flag by following these steps: 1. 2. INITIALIZING PORTB ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTB by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches ANCON1 not in Access Bank Configure as digital I/O pins in this example ; ; ; ; ; ; Value used to initialize data direction Set RB<3:0> as inputs RB<5:4> as outputs RB<7:6> as inputs 3. Any read or write of PORTB (except with the MOVFF (ANY), PORTB instruction). Wait one instruction cycle (such as executing a NOP instruction). Clear flag bit, RBIF. A mismatch condition continues to set flag bit, RBIF. Reading PORTB will end the mismatch condition and allow flag bit, RBIF, to be cleared after one instruction cycle of delay. The interrupt-on-change feature is recommended for wake-up on key depression operation and operations where PORTB is only used for the interrupt-on-change feature. Polling of PORTB is not recommended while using the interrupt-on-change feature. The RB5 pin is multiplexed with the Timer0 module clock input and one of the comparator outputs to become the RB5/CCP5/PMA0/KBI1/RP8 pin. Each of the PORTB pins has a weak internal pull-up. A single control bit can turn on all the pull-ups. This is performed by clearing bit, RBPU (INTCON2<7>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on a POR. The integrated weak pull-ups consist of a semiconductor structure similar to, but somewhat different from, a discrete resistor. On an unloaded I/O pin, the weak pull-ups are intended to provide logic high indication, but will not necessarily pull the pin all the way to VDD levels. Note: On a POR, the RB<3:0> bits are configured as analog inputs by default and read as ‘0’; RB<7:4> bits are configured as digital inputs. DS39974A-page 146 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 10-5: Pin RB0/AN12/ C3IND/INT0/ RP3 RB1/AN10/ C3INC/PMBE/ RTCC/RP4 PORTB I/O SUMMARY Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RB0 1 I TTL 0 O DIG LATB<0> data output; not affected by an analog input. 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 12.(1) C3IND 1 I ANA Comparator 3 Input D. INT0 1 I ST External Interrupt 0 input. RP3 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 3 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 3 output. 1 I TTL PORTB<1> data input; weak pull-up when the RBPU bit is cleared. Disabled when an analog input is enabled.(1) 0 O DIG LATB<1> data output; not affected by an analog input. AN10 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 10.(1) C3INC 1 I ANA Comparator 3 Input C. RB1 x O DIG Parallel Master Port byte enable. RTCC 0 O DIG Asynchronous serial transmit data output (USART module). RP4 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 4 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 4 output. 1 I TTL PORTB<2> data input; weak pull-up when the RBPU bit is cleared. Disabled when an analog input is enabled.(1) 0 O DIG LATB<2> data output; not affected by an analog input. AN8 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 8.(1) C2INC 1 I ANA Comparator 2 Input C. PMBE RB3/AN9/ C3INA/CTED2/ PMA2/RP6 PORTB<0> data input; weak pull-up when the RBPU bit is cleared. Disabled when analog input is enabled.(1) AN12 (3) RB2/AN8/ C2INC/CTED1/ PMA3/REFO/ RP5 Description RB2 CTED1 1 I ST CTMU Edge 1 input. PMA3(3) x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. REFO 0 O DIG Reference output clock. RP5 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 5 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 5 output. 0 O DIG LATB<3> data output; not affected by analog input. 1 I TTL PORTB<3> data input; weak pull-up when the RBPU bit is cleared. Disabled when analog input is enabled.(1) AN9 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 9.(1) Comparator 3 Input A. RB3 C3INA 1 I ANA CTED2 1 I ST (3) x O DIG Parallel Master Port address. 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 6 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 6 output. PMA2 RP6 CTMU Edge 2 input. Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; x = Don’t care (TRISx bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option) Note 1: Pins are configured as analog inputs by default on POR. Using these pins for digital inputs requires setting the appropriate bits in the ANCON1 register. 2: All other pin functions are disabled when ICSP™ or ICD is enabled. 3: Only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 4: Only on 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 147 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 10-5: Pin PORTB I/O SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RB4 0 O DIG LATB<4> data output; not affected by an analog input. 1 I TTL PORTB<4> data input; weak pull-up when the RBPU bit is cleared. Disabled when an analog input is enabled.(1) 1 I ST Capture input. DIG Compare/PWM output. RB4/CCP4/ PMA1/KBI0/ SCL2(4)/RP7 CCP4(3) PMA1 0 O x I/O Description ST/TTL/ Parallel Master Port address. DIG KBI0 1 I SCL2(4) 1 I RP7 1 I ST 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 7 output. 0 O DIG LATB<5> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<5> data input; weak pull-up when the RBPU bit is cleared. CCP5(3) 1 I ST Capture input. 0 O DIG Compare/PWM output. PMA0(3) x I/O KBI1 1 I TTL I2C™/ RB5/CCP5/ PMA0/KBI1/ SDA2(4)/RP8 RB5 TTL Interrupt-on-change pin. I2C™/ I2C clock input (MSSP2 module). SMBus Remappable Peripheral Pin 7 input. ST/TTL/ Parallel Master Port address. DIG Interrupt-on-change pin. I2C data input (MSSP2 module). SDA2(4) 1 I RP8 1 I ST 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 8 output. 0 O DIG LATB<6> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<6> data input; weak pull-up when the RBPU bit is cleared. 1 I ST Capture input. SMBus RB6/CCP6/ KBI2/PGC/RP9 RB6 CCP6(3) Remappable Peripheral Pin 8 input. 0 O DIG Compare/PWM output. KBI2 1 I TTL Interrupt-on-change pin. PGC x I ST Serial execution (ICSP™) clock input for ICSP and ICD operation.(2) RP9 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 9 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 9 output. Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; x = Don’t care (TRISx bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option) Note 1: Pins are configured as analog inputs by default on POR. Using these pins for digital inputs requires setting the appropriate bits in the ANCON1 register. 2: All other pin functions are disabled when ICSP™ or ICD is enabled. 3: Only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 4: Only on 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). DS39974A-page 148 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 10-5: Pin RB7/CCP7/ KBI3/PGD/ RP10 PORTB I/O SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RB7 0 O DIG LATB<7> data output. 1 I TTL PORTB<7> data input; weak pull-up when the RBPU bit is cleared. 1 I ST Capture input. CCP7 Description 0 O DIG Compare/PWM output. KBI3 1 O TTL Interrupt-on-change pin. PGD x O DIG Serial execution data output for ICSP and ICD operation.(2) x I ST Serial execution data input for ICSP and ICD operation.(2) RP10 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 10 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 10 output. Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; x = Don’t care (TRISx bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option) Note 1: Pins are configured as analog inputs by default on POR. Using these pins for digital inputs requires setting the appropriate bits in the ANCON1 register. 2: All other pin functions are disabled when ICSP™ or ICD is enabled. 3: Only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 4: Only on 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF27J13). TABLE 10-6: Name PORTB LATB TRISB SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTB Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF INTCON2 RBPU INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2 INTEDG3 TMR0IP INT3IP RBIP INTCON3 INT2IP INT1IP INT3IE INT2IE INT1IE INT3IF INT2IF INT1IF ANCON1 VBGEN — — PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 REFOCON ROON — ROSSLP ROSEL RODIV3 RODIV2 RODIV1 RODIV0 CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 PADCFG1 — — — — — RTCCFG RTCEN — CM3CON RTCWREN RTCSYNC HALFSEC RTSECSEL1 RTSECSEL0 PMPTTL RTCOE RTCPTR1 RTCPTR0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTB. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 149 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.4 PORTC, TRISC and LATC Registers Note: PORTC is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction register is TRISC. Setting a TRISC bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTC pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a high-impedance mode). Clearing a TRISC bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTC pin an output (i.e., put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). The Data Latch register (LATC) is also memory mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATC register read and write the latched output value for PORTC. PORTC is multiplexed with several peripheral functions (see Table 10-7). The pins have Schmitt Trigger input buffers. When enabling peripheral functions, care should be taken in defining TRISx bits for each PORTC pin. Some peripherals override the TRISx bit to make a pin an output, while other peripherals override the TRISx bit to make a pin an input. The user should refer to the corresponding peripheral section for additional information. DS39974A-page 150 On a Power-on Reset, PORTC pins (except RC2) are configured as digital inputs. RC2 will default as an analog input (controlled by the ANCON1 register). The contents of the TRISC register are affected by peripheral overrides. Reading TRISC always returns the current contents, even though a peripheral device may be overriding one or more of the pins. EXAMPLE 10-4: CLRF Initialize PORTC by clearing output data latches CLRF LATC Alternate method to clear output data latches MOVLW 0x3F Value used to initialize data direction MOVWF TRISC Set RC<5:0> as inputs RC<7:6> as outputs MOVLB 0x0F ANCON register is not in Access Bank BSF ANCON1,PCFG11 ;Configure RC2/AN11 as digital input Preliminary PORTC INITIALIZING PORTC ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 10-7: Pin RC0/T1OSO/ T1CKI/RP11 PORTC I/O SUMMARY Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RC0 1 I ST 0 O DIG LATC<0> data output. x O ANA Timer1 oscillator output; enabled when Timer1 oscillator is enabled. Disables digital I/O. T1OSO RC1/CCP8/ T1OSI/RP12 RC3/SCK1/ SCL1/RP14 1 I ST Timer1 digital clock input. RP11 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 11 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 11 output. 1 I ST PORTC<1> data input. 0 O DIG LATC<1> data output. 1 I ST Capture input. RC1 0 O DIG Compare/PWM output. T1OSI x I ANA Timer1 oscillator input; enabled when Timer1 oscillator is enabled. Disables digital I/O. RP12 1 I ST 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 12 output. 1 I ST PORTC<2> data input. RC2 Remappable Peripheral Pin 12 input. 0 O DIG PORTC<2> data output. AN11 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 11. C2IND 1 I ANA Comparator 2 Input D. CTPLS 0 O DIG CTMU pulse generator output. RP13 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 13 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 13 output. RC3 SCK1 SCL1 RP14 RC4/SDI1/ SDA1/RP15 PORTC<0> data input. T1CKI CCP8 RC2/AN11/ C2IND/CTPLS/ RP13 Description 1 I ST PORTC<3> data input. 0 O DIG PORTC<3> data output. 1 I ST SPI clock input (MSSP1 module). 0 O DIG SPI clock output (MSSP1 module). 1 I 2C/ 0 O I2C™ clock input (MSSP1 module). I SMBus DIG I2C clock output (MSSP1 module). 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 14 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 14 output. RC4 0 O DIG PORTC<4> data output. SDI1 1 I ST SPI data input (MSSP1 module). SDA1 1 I 0 O DIG I2C data output (MSSP1 module). 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 15 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 15 output. RP15 I2C data input (MSSP1 module). I2C/ SMBus Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; I2C/SMB = I2C/SMBus input buffer; x = Don’t care (TRISx bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option) Note 1: This bit is only available on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 151 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 10-7: Pin PORTC I/O SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RC5 0 O DIG SDO1 x O DIG SPI data output (MSSP1 module). RP16 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 16 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 16 output. RC5/SDO1/ RP16 RC6/CCP9/ PMA5/TX1/ CK1/RP17 RC6 CCP9 PMA5(1) PORTC<5> data output. 1 I ST PORTC<6> data input. 0 O DIG LATC<6> data output. 1 I ST Capture input. 0 O DIG Compare/PWM output. 1 I 0 O DIG Parallel Master Port address. TX1 0 O DIG Asynchronous serial transmit data output (EUSART module); takes priority over port data. User must configure as an output. CK1 1 I ST Synchronous serial clock input (EUSART module). 0 O DIG Synchronous serial clock output (EUSART module); takes priority over port data. RP17 RC7/CCP10/ PMA4/RX1/ DT1/RP18 Description RC7 CCP10 ST/TTL Parallel Master Port io_addr_in<5>. 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 17 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 17 output. 1 I ST PORTC<7> data input. 0 O DIG LATC<7> data output. 1 I ST Capture input. 0 O DIG Compare/PWM output. PMA4(1) x I/O RX1 1 I ST Asynchronous serial receive data input (EUSART module). DT1 1 1 ST Synchronous serial data input (EUSART module). User must configure as an input. 0 O DIG Synchronous serial data output (EUSART module); takes priority over port data. 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 18 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 18 output. RP18 ST/TTL/ Parallel Master Port address. DIG Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level input/output; I2C/SMB = I2C/SMBus input buffer; x = Don’t care (TRISx bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option) Note 1: This bit is only available on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). TABLE 10-8: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTC Name PORTC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 LATC LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 ANCON1 VBGEN — — PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 CM2CON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 RTCCFG RTCEN — RTCOE RTCPTR1 RTCPTR0 DS39974A-page 152 RTCWREN RTCSYNC HALFSEC Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.5 Note: EXAMPLE 10-5: PORTD, TRISD and LATD Registers PORTD CLRF LATD PORTD is available only in 44-pin devices. PORTD is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding Data Direction register is TRISD. Setting a TRISD bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTD pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISD bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTD pin an output (i.e., put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). The Data Latch register (LATD) is also memory mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATD register read and write the latched output value for PORTD. All pins on PORTD are implemented with Schmitt Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually configurable as an input or output. Note: CLRF On a POR, these pins are configured as digital inputs. MOVLW 0xCF MOVWF TRISD INITIALIZING PORTD ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTD by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Value used to initialize data direction Set RD<3:0> as inputs RD<5:4> as outputs RD<7:6> as inputs Each of the PORTD pins has a weak internal pull-up. A single control bit can turn on all the pull-ups. This is performed by clearing bit, RDPU (TRISE<7>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on a POR. The integrated weak pull-ups consist of a semiconductor structure similar to, but somewhat different from, a discrete resistor. On an unloaded I/O pin, the weak pull-ups are intended to provide logic high indication, but will not necessarily pull the pin all the way to VDD levels. Note that the pull-ups can be used for any set of features, similar to the pull-ups found on PORTB. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 153 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 10-9: Pin PORTD I/O SUMMARY Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RD0 1 I ST PORTD<0> data input. DIG LATD<0> data output. RD0/PMD0/ SCL2 RD1/PMD1/ SDA2 RD2/PMD2/ RP19 0 O PMD0(1) 1 I 0 O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. SCL2(1) 1 I I2C/ SMB I2C™ clock input (MSSP2 module); input type depends on the module setting. 0 O DIG I2C clock output (MSSP2 module); takes priority over port data. RD1 1 I ST PORTD<1> data input. 0 O DIG LATD<1> data output. PMD1(1) 1 I 0 O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. SDA2(1) 1 I I2C/ SMB I2C data input (MSSP2 module); input type depends on the module setting. 0 O DIG I2C data output (MSSP2 module); takes priority over port data. RD2 PMD2 (1) RP19 RD3/PMD3/ RP20 RD3 PMD3(1) RP20 RD4/PMD4/ RP21 RD4 PMD4(1) RP21 RD5/PMD5/ RP22 Description RD5 PMD5(1) RP22 ST/TTL Parallel Master Port data in. ST/TTL Parallel Master Port data in. 1 I ST PORTD<2> data input. 0 O DIG LATD<2> data output. 1 I 0 O ST/TTL Parallel Master Port data in. DIG Parallel Master Port data out. 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 19 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 19 output. 1 I ST PORTD<3> data input. 0 O DIG LATD<3> data output. 1 I 0 O ST/TTL Parallel Master Port data in. DIG Parallel Master Port data out. 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 20 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 20 output. 1 I ST PORTD<4> data input. 0 O DIG LATD<4> data output. 1 I 0 O ST/TTL Parallel Master Port data in. DIG Parallel Master Port data out. 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 21 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 21 output. 1 I ST PORTD<5> data input. 0 O DIG LATD<5> data output. 1 I 0 O ST/TTL Parallel Master Port data in. DIG Parallel Master Port data out. 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 22 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 22 output. Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; I2C/SMB = I2C/SMBus input buffer; x = Don’t care (TRISx bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Note 1: Only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). DS39974A-page 154 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 10-9: Pin RD6/PMD6/ RP23 PORTD I/O SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type RD6 1 I ST PORTD<6> data input. 0 O DIG LATD<6> data output. PMD6(1) 1 I 0 O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 23 input. RP23 RD7/PMD7/ RP24 Description ST/TTL Parallel Master Port data in. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 23 output. RD7 1 I ST PORTD<7> data input. 0 O DIG LATD<7> data output. PMD7(1) 1 I 0 O DIG Parallel Master Port data out. 1 I ST Remappable Peripheral Pin 24 input. 0 O DIG Remappable Peripheral Pin 24 output. RP24 ST/TTL Parallel Master Port data in. Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; I2C/SMB = I2C/SMBus input buffer; x = Don’t care (TRISx bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option). Note 1: Only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). TABLE 10-10: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTD Name (1) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 PORTD RD7 RD6 RD5 RD4 RD3 RD2 RD1 RD0 LATD(1) LATD7 LATD6 LATD5 LATD4 LATD3 LATD2 LATD1 LATD0 TRISD(1) TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTD. Note 1: These registers are not available in 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF26J13). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 155 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.6 Note: EXAMPLE 10-6: PORTE, TRISE and LATE Registers PORTE CLRF LATE MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW 0xE0 ANCON0 0x03 MOVWF TRISE PORTE is available only in 44-pin devices. Depending on the particular PIC18F47J13 family device selected, PORTE is implemented in two different ways. For 44-pin devices, PORTE is a 3-bit wide port. Three pins (RE0/AN5/PMRD, RE1/AN6/PMWR and RE2/ AN7/PMCS) are individually configurable as inputs or outputs. These pins have Schmitt Trigger input buffers. When selected as analog inputs, these pins will read as ‘0’s. The corresponding Data Direction register is TRISE. Setting a TRISE bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTE pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISE bit (= 0) will make the corresponding PORTE pin an output (i.e., put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). TRISE controls the direction of the RE pins, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user must make sure to keep the pins configured as inputs when using them as analog inputs. Note: CLRF On a POR, RE<2:0> are configured as analog inputs. INITIALIZING PORTE ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTE by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches Configure REx for digital inputs Value used to initialize data direction Set RE<0> as inputs RE<1> as outputs RE<2> as inputs Each of the PORTE pins has a weak internal pull-up. A single control bit can turn on all the pull-ups. This is performed by clearing bit, REPU (TRISE<6>). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on a POR. The integrated weak pull-ups consist of a semiconductor structure similar to, but somewhat different, from a discrete resistor. On an unloaded I/O pin, the weak pull-ups are intended to provide logic high indication, but will not necessarily pull the pin all the way to VDD levels. Note that the pull-ups can be used for any set of features, similar to the pull-ups found on PORTB. The Data Latch register (LATE) is also memory mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATE register read and write the latched output value for PORTE. DS39974A-page 156 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 10-11: PORTE I/O SUMMARY Pin RE0/AN5/ PMRD RE1/AN6/ PMWR RE2/AN7/ PMCS Function TRIS Setting I/O I/O Type Description RE0 1 I ST PORTE<0> data input; disabled when analog input is enabled. 0 O DIG LATE<0> data output; not affected by analog input. AN5 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 5; default input configuration on POR. PMRD 1 I 0 O RE1 ST/TTL Parallel Master Port (io_rd_in). DIG Parallel Master Port read strobe. 1 I ST PORTE<1> data input; disabled when analog input is enabled. 0 O DIG LATE<1> data output; not affected by analog input. AN6 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 6; default input configuration on POR. PMWR 1 I 0 O DIG Parallel Master Port write strobe. 1 I ST PORTE<2> data input; disabled when analog input is enabled. RE2 ST/TTL Parallel Master Port (io_wr_in). 0 O DIG LATE<2> data output; not affected by an analog input. AN7 1 I ANA A/D Input Channel 7; default input configuration on POR. PMCS 0 O DIG Parallel Master Port byte enable. Legend: DIG = Digital level output; TTL = TTL input buffer; ST = Schmitt Trigger input buffer; ANA = Analog level I = Input; O = Output; P = Power TABLE 10-12: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTE Name (1) PORTE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 — — — — — RE2 RE1 RE0 LATE(1) — — — — — LATE2 LATE1 LATE0 TRISE(1) RDPU REPU — — — TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0 ANCON0 PCFG7(1) PCFG6(1) PCFG5(1) PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTE. Note 1: These registers and/or bits are not available in 28-pin devices (PIC18F26J13, PIC18F27J13, PIC18LF26J13 and PIC18LF26J13). Note: bit 7 RDPU: PORTD Pull-up Enable bit 0 = All PORTD pull-ups are disabled 1 = PORTD pull-ups are enabled for any input pad bit 6 REPU: PORTE Pull-up Enable bit 0 = All PORTE pull-ups are disabled 1 = PORTE pull-ups are enabled for any input pad 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 157 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.7 10.7.2 Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) A major challenge in general purpose devices is providing the largest possible set of peripheral features while minimizing the conflict of features on I/O pins. The challenge is even greater on low pin count devices similar to the PIC18F47J13 family. In an application that needs to use more than one peripheral, multiplexed on a single pin, inconvenient work arounds in application code or a complete redesign may be the only option. The Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) feature provides an alternative to these choices by enabling the user’s peripheral set selection and its placement on a wide range of I/O pins. By increasing the pinout options available on a particular device, users can better tailor the microcontroller to their entire application, rather than trimming the application to fit the device. The PPS feature operates over a fixed subset of digital I/O pins. Users may independently map the input and/ or output of any one of the many digital peripherals to any one of these I/O pins. PPS is performed in software, and generally, does not require the device to be reprogrammed. Hardware safeguards are included that prevent accidental or spurious changes to the peripheral mapping once it has been established. 10.7.1 AVAILABLE PINS The PPS feature is used with a range of up to 22 pins. The number of available pins is dependent on the particular device and its pin count. Pins that support the PPS feature include the designation “RPn” in their full pin designation, where “RP” designates a remappable peripheral and “n” is the remappable pin number. See Table 1-3 and Table 1-4 for pinout options in each package offering. AVAILABLE PERIPHERALS The peripherals managed by the PPS are all digital only peripherals. These include general serial communications (UART and SPI), general purpose timer clock inputs, timer-related peripherals (input capture and output compare) and external interrupt inputs. Also included are the outputs of the comparator module, since these are discrete digital signals. The PPS module is not applied to I2C, change notification inputs, RTCC alarm outputs or peripherals with analog inputs. Additionally, the MSSP1 and EUSART1 modules are not routed through the PPS module. A key difference between pin select and non-pin select peripherals is that pin select peripherals are not associated with a default I/O pin. The peripheral must always be assigned to a specific I/O pin before it can be used. In contrast, non-pin select peripherals are always available on a default pin, assuming that the peripheral is active and not conflicting with another peripheral. 10.7.2.1 Peripheral Pin Select Function Priority When a pin selectable peripheral is active on a given I/O pin, it takes priority over all other digital I/O and digital communication peripherals associated with the pin. Priority is given regardless of the type of peripheral that is mapped. Pin select peripherals never take priority over any analog functions associated with the pin. 10.7.3 CONTROLLING PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT PPS features are controlled through two sets of Special Function Registers (SFRs): one to map peripheral inputs and the other to map outputs. Because they are separately controlled, a particular peripheral’s input and output (if the peripheral has both) can be placed on any selectable function pin without constraint. The association of a peripheral to a peripheral selectable pin is handled in two different ways, depending on whether an input or an output is being mapped. DS39974A-page 158 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.7.3.1 Input Mapping The inputs of the PPS options are mapped on the basis of the peripheral; that is, a control register associated with a peripheral dictates the pin it will be mapped to. The RPINRx registers are used to configure peripheral input mapping (see Register 10-6 through Register 10-23). Each register contains a 5-bit field which is associated TABLE 10-13: with one of the pin selectable peripherals. Programming a given peripheral’s bit field with an appropriate 5-bit value maps the RPn pin with that value to that peripheral. For any given device, the valid range of values for any of the bit fields corresponds to the maximum number of Peripheral Pin Selections supported by the device. SELECTABLE INPUT SOURCES (MAPS INPUT TO FUNCTION)(1) Input Name Function Name Register External Interrupt 1 INT1 RPINR1 External Interrupt 2 INT2 RPINR2 External Interrupt 3 INT3 RPINR3 Timer0 External Clock Input T0CKI RPINR4 Timer3 External Clock Input T3CKI RPINR6 Timer5 External Clock Input T5CKI RPINR15 Input Capture 1 CCP1 RPINR7 Input Capture 2 CCP2 RPINR8 Input Capture 3 CCP3 RPINR9 Timer1 Gate Input T1G RPINR12 Timer3 Gate Input T3G RPINR13 Timer5 Gate Input T5G RPINR14 EUSART2 Asynchronous Receive/Synchronous RX2/DT2 RPINR16 Receive EUSART2 Asynchronous Clock Input CK2 RPINR17 SPI2 Data Input SDI2 RPINR21 SPI2 Clock Input SCK2IN RPINR22 SPI2 Slave Select Input SS2IN RPINR23 PWM Fault Input FLT0 RPINR24 Note 1: Unless otherwise noted, all inputs use the Schmitt Trigger input buffers. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Configuration Bits INTR1R<4:0> INTR2R<4:0> INTR3R<4:0> T0CKR<4:0> T3CKR<4:0> T5CKR<4:0> IC1R<4:0> IC2R<4:0> IC3R<4:0> T1GR<4:0> T3GR<4:0> T5GR<4:0> RX2DT2R<4:0> CK2R<4:0> SDI2R<4:0> SCK2R<4:0> SS2R<4:0> OCFAR<4:0> DS39974A-page 159 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.7.3.2 Output Mapping In contrast to inputs, the outputs of the PPS options are mapped on the basis of the pin. In this case, a control register associated with a particular pin dictates the peripheral output to be mapped. The RPORx registers are used to control output mapping. The value of the bit field corresponds to one of the peripherals and that peripheral’s output is mapped to the pin (see Table 10-14). Because of the mapping technique, the list of peripherals for output mapping also includes a null value of ‘00000’. This permits any given pin to remain disconnected from the output of any of the pin selectable peripherals. TABLE 10-14: SELECTABLE OUTPUT SOURCES (MAPS FUNCTION TO OUTPUT) Function Output Function Number(1) Output Name NULL 0 NULL(2) C1OUT 1 Comparator 1 Output C2OUT 2 Comparator 2 Output C3OUT 3 Comparator 3 Output TX2/CK2 6 EUSART2 Asynchronous Transmit/Asynchronous Clock Output DT2 7 EUSART2 Synchronous Transmit SDO2 10 SPI2 Data Output SCK2 11 SPI2 Clock Output SSDMA 12 SPI DMA Slave Select ULPOUT 13 Ultra Low-Power Wake-up Event CCP1/P1A 14 ECCP1 Compare or PWM Output Channel A P1B 15 ECCP1 Enhanced PWM Output, Channel B P1C 16 ECCP1 Enhanced PWM Output, Channel C P1D 17 ECCP1 Enhanced PWM Output, Channel D CCP2/P2A 18 ECCP2 Compare or PWM Output P2B 19 ECCP2 Enhanced PWM Output, Channel B P2C 20 ECCP2 Enhanced PWM Output, Channel C P2D 21 ECCP2 Enhanced PWM Output, Channel D CCP3/P3A 22 ECCP3 Compare or PWM Output P3B 23 ECCP3 Enhanced PWM Output, Channel B P3C 24 ECCP3 Enhanced PWM Output, Channel C P3D 25 ECCP3 Enhanced PWM Output, Channel D Note 1: Value assigned to the RP<4:0> pins corresponds to the peripheral output function number. 2: The NULL function is assigned to all RPn outputs at device Reset and disables the RPn output function. DS39974A-page 160 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.7.3.3 Mapping Limitations 10.7.4.3 The control schema of the PPS is extremely flexible. Other than systematic blocks that prevent signal contention caused by two physical pins being configured as the same functional input or two functional outputs configured as the same pin, there are no hardware enforced lockouts. The flexibility extends to the point of allowing a single input to drive multiple peripherals or a single functional output to drive multiple output pins. 10.7.4 CONTROLLING CONFIGURATION CHANGES Because peripheral remapping can be changed during run time, some restrictions on peripheral remapping are needed to prevent accidental configuration changes. PIC18F devices include three features to prevent alterations to the peripheral map: • Control register lock sequence • Continuous state monitoring • Configuration bit remapping lock 10.7.4.1 Control Register Lock Under normal operation, writes to the RPINRx and RPORx registers are not allowed. Attempted writes will appear to execute normally, but the contents of the registers will remain unchanged. To change these registers, they must be unlocked in hardware. The register lock is controlled by the IOLOCK bit (PPSCON<0>). Setting IOLOCK prevents writes to the control registers; clearing IOLOCK allows writes. To set or clear IOLOCK, a specific command sequence must be executed: 1. 2. 3. Write 55h to EECON2<7:0>. Write AAh to EECON2<7:0>. Clear (or set) IOLOCK as a single operation. IOLOCK remains in one state until changed. This allows all of the PPS registers to be configured with a single unlock sequence followed by an update to all control registers, then locked with a second lock sequence. 10.7.4.2 Continuous State Monitoring In addition to being protected from direct writes, the contents of the RPINRx and RPORx registers are constantly monitored in hardware by shadow registers. If an unexpected change in any of the registers occurs (such as cell disturbances caused by ESD or other external events), a Configuration Mismatch Reset will be triggered. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Configuration Bit Pin Select Lock As an additional level of safety, the device can be configured to prevent more than one write session to the RPINRx and RPORx registers. The IOL1WAY (CONFIG3H<0>) Configuration bit blocks the IOLOCK bit from being cleared after it has been set once. If IOLOCK remains set, the register unlock procedure will not execute and the PPS Control registers cannot be written to. The only way to clear the bit and re-enable peripheral remapping is to perform a device Reset. In the default (unprogrammed) state, IOL1WAY is set, restricting users to one write session. Programming IOL1WAY allows users unlimited access (with the proper use of the unlock sequence) to the PPS registers. 10.7.5 CONSIDERATIONS FOR PERIPHERAL PIN SELECTION The ability to control Peripheral Pin Selection introduces several considerations into application design that could be overlooked. This is particularly true for several common peripherals that are available only as remappable peripherals. The main consideration is that the PPS is not available on default pins in the device’s default (Reset) state. Since all RPINRx registers reset to ‘11111’ and all RPORx registers reset to ‘00000’, all PPS inputs are tied to RP31 and all PPS outputs are disconnected. Note: In tying PPS inputs to RP31, RP31 does not have to exist on a device for the registers to be reset to it. This situation requires the user to initialize the device with the proper peripheral configuration before any other application code is executed. Since the IOLOCK bit resets in the unlocked state, it is not necessary to execute the unlock sequence after the device has come out of Reset. For application safety, however, it is best to set IOLOCK and lock the configuration after writing to the control registers. The unlock sequence is timing-critical. Therefore, it is recommended that the unlock sequence be executed as an assembly language routine with interrupts temporarily disabled. If the bulk of the application is written in C or another high-level language, the unlock sequence should be performed by writing in-line assembly. Preliminary DS39974A-page 161 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY Choosing the configuration requires the review of all PPSs and their pin assignments, especially those that will not be used in the application. In all cases, unused pin selectable peripherals should be disabled completely. Unused peripherals should have their inputs assigned to an unused RPn pin function. I/O pins with unused RPn functions should be configured with the null peripheral output. The assignment of a peripheral to a particular pin does not automatically perform any other configuration of the pin’s I/O circuitry. In theory, this means adding a pin selectable output to a pin may mean inadvertently driving an existing peripheral input when the output is driven. Users must be familiar with the behavior of other fixed peripherals that share a remappable pin and know when to enable or disable them. To be safe, fixed digital peripherals that share the same pin should be disabled when not in use. Along these lines, configuring a remappable pin for a specific peripheral does not automatically turn that feature on. The peripheral must be specifically configured for operation and enabled, as if it were tied to a fixed pin. Where this happens in the application code (immediately following device Reset and peripheral configuration or inside the main application routine) depends on the peripheral and its use in the application. A final consideration is that the PPS functions neither override analog inputs nor reconfigure pins with analog functions for digital I/O. If a pin is configured as an analog input on device Reset, it must be explicitly reconfigured as digital I/O when used with a PPS. Example 10-7 provides a configuration for bidirectional communication with flow control using EUSART2. The following input and output functions are used: • Input Function RX2 • Output Function TX2 EXAMPLE 10-7: CONFIGURING EUSART2 INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS ;************************************* ; Unlock Registers ;************************************* MOVLB 0x0E ; PPS registers in BANK 14 BCF INTCON, GIE ; Disable interrupts MOVLW 0x55 MOVWF EECON2, 0 MOVLW 0xAA MOVWF EECON2, 0 ; Turn off PPS Write Protect BCF PPSCON, IOLOCK, BANKED ;*************************** ; Configure Input Functions ; (See Table 10-13) ;*************************** ;*************************** ; Assign RX2 To Pin RP0 ;*************************** MOVLW 0x00 MOVWF RPINR16, BANKED ;*************************** ; Configure Output Functions ; (See Table 10-14) ;*************************** ;*************************** ; Assign TX2 To Pin RP1 ;*************************** MOVLW 0x06 MOVWF RPOR1, BANKED ;************************************* ; Lock Registers ;************************************* BCF INTCON, GIE MOVLW 0x55 MOVWF EECON2, 0 MOVLW 0xAA MOVWF EECON2, 0 ; Write Protect PPS BSF PPSCON, IOLOCK, BANKED Note: DS39974A-page 162 Preliminary If the Configuration bit, IOL1WAY = 1, once the IOLOCK bit is set, it cannot be cleared, preventing any future RP register changes. The IOLOCK bit is cleared back to ‘0’ on any device Reset. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 10.7.6 PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT REGISTERS Note: The PIC18F47J13 family of devices implements a total of 37 registers for remappable peripheral configuration of 44-pin devices. The 28-pin devices have 31 registers for remappable peripheral configuration. REGISTER 10-5: Input and output register values can only be changed if IOLOCK (PPSCON<0>) = 0. See Example 10-7 for a specific command sequence. PPSCON: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 0 (BANKED EBFh)(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 — — — — — — — IOLOCK bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 IOLOCK: I/O Lock Enable bit 1 = I/O lock is active, RPORx and RPINRx registers are write-protected 0 = I/O lock is not active, pin configurations can be changed Note 1: Register values can only be changed if IOLOCK (PPSCON<0>) = 0. REGISTER 10-6: RPINR1: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 1 (BANKED EE1h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — INTR1R4 INTR1R3 INTR1R2 INTR1R1 INTR1R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 INTR1R<4:0>: Assign External Interrupt 1 (INT1) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-7: RPINR2: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 2 (BANKED EE2h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — INTR2R4 INTR2R3 INTR2R2 INTR2R1 INTR2R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 INTR2R<4:0>: Assign External Interrupt 2 (INT2) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 163 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-8: RPINR3: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 3 (BANKED EE3h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — INTR3R4 INTR3R3 INTR3R2 INTR3R1 INTR3R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 INTR3R<4:0>: Assign External Interrupt 3 (INT3) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-9: RPINR4: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 4 (BANKED EE4h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — T0CKR4 T0CKR3 T0CKR2 T0CKR1 T0CKR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 T0CKR<4:0>: Timer0 External Clock Input (T0CKI) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-10: RPINR6: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 6 (BANKED EE6h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — T3CKR4 T3CKR3 T3CKR2 T3CKR1 T3CKR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 T3CKR<4:0>: Timer3 External Clock Input (T3CKI) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits DS39974A-page 164 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-11: RPINR7: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 7 (BANKED EE8h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — IC1R4 IC1R3 IC1R2 IC1R1 IC1R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 IC1R<4:0>: Assign Input Capture 1 (ECCP1) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-12: RPINR8: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 8 (BANKED EE9h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — IC2R4 IC2R3 IC2R2 IC2R1 IC2R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 IC2R<4:0>: Assign Input Capture 2 (ECCP2) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-13: RPINR9: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 9 (BANKED EEAh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — IC3R4 IC3R3 IC3R2 IC3R1 IC3R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 IC3R<4:0>: Assign Input Capture 3 (ECCP3) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 165 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-14: RPINR12: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 12 (BANKED EF2h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — T1GR4 T1GR3 T1GR2 T1GR1 T1GR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 T1GR<4:0>: Timer1 Gate Input (T1G) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-15: RPINR13: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 13 (BANKED EF3h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — T3GR4 T3GR3 T3GR2 T3GR1 T3GR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 T3GR<4:0>: Timer3 Gate Input (T3G) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-16: RPINR14: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 14 (BANKED EF4h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — T5GR4 T5GR3 T5GR2 T5GR1 T5GR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 T5GR<4:0>: Timer5 Gate Input (T5G) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits DS39974A-page 166 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-17: RPINR16: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 16 (BANKED EF7h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — RX2DT2R4 RX2DT2R3 RX2DT2R2 RX2DT2R1 RX2DT2R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RX2DT2R<4:0>: EUSART2 Synchronous/Asynchronous Receive (RX2/DT2) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-18: RPINR15: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 15 (BANKED EE7h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — T5CKR4 T5CKR3 T5CKR2 T5CKR1 T5CKR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 T5CKR<4:0>: Timer5 External Clock Input (T5CKI) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-19: RPINR17: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 17 (BANKED EF8h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — CK2R4 CK2R3 CK2R2 CK2R1 CK2R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 CK2R<4:0>: EUSART2 Clock Input (CK2) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 167 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-20: RPINR21: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 21 (BANKED EFCh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — SDI2R4 SDI2R3 SDI2R2 SDI2R1 SDI2R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 SDI2R<4:0>: Assign SPI2 Data Input (SDI2) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-21: RPINR22: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 22 (BANKED EFDh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — SCK2R4 SCK2R3 SCK2R2 SCK2R1 SCK2R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 SCK2R<4:0>: Assign SPI2 Clock Input (SCK2) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits REGISTER 10-22: RPINR23: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 23 (BANKED EFEh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — — SS2R4 SS2R3 SS2R2 SS2R1 SS2R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 SS2R<4:0>: Assign SPI2 Slave Select Input (SS2) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits DS39974A-page 168 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-23: RPINR24: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT INPUT REGISTER 24 (BANKED EFFh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — OCFAR4 OCFAR3 OCFAR2 OCFAR1 OCFAR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 OCFAR<4:0>: Assign PWM Fault Input (FLT0) to the Corresponding RPn Pin bits 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 169 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-24: RPOR0: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 0 (BANKED EC1h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP0R4 RP0R3 RP0R2 RP0R1 RP0R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP0R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP0 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-25: RPOR1: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 1 (BANKED EC7h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP1R4 RP1R3 RP1R2 RP1R1 RP1R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP1R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP1 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-26: RPOR2: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 2 (BANKED EC3h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP2R4 RP2R3 RP2R2 RP2R1 RP2R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP2R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP2 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) DS39974A-page 170 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-27: RPOR3: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 3 (BANKED EC3h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP3R4 RP3R3 RP3R2 RP3R1 RP3R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP3R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP3 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-28: RPOR4: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 4 (BANKED EC4h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP4R4 RP4R3 RP4R2 RP4R1 RP4R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP4R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP4 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-29: RPOR5: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 5 (BANKED EC5h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP5R4 RP5R3 RP5R2 RP5R1 RP5R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP5R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP5 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 171 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-30: RPOR6: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 6 (BANKED EC6h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP6R4 RP6R3 RP6R2 RP6R1 RP6R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP6R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP6 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-31: RPOR7: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 7 (BANKED EC7h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP7R4 RP7R3 RP7R2 RP7R1 RP7R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP7R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP7 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-32: RPOR8: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 8 (BANKED EC8h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP8R4 RP8R3 RP8R2 RP8R1 RP8R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP8R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP8 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) DS39974A-page 172 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-33: RPOR9: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 9 (BANKED EC9h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP9R4 RP9R3 RP9R2 RP9R1 RP9R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP9R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP9 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-34: RPOR10: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 10 (BANKED ECAh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP10R4 RP10R3 RP10R2 RP10R1 RP10R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP10R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP10 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-35: RPOR11: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 11 (BANKED ECBh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP11R4 RP11R3 RP11R2 RP11R1 RP11R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP11R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP11 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 173 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-36: RPOR12: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 12 (BANKED ECCh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP12R4 RP12R3 RP12R2 RP12R1 RP12R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP12R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP12 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-37: RPOR13: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 13 (BANKED ECDh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP13R4 RP13R3 RP13R2 RP13R1 RP13R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP13R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP13 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-38: RPOR14: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 14 (BANKED ECEh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP14R4 RP14R3 RP14R2 RP14R1 RP14R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP14R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP14 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) DS39974A-page 174 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-39: RPOR15: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 15 (BANKED ECFh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP15R4 RP15R3 RP15R2 RP15R1 RP15R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP15R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP15 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-40: RPOR16: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 16 (BANKED ED0h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP16R4 RP16R3 RP16R2 RP16R1 RP16R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP16R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP16 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-41: RPOR17: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 17 (BANKED ED1h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP17R4 RP17R3 RP17R2 RP17R1 RP17R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP17R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP17 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 175 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-42: RPOR18: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 18 (BANKED ED2h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP18R4 RP18R3 RP18R2 RP18R1 RP18R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP18R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP18 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) REGISTER 10-43: RPOR19: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 19 (BANKED ED3h)(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP19R4 RP19R3 RP19R2 RP19R1 RP19R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP19R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP19 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) Note 1: RP19 pins are not available on 28-pin devices. REGISTER 10-44: RPOR20: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 20 (BANKED ED4h)(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP20R4 RP20R3 RP20R2 RP20R1 RP20R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP20R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP20 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) Note 1: RP20 pins are not available on 28-pin devices. DS39974A-page 176 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-45: RPOR21: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 21 (BANKED ED5h)(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP21R4 RP21R3 RP21R2 RP21R1 RP21R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP21R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP21 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) Note 1: RP21 pins are not available on 28-pin devices. REGISTER 10-46: RPOR22: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 22 (BANKED ED6h)(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP22R4 RP22R3 RP22R2 RP22R1 RP22R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP22R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP22 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) Note 1: RP22 pins are not available on 28-pin devices. REGISTER 10-47: RPOR23: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 23 (BANKED ED7h)(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP23R4 RP23R3 RP23R2 RP23R1 RP23R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP23R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP23 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) Note 1: RP23 pins are not available on 28-pin devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 177 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 10-48: RPOR24: PERIPHERAL PIN SELECT OUTPUT REGISTER 24 (BANKED ED8h)(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — RP24R4 RP24R3 RP24R2 RP24R1 RP24R0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R/W = Readable bit, Writable bit if IOLOCK = 0 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 RP24R<4:0>: Peripheral Output Function is Assigned to RP24 Output Pin bits (see Table 10-14 for peripheral function numbers) Note 1: RP24 pins are not available on 28-pin devices. DS39974A-page 178 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.0 Key features of the PMP module are: PARALLEL MASTER PORT (PMP) The Parallel Master Port module (PMP) is an 8-bit parallel I/O module, specifically designed to communicate with a wide variety of parallel devices, such as communication peripherals, LCDs, external memory devices and microcontrollers. Because the interface to parallel peripherals varies significantly, the PMP is highly configurable. The PMP module can be configured to serve as either a PMP or as a Parallel Slave Port (PSP). Note: The PMP module is not implemented on 28-pin devices. It is available only on the PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13. FIGURE 11-1: • Up to 16 bits of Addressing when using Data/Address Multiplexing • Up to 8 Programmable Address Lines • One Chip Select Line • Programmable Strobe Options: - Individual Read and Write Strobes or; - Read/Write Strobe with Enable Strobe • Address Auto-Increment/Auto-Decrement • Programmable Address/Data Multiplexing • Programmable Polarity on Control Signals • Legacy Parallel Slave Port Support • Enhanced Parallel Slave Support: - Address Support - 4-Byte Deep, Auto-Incrementing Buffer • Programmable Wait States • Selectable Input Voltage Levels PMP MODULE OVERVIEW Address Bus Data Bus PIC18 Parallel Master Port PMA<0> PMALL Control Lines PMA<1> PMALH Up to 8-Bit Address PMA<7:2> EEPROM PMCS PMBE PMRD PMRD/PMWR Microcontroller LCD FIFO Buffer PMWR PMENB PMD<7:0> PMA<7:0> PMA<15:8> 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary 8-Bit Data DS39974A-page 179 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.1 The PMCON registers (Register 11-1 and Register 11-2) control basic module operations, including turning the module on or off. They also configure address multiplexing and control strobe configuration. Module Registers The PMP module has a total of 14 Special Function Registers (SFRs) for its operation, plus one additional register to set configuration options. Of these, eight registers are used for control and six are used for PMP data transfer. 11.1.1 The PMMODE registers (Register 11-3 and Register 11-4) configure the various Master and Slave modes, the data width and interrupt generation. CONTROL REGISTERS The PMEH and PMEL registers (Register 11-5 and Register 11-6) configure the module’s operation at the hardware (I/O pin) level. The eight PMP Control registers are: • PMCONH and PMCONL • PMEH and PMEL The PMSTAT registers (Register 11-5 and Register 11-6) provide status flags for the module’s input and output buffers, depending on the operating mode. REGISTER 11-1: PMCONH: PARALLEL PORT CONTROL REGISTER HIGH BYTE (BANKED F5Fh)(1) • PMMODEH and PMMODEL • PMSTATL and PMSTATH R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PMPEN — — ADRMUX1 ADRMUX0 PTBEEN PTWREN PTRDEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 PMPEN: Parallel Master Port Enable bit 1 = PMP enabled 0 = PMP disabled, no off-chip access performed bit 6-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-3 ADRMUX<1:0>: Address/Data Multiplexing Selection bits 11 = Reserved 10 = All 16 bits of address are multiplexed on PMD<7:0> pins 01 = Lower 8 bits of address are multiplexed on PMD<7:0> pins (only eight bits of address are available in this mode) 00 = Address and data appear on separate pins (only eight bits of address are available in this mode) bit 2 PTBEEN: Byte Enable Port Enable bit (16-Bit Master mode) 1 = PMBE port enabled 0 = PMBE port disabled bit 1 PTWREN: Write Enable Strobe Port Enable bit 1 = PMWR/PMENB port enabled 0 = PMWR/PMENB port disabled bit 0 PTRDEN: Read/Write Strobe Port Enable bit 1 = PMRD/PMWR port enabled 0 = PMRD/PMWR port disabled Note 1: This register is only available on 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 180 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 11-2: PMCONL: PARALLEL PORT CONTROL REGISTER LOW BYTE (BANKED F5Eh)(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0(2) U-0 R/W-0(2) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CSF1 CSF0 ALP — CS1P BEP WRSP RDSP bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 CSF<1:0>: Chip Select Function bits 11 = Reserved 10 = Chip select function is enabled and PMCS acts as chip select (in Master mode). Up to 13 address bits only can be generated. 01 = Reserved 00 = Chip select function is disabled (in Master mode). All 16 address bits can be generated. bit 5 ALP: Address Latch Polarity bit(2) 1 = Active-high (PMALL and PMALH) 0 = Active-low (PMALL and PMALH) bit 4 Unimplemented: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 3 CS1P: Chip Select Polarity bit(2) 1 = Active-high (PMCS) 0 = Active-low (PMCS) bit 2 BEP: Byte Enable Polarity bit 1 = Byte enable active-high (PMBE) 0 = Byte enable active-low (PMBE) bit 1 WRSP: Write Strobe Polarity bit For Slave modes and Master Mode 2 (PMMODEH<1:0> = 00,01,10): 1 = Write strobe active-high (PMWR) 0 = Write strobe active-low (PMWR) For Master Mode 1 (PMMODEH<1:0> = 11): 1 = Enable strobe active-high (PMENB) 0 = Enable strobe active-low (PMENB) bit 0 RDSP: Read Strobe Polarity bit For Slave modes and Master Mode 2 (PMMODEH<1:0> = 00,01,10): 1 = Read strobe active-high (PMRD) 0 = Read strobe active-low (PMRD) For Master Mode 1 (PMMODEH<1:0> = 11): 1 = Read/write strobe active-high (PMRD/PMWR) 0 = Read/write strobe active-low (PMRD/PMWR) Note 1: 2: This register is only available on 44-pin devices. These bits have no effect when their corresponding pins are used as address lines. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 181 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 11-3: PMMODEH: PARALLEL PORT MODE REGISTER HIGH BYTE (BANKED F5Dh)(1) R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 BUSY IRQM1 IRQM0 INCM1 INCM0 MODE16 MODE1 MODE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 BUSY: Busy bit (Master mode only) 1 = Port is busy 0 = Port is not busy bit 6-5 IRQM<1:0>: Interrupt Request Mode bits 11 = Interrupt generated when Read Buffer 3 is read or Write Buffer 3 is written (Buffered PSP mode) or on a read or write operation when PMA<1:0> = 11 (Addressable PSP mode only) 10 = No interrupt generated, processor stall activated 01 = Interrupt generated at the end of the read/write cycle 00 = No interrupt generated bit 4-3 INCM<1:0>: Increment Mode bits 11 = PSP read and write buffers auto-increment (Legacy PSP mode only) 10 = Decrement ADDR<15,13:0> by 1 every read/write cycle 01 = Increment ADDR<15,13:0> by 1 every read/write cycle 00 = No increment or decrement of address bit 2 MODE16: 8/16-Bit Mode bit 1 = 16-bit mode: Data register is 16 bits; a read or write to the Data register invokes two 8-bit transfers 0 = 8-bit mode: Data register is 8 bits; a read or write to the Data register invokes one 8-bit transfer bit 1-0 MODE<1:0>: Parallel Port Mode Select bits 11 = Master Mode 1 (PMCS, PMRD/PMWR, PMENB, PMBE, PMA<x:0> and PMD<7:0>) 10 = Master Mode 2 (PMCS, PMRD, PMWR, PMBE, PMA<x:0> and PMD<7:0>) 01 = Enhanced PSP, control signals (PMRD, PMWR, PMCS, PMD<7:0> and PMA<1:0>) 00 = Legacy Parallel Slave Port, control signals (PMRD, PMWR, PMCS and PMD<7:0>) Note 1: This register is only available on 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 182 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 11-4: PMMODEL: PARALLEL PORT MODE REGISTER LOW BYTE (BANKED F5Ch)(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 WAITB1(2) WAITB0(2) WAITM3 WAITM2 WAITM1 WAITM0 WAITE1(2) WAITE0(2) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 WAITB<1:0>: Data Setup to Read/Write Wait State Configuration bits(2) 11 = Data Wait of 4 TCY; multiplexed address phase of 4 TCY 10 = Data Wait of 3 TCY; multiplexed address phase of 3 TCY 01 = Data Wait of 2 TCY; multiplexed address phase of 2 TCY 00 = Data Wait of 1 TCY; multiplexed address phase of 1 TCY bit 5-2 WAITM<3:0>: Read to Byte Enable Strobe Wait State Configuration bits 1111 = Wait of additional 15 TCY . . . 0001 = Wait of additional 1 TCY 0000 = No additional Wait cycles (operation forced into one TCY) bit 1-0 WAITE<1:0>: Data Hold After Strobe Wait State Configuration bits(2) 11 = Wait of 4 TCY 10 = Wait of 3 TCY 01 = Wait of 2 TCY 00 = Wait of 1 TCY Note 1: 2: x = Bit is unknown This register is only available on 44-pin devices. WAITBx and WAITEx bits are ignored whenever WAITM<3:0> = 0000. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 183 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 11-5: PMEH: PARALLEL PORT ENABLE REGISTER HIGH BYTE (BANKED F57h)(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PTEN15 PTEN14 PTEN13 PTEN12 PTEN11 PTEN10 PTEN9 PTEN8 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 PTEN<15:14>: PMCS Port Enable bits 1 = PMA<15:14> function as either PMA<15:14> or PMCS 0 = PMA<15:14> function as port I/O bit 5-0 PTEN<13:8>: PMP Address Port Enable bits 1 = PMA<13:8> function as PMP address lines 0 = PMA<13:8> function as port I/O Note 1: x = Bit is unknown This register is only available on 44-pin devices. REGISTER 11-6: PMEL: PARALLEL PORT ENABLE REGISTER LOW BYTE (BANKED F56h)(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PTEN7 PTEN6 PTEN5 PTEN4 PTEN3 PTEN2 PTEN1 PTEN0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-2 PTEN<7:2>: PMP Address Port Enable bits 1 = PMA<7:2> function as PMP address lines 0 = PMA<7:2> function as port I/O bit 1-0 PTEN<1:0>: PMALH/PMALL Strobe Enable bits 1 = PMA<1:0> function as either PMA<1:0> or PMALH and PMALL 0 = PMA<1:0> pads functions as port I/O Note 1: x = Bit is unknown This register is only available on 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 184 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 11-7: PMSTATH: PARALLEL PORT STATUS REGISTER HIGH BYTE (BANKED F55h)(1) R-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 R-0 IBF IBOV — — IB3F IB2F IB1F IB0F bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IBF: Input Buffer Full Status bit 1 = All writable Input Buffer registers are full 0 = Some or all of the writable Input Buffer registers are empty bit 6 IBOV: Input Buffer Overflow Status bit 1 = A write attempt to a full Input Byte register occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No overflow occurred bit 5-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3-0 IB<3:0>F: Input Buffer x Status Full bits 1 = Input buffer contains data that has not been read (reading the buffer will clear this bit) 0 = Input buffer does not contain any unread data Note 1: This register is only available on 44-pin devices. REGISTER 11-8: PMSTATL: PARALLEL PORT STATUS REGISTER LOW BYTE (BANKED F54h)(1) R-1 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 R-1 R-1 R-1 R-1 OBE OBUF — — OB3E OB2E OB1E OB0E bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 OBE: Output Buffer Empty Status bit 1 = All readable Output Buffer registers are empty 0 = Some or all of the readable Output Buffer registers are full bit 6 OBUF: Output Buffer Underflow Status bit 1 = A read occurred from an empty Output Byte register (must be cleared in software) 0 = No underflow occurred bit 5-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3-0 OB<3:0>E: Output Buffer x Status Empty bits 1 = Output buffer is empty (writing data to the buffer will clear this bit) 0 = Output buffer contains data that has not been transmitted Note 1: This register is only available on 44-pin devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 185 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.1.2 DATA REGISTERS The PMP module uses eight registers for transferring data into and out of the microcontroller. They are arranged as four pairs to allow the option of 16-bit data operations: • • • • PMDIN1H and PMDIN1L PMDIN2H and PMDIN2L PMADDRH/PMDOUT1H and PMADDRL/PMDOUT1L PMDOUT2H and PMDOUT2L The PMDIN1 registers are used for incoming data in Slave modes, and both input and output data in Master modes. The PMDIN2 registers are used for buffering input data in select Slave modes. The PMADDR/PMDOUT1 registers are actually a single register pair; the name and function are dictated by the module’s operating mode. In Master modes, the registers function as the PMADDRH and PMADDRL registers, and contain the address of any incoming or outgoing data. In Slave modes, the registers function as PMDOUT1H and PMDOUT1L, and are used for outgoing data. DS39974A-page 186 PMADDRH differs from PMADDRL in that it can also have limited PMP control functions. When the module is operating in select Master mode configurations, the upper two bits of the register can be used to determine the operation of chip select signals. If these are not used, PMADDR simply functions to hold the upper 8 bits of the address. Register 11-9 provides the function of the individual bits in PMADDRH. The PMDOUT2H and PMDOUT2L registers are only used in Buffered Slave modes and serve as a buffer for outgoing data. 11.1.3 PAD CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTER In addition to the module level configuration options, the PMP module can also be configured at the I/O pin for electrical operation. This option allows users to select either the normal Schmitt Trigger input buffer on digital I/O pins shared with the PMP, or use TTL level compatible buffers instead. Buffer configuration is controlled by the PMPTTL bit in the PADCFG1 register. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 11-9: PMADDRH: PARALLEL PORT ADDRESS REGISTER HIGH BYTE (MASTER MODES ONLY) (ACCESS F6Fhh)(1) U0 R/W-0 — CS1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 Parallel Master Port Address High Byte<13:8> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 CS1: Chip Select bit If PMCON<7:6> = 10: 1 = Chip select is active 0 = Chip select is inactive If PMCON<7:6> = 11 or 00: Bits function as ADDR<14>. bit 5-0 Parallel Master Port Address: High Byte<13:8> bits Note 1: r = Reserved x = Bit is unknown In Enhanced Slave mode, PMADDRH functions as PMDOUT1H, one of the Output Data Buffer registers. REGISTER 11-10: PMADDRL: PARALLEL PORT ADDRESS REGISTER LOW BYTE (MASTER MODES ONLY) (ACCESS F6Eh)(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 Parallel Master Port Address Low Byte<7:0> bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 Note 1: r = Reserved x = Bit is unknown Parallel Master Port Address: Low Byte<7:0> bits In Enhanced Slave mode, PMADDRL functions as PMDOUT1L, one of the Output Data Buffer registers. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 187 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.2 Slave Port Modes The primary mode of operation for the module is configured using the MODE<1:0> bits in the PMMODEH register. The setting affects whether the module acts as a slave or a master and it determines the usage of the control pins. 11.2.1 LEGACY MODE (PSP) In Legacy mode (PMMODEH<1:0> = 00 and PMPEN = 1), the module is configured as a Parallel Slave Port (PSP) with the associated enabled module FIGURE 11-2: pins dedicated to the module. In this mode, an external device, such as another microcontroller or microprocessor, can asynchronously read and write data using the 8-bit data bus (PMD<7:0>), the read (PMRD), write (PMWR) and chip select (PMCS) inputs. It acts as a slave on the bus and responds to the read/write control signals. Figure 11-2 displays the connection of the PSP. When chip select is active and a write strobe occurs (PMCS = 1 and PMWR = 1), the data from PMD<7:0> is captured into the PMDIN1L register. LEGACY PARALLEL SLAVE PORT EXAMPLE Master PIC18 Slave PMD<7:0> DS39974A-page 188 PMD<7:0> PMCS PMCS PMRD PMRD PMWR PMWR Preliminary Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.2.2 WRITE TO SLAVE PORT 11.2.3 When chip select is active and a write strobe occurs (PMCS = 1 and PMWR = 1), the data from PMD<7:0> is captured into the lower PMDIN1L register. The PMPIF and IBF flag bits are set when the write ends.The timing for the control signals in Write mode is displayed in Figure 11-3. The polarity of the control signals are configurable. FIGURE 11-3: READ FROM SLAVE PORT When chip select is active and a read strobe occurs (PMCS = 1 and PMRD = 1), the data from the PMDOUT1L register (PMDOUT1L<7:0>) is presented on to PMD<7:0>. Figure 11-4 provides the timing for the control signals in Read mode. PARALLEL SLAVE PORT WRITE WAVEFORMS | Q4 | Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 | Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 PMCS PMWR PMRD PMD<7:0> IBF OBE PMPIF FIGURE 11-4: PARALLEL SLAVE PORT READ WAVEFORMS | Q4 PMCS PMWR PMRD PMD<7:0> IBF OBE PMPIF 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 189 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.2.4 BUFFERED PARALLEL SLAVE PORT MODE 11.2.4.2 Buffered Parallel Slave Port mode is functionally identical to the Legacy PSP mode with one exception, the implementation of 4-level read and write buffers. Buffered PSP mode is enabled by setting the INCM bits in the PMMODEH register. If the INCM<1:0> bits are set to ‘11’, the PMP module will act as the buffered PSP. When the Buffered PSP mode is active, the PMDIN1L, PMDIN1H, PMDIN2L and PMDIN2H registers become the write buffers and the PMDOUT1L, PMDOUT1H, PMDOUT2L and PMDOUT2H registers become the read buffers. Buffers are numbered, 0 through 3, starting with the lower byte of PMDIN1L to PMDIN2H as the read buffers and PMDOUT1L to PMDOUT2H as the write buffers. 11.2.4.1 READ FROM SLAVE PORT For read operations, the bytes will be sent out sequentially, starting with Buffer 0 (PMDOUT1L<7:0>) and ending with Buffer 3 (PMDOUT2H<7:0>) for every read strobe. The module maintains an internal pointer to keep track of which buffer is to be read. Each buffer has a corresponding read status bit, OBxE, in the PMSTATL register. This bit is cleared when a buffer contains data that has not been written to the bus and is set when data is written to the bus. If the current buffer location being read from is empty, a buffer underflow is generated and the Buffer Overflow Flag bit, OBUF, is set. If all four OBxE status bits are set, then the Output Buffer Empty flag (OBE) will also be set. FIGURE 11-5: WRITE TO SLAVE PORT For write operations, the data has to be stored sequentially, starting with Buffer 0 (PMDIN1L<7:0>) and ending with Buffer 3 (PMDIN2H<7:0>). As with read operations, the module maintains an internal pointer to the buffer that is to be written next. The input buffers have their own write status bits: IBxF in the PMSTATH register. The bit is set when the buffer contains unread incoming data and cleared when the data has been read. The flag bit is set on the write strobe. If a write occurs on a buffer when its associated IBxF bit is set, the Buffer Overflow flag, IBOV, is set; any incoming data in the buffer will be lost. If all four IBxF flags are set, the Input Buffer Full Flag (IBF) is set. In Buffered Slave mode, the module can be configured to generate an interrupt on every read or write strobe (IRQM<1:0> = 01). It can be configured to generate an interrupt on a read from Read Buffer 3 or a write to Write Buffer 3, which is essentially an interrupt every fourth read or write strobe (RQM<1:0> = 11). When interrupting every fourth byte for input data, all Input Buffer registers should be read to clear the IBxF flags. If these flags are not cleared, then there is a risk of hitting an overflow condition. PARALLEL MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION BUFFERED EXAMPLE PIC18 Slave Master PMD<7:0> PMD<7:0> Write Address Pointer Read Address Pointer PMDOUT1L (0) PMDIN1L (0) PMDOUT1H (1) PMDIN1H (1) PMCS PMCS PMRD PMRD PMDOUT2L (2) PMDIN2L (2) PMWR PMDOUT2H (3) PMDIN2H (3) PMWR Data Bus Control Lines DS39974A-page 190 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.2.5 ADDRESSABLE PARALLEL SLAVE PORT MODE In the Addressable Parallel Slave Port mode (PMMODEH<1:0> = 01), the module is configured with two extra inputs, PMA<1:0>, which are the Address Lines 1 and 0. This makes the 4-byte buffer space directly addressable as fixed pairs of read and write buffers. As with Legacy Buffered mode, data is output from PMDOUT1L, PMDOUT1H, PMDOUT2L and PMDOUT2H, and is read in PMDIN1L, PMDIN1H, PMDIN2L and PMDIN2H. Table 11-1 provides the buffer addressing for the incoming address to the input and output registers. FIGURE 11-6: TABLE 11-1: SLAVE MODE BUFFER ADDRESSING PMA<1:0> Output Register (Buffer) Input Register (Buffer) 00 PMDOUT1L (0) PMDIN1L (0) 01 PMDOUT1H (1) PMDIN1H (1) 10 PMDOUT2L (2) PMDIN2L (2) 11 PMDOUT2H((3) PMDIN2H (3) PARALLEL MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION ADDRESSED BUFFER EXAMPLE Master PIC18F Slave PMA<1:0> PMA<1:0> PMD<7:0> PMD<7:0> Write Address Decode Read Address Decode PMDOUT1L (0) PMDIN1L (0) PMDOUT1H (1) PMDIN1H (1) PMCS PMCS PMRD PMRD PMDOUT2L (2) PMDIN2L (2) PMWR PMDOUT2H (3) PMDIN2H (3) PMWR Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines 11.2.5.1 READ FROM SLAVE PORT When chip select is active and a read strobe occurs (PMCS = 1 and PMRD = 1), the data from one of the four output bytes is presented onto PMD<7:0>. Which byte is read depends on the 2-bit address placed on ADDR<1:0>. Table 11-1 provides the corresponding FIGURE 11-7: output registers and their associated address. When an output buffer is read, the corresponding OBxE bit is set. The OBxE flag bit is set when all the buffers are empty. If any buffer is already empty (OBxE = 1), the next read to that buffer will generate an OBUF event. PARALLEL SLAVE PORT READ WAVEFORMS | Q4 | Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 PMCS PMWR PMRD PMD<7:0> PMA<1:0> OBE PMPIF 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 191 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.2.5.2 WRITE TO SLAVE PORT When chip select is active and a write strobe occurs (PMCS = 1 and PMWR = 1), the data from PMD<7:0> is captured into one of the four input buffer bytes. Which byte is written depends on the 2-bit address placed on ADDRL<1:0>. When an input buffer is written, the corresponding IBxF bit is set. The IBF flag bit is set when all the buffers are written. If any buffer is already written (IBxF = 1), the next write strobe to that buffer will generate an OBUF event and the byte will be discarded. Table 11-1 provides the corresponding input registers and their associated address. FIGURE 11-8: PARALLEL SLAVE PORT WRITE WAVEFORMS | Q4 | Q1 | Q2 | Q3 | Q4 PMCS PMWR PMRD PMD<7:0> PMA<1:0> IBF PMPIF DS39974A-page 192 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.3 MASTER PORT MODES In its Master modes, the PMP module provides an 8-bit data bus, up to 16 bits of address, and all the necessary control signals to operate a variety of external parallel devices, such as memory devices, peripherals and slave microcontrollers. To use the PMP as a master, the module must be enabled (PMPEN = 1) and the mode must be set to one of the two possible Master modes (PMMODEH<1:0> = 10 or 11). Because there are a number of parallel devices with a variety of control methods, the PMP module is designed to be extremely flexible to accommodate a range of configurations. Some of these features include: • • • • • • • 8-Bit and 16-Bit Data modes on an 8-bit data bus Configurable address/data multiplexing Up to two chip select lines Up to 16 selectable address lines Address auto-increment and auto-decrement Selectable polarity on all control lines Configurable Wait states at different stages of the read/write cycle 11.3.1 PMP AND I/O PIN CONTROL Multiple control bits are used to configure the presence or absence of control and address signals in the module. These bits are PTBEEN, PTWREN, PTRDEN and PTEN<15:0>. They give the user the ability to conserve pins for other functions and allow flexibility to control the external address. When any one of these bits is set, the associated function is present on its associated pin; when clear, the associated pin reverts to its defined I/O port function. Setting a PTENx bit will enable the associated pin as an address pin and drive the corresponding data contained in the PMADDR register. Clearing a PTENx bit will force the pin to revert to its original I/O function. For the pins configured as chip select (PMCS) with the corresponding PTENx bit set, the PTEN0 and PTEN1 bits will also control the PMALL and PMALH signals. When multiplexing is used, the associated address latch signals should be enabled. 11.3.2 READ/WRITE-CONTROL The PMP module supports two distinct read/write signaling methods. In Master Mode 1, read and write strobes are combined into a single control line, PMRD/PMWR. A second control line, PMENB, determines when a read or write action is to be taken. In Master Mode 2, separate read and write strobes (PMRD and PMWR) are supplied on separate pins. same output pin (for example, PMWR and PMENB) are controlled by the same bit; the configuration depends on which Master Port mode is being used. 11.3.3 DATA WIDTH The PMP supports data widths of both 8 bits and 16 bits. The data width is selected by the MODE16 bit (PMMODEH<2>). Because the data path into and out of the module is only 8 bits wide, 16-bit operations are always handled in a multiplexed fashion, with the Least Significant Byte (LSB) of data being presented first. To differentiate data bytes, the byte enable control strobe, PMBE, is used to signal when the Most Significant Byte (MSB) of data is being presented on the data lines. 11.3.4 ADDRESS MULTIPLEXING In either of the Master modes (PMMODEH<1:0> = 1x), the user can configure the address bus to be multiplexed together with the data bus. This is accomplished by using the ADRMUX<1:0> bits (PMCONH<4:3>). There are three address multiplexing modes available. Typical pinout configurations for these modes are displayed in Figure 11-9, Figure 11-10 and Figure 11-11. In Demultiplexed mode (PMCONH<4:3> = 00), data and address information are completely separated. Data bits are presented on PMD<7:0>, and address bits are presented on PMADDRH<6:0> and PMADDRL<7:0>. In Partially Multiplexed mode (PMCONH<4:3> = 01), the lower eight bits of the address are multiplexed with the data pins on PMD<7:0>. The upper eight bits of the address are unaffected and are presented on PMADDRH<6:0>. The PMA0 pin is used as an address latch and presents the Address Latch Low (PMALL) enable strobe. The read and write sequences are extended by a complete CPU cycle during which the address is presented on the PMD<7:0> pins. In Fully Multiplexed mode (PMCONH<4:3> = 10), the entire 16 bits of the address are multiplexed with the data pins on PMD<7:0>. The PMA0 and PMA1 pins are used to present Address Latch Low (PMALL) enable and Address Latch High (PMALH) enable strobes, respectively. The read and write sequences are extended by two complete CPU cycles. During the first cycle, the lower eight bits of the address are presented on the PMD<7:0> pins with the PMALL strobe active. During the second cycle, the upper eight bits of the address are presented on the PMD<7:0> pins with the PMALH strobe active. In the event the upper address bits are configured as chip select pins, the corresponding address bits are automatically forced to ‘0’. All control signals (PMRD, PMWR, PMBE, PMENB, PMAL and PMCS) can be individually configured as either positive or negative polarity. Configuration is controlled by separate bits in the PMCONL register. Note that the polarity of control signals that share the 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 193 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 11-9: DEMULTIPLEXED ADDRESSING MODE (SEPARATE READ AND WRITE STROBES WITH CHIP SELECT) PIC18F PMA<7:0> PMD<7:0> PMCS PMRD Address Bus Data Bus PMWR FIGURE 11-10: Control Lines PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESSING MODE (SEPARATE READ AND WRITE STROBES WITH CHIP SELECT) PIC18F PMD<7:0> PMA<7:0> PMCS PMALL PMRD PMWR FIGURE 11-11: Address Bus Multiplexed Data and Address Bus Control Lines FULLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESSING MODE (SEPARATE READ AND WRITE STROBES WITH CHIP SELECT) PIC18F PMD<7:0> PMA<13:8> PMCS PMALL PMALH DS39974A-page 194 PMRD Multiplexed Data and Address Bus PMWR Control Lines Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.3.5 CHIP SELECT FEATURES A chip select line, PMCS, is available for the Master modes of the PMP. The chip select line is multiplexed with the second Most Significant bit (MSb) of the address bus (PMADDRH<6>). When configured for chip select, the PMADDRH<7:6> bits are not included in any address auto-increment/decrement. The function of the chip select signal is configured using the chip select function bits (PMCONL<7:6>). 11.3.6 AUTO-INCREMENT/DECREMENT While the module is operating in one of the Master modes, the INCMx bits (PMMODEH<4:3>) control the behavior of the address value. The address can be made to automatically increment or decrement after each read and write operation. The address increments once each operation is completed and the BUSY bit goes to ‘0’. If the chip select signals are disabled and configured as address bits, the bits will participate in the increment and decrement operations; otherwise, the CS1 bit values will be unaffected. 11.3.7 WAIT STATES In Master mode, the user has control over the duration of the read, write and address cycles by configuring the module Wait states. Three portions of the cycle, the beginning, middle and end, are configured using the corresponding WAITBx, WAITMx and WAITEx bits in the PMMODEL register. The WAITBx bits (PMMODEL<7:6>) set the number of Wait cycles for the data setup prior to the PMRD/PMWT strobe in Mode 10, or prior to the PMENB strobe in Mode 11. The WAITMx bits (PMMODEL<5:2>) set the number of Wait cycles for the PMRD/PMWT strobe in Mode 10, or for the PMENB strobe in Mode 11. When this Wait state setting is ‘0’, then WAITB and WAITE have no effect. The WAITE bits (PMMODEL<1:0>) define the number of Wait cycles for the data hold time after the PMRD/PMWT strobe in Mode 10 or after the PMENB strobe in Mode 11. 11.3.8 Note that the read data obtained from the PMDIN1L register is actually the read value from the previous read operation. Hence, the first user read will be a dummy read to initiate the first bus read and fill the read register. Also, the requested read value will not be ready until after the BUSY bit is observed low. Thus, in a back-to-back read operation, the data read from the register will be the same for both reads. The next read of the register will yield the new value. 11.3.9 To perform a read on the PMP, the user reads the PMDIN1L register. This causes the PMP to output the desired values on the chip select lines and the address bus. Then, the read line (PMRD) is strobed. The read data is placed into the PMDIN1L register. WRITE OPERATION To perform a write onto the parallel bus, the user writes to the PMDIN1L register. This causes the module to first output the desired values on the chip select lines and the address bus. The write data from the PMDIN1L register is placed onto the PMD<7:0> data bus. Then, the write line (PMWR) is strobed. If the 16-bit mode is enabled (MODE16 = 1), the write to the PMDIN1L register will initiate two bus writes. The first write will consist of the data contained in PMDIN1L and the second write will contain the PMDIN1H. 11.3.10 11.3.10.1 PARALLEL MASTER PORT STATUS The BUSY Bit In addition to the PMP interrupt, a BUSY bit is provided to indicate the status of the module. This bit is used only in Master mode. While any read or write operation is in progress, the BUSY bit is set for all but the very last CPU cycle of the operation. In effect, if a single-cycle read or write operation is requested, the BUSY bit will never be active. This allows back-to-back transfers. While the bit is set, any request by the user to initiate a new operation will be ignored (i.e., writing or reading the lower byte of the PMDIN1L register will neither initiate a read nor a write). 11.3.10.2 READ OPERATION 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. If the 16-bit mode is enabled (MODE16 = 1), the read of the low byte of the PMDIN1L register will initiate two bus reads. The first read data byte is placed into the PMDIN1L register and the second read data byte is placed into the PMDIN1H. Interrupts When the PMP module interrupt is enabled for Master mode, the module will interrupt on every completed read or write cycle; otherwise, the BUSY bit is available to query the status of the module. Preliminary DS39974A-page 195 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.3.11 MASTER MODE TIMING This section contains a number of timing examples that represent the common Master mode configuration options. These options vary from 8-bit to 16-bit data, fully demultiplexed to fully multiplexed address and Wait states. FIGURE 11-12: READ AND WRITE TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, DEMULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS PMD<7:0> PMA<7:0> PMWR PMRD PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-13: READ TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> Data PMWR PMRD PMALL PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-14: READ TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, WAIT STATES ENABLED, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - PMCS PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> Data PMRD PMWR PMALL PMPIF BUSY WAITB<1:0> = 01 DS39974A-page 196 WAITE<1:0> = 00 WAITM<3:0> = 0010 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 11-15: WRITE TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> Data PMWR PMRD PMALL PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-16: WRITE TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, WAIT STATES ENABLED, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - Q1- - - PMCS Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> Data PMWR PMRD PMALL PMPIF BUSY WAITB<1:0> = 01 WAITE<1:0> = 00 WAITM<3:0> = 0010 FIGURE 11-17: READ TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS, ENABLE STROBE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> Data PMRD/PMWR PMENB PMALL PMPIF BUSY 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 197 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 11-18: WRITE TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS, ENABLE STROBE Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> Data PMRD/PMWR PMENB PMALL PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-19: READ TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, FULLY MULTIPLEXED 16-BIT ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> Data Address<13:8> PMWR PMRD PMALL PMALH PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-20: WRITE TIMING, 8-BIT DATA, FULLY MULTIPLEXED 16-BIT ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> Address<13:8> Data PMWR PMRD PMALL PMALH PMPIF BUSY DS39974A-page 198 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 11-21: READ TIMING, 16-BIT DATA, DEMULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS LSB PMD<7:0> MSB PMA<7:0> PMWR PMRD PMBE PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-22: WRITE TIMING, 16-BIT DATA, DEMULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS LSB PMD<7:0> MSB PMA<7:0> PMWR PMRD PMBE PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-23: READ TIMING, 16-BIT MULTIPLEXED DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> LSB MSB PMWR PMRD PMBE PMALL PMPIF BUSY 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 199 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 11-24: WRITE TIMING, 16-BIT MULTIPLEXED DATA, PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> LSB MSB PMWR PMRD PMBE PMALL PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-25: READ TIMING, 16-BIT MULTIPLEXED DATA, FULLY MULTIPLEXED 16-BIT ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS Address<7:0> PMD<7:0> Address<13:8> LSB MSB PMWR PMRD PMBE PMALH PMALL PMPIF BUSY FIGURE 11-26: WRITE TIMING, 16-BIT MULTIPLEXED DATA, FULLY MULTIPLEXED 16-BIT ADDRESS Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 PMCS PMD<7:0> Address<7:0> Address<13:8> LSB MSB PMWR PMRD PMBE PMALH PMALL PMPIF BUSY DS39974A-page 200 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.4 11.4.1 Application Examples This section introduces some potential applications for the PMP module. FIGURE 11-27: Figure 11-27 demonstrates the hookup of a memory or another addressable peripheral in Full Multiplex mode. Consequently, this mode achieves the best pin saving from the microcontroller perspective. However, for this configuration, there needs to be some external latches to maintain the address. MULTIPLEXED ADDRESSING APPLICATION EXAMPLE PIC18F PMD<7:0> PMALL A<7:0> 373 A<13:0> D<7:0> 373 PMALH 11.4.2 MULTIPLEXED MEMORY OR PERIPHERAL D<7:0> CE A<15:8> OE WR PMCS Address Bus PMRD Data Bus PMWR Control Lines PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED MEMORY OR PERIPHERAL an external latch. If the peripheral has internal latches, as displayed in Figure 11-29, then no extra circuitry is required except for the peripheral itself. Partial multiplexing implies using more pins; however, for a few extra pins, some extra performance can be achieved. Figure 11-28 provides an example of a memory or peripheral that is partially multiplexed with FIGURE 11-28: EXAMPLE OF A PARTIALLY MULTIPLEXED ADDRESSING APPLICATION PIC18F PMD<7:0> 373 PMALL A<7:0> D<7:0> A<7:0> D<7:0> CE PMCS OE WR Address Bus PMRD Data Bus PMWR Control Lines FIGURE 11-29: EXAMPLE OF AN 8-BIT MULTIPLEXED ADDRESS AND DATA APPLICATION PIC18F PMD<7:0> PMALL Parallel Peripheral AD<7:0> ALE PMCS CS Address Bus PMRD RD Data Bus PMWR WR Control Lines 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 201 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 11.4.3 PARALLEL EEPROM EXAMPLE Figure 11-30 provides an example connecting parallel EEPROM to the PMP. Figure 11-31 demonstrates a slight variation to this, configuring the connection for 16-bit data from a single EEPROM. FIGURE 11-30: PARALLEL EEPROM EXAMPLE (UP TO 15-BIT ADDRESS, 8-BIT DATA) PIC18F Parallel EEPROM PMA<n:0> A<n:0> PMD<7:0> D<7:0> PMCS CE PMRD OE PMWR WR FIGURE 11-31: Data Bus Control Lines PARALLEL EEPROM EXAMPLE (UP TO 15-BIT ADDRESS, 16-BIT DATA) PIC18F Parallel EEPROM PMA<n:0> A<n:1> PMD<7:0> D<7:0> PMBE 11.4.4 Address Bus A0 PMCS CE PMRD OE PMWR WR Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines LCD CONTROLLER EXAMPLE The PMP module can be configured to connect to a typical LCD controller interface, as displayed in Figure 11-32. In this case the PMP module is configured for active-high control signals since common LCD displays require active-high control. FIGURE 11-32: LCD CONTROL EXAMPLE (BYTE MODE OPERATION) PIC18F PM<7:0> PMA0 PMRD/PMWR PMCS LCD Controller D<7:0> RS R/W E Address Bus Data Bus Control Lines DS39974A-page 202 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 11-2: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PMP MODULE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF PIR1 PMPIF (2) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF PIE1 PMPIE(2) ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE IPR1 PMPIP(2) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP PMCONH(2) PMPEN — — ADRMUX1 ADRMUX0 PTBEEN PTWREN PTRDEN PMCONL(2) CSF1 CSF0 ALP — CS1P BEP WRSP RDSP — CS1 PMADDRH(1,2) / Parallel Master Port Address High Byte PMDOUT1H(1,2) Parallel Port Out Data High Byte (Buffer 1) PMADDRL(1,2)/ Parallel Master Port Address Low Byte (1,2) PMDOUT1L Parallel Port Out Data Low Byte (Buffer 0) PMDOUT2H(2) Parallel Port Out Data High Byte (Buffer 3) PMDOUT2L(2) Parallel Port Out Data Low Byte (Buffer 2) PMDIN1H(2) Parallel Port In Data High Byte (Buffer 1) PMDIN1L(2) Parallel Port In Data Low Byte (Buffer 0) PMDIN2H(2) Parallel Port In Data High Byte (Buffer 3) PMDIN2L(2) Parallel Port In Data Low Byte (Buffer 2) PMMODEH(2) (2) BUSY IRQM1 IRQM0 INCM1 INCM0 MODE16 MODE1 MODE0 PMMODEL WAITB1 WAITB0 WAITM3 WAITM2 WAITM1 WAITM0 WAITE1 WAITE0 PMEH(2) PTEN15 PTEN14 PTEN13 PTEN12 PTEN11 PTEN10 PTEN9 PTEN8 PMEL(2) PTEN7 PTEN6 PTEN5 PTEN4 PTEN3 PTEN2 PTEN1 PTEN0 PMSTATH(2) IBF IBOV — — IB3F IB2F IB1F IB0F PMSTATL(2) OBE OBUF — — OB3E OB2E OB1E OB0E — — — — — RTSECSEL1 RTSECSEL0 PMPTTL PADCFG1 Legend: Note 1: 2: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used during PMP operation. The PMADDRH/PMDOUT1H and PMADDRL/PMDOUT1L register pairs share the physical registers and addresses, but have different functions determined by the module’s operating mode. These bits and/or registers are only available in 44-pin devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 203 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 204 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 12.0 TIMER0 MODULE The Timer0 module incorporates the following features: • Software selectable operation as a timer or counter in both 8-bit or 16-bit modes • Readable and writable registers • Dedicated 8-bit, software programmable prescaler • Selectable clock source (internal or external) • Edge select for external clock • Interrupt-on-overflow REGISTER 12-1: The T0CON register (Register 12-1) controls all aspects of the module’s operation, including the prescale selection. It is both readable and writable. Figure 12-1 provides a simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 8-bit mode. Figure 12-2 provides a simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 16-bit mode. T0CON: TIMER0 CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS FD5h) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS2 T0PS1 T0PS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 TMR0ON: Timer0 On/Off Control bit 1 = Enables Timer0 0 = Stops Timer0 bit 6 T08BIT: Timer0 8-Bit/16-Bit Control bit 1 = Timer0 is configured as an 8-bit timer/counter 0 = Timer0 is configured as a 16-bit timer/counter bit 5 T0CS: Timer0 Clock Source Select bit 1 = Transition on T0CKI pin input edge 0 = Internal clock (FOSC/4) bit 4 T0SE: Timer0 Source Edge Select bit 1 = Increment on high-to-low transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Increment on low-to-high transition on T0CKI pin bit 3 PSA: Timer0 Prescaler Assignment bit 1 = Timer0 prescaler is not assigned. Timer0 clock input bypasses prescaler. 0 = Timer0 prescaler is assigned. Timer0 clock input comes from the prescaler output. bit 2-0 T0PS<2:0>: Timer0 Prescaler Select bits 111 = 1:256 Prescale value 110 = 1:128 Prescale value 101 = 1:64 Prescale value 100 = 1:32 Prescale value 011 = 1:16 Prescale value 010 = 1:8 Prescale value 001 = 1:4 Prescale value 000 = 1:2 Prescale value 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 205 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 12.1 Timer0 Operation Timer0 can operate as either a timer or a counter. The mode is selected with the T0CS bit (T0CON<5>). In Timer mode (T0CS = 0), the module increments on every clock by default unless a different prescaler value is selected (see Section 12.3 “Prescaler”). If the TMR0 register is written to, the increment is inhibited for the following two instruction cycles. The user can work around this by writing an adjusted value to the TMR0 register. The Counter mode is selected by setting the T0CS bit (= 1). In this mode, Timer0 increments either on every rising edge or falling edge of the pin, T0CKI. The incrementing edge is determined by the Timer0 Source Edge Select bit, T0SE (T0CON<4>); clearing this bit selects the rising edge. Restrictions on the external clock input are discussed below. An external clock source can be used to drive Timer0; however, it must meet certain requirements to ensure that the external clock can be synchronized with the FIGURE 12-1: internal phase clock (TOSC). There is a delay between synchronization and the onset of incrementing the timer/counter. 12.2 Timer0 Reads and Writes in 16-Bit Mode TMR0H is not the actual high byte of Timer0 in 16-bit mode. It is actually a buffered version of the real high byte of Timer0, which is not directly readable nor writable (refer to Figure 12-2). TMR0H is updated with the contents of the high byte of Timer0 during a read of TMR0L. This provides the ability to read all 16 bits of Timer0 without having to verify that the read of the high and low byte were valid, due to a rollover between successive reads of the high and low byte. Similarly, a write to the high byte of Timer0 must also take place through the TMR0H Buffer register. The high byte is updated with the contents of TMR0H when a write occurs to TMR0L. This allows all 16 bits of Timer0 to be updated at once. TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (8-BIT MODE) FOSC/4 0 1 1 Programmable Prescaler T0CKI Pin T0SE T0CS 0 Sync with Internal Clocks Set TMR0IF on Overflow TMR0L (2 TCY Delay) 8 3 T0PS<2:0> 8 PSA Internal Data Bus Note: Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-bit mode with clock input from T0CKI max. prescale. FIGURE 12-2: FOSC/4 TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT MODE) 0 1 1 T0CKI Pin T0SE T0CS Programmable Prescaler 0 Sync with Internal Clocks TMR0 High Byte TMR0L 8 Set TMR0IF on Overflow (2 TCY Delay) 3 Read TMR0L T0PS<2:0> Write TMR0L PSA 8 8 TMR0H 8 8 Internal Data Bus Note: Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-bit mode with clock input from T0CKI max. prescale. DS39974A-page 206 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 12.3 12.3.1 Prescaler An 8-bit counter is available as a prescaler for the Timer0 module. The prescaler is not directly readable or writable. Its value is set by the PSA and T0PS<2:0> bits (T0CON<3:0>), which determine the prescaler assignment and prescale ratio. The prescaler assignment is fully under software control and can be changed “on-the-fly” during program execution. 12.4 Clearing the PSA bit assigns the prescaler to the Timer0 module. When it is assigned, prescale values from 1:2 through 1:256, in power-of-2 increments, are selectable. Writing to TMR0 when the prescaler is assigned to Timer0 will clear the prescaler count but will not change the prescaler assignment. TABLE 12-1: Name Timer0 Interrupt The TMR0 interrupt is generated when the TMR0 register overflows from FFh to 00h in 8-bit mode, or from FFFFh to 0000h in 16-bit mode. This overflow sets the TMR0IF flag bit. The interrupt can be masked by clearing the TMR0IE bit (INTCON<5>). Before re-enabling the interrupt, the TMR0IF bit must be cleared in software by the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR). When assigned to the Timer0 module, all instructions writing to the TMR0 register (e.g., CLRF TMR0, MOVWF TMR0, BSF TMR0, etc.) clear the prescaler count. Note: SWITCHING PRESCALER ASSIGNMENT Since Timer0 is shut down in Sleep mode, the TMR0 interrupt cannot awaken the processor from Sleep. REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER0 Bit 7 Bit 6 TMR0L Timer0 Register Low Byte TMR0H Timer0 Register High Byte Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF T0CON TMR0ON T08BIT T0CS T0SE PSA T0PS2 T0PS1 T0PS0 Legend: Shaded cells are not used by Timer0. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 207 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 208 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 13.0 TIMER1 MODULE The Timer1 timer/counter module incorporates these features: • Software selectable operation as a 16-bit timer or counter • Readable and writable 8-bit registers (TMR1H and TMR1L) • Selectable clock source (internal or external) with device clock or Timer1 oscillator internal options • Interrupt-on-overflow • Reset on ECCP Special Event Trigger • Device clock status flag (SOSCRUN) • Timer with gated control REGISTER 13-1: Figure 13-1 displays a simplified block diagram of the Timer1 module. The module incorporates its own low-power oscillator to provide an additional clocking option. The Timer1 oscillator can also be used as a low-power clock source for the microcontroller in power-managed operation. Timer1 is controlled through the T1CON Control register (Register 13-1). It also contains the Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit (T1OSCEN). Timer1 can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing control bit, TMR1ON (T1CON<0>). The FOSC clock source (TMR1CS<1:0> = 01) should not be used with the ECCP capture/compare features. If the timer will be used with the capture or compare features, always select one of the other timer clocking options. T1CON: TIMER1 CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS FCDh) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TMR1CS1 bit 7 TMR1CS0 T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC RD16 Legend: R = Readable bit -n = Value at POR bit 7-6 bit 5-4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 Note 1: 2: W = Writable bit ‘1’ = Bit is set R/W-0 TMR1ON bit 0 U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown TMR1CS<1:0>: Timer1 Clock Source Select bits 10 = Timer1 clock source is the T1OSC or T1CKI pin 01 = Timer1 clock source is the system clock (FOSC)(1) 00 = Timer1 clock source is the instruction clock (FOSC/4) T1CKPS<1:0>: Timer1 Input Clock Prescale Select bits 11 = 1:8 Prescale value 10 = 1:4 Prescale value 01 = 1:2 Prescale value 00 = 1:1 Prescale value T1OSCEN: Timer1 Oscillator Source Select bit When TMR1CS<1:0> = 10: 1 = Power up the Timer1 crystal driver and supply the Timer1 clock from the crystal output 0 = Timer1 crystal driver is off, Timer1 clock is from the T1CKI input pin(2) When TMR1CS<1:0> = 0x: 1 = Power up the Timer1 crystal driver 0 = Timer1 crystal driver is off(2) T1SYNC: Timer1 External Clock Input Synchronization Select bit TMR1CS<1:0> = 10: 1 = Do not synchronize external clock input 0 = Synchronize external clock input TMR1CS<1:0> = 0x: This bit is ignored. Timer1 uses the internal clock when TMR1CS<1:0> = 0x. RD16: 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit 1 = Enables register read/write of Timer1 in one 16-bit operation 0 = Enables register read/write of Timer1 in two 8-bit operations TMR1ON: Timer1 On bit 1 = Enables Timer1 0 = Stops Timer1 The FOSC clock source should not be selected if the timer will be used with the ECCP capture/compare features. The Timer1 oscillator crystal driver is powered whenever T1OSCEN (T1CON<3>) or T3OSCEN (T3CON<3>) = 1. The circuit is enabled by the logical OR of these two bits. When disabled, the inverter and feedback resistor are disabled to eliminate power drain. The TMR1ON and TMR3ON bits do not have to be enabled to power up the crystal driver. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 209 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 13.1 Timer1 Gate Control Register The Timer1 Gate Control register (T1GCON), displayed in Register 13-2, is used to control the Timer1 gate. REGISTER 13-2: T1GCON: TIMER1 GATE CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS F9Ah)(1) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-x R/W-0 R/W-0 TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GTM T1GSPM T1GGO/T1DONE T1GVAL T1GSS1 T1GSS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 TMR1GE: Timer1 Gate Enable bit If TMR1ON = 0: This bit is ignored. If TMR1ON = 1: 1 = Timer1 counting is controlled by the Timer1 gate function 0 = Timer1 counts regardless of the Timer1 gate function bit 6 T1GPOL: Timer1 Gate Polarity bit 1 = Timer1 gate is active-high (Timer1 counts when gate is high) 0 = Timer1 gate is active-low (Timer1 counts when gate is low) bit 5 T1GTM: Timer1 Gate Toggle Mode bit 1 = Timer1 Gate Toggle mode is enabled 0 = Timer1 Gate Toggle mode is disabled and toggle flip-flop is cleared Timer1 gate flip-flop toggles on every rising edge. bit 4 T1GSPM: Timer1 Gate Single Pulse Mode bit 1 = Timer1 Gate Single Pulse mode is enabled and is controlling the Timer1 gate 0 = Timer1 Gate Single Pulse mode is disabled bit 3 T1GGO/T1DONE: Timer1 Gate Single Pulse Acquisition Status bit 1 = Timer1 gate single pulse acquisition is ready, waiting for an edge 0 = Timer1 gate single pulse acquisition has completed or has not been started This bit is automatically cleared when T1GSPM is cleared. bit 2 T1GVAL: Timer1 Gate Current State bit Indicates the current state of the Timer1 gate that could be provided to TMR1H:TMR1L; unaffected by Timer1 Gate Enable (TMR1GE) bit. bit 1-0 T1GSS<1:0>: Timer1 Gate Source Select bits 00 = Timer1 gate pin 01 = TMR2 to match PR2 output 10 = Comparator 1 output 11 = Comparator 2 output Note 1: Programming the T1GCON prior to T1CON is recommended. DS39974A-page 210 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 13.2 13.3.2 Timer1 Operation The Timer1 module is an 8-bit or 16-bit incrementing counter, which is accessed through the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair. When used with an internal clock source, the module is a timer and increments on every instruction cycle. When used with an external clock source, the module can be used as either a timer or counter and increments on every selected edge of the external source. Timer1 is enabled by configuring the TMR1ON and TMR1GE bits in the T1CON and T1GCON registers, respectively. When the external clock source is selected, the Timer1 module may work as a timer or a counter. When enabled to count, Timer1 is incremented on the rising edge of the external clock input, T1CKI, or the capacitive sensing oscillator signal. Either of these external clock sources can be synchronized to the microcontroller system clock or they can run asynchronously. When used as a timer with a clock oscillator, an external 32.768 kHz crystal can be used in conjunction with the dedicated internal oscillator circuit. Note: When Timer1 is enabled, the RC1/CCP8/T1OSI/RP12 and RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI/RP11 pins become inputs. This means the values of TRISC<1:0> are ignored and the pins are read as ‘0’. 13.3 Clock Source Selection The TMR1CS<1:0> and T1OSCEN bits of the T1CON register are used to select the clock source for Timer1. Register 13-1 displays the clock source selections. 13.3.1 EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE In Counter mode, a falling edge must be registered by the counter prior to the first incrementing rising edge after any one or more of the following conditions: • Timer1 enabled after POR Reset • Write to TMR1H or TMR1L • Timer1 is disabled • Timer1 is disabled (TMR1ON = 0) when T1CKI is high, then Timer1 is enabled (TMR1ON = 1) when T1CKI is low. INTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE When the internal clock source is selected, the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair will increment on multiples of FOSC as determined by the Timer1 prescaler. TABLE 13-1: TIMER1 CLOCK SOURCE SELECTION TMR1CS1 TMR1CS0 T1OSCEN 0 1 x Clock Source (FOSC) 0 0 x Instruction Clock (FOSC/4) 1 0 0 External Clock on T1CKI Pin 1 0 1 Oscillator Circuit on T1OSI/T1OSO Pin 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Clock Source Preliminary DS39974A-page 211 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 13-1: TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM T1GSS<1:0> T1G 00 From Timer2 Match PR2 Comparator 1 Output Comparator 2 Output 01 T1GSPM 0 T1G_IN 10 Single Pulse 11 TMR1ON T1GPOL T1GVAL 0 D Q CK R Q 1 Acq. Control 1 Q1 Data Bus D Q RD T1GCON EN Interrupt T1GGO/T1DONE det Set TMR1GIF T1GTM TMR1GE Set Flag bit TMR1IF on Overflow TMR1ON TMR1(2) TMR1H EN TMR1L Q D T1CLK Synchronized Clock Input 0 1 TMR1CS<1:0> T1OSO/T1CKI T1OSC T1OSI SOSCGO T1OSCEN T3OSCEN T5OSCEN T1SYNC OUT Synchronize(3) Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 1 det 10 EN 0 T1OSCEN FOSC Internal Clock 01 FOSC/4 Internal Clock 00 2 T1CKPS<1:0> FOSC/2 Internal Clock Sleep Input (1) T1CKI Note 1: 2: 3: ST buffer is high-speed type when using T1CKI. Timer1 register increments on the rising edge. Synchronization does not operate while in Sleep. DS39974A-page 212 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 13.4 TABLE 13-2: Timer1 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Timer1 can be configured for 16-bit reads and writes. When the RD16 control bit (T1CON<1>) is set, the address for TMR1H is mapped to a buffer register for the high byte of Timer1. A read from TMR1L loads the contents of the high byte of Timer1 into the Timer1 High Byte Buffer register. This provides the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of Timer1 without having to determine whether a read of the high byte, followed by a read of the low byte, has become invalid due to a rollover between reads. Oscillator Type Freq. C1 C2 LP 32 kHz 12 pF(1) 12 pF(1) Note 1: Microchip suggests these values as a starting point in validating the oscillator circuit. 2: Higher capacitance increases the stability of the oscillator but also increases the start-up time. A write to the high byte of Timer1 must also take place through the TMR1H Buffer register. The Timer1 high byte is updated with the contents of TMR1H when a write occurs to TMR1L. This allows a user to write all 16 bits to both the high and low bytes of Timer1 at once. 3: Since each resonator/crystal has its own characteristics, the user should consult the resonator/crystal manufacturer for appropriate values of external components. The high byte of Timer1 is not directly readable or writable in this mode. All reads and writes must take place through the Timer1 High Byte Buffer register. Writes to TMR1H do not clear the Timer1 prescaler. The prescaler is only cleared on writes to TMR1L. 13.5 The user must provide a software time delay to ensure proper start-up of the Timer1 oscillator. FIGURE 13-2: EXTERNAL COMPONENTS FOR THE TIMER1 LP OSCILLATOR C1 12 pF PIC18F47J13 T1OSI XTAL 32.768 kHz T1OSO C2 12 pF Note: 4: Capacitor values are for design guidance only. Values listed would be typical of a CL = 10 pF rated crystal when SOSCSEL = 0b11. Timer1 Oscillator An on-chip crystal oscillator circuit is incorporated between pins, T1OSI (input) and T1OSO (amplifier output). It is enabled by setting the Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit, T1OSCEN (T1CON<3>). The oscillator is a low-power circuit rated for 32 kHz crystals. It will continue to run during all power-managed modes. The circuit for a typical LP oscillator is depicted in Figure 13-2. Table 13-2 provides the capacitor selection for the Timer1 oscillator. See the Notes with Table 13-2 for additional information about capacitor selection. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR THE TIMER OSCILLATOR(2,3,4,5) 5: Incorrect capacitance value may result in a frequency not meeting the crystal manufacturer’s tolerance specification. The Timer1 crystal oscillator drive level is determined based on the SOSCSEL (CONFIG2L<3:4>) Configuration bit. The Higher Drive Level mode, SOSCSEL = 0b11, is intended to drive a wide variety of 32.768 kHz crystals with a variety of load capacitance (CL) ratings. The Lower Drive Level mode is highly optimized for extremely low-power consumption. It is not intended to drive all types of 32.768 kHz crystals. In the Low Drive Level mode, the crystal oscillator circuit may not work correctly if excessively large discrete capacitors are placed on the T1OSI and T1OSO pins. This mode is only designed to work with discrete capacitances of approximately 3 pF-10 pF on each pin. Crystal manufacturers usually specify a CL (load capacitance) rating for their crystals. This value is related to, but not necessarily the same as, the values that should be used for C1 and C2 in Figure 13-2. See the crystal manufacturer’s applications information for more details on how to select the optimum C1 and C2 for a given crystal. The optimum value depends in part on the amount of parasitic capacitance in the circuit, which is often unknown. Therefore, after values have been selected, it is highly recommended that thorough testing and validation of the oscillator be performed. Preliminary DS39974A-page 213 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 13.5.1 USING TIMER1 AS A CLOCK SOURCE FIGURE 13-3: The Timer1 oscillator is also available as a clock source in power-managed modes. By setting the clock select bits, SCS<1:0> (OSCCON<1:0>), to ‘01’, the device switches to SEC_RUN mode. Both the CPU and peripherals are clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. If the IDLEN bit (OSCCON<7>) is cleared and a SLEEP instruction is executed, the device enters SEC_IDLE mode. Additional details are available in Section 4.0 “Low-Power Modes”. Whenever the Timer1 oscillator is providing the clock source, the Timer1 system clock status flag, SOSCRUN (OSCCON2<6>), is set. This can be used to determine the controller’s current clocking mode. It can also indicate the clock source currently being used by the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor. If the Clock Monitor is enabled and the Timer1 oscillator fails while providing the clock, polling the SOSCRUN bit will indicate whether the clock is being provided by the Timer1 oscillator or another source. 13.5.2 TIMER1 OSCILLATOR LAYOUT CONSIDERATIONS The Timer1 oscillator circuit draws very little power during operation. Due to the low-power nature of the oscillator, it may also be sensitive to rapidly changing signals in close proximity. This is especially true when the oscillator is configured for extremely Low-Power mode (SOSCSEL = 0b01). The oscillator circuit, displayed in Figure 13-2, should be located as close as possible to the microcontroller. There should be no circuits passing within the oscillator circuit boundaries other than VSS or VDD. If a high-speed circuit must be located near the oscillator (such as the ECCP1 pin in Output Compare or PWM mode, or the primary oscillator using the OSC2 pin), a grounded guard ring around the oscillator circuit, as displayed in Figure 13-3, may be helpful when used on a single-sided PCB or in addition to a ground plane. DS39974A-page 214 OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT WITH GROUNDED GUARD RING VDD VSS OSC1 OSC2 RC0 RC1 RC2 Note: Not drawn to scale. In the Low Drive Level mode, SOSCSEL = 0b01, it is critical that the RC2 I/O pin signals be kept away from the oscillator circuit. Configuring RC2 as a digital output, and toggling it, can potentially disturb the oscillator circuit, even with relatively good PCB layout. If possible, it is recommended to either leave RC2 unused, or use it as an input pin with a slew rate limited signal source. If RC2 must be used as a digital output, it may be necessary to use the Higher Drive Level Oscillator mode (SOSCSEL = 0b11) with many PCB layouts. Even in the High Drive Level mode, careful layout procedures should still be followed when designing the oscillator circuit. In addition to dV/dt induced noise considerations, it is also important to ensure that the circuit board is clean. Even a very small amount of conductive soldering flux residue can cause PCB leakage currents which can overwhelm the oscillator circuit. 13.6 Timer1 Interrupt The TMR1 register pair (TMR1H:TMR1L) increments from 0000h to FFFFh and rolls over to 0000h. The Timer1 interrupt, if enabled, is generated on overflow which is latched in interrupt flag bit, TMR1IF (PIR1<0>). This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the Timer1 Interrupt Enable bit, TMR1IE (PIE1<0>). Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 13.7 Resetting Timer1 Using the ECCP Special Event Trigger 13.8 The Timer1 can be configured to count freely or the count can be enabled and disabled using the Timer1 gate circuitry. This is also referred to as Timer1 gate count enable. If ECCP1 or ECCP2 is configured to use Timer1 and to generate a Special Event Trigger in Compare mode (CCPxM<3:0> = 1011), this signal will reset Timer3. The trigger from ECCP2 will also start an A/D conversion if the A/D module is enabled (see Section 19.3.4 “Special Event Trigger” for more information). The Timer1 gate can also be driven by multiple selectable sources. 13.8.1 The module must be configured as either a timer or a synchronous counter to take advantage of this feature. When used this way, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair effectively becomes a period register for Timer1. When Timer1 Gate Enable mode is enabled, Timer1 will increment on the rising edge of the Timer1 clock source. When Timer1 Gate Enable mode is disabled, no incrementing will occur and Timer1 will hold the current count. See Figure 13-4 for timing details. In the event that a write to Timer1 coincides with a Special Event Trigger, the write operation will take precedence. The Special Event Trigger from the ECCPx module will not set the TMR1IF interrupt flag bit (PIR1<0>). FIGURE 13-4: TIMER1 GATE COUNT ENABLE The Timer1 Gate Enable mode is enabled by setting the TMR1GE bit of the T1GCON register. The polarity of the Timer1 Gate Enable mode is configured using the T1GPOL bit of the T1GCON register. If Timer1 is running in Asynchronous Counter mode, this Reset operation may not work. Note: Timer1 Gate TABLE 13-3: TIMER1 GATE ENABLE SELECTIONS T1CLK T1GPOL T1G Timer1 Operation 0 0 Counts 0 1 Holds Count 1 0 Holds Count 1 1 Counts TIMER1 GATE COUNT ENABLE MODE TMR1GE T1GPOL T1G_IN T1CKI T1GVAL Timer1 N 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. N+1 Preliminary N+2 N+3 N+4 DS39974A-page 215 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 13.8.2 TIMER1 GATE SOURCE SELECTION The Timer1 gate source can be selected from one of four different sources. Source selection is controlled by the T1GSSx bits of the T1GCON register. The polarity for each available source is also selectable. Polarity selection is controlled by the T1GPOL bit of the T1GCON register. TABLE 13-4: Timer1 Gate Pin 01 TMR2 matches PR2 10 Comparator 1 output 11 Comparator 2 output 13.8.2.1 The Timer1 gate source is routed through a flip-flop that changes state on every incrementing edge of the signal. See Figure 13-5 for timing details. T1G Pin Gate Operation The T1G pin is one source for Timer1 gate control. It can be used to supply an external source to the Timer1 gate circuitry. 13.8.2.2 Timer2 Match Gate Operation The TMR2 register will increment until it matches the value in the PR2 register. On the very next increment cycle, TMR2 will be reset to 00h. When this Reset FIGURE 13-5: TIMER1 GATE TOGGLE MODE When Timer1 Gate Toggle mode is enabled, it is possible to measure the full cycle length of a Timer1 gate signal, as opposed to the duration of a single level pulse. Timer1 Gate Source 00 When T1GPOL = 1, Timer1 increments for a single instruction cycle following TMR2 matching PR2. With T1GPOL = 0, Timer1 increments except during the cycle following the match. 13.8.3 TIMER1 GATE SOURCES T1GSS<1:0> occurs, a low-to-high pulse will automatically be generated and internally supplied to the Timer1 gate circuitry. The pulse remains high for one instruction cycle and returns to low until the next match. The T1GVAL bit will indicate when the Toggled mode is active and the timer is counting. The Timer1 Gate Toggle mode is enabled by setting the T1GTM bit of the T1GCON register. When the T1GTM bit is cleared, the flip-flop is cleared and held clear. This is necessary in order to control which edge is measured. TIMER1 GATE TOGGLE MODE TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GTM T1G_IN T1CKI T1GVAL Timer1 DS39974A-page 216 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 Preliminary N+5 N+6 N+7 N+8 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 13.8.4 TIMER1 GATE SINGLE PULSE MODE When Timer1 Gate Single Pulse mode is enabled, it is possible to capture a single pulse gate event. Timer1 Gate Single Pulse mode is first enabled by setting the T1GSPM bit in the T1GCON register. Next, the T1GGO/T1DONE bit in the T1GCON register must be set. The Timer1 will be fully enabled on the next incrementing edge. On the next trailing edge of the pulse, the T1GGO/T1DONE bit will automatically be cleared. No other gate events will be allowed to increment Timer1 until the T1GGO/T1DONE bit is once again set in software. FIGURE 13-6: Clearing the T1GSPM bit of the T1GCON register will also clear the T1GGO/T1DONE bit. See Figure 13-6 for timing details. Enabling the Toggle mode and the Single Pulse mode, simultaneously, will permit both sections to work together. This allows the cycle times on the Timer1 gate source to be measured. See Figure 13-7 for timing details. 13.8.5 TIMER1 GATE VALUE STATUS When the Timer1 gate value status is utilized, it is possible to read the most current level of the gate control value. The value is stored in the T1GVAL bit in the T1GCON register. The T1GVAL bit is valid even when the Timer1 gate is not enabled (TMR1GE bit is cleared). TIMER1 GATE SINGLE PULSE MODE TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GSPM T1GGO/ Cleared by Hardware on Falling Edge of T1GVAL Set by Software T1DONE Counting Enabled on Rising Edge of T1G T1G_IN T1CKI T1GVAL Timer1 TMR1GIF N N+1 Set by Hardware on Falling Edge of T1GVAL Cleared by Software 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. N+2 Preliminary Cleared by Software DS39974A-page 217 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 13-7: TIMER1 GATE SINGLE PULSE AND TOGGLE COMBINED MODE TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GSPM T1GTM T1GGO/ Cleared by Hardware on Falling Edge of T1GVAL Set by Software T1DONE Counting Enabled on Rising Edge of T1G T1G_IN T1CKI T1GVAL Timer1 TABLE 13-5: N+2 N+4 N+3 Set by Hardware on Falling Edge of T1GVAL Cleared by Software TMR1GIF Name N+1 N Cleared by Software REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER1 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF PIR1 PMPIF(1) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF PIE1 PMPIE(1) ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE IPR1 PMPIP(1) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP TMR1L Timer1 Register Low Byte TMR1H Timer1 Register High Byte T1CON TMR1CS1 TMR1CS0 T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC RD16 TMR1ON T1GCON TMR1GE T1GPOL T1GTM T1GSPM T1GGO/ T1DONE T1GVAL T1GSS1 T1GSS0 — SOSCRUN — SOSCDRV SOSCGO — — — OSCCON2 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer1 module. Note 1: These bits are only available in 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 218 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 14.0 TIMER2 MODULE 14.1 Timer2 Operation • 8-bit Timer and Period registers (TMR2 and PR2, respectively) • Readable and writable (both registers) • Software programmable prescaler (1:1, 1:4 and 1:16) • Software programmable postscaler (1:1 through 1:16) • Interrupt on TMR2 to PR2 match • Optional use as the shift clock for the MSSP modules In normal operation, TMR2 is incremented from 00h on each clock (FOSC/4). A 4-bit counter/prescaler on the clock input gives direct input, divide-by-4 and divide-by-16 prescale options. These are selected by the prescaler control bits, T2CKPS<1:0> (T2CON<1:0>). The value of TMR2 is compared to that of the Period register, PR2, on each clock cycle. When the two values match, the comparator generates a match signal as the timer output. This signal also resets the value of TMR2 to 00h on the next cycle and drives the output counter/postscaler (see Section 14.2 “Timer2 Interrupt”). The module is controlled through the T2CON register (Register 14-1) which enables or disables the timer and configures the prescaler and postscaler. Timer2 can be shut off by clearing control bit, TMR2ON (T2CON<2>), to minimize power consumption. The TMR2 and PR2 registers are both directly readable and writable. The TMR2 register is cleared on any device Reset, while the PR2 register initializes at FFh. Both the prescaler and postscaler counters are cleared on the following events: A simplified block diagram of the module is shown in Figure 14-1. • a write to the TMR2 register • a write to the T2CON register • any device Reset (Power-on Reset (POR), MCLR Reset, Watchdog Timer Reset (WDTR) or Brown-out Reset (BOR)) The Timer2 module incorporates the following features: TMR2 is not cleared when T2CON is written. REGISTER 14-1: T2CON: TIMER2 CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS FCAh) U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-3 T2OUTPS<3:0>: Timer2 Output Postscale Select bits 0000 = 1:1 Postscale 0001 = 1:2 Postscale • • • 1111 = 1:16 Postscale bit 2 TMR2ON: Timer2 On bit 1 = Timer2 is on 0 = Timer2 is off bit 1-0 T2CKPS<1:0>: Timer2 Clock Prescale Select bits 00 = Prescaler is 1 01 = Prescaler is 4 10 = Prescaler is 16 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39974A-page 219 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 14.2 Timer2 Interrupt 14.3 Timer2 can also generate an optional device interrupt. The Timer2 output signal (TMR2 to PR2 match) provides the input for the 4-bit output counter/postscaler. This counter generates the TMR2 Match Interrupt Flag, which is latched in TMR2IF (PIR1<1>). The interrupt is enabled by setting the TMR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit, TMR2IE (PIE1<1>). Timer2 Output The unscaled output of TMR2 is available primarily to the ECCP modules, where it is used as a time base for operations in PWM mode. Timer2 can be optionally used as the shift clock source for the MSSP modules operating in SPI mode. Additional information is provided in Section 20.0 “Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) Module”. A range of 16 postscaler options (from 1:1 through 1:16 inclusive) can be selected with the postscaler control bits, T2OUTPS<3:0> (T2CON<6:3>). FIGURE 14-1: TIMER2 BLOCK DIAGRAM 4 1:1 to 1:16 Postscaler T2OUTPS<3:0> Set TMR2IF 2 T2CKPS<1:0> TMR2/PR2 Match Reset 1:1, 1:4, 1:16 Prescaler FOSC/4 TMR2 Output (to PWM or MSSPx) Comparator TMR2 8 PR2 8 8 Internal Data Bus TABLE 14-1: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER2 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE PIR1 PMPIF(1) ADIF RC1IF PIE1 PMPIE(1) ADIE IPR1 PMPIP(1) ADIP TMR2 T2CON PR2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 Timer2 Register — T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 Timer2 Period Register Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer2 module. Note 1: These bits are only available in 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 220 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 15.0 TIMER3/5 MODULE The Timer3/5 timer/counter modules incorporate these features: • Software selectable operation as a 16-bit timer or counter • Readable and writable 8-bit registers (TMRxH and TMRxL) • Selectable clock source (internal or external) with device clock or Timer1 oscillator internal options • Interrupt-on-overflow • Module Reset on ECCP Special Event Trigger A simplified block diagram of the Timer3/5 module is shown in Figure 15-1. The Timer3/5 module is controlled through the TxCON register (Register 15-1). It also selects the clock source options for the ECCP modules. (For more information, see Section 19.1.1 “ECCP Module and Timer Resources”.) The FOSC clock source should not be used with the ECCP capture/compare features. If the timer will be used with the capture or compare features, always select one of the other timer clocking options. Note: Throughout this section, generic references are used for register and bit names that are the same – except for an ‘x’ variable that indicates the item’s association with the Timer3 or Timer5 module. For example, the control register is named TxCON, and refers to T3CON and T5CON. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 221 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 15-1: TxCON: TIMER3/5 CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS F79h, BANKED F22h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TMRxCS1 TMRxCS0 TxCKPS1 TxCKPS0 TxOSCEN TxSYNC RD16 TMRxON bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 TMRxCS<1:0>: Clock Source Select bits 10 = Clock source is the pin or TxCKI input pin 01 = Clock source is the system clock (FOSC)(1) 00 = Clock source is the instruction clock (FOSC/4) bit 5-4 TxCKPS<1:0>: Timerx Input Clock Prescale Select bits 11 = 1:8 Prescale value 10 = 1:4 Prescale value 01 = 1:2 Prescale value 00 = 1:1 Prescale value bit 3 TxOSCEN: Timer Oscillator Enable bit 1 = T1OSC/SOSC oscillator used as clock source 0 = TxCKI digital input pin used as clock source bit 2 TxSYNC: External Clock Input Synchronization Control bit (Not usable if the device clock comes from Timer1/Timer3.) When TMRxCS1:TMRxCS0 = 10: 1 = Do not synchronize external clock input 0 = Synchronize external clock input When TMRxCS1:TMRxCS0 = 0x: This bit is ignored; Timer3 uses the internal clock. bit 1 RD16: 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit 1 = Enables register read/write of timer in one 16-bit operation 0 = Enables register read/write of timer in two eight-bit operations bit 0 TMRxON: Timer On bit 1 = Enables Timer 0 = Stops Timer Note 1: x = Bit is unknown The FOSC clock source should not be selected if the timer will be used with the ECCP capture/compare features. DS39974A-page 222 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 15.1 Timer3/5 Gate Control Register The Timer3/5 Gate Control register (TxGCON), provided in Register 14-2, is used to control the Timerx gate. REGISTER 15-2: TxGCON: TIMER3/5 GATE CONTROL REGISTER(1) (ACCESS F97h, BANKED F21h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-x R/W-0 R/W-0 TMRxGE TxGPOL TxGTM TxGSPM TxGGO/TxDONE TxGVAL TxGSS1 TxGSS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 TMRxGE: Timer Gate Enable bit If TMRxON = 0: This bit is ignored. If TMRxON = 1: 1 = Timer counting is controlled by the Timerx gate function 0 = Timer counts regardless of the Timerx gate function bit 6 TxGPOL: Gate Polarity bit 1 = Timer gate is active-high (Timerx counts when the gate is high) 0 = Timer gate is active-low (Timerx counts when the gate is low) bit 5 TxGTM: Gate Toggle Mode bit 1 = Timer Gate Toggle mode is enabled. 0 = Timer Gate Toggle mode is disabled and toggle flip-flop is cleared Timerx gate flip-flop toggles on every rising edge. bit 4 TxGSPM: Timer Gate Single Pulse Mode bit 1 = Timer Gate Single Pulse mode is enabled and is controlling Timerx gate 0 = Timer Gate Single Pulse mode is disabled bit 3 TxGGO/TxDONE: Timer Gate Single Pulse Acquisition Status bit 1 = Timer gate single pulse acquisition is ready, waiting for an edge 0 = Timer gate single pulse acquisition has completed or has not been started This bit is automatically cleared when TxGSPM is cleared. bit 2 TxGVAL: Timer Gate Current State bit Indicates the current state of the Timer gate that could be provided to TMRxH:TMRxL. Unaffected by the Timer Gate Enable bit (TMRxGE). bit 1-0 TxGSS<1:0>: Timer Gate Source Select bits 11 = Comparator 2 output 10 = Comparator 1 output 01 = TMR4/6 to match PR4/6 output 00 = T3G/T5G gate input pin Note 1: Programming the TxGCON prior to TxCON is recommended. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 223 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 15-3: OSCCON2: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER 2 (ACCESS F87h) U-0 R-0(2) U-0 — SOSCRUN — R/W-1 R/W-0(2) SOSCDRV SOSCGO(3) R/W-1 U-0 U-0 PRISD — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6 SOSCRUN: SOSC Run Status bit 1 = System clock comes from secondary SOSC 0 = System clock comes from an oscillator other than SOSC bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 SOSCDRV: SOSC Drive Control bit 1 = T1OSC/SOSC oscillator drive circuit is selected by Configuration bits, CONFIG2L<4:3> 0 = Low-power T1OSC/SOSC circuit is selected bit 3 SOSCGO: Oscillator Start Control bit 1 = Turns on the oscillator, even if no peripherals are requesting it 0 = Oscillator is shut off unless peripherals are requesting it bit 2 PRISD: Primary Oscillator Drive Circuit Shutdown bit 1 = Oscillator drive circuit is on 0 = Oscillator drive circuit is off (zero power) bit 1-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Note 1: 2: 3: Reset value is ‘0’ when Two-Speed Start-up is enabled and ‘1’ if disabled. Default output frequency of INTOSC on Reset (4 MHz). When the SOSC is selected to run from a digital clock input, rather than an external crystal, this bit has no effect. DS39974A-page 224 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 15.2 The operating mode is determined by the clock select bits, TMRxCSx (TxCON<7:6>). When the TMRxCSx bits are cleared (= 00), Timer3/5 increments on every internal instruction cycle (FOSC/4). When TMRxCSx = 01, the Timer3/5 clock source is the system clock (FOSC), and when it is ‘10’, Timer3/5 works as a counter from the external clock from the TxCKI pin (on the rising edge after the first falling edge) or the Timer1 oscillator. Timer3/5 Operation Timer3 and Timer5 can operate in these modes: • • • • Timer Synchronous Counter Asynchronous Counter Timer with Gated Control FIGURE 15-1: TIMER3/5 BLOCK DIAGRAM TxGSS<1:0> TxG 00 From Timer4/6 Match PR4/6 01 Comparator 1 Output 10 TxGSPM 0 TxG_IN TxGVAL 0 Comparator 2 Output Single Pulse D Q CK R Q 11 TMRxON 1 Acq. Control 1 Q1 D Data Bus Q RD T3GCON EN Interrupt TxGGO/TxDONE Set TMRxGIF det TxGTM TxGPOL TMRxGE Set Flag bit TMRxIF on Overflow TMRxON TMRx(2) TMRxH EN TMRxL Q D TxCLK Synchronized Clock Input 0 1 TMRxCS<1:0> T1OSO/T1CKI TxSYNC OUT T1OSC/SOSC T1OSI SOSCGO T1OSCEN T3OSCEN T5OSCEN Synchronize(3) Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 1 det 10 EN 0 TXOSCEN (1) 2 TxCKPS<1:0> FOSC Internal Clock 01 FOSC/4 Internal Clock 00 FOSC/2 Internal Clock Sleep Input TxCKI Note 1: 2: 3: ST buffer is a high-speed type when using T1CKI. Timerx registers increment on rising edge. Synchronization does not operate while in Sleep. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 225 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 15.3 Timer3/5 16-Bit Read/Write Mode 15.5 Timer3/5 can be configured for 16-bit reads and writes (see Figure 15.3). When the RD16 control bit (TxCON<1>) is set, the address for TMRxH is mapped to a buffer register for the high byte of Timer3/5. A read from TMRxL will load the contents of the high byte of Timer3/5 into the Timerx High Byte Buffer register. This provides users with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of Timer3/5 without having to determine whether a read of the high byte, followed by a read of the low byte, has become invalid due to a rollover between reads. Timer3/5 can be configured to count freely or the count can be enabled and disabled using the Timer3/5 gate circuitry. This is also referred to as the Timer3/5 gate count enable. The Timer3/5 gate can also be driven by multiple selectable sources. 15.5.1 TIMER3/5 GATE COUNT ENABLE The Timerx Gate Enable mode is enabled by setting the TMRxGE bit (TxGCON<7>). The polarity of the Timerx Gate Enable mode is configured using the TxGPOL bit (TxGCON<6>). A write to the high byte of Timer3/5 must also take place through the TMRxH Buffer register. The Timer3/5 high byte is updated with the contents of TMRxH when a write occurs to TMRxL. This allows users to write all 16 bits to both the high and low bytes of Timer3/5 at once. When Timerx Gate Enable mode is enabled, Timer3/5 will increment on the rising edge of the Timer3/5 clock source. When Timerx Gate Enable mode is disabled, no incrementing will occur and Timer3/5 will hold the current count. See Figure 15-2 for timing details. The high byte of Timer3/5 is not directly readable or writable in this mode. All reads and writes must take place through the Timerx High Byte Buffer register. Writes to TMRxH do not clear the Timer3/5 prescaler. The prescaler is only cleared on writes to TMRxL. 15.4 Timer3/5 Gates TABLE 15-1: TxCLK(†) Using the Timer1 Oscillator as the Timer3/5 Clock Source The Timer1 internal oscillator may be used as the clock source for Timer3/5. The Timer1 oscillator is enabled by setting the T1OSCEN (T1CON<3>) bit. To use it as the Timer3/5 clock source, the TMRxCS bits must also be set. As previously noted, this also configures Timer3/5 to increment on every rising edge of the oscillator source. TIMER3/5 GATE ENABLE SELECTIONS TxGPOL (TxGCON<6>) TxG Pin Timerx Operation 0 0 Counts 0 1 Holds Count 1 0 Holds Count 1 1 Counts † The clock on which TMR3/5 is running. For more information, see TxCLK in Figure 15-1. The Timer1 oscillator is described in Section 13.0 “Timer1 Module”. FIGURE 15-2: TIMER3/5 GATE COUNT ENABLE MODE TMRxGE TxGPOL TxG_IN TxCKI TxGVAL Timer3/5 DS39974A-page 226 N N+1 Preliminary N+2 N+3 N+4 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 15.5.2 TIMER3/5 GATE SOURCE SELECTION 15.5.2.2 Timer4/6 Match Gate Operation The Timer3/5 gate source can be selected from one of four different sources. Source selection is controlled by the TxGSS<1:0> bits (TxGCON<1:0>). The polarity for each available source is also selectable and is controlled by the TxGPOL bit (TxGCON<6>). The TMR4/6 register will increment until it matches the value in the PR4/6 register. On the very next increment cycle, TMR4/6 will be reset to 00h. When this Reset occurs, a low-to-high pulse will automatically be generated and internally supplied to the Timer3/5 gate circuitry. TABLE 15-2: 15.5.3 TIMER3/5 GATE SOURCES TxGSS<1:0> TxG timer gate pin 01 TMR4/6 matches PR4/6 10 Comparator 1 output 11 Comparator 2 output 15.5.2.1 When Timer3/5 Gate Toggle mode is enabled, it is possible to measure the full cycle length of a Timer3/5 gate signal, as opposed to the duration of a single level pulse. Timerx Gate Source 00 The Timer1 gate source is routed through a flip-flop that changes state on every incrementing edge of the signal. (For timing details, see Figure 15-3.) TxG Pin Gate Operation The TxG pin is one source for Timer3/5 gate control. It can be used to supply an external source to the gate circuitry. FIGURE 15-3: TIMER3/5 GATE-TOGGLE MODE The TxGVAL bit will indicate when the Toggled mode is active and the timer is counting. Timer3/5 Gate Toggle mode is enabled by setting the TxGTM bit (TxGCON<5>). When the TxGTM bit is cleared, the flip-flop is cleared and held clear. This is necessary in order to control which edge is measured. TIMER3/5 GATE TOGGLE MODE TMRxGE TxGPOL TxGTM TxG_IN TxCKI TxGVAL Timer3/5 N 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 Preliminary N+5 N+6 N+7 N+8 DS39974A-page 227 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 15.5.4 TIMER3/5 GATE SINGLE PULSE MODE No other gate events will be allowed to increment Timer3/5 until the TxGGO/TxDONE bit is once again set in software. When Timer3/5 Gate Single Pulse mode is enabled, it is possible to capture a single pulse gate event. Timer3/5 Gate Single Pulse mode is first enabled by setting the TxGSPM bit (TxGCON<4>). Next, the TxGGO/TxDONE bit (TxGCON<3>) must be set. Clearing the TxGSPM bit TxGGO/TxDONE bit. (For Figure 15-4.) Simultaneously, enabling the Toggle mode and the Single Pulse mode will permit both sections to work together. This allows the cycle times on the Timer3/5 gate source to be measured. (For timing details, see Figure 15-5.) The Timer3/5 will be fully enabled on the next incrementing edge. On the next trailing edge of the pulse, the TxGGO/TxDONE bit will automatically be cleared. FIGURE 15-4: will also clear the timing details, see TIMER3/5 GATE SINGLE PULSE MODE TMRxGE TxGPOL TxGSPM TxGGO/ Cleared by Hardware on Falling Edge of TxGVAL Set by Software TxDONE Counting Enabled on Rising Edge of TxG TxG_IN TxCKI TxGVAL Timer3/5 TMRxGIF DS39974A-page 228 N N+1 N+2 Set by Hardware on Falling Edge of TxGVAL Cleared by Software Preliminary Cleared by Software 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 15-5: TIMER3/5 GATE SINGLE PULSE AND TOGGLE COMBINED MODE TMRxGE TxGPOL TxGSPM TxGTM TxGGO/ Cleared by Hardware on Falling Edge of TxGVAL Set by Software TxDONE Counting Enabled on Rising Edge of TxG TxG_IN TxCKI TxGVAL Timer3/5 TMRxGIF 15.5.5 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 Set by Hardware on Falling Edge of TxGVAL Cleared by Software TIMER3/5 GATE VALUE STATUS 15.5.6 When Timer3/5 gate value status is utilized, it is possible to read the most current level of the gate control value. The value is stored in the TxGVAL bit (TxGCON<2>). The TxGVAL bit is valid even when the Timer3/5 gate is not enabled (TMRxGE bit is cleared). Cleared by Software TIMER3/5 GATE EVENT INTERRUPT When the Timer3/5 gate event interrupt is enabled, it is possible to generate an interrupt upon the completion of a gate event. When the falling edge of TxGVAL occurs, the TMRxGIF flag bit in the PIRx register will be set. If the TMRxGIE bit in the PIEx register is set, then an interrupt will be recognized. The TMRxGIF flag bit operates even when the Timer3/5 gate is not enabled (TMRxGE bit is cleared). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 229 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 15.6 Timer3/5 Interrupt 15.7 The TMRx register pair (TMRxH:TMRxL) increments from 0000h to FFFFh and overflows to 0000h. The Timerx interrupt, if enabled, is generated on overflow and is latched in the interrupt flag bit, TMRxIF. Table 15-3 gives each module’s flag bit. TABLE 15-3: TIMER3/5 INTERRUPT FLAG BITS Timer Module Flag Bit 3 PIR2<1> 5 PIR5<1> TIMER3/5 INTERRUPT ENABLE BITS Timer Module Flag Bit 3 PIE2<1> 5 PIE5<2> DS39974A-page 230 If the ECCP modules are configured to use Timerx and to generate a Special Event Trigger in Compare mode (CCPxM<3:0> = 1011), this signal will reset Timerx. The trigger from ECCP2 will also start an A/D conversion if the A/D module is enabled. (For more information, see Section 19.3.4 “Special Event Trigger”.) The module must be configured as either a timer or synchronous counter to take advantage of this feature. When used this way, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair effectively becomes a Period register for TimerX. This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the TMRxIE bit, respectively. Table 15-4 gives each module’s enable bit. TABLE 15-4: Resetting Timer3/5 Using the ECCP Special Event Trigger If Timerx is running in Asynchronous Counter mode, the Reset operation may not work. In the event that a write to Timerx coincides with a Special Event Trigger from an ECCP module, the write will take precedence. Note: The Special Event Triggers from the ECCPx module will only clear the TMR3 register’s content, but not set the TMR3IF interrupt flag bit (PIR1<0>). Note: The CCP and ECCP modules use Timers, 1 through 8, for some modes. The assignment of a particular timer to a CCP/ECCP module is determined by the Timer to CCP enable bits in the CCPTMRSx registers. For more details, see Register 18-3 and Register 19-2. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 15-5: Name INTCON PIR5 REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER3/5 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF — — CM3IF TMR8IF TMR6IF TMR5IF TMR5GIF TMR1GIF PIE5 — — CM3IE TMR8IE TMR6IE TMR5IE TMR5GIE TMR1GIE PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE PIE2 TMR3H Timer3 Register High Byte TMR3L Timer3 Register Low Byte T3GCON TMR3GE T3GPOL T3GTM T3GSPM T3GGO/ T3DONE T3GVAL T3GSS1 T3GSS0 TMR3CS0 T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3OSCEN T3SYNC RD16 TMR3ON T3CON TMR3CS1 TMR5H Timer5 Register High Byte TMR5L Timer5 Register Low Byte T5GCON TMR5GE T5GPOL T5GTM T5GSPM T5GGO/ T5DONE T5GVAL T5GSS1 T5GSS0 T5CON TMR5CS1 TMR5CS0 T5CKPS1 T5CKPS0 T5OSCEN T5SYNC RD16 TMR5ON — SOSCRUN — — — — OSCCON2 SOSCDRV SOSCGO CCPTMRS0 C3TSEL1 C3TSEL0 C2TSEL2 C2TSEL1 C2TSEL0 C1TSEL2 C1TSEL1 C1TSEL0 CCPTMRS1 C7TSEL1 C7TSEL0 — C6TSEL0 — C5TSEL0 C4TSEL1 C4TSEL0 CCPTMRS1 — — — C10TSEL0 — C9TSEL0 C8TSEL1 C8TSEL0 CCPTMRS2 — — — C10TSEL0 — C9TSEL0 C8TSEL1 C8TSEL0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer3 module. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 231 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 232 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 16.0 TIMER4/6/8 MODULE The Timer4/6/8 timer modules have the following features: • • • • • • Eight-bit Timer register (TMRx) Eight-bit Period register (PRx) Readable and writable (all registers) Software programmable prescaler (1:1, 1:4, 1:16) Software programmable postscaler (1:1 to 1:16) Interrupt on TMRx match of PRx Note: Throughout this section, generic references are used for register and bit names that are the same – except for an ‘x’ variable that indicates the item’s association with the Timer4, Timer6 or Timer8 module. For example, the control register is named TxCON and refers to T4CON, T6CON and T8CON. The Timer4/6/8 modules have a control register shown in Register 16-1. Timer4/6/8 can be shut off by clearing control bit, TMRxON (TxCON<2>), to minimize power consumption. The prescaler and postscaler selection of Timer4/6/8 is also controlled by this register. Figure 16-1 is a simplified block diagram of the Timer4/6/8 modules. 16.1 Timer4/6/8 Operation Timer4/6/8 can be used as the PWM time base for the PWM mode of the ECCP modules. The TMRx registers are readable and writable, and are cleared on any device Reset. The input clock (FOSC/4) has a prescale option of 1:1, 1:4 or 1:16, selected by control bits, TxCKPS<1:0> (TxCON<1:0>). The match output of TMRx goes through a four-bit postscaler (that gives a 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 1:1 to 1:16 inclusive scaling) to generate a TMRx interrupt, latched in the flag bit, TMRxIF. Table 16-1 gives each module’s flag bit. TABLE 16-1: TIMER4/6/8 FLAG BITS Timer Module Flag Bit 4 PIR3<3> 6 PIR5<3> 8 PIR5<4> The interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the Timerx Interrupt Enable bit (TMRxIE), shown in Table 16-2. TABLE 16-2: TIMER4/6/8 INTERRUPT ENABLE BITS Timer Module Flag Bit 4 PIE3<3> 6 PIE5<3> 8 PIE5<4> The prescaler and postscaler counters are cleared when any of the following occurs: • A write to the TMRx register • A write to the TxCON register • Any device Reset (Power-on Reset (POR), MCLR Reset, Watchdog Timer Reset (WDTR) or Brown-out Reset (BOR)) A TMRx is not cleared when a TxCON is written. Note: Preliminary The CCP and ECCP modules use Timers, 1 through 8, for some modes. The assignment of a particular timer to a CCP/ECCP module is determined by the Timer to CCP enable bits in the CCPTMRSx registers. For more details, see Register 18-2, Register 18-3 and Register 19-2. DS39974A-page 233 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 16-1: TxCON: TIMER4/6/8 CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS F76h, BANKED F1Eh, BANKED F1Bh) U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — TxOUTPS3 TxOUTPS2 TxOUTPS1 TxOUTPS0 TMRxON TxCKPS1 TxCKPS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-3 TxOUTPS<3:0>: Timerx Output Postscale Select bits 0000 = 1:1 Postscale 0001 = 1:2 Postscale • • • 1111 = 1:16 Postscale bit 2 TMRxON: Timerx On bit 1 = Timerx is on 0 = Timerx is off bit 1-0 TxCKPS<1:0>: Timerx Clock Prescale Select bits 00 = Prescaler is 1 01 = Prescaler is 4 1x = Prescaler is 16 16.2 Timer4/6/8 Interrupt 16.3 The Timer4/6/8 modules have 8-bit Period registers, PRx, that are both readable and writable. Timer4/6/8 increment from 00h until they match PR4/6/8 and then reset to 00h on the next increment cycle. The PRx registers are initialized to FFh upon Reset. FIGURE 16-1: x = Bit is unknown Output of TMRx The outputs of TMRx (before the postscaler) are used only as a PWM time base for the ECCP modules. They are not used as baud rate clocks for the MSSP modules as is the Timer2 output. TIMER4 BLOCK DIAGRAM 4 TxOUTPS<3:0> 1:1 to 1:16 Postscaler Set TMRxIF 2 TMRx Output (to PWM) TxCKPS<1:0> FOSC/4 1:1, 1:4, 1:16 Prescaler Reset TMRx 8 TMRx/PRx Match Comparator 8 PRx 8 Internal Data Bus DS39974A-page 234 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 16-3: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER4/6/8 AS A TIMER/COUNTER Bit 7 Bit 6 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF CM3IP TMR8IP TMR6IP TMR5IP TMR5GIP TMR1GIP IPR5 — — PIR5 — — CM3IF TMR8IF TMR6IF TMR5IF TMR5GIF TMR1GIF PIE5 — — CM3IE TMR8IE TMR6IE TMR5IE TMR5GIE TMR1GIE TMR4ON T4CKPS1 T4CKPS0 TMR6ON T6CKPS1 T6CKPS0 TMR8ON T8CKPS1 T8CKPS0 TMR4 T4CON Timer4 Register — T4OUTPS3 T4OUTPS2 T4OUTPS1 T4OUTPS0 PR4 Timer4 Period Register TMR6 Timer6 Register T6CON — T6OUTPS3 T6OUTPS2 T6OUTPS1 T6OUTPS0 PR6 Timer6 Period Register TMR8 Timer8 Register T8CON — T8OUTPS3 T8OUTPS2 T8OUTPS1 T8OUTPS0 PR8 Timer8 Period Register CCPTMRS0 C3TSEL1 C3TSEL0 C2TSEL2 CCPTMRS1 C7TSEL1 C7TSEL0 CCPTMRS2 — — C2TSEL1 C2TSEL0 C1TSEL2 C1TSEL1 C1TSEL0 — C6TSEL0 — C5TSEL0 C4TSEL1 C4TSEL0 — C10TSEL0 — C9TSEL0 C8TSEL1 C8TSEL0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer4/6/8 modules. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 235 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 236 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 17.0 REAL-TIME CLOCK AND CALENDAR (RTCC) The key features of the Real-Time Clock and Calendar (RTCC) module are: • • • • • • • • • • • • Time: hours, minutes and seconds 24-hour format (military time) Calendar: weekday, date, month and year Alarm configurable Year range: 2000 to 2099 Leap year correction BCD format for compact firmware Optimized for low-power operation User calibration with auto-adjust Calibration range: 2.64 seconds error per month Requirements: external 32.768 kHz clock crystal Alarm pulse or seconds clock output on RTCC pin FIGURE 17-1: The RTCC module is intended for applications where accurate time must be maintained for an extended period with minimum to no intervention from the CPU. The module is optimized for low-power usage in order to provide extended battery life while keeping track of time. The module is a 100-year clock and calendar with automatic leap year detection. The range of the clock is from 00:00:00 (midnight) on January 1, 2000 to 23:59:59 on December 31, 2099. Hours are measured in 24-hour (military time) format. The clock provides a granularity of one second with half second visibility to the user. RTCC BLOCK DIAGRAM RTCC Clock Domain 32.768 kHz Input from Timer1 Oscillator CPU Clock Domain RTCCFG RTCC Prescalers Internal RC ALRMRPT YEAR 0.5s Alarm Event MTHDY RTCVAL RTCC Timer WKDYHR MINSEC Comparator ALMTHDY Compare Registers with Masks ALRMVAL ALWDHR ALMINSEC Repeat Counter RTCC Interrupt RTCC Interrupt Logic Alarm Pulse RTCC Pin RTCOE 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 237 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 17.1 RTCC MODULE REGISTERS Alarm Value Registers The RTCC module registers are divided into following categories: RTCC Control Registers • • • • • RTCCFG RTCCAL PADCFG1 ALRMCFG ALRMRPT • ALRMVALH and ALRMVALL – Can access the following registers: - ALRMMNTH - ALRMDAY - ALRMWD - ALRMHR - ALRMMIN - ALRMSEC Note: RTCC Value Registers The RTCVALH and RTCVALL registers can be accessed through RTCRPT<1:0>. ALRMVALH and ALRMVALL can be accessed through ALRMPTR<1:0>. • RTCVALH and RTCVALL – Can access the following registers - YEAR - MONTH - DAY - WEEKDAY - HOUR - MINUTE - SECOND DS39974A-page 238 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 17.1.1 RTCC CONTROL REGISTERS REGISTER 17-1: R/W-0 RTCCFG: RTCC CONFIGURATION REGISTER (BANKED F3Fh)(1) U-0 RTCEN(2) — R/W-0 RTCWREN R-0 R-0 (3) RTCSYNC HALFSEC R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 RTCOE RTCPTR1 RTCPTR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 RTCEN: RTCC Enable bit(2) 1 = RTCC module is enabled 0 = RTCC module is disabled bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 RTCWREN: RTCC Value Registers Write Enable bit 1 = RTCVALH and RTCVALL registers can be written to by the user 0 = RTCVALH and RTCVALL registers are locked out from being written to by the user bit 4 RTCSYNC: RTCC Value Registers Read Synchronization bit 1 = RTCVALH, RTCVALL and ALCFGRPT registers can change while reading due to a rollover ripple resulting in an invalid data read If the register is read twice and results in the same data, the data can be assumed to be valid. 0 = RTCVALH, RTCVALL or ALCFGRPT registers can be read without concern over a rollover ripple bit 3 HALFSEC: Half-Second Status bit(3) 1 = Second half period of a second 0 = First half period of a second bit 2 RTCOE: RTCC Output Enable bit 1 = RTCC clock output enabled 0 = RTCC clock output disabled bit 1-0 RTCPTR<1:0>: RTCC Value Register Window Pointer bits Points to the corresponding RTCC Value registers when reading the RTCVALH and RTCVALL registers. The RTCPTR<1:0> value decrements on every read or write of RTCVALH until it reaches ‘00’. RTCVAL<15:8>: 00 = Minutes 01 = Weekday 10 = Month 11 = Reserved RTCVAL<7:0>: 00 = Seconds 01 = Hours 10 = Day 11 = Year Note 1: 2: 3: The RTCCFG register is only affected by a POR. A write to the RTCEN bit is only allowed when RTCWREN = 1. This bit is read-only. It is cleared to ‘0’ on a write to the lower half of the MINSEC register. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 239 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY RTCCAL: RTCC CALIBRATION REGISTER (BANKED F3Eh) REGISTER 17-2: R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CAL7 CAL6 CAL5 CAL4 CAL3 CAL2 CAL1 CAL0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown CAL<7:0>: RTCC Drift Calibration bits 01111111 = Maximum positive adjustment; adds 508 RTC clock pulses every minute . . . 00000001 = Minimum positive adjustment; adds four RTCC clock pulses every minute 00000000 = No adjustment 11111111 = Minimum negative adjustment; subtracts four RTCC clock pulses every minute . . . 10000000 = Maximum negative adjustment; subtracts 512 RTCC clock pulses every minute REGISTER 17-3: PADCFG1: PAD CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 (BANKED F3Ch) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 RTSECSEL1(1) RTSECSEL0(1) PMPTTL(2) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-1 RTSECSEL<1:0>: RTCC Seconds Clock Output Select bits(1) 11 = Reserved; do not use 10 = RTCC source clock is selected for the RTCC pin (pin can be INTRC or T1OSC, depending on the RTCOSC (CONFIG3L<1>) setting) 01 = RTCC seconds clock is selected for the RTCC pin 00 = RTCC alarm pulse is selected for the RTCC pin bit 0 PMPTTL: PMP Module TTL Input Buffer Select bit(2) 1 = PMP module uses TTL input buffers 0 = PMP module uses Schmitt input buffers Note 1: 2: To enable the actual RTCC output, the RTCOE (RTCCFG<2>) bit must be set. Available only on 44-pin devices (PIC18F46J13, PIC18F47J13, PIC18LF46J13 and PIC18LF47J13). For 28-pin devices, the bit is U-0. DS39974A-page 240 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 17-4: ALRMCFG: ALARM CONFIGURATION REGISTER (ACCESS F47h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ALRMEN CHIME AMASK3 AMASK2 AMASK1 AMASK0 ALRMPTR1 ALRMPTR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ALRMEN: Alarm Enable bit 1 = Alarm is enabled (cleared automatically after an alarm event whenever ARPT<7:0> = 0000 0000 and CHIME = 0) 0 = Alarm is disabled bit 6 CHIME: Chime Enable bit 1 = Chime is enabled; ARPT<7:0> bits are allowed to roll over from 00h to FFh 0 = Chime is disabled; ARPT<7:0> bits stop once they reach 00h bit 5-2 AMASK<3:0>: Alarm Mask Configuration bits 0000 = Every half second 0001 = Every second 0010 = Every 10 seconds 0011 = Every minute 0100 = Every 10 minutes 0101 = Every hour 0110 = Once a day 0111 = Once a week 1000 = Once a month 1001 = Once a year (except when configured for February 29th, once every four years) 101x = Reserved – do not use 11xx = Reserved – do not use bit 1-0 ALRMPTR<1:0>: Alarm Value Register Window Pointer bits Points to the corresponding Alarm Value registers when reading the ALRMVALH and ALRMVALL registers. The ALRMPTR<1:0> value decrements on every read or write of ALRMVALH until it reaches ‘00’. ALRMVAL<15:8>: 00 = ALRMMIN 01 = ALRMWD 10 = ALRMMNTH 11 = Unimplemented ALRMVAL<7:0>: 00 = ALRMSEC 01 = ALRMHR 10 = ALRMDAY 11 = Unimplemented 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 241 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 17-5: ALRMRPT: ALARM REPEAT COUNTER (ACCESS F46h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ARPT7 ARPT6 ARPT5 ARPT4 ARPT3 ARPT2 ARPT1 ARPT0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown ARPT<7:0>: Alarm Repeat Counter Value bits 11111111 = Alarm will repeat 255 more times . . . 00000000 = Alarm will not repeat The counter decrements on any alarm event. The counter is prevented from rolling over from 00h to FFh unless CHIME = 1. DS39974A-page 242 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 17.1.2 RTCVALH AND RTCVALL REGISTER MAPPINGS REGISTER 17-6: RESERVED REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ REGISTER 17-7: YEAR: YEAR VALUE REGISTER(1) R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x YRTEN3 YRTEN2 YRTEN1 YRTEN0 YRONE3 YRONE2 YRONE1 YRONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 YRTEN<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Year’s Tens Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. bit 3-0 YRONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Year’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. Note 1: A write to the YEAR register is only allowed when RTCWREN = 1. REGISTER 17-8: MONTH: MONTH VALUE REGISTER(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — — MTHTEN0 MTHONE3 MTHONE2 MTHONE1 MTHONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 MTHTEN0: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Month’s Tens Digit bit Contains a value of 0 or 1. bit 3-0 MTHONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Month’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. Note 1: x = Bit is unknown A write to this register is only allowed when RTCWREN = 1. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 243 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 17-9: DAY: DAY VALUE REGISTER(1) U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — DAYTEN1 DAYTEN0 DAYONE3 DAYONE2 DAYONE1 DAYONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 DAYTEN<1:0>: Binary Coded Decimal value of Day’s Tens Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 3. bit 3-0 DAYONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Day’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. Note 1: A write to this register is only allowed when RTCWREN = 1. REGISTER 17-10: WKDY: WEEKDAY VALUE REGISTER(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — — — — WDAY2 WDAY1 WDAY0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 WDAY<2:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Weekday Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 6. Note 1: x = Bit is unknown A write to this register is only allowed when RTCWREN = 1. DS39974A-page 244 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 17-11: HOURS: HOURS VALUE REGISTER(1) U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — HRTEN1 HRTEN0 HRONE3 HRONE2 HRONE1 HRONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 HRTEN<1:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Hour’s Tens Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 2. bit 3-0 HRONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Hour’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. Note 1: A write to this register is only allowed when RTCWREN = 1. REGISTER 17-12: MINUTES: MINUTES VALUE REGISTER U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — MINTEN2 MINTEN1 MINTEN0 MINONE3 MINONE2 MINONE1 MINONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 MINTEN<2:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Minute’s Tens Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 5. bit 3-0 MINONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Minute’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. REGISTER 17-13: SECONDS: SECONDS VALUE REGISTER U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — SECTEN2 SECTEN1 SECTEN0 SECONE3 SECONE2 SECONE1 SECONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 SECTEN<2:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Second’s Tens Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 5. bit 3-0 SECONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Second’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 245 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 17.1.3 ALRMVALH AND ALRMVALL REGISTER MAPPINGS REGISTER 17-14: ALRMMNTH: ALARM MONTH VALUE REGISTER(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — — MTHTEN0 MTHONE3 MTHONE2 MTHONE1 MTHONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 MTHTEN0: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Month’s Tens Digit bit Contains a value of 0 or 1. bit 3-0 MTHONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Month’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. Note 1: A write to this register is only allowed when RTCWREN = 1. REGISTER 17-15: ALRMDAY: ALARM DAY VALUE REGISTER(1) U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — DAYTEN1 DAYTEN0 DAYONE3 DAYONE2 DAYONE1 DAYONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 DAYTEN<1:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Day’s Tens Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 3. bit 3-0 DAYONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Day’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. Note 1: x = Bit is unknown A write to this register is only allowed when RTCWREN = 1. DS39974A-page 246 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 17-16: ALRMWD: ALARM WEEKDAY VALUE REGISTER(1) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — — — — WDAY2 WDAY1 WDAY0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 WDAY<2:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Weekday Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 6. Note 1: A write to this register is only allowed when RTCWREN = 1. REGISTER 17-17: ALRMHR: ALARM HOURS VALUE REGISTER(1) U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — HRTEN1 HRTEN0 HRONE3 HRONE2 HRONE1 HRONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 HRTEN<1:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Hour’s Tens Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 2. bit 3-0 HRONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Hour’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. Note 1: x = Bit is unknown A write to this register is only allowed when RTCWREN = 1. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 247 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 17-18: ALRMMIN: ALARM MINUTES VALUE REGISTER U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — MINTEN2 MINTEN1 MINTEN0 MINONE3 MINONE2 MINONE1 MINONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 MINTEN<2:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Minute’s Tens Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 5. bit 3-0 MINONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Minute’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. REGISTER 17-19: ALRMSEC: ALARM SECONDS VALUE REGISTER U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — SECTEN2 SECTEN1 SECTEN0 SECONE3 SECONE2 SECONE1 SECONE0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 SECTEN<2:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Second’s Tens Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 5. bit 3-0 SECONE<3:0>: Binary Coded Decimal Value of Second’s Ones Digit bits Contains a value from 0 to 9. DS39974A-page 248 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 17.1.4 RTCEN BIT WRITE 17.2 An attempt to write to the RTCEN bit while RTCWREN = 0 will be ignored. RTCWREN must be set before a write to RTCEN can take place. Like the RTCEN bit, the RTCVALH and RTCVALL registers can only be written to when RTCWREN = 1. A write to these registers, while RTCWREN = 0, will be ignored. FIGURE 17-2: FIGURE 17-3: The register interface for the RTCC and alarm values is implemented using the Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) format. This simplifies the firmware when using the module, as each of the digits is contained within its own 4-bit value (see Figure 17-2 and Figure 17-3). Day Month 0-9 0-1 Hours (24-hour format) 0-2 0-9 0-9 0-3 Minutes 0-5 Day of Week 0-9 Seconds 0-9 0-5 0-9 0-6 1/2 Second Bit (binary format) 0/1 ALARM DIGIT FORMAT Day Month 0-1 Hours (24-hour format) 0-2 REGISTER INTERFACE TIMER DIGIT FORMAT Year 0-9 17.2.1 Operation 0-9 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 0-9 0-3 Minutes 0-5 Day of Week 0-9 0-6 Seconds 0-9 Preliminary 0-5 0-9 DS39974A-page 249 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 17.2.2 CLOCK SOURCE As mentioned earlier, the RTCC module is intended to be clocked by an external Real-Time Clock (RTC) crystal oscillating at 32.768 kHz, but can also be clocked by the INTRC. The RTCC clock selection is decided by the RTCOSC bit (CONFIG3L<1>). FIGURE 17-4: Calibration of the crystal can be done through this module to yield an error of 3 seconds or less per month. (For further details, see Section 17.2.9 “Calibration”.) CLOCK SOURCE MULTIPLEXING 32.768 kHz XTAL from T1OSC 1:16384 Half Second Clock Half Second(1) Clock Prescaler(1) Internal RC One Second Clock CONFIG 3L<1> Second Note 1: 17.2.2.1 Hour:Minute Day Month Day of Week Year Writing to the lower half of the MINSEC register resets all counters, allowing fraction of a second synchronization. The clock prescaler is held in Reset when RTCEN = 0. Real-Time Clock Enable For the day to month rollover schedule, see Table 17-2. The RTCC module can be clocked by an external, 32.768 kHz crystal (Timer1 oscillator or T1CKI input) or the INTRC oscillator, which can be selected in CONFIG3L<1>. Considering that the following values are in BCD format, the carry to the upper BCD digit will occur at a count of 10 and not at 16 (SECONDS, MINUTES, HOURS, WEEKDAY, DAYS and MONTHS). If the Timer1 oscillator will be used as the clock source for the RTCC, make sure to enable it by setting T1CON<3> (T1OSCEN). The selected RTC clock can be brought out to the RTCC pin by the RTSECSEL<1:0> bits in the PADCFG1 register. 17.2.3 TABLE 17-1: DIGIT CARRY RULES This section explains which timer values are affected when there is a rollover. • Time of Day: From 23:59:59 to 00:00:00 with a carry to the Day field • Month: From 12/31 to 01/01 with a carry to the Year field • Day of Week: From 6 to 0 with no carry (see Table 17-1) • Year Carry: From 99 to 00; this also surpasses the use of the RTCC DS39974A-page 250 Preliminary DAY OF WEEK SCHEDULE Day of Week Sunday 0 Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Friday 5 Saturday 6 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 17-2: DAY TO MONTH ROLLOVER SCHEDULE Month Maximum Day Field 01 (January) 31 02 (February) 28 or 29(1) 03 (March) 31 04 (April) 30 05 (May) 31 06 (June) 30 07 (July) 31 08 (August) 31 17.2.6 SAFETY WINDOW FOR REGISTER READS AND WRITES The RTCSYNC bit indicates a time window during which the RTCC Clock Domain registers can be safely read and written without concern about a rollover. When RTCSYNC = 0, the registers can be safely accessed by the CPU. Whether RTCSYNC = 1 or 0, the user should employ a firmware solution to ensure that the data read did not fall on a rollover boundary, resulting in an invalid or partial read. This firmware solution would consist of reading each register twice and then comparing the two values. If the two values matched, then, a rollover did not occur. 09 (September) 30 10 (October) 31 17.2.7 11 (November) 30 12 (December) 31 In order to perform a write to any of the RTCC Timer registers, the RTCWREN bit (RTCCFG<5>) must be set. Note 1: 17.2.4 See Section 17.2.4 “Leap Year”. LEAP YEAR Since the year range on the RTCC module is 2000 to 2099, the leap year calculation is determined by any year divisible by four in the above range. Only February is effected in a leap year. February will have 29 days in a leap year and 28 days in any other year. 17.2.5 WRITE LOCK To avoid accidental writes to the RTCC Timer register, it is recommended that the RTCWREN bit (RTCCFG<5>) be kept clear at any time other than while writing to it. For the RTCWREN bit to be set, there is only one instruction cycle time window allowed between the 55h/AA sequence and the setting of RTCWREN. For that reason, it is recommended that users follow the code example in Example 17-1. EXAMPLE 17-1: GENERAL FUNCTIONALITY All Timer registers containing a time value of seconds or greater are writable. The user configures the time by writing the required year, month, day, hour, minutes and seconds to the Timer registers, via register pointers (see Section 17.2.8 “Register Mapping”). The timer uses the newly written values and proceeds with the count from the required starting point. The RTCC is enabled by setting the RTCEN bit (RTCCFG<7>). If enabled, while adjusting these registers, the timer still continues to increment. However, any time the MINSEC register is written to, both of the timer prescalers are reset to ‘0’. This allows fraction of a second synchronization. The Timer registers are updated in the same cycle as the write instruction’s execution by the CPU. The user must ensure that when RTCEN = 1, the updated registers will not be incremented at the same time. This can be accomplished in several ways: • By checking the RTCSYNC bit (RTCCFG<4>) • By checking the preceding digits from which a carry can occur • By updating the registers immediately following the seconds pulse (or alarm interrupt) movlb bcf movlw movwf movlw movwf bsf 17.2.8 SETTING THE RTCWREN BIT 0x0F ;RTCCFG is banked INTCON, GIE ;Disable interrupts 0x55 EECON2 0xAA EECON2 RTCCFG, RTCWREN REGISTER MAPPING To limit the register interface, the RTCC Timer and Alarm Timer registers are accessed through corresponding register pointers. The RTCC Value register window (RTCVALH<15:8> and RTCVALL<7:0>) uses the RTCPTR bits (RTCCFG<1:0>) to select the required Timer register pair. By reading or writing to the RTCVALH register, the RTCC Pointer value (RTCPTR<1:0>) decrements by 1 until it reaches ‘00’. Once it reaches ‘00’, the MINUTES and SECONDS value will be accessible through RTCVALH and RTCVALL until the pointer value is manually changed. The user has visibility to the half second field of the counter. This value is read-only and can be reset only by writing to the lower half of the SECONDS register. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 251 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 17-3: To calibrate the RTCC module: RTCVALH AND RTCVALL REGISTER MAPPING 1. RTCC Value Register Window RTCPTR<1:0> RTCVAL<15:8> RTCVAL<7:0> 00 MINUTES SECONDS 01 WEEKDAY HOURS 10 MONTH DAY 11 — YEAR Use another timer resource on the device to find the error of the 32.768 kHz crystal. Convert the number of error clock pulses per minute (see Equation 17-1). 2. EQUATION 17-1: (Ideal Frequency (32,768) – Measured Frequency) * 60 = Error Clocks per Minute The Alarm Value register window (ALRMVALH and ALRMVALL) uses the ALRMPTR bits (ALRMCFG<1:0>) to select the desired Alarm register pair. • If the oscillator is faster than ideal (negative result from Step 2), the RTCCFG register value needs to be negative. This causes the specified number of clock pulses to be subtracted from the timer counter, once every minute. • If the oscillator is slower than ideal (positive result from Step 2), the RTCCFG register value needs to be positive. This causes the specified number of clock pulses to be added to the timer counter, once every minute. Load the RTCCAL register with the correct value. By reading or writing to the ALRMVALH register, the Alarm Pointer value, ALRMPTR<1:0>, decrements by 1 until it reaches ‘00’. Once it reaches ‘00’, the ALRMMIN and ALRMSEC value will be accessible through ALRMVALH and ALRMVALL until the pointer value is manually changed. TABLE 17-4: ALRMVAL REGISTER MAPPING 3. Alarm Value Register Window ALRMPTR<1:0> ALRMVAL<15:8> ALRMVAL<7:0> 17.2.9 CONVERTING ERROR CLOCK PULSES 00 ALRMMIN ALRMSEC 01 ALRMWD ALRMHR 10 ALRMMNTH ALRMDAY 11 — — Writes to the RTCCAL register should occur only when the timer is turned off, or immediately after the rising edge of the seconds pulse. Note: CALIBRATION In determining the crystal’s error value, it is the user’s responsibility to include the crystal’s initial error from drift due to temperature or crystal aging. The real-time crystal input can be calibrated using the periodic auto-adjust feature. When properly calibrated, the RTCC can provide an error of less than three seconds per month. To perform this calibration, find the number of error clock pulses and store the value in the lower half of the RTCCAL register. The 8-bit, signed value, loaded into RTCCAL, is multiplied by four and will either be added or subtracted from the RTCC timer, once every minute. DS39974A-page 252 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 17.3 The alarm can also be configured to repeat based on a preconfigured interval. The number of times this occurs, after the alarm is enabled, is stored in the ALRMRPT register. Alarm The alarm features and characteristics are: • Configurable from half a second to one year • Enabled using the ALRMEN bit (ALRMCFG<7>, Register 17-4) • Offers one time and repeat alarm options 17.3.1 While the alarm is enabled (ALRMEN = 1), changing any of the registers, other than the RTCCAL, ALRMCFG and ALRMRPT registers, and the CHIME bit, can result in a false alarm event leading to a false alarm interrupt. To avoid this, only change the timer and alarm values while the alarm is disabled (ALRMEN = 0). It is recommended that the ALRMCFG and ALRMRPT registers and CHIME bit be changed when RTCSYNC = 0. Note: CONFIGURING THE ALARM The alarm feature is enabled using the ALRMEN bit. This bit is cleared when an alarm is issued. The bit will not be cleared if the CHIME bit = 1 or if ALRMRPT 0. The interval selection of the alarm is configured through the ALRMCFG (AMASK<3:0>) bits (see Figure 17-5). These bits determine which and how many digits of the alarm must match the clock value for the alarm to occur. FIGURE 17-5: ALARM MASK SETTINGS Alarm Mask Setting AMASK<3:0> Day of the Week Month Day Hours Minutes Seconds 0000 – Every half second 0001 – Every second 0010 – Every 10 seconds s 0011 – Every minute s s m s s m m s s 0100 – Every 10 minutes 0101 – Every hour 0110 – Every day 0111 – Every week d 1000 – Every month 1001 – Every year(1) Note 1: m m h h m m s s h h m m s s d d h h m m s s d d h h m m s s Annually, except when configured for February 29. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 253 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY When ALRMCFG = 00 and the CHIME bit = 0 (ALRMCFG<6>), the repeat function is disabled and only a single alarm will occur. The alarm can be repeated up to 255 times by loading the ALRMRPT register with FFh. After each alarm is issued, the ALRMRPT register is decremented by one. Once the register has reached ‘00’, the alarm will be issued one last time. After the alarm is issued a last time, the ALRMEN bit is cleared automatically and the alarm turned off. Indefinite repetition of the alarm can occur if the CHIME bit = 1. When CHIME = 1, the alarm is not disabled when the ALRMRPT register reaches ‘00’, but it rolls over to FF and continues counting indefinitely. 17.3.2 ALARM INTERRUPT At every alarm event, an interrupt is generated. Additionally, an alarm pulse output is provided that operates at half the frequency of the alarm. The alarm pulse output is completely synchronous with the RTCC clock and can be used as a trigger clock to other peripherals. This output is available on the RTCC pin. The output pulse is a clock with a 50% duty cycle and a frequency half that of the alarm event (see Figure 17-6). The RTCC pin can also output the seconds clock. The user can select between the alarm pulse, generated by the RTCC module, or the seconds clock output. The RTSECSEL (PADCFG1<2:1>) bits select between these two outputs: • Alarm pulse – RTSECSEL<2:1> = 00 • Seconds clock – RTSECSEL<2:1> = 01 FIGURE 17-6: TIMER PULSE GENERATION RTCEN bit ALRMEN bit RTCC Alarm Event RTCC Pin 17.4 17.5.2 Low-Power Modes POWER-ON RESET (POR) The timer and alarm can optionally continue to operate while in Sleep, Idle and even Deep Sleep mode. An alarm event can be used to wake-up the microcontroller from any of these Low-Power modes. The RTCCFG and ALRMRPT registers are reset only on a POR. Once the device exits the POR state, the clock registers should be reloaded with the desired values. 17.5 The timer prescaler values can be reset only by writing to the SECONDS register. No device Reset can affect the prescalers. 17.5.1 Reset DEVICE RESET When a device Reset occurs, the ALCFGRPT register is forced to its Reset state, causing the alarm to be disabled (if enabled prior to the Reset). If the RTCC was enabled, it will continue to operate when a basic device Reset occurs. DS39974A-page 254 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 17.6 Register Maps Table 17-5, Table 17-6 and Table 17-7 summarize the registers associated with the RTCC module. TABLE 17-5: File Name RTCC CONTROL REGISTERS Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 All Resets 0000 RTCCFG RTCEN — RTCWREN RTCSYNC HALFSEC RTCOE RTCPTR1 RTCPTR0 RTCCAL CAL7 CAL6 CAL5 CAL4 CAL3 CAL2 CAL1 CAL0 0000 PADCFG1 — — — — — PMPTTL 0000 ALRMCFG ALRMEN CHIME AMASK3 AMASK2 AMASK1 RTSECSEL1 RTSECSEL0 AMASK0 ALRMPTR1 ALRMPTR0 0000 ALRMRPT ARPT7 ARPT6 ARPT5 ARPT4 ARPT3 ARPT2 ARPT1 ARPT0 0000 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCCIF 0000 PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCCIE 0000 IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCCIP 0000 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown in hexadecimal for 44-pin devices. TABLE 17-6: File Name RTCC VALUE REGISTERS Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 RTCVALH RTCC Value Register Window High Byte, Based on RTCPTR<1:0> RTCVALL RTCC Value Register Window Low Byte, Based on RTCPTR<1:0> RTCEN — ALRMEN CHIME RTCCFG ALRMCFG RTCWREN RTCSYNC HALFSEC AMASK3 AMASK2 AMASK1 Bit 1 Bit 0 All Resets xxxx xxxx RTCOE RTCPTR1 RTCPTR0 0000 AMASK0 ALRMPTR1 ALRMPTR0 0000 ALRMVALH Alarm Value Register Window High Byte, Based on ALRMPTR<1:0> xxxx ALRMVALL xxxx Legend: Alarm Value Register Window Low Byte, Based on ALRMPTR<1:0> — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown in hexadecimal for 44-pin devices. TABLE 17-7: File Name ALRMRPT ALARM VALUE REGISTERS Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 All Resets ARPT7 ARPT6 ARPT5 ARPT4 ARPT3 ARPT2 ARPT1 ARPT0 0000 ALRMVALH Alarm Value Register Window High Byte, Based on ALRMPTR<1:0> xxxx ALRMVALL Alarm Value Register Window Low Byte, Based on ALRMPTR<1:0> RTCCAL CAL7 CAL6 CAL5 CAL4 CAL3 xxxx CAL2 CAL1 CAL0 0000 RTCVALH RTCC Value Register Window High Byte, Based on RTCPTR<1:0> xxxx RTCVALL RTCC Value Register Window Low Byte, Based on RTCPTR<1:0> xxxx Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown in hexadecimal for 44-pin devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 255 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 256 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 18.0 CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM (CCP) MODULES PIC18F47J13 family devices have seven CCP (Capture/Compare/PWM) modules, designated CCP4 through CCP10. All the modules implement standard Capture, Compare and Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) modes. Note: Each CCP module contains a 16-bit register that can operate as a 16-bit Capture register, a 16-bit Compare register or a PWM Master/Slave Duty Cycle register. For the sake of clarity, all CCP module operation in the following sections is described with respect to CCP4, but is equally applicable to CCP5 through CCP10. Throughout this section, generic references are used for register and bit names that are the same – except for an ‘x’ variable that indicates the item’s association with the specific CCP module. For example, the control register is named CCPxCON and refers to CCP4CON through CCP10CON. REGISTER 18-1: CCPxCON: CCP4-10 CONTROL REGISTER (4, BANKED F12h; 5, F0Fh; 6, F0Ch; 7, F09h; 8, F06h; 9, F03h; 10, F00h) U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — DCxB1 DCxB0 CCPxM3(1) CCPxM2(1) CCPxM1(1) CCPxM0(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 DCxB<1:0>: PWM Duty Cycle Bit 1 and Bit 0 for CCPx Module Capture mode: Unused. Compare mode: Unused. PWM mode: These bits are the two Least Significant bits (Bit 1 and Bit 0) of the 10-bit PWM duty cycle. The eight Most Significant bits (DCxB<9:2>) of the duty cycle are found in CCPRxL. bit 3-0 CCPxM<3:0>: CCPx Module Mode Select bits(1) 0000 = Capture/Compare/PWM disabled (resets CCPx module) 0001 = Reserved 0010 = Compare mode, toggle output on match (CCPxIF bit is set) 0011 = Reserved 0100 = Capture mode: every falling edge 0101 = Capture mode: every rising edge 0110 = Capture mode: every 4th rising edge 0111 = Capture mode: every 16th rising edge 1000 = Compare mode: initialize CCPx pin low; on compare match, force CCPx pin high (CCPxIF bit is set) 1001 = Compare mode: initialize CCPx pin high; on compare match, force CCPx pin low (CCPxIF bit is set) 1010 = Compare mode: generate software interrupt on compare match (CCPxIF bit is set, CCPx pin reflects I/O state) 1011 = Compare mode: Special Event Trigger; reset timer on CCPx match (CCPxIF bit is set) 11xx = PWM mode Note 1: CCPxM<3:0> = 1011 will only reset the timer and not start an A/D conversion on CCPx match. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 257 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 18-2: CCPTMRS1: CCP4-10 TIMER SELECT 1 REGISTER (BANKED F51h) R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 C7TSEL1 C7TSEL0 — C6TSEL0 — C5TSEL0 C4TSEL1 C4TSEL0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 C7TSEL<1:0>: CCP7 Timer Selection bit 00 = CCP7 is based off of TMR1/TMR2 01 = CCP7 is based off of TMR5/TMR4 10 = CCP7 is based off of TMR5/TMR6 11 = CCP7 is based off of TMR5/TMR8 bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 C6TSEL0: CCP6 Timer Selection bit 0 = CCP6 is based off of TMR1/TMR2 1 = CCP6 is based off of TMR5/TMR2 bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 C5TSEL0: CCP5 Timer Selection bit 0 = CCP5 is based off of TMR1/TMR2 1 = CCP5 is based off of TMR5/TMR4 bit 1-0 C4TSEL<1:0>: CCP4 Timer Selection bits 00 = CCP4 is based off of TMR1/TMR2 01 = CCP4 is based off of TMR3/TMR4 10 = CCP4 is based off of TMR3/TMR6 11 = Reserved; do not use DS39974A-page 258 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 18-3: CCPTMRS2: CCP4-10 TIMER SELECT 2 REGISTER (BANKED F50h) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — C10TSEL0 — C9TSEL0 C8TSEL1 C8TSEL0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 C10TSEL0: CCP10 Timer Selection bit 0 = CCP10 is based off of TMR1/TMR2 1 = Reserved; do not use bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2 C9TSEL0: CCP9 Timer Selection bit 0 = CCP9 is based off of TMR1/TMR2 1 = CCP9 is based off of TMR1/TMR4 bit 1-0 C8TSEL<1:0>: CCP8 Timer Selection bits 00 = CCP8 is based off of TMR1/TMR2 01 = CCP8 is based off of TMR1/TMR4 10 = CCP8 is based off of TMR1/TMR6 11 = Reserved; do not use 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39974A-page 259 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 18-4: CCPRxL: CCP4-10 PERIOD LOW BYTE REGISTER (4, BANKED F13h; 5, F10h; 6, F0Dh; 7, F0Ah; 8, F07h; 9, F04h; 10, F01h) R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x CCPRxL7 CCPRxL6 CCPRxL5 CCPRxL4 CCPRxL3 CCPRxL2 CCPRxL1 CCPRxL0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown CCPRxL<7:0>: CCPx Period Register Low Byte bits Capture Mode: Capture register low byte Compare Mode: Compare register low byte PWM Mode: PWM Period register low byte REGISTER 18-5: CCPRxH: CCP4-10 PERIOD HIGH BYTE REGISTER (4, BANKED F14h; 5, F11h; 6, F0Eh; 7, F0Bh; 8, F08h; 9, F05h; 10, F02h) R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x CCPRxH7 CCPRxH6 CCPRxH5 CCPRxH4 CCPRxH3 CCPRxH2 CCPRxH1 CCPRxH0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown CCPRxH<7:0>: CCPx Period Register High Byte bits Capture Mode: Capture register high byte Compare Mode: Compare register high byte PWM Mode: PWM Period register high byte DS39974A-page 260 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 18.1 TABLE 18-1: CCP Module Configuration Each Capture/Compare/PWM module is associated with a control register (generically, CCPxCON) and a data register (CCPRx). The data register, in turn, is comprised of two 8-bit registers: CCPRxL (low byte) and CCPRxH (high byte). All registers are both readable and writable. 18.1.1 CCP MODE – TIMER RESOURCE CCP Mode Timer Resource Capture Timer1, Timer3 or Timer5 Compare PWM CCP MODULES AND TIMER RESOURCES Timer2, Timer4, Timer6 or Timer8 The assignment of a particular timer to a module is determined by the Timer to CCP enable bits in the CCPTMRSx registers. (See Register 18-2 and Register 18-3.) All of the modules may be active at once and may share the same timer resource if they are configured to operate in the same mode (Capture/Compare or PWM), at the same time. The CCP modules utilize Timers, 1 through 8, varying with the selected mode. Various timers are available to the CCP modules in Capture, Compare or PWM modes, as shown in Table 18-1. The CCPTMRS1 register selects the timers for CCP modules, 7, 6, 5 and 4, and the CCPTMRS2 register selects the timers for CCP modules, 10, 9 and 8. The possible configurations are shown in Table 18-2 and Table 18-3. TABLE 18-2: TIMER ASSIGNMENTS FOR CCP MODULES 4, 5, 6 AND 7 CCPTMRS1 Register CCP4 CCP5 Capture/ C4TSEL Compare <1:0> Mode PWM Mode CCP6 Capture/ C5TSEL0 Compare Mode CCP7 Capture/ PWM C6TSEL0 Compare Mode Mode PWM Mode Capture/ C7TSEL Compare <1:0> Mode PWM Mode 0 0 TMR1 TMR2 0 TMR1 TMR2 0 TMR1 TMR2 0 0 TMR1 TMR2 0 1 TMR3 TMR4 1 TMR5 TMR4 1 TMR5 TMR2 0 1 TMR5 TMR4 1 0 TMR3 TMR6 1 0 TMR5 TMR6 1 1 TMR5 TMR8 1 1 Note 1: Reserved(1) Do not use the reserved bit configuration. TABLE 18-3: TIMER ASSIGNMENTS FOR CCP MODULES 8, 9 AND 10 CCPTMRS2 Register CCP8 Devices with 64 Kbyte CCP8 Capture/ C8TSEL Compare <1:0> Mode CCP9 CCP10 Capture/ PWM C8TSEL Compare Mode <1:0> Mode Capture/ PWM C9TSEL0 Compare Mode Mode Capture/ PWM C10TSEL0 Compare Mode Mode PWM Mode TMR2 0 0 TMR1 TMR2 0 0 TMR1 TMR2 0 TMR1 TMR2 0 0 1 TMR1 TMR4 0 1 TMR1 TMR4 1 TMR1 TMR4 1 1 0 TMR1 TMR6 1 0 TMR1 TMR6 1 1 Note 1: Reserved(1) 1 1 TMR1 Reserved(1) Reserved(1) Do not use the reserved bit configuration. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 261 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 18.1.2 OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT OPTION The event is selected by the mode select bits, CCP4M<3:0> (CCP4CON<3:0>). When a capture is made, the interrupt request flag bit, CCP4IF (PIR4<1>), is set. (It must be cleared in software.) If another capture occurs before the value in register, CCPR4, is read, the old captured value is overwritten by the new captured value. When operating in Output mode (the Compare or PWM modes), the drivers for the CCPx pins can be optionally configured as open-drain outputs. This feature allows the voltage level on the pin to be pulled to a higher level through an external pull-up resistor and allows the output to communicate with external circuits without the need for additional level shifters. Figure 18-1 shows the Capture mode block diagram. The open-drain output option is controlled by the CCPxOD bits (ODCON1<7:0> and ODCON2<3:2>). Setting the appropriate bit configures the pin for the corresponding module for open-drain operation. 18.2 18.2.1 In Capture mode, the appropriate CCPx pin should be configured as an input by setting the corresponding TRISx direction bit. Capture Mode Note: In Capture mode, the CCPR4H:CCPR4L register pair captures the 16-bit value of the TMR1 or TMR3 register when an event occurs on the CCP4 pin, RB4. An event is defined as one of the following: • • • • CCP PIN CONFIGURATION 18.2.2 If RB4 is configured as a CCP4 output, a write to the port causes a capture condition. TIMER1/3/5 MODE SELECTION For the available timers (1/3/5) to be used for the capture feature, the used timers must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the capture operation may not work. Every falling edge Every rising edge Every 4th rising edge Every 16th rising edge The timer to be used with each CCP module is selected in the CCPTMRSx registers. (See Section 18.1.1 “CCP Modules and Timer Resources”.) Details of the timer assignments for the CCP modules are given in Table 18-2 and Table 18-3. FIGURE 18-1: CAPTURE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM Set CCP5IF C5TSEL0 CCP5 Pin Prescaler 1, 4, 16 and Edge Detect Q1:Q4 CCP4CON<3:0> 4 4 CCPR5L TMR1 Enable TMR1H TMR1L TMR3H TMR3L Set CCP4IF 4 C4TSEL1 C4TSEL0 CCP4 Pin Prescaler 1, 4, 16 TMR5L TMR5 Enable CCPR5H C5TSEL0 CCP5CON<3:0> TMR5H and Edge Detect TMR3 Enable CCPR4H CCPR4L TMR1 Enable C4TSEL0 C4TSEL1 Note: TMR1H TMR1L This block diagram uses CCP4 and CCP5, and their appropriate timers as an example. For details on all of the CCP modules and their timer assignments, see Table 18-2 and Table 18-3. DS39974A-page 262 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 18.2.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT 18.3.1 When the Capture mode is changed, a false capture interrupt may be generated. The user should keep the CCP4IE bit (PIE4<1>) clear to avoid false interrupts and should clear the flag bit, CCP4IF, following any such change in operating mode. 18.2.4 Switching from one capture prescaler to another may generate an interrupt. Doing that also will not clear the prescaler counter – meaning the first capture may be from a non-zero prescaler. Example 18-1 shows the recommended method for switching between capture prescalers. This example also clears the prescaler counter and will not generate the “false” interrupt. EXAMPLE 18-1: CHANGING BETWEEN CAPTURE PRESCALERS CLRF MOVLW CCP4CON NEW_CAPT_PS MOVWF CCP4CON 18.3 ; ; ; ; ; ; Turn CCP module off Load WREG with the new prescaler mode value and CCP ON Load CCP4CON with this value Compare Mode In Compare mode, the 16-bit CCPR4 register value is constantly compared against either the TMR1 or TMR3 register pair value. When a match occurs, the CCP4 pin can be: • • • • The user must configure the CCPx pin as an output by clearing the appropriate TRISx bit. Note: CCP PRESCALER There are four prescaler settings in Capture mode. They are specified as part of the operating mode selected by the mode select bits (CCP4M<3:0>). Whenever the CCP module is turned off, or the CCP module is not in Capture mode, the prescaler counter is cleared. This means that any Reset will clear the prescaler counter. Driven high Driven low Toggled (high-to-low or low-to-high) Unchanged (that is, reflecting the state of the I/O latch) CCP PIN CONFIGURATION 18.3.2 Clearing the CCP4CON register will force the RB4 compare output latch (depending on device configuration) to the default low level. This is not the PORTB I/O data latch. TIMER1/3/5 MODE SELECTION If the CCP module is using the compare feature in conjunction with any of the Timer1/3/5 timers, the timers must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the compare operation may not work. Note: 18.3.3 Details of the timer assignments for the CCP modules are given in Table 18-2 and Table 18-3. SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE When the Generate Software Interrupt mode is chosen (CCP4M<3:0> = 1010), the CCP4 pin is not affected. Only a CCP interrupt is generated, if enabled, and the CCP4IE bit is set. 18.3.4 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER Both CCP modules are equipped with a Special Event Trigger. This is an internal hardware signal generated in Compare mode to trigger actions by other modules. The Special Event Trigger is enabled by selecting the Compare Special Event Trigger mode (CCP4M<3:0> = 1011). For either CCP module, the Special Event Trigger resets the Timer register pair for whichever timer resource is currently assigned as the module’s time base. This allows the CCPRx registers to serve as a programmable period register for either timer. The Special Event Trigger for CCP4 cannot start an A/D conversion. Note: The Special Event Trigger of ECCP1 can start an A/D conversion, but the A/D Converter must be enabled. For more information, see Section 19.0 “Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) Module”. The action on the pin is based on the value of the mode select bits (CCP4M<3:0>). At the same time, the interrupt flag bit, CCP4IF, is set. Figure 18-2 gives the Compare mode block diagram 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 263 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 18-2: COMPARE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM CCPR5H Set CCP5IF CCPR5L Special Event Trigger (Timer1/5 Reset) CCP5 Pin Compare Match Comparator S Output Logic Q R TRIS Output Enable 4 CCP5CON<3:0> TMR1H TMR1L 0 TMR5H TMR5L 1 C5TSEL0 0 TMR1H TMR1L 1 TMR5H TMR5L Special Event Trigger (Timer1/Timer3 Reset, A/D Trigger) C4TSEL1 C4TSEL0 Set CCP4IF Comparator CCPR4H CCP4 Pin Compare Match Output Logic 4 CCPR4L S Q R TRIS Output Enable CCP4CON<3:0> Note: This block diagram uses CCP4 and CCP5 and their appropriate timers as an example. For details on all of the CCP modules and their timer assignments, see Table 18-2 and Table 18-3. DS39974A-page 264 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 18-4: Name INTCON RCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CAPTURE, COMPARE, TIMER1/3/5/7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR PIR4 CCP10IF CCP9IF CCP8IF CCP7IF CCP6IF CCP5IF CCP4IF CCP3IF PIE4 CCP10IE CCP9IE CCP8IE CCP7IE CCP6IE CCP5IE CCP4IE CCP3IE IPR4 CCP10IP CCP9IP CCP8IP CCP7IP CCP6IP CCP5IP CCP4IP CCP3IP TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 RDPU REPU — — — TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0 TRISE TMR1L Timer1 Register Low Byte TMR1H Timer1 Register High Byte TMR3L Timer3 Register Low Byte TMR3H Timer3 Register High Byte TMR5L Timer5 Register Low Byte TMR5H Timer5 Register High Byte T1CON TMR1CS1 TMR1CS0 T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC RD16 TMR1ON T3CON TMR3CS1 TMR3CS0 T3CKPS1 T3CKPS0 T3OSCEN T3SYNC RD16 TMR3ON T5CON TMR5CS1 TMR5CS0 T5CKPS1 T5CKPS0 T5OSCEN T5SYNC RD16 TMR5ON CCPR4L CCPR4L7 CCPR4L5 CCPR4L4 CCPR4L3 CCPR4L2 CCPR4L1 CCPR4L0 CCPR4H CCPR4H7 CCPR4H6 CCPR4H5 CCPR4H4 CCPR4H3 CCPR4H2 CCPR4H1 CCPR4H0 CCPR4L6 CCPR5L CCPR5L7 CCPR5H CCPR5H7 CCPR5H6 CCPR5H5 CCPR5H4 CCPR5H3 CCPR5H2 CCPR5H1 CCPR5H0 CCPR5L6 CCPR6L6 CCPR5L5 CCPR7L7 CCPR7H CCPR7H7 CCPR7H6 CCPR7H5 CCPR7H4 CCPR7H3 CCPR7H2 CCPR7H1 CCPR7H0 CCPR8L7 CCPR8H CCPR8H7 CCPR8H6 CCPR8H5 CCPR8H4 CCPR8H3 CCPR8H2 CCPR8H1 CCPR8H0 CCPR9L5 CCPR8L4 CCPR9L4 CCPR8L3 CCPR9L3 CCPR8L2 CCPR9L2 CCPR8L1 CCPR7L0 CCPR8L CCPR9L6 CCPR8L5 CCPR7L1 CCPR6L0 CCPR7L CCPR8L6 CCPR7L2 CCPR6L1 CCPR5L0 CCPR6L7 CCPR7L3 CCPR6L2 CCPR5L1 CCPR6H7 CCPR6H6 CCPR6H5 CCPR6H4 CCPR6H3 CCPR6H2 CCPR6H1 CCPR6H0 CCPR7L4 CCPR6L3 CCPR5L2 CCPR6H CCPR7L5 CCPR6L4 CCPR5L3 CCPR6L CCPR7L6 CCPR6L5 CCPR5L4 CCPR9L1 CCPR8L0 CCPR9L CCPR9L7 CCPR9H CCPR9H7 CCPR9H6 CCPR9H5 CCPR9H4 CCPR9H3 CCPR9H2 CCPR9H1 CCPR9H0 CCPR9L0 CCPR10L CCPR10L7 CCPR10L6 CCPR10L5 CCPR10L4 CCPR10L3 CCPR10L2 CCPR10L1 CCPR10L0 CCPR10H CCPR10H7 CCPR10H6 CCPR10H5 CCPR10H4 CCPR10H3 CCPR10H2 CCPR10H1 CCPR10H0 CCP4CON — — DC4B1 DC4B0 CCP4M3 CCP4M2 CCP4M1 CCP4M0 CCP5CON — — DC5B1 DC5B0 CCP5M3 CCP5M2 CCP5M1 CCP5M0 CCP6CON — — DC6B1 DC6B0 CCP6M3 CCP6M2 CCP6M1 CCP6M0 CCP7CON — — DC7B1 DC7B0 CCP7M3 CCP7M2 CCP7M1 CCP7M0 CCP8CON — — DC8B1 DC8B0 CCP8M3 CCP8M2 CCP8M1 CCP8M0 CCP9CON — — DC9B1 DC9B0 CCP9M3 CCP9M2 CCP9M1 CCP9M0 CCP10CON — — DC10B1 DC10B0 CCP10M3 CCP10M2 CCP10M1 CCP10M0 CCPTMRS1 C7TSEL1 C7TSEL0 — C6TSEL0 — C5TSEL0 C4TSEL1 C4TSEL0 CCPTMRS2 — — — C10TSEL0 — C9TSEL0 C8TSEL1 C8TSEL0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by capture/compare or Timer1/3/5. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 265 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 18.4 PWM Mode In Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) mode, the CCP4 pin produces up to a 10-bit resolution PWM output. Since the CCP4 pin is multiplexed with a PORTB data latch, the appropriate TRISx bit must be cleared to make the CCP4 pin an output. A PWM output (Figure 18-4) has a time base (period) and a time that the output stays high (duty cycle). The frequency of the PWM is the inverse of the period (1/period). FIGURE 18-4: Period Figure 18-3 shows a simplified block diagram of the CCP1 module in PWM mode. For a step-by-step procedure on how to set up the CCP module for PWM operation, see Section 18.4.3 “Setup for PWM Operation”. FIGURE 18-3: Duty Cycle TMR2 = PR2 TMR2 = Duty Cycle SIMPLIFIED PWM BLOCK DIAGRAM(2) Duty Cycle Registers PWM OUTPUT TMR2 = PR2 CCP4CON<5:4> 18.4.1 CCPR4L PWM PERIOD The PWM period is specified by writing to the PR2 register. The PWM period can be calculated using the following formula: CCPR4H (Slave) EQUATION 18-1: R Comparator Q PWM Period = [(PR2) + 1] • 4 • TOSC • (TMR2 Prescale Value) RC2 TMR2 (Note 1) Comparator PR2 Note 1: 2: S PWM frequency is defined as 1/[PWM period]. TRISC<2> Clear Timer, CCP1 pin and latch D.C. The 8-bit TMR2 value is concatenated with the 2-bit internal Q clock, or 2 bits of the prescaler, to create the 10-bit time base. CCP4 and its appropriate timers are used as an example. For details on all of the CCP modules and their timer assignments, see Table 18-2 and Table 18-3. DS39974A-page 266 When TMR2 is equal to PR2, the following three events occur on the next increment cycle: • TMR2 is cleared • The CCP4 pin is set (An exception: If the PWM duty cycle = 0%, the CCP4 pin will not be set) • The PWM duty cycle is latched from CCPR4L into CCPR4H Note: Preliminary The Timer2 postscalers (see Section 14.0 “Timer2 Module”) are not used in the determination of the PWM frequency. The postscaler could be used to have a servo update rate at a different frequency than the PWM output. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 18.4.2 PWM DUTY CYCLE The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing to the CCPR4L register and to the CCP4CON<5:4> bits. Up to 10-bit resolution is available. The CCPR4L contains the eight MSbs and the CCP4CON<5:4> contains the two LSbs. This 10-bit value is represented by CCPR4L:CCP4CON<5:4>. The following equation is used to calculate the PWM duty cycle in time: The CCPR4H register and a two-bit internal latch are used to double-buffer the PWM duty cycle. This double-buffering is essential for glitchless PWM operation. When the CCPR4H and two-bit latch match TMR2, concatenated with an internal two-bit Q clock or two bits of the TMR2 prescaler, the CCP4 pin is cleared. The maximum PWM resolution (bits) for a given PWM frequency is given by the equation: EQUATION 18-2: PWM Duty Cycle = (CCPR4L:CCP4CON<5:4>) • TOSC • (TMR2 Prescale Value) EQUATION 18-3: CCPR4L and CCP4CON<5:4> can be written to at any time, but the duty cycle value is not latched into CCPR4H until after a match between PR2 and TMR2 occurs (that is, the period is complete). In PWM mode, CCPR4H is a read-only register. TABLE 18-5: Note: If the PWM duty cycle value is longer than the PWM period, the CCP4 pin will not be cleared. EXAMPLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS AT 40 MHz PWM Frequency Timer Prescaler (1, 4, 16) PR2 Value Maximum Resolution (bits) 18.4.3 F OSC log --------------- F PWM PWM Resolution (max) = -----------------------------bits log 2 2.44 kHz 9.77 kHz 39.06 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.50 kHz 416.67 kHz 16 4 1 1 1 1 FFh FFh FFh 3Fh 1Fh 17h 10 10 10 8 7 6.58 SETUP FOR PWM OPERATION To configure the CCP module for PWM operation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set the PWM period by writing to the PR2 register. Set the PWM duty cycle by writing to the CCPR4L register and CCP4CON<5:4> bits. Make the CCP4 pin an output by clearing the appropriate TRISx bit. Set the TMR2 prescale value, then enable Timer2 by writing to T2CON. Configure the CCP4 module for PWM operation. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 267 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 18-6: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PWM AND TIMERS Name INTCON Bit 7 Bit 6 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR PIR4 PIE4 CCP10IF CCP10IE CCP9IF CCP9IE CCP8IF CCP8IE CCP7IF CCP7IE CCP6IF CCP6IE CCP5IF CCP5IE CCP4IF CCP4IE CCP3IF CCP3IE IPR4 TRISB CCP10IP TRISB7 CCP9IP TRISB6 CCP8IP TRISB5 CCP7IP TRISB4 CCP6IP TRISB3 CCP5IP TRISB2 CCP4IP TRISB1 CCP3IP TRISB0 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 RDPU REPU — — — TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0 RCON TRISE TMR2 TMR4 Timer2 Register Timer4 Register TMR6 TMR8 Timer6 Register Timer8 Register PR2 PR4 Timer2 Period Register Timer4 Period Register PR6 PR8 Timer6 Period Register Timer8 Period Register T2CON T4CON — — T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 T4OUTPS3 T4OUTPS2 T4OUTPS1 T4OUTPS0 TMR2ON TMR4ON T2CKPS1 T4CKPS1 T2CKPS0 T4CKPS0 T6CON T8CON — — T6OUTPS3 T6OUTPS2 T6OUTPS1 T6OUTPS0 T8OUTPS3 T8OUTPS2 T8OUTPS1 T8OUTPS0 TMR6ON TMR8ON T6CKPS1 T8CKPS1 T6CKPS0 T8CKPS0 CCPR4L CCPR4H CCPR4L7 CCPR4L6 CCPR4L5 CCPR4L4 CCPR4L3 CCPR4L2 CCPR4L1 CCPR4L0 CCPR4H7 CCPR4H6 CCPR4H5 CCPR4H4 CCPR4H3 CCPR4H2 CCPR4H1 CCPR4H0 CCPR5L CCPR5L7 CCPR5H CCPR6L CCPR5H7 CCPR5H6 CCPR5H5 CCPR5H4 CCPR5H3 CCPR5H2 CCPR5H1 CCPR5H0 CCPR6L7 CCPR6L6 CCPR6L5 CCPR6L4 CCPR6L3 CCPR6L2 CCPR6L1 CCPR6L0 CCPR6H CCPR7L CCPR6H7 CCPR6H6 CCPR6H5 CCPR6H4 CCPR6H3 CCPR6H2 CCPR6H1 CCPR6H0 CCPR7L7 CCPR7L6 CCPR7L5 CCPR7L4 CCPR7L3 CCPR7L2 CCPR7L1 CCPR7L0 CCPR7H CCPR8L CCPR7H7 CCPR7H6 CCPR7H5 CCPR7H4 CCPR7H3 CCPR7H2 CCPR7H1 CCPR7H0 CCPR8L7 CCPR8L6 CCPR8L5 CCPR8L4 CCPR8L3 CCPR8L2 CCPR8L1 CCPR8L0 CCPR8H CCPR9L CCPR8H7 CCPR8H6 CCPR8H5 CCPR8H4 CCPR8H3 CCPR8H2 CCPR8H1 CCPR8H0 CCPR9L7 CCPR9L6 CCPR9L5 CCPR9L4 CCPR9L3 CCPR9L2 CCPR9L1 CCPR9L0 CCPR9H CCPR10L CCPR9H7 CCPR9H6 CCPR9H5 CCPR9H4 CCPR9H3 CCPR9H2 CCPR9H1 CCPR9H0 CCPR10L7 CCPR10L6 CCPR10L5 CCPR10L4 CCPR10L3 CCPR10L2 CCPR10L1 CCPR10L0 CCPR10H CCP4CON CCPR10H7 CCPR10H6 CCPR10H5 CCPR10H4 CCPR10H3 CCPR10H2 CCPR10H1 CCPR10H0 — — DC4B1 DC4B0 CCP4M3 CCP4M2 CCP4M1 CCP4M0 CCPR5L6 CCPR5L5 CCPR5L4 CCPR5L3 CCPR5L2 CCPR5L1 CCPR5L0 CCP5CON CCP6CON — — — — DC5B1 DC6B1 DC5B0 DC6B0 CCP5M3 CCP6M3 CCP5M2 CCP6M2 CCP5M1 CCP6M1 CCP5M0 CCP6M0 CCP7CON CCP8CON — — — — DC7B1 DC8B1 DC7B0 DC8B0 CCP7M3 CCP8M3 CCP7M2 CCP8M2 CCP7M1 CCP8M1 CCP7M0 CCP8M0 CCP9CON CCP10CON — — — — DC9B1 DC10B1 DC9B0 DC10B0 CCP9M3 CCP10M3 CCP9M2 CCP9M1 CCP9M0 CCP10M2 CCP10M1 CCP10M0 CCPTMRS1 CCPTMRS2 C7TSEL1 — C7TSEL0 — — — C6TSEL0 C10TSEL0 — — C5TSEL0 C9TSEL0 C4TSEL1 C8TSEL1 C4TSEL0 C8TSEL0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PWM or Timer2/4/6/8. DS39974A-page 268 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 19.0 The ECCP modules are implemented as standard CCP modules with enhanced PWM capabilities. These include: ENHANCED CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM (ECCP) MODULE PIC18F47J13 family devices have three Enhanced Capture/Compare/PWM (ECCP) modules: ECCP1, ECCP2 and ECCP3. These modules contain a 16-bit register, which can operate as a 16-bit Capture register, a 16-bit Compare register or a PWM Master/Slave Duty Cycle register. These ECCP modules are upwardly compatible with CCP. Note: • • • • • Provision for two or four output channels Output Steering modes Programmable polarity Programmable dead-band control Automatic shutdown and restart The enhanced features are discussed in detail in Section 19.4 “PWM (Enhanced Mode)”. Throughout this section, generic references are used for register and bit names that are the same – except for an ‘x’ variable that indicates the item’s association with the ECCP1, ECCP2 or ECCP3 module. For example, the control register is named CCPxCON and refers to CCP1CON, CCP2CON and CCP3CON. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 269 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 19-1: CCPxCON: ECCP1/2/3 CONTROL (1, ACCESS FBAh; 2, FB4h; 3, BANKED F15h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PxM1 PxM0 DCxB1 DCxB0 CCPxM3 CCPxM2 CCPxM1 CCPxM0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 PxM<1:0>: Enhanced PWM Output Configuration bits If CCPxM<3:2> = 00, 01, 10: xx = PxA assigned as capture/compare input/output; PxB, PxC and PxD assigned as port pins If CCPxM<3:2> = 11: 00 = Single output: PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD are controlled by steering (see Section 19.4.7 “Pulse Steering Mode”) 01 = Full-bridge output forward: PxD modulated; PxA active; PxB, PxC inactive 10 = Half-bridge output: PxA, PxB modulated with dead-band control; PxC and PxD assigned as port pins 11 = Full-bridge output reverse: PxB modulated; PxC active; PxA and PxD inactive bit 5-4 DCxB<1:0>: PWM Duty Cycle Bit 1 and Bit 0 Capture mode: Unused. Compare mode: Unused. PWM mode: These bits are the two LSbs of the 10-bit PWM duty cycle. The eight MSbs of the duty cycle are found in ECCPRxL. bit 3-0 CCPxM<3:0>: ECCPx Mode Select bits 0000 = Capture/Compare/PWM off (resets ECCPx module) 0001 = Reserved 0010 = Compare mode; toggle output on match 0011 = Capture mode 0100 = Capture mode; every falling edge 0101 = Capture mode; every rising edge 0110 = Capture mode; every fourth rising edge 0111 = Capture mode; every 16th rising edge 1000 = Compare mode; initialize ECCPx pin low, set output on compare match (set CCPxIF) 1001 = Compare mode; initialize ECCPx pin high, clear output on compare match (set CCPxIF) 1010 = Compare mode; generate software interrupt only, ECCPx pin reverts to I/O state 1011 = Compare mode; trigger special event (ECCPx resets TMR1 or TMR3, starts A/D conversion, sets CCPxIF bit) 1100 = PWM mode; PxA and PxC active-high; PxB and PxD active-high 1101 = PWM mode; PxA and PxC active-high; PxB and PxD active-low 1110 = PWM mode; PxA and PxC active-low; PxB and PxD active-high 1111 = PWM mode; PxA and PxC active-low; PxB and PxD active-low DS39974A-page 270 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 19-2: CCPTMRS0: ECCP1/2/3 TIMER SELECT 0 REGISTER (BANKED F52h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 C3TSEL1 C3TSEL0 C2TSEL2 C2TSEL1 C2TSEL0 C1TSEL2 C1TSEL1 C1TSEL0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-6 C3TSEL<1:0>: ECCP3 Timer Selection bits 00 = ECCP3 is based off of TMR1/TMR2 01 = ECCP3 is based off of TMR3/TMR4 10 = ECCP3 is based off of TMR3/TMR6 11 = ECCP3 is based off of TMR3/TMR8 bit 5-3 C2TSEL<2:0>: ECCP2 Timer Selection bits 000 = ECCP2 is based off of TMR1/TMR2 001 = ECCP2 is based off of TMR3/TMR4 010 = ECCP2 is based off of TMR3/TMR6 011 = ECCP2 is based off of TMR3/TMR8 1xx = Reserved; do not use bit 2-0 C1TSEL<2:0>: ECCP1 Timer Selection bits 000 = ECCP1 is based off of TMR1/TMR2 001 = ECCP1 is based off of TMR3/TMR4 010 = ECCP1 is based off of TMR3/TMR6 011 = ECCP1 is based off of TMR3/TMR8 1xx = Reserved; do not use x = Bit is unknown In addition to the expanded range of modes available through the CCPxCON and ECCPxAS registers, the ECCP modules have two additional registers associated with Enhanced PWM operation and auto-shutdown features. They are: • ECCPxDEL – Enhanced PWM Control • PSTRxCON – Pulse Steering Control 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 271 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 19.1 ECCP Outputs and Configuration The Enhanced CCP module may have up to four PWM outputs, depending on the selected operating mode. These outputs, designated PxA through PxD, are routed through the Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) module. Therefore, individual functions can be mapped to any of the remappable I/O pins (RPn). The outputs that are active depend on the ECCP operating mode selected. The pin assignments are summarized in Table 19-3. To configure the I/O pins as PWM outputs, the proper PWM mode must be selected by setting the PxM<1:0> and CCPxM<3:0> bits. The appropriate TRIS direction bits for the port pins must also be set as outputs. 19.1.1 ECCP MODULE AND TIMER RESOURCES The ECCP modules use Timer1, 2, 3, 4, 6 or 8, depending on the mode selected. These timers are available to CCP modules in Capture, Compare or PWM modes, as shown in Table 19-1. TABLE 19-1: 19.2 Capture Mode In Capture mode, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair captures the 16-bit value of the TMR1 or TMR3 registers when an event occurs on the corresponding ECCPx pin. An event is defined as one of the following: • • • • Every falling edge Every rising edge Every fourth rising edge Every 16th rising edge The event is selected by the mode select bits, CCPxM<3:0> (CCPxCON register<3:0>). When a capture is made, the interrupt request flag bit, CCPxIF, is set (see Table 19-2). The flag must be cleared by software. If another capture occurs before the value in the CCPRxH/L register pair is read, the old captured value is overwritten by the new captured value. TABLE 19-2: ECCP1/2/3 INTERRUPT FLAG BITS ECCP Module Flag-Bit 1 PIR1<2> 2 PIR2<0> 3 PIR4<0> ECCP MODE – TIMER RESOURCE ECCP Mode Timer Resource 19.2.1 Capture Timer1 or Timer3 Compare Timer1 or Timer3 PWM Timer2, Timer4, Timer6 or Timer8 In Capture mode, the appropriate ECCPx pin should be configured as an input by setting the corresponding TRISx direction bit. The assignment of a particular timer to a module is determined by the Timer to ECCP enable bits in the CCPTMRS0 register (Register 19-2). The interactions between the two modules are depicted in Figure 19-1. Capture operations are designed to be used when the timer is configured for Synchronous Counter mode. Capture operations may not work as expected if the associated timer is configured for Asynchronous Counter mode. DS39974A-page 272 ECCP PIN CONFIGURATION Additionally, the ECCPx input function needs to be assigned to an I/O pin through the Peripheral Pin Select module. For details on setting up the remappable pins, see Section 10.7 “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS)”. Note: Preliminary If the ECCPx pin is configured as an output, a write to the port can cause a capture condition. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 19.2.2 TIMER1/TIMER3 MODE SELECTION The timers that are to be used with the capture feature (Timer1 and/or Timer3) must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the capture operation may not work. The timer to be used with each ECCP module is selected in the CCPTMRS0 register (Register 19-2). 19.2.3 SOFTWARE INTERRUPT When the Capture mode is changed, a false capture interrupt may be generated. The user should keep the CCPxIE interrupt enable bit clear to avoid false interrupts. The interrupt flag bit, CCPxIF, should also be cleared following any such change in operating mode. 19.2.4 ECCP PRESCALER There are four prescaler settings in Capture mode; they are specified as part of the operating mode selected by the mode select bits (CCPxM<3:0>). Whenever the FIGURE 19-1: ECCP module is turned off, or Capture mode is disabled, the prescaler counter is cleared. This means that any Reset will clear the prescaler counter. Switching from one capture prescaler to another may generate an interrupt. Also, the prescaler counter will not be cleared; therefore, the first capture may be from a non-zero prescaler. Example 19-1 provides the recommended method for switching between capture prescalers. This example also clears the prescaler counter and will not generate the “false” interrupt. EXAMPLE 19-1: CLRF MOVLW MOVWF CHANGING BETWEEN CAPTURE PRESCALERS ECCP1CON ; Turn ECCP module off NEW_CAPT_PS ; Load WREG with the ; new prescaler mode ; value and ECCP ON CCP1CON ; Load ECCP1CON with ; this value CAPTURE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM Set CCP1IF ECCP1 Pin Prescaler 1, 4, 16 TMR3H C1TSEL0 C1TSEL1 C1TSEL2 and Edge Detect CCP1CON<3:0> Q1:Q4 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. TMR3 Enable CCPR1H C1TSEL0 C1TSEL1 C1TSEL2 CCPR1L TMR1 Enable TMR1H 4 TMR3L TMR1L 4 Preliminary DS39974A-page 273 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 19.3 19.3.2 Compare Mode TIMER1/TIMER3 MODE SELECTION In Compare mode, the 16-bit CCPRx register pair value is constantly compared against either the TMR1 or TMR3 register pair value. When a match occurs, the ECCPx pin can be: Timer1 and/or Timer3 must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode if the ECCP module is using the compare feature. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the compare operation will not work reliably. • • • • 19.3.3 Driven high Driven low Toggled (high-to-low or low-to-high) Unchanged (that is, reflecting the state of the I/O latch) The action on the pin is based on the value of the mode select bits (CCPxM<3:0>). At the same time, the interrupt flag bit, CCPxIF, is set. 19.3.1 ECCP PIN CONFIGURATION Users must configure the ECCPx pin as an output by clearing the appropriate TRISx bit. Note: Clearing the CCPxCON register will force the ECCPx compare output latch (depending on device configuration) to the default low level. This is not the PORTx I/O data latch. SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE When the Generate Software Interrupt mode is chosen (CCPxM<3:0> = 1010), the ECCPx pin is not affected; only the CCPxIF interrupt flag is affected. 19.3.4 SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER The ECCP module is equipped with a Special Event Trigger. This is an internal hardware signal generated in Compare mode to trigger actions by other modules. The Special Event Trigger is enabled by selecting the Compare Special Event Trigger mode (CCPxM<3:0> = 1011). The Special Event Trigger resets the Timer register pair for whichever timer resource is currently assigned as the module’s time base. This allows the CCPRx registers to serve as a Programmable Period register for either timer. The Special Event Trigger can also start an A/D conversion. In order to do this, the A/D Converter must already be enabled. FIGURE 19-2: COMPARE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM 0 TMR1H TMR1L 1 TMR3H TMR3L Special Event Trigger (Timer1/Timer3 Reset, A/D Trigger) C1TSEL0 C1TSEL1 C1TSEL2 Set CCP1IF Comparator CCPR1H ECCP1 Pin Compare Match Output Logic 4 CCPR1L S Q R TRIS Output Enable CCP1CON<3:0> DS39974A-page 274 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 19.4 The PWM outputs are multiplexed with I/O pins and are designated: PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD. The polarity of the PWM pins is configurable and is selected by setting the CCPxM bits in the CCPxCON register appropriately. PWM (Enhanced Mode) The Enhanced PWM mode can generate a PWM signal on up to four different output pins with up to 10 bits of resolution. It can do this through four different PWM Output modes: • • • • Table 19-1 provides the pin assignments for each Enhanced PWM mode. Single PWM mode Half-Bridge PWM mode Full-Bridge PWM, Forward mode Full-Bridge PWM, Reverse mode Figure 19-3 provides an example of a simplified block diagram of the Enhanced PWM module. Note: To select an Enhanced PWM mode, the PxM bits of the CCPxCON register must be set appropriately. FIGURE 19-3: To prevent the generation of an incomplete waveform when the PWM is first enabled, the ECCP module waits until the start of a new PWM period before generating a PWM signal. SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE ENHANCED PWM MODE EXAMPLE Duty Cycle Registers DC1B<1:0> CCPxM<3:0> 4 PxM<1:0> 2 CCPR1L ECCPx/PxA ECCPx/Output Pin TRIS CCPR1H (Slave) PxB R Comparator Q Output Controller Output Pin TRIS PxC TMR2 Comparator PR2 Note 1: (1) Output Pin TRIS S PxD Clear Timer2, Toggle PWM Pin and Latch Duty Cycle Output Pin TRIS ECCP1DEL The 8-bit timer, TMR2 register, is concatenated with the 2-bit internal Q clock, or 2 bits of the prescaler, to create the 10-bit time base. Note 1: The TRIS register value for each PWM output must be configured appropriately. 2: Any pin not used by an Enhanced PWM mode is available for alternate pin functions. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 275 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 19-3: EXAMPLE PIN ASSIGNMENTS FOR VARIOUS PWM ENHANCED MODES ECCP Mode PxM<1:0> PxA PxB PxC PxD Single 00 Yes(1) Yes(1) Yes(1) Yes(1) Half-Bridge 10 Yes Yes No No Full-Bridge, Forward 01 Yes Yes Yes Yes Full-Bridge, Reverse 11 Yes Yes Yes Yes Note 1: Outputs are enabled by pulse steering in Single mode (see Register 19-5). FIGURE 19-4: PWM (ENHANCED MODE) OUTPUT RELATIONSHIPS (ACTIVE-HIGH STATE) EXAMPLE PxM<1:0> Signal 0 PR2 + 1 Pulse Width Period 00 (Single Output) PxA Modulated Delay(1) Delay(1) PxA Modulated 10 (Half-Bridge) PxB Modulated PxA Active 01 (Full-Bridge, Forward) PxB Inactive PxC Inactive PxD Modulated PxA Inactive 11 (Full-Bridge, Reverse) PxB Modulated PxC Active PxD Inactive Relationships: • Period = 4 * TOSC * (PR2 + 1) * (TMR2 Prescale Value) • Pulse Width = TOSC * (CCPRxL<7:0>:CCPxCON<5:4>) * (TMR2 Prescale Value) • Delay = 4 * TOSC * (ECCPxDEL<6:0>) Note 1: Dead-band delay is programmed using the ECCPxDEL register (see Section 19.4.6 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay Mode”). DS39974A-page 276 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 19-5: ENHANCED PWM OUTPUT RELATIONSHIPS (ACTIVE-LOW STATE) EXAMPLE PxM<1:0> Signal PR2 + 1 Pulse Width 0 Period 00 (Single Output) PxA Modulated PxA Modulated 10 (Half-Bridge) Delay(1) Delay(1) PxB Modulated PxA Active 01 (Full-Bridge, Forward) PxB Inactive PxC Inactive PxD Modulated PxA Inactive 11 (Full-Bridge, Reverse) PxB Modulated PxC Active PxD Inactive Relationships: • Period = 4 * TOSC * (PR2 + 1) * (TMR2 Prescale Value) • Pulse Width = TOSC * (CCPRxL<7:0>:CCPxCON<5:4>) * (TMR2 Prescale Value) • Delay = 4 * TOSC * (ECCPxDEL<6:0>) Note 1: Dead-band delay is programmed using the ECCPxDEL register (see Section 19.4.6 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay Mode”). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 277 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 19.4.1 HALF-BRIDGE MODE In Half-Bridge mode, two pins are used as outputs to drive push-pull loads. The PWM output signal is output on the PxA pin, while the complementary PWM output signal is output on the PxB pin (see Figure 19-6). This mode can be used for half-bridge applications, as shown in Figure 19-7, or for full-bridge applications, where four power switches are being modulated with two PWM signals. Since the PxA and PxB outputs are multiplexed with the port data latches, the associated TRIS bits must be cleared to configure PxA and PxB as outputs. FIGURE 19-6: Period Period Pulse Width In Half-Bridge mode, the programmable dead-band delay can be used to prevent shoot-through current in half-bridge power devices. The value of the PxDC<6:0> bits of the ECCPxDEL register sets the number of instruction cycles before the output is driven active. If the value is greater than the duty cycle, the corresponding output remains inactive during the entire cycle. For more details on the dead-band delay operations, see Section 19.4.6 “Programmable Dead-Band Delay Mode”. PxA(2) td td PxB(2) (1) (1) (1) td = Dead-Band Delay At this time, the TMR2 register is equal to the PR2 register. Note 1: Output signals are shown as active-high. 2: FIGURE 19-7: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE APPLICATIONS Standard Half-Bridge Circuit (“Push-Pull”) FET Driver + PxA Load FET Driver + PxB - Half-Bridge Output Driving a Full-Bridge Circuit V+ FET Driver FET Driver PxA FET Driver Load FET Driver PxB DS39974A-page 278 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 19.4.2 FULL-BRIDGE MODE In the Reverse mode, the PxC pin is driven to its active state and the PxB pin is modulated, while the PxA and PxD pins are driven to their inactive state, as shown in Figure 19-9. In Full-Bridge mode, all four pins are used as outputs. An example of a full-bridge application is provided in Figure 19-8. The PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD outputs are multiplexed with the port data latches. The associated TRIS bits must be cleared to configure the PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD pins as outputs. In the Forward mode, the PxA pin is driven to its active state and the PxD pin is modulated, while the PxB and PxC pins are driven to their inactive state, as shown in Figure 19-9. FIGURE 19-8: EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE APPLICATION V+ FET Driver QC QA FET Driver PxA Load PxB FET Driver PxC FET Driver QD QB VPxD 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 279 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 19-9: EXAMPLE OF FULL-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT Forward Mode Period PxA (2) Pulse Width PxB(2) PxC(2) PxD(2) (1) (1) Reverse Mode Period Pulse Width PxA(2) PxB(2) PxC(2) PxD(2) (1) Note 1: 2: (1) At this time, the TMR2 register is equal to the PR2 register. The output signal is shown as active-high. DS39974A-page 280 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 19.4.2.1 Direction Change in Full-Bridge Mode In the Full-Bridge mode, the PxM1 bit in the CCPxCON register allows users to control the forward/reverse direction. When the application firmware changes this direction control bit, the module will change to the new direction on the next PWM cycle. A direction change is initiated in software by changing the PxM1 bit of the CCPxCON register. The following sequence occurs prior to the end of the current PWM period: • The modulated outputs (PxB and PxD) are placed in their inactive state. • The associated unmodulated outputs (PxA and PxC) are switched to drive in the opposite direction. • PWM modulation resumes at the beginning of the next period. For an illustration of this sequence, see Figure 19-10. Figure 19-11 shows an example of the PWM direction changing from forward to reverse at a near 100% duty cycle. In this example, at time t1, the PxA and PxD outputs become inactive, while the PxC output becomes active. Since the turn-off time of the power devices is longer than the turn-on time, a shoot-through current will flow through power devices, QC and QD (see Figure 19-8), for the duration of ‘t’. The same phenomenon will occur to power devices, QA and QB, for PWM direction change from reverse to forward. If changing PWM direction at high duty cycle is required for an application, two possible solutions for eliminating the shoot-through current are: • Reduce PWM duty cycle for one PWM period before changing directions. • Use switch drivers that can drive the switches off faster than they can drive them on. Other options to prevent shoot-through current may exist. The Full-Bridge mode does not provide a dead-band delay. As one output is modulated at a time, a dead-band delay is generally not required. There is a situation where a dead-band delay is required. This situation occurs when both of the following conditions are true: • The direction of the PWM output changes when the duty cycle of the output is at or near 100%. • The turn-off time of the power switch, including the power device and driver circuit, is greater than the turn-on time. FIGURE 19-10: EXAMPLE OF PWM DIRECTION CHANGE Period(1) Signal Period PxA (Active-High) PxB (Active-High) Pulse Width PxC (Active-High) (2) PxD (Active-High) Pulse Width Note 1: 2: The direction bit, PxM1 of the CCPxCON register, is written any time during the PWM cycle. When changing directions, the PxA and PxC signals switch before the end of the current PWM cycle. The modulated PxB and PxD signals are inactive at this time. The length of this time is: (1/FOSC) • TMR2 Prescale Value. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 281 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 19-11: EXAMPLE OF PWM DIRECTION CHANGE AT NEAR 100% DUTY CYCLE Forward Period t1 Reverse Period PxA PxB PW PxC PxD PW TON External Switch C TOFF External Switch D Potential Shoot-Through Current Note 1: 19.4.3 T = TOFF – TON All signals are shown as active-high. 2: TON is the turn-on delay of power switch, QC, and its driver. 3: TOFF is the turn-off delay of power switch, QD, and its driver. START-UP CONSIDERATIONS When any PWM mode is used, the application hardware must use the proper external pull-up and/or pull-down resistors on the PWM output pins. Note: When the microcontroller is released from Reset, all of the I/O pins are in the high-impedance state. The external circuits must keep the power switch devices in the OFF state until the microcontroller drives the I/O pins with the proper signal levels or activates the PWM output(s). pin output drivers. The completion of a full PWM cycle is indicated by the TMR2IF or TMR4IF bit of the PIR1 or PIR3 register being set as the second PWM period begins. 19.4.4 ENHANCED PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN MODE The PWM mode supports an Auto-Shutdown mode that will disable the PWM outputs when an external shutdown event occurs. Auto-Shutdown mode places the PWM output pins into a predetermined state. This mode is used to help prevent the PWM from damaging the application. The CCPxM<1:0> bits of the CCPxCON register allow the user to choose whether the PWM output signals are active-high or active-low for each pair of PWM output pins (PxA/PxC and PxB/PxD). The PWM output polarities must be selected before the PWM pin output drivers are enabled. Changing the polarity configuration while the PWM pin output drivers are enabled is not recommended, since it may result in damage to the application circuits. The auto-shutdown sources are selected using the ECCPxAS<2:0> bits (ECCPxAS<6:4>). A shutdown event may be generated by: The PxA, PxB, PxC and PxD output latches may not be in the proper states when the PWM module is initialized. Enabling the PWM pin output drivers at the same time as the Enhanced PWM modes may cause damage to the application circuit. The Enhanced PWM modes must be enabled in the proper Output mode and complete a full PWM cycle before enabling the PWM A shutdown condition is indicated by the ECCPxASE (Auto-Shutdown Event Status) bit (ECCPxAS<7>). If the bit is a ‘0’, the PWM pins are operating normally. If the bit is a ‘1’, the PWM outputs are in the shutdown state. DS39974A-page 282 • A logic ‘0’ on the pin that is assigned to the FLT0 input function • Comparator C1 • Comparator C2 • Setting the ECCPxASE bit in firmware Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY When a shutdown event occurs, two things happen: • The ECCPxASE bit is set to ‘1’. The ECCPxASE will remain set until cleared in firmware or an auto-restart occurs. (See Section 19.4.5 “Auto-Restart Mode”.) • The enabled PWM pins are asynchronously placed in their shutdown states. The PWM output pins are grouped into pairs (PxA/PxC and REGISTER 19-3: PxB/PxD). The state of each pin pair is determined by the PSSxAC and PSSxBD bits (ECCPxAS<3:0>). Each pin pair may be placed into one of three states: • Drive logic ‘1’ • Drive logic ‘0’ • Tri-state (high-impedance) ECCPxAS: ECCP1/2/3 AUTO-SHUTDOWN CONTROL REGISTER (1, ACCESS FBEh; 2, FB8h; 3, BANKED F19h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ECCPxASE ECCPxAS2 ECCPxAS1 ECCPxAS0 PSSxAC1 PSSxAC0 PSSxBD1 PSSxBD0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ECCPxASE: ECCP Auto-Shutdown Event Status bit 1 = A shutdown event has occurred; ECCP outputs are in a shutdown state 0 = ECCP outputs are operating bit 6-4 ECCPxAS<2:0>: ECCP Auto-Shutdown Source Select bits 000 = Auto-shutdown is disabled 001 = Comparator, C1OUT, output is high 010 = Comparator, C2OUT, output is high 011 = Either comparator, C1OUT or C2OUT, is high 100 = VIL on FLT0 pin 101 = VIL on FLT0 pin or comparator, C1OUT, output is high 110 = VIL on FLT0 pin or comparator, C2OUT, output is high 111 = VIL on FLT0 pin or comparator, C1OUT, or comparator, C2OUT, is high bit 3-2 PSSxAC<1:0>: PxA and PxC Pins Shutdown State Control bits 00 = Drive pins, PxA and PxC, to ‘0’ 01 = Drive pins, PxA and PxC, to ‘1’ 1x = PxA and PxC pins tri-state bit 1-0 PSSxBD<1:0>: PxB and PxD Pins Shutdown State Control bits 00 = Drive pins, PxB and PxD, to ‘0’ 01 = Drive pins, PxB and PxD, to ‘1’ 1x = PxB and PxD pins tri-state Note 1: The auto-shutdown condition is a level-based signal, not an edge-based signal. As long as the level is present, the auto-shutdown will persist. 2: Writing to the ECCPxASE bit is disabled while an auto-shutdown condition persists. 3: Once the auto-shutdown condition has been removed and the PWM restarted (either through firmware or auto-restart), the PWM signal will always restart at the beginning of the next PWM period. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 283 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 19-12: PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN WITH FIRMWARE RESTART (PxRSEN = 0) PWM Period Shutdown Event ECCPxASE bit PWM Activity Normal PWM Start of PWM Period 19.4.5 Shutdown Event Occurs AUTO-RESTART MODE The Enhanced PWM can be configured to automatically restart the PWM signal once the auto-shutdown condition has been removed. Auto-restart is enabled by setting the PxRSEN bit (ECCPxDEL<7>). Shutdown Event Clears ECCPxASE Cleared by Firmware PWM Resumes The module will wait until the next PWM period begins, however, before re-enabling the output pin. This behavior allows the auto-shutdown with auto-restart features to be used in applications based on the current mode of PWM control. If auto-restart is enabled, the ECCPxASE bit will remain set as long as the auto-shutdown condition is active. When the auto-shutdown condition is removed, the ECCPxASE bit will be cleared via hardware and normal operation will resume. FIGURE 19-13: PWM AUTO-SHUTDOWN WITH AUTO-RESTART ENABLED (PxRSEN = 1) PWM Period Shutdown Event ECCPxASE bit PWM Activity Normal PWM Start of PWM Period DS39974A-page 284 Shutdown Event Occurs Preliminary Shutdown Event Clears PWM Resumes 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 19.4.6 PROGRAMMABLE DEAD-BAND DELAY MODE FIGURE 19-14: In half-bridge applications, where all power switches are modulated at the PWM frequency, the power switches normally require more time to turn off than to turn on. If both the upper and lower power switches are switched at the same time (one turned on and the other turned off), both switches may be on for a short period until one switch completely turns off. During this brief interval, a very high current (shoot-through current) will flow through both power switches, shorting the bridge supply. To avoid this potentially destructive shoot-through current from flowing during switching, turning on either of the power switches is normally delayed to allow the other switch to completely turn off. In Half-Bridge mode, a digitally programmable, dead-band delay is available to avoid shoot-through current from destroying the bridge power switches. The delay occurs at the signal transition from the non-active state to the active state. For an illustration, see Figure 19-14. The lower seven bits of the associated ECCPxDEL register (Register 19-4) set the delay period in terms of microcontroller instruction cycles (TCY or 4 TOSC). FIGURE 19-15: EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE PWM OUTPUT Period Period Pulse Width (2) PxA td td PxB(2) (1) (1) (1) td = Dead-Band Delay Note 1: 2: At this time, the TMR2 register is equal to the PR2 register. Output signals are shown as active-high. EXAMPLE OF HALF-BRIDGE APPLICATIONS V+ Standard Half-Bridge Circuit (“Push-Pull”) FET Driver + V - PxA Load FET Driver + V - PxB V- 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 285 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 19-4: ECCPxDEL: ECCP1/2/3 ENHANCED PWM CONTROL REGISTER (1, ACCESS FBDh; 2, FB7h; 3, BANKED F18h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PxRSEN PxDC6 PxDC5 PxDC4 PxDC3 PxDC2 PxDC1 PxDC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 PxRSEN: PWM Restart Enable bit 1 = Upon auto-shutdown, the ECCPxASE bit clears automatically once the shutdown event goes away; the PWM restarts automatically 0 = Upon auto-shutdown, ECCPxASE must be cleared by software to restart the PWM bit 6-0 PxDC<6:0>: PWM Delay Count bits PxDCn = Number of FOSC/4 (4 * TOSC) cycles between the scheduled time when a PWM signal should transition active and the actual time it does transition active. 19.4.7 PULSE STEERING MODE In Single Output mode, pulse steering allows any of the PWM pins to be the modulated signal. Additionally, the same PWM signal can simultaneously be available on multiple pins. Once the Single Output mode is selected (CCPxM<3:2> = 11 and PxM<1:0> = 00 of the CCPxCON register), the user firmware can bring out the same PWM signal to one, two, three or four output pins by setting the appropriate STR<D:A> bits (PSTRxCON<3:0>), as provided in Table 19-3. Note: While the PWM Steering mode is active, the CCPxM<1:0> bits (CCPxCON<1:0>) select the PWM output polarity for the Px<D:A> pins. The PWM auto-shutdown operation also applies to PWM Steering mode, as described in Section 19.4.4 “Enhanced PWM Auto-Shutdown Mode”. An auto-shutdown event will only affect pins that have PWM outputs enabled. The associated TRIS bits must be set to output (‘0’), to enable the pin output driver, in order to see the PWM signal on the pin. DS39974A-page 286 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 19-5: R/W-0 CMPL1 PSTRxCON: PULSE STEERING CONTROL (1, ACCESS FBFh; 2, FB9h; 3, BANKED F1Ah)(1) R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 CMPL0 — STRSYNC STRD STRC STRB STRA bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 CMPL<1:0>: Complementary Mode Output Assignment Steering Sync bits 1 = Modulated output pin toggles between PxA and PxB for each period 0 = Complementary output assignment is disabled; the STRD:STRA bits are used to determine Steering mode bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4 STRSYNC: Steering Sync bit 1 = Output steering update occurs on the next PWM period 0 = Output steering update occurs at the beginning of the instruction cycle boundary bit 3 STRD: Steering Enable D bit 1 = PxD pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0> 0 = PxD pin is assigned to a port pin bit 2 STRC: Steering Enable C bit 1 = PxC pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0> 0 = PxC pin is assigned to a port pin bit 1 STRB: Steering Enable B bit 1 = PxB pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0> 0 = PxB pin is assigned to a port pin bit 0 STRA: Steering Enable A bit 1 = PxA pin has the PWM waveform with polarity control from CCPxM<1:0> 0 = PxA pin is assigned to a port pin Note 1: The PWM Steering mode is available only when the CCPxCON register bits, CCPxM<3:2> = 11 and PxM<1:0> = 00. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 287 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 19-16: 19.4.7.1 SIMPLIFIED STEERING BLOCK DIAGRAM The STRSYNC bit of the PSTRxCON register gives the user two choices for when the steering event will happen. When the STRSYNC bit is ‘0’, the steering event will happen at the end of the instruction that writes to the PSTRxCON register. In this case, the output signal at the Px<D:A> pins may be an incomplete PWM waveform. This operation is useful when the user firmware needs to immediately remove a PWM signal from the pin. STRA(2) PxA Signal CCPxM1 1 PORT Data(1) 0 Output Pin TRIS STRB(2) CCPxM0 1 Data(1) 0 PORT Output Pin CCPxM1 1 PORT Data(1) 0 STRD PORT Data(1) Figure 19-17 and Figure 19-18 illustrate the timing diagrams of the PWM steering depending on the STRSYNC setting. Output Pin TRIS (2) CCPxM0 When the STRSYNC bit is ‘1’, the effective steering update will happen at the beginning of the next PWM period. In this case, steering on/off the PWM output will always produce a complete PWM waveform. TRIS STRC(2) Steering Synchronization Output Pin 1 0 TRIS Port outputs are configured as displayed when the CCPxCON register bits, PxM<1:0> = 00 and CCP1M<3:2> = 11. Single PWM output requires setting at least one of the STR<D:A> bits. Note 1: 2: FIGURE 19-17: EXAMPLE OF STEERING EVENT AT END OF INSTRUCTION (STRSYNC = 0) PWM Period PWM STRn P1<D:A> PORT Data PORT Data P1n = PWM FIGURE 19-18: EXAMPLE OF STEERING EVENT AT BEGINNING OF INSTRUCTION (STRSYNC = 1) PWM STRn P1<D:A> PORT Data PORT Data P1n = PWM DS39974A-page 288 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 19.4.8 OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED MODES will be set. The ECCPx will then be clocked from the internal oscillator clock source, which may have a different clock frequency than the primary clock. In Sleep mode, all clock sources are disabled. Timer2 will not increment and the state of the module will not change. If the ECCPx pin is driving a value, it will continue to drive that value. When the device wakes up, it will continue from this state. If Two-Speed Start-ups are enabled, the initial start-up frequency from HFINTOSC and the postscaler may not be immediately stable. 19.4.9 This forces the ECCP module to reset to a state compatible with previous, non-enhanced CCP modules used on other PIC18 and PIC16 devices. In PRI_IDLE mode, the primary clock will continue to clock the ECCPx module without change. 19.4.8.1 EFFECTS OF A RESET Both Power-on Reset and subsequent Resets will force all ports to Input mode and the ECCP registers to their Reset states. Operation with Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) If the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) is enabled, a clock failure will force the device into the power-managed RC_RUN mode and the OSCFIF bit of the PIR2 register TABLE 19-4: File Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ECCP1/2/3 MODULE AND TIMER1/2/3/4/6/8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF RCON PIR1 PIR2 IPEN PMPIF OSCFIF CCP10IF PMPIE OSCFIE CCP10IE PMPIP OSCFIP CCP10IP TRISB7 TRISC7 — ADIF CM2IF CCP9IF ADIE CM2IE CCP9IE ADIP CM2IP CCP9IP TRISB6 TRISC6 CM RC1IF CM1IF CCP8IF RC1IE CM1IE CCP8IE RC1IP CM1IP CCP8IP TRISB5 — RI TX1IF — CCP7IF TX1IE — CCP7IE TX1IP — CCP7IP TRISB4 — TO SSP1IF BCL1IF CCP6IF SSP1IE BCL1IE CCP6IE SSP1IP BCL1IP CCP6IP TRISB3 — PD CCP1IF HLVDIF CCP5IF CCP1IE HLVDIE CCP5IE CCP1IP HLVDIP CCP5IP TRISB2 TRISC2 POR TMR2IF TMR3IF CCP4IF TMR2IE TMR3IE CCP4IE TMR2IP TMR3IP CCP4IP TRISB1 TRISC1 BOR TMR1IF CCP2IF CCP3IF TMR1IE CCP2IE CCP3IE TMR1IP CCP2IP CCP3IP TRISB0 TRISC0 — — — TRISE2 TRISE1 TRISE0 PIR4 PIE1 PIE2 PIE4 IPR1 IPR2 IPR4 TRISB TRISC TRISE TMR1H TMR1L TMR2 TMR3H TMR3L TMR4 TMR6 TMR8 PR2 PR4 PR6 PR8 REPU RDPU Timer1 Register High Byte Timer1 Register Low Byte Timer2 Register Timer3 Register High Byte Timer3 Register Low Byte Timer4 Register Timer6 Register Timer8 Register Timer2 Period Register Timer4 Period Register Timer6 Period Register Timer8 Period Register T1CON T2CON TMR1CS1 — TMR1CS0 T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 T1SYNC TMR2ON RD16 T2CKPS1 TMR1ON T2CKPS0 T3CON T4CON T6CON TMR3CS1 — — TMR3CS0 T3CKPS1 T4OUTPS3 T4OUTPS2 T6OUTPS3 T6OUTPS2 T3SYNC TMR4ON TMR6ON RD16 T4CKPS1 T6CKPS1 TMR3ON T4CKPS0 T6CKPS0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. T3CKPS0 T3OSCEN T4OUTPS1 T4OUTPS0 T6OUTPS1 T6OUTPS0 Preliminary DS39974A-page 289 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 19-4: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ECCP1/2/3 MODULE AND TIMER1/2/3/4/6/8 (CONTINUED) File Name Bit 7 T8CON CCPR1H CCPR1L CCPR2H CCPR2L CCPR3H CCPR3L CCP1CON CCP2CON CCP3CON — Bit 6 Bit 5 T8OUTPS3 T8OUTPS2 Bit 4 T8OUTPS1 T8OUTPS0 Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 High Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 2 Low Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 3 High Byte Capture/Compare/PWM Register 3 Low Byte P1M1 P1M0 DC1B1 DC1B0 P2M1 P2M0 DC2B1 DC2B0 P3M1 P3M0 DC3B1 DC3B0 DS39974A-page 290 Bit 3 Preliminary CCP1M3 CCP2M3 CCP3M3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TMR8ON T8CKPS1 T8CKPS0 CCP1M2 CCP2M2 CCP3M2 CCP1M1 CCP2M1 CCP3M1 CCP1M0 CCP2M0 CCP3M0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.0 All of the MSSP1 module related SPI and I2C I/O functions are hard-mapped to specific I/O pins. MASTER SYNCHRONOUS SERIAL PORT (MSSP) MODULE For MSSP2 functions: The Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) module is a serial interface, useful for communicating with other peripheral or microcontroller devices. These peripheral devices include serial EEPROMs, shift registers, display drivers and A/D Converters. 20.1 Master SSP (MSSP) Module Overview The MSSP module can operate in one of two modes: • Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) • Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C™) - Full Master mode - Slave mode (with general address call) • SPI I/O functions (SDO2, SDI2, SCK2 and SS2) are all routed through the Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) module. These functions may be configured to use any of the RPn remappable pins, as described in Section 10.7 “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS)”. • I2C functions (SCL2 and SDA2) have fixed pin locations. On all PIC18F47J13 family devices, the SPI DMA capability can only be used in conjunction with MSSP2. The SPI DMA feature is described in Section 20.4 “SPI DMA Module”. Note: The I2C interface supports the following modes in hardware: • Master mode • Multi-Master mode • Slave mode with 5-bit and 7-bit address masking (with address masking for both 10-bit and 7-bit addressing) Throughout this section, generic references to an MSSP module in any of its operating modes may be interpreted as being equally applicable to MSSP1 or MSSP2. Register names and module I/O signals use the generic designator ‘x’ to indicate the use of a numeral to distinguish a particular module when required. Control bit names are not individuated. All members of the PIC18F47J13 family have two MSSP modules, designated as MSSP1 and MSSP2. The modules operate independently: • PIC18F4XJ13 devices – Both modules can be configured for either I2C or SPI communication • PIC18F2XJ13 devices: - MSSP1 can be used for either I2C or SPI communication - MSSP2 can be used only for SPI communication 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 291 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.2 FIGURE 20-1: Control Registers Each MSSP module has three associated control registers. These include a status register (SSPxSTAT) and two control registers (SSPxCON1 and SSPxCON2). The use of these registers and their individual Configuration bits differs significantly depending on whether the MSSP module is operated in SPI or I2C mode. Internal Data Bus Read 20.3 SDIx In devices with more than one MSSP module, it is very important to pay close attention to the SSPxCON register names. SSP1CON1 and SSP1CON2 control different operational aspects of the same module, while SSP1CON1 and SSP2CON1 control the same features for two different modules. SSPxSR reg SDOx SSx SPI Mode To accomplish communication, typically three pins are used: • Serial Data Out (SDOx) – RC5/SDO1/RP16 or SDO2/Remappable • Serial Data In (SDIx) – RC4/SDI1/SDA1/RP15 or SDI2/Remappable • Serial Clock (SCKx) – RC3/SCK1/SCL1/RP14 or SCK2/Remappable Shift Clock bit 0 SSx Control Enable Edge Select The SPI mode allows 8 bits of data to be synchronously transmitted and received simultaneously. All four modes of SPI are supported. When MSSP2 is used in SPI mode, it can optionally be configured to work with the SPI DMA submodule described in Section 20.4 “SPI DMA Module”. Write SSPxBUF reg Additional details are provided under the individual sections. Note: MSSPx BLOCK DIAGRAM (SPI MODE) 2 Clock Select SCKx SSPM<3:0> SMP:CKE 4 (TMR2 Output 2 2 ) Edge Select Prescaler TOSC 4, 8, 16, 64 Data to TXx/RXx in SSPxSR TRIS bit Note: Only port I/O names are used in this diagram for the sake of brevity. Refer to the text for a full list of multiplexed functions. Additionally, a fourth pin may be used when in a Slave mode of operation: • Slave Select (SSx) – RA5/AN4/C1INC/SS1/ HLVDIN/RP2 or SS2/Remappable Figure 20-1 depicts the block diagram of the MSSP module when operating in SPI mode. DS39974A-page 292 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.3.1 REGISTERS In receive operations, SSPxSR and SSPxBUF together, create a double-buffered receiver. When SSPxSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPxBUF and the SSPxIF interrupt is set. Each MSSP module has four registers for SPI mode operation. These are: • MSSPx Control Register 1 (SSPxCON1) • MSSPx Status Register (SSPxSTAT) • Serial Receive/Transmit Buffer Register (SSPxBUF) • MSSPx Shift Register (SSPxSR) – Not directly accessible During transmission, the SSPxBUF is not double-buffered. A write to SSPxBUF will write to both SSPxBUF and SSPxSR. Note: SSPxCON1 and SSPxSTAT are the control and status registers in SPI mode operation. The SSPxCON1 register is readable and writable. The lower six bits of the SSPxSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPxSTAT are read/write. Similarly, when debugging under an in-circuit debugger, performing actions that cause reads of SSPxBUF (mouse hovering, watch, etc.) can consume data that the application code was expecting to receive. SSPxSR is the shift register used for shifting data in or out. SSPxBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written to or read from. REGISTER 20-1: R/W-1 SMP Because the SSPxBUF register is double-buffered, using read-modify-write instructions such as BCF, COMF, etc., will not work. SSPxSTAT: MSSPx STATUS REGISTER (SPI MODE) (ACCESS 1, FC7h; 2, F73h) R/W-1 R-1 R-1 R-1 R-1 R-1 R-1 (1) D/A P S R/W UA BF CKE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SMP: Sample bit SPI Master mode: 1 = Input data sampled at the end of data output time 0 = Input data sampled at the middle of data output time SPI Slave mode: SMP must be cleared when SPI is used in Slave mode. bit 6 CKE: SPI Clock Select bit(1) 1 = Transmit occurs on transition from active to Idle clock state 0 = Transmit occurs on transition from Idle to active clock state bit 5 D/A: Data/Address bit Used in I2C™ mode only. bit 4 P: Stop bit Used in I2C mode only; this bit is cleared when the MSSP module is disabled, SSPEN is cleared. bit 3 S: Start bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 2 R/W: Read/Write Information bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 1 UA: Update Address bit Used in I2C mode only. bit 0 BF: Buffer Full Status bit 1 = Receive complete, SSPxBUF is full 0 = Receive not complete, SSPxBUF is empty Note 1: Polarity of the clock state is set by the CKP bit (SSPxCON1<4>). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 293 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 20-2: R/W-0 WCOL SSPxCON1: MSSPx CONTROL REGISTER 1 (SPI MODE) (1, ACCESS FC6h; 2, F72h) R/C-0 (1) SSPOV R/W-0 (2) SSPEN R/W-0 CKP R/W-0 SSPM3 (3) R/W-0 SSPM2 (3) R/W-0 SSPM1 (3) R/W-0 SSPM0(3) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: C = Clearable bit R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 WCOL: Write Collision Detect bit 1 = The SSPxBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared in software) 0 = No collision bit 6 SSPOV: Receive Overflow Indicator bit(1) SPI Slave mode: 1 = A new byte is received while the SSPxBUF register is still holding the previous data. In case of overflow, the data in SSPxSR is lost. Overflow can only occur in Slave mode. The user must read the SSPxBUF, even if only transmitting data, to avoid setting overflow (must be cleared in software). 0 = No overflow bit 5 SSPEN: Master Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit(2) 1 = Enables serial port and configures SCKx, SDOx, SDIx and SSx as serial port pins 0 = Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins bit 4 CKP: Clock Polarity Select bit 1 = Idle state for clock is a high level 0 = Idle state for clock is a low level bit 3-0 SSPM<3:0>: Master Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits(3) 0101 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCKx pin; SSx pin control disabled, SSx can be used as I/O pin 0100 = SPI Slave mode, clock = SCKx pin; SSx pin control enabled 0011 = SPI Master mode, clock = TMR2 output/2 0010 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/64 0001 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/16 1010 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/8 0000 = SPI Master mode, clock = FOSC/4 Note 1: 2: 3: In Master mode, the overflow bit is not set since each new reception (and transmission) is initiated by writing to the SSPxBUF register. When enabled, this pin must be properly configured as input or output. Bit combinations not specifically listed here are either reserved or implemented in I2C™ mode only. DS39974A-page 294 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.3.2 OPERATION When initializing the SPI, several options need to be specified. This is done by programming the appropriate control bits (SSPxCON1<5:0> and SSPxSTAT<7:6>). These control bits allow the following to be specified: • • • • Master mode (SCKx is the clock output) Slave mode (SCKx is the clock input) Clock Polarity (Idle state of SCKx) Data Input Sample Phase (middle or end of data output time) • Clock Edge (output data on rising/falling edge of SCKx) • Clock Rate (Master mode only) • Slave Select mode (Slave mode only) The Buffer Full bit, BF (SSPxSTAT<0>), indicates when SSPxBUF has been loaded with the received data (transmission is complete). When the SSPxBUF is read, the BF bit is cleared. This data may be irrelevant if the SPI is only a transmitter. Generally, the MSSP interrupt is used to determine when the transmission/reception has completed. If the interrupt method is not going to be used, then software polling can be done to ensure that a write collision does not occur. Example 20-1 provides the loading of the SSPxBUF (SSPxSR) for data transmission. The SSPxSR is not directly readable or writable and can only be accessed by addressing the SSPxBUF register. Additionally, the SSPxSTAT register indicates the various status conditions. Each MSSP module consists of a Transmit/Receive Shift register (SSPxSR) and a Buffer register (SSPxBUF). The SSPxSR shifts the data in and out of the device, MSb first. The SSPxBUF holds the data that was written to the SSPxSR until the received data is ready. Once the 8 bits of data have been received, that byte is moved to the SSPxBUF register. Then, the Buffer Full (BF) detect bit (SSPxSTAT<0>) and the interrupt flag bit, SSPxIF, are set. This double-buffering of the received data (SSPxBUF) allows the next byte to start reception before reading the data that was just received. 20.3.3 Any write to the SSPxBUF register during transmission or reception of data will be ignored and the Write Collision Detect bit, WCOL (SSPxCON1<7>), will be set. User software must clear the WCOL bit so that it can be determined if the following write(s) to the SSPxBUF register completed successfully. The open-drain output option is controlled by the SPI2OD and SPI1OD bits (ODCON3<1:0>). Setting an SPIxOD bit configures both the SDOx and SCKx pins for the corresponding open-drain operation. Note: The drivers for the SDOx output and SCKx clock pins can be optionally configured as open-drain outputs. This feature allows the voltage level on the pin to be pulled to a higher level through an external pull-up resistor, provided the SDOx or SCKx pin is not multiplexed with an ANx analog function. This allows the output to communicate with external circuits without the need for additional level shifters. For more information, see Section 10.1.4 “Open-Drain Outputs”. When the application software is expecting to receive valid data, the SSPxBUF should be read before the next byte of transfer data is written to the SSPxBUF. Application software should follow this process even when the current contents of SSPxBUF are not important. EXAMPLE 20-1: LOOP OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT OPTION LOADING THE SSP1BUF (SSP1SR) REGISTER BTFSS BRA MOVF SSP1STAT, BF LOOP SSP1BUF, W ;Has data been received (transmit complete)? ;No ;WREG reg = contents of SSP1BUF MOVWF RXDATA ;Save in user RAM, if data is meaningful MOVF MOVWF TXDATA, W SSP1BUF ;W reg = contents of TXDATA ;New data to xmit 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 295 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.3.4 ENABLING SPI I/O To enable the serial port, MSSP Enable bit, SSPEN (SSPxCON1<5>), must be set. To reset or reconfigure SPI mode, clear the SSPEN bit, re-initialize the SSPxCON1 registers and then set the SSPEN bit. This configures the SDIx, SDOx, SCKx and SSx pins as serial port pins. For the pins to behave as the serial port function, the appropriate TRISx bits, PCFGx bits and Peripheral Pin Select registers (if using MSSP2) should be correctly initialized prior to setting the SSPEN bit. Any MSSP1 serial port function that is not desired may be overridden by programming the corresponding Data Direction (TRIS) register to the opposite value. If individual MSSP2 serial port functions will not be used, they may be left unmapped. Note: A typical SPI serial port initialization process follows: • Initialize the ODCON3 register (optional open-drain output control) • Initialize the remappable pin functions (if using MSSP2, see Section 10.7 “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS)”) • Initialize the SCKx/LAT value to the desired Idle SCKx level (if master device) • Initialize the SCKx/PCFGx bit (if in Slave mode and multiplexed with the ANx function) • Initialize the SCKx/TRISx bit as an output (Master mode) or input (Slave mode) • Initialize the SDIx/PCFGx bit (if SDIx is multiplexed with the ANx function) • Initialize the SDIx/TRISx bit • Initialize the SSx/PCFG bit (if in Slave mode and multiplexed with the ANx function) • Initialize the SSx/TRISx bit (Slave modes) • Initialize the SDOx/TRISx bit • Initialize the SSPxSTAT register • Initialize the SSPxCON1 register • Set the SSPEN bit to enable the module FIGURE 20-2: 20.3.5 When MSSP2 is used in SPI Master mode, the SCK2 function must be configured as both an output and an input in the PPS module. SCK2 must be initialized as an output pin (by writing 0x0A to one of the RPORx registers). Additionally, SCK2IN must also be mapped to the same pin by initializing the RPINR22 register. Failure to initialize SCK2/SCK2IN as both output and input will prevent the module from receiving data on the SDI2 pin, as the module uses the SCK2IN signal to latch the received data. TYPICAL CONNECTION Figure 20-2 illustrates a typical connection between two microcontrollers. The master controller (Processor 1) initiates the data transfer by sending the SCKx signal. Data is shifted out of both shift registers on their programmed clock edge and latched on the opposite edge of the clock. Both processors should be programmed to the same Clock Polarity (CKP), then both controllers would send and receive data at the same time. Whether the data is meaningful (or dummy data) depends on the application software. This leads to three scenarios for data transmission: • Master sends valid data–Slave sends dummy data • Master sends valid data–Slave sends valid data • Master sends dummy data–Slave sends valid data SPI MASTER/SLAVE CONNECTION SPI Master SSPM<3:0> = 00xxb SPI Slave SSPM<3:0> = 010xb SDOx SDIx Serial Input Buffer (SSPxBUF) SDIx Shift Register (SSPxSR) MSb Serial Input Buffer (SSPxBUF) SDOx LSb MSb SCKx Serial Clock PROCESSOR 1 DS39974A-page 296 Shift Register (SSPxSR) LSb SCKx PROCESSOR 2 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.3.6 MASTER MODE The master can initiate the data transfer at any time because it controls the SCKx. The master determines when the slave (Processor 2, Figure 20-2) is to broadcast data by the software protocol. In Master mode, the data is transmitted/received as soon as the SSPxBUF register is written to. If the SPI is only going to receive, the SDOx output could be disabled (programmed as an input). The SSPxSR register will continue to shift in the signal present on the SDIx pin at the programmed clock rate. As each byte is received, it will be loaded into the SSPxBUF register as if it is a normal received byte (interrupts and status bits are appropriately set). This could be useful in receiver applications as a “Line Activity Monitor” mode. Note: To avoid lost data in Master mode, a read of the SSPxBUF must be performed to clear the Buffer Full (BF) detect bit (SSPxSTAT<0>) between each transmission. Figure 20-3, Figure 20-5 and Figure 20-6, where the Most Significant Byte (MSB) is transmitted first. In Master mode, the SPI clock rate (bit rate) is user-programmable to be one of the following: • • • • • FOSC/4 (or TCY) FOSC/8 (or 2 • TCY) FOSC/16 (or 4 • TCY) FOSC/64 (or 16 • TCY) Timer2 output/2 When using the Timer2 output/2 option, the Period Register 2 (PR2) can be used to determine the SPI bit rate. However, only PR2 values of 0x01 to 0xFF are valid in this mode. Figure 20-3 illustrates the waveforms for Master mode. When the CKE bit is set, the SDOx data is valid before there is a clock edge on SCKx. The change of the input sample is shown based on the state of the SMP bit. The time when the SSPxBUF is loaded with the received data is shown. The CKP is selected by appropriately programming the CKP bit (SSPxCON1<4>). This then, would give waveforms for SPI communication, as illustrated in FIGURE 20-3: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (MASTER MODE) Write to SSPxBUF SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) 4 Clock Modes SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 1) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 1) SDOx (CKE = 0) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SDOx (CKE = 1) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SDIx (SMP = 0) bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 0) SDIx (SMP = 1) bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 1) SSPxIF Next Q4 Cycle after Q2 SSPxSR to SSPxBUF 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 297 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.3.7 SLAVE MODE In Slave mode, the data is transmitted and received as the external clock pulses appear on SCKx. When the last bit is latched, the SSPxIF interrupt flag bit is set. transmitted byte and becomes a floating output. External pull-up/pull-down resistors may be desirable depending on the application. While in Slave mode, the external clock is supplied by the external clock source on the SCKx pin. This external clock must meet the minimum high and low times as specified in the electrical specifications. Note 1: When the SPI is in Slave mode with pin control enabled the SSx (SSPxCON1<3:0> = 0100), the SPI module will reset if the SSx pin is set to VDD. While in Sleep mode, the slave can transmit/receive data. When a byte is received, the device can be configured to wake-up from Sleep. 2: If the SPI is used in Slave mode with CKE set, then the SSx pin control must be enabled. 20.3.8 When the SPI module resets, the bit counter is forced to ‘0’. This can be done by either forcing the SSx pin to a high level or clearing the SSPEN bit. SLAVE SELECT SYNCHRONIZATION The SSx pin allows a Synchronous Slave mode. The SPI must be in Slave mode with the SSx pin control enabled (SSPxCON1<3:0> = 04h). When the SSx pin is low, transmission and reception are enabled and the SDOx pin is driven. When the SSx pin goes high, the SDOx pin is no longer driven, even if in the middle of a FIGURE 20-4: To emulate two-wire communication, the SDOx pin can be connected to the SDIx pin. When the SPI needs to operate as a receiver, the SDOx pin can be configured as an input. This disables transmissions from the SDOx. The SDIx can always be left as an input (SDIx function) since it cannot create a bus conflict. SLAVE SYNCHRONIZATION WAVEFORM SSx SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) Write to SSPxBUF SDOx SDIx (SMP = 0) bit 7 bit 6 bit 7 bit 0 bit 0 bit 7 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 0) SSPxIF Interrupt Flag Next Q4 Cycle after Q2 SSPxSR to SSPxBUF DS39974A-page 298 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 20-5: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 0) SSx Optional SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) Write to SSPxBUF SDOx bit 7 SDIx (SMP = 0) bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 0) SSPxIF Interrupt Flag Next Q4 Cycle after Q2 SSPxSR to SSPxBUF FIGURE 20-6: SPI MODE WAVEFORM (SLAVE MODE WITH CKE = 1) SSx Not Optional SCKx (CKP = 0 CKE = 1) SCKx (CKP = 1 CKE = 1) Write to SSPxBUF SDOx SDIx (SMP = 0) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 0) SSPxIF Interrupt Flag Next Q4 Cycle after Q2 SSPxSR to SSPxBUF 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 299 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.3.9 OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED MODES In SPI Master mode, module clocks may be operating at a different speed than when in Full-Power mode. In the case of Sleep mode, all clocks are Halted. 20.3.11 BUS MODE COMPATIBILITY Table 20-1 provides the compatibility between the standard SPI modes and the states of the CKP and CKE control bits. In Idle modes, a clock is provided to the peripherals. That clock can be from the primary clock source, the secondary clock (Timer1 oscillator) or the INTOSC source. See Section 3.3 “Clock Sources and Oscillator Switching” for additional information. TABLE 20-1: In most cases, the speed that the master clocks SPI data is not important; however, this should be evaluated for each system. If MSSP interrupts are enabled, they can wake the controller from Sleep mode, or one of the Idle modes, when the master completes sending data. If an exit from Sleep or Idle mode is not desired, MSSP interrupts should be disabled. If the Sleep mode is selected, all module clocks are Halted and the transmission/reception will remain in that state until the device wakes. After the device returns to Run mode, the module will resume transmitting and receiving data. In SPI Slave mode, the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register operates asynchronously to the device. This allows the device to be placed in any power-managed mode and data to be shifted into the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register. When all 8 bits have been received, the MSSPx interrupt flag bit will be set, and if enabled, will wake the device. 20.3.10 SPI BUS MODES Control Bits State Standard SPI Mode Terminology CKP CKE 0, 0 0 1 0, 1 0 0 1, 0 1 1 1, 1 1 0 There is also an SMP bit, which controls when the data is sampled. 20.3.12 SPI CLOCK SPEED AND MODULE INTERACTIONS Because MSSP1 and MSSP2 are independent modules, they can operate simultaneously at different data rates. Setting the SSPM<3:0> bits of the SSPxCON1 register determines the rate for the corresponding module. An exception is when both modules use Timer2 as a time base in Master mode. In this instance, any changes to the Timer2 module’s operation will affect both MSSP modules equally. If different bit rates are required for each module, the user should select one of the other three time base options for one of the modules. EFFECTS OF A RESET A Reset disables the MSSP modules and terminates the current transfer. DS39974A-page 300 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 20-2: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SPI OPERATION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF (2) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF PIE1 PMPIE (2) ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE IPR1 PMPIP(2) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP INTCON PIR1 PMPIF PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCIP TRISB TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 — — — TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 TRISD TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 SSP1BUF SSPxCON1 SSPxSTAT SSP2BUF ODCON3(1) MSSP1 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF — — — SPI2OD SPI1OD MSSP2 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register CTMUDS — — Legend: Shaded cells are not used by the MSSPx module in SPI mode. Note 1: Configuration SFR overlaps with default SFR at this address; available only when WDTCON<4> = 1. 2: These bits are only available on 44-pin devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 301 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.4 20.4.3 SPI DMA MODULE The SPI DMA module contains control logic to allow the MSSP2 module to perform SPI direct memory access transfers. This enables the module to quickly transmit or receive large amounts of data with relatively little CPU intervention. When the SPI DMA module is used, MSSP2 can directly read and write to general purpose SRAM. When the SPI DMA module is not enabled, MSSP2 functions normally, but without DMA capability. The SPI DMA module is composed of control logic, a Destination Receive Address Pointer, a Transmit Source Address Pointer, an interrupt manager and a Byte Count register for setting the size of each DMA transfer. The DMA module may be used with all SPI Master and Slave modes, and supports both half-duplex and full-duplex transfers. 20.4.1 I/O PIN CONSIDERATIONS When enabled, the SPI DMA module uses the MSSP2 module. All SPI input and output signals, related to MSSP2, are routed through the Peripheral Pin Select module. The appropriate initialization procedure, as described in Section 20.4.6 “Using the SPI DMA Module”, will need to be followed prior to using the SPI DMA module. The output pins assigned to the SDO2 and SCK2 functions can optionally be configured as open-drain outputs, such as for level shifting operations mentioned in the same section. 20.4.2 RAM TO RAM COPY OPERATIONS The SPI DMA module remains fully functional when the microcontroller is in Idle mode. During normal Sleep, the SPI DMA module is not functional and should not be used. To avoid corrupting a transfer, user firmware should be careful to make certain that pending DMA operations are complete by polling the DMAEN bit in the DMACON1 register prior to putting the microcontroller into Sleep. In SPI Slave modes, the MSSP2 module is capable of transmitting and/or receiving one byte of data while in Sleep mode. This allows the SSP2IF flag in the PIR3 register to be used as a wake-up source. When the DMAEN bit is cleared, the SPI DMA module is effectively disabled, and the MSSP2 module functions normally, but without DMA capabilities. If the DMAEN bit is clear prior to entering Sleep, it is still possible to use the SSP2IF as a wake-up source without any data loss. Neither MSSP2 nor the SPI DMA module will provide any functionality in Deep Sleep. Upon exiting from Deep Sleep, all of the I/O pins, MSSP2 and SPI DMA related registers will need to be fully re-initialized before the SPI DMA module can be used again. 20.4.4 REGISTERS The SPI DMA engine is enabled and controlled by the following Special Function Registers: Although the SPI DMA module is primarily intended to be used for SPI communication purposes, the module can also be used to perform RAM to RAM copy operations. To do this, configure the module for Full-Duplex Master mode operation, but assign the SDO2 output and SDI2 input functions onto the same RPn pin in the PPS module. Also assign SCK2 out and SCK2 in onto the same RPn pin (a different pin than used for SDO2 and SDI2). This will allow the module to operate in Loopback mode, providing RAM copy capability. DS39974A-page 302 IDLE AND SLEEP CONSIDERATIONS Preliminary • DMACON1 • DMACON2 • TXADDRH • TXADDRL • RXADDRH • RXADDRL • DMABCH • DMABCL 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.4.4.1 DMACON1 The DMACON1 register is used to select the main operating mode of the SPI DMA module. The SSCON1 and SSCON0 bits are used to control the slave select pin. When MSSP2 is used in SPI Master mode with the SPI DMA module, SSDMA can be controlled by the DMA module as an output pin. If MSSP2 will be used to communicate with an SPI slave device that needs the SSx pin to be toggled periodically, the SPI DMA hardware can automatically be used to deassert SSx between each byte, every two bytes or every four bytes. Alternatively, user firmware can manually generate slave select signals with normal general purpose I/O pins, if required by the slave device(s). When the TXINC bit is set, the TXADDR register will automatically increment after each transmitted byte. Automatic transmit address increment can be disabled by clearing the TXINC bit. If the automatic transmit address increment is disabled, each byte which is output on SDO2, will be the same (the contents of the SRAM pointed to by the TXADDR register) for the entire DMA transaction. When the RXINC bit is set, the RXADDR register will automatically increment after each received byte. Automatic receive address increment can be disabled by clearing the RXINC bit. If RXINC is disabled in Full-Duplex or Half-Duplex Receive modes, all incoming data bytes on SDI2 will overwrite the same memory location pointed to by the RXADDR register. After the SPI DMA transaction has completed, the last received byte will reside in the memory location pointed to by the RXADDR register. The SPI DMA module can be used for either half-duplex receive only communication, half-duplex transmit only communication or full-duplex simultaneous transmit and receive operations. All modes are available for both SPI master and SPI slave configurations. The DUPLEX0 and DUPLEX1 bits can be used to select the desired operating mode. The behavior of the DLYINTEN bit varies greatly depending on the SPI operating mode. For example behavior for each of the modes, see Figure 20-3 through Figure 20-6. SPI Slave mode, DLYINTEN = 1: In this mode, an SSP2IF interrupt will be generated during a transfer if the time between successful byte transmission events is longer than the value set by the DLYCYC<3:0> bits in the DMACON2 register. This interrupt allows slave firmware to know that the master device is taking an unusually large amount of time between byte transmissions. For example, this information may be useful for implementing application defined communication 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. protocols involving time-outs if the bus remains Idle for too long. When DLYINTEN = 1, the DLYCYC<3:0> interrupts occur normally according to the selected setting. SPI Slave mode, DLYINTEN = 0: In this mode, the time-out based interrupt is disabled. No additional SSP2IF interrupt events will be generated by the SPI DMA module, other than those indicated by the INTLVL<3:0> bits in the DMACON2 register. In this mode, always set DLYCYC<3:0> = 0000. SPI Master mode, DLYINTEN = 0: The DLYCYC<3:0> bits in the DMACON2 register determine the amount of additional inter-byte delay, which is added by the SPI DMA module during a transfer. The Master mode SS2 output feature may be used. SPI Master mode, DLYINTEN = 1: The amount of hardware overhead is slightly reduced in this mode, and the minimum inter-byte delay is 8 TCY for FOSC/4, 9 TCY for FOSC/16 and 15 TCY for FOSC/64. This mode can potentially be used to obtain slightly higher effective SPI bandwidth. In this mode, the SS2 control feature cannot be used, and should always be disabled (DMACON1<7:6> = 00). Additionally, the interrupt generating hardware (used in Slave mode) remains active. To avoid extraneous SSP2IF interrupt events, set the DMACON2 delay bits, DLYCYC<3:0> = 1111, and ensure that the SPI serial clock rate is no slower than FOSC/64. In SPI Master modes, the DMAEN bit is used to enable the SPI DMA module and to initiate an SPI DMA transaction. After user firmware sets the DMAEN bit, the DMA hardware will begin transmitting and/or receiving data bytes according to the configuration used. In SPI Slave modes, setting the DMAEN bit will finish the initialization steps needed to prepare the SPI DMA module for communication (which still must be initiated by the master device). To avoid possible data corruption, once the DMAEN bit is set, user firmware should not attempt to modify any of the MSSP2 or SPI DMA related registers, with the exception of the INTLVL bits in the DMACON2 register. If user firmware wants to Halt an ongoing DMA transaction, the DMAEN bit can be manually cleared by the firmware. Clearing the DMAEN bit while a byte is currently being transmitted will not immediately Halt the byte in progress. Instead, any byte currently in progress will be completed before the MSSP2 and SPI DMA modules go back to their Idle conditions. If user firmware clears the DMAEN bit, the TXADDR, RXADDR and DMABC registers will no longer update, and the DMA module will no longer make any additional read or writes to SRAM; therefore, state information can be lost. Preliminary DS39974A-page 303 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 20-3: DMACON1: DMA CONTROL REGISTER 1 (ACCESS F88h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SSCON1 SSCON0 TXINC RXINC DUPLEX1 DUPLEX0 DLYINTEN DMAEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 SSCON<1:0>: SSDMA Output Control bits (Master modes only) 11 = SSDMA is asserted for the duration of 4 bytes; DLYINTEN is always reset low 01 = SSDMA is asserted for the duration of 2 bytes; DLYINTEN is always reset low 10 = SSDMA is asserted for the duration of 1 byte; DLYINTEN is always reset low 00 = SSDMA is not controlled by the DMA module; the DLYINTEN bit is software programmable bit 5 TXINC: Transmit Address Increment Enable bit Allows the transmit address to increment as the transfer progresses. 1 = The transmit address is to be incremented from the initial value of TXADDR<11:0> 0 = The transmit address is always set to the initial value of TXADDR<11:0> bit 4 RXINC: Receive Address Increment Enable bit Allows the receive address to increment as the transfer progresses. 1 = The received address is to be incremented from the intial value of RXADDR<11:0> 0 = The received address is always set to the initial value of RXADDR<11:0> bit 3-2 DUPLEX<1:0>: Transmit/Receive Operating Mode Select bits 10 = SPI DMA operates in Full-Duplex mode; data is simultaneously transmitted and received 01 = DMA operates in Half-Duplex mode; data is transmitted only 00 = DMA operates in Half-Duplex mode; data is received only bit 1 DLYINTEN: Delay Interrupt Enable bit Enables the interrupt to be invoked after the number of TCY cycles specified in DLYCYC<2:0> has elapsed from the latest completed transfer. 1 = The interrupt is enabled; SSCON<1:0> must be set to ‘00’ 0 = The interrupt is disabled bit 0 DMAEN: DMA Operation Start/Stop bit This bit is set by the users’ software to start the DMA operation. It is reset back to zero by the DMA engine when the DMA operation is completed or aborted. 1 = DMA is in session 0 = DMA is not in session DS39974A-page 304 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.4.4.2 DMACON2 The DMACON2 register contains control bits for controlling interrupt generation and inter-byte delay behavior. The INTLVL<3:0> bits are used to select when an SSP2IF interrupt should be generated. The function of the DLYCYC<3:0> bits depends on the SPI operating mode (Master/Slave), as well as the DLYINTEN setting. In SPI Master mode, the DLYCYC<3:0> bits can be used REGISTER 20-4: to control how much time the module will Idle between bytes in a transfer. By default, the hardware requires a minimum delay of 8 TCY for FOSC/4, 9 TCY for FOSC/16 and 15 TCY for FOSC/64. An additional delay can be added with the DLYCYC bits. In SPI Slave modes, the DLYCYC<3:0> bits may optionally be used to trigger an additional time-out based interrupt. DMACON2: DMA CONTROL REGISTER 2 (ACCESS F86h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 DLYCYC3 DLYCYC2 DLYCYC1 DLYCYC0 INTLVL3 INTLVL2 INTLVL1 INTLVL0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 DLYCYC<3:0>: Delay Cycle Selection bits When DLYINTEN = 0, these bits specify the additional delay (above the base overhead of the hardware) in number of TCY cycles before the SSP2BUF register is written again for the next transfer. When DLYINTEN = 1, these bits specify the delay in number of TCY cycles from the latest completed transfer before an interrupt to the CPU is invoked. In this case, the additional delay before the SSP2BUF register is written again is 1 TCY + (base overhead of hardware). 1111 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 2,048 cycles 1110 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 1,024 cycles 1101 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 896 cycles 1100 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 768 cycles 1011 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 640 cycles 1010 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 512 cycles 1001 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 384 cycles 1000 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 256 cycles 0111 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 128 cycles 0110 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 64 cycles 0101 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 32 cycles 0100 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 16 cycles 0011 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 8 cycles 0010 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 4 cycles 0001 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 2 cycles 0000 = Delay time in number of instruction cycles is 1 cycle bit 3-0 INTLVL<3:0>: Watermark Interrupt Enable bits These bits specify the amount of remaining data yet to be transferred (transmitted and/or received) upon which an interrupt is generated. 1111 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 576 bytes 1110 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 512 bytes 1101 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 448 bytes 1100 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 384 bytes 1011 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 320 bytes 1010 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 256 bytes 1001 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 192 bytes 1000 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 128 bytes 0111 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 67 bytes 0110 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 32 bytes 0101 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 16 bytes 0100 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 8 bytes 0011 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 4 bytes 0010 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 2 bytes 0001 = Amount of remaining data to be transferred is 1 byte 0000 = Transfer complete 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 305 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.4.4.3 DMABCH and DMABCL The DMABCH and DMABCL register pair forms a 10-bit Byte Count register, which is used by the SPI DMA module to send/receive up to 1,024 bytes for each DMA transaction. When the DMA module is actively running (DMAEN = 1), the DMA Byte Count register decrements after each byte is transmitted/received. The DMA transaction will Halt and the DMAEN bit will be automatically cleared by hardware after the last byte has completed. After a DMA transaction is complete, the DMABC register will read 0x000. Prior to initiating a DMA transaction by setting the DMAEN bit, user firmware should load the appropriate value into the DMABCH/DMABCL registers. The DMABC is a “base zero” counter, so the actual number of bytes which will be transmitted follows in Equation 20-1. For example, if user firmware wants to transmit 7 bytes in one transaction, DMABC should be loaded with 006h. Similarly, if user firmware wishes to transmit 1,024 bytes, DMABC should be loaded with 3FFh. EQUATION 20-1: BYTES TRANSMITTED FOR A GIVEN DMABC Bytes XMIT DMABC + 1 20.4.4.4 20.4.5 The SSP2IF flag becomes set once the DMA byte count value indicates that the specified INTLVL has been reached. For example, if DMACON2<3:0> = 0101 (16 bytes remaining), the SSP2IF interrupt flag will become set once DMABC reaches 00Fh. If user firmware then clears the SSP2IF interrupt flag, the flag will not be set again by the hardware until after all bytes have been fully transmitted and the DMA transaction is complete. TXADDRH and TXADDRL The SPI DMA module can read from, and transmit data from, all general purpose memory on the device. The SPI DMA module cannot be used to read from the Special Function Registers (SFRs) contained in Banks 14 and 15. INTERRUPTS The SPI DMA module alters the behavior of the SSP2IF interrupt flag. In normal non-DMA modes, the SSP2IF is set once after every single byte is transmitted/received through the MSSP2 module. When MSSP2 is used with the SPI DMA module, the SSP2IF interrupt flag will be set according to the user-selected INTLVL<3:0> value specified in the DMACON2 register. The SSP2IF interrupt condition will also be generated once the SPI DMA transaction has fully completed and the DMAEN bit has been cleared by hardware. Note: The TXADDRH and TXADDRL registers pair together to form a 12-bit Transmit Source Address Pointer register. In modes that use TXADDR (Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex Transmit), the TXADDR will be incremented after each byte is transmitted. Transmitted data bytes will be taken from the memory location pointed to by the TXADDR register. The contents of the memory locations pointed to by TXADDR will not be modified by the DMA module during a transmission. 20.4.4.5 The SPI DMA module can write received data to all general purpose memory on the device. The SPI DMA module cannot be used to modify the Special Function Registers contained in Banks 14 and 15. User firmware may modify the INTLVL bits while a DMA transaction is in progress (DMAEN = 1). If an INTLVL value is selected which is higher than the actual remaining number of bytes (indicated by DMABC + 1), the SSP2IF interrupt flag will immediately become set. For example, if DMABC = 00Fh (implying 16 bytes are remaining) and user firmware writes ‘1111’ to INTLVL<3:0> (interrupt when 576 bytes remaining), the SSP2IF interrupt flag will immediately become set. If user firmware clears this interrupt flag, a new interrupt condition will not be generated until either: user firmware again writes INTLVL with an interrupt level higher than the actual remaining level, or the DMA transaction completes and the DMAEN bit is cleared. Note: RXADDRH and RXADDRL If the INTLVL bits are modified while a DMA transaction is in progress, care should be taken to avoid inadvertently changing the DLYCYC<3:0> value. The RXADDRH and RXADDRL registers pair together to form a 12-bit Receive Destination Address Pointer. In modes that use RXADDR (Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex Receive), the RXADDR register will be incremented after each byte is received. Received data bytes will be stored at the memory location pointed to by the RXADDR register. DS39974A-page 306 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.4.6 USING THE SPI DMA MODULE 4. The following steps would typically be taken to enable and use the SPI DMA module: 1. 2. 3. Configure the I/O pins, which will be used by MSSP2. a) Assign SCK2, SDO2, SDI2 and SS2 to the RPn pins as appropriate for the SPI mode which will be used. Only functions which will be used need to be assigned to a pin. b) Initialize the associated LAT registers for the desired Idle SPI bus state. c) If Open-Drain Output mode on SDO2 and SCK2 (Master mode) is desired, set ODCON3<1>. d) Configure the corresponding TRIS bits for each I/O pin used. Configure and enable MSSP2 for the desired SPI operating mode. a) Select the desired operating mode (Master or Slave, SPI Mode 0, 1, 2 and 3) and configure the module by writing to the SSP2STAT and SSP2CON1 registers. b) Enable MSSP2 by setting SSP2CON1<5> = 1. Configure the SPI DMA engine. a) Select the desired operating mode by writing the appropriate values to DMACON2 and DMACON1. b) Initialize the TXADDRH/TXADDRL Pointer (Full-Duplex or Half-Duplex Transmit Only mode). c) Initialize the RXADDRH/RXADDRL Pointer (Full-Duplex or Half-Duplex Receive Only mode). d) Initialize the DMABCH/DMABCL Byte Count register with the number of bytes to be transferred in the next SPI DMA operation. e) Set the DMAEN bit (DMACON1<0>). Detect the SSP2IF interrupt condition (PIR3<7). a) If the interrupt was configured to occur at the completion of the SPI DMA transaction, the DMAEN bit (DMACON1<0>) will be clear. User firmware may prepare the module for another transaction by repeating Steps 3.b through 3.e. b) If the interrupt was configured to occur prior to the completion of the SPI DMA transaction, the DMAEN bit may still be set, indicating the transaction is still in progress. User firmware would typically use this interrupt condition to begin preparing new data for the next DMA transaction. Firmware should not repeat Steps 3.b. through 3.e. until the DMAEN bit is cleared by the hardware, indicating the transaction is complete. Example 20-2 provides example code demonstrating the initialization process and the steps needed to use the SPI DMA module to perform a 512-byte Full-Duplex Master mode transfer. In SPI Master modes, this will initiate a DMA transaction. In SPI Slave modes, this will complete the initialization process, and the module will now be ready to begin receiving and/or transmitting data to the master device once the master starts the transaction. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 307 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY EXAMPLE 20-2: 512-BYTE SPI MASTER MODE Init AND TRANSFER ;For this example, let's use RP5(RB2) for SCK2, ;RP4(RB1) for SDO2, and RP3(RB0) for SDI2 ;Let’s use SPI master mode, CKE = 0, CKP = 0, ;without using slave select signalling. InitSPIPins: movlb 0x0F bcf ODCON3, SPI2OD bcf bcf bcf bcf bsf LATB, RB2 LATB, RB1 TRISB, RB1 TRISB, RB2 TRISB, RB0 ;Select bank 15, for access to ODCON3 register ;Let’s not use open drain outputs in this example ;Initialize our (to be) SCK2 ;Initialize our (to be) SDO2 ;Make SDO2 output, and drive ;Make SCK2 output, and drive ;SDI2 is an input, make sure pin low (idle). pin to an idle state low low (idle state) it is tri-stated ;Now we should unlock the PPS registers, so we can ;assign the MSSP2 functions to our desired I/O pins. movlb bcf 0x0E INTCON, GIE movlw movwf movlw movwf bcf bsf 0x55 EECON2 0xAA EECON2 PPSCON, IOLOCK INTCON, GIE ;We may now write to RPINRx and RPORx registers ;May now turn back on interrupts if desired movlw movwf 0x03 RPINR21 ;RP3 will be SDI2 ;Assign the SDI2 function to pin RP3 movlw movwf movlw 0x0A RPOR4 0x04 movwf movlw movwf movlb RPINR22 0x09 RPOR5 0x0F ;Let’s assign SCK2 output to pin RP4 ;RPOR4 maps output signals to RP4 pin ;SCK2 also needs to be configured as an input on the same pin ;SCK2 input function taken from RP4 pin ;0x09 is SDO2 output ;Assign SDO2 output signal to the RP5 (RB2) pin ;Done with PPS registers, bank 15 has other SFRs InitMSSP2: clrf movlw movwf bsf SSP2STAT b'00000000' SSP2CON1 SSP2CON1, SSPEN ;CKE = 0, SMP = 0 (sampled at middle of bit) ;CKP = 0, SPI Master mode, Fosc/4 ;MSSP2 initialized ;Enable the MSSP2 module InitSPIDMA: movlw movwf movlw movwf b'00111010' DMACON1 b'11110000' DMACON2 ;Full duplex, RX/TXINC enabled, no SSCON ;DLYINTEN is set, so DLYCYC3:DLYCYC0 = 1111 ;Minimum delay between bytes, interrupt ;only once when the transaction is complete DS39974A-page 308 ;Select bank 14 for access to PPS registers ;I/O Pin unlock sequence will not work if CPU ;services an interrupt during the sequence ;Unlock sequence consists of writing 0x55 ;and 0xAA to the EECON2 register. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY EXAMPLE 20-2: 512-BYTE SPI MASTER MODE Init AND TRANSFER (CONTINUED) ;Somewhere else in our project, lets assume we have ;allocated some RAM for use as SPI receive and ;transmit buffers. ; ;DestBuf ; ;SrcBuf ; udata res 0x500 0x200 res 0x200 PrepareTransfer: movlw HIGH(DestBuf) movwf RXADDRH movlw LOW(DestBuf) movwf RXADDRL ;Let’s reserve 0x500-0x6FF for use as our SPI ;receive data buffer in this example ;Lets reserve 0x700-0x8FF for use as our SPI ;transmit data buffer in this example ;Get high byte of DestBuf address (0x05) ;Load upper four bits of the RXADDR register ;Get low byte of the DestBuf address (0x00) ;Load lower eight bits of the RXADDR register movlw movwf movlw movwf HIGH(SrcBuf) TXADDRH LOW(SrcBuf) TXADDRL ;Get high byte of SrcBuf address (0x07) ;Load upper four bits of the TXADDR register ;Get low byte of the SrcBuf address (0x00) ;Load lower eight bits of the TXADDR register movlw movwf movlw movwf 0x01 DMABCH 0xFF DMABCL ;Lets move 0x200 (512) bytes in one DMA xfer ;Load the upper two bits of DMABC register ;Actual bytes transferred is (DMABC + 1), so ;we load 0x01FF into DMABC to xfer 0x200 bytes DMACON1, DMAEN ;The SPI DMA module will now begin transferring ;the data taken from SrcBuf, and will store ;received bytes into DestBuf. BeginXfer: bsf ;Execute whatever ;CPU is now free to do whatever it wants to ;and the DMA operation will continue without ;intervention, until it completes. ;When the transfer is complete, the SSP2IF flag in ;the PIR3 register will become set, and the DMAEN bit ;is automatically cleared by the hardware. ;The DestBuf (0x500-0x7FF) will contain the received ;data. To start another transfer, firmware will need ;to reinitialize RXADDR, TXADDR, DMABC and then ;set the DMAEN bit. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 309 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5 I2C Mode 20.5.1 The MSSP module in I2C mode fully implements all master and slave functions (including general call support), and provides interrupts on Start and Stop bits in hardware to determine a free bus (multi-master function). The MSSP module implements the standard mode specifications and 7-bit and 10-bit addressing. Two pins are used for data transfer: • Serial Clock (SCLx) – RC3/SCK1/SCL1/RP14, RD0/PMD0/SCL2 (44-pin devices) or RB4/CCP4/PMA1/KBI0/SCL2/RP7 (28-pin devices) • Serial Data (SDAx) – RC4/SDI1/SDA1/RP15, RD1/PMD1/SDA2 (44-pin devices) or RB5/CCP5/KBI1/SDA2/RP8 (28-pin devices) The user must configure these pins as inputs by setting the associated TRISx bits. These pins are up to 5.5V tolerant, allowing direct use in I2C busses operating at voltages higher than VDD. FIGURE 20-7: MSSPx BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2C™ MODE) Internal Data Bus Read Write Shift Clock SSPxSR reg SDAx MSb LSb Match Detect SSPxADD reg Note: • • • • MSSPx Control Register 1 (SSPxCON1) MSSPx Control Register 2 (SSPxCON2) MSSPx Status Register (SSPxSTAT) Serial Receive/Transmit Buffer Register (SSPxBUF) • MSSPx Shift Register (SSPxSR) – Not directly accessible • MSSPx Address Register (SSPxADD) • MSSPx 7-Bit Address Mask Register (SSPxMSK) SSPxCON1, SSPxCON2 and SSPxSTAT are the control and status registers in I2C mode operation. The SSPxCON1 and SSPxCON2 registers are readable and writable. The lower six bits of the SSPxSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPxSTAT are read/write. SSPxSR is the shift register used for shifting data in or out. SSPxBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written to or read from. SSPxADD contains the slave device address when the MSSP is configured in I2C Slave mode. When the MSSP is configured in Master mode, the lower seven bits of SSPxADD act as the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) reload value. In receive operations, SSPxSR and SSPxBUF together, create a double-buffered receiver. When SSPxSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPxBUF and the SSPxIF interrupt is set. Addr Match Address Mask Start and Stop bit Detect The MSSP module has six registers for I2C operation. These are: SSPxMSK holds the slave address mask value when the module is configured for 7-Bit Address Masking mode. While it is a separate register, it shares the same SFR address as SSPxADD; it is only accessible when the SSPM<3:0> bits are specifically set to permit access. Additional details are provided in Section 20.5.3.4 “7-Bit Address Masking Mode”. SSPxBUF reg SCLx REGISTERS During transmission, the SSPxBUF is not double-buffered. A write to SSPxBUF will write to both SSPxBUF and SSPxSR. Set, Reset S, P bits (SSPxSTAT reg) Only port I/O names are used in this diagram for the sake of brevity. Refer to the text for a full list of multiplexed functions. DS39974A-page 310 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 20-5: R/W-1 SSPxSTAT: MSSPx STATUS REGISTER (I2C™ MODE) (1, ACCESS FC7h; 2, F73h) R/W-1 SMP CKE R-1 R-1 R-1 D/A (1) (1) P S R-1 R/W (2,3) R-1 R-1 UA BF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SMP: Slew Rate Control bit In Master or Slave mode: 1 = Slew rate control is disabled for Standard Speed mode (100 kHz and 1 MHz) 0 = Slew rate control is enabled for High-Speed mode (400 kHz) bit 6 CKE: SMBus Select bit In Master or Slave mode: 1 = Enable SMBus specific inputs 0 = Disable SMBus specific inputs bit 5 D/A: Data/Address bit In Master mode: Reserved. In Slave mode: 1 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was data 0 = Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was address bit 4 P: Stop bit(1) 1 = Indicates that a Stop bit has been detected last 0 = Stop bit was not detected last bit 3 S: Start bit(1) 1 = Indicates that a Start bit has been detected last 0 = Start bit was not detected last bit 2 R/W: Read/Write Information bit(2,3) In Slave mode: 1 = Read 0 = Write In Master mode: 1 = Transmit is in progress 0 = Transmit is not in progress bit 1 UA: Update Address bit (10-Bit Slave mode only) 1 = Indicates that the user needs to update the address in the SSPxADD register 0 = Address does not need to be updated bit 0 BF: Buffer Full Status bit In Transmit mode: 1 = SSPxBUF is full 0 = SSPxBUF is empty In Receive mode: 1 = SSPxBUF is full (does not include the ACK and Stop bits) 0 = SSPxBUF is empty (does not include the ACK and Stop bits) Note 1: 2: 3: This bit is cleared on Reset and when SSPEN is cleared. This bit holds the R/W bit information following the last address match. This bit is only valid from the address match to the next Start bit, Stop bit or not ACK bit. ORing this bit with SEN, RSEN, PEN, RCEN or ACKEN will indicate if the MSSPx is in Active mode. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 311 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 20-6: R/W-0 SSPxCON1: MSSPx CONTROL REGISTER 1 (I2C™ MODE) (1, ACCESS FC6h; 2, F73h) R/W-0 WCOL SSPOV R/W-0 (1) SSPEN R/W-0 CKP R/W-0 (2) SSPM3 R/W-0 SSPM2 (2) R/W-0 (2) SSPM1 R/W-0 SSPM0(2) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 WCOL: Write Collision Detect bit In Master Transmit mode: 1 = A write to the SSPxBUF register was attempted while the I2C conditions were not valid for a transmission to be started (must be cleared in software) 0 = No collision In Slave Transmit mode: 1 = The SSPxBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared in software) 0 = No collision In Receive mode (Master or Slave modes): This is a “don’t care” bit. bit 6 SSPOV: Receive Overflow Indicator bit In Receive mode: 1 = A byte is received while the SSPxBUF register is still holding the previous byte (must be cleared in software) 0 = No overflow In Transmit mode: This is a “don’t care” bit in Transmit mode. bit 5 SSPEN: Master Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit(1) 1 = Enables the serial port and configures the SDAx and SCLx pins as the serial port pins 0 = Disables the serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins bit 4 CKP: SCKx Release Control bit In Slave mode: 1 = Releases clock 0 = Holds clock low (clock stretch); used to ensure data setup time In Master mode: Unused in this mode. bit 3-0 SSPM<3:0>: Master Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits(2) 1111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled 1110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled 1011 = I2C Firmware Controlled Master mode (slave Idle) 1001 = Load the SSPxMSK register at the SSPxADD SFR address(3,4) 1000 = I2C Master mode, clock = FOSC/(4 * (SSPxADD + 1)) 0111 = I2C Slave mode, 10-bit address 0110 = I2C Slave mode, 7-bit address Note 1: 2: 3: 4: When enabled, the SDAx and SCLx pins must be configured as inputs. Bit combinations not specifically listed here are either reserved or implemented in SPI mode only. When SSPM<3:0> = 1001, any reads or writes to the SSPxADD SFR address actually accesses the SSPxMSK register. This mode is only available when 7-Bit Address Masking mode is selected (MSSPMSK Configuration bit is ‘1’). DS39974A-page 312 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 20-7: R/W-0 (3) GCEN SSPxCON2: MSSPx CONTROL REGISTER 2 (I2C™ MASTER MODE) (1, ACCESS FC5h; 2, F71h) R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ACKSTAT ACKDT(1) ACKEN(2) RCEN(2) PEN(2) RSEN(2) SEN(2) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GCEN: General Call Enable bit (Slave mode only)(3) 1 = Enables interrupt when a general call address (0000h) is received in the SSPxSR 0 = General call address is disabled bit 6 ACKSTAT: Acknowledge Status bit (Master Transmit mode only) 1 = Acknowledge was not received from slave 0 = Acknowledge was received from slave bit 5 ACKDT: Acknowledge Data bit (Master Receive mode only)(1) 1 = Not Acknowledge 0 = Acknowledge bit 4 ACKEN: Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiates Acknowledge sequence on SDAx and SCLx pins, and transmits ACKDT data bit; automatically cleared by hardware 0 = Acknowledge sequence Idle bit 3 RCEN: Receive Enable bit (Master Receive mode only)(2) 1 = Enables Receive mode for I2C 0 = Receive is Idle bit 2 PEN: Stop Condition Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiates Stop condition on SDAx and SCLx pins; automatically cleared by hardware 0 = Stop condition is Idle bit 1 RSEN: Repeated Start Condition Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiates Repeated Start condition on SDAx and SCLx pins; automatically cleared by hardware 0 = Repeated Start condition is Idle bit 0 SEN: Start Condition Enable bit(2) 1 = Initiates Start condition on SDAx and SCLx pins; automatically cleared by hardware 0 = Start condition is Idle Note 1: 2: 3: Value that will be transmitted when the user initiates an Acknowledge sequence at the end of a receive. If the I2C module is active, these bits may not be set (no spooling) and the SSPxBUF may not be written (or writes to the SSPxBUF are disabled). This bit is not implemented in I2C Master mode. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 313 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 20-8: R/W-0 GCEN SSPxCON2: MSSPx CONTROL REGISTER 2 (I2C™ SLAVE MODE) (1, ACCESS FC5h; 2, F71h) R-0 ACKSTAT (2) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ADMSK5 ADMSK4 ADMSK3 ADMSK2 ADMSK1 SEN(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GCEN: General Call Enable bit (Slave mode only) 1 = Enables interrupt when a general call address (0000h) is received in the SSPxSR 0 = General call address disabled bit 6 ACKSTAT: Acknowledge Status bit(2) Unused in Slave mode. bit 5-2 ADMSK<5:2>: Slave Address Mask Select bits (5-bit address masking) 1 = Masking of the corresponding bits of SSPxADD is enabled 0 = Masking of the corresponding bits of SSPxADD is disabled bit 1 ADMSK1: Slave Address Least Significant bit(s) Mask Select bit In 7-Bit Addressing mode: 1 = Masking of SSPxADD<1> only is enabled 0 = Masking of SSPxADD<1> only is disabled In 10-Bit Addressing mode: 1 = Masking of SSPxADD<1:0> is enabled 0 = Masking of SSPxADD<1:0> is disabled bit 0 SEN: Start Condition Enable/Stretch Enable bit(1) 1 = Clock stretching is enabled for both slave transmit and slave receive (stretch enabled) 0 = Clock stretching is disabled Note 1: 2: If the I2C module is active, these bits may not be set (no spooling) and the SSPxBUF may not be written (or writes to the SSPxBUF are disabled). This bit is unimplemented in I2C Slave mode. REGISTER 20-9: SSPxMSK: I2C™ SLAVE ADDRESS MASK REGISTER (7-BIT MASKING MODE) (1, ACCESS FC8h; 2, F74h)(1) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0(2) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown MSK<7:0>: Slave Address Mask Select bits 1 = Masking of the corresponding bit of SSPxADD is enabled 0 = Masking of the corresponding bit of SSPxADD is disabled Note 1: 2: This register shares the same SFR address as SSPxADD and is only addressable in select MSSP operating modes. See Section 20.5.3.4 “7-Bit Address Masking Mode” for more details. MSK0 is not used as a mask bit in 7-bit addressing. DS39974A-page 314 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.2 OPERATION The MSSP module functions are enabled by setting the MSSP Enable bit, SSPEN (SSPxCON1<5>). The SSPxCON1 register allows control of the I2C operation. Four mode selection bits (SSPxCON1<3:0>) allow one of the following I2C modes to be selected: 2 I C Master mode, clock I2C Slave mode (7-bit address) I2C Slave mode (10-bit address) I2C Slave mode (7-bit address) with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled • I2C Slave mode (10-bit address) with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled • I2C Firmware Controlled Master mode, slave is Idle • • • • 20.5.3.1 SLAVE MODE In Slave mode, the SCLx and SDAx pins must be configured as inputs (TRISB<5:4> set). The MSSP module will override the input state with the output data when required (slave-transmitter). The I2C Slave mode hardware will always generate an interrupt on an address match. Address masking will allow the hardware to generate an interrupt for more than one address (up to 31 in 7-bit addressing and up to 63 in 10-bit addressing). Through the mode select bits, the user can also choose to interrupt on Start and Stop bits. When an address is matched, or the data transfer after an address match is received, the hardware will automatically generate the Acknowledge (ACK) pulse and load the SSPxBUF register with the received value currently in the SSPxSR register. Any combination of the following conditions will cause the MSSP module not to give this ACK pulse: • The Buffer Full bit, BF (SSPxSTAT<0>), was set before the transfer was received. • The overflow bit, SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>), was set before the transfer was received. 1. 2. 3. 4. The SSPxSR register value is loaded into the SSPxBUF register. The Buffer Full bit, BF, is set. An ACK pulse is generated. The MSSPx Interrupt Flag bit, SSPxIF, is set (and an interrupt is generated, if enabled) on the falling edge of the ninth SCLx pulse. In 10-Bit Addressing mode, two address bytes need to be received by the slave. The five Most Significant bits (MSbs) of the first address byte specify if this is a 10-bit address. Bit, R/W (SSPxSTAT<2>), must specify a write so the slave device will receive the second address byte. For a 10-bit address, the first byte would equal ‘11110 A9 A8 0’, where ‘A9’ and ‘A8’ are the two MSbs of the address. The sequence of events for 10-bit addressing is as follows, with Steps 7 through 9 for the slave-transmitter: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In this case, the SSPxSR register value is not loaded into the SSPxBUF, but bit, SSPxIF, is set. The BF bit is cleared by reading the SSPxBUF register, while bit, SSPOV, is cleared through software. 7. 8. 9. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Addressing Once the MSSP module has been enabled, it waits for a Start condition to occur. Following the Start condition, the 8 bits are shifted into the SSPxSR register. All incoming bits are sampled with the rising edge of the clock (SCLx) line. The value of register, SSPxSR<7:1>, is compared to the value of the SSPxADD register. The address is compared on the falling edge of the eighth clock (SCLx) pulse. If the addresses match and the BF and SSPOV bits are clear, the following events occur: Selection of any I2C mode, with the SSPEN bit set, forces the SCLx and SDAx pins to be open-drain, provided these pins are programmed as inputs by setting the appropriate TRISB or TRISD bits. To ensure proper operation of the module, pull-up resistors must be provided externally to the SCLx and SDAx pins. 20.5.3 The SCLx clock input must have a minimum high and low for proper operation. The high and low times of the I2C specification, as well as the requirement of the MSSP module, are shown in timing parameter 100 and parameter 101. Preliminary Receive the first (high) byte of address (bits, SSPxIF, BF and UA, are set on an address match). Update the SSPxADD register with the second (low) byte of the address (clears bit, UA, and releases the SCLx line). Read the SSPxBUF register (clears bit, BF) and clear flag bit, SSPxIF. Receive the second (low) byte of the address (bits, SSPxIF, BF and UA, are set). Update the SSPxADD register with the first (high) byte of the address. If a match releases the SCLx line, this will clear bit, UA. Read the SSPxBUF register (clears bit, BF) and clears flag bit, SSPxIF. Receive Repeated Start condition. Receive the first (high) byte of address (bits, SSPxIF and BF, are set). Read the SSPxBUF register (clears bit, BF) and clear flag bit, SSPxIF. DS39974A-page 315 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.3.2 Address Masking Modes Masking an address bit causes that bit to become a “don’t care”. When one address bit is masked, two addresses will be Acknowledged and cause an interrupt. It is possible to mask more than one address bit at a time, which greatly expands the number of addresses Acknowledged. The I2C slave behaves the same way, whether address masking is used or not. However, when address masking is used, the I2C slave can Acknowledge multiple addresses and cause interrupts. When this occurs, it is necessary to determine which address caused the interrupt by checking SSPxBUF. The PIC18F47J13 family of devices is capable of using two different Address Masking modes in I2C slave operation: 5-Bit Address Masking and 7-Bit Address Masking. The Masking mode is selected at device configuration using the MSSPMSK Configuration bit. The default device configuration is 7-Bit Address Masking. Both Masking modes, in turn, support address masking of 7-bit and 10-bit addresses. The combination of Masking modes and addresses provides different ranges of Acknowledgable addresses for each combination. While both Masking modes function in roughly the same manner, the way they use address masks is different. 20.5.3.3 of the incoming address. This allows the module to Acknowledge up to 31 addresses when using 7-bit addressing or 63 addresses with 10-bit addressing (see Example 20-3). This Masking mode is selected when the MSSPMSK Configuration bit is programmed (‘0’). The address mask in this mode is stored in the SSPxCON2 register, which stops functioning as a control register in I2C Slave mode (Register 20-8). In 7-Bit Address Masking mode, address mask bits, ADMSK<5:1> (SSPxCON2<5:1>), mask the corresponding address bits in the SSPxADD register. For any ADMSK bits that are set (ADMSK<n> = 1), the corresponding address bit is ignored (SSPxADD<n> = x). For the module to issue an address Acknowledge, it is sufficient to match only on addresses that do not have an active address mask. In 10-Bit Address Masking mode, bits, ADMSK<5:2>, mask the corresponding address bits in the SSPxADD register. In addition, ADMSK1 simultaneously masks the two LSbs of the address (SSPxADD<1:0>). For any ADMSK bits that are active (ADMSK<n> = 1), the corresponding address bit is ignored (SPxADD<n> = x). Also note, that although in 10-Bit Address Masking mode, the upper address bits reuse part of the SSPxADD register bits. The address mask bits do not interact with those bits; they only affect the lower address bits. Note 1: ADMSK1 masks the two Least Significant bits of the address. 5-Bit Address Masking Mode As the name implies, 5-Bit Address Masking mode uses an address mask of up to five bits to create a range of addresses to be Acknowledged, using Bits 5 through 1 EXAMPLE 20-3: 2: The two MSbs of the address are not affected by address masking. ADDRESS MASKING EXAMPLES IN 5-BIT MASKING MODE 7-Bit Addressing: SSPxADD<7:1>= A0h (1010000) (SSPxADD<0> is assumed to be ‘0’) ADMSK<5:1> = 00111 Addresses Acknowledged: A0h, A2h, A4h, A6h, A8h, AAh, ACh, AEh 10-Bit Addressing: SSPxADD<7:0> = A0h (10100000) (the two MSbs of the address are ignored in this example, since they are not affected by masking) ADMSK<5:1> = 00111 Addresses Acknowledged: A0h, A1h, A2h, A3h, A4h, A5h, A6h, A7h, A8h, A9h, AAh, ABh, ACh, ADh, AEh, AFh DS39974A-page 316 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.3.4 7-Bit Address Masking Mode Unlike 5-Bit Address Masking mode, 7-Bit Address Masking mode uses a mask of up to eight bits (in 10-bit addressing) to define a range of addresses than can be Acknowledged, using the lowest bits of the incoming address. This allows the module to Acknowledge up to 127 different addresses with 7-bit addressing, or 255 with 10-bit addressing (see Example 20-4). This mode is the default configuration of the module and is selected when MSSPMSK is unprogrammed (‘1’). The address mask for 7-Bit Address Masking mode is stored in the SSPxMSK register, instead of the SSPxCON2 register. SSPxMSK is a separate, hardware register within the module, but it is not directly addressable. Instead, it shares an address in the SFR space with the SSPxADD register. To access the SSPxMSK register, it is necessary to select MSSP mode, ‘1001’ (SSPCON1<3:0> = 1001), and then read or write to the location of SSPxADD. To use 7-Bit Address Masking mode, it is necessary to initialize SSPxMSK with a value before selecting the I2C Slave Addressing mode. Thus, the required sequence of events is: 1. 2. 3. Setting or clearing mask bits in SSPxMSK behaves in the opposite manner of the ADMSK bits in 5-Bit Address Masking mode. That is, clearing a bit in SSPxMSK causes the corresponding address bit to be masked; setting the bit requires a match in that position. SSPxMSK resets to all ‘1’s upon any Reset condition, and therefore, has no effect on the standard MSSP operation until written with a mask value. With 7-Bit Address Masking mode, the SSPxMSK<7:1> bits mask the corresponding address bits in the SSPxADD register. For any SSPxMSK bits that are active (SSPxMSK<n> = 0), the corresponding SSPxADD address bit is ignored (SSPxADD<n> = x). For the module to issue an address Acknowledge, it is sufficient to match only on addresses that do not have an active address mask. With 10-Bit Address Masking mode, SSPxMSK<7:0> bits mask the corresponding address bits in the SSPxADD register. For any SSPxMSK bits that are active (= 0), the corresponding SSPxADD address bit is ignored (SSPxADD<n> = x). Note: The two MSbs of the address are not affected by address masking. Select SSPxMSK Access mode (SSPxCON2<3:0> = 1001). Write the mask value to the appropriate SSPxADD register address (FC8h for MSSP1, F74h for MSSP2). Set the appropriate I2C Slave mode (SSPxCON2<3:0> = 0111 for 10-bit addressing, 0110 for 7-bit addressing). EXAMPLE 20-4: ADDRESS MASKING EXAMPLES IN 7-BIT MASKING MODE 7-Bit Addressing: SSPxADD<7:1>= 1010 000 SSPxMSK<7:1>= 1111 001 Addresses Acknowledged = ACh, A8h, A4h, A0h 10-Bit Addressing: SSPxADD<7:0> = 1010 0000 (the two MSbs are ignored in this example since they are not affected) SSPxMSK<5:1> = 1111 0011 Addresses Acknowledged = ACh, A8h, A4h, A0h 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 317 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.3.5 Reception 20.5.3.6 When the R/W bit of the address byte is clear and an address match occurs, the R/W bit of the SSPxSTAT register is cleared. The received address is loaded into the SSPxBUF register and the SDAx line is held low (ACK). When the address byte overflow condition exists, then the no Acknowledge (ACK) pulse is given. An overflow condition is defined as either bit, BF (SSPxSTAT<0>), is set or bit, SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>), is set. An MSSP interrupt is generated for each data transfer byte. The interrupt flag bit, SSPxIF, must be cleared in software. The SSPxSTAT register is used to determine the status of the byte. If SEN is enabled (SSPxCON2<0> = 1), SCLx will be held low (clock stretch) following each data transfer. The clock must be released by setting bit, CKP (SSPxCON1<4>). See Section 20.5.4 “Clock Stretching” for more details. Transmission When the R/W bit of the incoming address byte is set and an address match occurs, the R/W bit of the SSPxSTAT register is set. The received address is loaded into the SSPxBUF register. The ACK pulse will be sent on the ninth bit and pin, SCLx, is held low regardless of SEN (see Section 20.5.4 “Clock Stretching” for more details). By stretching the clock, the master will be unable to assert another clock pulse until the slave is done preparing the transmit data. The transmit data must be loaded into the SSPxBUF register, which also loads the SSPxSR register. Then, the SCLx pin should be enabled by setting bit, CKP (SSPxCON1<4>). The eight data bits are shifted out on the falling edge of the SCLx input. This ensures that the SDAx signal is valid during the SCLx high time (Figure 20-10). The ACK pulse from the master-receiver is latched on the rising edge of the ninth SCLx input pulse. If the SDAx line is high (not ACK), then the data transfer is complete. In this case, when the ACK is latched by the slave, the slave monitors for another occurrence of the Start bit. If the SDAx line was low (ACK), the next transmit data must be loaded into the SSPxBUF register. Again, the SCLx pin must be enabled by setting bit, CKP. An MSSP interrupt is generated for each data transfer byte. The SSPxIF bit must be cleared in software and the SSPxSTAT register is used to determine the status of the byte. The SSPxIF bit is set on the falling edge of the ninth clock pulse. DS39974A-page 318 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 A6 Preliminary 3 A5 4 A4 5 A3 6 A2 (CKP does not reset to ‘0’ when SEN = 0) CKP (SSPxCON1<4>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S A7 Receiving Address 7 A1 8 9 ACK R/W = 0 1 D7 3 D5 4 D4 Cleared in software SSPxBUF is read 2 D6 5 D3 Receiving Data 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 9 ACK 1 D7 2 D6 3 D5 4 D4 5 D3 Receiving Data 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 Bus master terminates transfer P SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. 9 ACK FIGURE 20-8: SDAx PIC18F47J13 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) DS39974A-page 319 DS39974A-page 320 2 A6 Preliminary Note 1: 3 4 X 5 A3 Receiving Address A5 6 X 7 X 8 9 ACK R/W = 0 1 D7 3 4 D4 5 D3 Receiving Data D5 Cleared in software SSPxBUF is read 2 D6 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 9 ACK 1 D7 In this example, an address equal to A7.A6.A5.X.A3.X.X will be Acknowledged and cause an interrupt. (CKP does not reset to ‘0’ when SEN = 0) CKP (SSPxCON1<4>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S A7 2 D6 3 4 D4 5 D3 Receiving Data D5 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 Bus master terminates transfer P SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. 9 ACK FIGURE 20-9: SDAx PIC18F47J13 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 AND ADMSK<5:1> = 01011 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS)(1) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 1 Preliminary BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) CKP 2 A6 Data in sampled SSPxIF (PIR1<3>) S A7 3 4 A4 5 A3 6 A2 Receiving Address A5 7 A1 8 R/W = 1 9 ACK 4 5 D3 6 D2 Transmitting Data D4 Cleared in software 3 D5 SSPxBUF is written in software 2 D6 CKP is set in software Clear by reading SCLx held low while CPU responds to SSPxIF 1 D7 7 8 D0 9 ACK From SSPxIF ISR D1 1 D7 4 D4 5 D3 6 D2 CKP is set in software 7 8 D0 9 ACK From SSPxIF ISR D1 Transmitting Data Cleared in software 3 D5 SSPxBUF is written in software 2 D6 P FIGURE 20-10: SCLx SDAx PIC18F47J13 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING (TRANSMISSION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) DS39974A-page 321 DS39974A-page 322 2 1 3 1 Preliminary 2: 5 0 7 A8 8 UA is set indicating that the SSPxADD needs to be updated SSPxBUF is written with contents of SSPxSR 6 A9 9 A7 2 X 4 5 A3 6 A2 UA is set indicating that SSPxADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with low byte of address 7 X Cleared in software 3 A5 Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag 1 A6 Receive Second Byte of Address 8 X 9 ACK 1 D7 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 D3 D2 7 8 9 1 Note that the Most Significant bits of the address are not affected by the bit masking. 2 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 D3 D2 Receive Data Byte D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with high byte of address 2 D6 D5 D4 Receive Data Byte In this example, an address equal to A9.A8.A7.A6.A5.X.A3.A2.X.X will be Acknowledged and cause an interrupt. (CKP does not reset to ‘0’ when SEN = 0) CKP (SSPxCON1<4>) UA (SSPxSTAT<1>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) Note 1: 4 1 Cleared in software SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S 1 ACK R/W = 0 Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place 7 8 D1 D0 9 P Bus master terminates transfer SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. ACK FIGURE 20-11: SDAx Receive First Byte of Address Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place PIC18F47J13 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 AND ADMSK<5:1> = 01001 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS)(1,2) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 0 Preliminary 7 A8 8 UA is set indicating that the SSPxADD needs to be updated SSPxBUF is written with contents of SSPxSR 6 A9 9 (CKP does not reset to ‘0’ when SEN = 0) CKP (SSPxCON1<4>) UA (SSPxSTAT<1>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) Cleared in software SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S 1 ACK R/W = 0 A7 2 4 A4 5 A3 6 A2 8 9 A0 ACK UA is set indicating that SSPxADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with low byte of address 7 A1 Cleared in software 3 A5 Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag 1 A6 Receive Second Byte of Address 1 D7 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 D3 D2 7 8 9 1 2 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 D3 D2 Receive Data Byte D1 D0 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with high byte of address 2 D6 D5 D4 Receive Data Byte Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place 7 8 D1 D0 9 P Bus master terminates transfer SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. ACK FIGURE 20-12: SDAx Receive First Byte of Address Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place PIC18F47J13 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 0 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) DS39974A-page 323 DS39974A-page 324 2 1 3 1 4 1 Preliminary CKP (SSPxCON1<4>) UA (SSPxSTAT<1>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) 5 0 6 7 A9 A8 8 UA is set indicating that the SSPxADD needs to be updated SSPxBUF is written with contents of SSPxSR SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S 1 9 ACK R/W = 0 1 3 4 5 Cleared in software 2 7 UA is set indicating that SSPxADD needs to be updated 8 A0 Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with low byte of address 6 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Receive Second Byte of Address Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag A7 9 ACK 2 3 1 4 1 Cleared in software 1 1 5 0 6 8 9 ACK R/W = 1 1 2 4 5 6 CKP is set in software 9 P Completion of data transmission clears BF flag 8 ACK Bus master terminates transfer CKP is automatically cleared in hardware, holding SCLx low 7 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Cleared in software 3 D7 D6 D5 Transmitting Data Byte Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’ Write of SSPxBUF BF flag is clear initiates transmit at the end of the third address sequence 7 A9 A8 Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with high byte of address. Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag Sr 1 Receive First Byte of Address Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place FIGURE 20-13: SDAx Receive First Byte of Address Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place PIC18F47J13 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING (TRANSMISSION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.4 CLOCK STRETCHING 20.5.4.3 Both 7-Bit and 10-Bit Slave modes implement automatic clock stretching during a transmit sequence. The SEN bit (SSPxCON2<0>) allows clock stretching to be enabled during receives. Setting SEN will cause the SCLx pin to be held low at the end of each data receive sequence. 20.5.4.1 Clock Stretching for 7-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) In 7-Bit Slave Receive mode, on the falling edge of the ninth clock at the end of the ACK sequence, if the BF bit is set, the CKP bit in the SSPxCON1 register is automatically cleared, forcing the SCLx output to be held low. The CKP bit being cleared to ‘0’ will assert the SCLx line low. The CKP bit must be set in the user’s ISR before reception is allowed to continue. By holding the SCLx line low, the user has time to service the ISR and read the contents of the SSPxBUF before the master device can initiate another receive sequence. This will prevent buffer overruns from occurring (see Figure 20-15). Note 1: If the user reads the contents of the SSPxBUF before the falling edge of the ninth clock, thus clearing the BF bit, the CKP bit will not be cleared and clock stretching will not occur. 2: The CKP bit can be set in software regardless of the state of the BF bit. The user should be careful to clear the BF bit in the ISR before the next receive sequence in order to prevent an overflow condition. 20.5.4.2 Clock Stretching for 7-Bit Slave Transmit Mode The 7-Bit Slave Transmit mode implements clock stretching by clearing the CKP bit, after the falling edge of the ninth clock, if the BF bit is clear. This occurs regardless of the state of the SEN bit. The user’s Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) must set the CKP bit before transmission is allowed to continue. By holding the SCLx line low, the user has time to service the ISR and load the contents of the SSPxBUF before the master device can initiate another transmit sequence (see Figure 20-10). Note 1: If the user loads the contents of SSPxBUF, setting the BF bit before the falling edge of the ninth clock, the CKP bit will not be cleared and clock stretching will not occur. 2: The CKP bit can be set in software regardless of the state of the BF bit. 20.5.4.4 Clock Stretching for 10-Bit Slave Transmit Mode In 10-Bit Slave Transmit mode, clock stretching is controlled during the first two address sequences by the state of the UA bit, just as it is in 10-Bit Slave Receive mode. The first two addresses are followed by a third address sequence, which contains the high-order bits of the 10-bit address and the R/W bit set to ‘1’. After the third address sequence is performed, the UA bit is not set, the module is now configured in Transmit mode and clock stretching is controlled by the BF flag as in 7-Bit Slave Transmit mode (see Figure 20-13). Clock Stretching for 10-Bit Slave Receive Mode (SEN = 1) In 10-Bit Slave Receive mode, during the address sequence, clock stretching automatically takes place but CKP is not cleared. During this time, if the UA bit is set after the ninth clock, clock stretching is initiated. The UA bit is set after receiving the upper byte of the 10-bit address and following the receive of the second byte of the 10-bit address with the R/W bit cleared to ‘0’. The release of the clock line occurs upon updating SSPxADD. Clock stretching will occur on each data receive sequence, as described in 7-bit mode. Note: If the user polls the UA bit and clears it by updating the SSPxADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock occurs, and if the user has not cleared the BF bit by reading the SSPxBUF register before that time, then the CKP bit will still NOT be asserted low. Clock stretching on the basis of the state of the BF bit only occurs during a data sequence, not an address sequence. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 325 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.4.5 Clock Synchronization and CKP bit When the CKP bit is cleared, the SCLx output is forced to ‘0’. However, clearing the CKP bit will not assert the SCLx output low until the SCLx output is already sampled low. Therefore, the CKP bit will not assert the SCLx line until an external I2C master device has FIGURE 20-14: already asserted the SCLx line. The SCLx output will remain low until the CKP bit is set and all other devices on the I2C bus have deasserted SCLx. This ensures that a write to the CKP bit will not violate the minimum high time requirement for SCLx (see Figure 20-14). CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION TIMING Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 SDAx DX – 1 DX SCLx CKP Master Device Asserts Clock Master Device Deasserts Clock WR SSPxCON1 DS39974A-page 326 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 A6 Preliminary CKP (SSPxCON1<4>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S A7 3 A5 4 A4 5 A3 6 A2 Receiving Address 7 A1 8 9 ACK R/W = 0 3 D5 4 D4 5 D3 Cleared in software 2 D6 If BF is cleared prior to the falling edge of the 9th clock, CKP will not be reset to ‘0’ and no clock stretching will occur SSPxBUF is read 1 D7 Receiving Data 6 D2 7 8 D0 9 1 D7 BF is still set after falling edge of the 9th clock, CKP is reset to ‘0’ and clock stretching occurs D1 ACK 3 4 D4 5 D3 Receiving Data D5 CKP written to ‘1’ in software 2 D6 Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’ 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 Bus master terminates transfer P SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. 9 ACK Clock is not held low because ACK = 1 FIGURE 20-15: SDAx Clock is not held low because buffer full bit is clear prior to falling edge of 9th clock PIC18F47J13 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 1 (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) DS39974A-page 327 DS39974A-page 328 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 0 Preliminary CKP (SSPxCON1<4>) UA (SSPxSTAT<1>) SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) 6 7 A9 A8 8 UA is set indicating that the SSPxADD needs to be updated SSPxBUF is written with contents of SSPxSR Cleared in software SSPxIF (PIR1<3> or PIR3<7>) 1 SCLx S 1 9 ACK R/W = 0 A7 2 4 A4 5 A3 6 A2 Cleared in software 3 A5 7 A1 8 A0 Note: An update of the SSPxADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock will have no effect on UA and UA will remain set. UA is set indicating that SSPxADD needs to be updated Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with low byte of address after falling edge of ninth clock Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag 1 A6 Receive Second Byte of Address 9 ACK 2 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 D3 D2 7 8 1 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 CKP written to ‘1’ in software 2 D3 D2 Receive Data Byte D7 D6 D5 D4 Note: An update of the SSPxADD register before the falling edge of the ninth clock will have no effect on UA and UA will remain set. 9 ACK Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’ D1 D0 Cleared by hardware when SSPxADD is updated with high byte of address after falling edge of ninth clock Dummy read of SSPxBUF to clear BF flag 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 Receive Data Byte Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place 7 8 9 ACK Bus master terminates transfer P SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. D1 D0 Clock is not held low because ACK = 1 FIGURE 20-16: SDAx Receive First Byte of Address Clock is held low until update of SSPxADD has taken place PIC18F47J13 FAMILY I2C™ SLAVE MODE TIMING WITH SEN = 1 (RECEPTION, 10-BIT ADDRESS) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.5 GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SUPPORT If the general call address matches, the SSPxSR is transferred to the SSPxBUF, the BF flag bit is set (eighth bit), and on the falling edge of the ninth bit (ACK bit), the SSPxIF interrupt flag bit is set. The addressing procedure for the I2C bus is such that the first byte after the Start condition usually determines which device will be the slave addressed by the master. The exception is the general call address, which can address all devices. When this address is used, all devices should, in theory, respond with an Acknowledge. When the interrupt is serviced, the source for the interrupt can be checked by reading the contents of the SSPxBUF. The value can be used to determine if the address was device-specific or a general call address. In 10-bit mode, the SSPxADD is required to be updated for the second half of the address to match and the UA bit is set (SSPxSTAT<1>). If the general call address is sampled when the GCEN bit is set, while the slave is configured in 10-Bit Addressing mode, then the second half of the address is not necessary. The UA bit will not be set and the slave will begin receiving data after the Acknowledge (Figure 20-17). The general call address is one of eight addresses reserved for specific purposes by the I2C protocol. It consists of all ‘0’s with R/W = 0. The general call address is recognized when the General Call Enable bit, GCEN, is enabled (SSPxCON2<7> set). Following a Start bit detect, 8 bits are shifted into the SSPxSR and the address is compared against the SSPxADD. It is also compared to the general call address and fixed in hardware. FIGURE 20-17: SLAVE MODE GENERAL CALL ADDRESS SEQUENCE (7-BIT OR 10-BIT ADDRESSING MODE) Address is Compared to General Call Address after ACK, Set Interrupt SCLx S 1 2 3 4 5 Receiving Data R/W = 0 General Call Address SDAx ACK D7 6 7 8 9 1 ACK D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SSPxIF BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) Cleared in Software SSPxBUF is Read SSPOV (SSPxCON1<6>) ‘0’ GCEN (SSPxCON2<7>) ‘1’ 20.5.6 MASTER MODE Master mode is enabled by setting and clearing the appropriate SSPM bits in SSPxCON1 and by setting the SSPEN bit. In Master mode, the SCLx and SDAx lines are manipulated by the MSSP hardware if the TRISx bits are set. Master mode of operation is supported by interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions. The Start (S) and Stop (P) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSP module is disabled. Control of the I2C bus may be taken when the Stop bit is set, or the bus is Idle, with both the Start and Stop bits clear. Once Master mode is enabled, the user has six options. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Assert a Start condition on SDAx and SCLx. Assert a Repeated Start condition on SDAx and SCLx. Write to the SSPxBUF register initiating transmission of data/address. Configure the I2C port to receive data. Generate an Acknowledge condition at the end of a received byte of data. Generate a Stop condition on SDAx and SCLx. In Firmware Controlled Master mode, user code conducts all I2C bus operations based on Start and Stop bit conditions. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 329 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY The following events will cause the MSSP Interrupt Flag bit, SSPxIF, to be set (and MSSP interrupt, if enabled): The MSSP module, when configured in I2C Master mode, does not allow queueing of events. For instance, the user is not allowed to initiate a Start condition and immediately write the SSPxBUF register to initiate transmission before the Start condition is complete. In this case, the SSPxBUF will not be written to and the WCOL bit will be set, indicating that a write to the SSPxBUF did not occur. FIGURE 20-18: • • • • • Start condition Stop condition Data transfer byte transmitted/received Acknowledge transmitted Repeated Start MSSPx BLOCK DIAGRAM (I2C™ MASTER MODE) SSPM<3:0> SSPxADD<6:0> Internal Data Bus Read Write SSPxBUF SDAx Baud Rate Generator Shift Clock SDAx In SCLx In Bus Collision DS39974A-page 330 LSb Start bit, Stop bit, Acknowledge Generate Start bit Detect Stop bit Detect Write Collision Detect Clock Arbitration State Counter for End of XMIT/RCV Preliminary Clock Cntl SCLx Receive Enable SSPxSR MSb Clock Arbitrate/WCOL Detect (hold off clock source) Note: Set/Reset S, P (SSPxSTAT), WCOL (SSPxCON1) Set SSPxIF, BCLxIF Reset ACKSTAT, PEN (SSPxCON2) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.6.1 I2C Master Mode Operation A typical transmit sequence would go as follows: The master device generates all of the serial clock pulses and the Start and Stop conditions. A transfer is ended with a Stop condition or with a Repeated Start condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will not be released. In Master Transmitter mode, serial data is output through SDAx while SCLx outputs the serial clock. The first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the receiving device (7 bits) and the Read/Write (R/W) bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic ‘0’. Serial data is transmitted, 8 bits at a time. After each byte is transmitted, an Acknowledge bit is received. S and P conditions are output to indicate the beginning and end of a serial transfer. In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the transmitting device (7 bits) and the R/W bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic ‘1’. Thus, the first byte transmitted is a 7-bit slave address, followed by a ‘1’ to indicate the receive bit. Serial data is received via SDAx, while SCLx outputs the serial clock. Serial data is received 8 bits at a time. After each byte is received, an Acknowledge bit is transmitted. S and P conditions indicate the beginning and end of transmission. The BRG used for the SPI mode operation is used to set the SCLx clock frequency for either 100 kHz, 400 kHz or 1 MHz I2C operation. See Section 20.5.7 “Baud Rate” for more details. 1. The user generates a Start condition by setting the Start Enable bit, SEN (SSPxCON2<0>). 2. SSPxIF is set. The MSSP module will wait for the required start time before any other operation takes place. 3. The user loads the SSPxBUF with the slave address to transmit. 4. The address is shifted out of the SDAx pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. 5. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the SSPxCON2 register (SSPxCON2<6>). 6. The MSSP module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPxIF bit. 7. The user loads the SSPxBUF with 8 bits of data. 8. Data is shifted out of the SDAx pin until all 8 bits are transmitted. 9. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the SSPxCON2 register (SSPxCON2<6>). 10. The MSSP module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPxIF bit. 11. The user generates a Stop condition by setting the Stop Enable bit, PEN (SSPxCON2<2>). 12. The interrupt is generated once the Stop condition is complete. 20.5.7 BAUD RATE In I2C Master mode, the BRG reload value is placed in the lower seven bits of the SSPxADD register (Figure 20-19). When a write occurs to SSPxBUF, the Baud Rate Generator will automatically begin counting. The BRG counts down to 0 and stops until another reload has taken place. The BRG count is decremented twice per instruction cycle (TCY) on the Q2 and Q4 clocks. In I2C Master mode, the BRG is reloaded automatically. Once the given operation is complete (i.e., transmission of the last data bit is followed by ACK), the internal clock will automatically stop counting and the SCLx pin will remain in its last state. Table 20-3 demonstrates clock rates based on instruction cycles and the BRG value loaded into SSPxADD. The SSPADD BRG value of 0x00 is not supported. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 331 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.7.1 Baud Rate and Module Interdependence Because this mode derives its basic clock source from the system clock, any changes to the clock will affect both modules in the same proportion. It may be possible to change one or both baud rates back to a previous value by changing the BRG reload value. Because MSSP1 and MSSP2 are independent, they can operate simultaneously in I2C Master mode at different baud rates. This is done by using different BRG reload values for each module. FIGURE 20-19: BAUD RATE GENERATOR BLOCK DIAGRAM SSPM<3:0> SSPM<3:0> Reload SCLx Control SSPxADD<6:0> Reload CLKO TABLE 20-3: BRG Down Counter FOSC/4 I2C™ CLOCK RATE w/BRG FOSC FCY FCY * 2 BRG Value FSCL (2 Rollovers of BRG) 40 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 18h 400 kHz 40 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 1Fh 312.5 kHz 40 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz 63h 100 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 09h 400 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 0Ch 308 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 27h 100 kHz 4 MHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 02h 333 kHz 4 MHz 1 MHz 2 MHz 09h 100 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 8 MHz 03h 1 MHz(1) Note 1: The I2C interface does not conform to the 400 kHz I2C specification (which applies to rates greater than 100 kHz) in all details, but may be used with care where higher rates are required by the application. DS39974A-page 332 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.7.2 Clock Arbitration sampled high. When the SCLx pin is sampled high, the BRG is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<6:0> and begins counting. This ensures that the SCLx high time will always be at least one BRG rollover count in the event that the clock is held low by an external device (Figure 20-20). Clock arbitration occurs when the master, during any receive, transmit or Repeated Start/Stop condition, deasserts the SCLx pin (SCLx allowed to float high). When the SCLx pin is allowed to float high, the BRG is suspended from counting until the SCLx pin is actually FIGURE 20-20: BAUD RATE GENERATOR TIMING WITH CLOCK ARBITRATION SDAx DX DX – 1 SCLx Allowed to Transition High SCLx Deasserted but Slave Holds SCLx Low (clock arbitration) SCLx BRG Decrements on Q2 and Q4 Cycles BRG Value 03h 02h 01h 00h (hold off) 03h 02h SCLx is Sampled High, Reload takes place and BRG Starts its Count BRG Reload 20.5.8 I2C MASTER MODE START CONDITION TIMING Note: To initiate a Start condition, the user sets the Start Enable bit, SEN (SSPxCON2<0>). If the SDAx and SCLx pins are sampled high, the BRG is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<6:0> and starts its count. If SCLx and SDAx are both sampled high when the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SDAx pin is driven low. The action of the SDAx being driven low while SCLx is high is the Start condition and causes the Start bit (SSPxSTAT<3>) to be set. Following this, the BRG is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<6:0> and resumes its count. When the BRG times out (TBRG), the SEN bit (SSPxCON2<0>) will be automatically cleared by hardware. The BRG is suspended, leaving the SDAx line held low and the Start condition is complete. FIGURE 20-21: 20.5.8.1 If, at the beginning of the Start condition, the SDAx and SCLx pins are already sampled low, or if during the Start condition, the SCLx line is sampled low before the SDAx line is driven low, a bus collision occurs. The Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLxIF, is set, the Start condition is aborted and the I2C module is reset into its Idle state. WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Start sequence is in progress, the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur). Note: Because queueing of events is not allowed, writing to the lower five bits of SSPxCON2 is disabled until the Start condition is complete. FIRST START BIT TIMING Write to SEN bit Occurs Here Set S bit (SSPxSTAT<3>) SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 TBRG At Completion of Start bit, Hardware Clears SEN bit and Sets SSPxIF bit TBRG Write to SSPxBUF Occurs Here 1st bit SDAx 2nd bit TBRG SCLx TBRG S 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 333 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.9 I2C MASTER MODE REPEATED START CONDITION TIMING Note 1: If RSEN is programmed while any other event is in progress, it will not take effect. A Repeated Start condition occurs when the RSEN bit (SSPxCON2<1>) is programmed high and the I2C logic module is in the Idle state. When the RSEN bit is set, the SCLx pin is asserted low. When the SCLx pin is sampled low, the BRG is loaded with the contents of SSPxADD<5:0> and begins counting. The SDAx pin is released (brought high) for one BRG count (TBRG). When the BRG times out, and if SDAx is sampled high, the SCLx pin will be deasserted (brought high). When SCLx is sampled high, the BRG is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD<6:0> and begins counting. SDAx and SCLx must be sampled high for one TBRG. This action is then followed by assertion of the SDAx pin (SDAx = 0) for one TBRG while SCLx is high. Following this, the RSEN bit (SSPxCON2<1>) will be automatically cleared and the BRG will not be reloaded, leaving the SDAx pin held low. As soon as a Start condition is detected on the SDAx and SCLx pins, the Start bit (SSPxSTAT<3>) will be set. The SSPxIF bit will not be set until the BRG has timed out. 2: A bus collision during the Repeated Start condition occurs if: • SDAx is sampled low when SCLx goes from low-to-high. • SCLx goes low before SDAx is asserted low. This may indicate that another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’. Immediately following the SSPxIF bit getting set, the user may write the SSPxBUF with the 7-bit address in 7-bit mode, or the default first address in 10-bit mode. After the first eight bits are transmitted and an ACK is received, the user may then transmit an additional 8 bits of address (10-bit mode) or 8 bits of data (7-bit mode). 20.5.9.1 If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Repeated Start sequence is in progress, the WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur). Note: FIGURE 20-22: WCOL Status Flag Because queueing of events is not allowed, writing of the lower five bits of SSPxCON2 is disabled until the Repeated Start condition is complete. REPEATED START CONDITION WAVEFORM S bit Set by Hardware Write to SSPxCON2 Occurs Here: SDAx = 1, SCLx (no change) SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 TBRG TBRG At Completion of Start bit, Hardware Clears RSEN bit and Sets SSPxIF TBRG 1st bit SDAx RSEN bit Set by Hardware on Falling Edge of Ninth Clock, End of XMIT Write to SSPxBUF Occurs Here TBRG SCLx TBRG Sr = Repeated Start DS39974A-page 334 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.10 I2C MASTER MODE TRANSMISSION Transmission of a data byte, a 7-bit address or the other half of a 10-bit address is accomplished by simply writing a value to the SSPxBUF register. This action will set the Buffer Full flag bit, BF, and allow the BRG to begin counting and start the next transmission. Each bit of address/data will be shifted out onto the SDAx pin after the falling edge of SCLx is asserted (see data hold time specification, parameter 106). SCLx is held low for one BRG rollover count (TBRG). Data should be valid before SCLx is released high (see data setup time specification, parameter 107). When the SCLx pin is released high, it is held that way for TBRG. The data on the SDAx pin must remain stable for that duration, and some hold time, after the next falling edge of SCLx. After the eighth bit is shifted out (the falling edge of the eighth clock), the BF flag is cleared and the master releases SDAx. This allows the slave device being addressed to respond with an ACK bit during the ninth bit time if an address match occurred or if data was received properly. The status of ACK is written into the ACKDT bit on the falling edge of the ninth clock. If the master receives an Acknowledge, the Acknowledge Status bit, ACKSTAT, is cleared; if not, the bit is set. After the ninth clock, the SSPxIF bit is set and the master clock (BRG) is suspended until the next data byte is loaded into the SSPxBUF, leaving SCLx low and SDAx unchanged (Figure 20-23). After the write to the SSPxBUF, each bit of the address will be shifted out on the falling edge of SCLx until all seven address bits and the R/W bit are completed. On the falling edge of the eighth clock, the master will deassert the SDAx pin, allowing the slave to respond with an Acknowledge. On the falling edge of the ninth clock, the master will sample the SDAx pin to see if the address was recognized by a slave. The status of the ACK bit is loaded into the ACKSTAT status bit (SSPxCON2<6>). Following the falling edge of the ninth clock transmission of the address, the SSPxIF flag is set, the BF flag is cleared and the BRG is turned off until another write to the SSPxBUF takes place, holding SCLx low and allowing SDAx to float. 20.5.10.1 BF Status Flag In Transmit mode, the BF bit (SSPxSTAT<0>) is set when the CPU writes to SSPxBUF and is cleared when all eight bits are shifted out. 20.5.10.2 The user should verify that the WCOL bit is clear after each write to SSPxBUF to ensure the transfer is correct. In all cases, WCOL must be cleared in software. 20.5.10.3 ACKSTAT Status Flag In Transmit mode, the ACKSTAT bit (SSPxCON2<6>) is cleared when the slave has sent an Acknowledge (ACK = 0) and is set when the slave does not Acknowledge (ACK = 1). A slave sends an Acknowledge when it has recognized its address (including a general call) or when the slave has properly received its data. 20.5.11 I2C MASTER MODE RECEPTION Master mode reception is enabled by programming the Receive Enable bit, RCEN (SSPxCON2<3>). Note: The MSSP module must be in an inactive state before the RCEN bit is set or the RCEN bit will be disregarded. The BRG begins counting, and on each rollover, the state of the SCLx pin changes (high-to-low/low-to-high) and data is shifted into the SSPxSR. After the falling edge of the eighth clock, the receive enable flag is automatically cleared, the contents of the SSPxSR are loaded into the SSPxBUF, the BF flag bit is set, the SSPxIF flag bit is set and the BRG is suspended from counting, holding SCLx low. The MSSP is now in an Idle state awaiting the next command. When the buffer is read by the CPU, the BF flag bit is automatically cleared. The user can then send an Acknowledge bit at the end of reception by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit, ACKEN (SSPxCON2<4>). 20.5.11.1 BF Status Flag In receive operation, the BF bit is set when an address or data byte is loaded into SSPxBUF from SSPxSR. It is cleared when the SSPxBUF register is read. 20.5.11.2 SSPOV Status Flag In receive operation, the SSPOV bit is set when 8 bits are received into the SSPxSR and the BF flag bit is already set from a previous reception. 20.5.11.3 WCOL Status Flag If users write the SSPxBUF when a receive is already in progress (i.e., SSPxSR is still shifting in a data byte), the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur). WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a transmit is already in progress (i.e., SSPxSR is still shifting out a data byte), the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur) after 2 TCY after the SSPxBUF write. If SSPxBUF is rewritten within 2 TCY, the WCOL bit is set and SSPxBUF is updated. This may result in a corrupted transfer. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 335 DS39974A-page 336 S Preliminary R/W PEN SEN BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SSPxIF SCLx SDAx A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 3 4 5 Cleared in software 2 6 7 8 After Start condition, SEN cleared by hardware SSPxBUF written 1 9 D7 1 SCLx held low while CPU responds to SSPxIF ACK = 0 R/W = 0 SSPxBUF written with 7-bit address and R/W, start transmit A7 Transmit Address to Slave 3 D5 4 D4 5 D3 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 SSPxBUF is written in software Cleared in software service routine from MSSP interrupt 2 D6 Transmitting Data or Second Half of 10-bit Address P Cleared in software 9 ACK From slave, clear ACKSTAT bit (SSPxCON2<6>) ACKSTAT in SSPxCON2 = 1 FIGURE 20-23: SEN = 0 Write SSPxCON2<0> (SEN = 1), Start condition begins PIC18F47J13 FAMILY I 2C™ MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (TRANSMISSION, 7-BIT OR 10-BIT ADDRESS) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. S Preliminary ACKEN SSPOV BF (SSPxSTAT<0>) SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1, while CPU responds to SSPxIF SSPxIF SCLx SDAx 1 A7 2 4 5 6 Cleared in software 3 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 Transmit Address to Slave 7 A1 8 9 R/W = 1 ACK Receiving Data from Slave 2 3 5 6 7 8 D0 9 ACK Receiving Data from Slave 2 3 4 5 6 7 Cleared in software Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence Data shifted in on falling edge of CLK 1 Cleared in software Set SSPxIF at end of receive 9 ACK is not sent ACK Bus master terminates transfer Set P bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) and SSPxIF Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence P PEN bit = 1 written here SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full 8 D0 RCEN cleared automatically Set ACKEN, start Acknowledge sequence, SDAx = ACKDT = 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Last bit is shifted into SSPxSR and contents are unloaded into SSPxBUF Cleared in software Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of receive 4 Cleared in software 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 RCEN = 1, start next receive ACK from master, SDAx = ACKDT = 0 FIGURE 20-24: Master configured as a receiver by programming SSPxCON2<3> (RCEN = 1) SEN = 0 Write to SSPxBUF occurs here, RCEN cleared ACK from Slave automatically start XMIT Write to SSPxCON2<0> (SEN = 1), begin Start condition Write to SSPxCON2<4> to start Acknowledge sequence, SDAx = ACKDT (SSPxCON2<5>) = 0 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY I2C™ MASTER MODE WAVEFORM (RECEPTION, 7-BIT ADDRESS) DS39974A-page 337 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.12 ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE TIMING 20.5.13 A Stop bit is asserted on the SDAx pin at the end of a receive/transmit by setting the Stop Sequence Enable bit, PEN (SSPxCON2<2>). At the end of a receive/transmit, the SCLx line is held low after the falling edge of the ninth clock. When the PEN bit is set, the master will assert the SDAx line low. When the SDAx line is sampled low, the BRG is reloaded and counts down to 0. When the BRG times out, the SCLx pin will be brought high and one Baud Rate Generator rollover count (TBRG) later, the SDAx pin will be deasserted. When the SDAx pin is sampled high while SCLx is high, the Stop bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) is set. A TBRG later, the PEN bit is cleared and the SSPxIF bit is set (Figure 20-26). An Acknowledge sequence is enabled by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit, ACKEN (SSPxCON2<4>). When this bit is set, the SCLx pin is pulled low and the contents of the Acknowledge data bit are presented on the SDAx pin. If the user wishes to generate an Acknowledge, then the ACKDT bit should be cleared. If not, the user should set the ACKDT bit before starting an Acknowledge sequence. The BRG then counts for one rollover period (TBRG) and the SCLx pin is deasserted (pulled high). When the SCLx pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the BRG counts for TBRG; the SCLx pin is then pulled low. Following this, the ACKEN bit is automatically cleared, the BRG is turned off and the MSSP module then goes into an inactive state (Figure 20-25). 20.5.12.1 20.5.13.1 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Stop sequence is in progress, then the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur). WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when an Acknowledge sequence is in progress, then WCOL is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur). FIGURE 20-25: STOP CONDITION TIMING ACKNOWLEDGE SEQUENCE WAVEFORM Acknowledge Sequence Starts Here, Write to SSPxCON2, ACKEN = 1, ACKDT = 0 ACKEN Automatically Cleared TBRG TBRG SDAx ACK D0 SCLx 8 9 SSPxIF SSPxIF Set at the End of Receive Note: Cleared in Software Cleared in Software SSPxIF Set at the End of Acknowledge Sequence TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. FIGURE 20-26: STOP CONDITION RECEIVE OR TRANSMIT MODE SCLx = 1 for TBRG, Followed by SDAx = 1 for TBRG after SDAx Sampled High, P bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) is Set Write to SSPxCON2, Set PEN PEN bit (SSPxCON2<2>) is Cleared by Hardware and the SSPxIF bit is Set Falling Edge of 9th Clock TBRG SCLx SDAx ACK P TBRG TBRG TBRG SCLx Brought High after TBRG SDAx Asserted Low before Rising Edge of Clock to Set up Stop Condition Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. DS39974A-page 338 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.14 SLEEP OPERATION 20.5.17 2 While in Sleep mode, the I C module can receive addresses or data and when an address match or complete byte transfer occurs, wake the processor from Sleep (if the MSSP interrupt is enabled). 20.5.15 EFFECTS OF A RESET A Reset disables the MSSP module and terminates the current transfer. 20.5.16 MULTI-MASTER MODE In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. The Start and Stop bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSP module is disabled. Control of the I2C bus may be taken when the P bit (SSPxSTAT<4>) is set, or the bus is Idle, with both the Start and Stop bits clear. When the bus is busy, enabling the MSSP interrupt will generate the interrupt when the Stop condition occurs. In multi-master operation, the SDAx line must be monitored for arbitration to see if the signal level is the expected output level. This check is performed in hardware with the result placed in the BCLxIF bit. The states where arbitration can be lost are: • • • • • Address Transfer Data Transfer A Start Condition A Repeated Start Condition An Acknowledge Condition MULTI -MASTER COMMUNICATION, BUS COLLISION AND BUS ARBITRATION Multi-Master mode support is achieved by bus arbitration. When the master outputs address/data bits onto the SDAx pin, arbitration takes place when the master outputs a ‘1’ on SDAx, by letting SDAx float high, and another master asserts a ‘0’. When the SCLx pin floats high, data should be stable. If the expected data on SDAx is a ‘1’ and the data sampled on the SDAx pin = 0, then a bus collision has taken place. The master will set the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLxIF, and reset the I2C port to its Idle state (Figure 20-27). If a transmit was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the transmission is Halted, the BF flag is cleared, the SDAx and SCLx lines are deasserted and the SSPxBUF can be written to. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine, and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. If a Start, Repeated Start, Stop or Acknowledge condition was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the condition is aborted, the SDAx and SCLx lines are deasserted, and the respective control bits in the SSPxCON2 register are cleared. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine (ISR), and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. The master will continue to monitor the SDAx and SCLx pins. If a Stop condition occurs, the SSPxIF bit will be set. A write to the SSPxBUF will start the transmission of data at the first data bit regardless of where the transmitter left off when the bus collision occurred. In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. Control of the I2C bus can be taken when the Stop bit is set in the SSPxSTAT register, or the bus is Idle and the Start and Stop bits are cleared. FIGURE 20-27: BUS COLLISION TIMING FOR TRANSMIT AND ACKNOWLEDGE Data Changes while SCLx = 0 SDAx Line Pulled Low by Another Source SDAx Released by Master Sample SDAx. While SCLx is High, Data doesn’t Match what is Driven by the Master; Bus Collision has Occurred SDAx SCLx Set Bus Collision Interrupt (BCLxIF) BCLxIF 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 339 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.17.1 Bus Collision During a Start Condition During a Start condition, a bus collision occurs if: a) b) SDAx or SCLx is sampled low at the beginning of the Start condition (Figure 20-28). SCLx is sampled low before SDAx is asserted low (Figure 20-29). During a Start condition, both the SDAx and the SCLx pins are monitored. If the SDAx pin is sampled low during this count, the BRG is reset and the SDAx line is asserted early (Figure 20-30). If, however, a ‘1’ is sampled on the SDAx pin, the SDAx pin is asserted low at the end of the BRG count. The BRG is then reloaded and counts down to 0. If the SCLx pin is sampled as ‘0’ during this time, a bus collision does not occur. At the end of the BRG count, the SCLx pin is asserted low. Note: If the SDAx pin is already low, or the SCLx pin is already low, then all of the following occur: • The Start condition is aborted • The BCLxIF flag is set • The MSSP module is reset to its inactive state (Figure 20-28) The Start condition begins with the SDAx and SCLx pins deasserted. When the SDAx pin is sampled high, the BRG is loaded from SSPxADD<6:0> and counts down to 0. If the SCLx pin is sampled low while SDAx is high, a bus collision occurs because it is assumed that another master is attempting to drive a data ‘1’ during the Start condition. FIGURE 20-28: The reason that a bus collision is not a factor during a Start condition is that no two bus masters can assert a Start condition at the exact same time. Therefore, one master will always assert SDAx before the other. This condition does not cause a bus collision because the two masters must be allowed to arbitrate the first address following the Start condition. If the address is the same, arbitration must be allowed to continue into the data portion, Repeated Start or Stop conditions. BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SDAx ONLY) SDAx goes Low Before the SEN bit is Set; Set BCLxIF, S bit and SSPxIF Set because SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1 SDAx SCLx Set SEN, Enable Start Condition if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 SEN Cleared Automatically because of Bus Collision; MSSPx module Reset into Idle State SEN BCLxIF SDAx Sampled Low Before Start Condition; Set BCLxIF; S bit and SSPxIF Set because SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1 SSPxIF and BCLxIF are Cleared in Software S SSPxIF SSPxIF and BCLxIF are Cleared in Software DS39974A-page 340 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 20-29: BUS COLLISION DURING START CONDITION (SCLx = 0) SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1 TBRG TBRG SDAx Set SEN, Enable Start Sequence if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 SCLx SCLx = 0 before SDAx = 0, Bus Collision Occurs; Set BCLxIF SEN SCLx = 0 before BRG Time-out; Bus Collision Occurs. Set BCLxIF BCLxIF Interrupt Cleared in Software S ‘0’ ‘0’ SSPxIF ‘0’ ‘0’ FIGURE 20-30: BRG RESET DUE TO SDAx ARBITRATION DURING START CONDITION SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1 Set S Less than TBRG SDAx Set SSPxIF TBRG SDAx Pulled Low by Other Master; Reset BRG and Assert SDAx. SCLx S SCLx Pulled Low after BRG Time-out SEN BCLxIF Set SEN, Enable Start Sequence if SDAx = 1, SCLx = 1 ‘0’ S SSPxIF SDAx = 0, SCLx = 1, Set SSPxIF 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Interrupts Cleared in Software DS39974A-page 341 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.17.2 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition If SDAx is low, a bus collision has occurred (i.e., another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘0’; see Figure 20-31). If SDAx is sampled high, the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. If SDAx goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out, no bus collision occurs because no two masters can assert SDAx at exactly the same time. During a Repeated Start condition, a bus collision occurs if: a) b) A low level is sampled on SDAx when SCLx goes from a low level to a high level. SCLx goes low before SDAx is asserted low, indicating that another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’. If SCLx goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out and SDAx has not already been asserted, a bus collision occurs. In this case, another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’ during the Repeated Start condition (see Figure 20-32). When the user deasserts SDAx and the pin is allowed to float high, the BRG is loaded with SSPxADD<6:0> and counts down to 0. The SCLx pin is then deasserted and when sampled high, the SDAx pin is sampled. FIGURE 20-31: If, at the end of the BRG time-out, both SCLx and SDAx are still high, the SDAx pin is driven low and the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. At the end of the count, regardless of the status of the SCLx pin, the SCLx pin is driven low and the Repeated Start condition is complete. BUS COLLISION DURING A REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 1) SDAx SCLx Sample SDAx when SCLx goes High; If SDAx = 0, Set BCLxIF and Release SDAx and SCLx RSEN BCLxIF Cleared in Software S ‘0’ SSPxIF ‘0’ FIGURE 20-32: BUS COLLISION DURING REPEATED START CONDITION (CASE 2) TBRG TBRG SDAx SCLx BCLxIF SCLx goes Low Before SDAx, Set BCLxIF; Release SDAx and SCLx Interrupt Cleared in Software RSEN ‘0’ S SSPxIF DS39974A-page 342 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 20.5.17.3 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition The Stop condition begins with SDAx asserted low. When SDAx is sampled low, the SCLx pin is allowed to float. When the pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the BRG is loaded with SSPxADD<6:0> and counts down to 0. After the BRG times out, SDAx is sampled. If SDAx is sampled low, a bus collision has occurred. This is due to another master attempting to drive a data ‘0’ (Figure 20-33). If the SCLx pin is sampled low before SDAx is allowed to float high, a bus collision occurs. This is another case of another master attempting to drive a data ‘0’ (Figure 20-34). Bus collision occurs during a Stop condition if: a) b) After the SDAx pin has been deasserted and allowed to float high, SDAx is sampled low after the BRG has timed out. After the SCLx pin is deasserted, SCLx is sampled low before SDAx goes high. FIGURE 20-33: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 1) TBRG TBRG TBRG SDAx SDAx Sampled Low after TBRG, Set BCLxIF SDAx Asserted Low SCLx PEN BCLxIF P ‘0’ SSPxIF ‘0’ FIGURE 20-34: BUS COLLISION DURING A STOP CONDITION (CASE 2) TBRG TBRG TBRG SDAx SCLx goes Low Before SDAx goes High, Set BCLxIF Assert SDAx SCLx PEN BCLxIF P ‘0’ SSPxIF ‘0’ 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 343 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 20-4: Name INTCON REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH I2C™ OPERATION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF PIR1 PMPIF (3) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF PIE1 PMPIE(3) ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE IPR1 PMPIP(3) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP HLVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE RTCCIP IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP TRISD(3) TRISD7 TRISD6 TRISD5 TRISD4 TRISD3 TRISD2 TRISD1 TRISD0 TRISC TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 TRISB SSP1BUF MSSP1 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register MSSP1 Address Register (I2C™ Slave mode), MSSP1 Baud Rate Reload Register (I2C Master mode) SSP1ADD (1) SSPxMSK MSK7 MSK6 MSK5 MSK4 MSK3 MSK2 MSK1 MSK0 SSPxCON1 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP SSPM3 SSPM2 SSPM1 SSPM0 SSPxCON2 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN GCEN ACKSTAT ADMSK5(2) ADMSK4(2) ADMSK3(2) ADMSK2(2) ADMSK1(2) SEN SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF SSPxSTAT SSP2BUF MSSP2 Receive Buffer/Transmit Register SSP2ADD MSSP2 Address Register (I2C Slave mode), MSSP2 Baud Rate Reload Register (I2C Master mode) Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the MSSPx module in I2C™ mode. SSPxMSK shares the same address in SFR space as SSPxADD, but is only accessible in certain I2C Slave mode operations in 7-Bit Masking mode. See Section 20.5.3.4 “7-Bit Address Masking Mode” for more details. Alternate bit definitions for use in I2C Slave mode operations only. These bits are only available on 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 344 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.0 ENHANCED UNIVERSAL SYNCHRONOUS ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER TRANSMITTER (EUSART) The Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) module is one of two serial I/O modules. (Generically, the EUSART is also known as a Serial Communications Interface or SCI.) The EUSART can be configured as a full-duplex asynchronous system that can communicate with peripheral devices, such as CRT terminals and personal computers. It can also be configured as a half-duplex synchronous system that can communicate with peripheral devices, such as A/D or D/A integrated circuits, serial EEPROMs and so on. The Enhanced USART module implements additional features, including Automatic Baud Rate Detection and calibration, automatic wake-up on Sync Break reception, and 12-bit Break character transmit. These make it ideally suited for use in Local Interconnect Network bus (LIN/J2602 bus) systems. All members of the PIC18F47J13 family are equipped with two independent EUSART modules, referred to as EUSART1 and EUSART2. They can be configured in the following modes: • Asynchronous (full-duplex) with: - Auto-wake-up on character reception - Auto-baud calibration - 12-bit Break character transmission • Synchronous – Master (half-duplex) with selectable clock polarity • Synchronous – Slave (half-duplex) with selectable clock polarity The pins of EUSART1 and EUSART2 are multiplexed with the functions of PORTC (RC6/CCP9/PMA5/TX1/CK1/RP17 and RC7/CCP10/PMA4/RX1/DT1/RP18), and remapped (RPn1/TX2/CK2 and RPn2/RX2/DT2), respectively. In order to configure these pins as an EUSART: • For EUSART1: - SPEN bit (RCSTA1<7>) must be set (= 1) - TRISC<7> bit must be set (= 1) - TRISC<6> bit must be cleared (= 0) for Asynchronous and Synchronous Master modes - TRISC<6> bit must be set (= 1) for Synchronous Slave mode • For EUSART2: - SPEN bit (RCSTA2<7>) must be set (= 1) - TRIS bit for RPn2/RX2/DT2 = 1 - TRIS bit for RPn1/TX2/CK2 = 0 for Asynchronous and Synchronous Master modes - TRISC<6> bit must be set (= 1) for Synchronous Slave mode Note: The EUSART control will automatically reconfigure the pin from input to output as needed. The TXx/CKx I/O pins have an optional open-drain output capability. By default, when this pin is used by the EUSART as an output, it will function as a standard push-pull CMOS output. The TXx/CKx I/O pins’ open-drain, output feature can be enabled by setting the corresponding UxOD bit in the ODCON2 register. For more details, see Section 20.3.3 “Open-Drain Output Option”. The operation of each Enhanced USART module is controlled through three registers: • Transmit Status and Control (TXSTAx) • Receive Status and Control (RCSTAx) • Baud Rate Control (BAUDCONx) These are covered in detail in Register 21-1, Register 21-2 and Register 21-3, respectively. Note: 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Throughout this section, references to register and bit names that may be associated with a specific EUSART module are referred to generically by the use of ‘x’ in place of the specific module number. Thus, “RCSTAx” might refer to the Receive Status register for either EUSART1 or EUSART2. DS39974A-page 345 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 21-1: TXSTAx: TRANSMIT STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER (1, ACCESS FADh; 2, FA8h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-1 R/W-0 CSRC TX9 TXEN(1) SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 CSRC: Clock Source Select bit Asynchronous mode: Don’t care. Synchronous mode: 1 = Master mode (clock generated internally from BRG) 0 = Slave mode (clock from external source) bit 6 TX9: 9-Bit Transmit Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit transmission 0 = Selects 8-bit transmission bit 5 TXEN: Transmit Enable bit(1) 1 = Transmit is enabled and the TXx/CKx pin is configured as an output 0 = Transmit is disabled bit 4 SYNC: EUSART Mode Select bit 1 = Synchronous mode 0 = Asynchronous mode bit 3 SENDB: Send Break Character bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Send Sync Break on next transmission (cleared by hardware upon completion) 0 = Sync Break transmission completed Synchronous mode: Don’t care. bit 2 BRGH: High Baud Rate Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = High speed 0 = Low speed Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode. bit 1 TRMT: Transmit Shift Register Status bit 1 = TSR is empty 0 = TSR is full bit 0 TX9D: 9th bit of Transmit Data Can be address/data bit or a parity bit. Note 1: SREN/CREN overrides TXEN in Sync mode. DS39974A-page 346 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 21-2: RCSTAx: RECEIVE STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER (1, ACCESS FACh; 2, FC9h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R-x SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 SPEN: Serial Port Enable bit 1 = Serial port enabled 0 = Serial port disabled (held in Reset) bit 6 RX9: 9-Bit Receive Enable bit 1 = Selects 9-bit reception 0 = Selects 8-bit reception bit 5 SREN: Single Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: Don’t care. Synchronous mode – Master: 1 = Enables single receive 0 = Disables single receive This bit is cleared after reception is complete. Synchronous mode – Slave: Don’t care. bit 4 CREN: Continuous Receive Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Enables receiver 0 = Disables receiver Synchronous mode: 1 = Enables continuous receive until enable bit, CREN, is cleared (CREN overrides SREN) 0 = Disables continuous receive bit 3 ADDEN: Address Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode 9-Bit (RX9 = 1): 1 = Enables address detection, enables interrupt and loads the receive buffer when RSR<8> is set 0 = Disables address detection, all bytes are received and the ninth bit can be used as a parity bit Asynchronous mode 8-Bit (RX9 = 0): Don’t care. bit 2 FERR: Framing Error bit 1 = Framing error (can be cleared by reading the RCREGx register and receiving the next valid byte) 0 = No framing error bit 1 OERR: Overrun Error bit 1 = Overrun error (can be cleared by clearing bit, CREN) 0 = No overrun error bit 0 RX9D: 9th bit of Received Data This can be an address/data bit or a parity bit and must be calculated by user firmware. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 347 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 21-3: BAUDCONx: BAUD RATE CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS F7Eh, F7Ch) R/W-0 R-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ABDOVF RCIDL RXDTP TXCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 ABDOVF: Auto-Baud Acquisition Rollover Status bit 1 = A BRG rollover has occurred during Auto-Baud Rate Detect mode (must be cleared in software) 0 = No BRG rollover has occurred bit 6 RCIDL: Receive Operation Idle Status bit 1 = Receive operation is Idle 0 = Receive operation is active bit 5 RXDTP: Data/Receive Polarity Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Receive data (RXx) is inverted (active-low) 0 = Receive data (RXx) is not inverted (active-high) Synchronous mode: 1 = Data (DTx) is inverted (active-low) 0 = Data (DTx) is not inverted (active-high) bit 4 TXCKP: Synchronous Clock Polarity Select bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Idle state for transmit (TXx) is a low level 0 = Idle state for transmit (TXx) is a high level Synchronous mode: 1 = Idle state for clock (CKx) is a high level 0 = Idle state for clock (CKx) is a low level bit 3 BRG16: 16-Bit Baud Rate Register Enable bit 1 = 16-bit Baud Rate Generator – SPBRGHx and SPBRGx 0 = 8-bit Baud Rate Generator – SPBRGx only (Compatible mode), SPBRGHx value is ignored bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 WUE: Wake-up Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = EUSART will continue to sample the RXx pin – interrupt is generated on the falling edge; bit is cleared in hardware on the following rising edge 0 = RXx pin is not monitored or the rising edge detected Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode. bit 0 ABDEN: Auto-Baud Detect Enable bit Asynchronous mode: 1 = Enable baud rate measurement on the next character; requires reception of a Sync field (55h); cleared in hardware upon completion 0 = Baud rate measurement disabled or completed Synchronous mode: Unused in this mode. DS39974A-page 348 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.1 Baud Rate Generator (BRG) The BRG is a dedicated, 8-bit or 16-bit generator that supports both the Asynchronous and Synchronous modes of the EUSART. By default, the BRG operates in 8-bit mode. Setting the BRG16 bit (BAUDCONx<3>) selects 16-bit mode. The SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register pair controls the period of a free-running timer. In Asynchronous mode, the BRGH (TXSTAx<2>) and BRG16 (BAUDCONx<3>) bits also control the baud rate. In Synchronous mode, BRGH is ignored. Table 21-1 provides the formula for computation of the baud rate for different EUSART modes, which only apply in Master mode (internally generated clock). Given the desired baud rate and FOSC, the nearest integer value for the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers can be calculated using the formulas in Table 21-1. From this, the error in baud rate can be determined. An example calculation is provided in Example 21-1. Typical baud rates and error values for the various Asynchronous modes are provided in Table 21-2. It may be advantageous to use the high baud rate (BRGH = 1) or the 16-bit BRG to reduce the baud rate error, or achieve a slow baud rate for a fast oscillator frequency. TABLE 21-1: Writing a new value to the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers causes the BRG timer to be reset (or cleared). This ensures the BRG does not wait for a timer overflow before outputting the new baud rate. When operated in the Synchronous mode, SPBRGH:SPBRG values of 0000h and 0001h are not supported. In the Asynchronous mode, all BRG values may be used. 21.1.1 OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED MODES The device clock is used to generate the desired baud rate. When one of the power-managed modes is entered, the new clock source may be operating at a different frequency. This may require an adjustment to the value in the SPBRGx register pair. 21.1.2 SAMPLING The data on the RXx pin (either RC7/CCP10/PMA4/ RX1/DT1/RP18 or RPn/RX2/DT2) is sampled three times by a majority detect circuit to determine if a high or a low level is present at the RXx pin. BAUD RATE FORMULAS Configuration Bits BRG/EUSART Mode Baud Rate Formula 0 8-bit/Asynchronous FOSC/[64 (n + 1)] 0 1 8-bit/Asynchronous 0 1 0 16-bit/Asynchronous 0 1 1 16-bit/Asynchronous 1 0 x 8-bit/Synchronous 1 1 x 16-bit/Synchronous SYNC BRG16 BRGH 0 0 0 FOSC/[16 (n + 1)] FOSC/[4 (n + 1)] Legend: x = Don’t care, n = value of SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register pair 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 349 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY EXAMPLE 21-1: CALCULATING BAUD RATE ERROR For a device with Fosc of 16 MHz, desired baud rate of 9600, Asynchronous mode, and 8-bit BRG: Desired Baud Rate = Fosc/(64 ([SPBRGHx:SPBRGx] + 1)) Solving for SPBRGHx:SPBRGx: X = ((Fosc/Desired Baud Rate)/64) – 1 = ((16000000/9600)/64) – 1 = [25.042] = 25 Calculated Baud Rate=16000000/(64 (25 + 1)) = 9615 Error = (Calculated Baud Rate – Desired Baud Rate)/Desired Baud Rate = (9615 – 9600)/9600 = 0.16% TABLE 21-2: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH BAUD RATE GENERATOR Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TXSTAx CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D RCSTAx SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D ABDOVF RCIDL RXDTP TXCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN BAUDCONx SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator High Byte SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Low Byte Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the BRG. DS39974A-page 350 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 21-3: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz FOSC = 20.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — — — — — 1.221 2.441 1.73 255 9.615 0.16 64 19.531 1.73 56.818 -1.36 125.000 8.51 Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.3 1.2 — — 2.4 9.6 19.2 57.6 115.2 FOSC = 10.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — 1.73 — 255 — 1.202 2.404 0.16 129 9.766 1.73 31 31 19.531 1.73 15 10 62.500 8.51 4 4 104.167 -9.58 2 SPBRG value SPBRG value FOSC = 8.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — 0.16 — 129 — 1.201 — -0.16 — 103 2.404 0.16 64 2.403 -0.16 51 9.766 1.73 15 9.615 -0.16 12 19.531 1.73 7 — — — 52.083 -9.58 2 — — — 78.125 -32.18 1 — — — SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz FOSC = 2.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.16 0.16 207 51 0.300 1.201 2.404 0.16 25 8.929 -6.99 6 19.2 20.833 8.51 57.6 62.500 8.51 115.2 62.500 -45.75 Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.3 1.2 0.300 1.202 2.4 9.6 FOSC = 1.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error -0.16 -0.16 103 25 0.300 1.201 -0.16 -0.16 51 12 2.403 -0.16 12 — — — — — — — — — 2 — — — — — — 0 — — — — — — 0 — — — — — — SPBRG value SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz FOSC = 20.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — — — — — — — — — Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.3 1.2 — — 2.4 — SPBRG value FOSC = 10.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — — — — — — — — 2.441 SPBRG value FOSC = 8.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — — — — — — — — — — 1.73 255 2.403 -0.16 207 SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) 9.6 9.766 1.73 255 9.615 0.16 129 9.615 0.16 64 9615. -0.16 51 19.2 19.231 0.16 129 19.231 0.16 64 19.531 1.73 31 19.230 -0.16 25 57.6 58.140 0.94 42 56.818 -1.36 21 56.818 -1.36 10 55.555 3.55 8 115.2 113.636 -1.36 21 113.636 -1.36 10 125.000 8.51 4 — — — SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz FOSC = 2.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — 207 — 1.201 — -0.16 0.16 103 2.403 0.16 25 9.615 19.231 0.16 12 57.6 62.500 8.51 115.2 125.000 8.51 Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.3 1.2 — 1.202 — 0.16 2.4 2.404 9.6 9.615 19.2 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. FOSC = 1.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error — 103 0.300 1.201 -0.16 -0.16 207 51 -0.16 51 2.403 -0.16 25 -0.16 12 — — — — — — — — — 3 — — — — — — 1 — — — — — — SPBRG value SPBRG value Preliminary SPBRG value (decimal) DS39974A-page 351 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 21-3: BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES (CONTINUED) SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) % Error FOSC = 20.000 MHz SPBRG value (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error FOSC = 10.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) SPBRG value % Error FOSC = 8.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) 0.3 0.300 0.00 8332 0.300 0.02 4165 0.300 0.02 2082 0.300 -0.04 1.2 1.200 0.02 2082 1.200 -0.03 1041 1.200 -0.03 520 1.201 -0.16 1665 415 2.4 2.402 0.06 1040 2.399 -0.03 520 2.404 0.16 259 2.403 -0.16 207 9.6 9.615 0.16 259 9.615 0.16 129 9.615 0.16 64 9.615 -0.16 51 19.2 19.231 0.16 129 19.231 0.16 64 19.531 1.73 31 19.230 -0.16 25 57.6 58.140 0.94 42 56.818 -1.36 21 56.818 -1.36 10 55.555 3.55 8 115.2 113.636 -1.36 21 113.636 -1.36 10 125.000 8.51 4 — — — SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 4.000 MHz FOSC = 2.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.04 832 0.300 0.16 207 1.201 2.404 0.16 103 9.6 9.615 0.16 19.2 19.231 57.6 62.500 115.2 125.000 FOSC = 1.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error -0.16 415 0.300 -0.16 -0.16 103 1.201 -0.16 51 2.403 -0.16 51 2.403 -0.16 25 25 9.615 -0.16 12 — — — 0.16 12 — — — — — — 8.51 3 — — — — — — 8.51 1 — — — — — — Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.3 0.300 1.2 1.202 2.4 SPBRG value SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) 207 SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) FOSC = 40.000 MHz FOSC = 20.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.00 33332 0.300 0.00 8332 1.200 0.02 4165 Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.3 0.300 1.2 1.200 2.4 2.400 SPBRG value FOSC = 10.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.00 16665 0.300 0.02 4165 1.200 2.400 0.02 2082 2.402 SPBRG value FOSC = 8.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.00 8332 0.300 -0.01 6665 0.02 2082 1.200 -0.04 1665 0.06 1040 2.400 -0.04 832 SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) 9.6 9.606 0.06 1040 9.596 -0.03 520 9.615 0.16 259 9.615 -0.16 207 19.2 19.193 -0.03 520 19.231 0.16 259 19.231 0.16 129 19.230 -0.16 103 57.6 57.803 0.35 172 57.471 -0.22 86 58.140 0.94 42 57.142 0.79 34 115.2 114.943 -0.22 86 116.279 0.94 42 113.636 -1.36 21 117.647 -2.12 16 SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 BAUD RATE (K) 0.3 1.2 FOSC = 4.000 MHz Actual Rate (K) % Error 0.300 1.200 0.01 0.04 FOSC = 2.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 3332 832 0.300 1.201 -0.04 -0.16 SPBRG value FOSC = 1.000 MHz (decimal) Actual Rate (K) % Error 1665 415 0.300 1.201 -0.04 -0.16 832 207 103 SPBRG value SPBRG value (decimal) 2.4 2.404 0.16 415 2.403 -0.16 207 2.403 -0.16 9.6 9.615 0.16 103 9.615 -0.16 51 9.615 -0.16 25 19.2 19.231 0.16 51 19.230 -0.16 25 19.230 -0.16 12 57.6 58.824 2.12 16 55.555 3.55 8 — — — 115.2 111.111 -3.55 8 — — — — — — DS39974A-page 352 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.1.3 AUTO-BAUD RATE DETECT The Enhanced USART module supports the automatic detection and calibration of baud rate. This feature is active only in Asynchronous mode and while the WUE bit is clear. Note 1: If the WUE bit is set with the ABDEN bit, Auto-Baud Rate Detection will occur on the byte following the Break character. 2: It is up to the user to determine that the incoming character baud rate is within the range of the selected BRG clock source. Some combinations of oscillator frequency and EUSART baud rates are not possible due to bit error rates. Overall system timing and communication baud rates must be taken into consideration when using the Auto-Baud Rate Detection feature. The automatic baud rate measurement sequence (Figure 21-1) begins whenever a Start bit is received and the ABDEN bit is set. The calculation is self-averaging. In the Auto-Baud Rate Detect (ABD) mode, the clock to the BRG is reversed. Rather than the BRG clocking the incoming RXx signal, the RXx signal is timing the BRG. In ABD mode, the internal BRG is used as a counter to time the bit period of the incoming serial byte stream. Once the ABDEN bit is set, the state machine will clear the BRG and look for a Start bit. The ABD must receive a byte with the value, 55h (ASCII “U”, which is also the LIN/J2602 bus Sync character), in order to calculate the proper bit rate. The measurement is taken over both a low and high bit time in order to minimize any effects caused by asymmetry of the incoming signal. After a Start bit, the SPBRGx begins counting up, using the preselected clock source on the first rising edge of RXx. After eight bits on the RXx pin, or the fifth rising edge, an accumulated value totalling the proper BRG period is left in the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx register pair. Once the 5th edge is seen (this should correspond to the Stop bit), the ABDEN bit is automatically cleared. If a rollover of the BRG occurs (an overflow from FFFFh to 0000h), the event is trapped by the ABDOVF status bit (BAUDCONx<7>). It is set in hardware by BRG rollovers and can be set or cleared by the user in software. ABD mode remains active after rollover events and the ABDEN bit remains set (Figure 21-2). While calibrating the baud rate period, the BRG registers are clocked at 1/8th the preconfigured clock rate. Note that the BRG clock can be configured by the BRG16 and BRGH bits. The BRG16 bit must be set to use both SPBRG1 and SPBRGH1 as a 16-bit counter. This allows the user to verify that no carry occurred for 8-bit modes by checking for 00h in the SPBRGHx register. 3: To maximize baud rate range, it is recommended to set BRG16 bit if auto-baud feature is used. TABLE 21-4: BRG COUNTER CLOCK RATES BRG16 BRGH BRG Counter Clock 0 0 FOSC/512 0 1 FOSC/128 1 0 FOSC/128 1 1 FOSC/32 21.1.3.1 ABD and EUSART Transmission Since the BRG clock is reversed during ABD acquisition, the EUSART transmitter cannot be used during ABD. This means that whenever the ABDEN bit is set, TXREGx cannot be written to. Users should also ensure that ABDEN does not become set during a transmit sequence. Failing to do this may result in unpredictable EUSART operation. Refer to Table 21-4 for counter clock rates to the BRG. While the ABD sequence takes place, the EUSART state machine is held in Idle. The RCxIF interrupt is set once the fifth rising edge on RXx is detected. The value in the RCREGx needs to be read to clear the RCxIF interrupt. The contents of RCREGx should be discarded. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 353 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 21-1: BRG Value AUTOMATIC BAUD RATE CALCULATION XXXXh RXx Pin 0000h 001Ch Start Edge #1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Edge #2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Edge #3 Bit 5 Bit 4 Edge #4 Bit 7 Bit 6 Edge #5 Stop Bit BRG Clock Auto-Cleared Set by User ABDEN bit RCxIF bit (Interrupt) Read RCREGx SPBRGx XXXXh 1Ch SPBRGHx XXXXh 00h Note: The ABD sequence requires the EUSART module to be configured in Asynchronous mode and WUE = 0. FIGURE 21-2: BRG OVERFLOW SEQUENCE BRG Clock ABDEN bit RXx Pin Start Bit 0 ABDOVF bit FFFFh BRG Value DS39974A-page 354 XXXXh 0000h 0000h Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.2 Once the TXREGx register transfers the data to the TSR register (occurs in one TCY), the TXREGx register is empty and the TXxIF flag bit is set. This interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the interrupt enable bit, TXxIE. TXxIF will be set regardless of the state of TXxIE; it cannot be cleared in software. TXxIF is also not cleared immediately upon loading TXREGx, but becomes valid in the second instruction cycle following the load instruction. Polling TXxIF immediately following a load of TXREGx will return invalid results. EUSART Asynchronous Mode The Asynchronous mode of operation is selected by clearing the SYNC bit (TXSTAx<4>). In this mode, the EUSART uses standard Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ) format (one Start bit, eight or nine data bits and one Stop bit). The most common data format is 8 bits. An on-chip dedicated 8-bit/16-bit BRG can be used to derive standard baud rate frequencies from the oscillator. The EUSART transmits and receives the LSb first. The EUSART’s transmitter and receiver are functionally independent but use the same data format and baud rate. The BRG produces a clock, either x16 or x64 of the bit shift rate, depending on the BRGH and BRG16 bits (TXSTAx<2> and BAUDCONx<3>). Parity is not supported by the hardware but can be implemented in software and stored as the ninth data bit. While TXxIF indicates the status of the TXREGx register; another bit, TRMT (TXSTAx<1>), shows the status of the TSR register. TRMT is a read-only bit, which is set when the TSR register is empty. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit, so the user has to poll this bit in order to determine if the TSR register is empty. When operating in Asynchronous mode, the EUSART module consists of the following important elements: • • • • • • • Note 1: The TSR register is not mapped in data memory, so it is not available to the user. Baud Rate Generator Sampling Circuit Asynchronous Transmitter Asynchronous Receiver Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break Character 12-Bit Break Character Transmit Auto-Baud Rate Detection 21.2.1 2: Flag bit, TXxIF, is set when enable bit, TXEN, is set. To set up an Asynchronous Transmission: 1. 2. EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMITTER 3. 4. Figure 21-3 displays the EUSART transmitter block diagram. 5. The heart of the transmitter is the Transmit (Serial) Shift Register (TSR). The shift register obtains its data from the Read/Write Transmit Buffer register, TXREGx. The TXREGx register is loaded with data in software. The TSR register is not loaded until the Stop bit has been transmitted from the previous load. As soon as the Stop bit is transmitted, the TSR is loaded with new data from the TXREGx register (if available). FIGURE 21-3: 6. 7. 8. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing bit, SYNC, and setting bit, SPEN. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TXxIE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set transmit bit, TX9; can be used as an address/data bit. Enable the transmission by setting bit, TXEN, which will also set bit, TXxIF. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit, TX9D. Load data to the TXREGx register (starts transmission). If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. EUSART TRANSMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus TXxIF TXREGx Register TXxIE 8 MSb (8) LSb Pin Buffer and Control 0 TSR Register TXx Pin Interrupt TXEN Baud Rate CLK TRMT BRG16 SPBRGHx SPBRGx Baud Rate Generator 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. SPEN TX9 TX9D Preliminary DS39974A-page 355 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 21-4: ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Write to TXREGx Word 1 BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx (pin) Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 1 TXxIF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg. Empty Flag) 1 TCY Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) FIGURE 21-5: ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (BACK-TO-BACK) Write to TXREGx Word 2 Word 1 BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx (pin) Start bit 1 TCY TXxIF bit (Interrupt Reg. Flag) bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit bit 0 Word 2 Word 1 1 TCY Word 1 Transmit Shift Reg. TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) Note: bit 0 Word 2 Transmit Shift Reg. This timing diagram shows two consecutive transmissions. TABLE 21-5: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF PIR1 PMPIF(1) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF PIE1 PMPIE(1) ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE IPR1 PMPIP(1) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCIP SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D RCSTAx TXREGx EUSARTx Transmit Register TXSTAx BAUDCONx CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D ABDOVF RCIDL RXDTP TXCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN CCP10OD CCP9OD U2OD U1OD SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte ODCON2 — — — — Legend: — = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous transmission. Note 1: These bits are only available on 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 356 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.2.2 EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER 21.2.3 The receiver block diagram is displayed in Figure 21-6. The data is received on the RXx pin and drives the data recovery block. The data recovery block is actually a high-speed shifter, operating at x16 times the baud rate, whereas the main receive serial shifter operates at the bit rate or at FOSC. This mode would typically be used in RS-232 systems. This mode would typically be used in RS-485 systems. To set up an Asynchronous Reception with Address Detect Enable: 1. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. 2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing the SYNC bit and setting the SPEN bit. 3. If interrupts are required, set the RCEN bit and select the desired priority level with the RCxIP bit. 4. Set the RX9 bit to enable 9-bit reception. 5. Set the ADDEN bit to enable address detect. 6. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. 7. The RCxIF bit will be set when reception is complete. The interrupt will be Acknowledged if the RCxIE and GIE bits are set. 8. Read the RCSTAx register to determine if any error occurred during reception, as well as read bit 9 of data (if applicable). 9. Read RCREGx to determine if the device is being addressed. 10. If any error occurred, clear the CREN bit. 11. If the device has been addressed, clear the ADDEN bit to allow all received data into the receive buffer and interrupt the CPU. To set up an Asynchronous Reception: 1. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. 2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing bit, SYNC, and setting bit, SPEN. 3. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RCxIE. 4. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. 5. Enable the reception by setting bit, CREN. 6. Flag bit, RCxIF, will be set when reception is complete and an interrupt will be generated if enable bit, RCxIE, was set. 7. Read the RCSTAx register to get the ninth bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. 8. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREGx register. 9. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing enable bit, CREN. 10. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. FIGURE 21-6: SETTING UP 9-BIT MODE WITH ADDRESS DETECT EUSARTx RECEIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM CREN OERR FERR x64 Baud Rate CLK BRG16 SPBRGHx SPBRGx Baud Rate Generator 64 or 16 or 4 RSR Register MSb Stop (8) 7 LSb 1 0 Start RX9 Pin Buffer and Control Data Recovery RXx RX9D RCREGx Register 2-Byte FIFO SPEN 8 Interrupt RCxIF Data Bus RCxIE 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 357 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 21-7: ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Start bit RXx (pin) bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Rcv Shift Reg Rcv Buffer Reg Start bit bit 0 Stop bit Start bit bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 2 RCREGx Word 1 RCREGx Read Rcv Buffer Reg RCREGx bit 7/8 RCxIF (Interrupt Flag) OERR bit CREN Note: This timing diagram shows three words appearing on the RXx input. The RCREGx (Receive Buffer) is read after the third word causing the OERR (Overrun) bit to be set. TABLE 21-6: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF PIR1 PMPIF(1) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF PIE1 PMPIE(1) ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE IPR1 PMPIP(1) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCIP SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D RCSTAx RCREGx EUSARTx Receive Register TXSTAx BAUDCONx CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D ABDOVF RCIDL RXDTP TXCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator High Byte SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Low Byte Legend: — = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous reception. Note 1: These bits are only available on 44-pin devices. 21.2.4 AUTO-WAKE-UP ON SYNC BREAK CHARACTER During Sleep mode, all clocks to the EUSART are suspended. Because of this, the BRG is inactive and a proper byte reception cannot be performed. The auto-wake-up feature allows the controller to wake-up due to activity on the RXx/DTx line while the EUSART is operating in Asynchronous mode. The auto-wake-up feature is enabled by setting the WUE bit (BAUDCONx<1>). Once set, the typical receive sequence on RXx/DTx is disabled and the EUSART remains in an Idle state, monitoring for a DS39974A-page 358 wake-up event independent of the CPU mode. A wake-up event consists of a high-to-low transition on the RXx/DTx line. (This coincides with the start of a Sync Break or a Wake-up Signal character for the LIN/J2602 protocol.) Following a wake-up event, the module generates an RCxIF interrupt. The interrupt is generated synchronously to the Q clocks in normal operating modes (Figure 21-8) and asynchronously if the device is in Sleep mode (Figure 21-9). The interrupt condition is cleared by reading the RCREGx register. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.2.4.2 The WUE bit is automatically cleared once a low-to-high transition is observed on the RXx line following the wake-up event. At this point, the EUSART module is in Idle mode and returns to normal operation. This signals to the user that the Sync Break event is over. 21.2.4.1 The timing of WUE and RCxIF events may cause some confusion when it comes to determining the validity of received data. As noted, setting the WUE bit places the EUSART in an Idle mode. The wake-up event causes a receive interrupt by setting the RCxIF bit. The WUE bit is cleared after this when a rising edge is seen on RXx/DTx. The interrupt condition is then cleared by reading the RCREGx register. Ordinarily, the data in RCREGx will be dummy data and should be discarded. Special Considerations Using Auto-Wake-up Since auto-wake-up functions by sensing rising edge transitions on RXx/DTx, information with any state changes before the Stop bit may signal a false End-Of-Character (EOC) and cause data or framing errors. To work properly, therefore, the initial character in the transmission must be all ‘0’s. This can be 00h (8 bits) for standard RS-232 devices or 000h (12 bits) for LIN/J2602 bus. The fact that the WUE bit has been cleared (or is still set) and the RCxIF flag is set should not be used as an indicator of the integrity of the data in RCREGx. Users should consider implementing a parallel method in firmware to verify received data integrity. To assure that no actual data is lost, check the RCIDL bit to verify that a receive operation is not in process. If a receive operation is not occurring, the WUE bit may then be set just prior to entering Sleep mode. Oscillator start-up time must also be considered, especially in applications using oscillators with longer start-up intervals (i.e., HS or HSPLL mode). The Sync Break (or Wake-up Signal) character must be of sufficient length and be followed by a sufficient interval to allow enough time for the selected oscillator to start and provide proper initialization of the EUSART. FIGURE 21-8: Special Considerations Using the WUE Bit AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING NORMAL OPERATION Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 Bit Set by User Auto-Cleared WUE bit(1) RXx/DTx Line RCxIF Note 1: Cleared due to User Read of RCREGx The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set. FIGURE 21-9: AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING SLEEP Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Bit set by user Auto-Cleared WUE bit(2) RXx/DTx Line Note 1 RCxIF SLEEP Command Executed Note 1: 2: Sleep Ends Cleared due to User Read of RCREGx If the wake-up event requires long oscillator warm-up time, the auto-clear of the WUE bit can occur before the oscillator is ready. This sequence should not depend on the presence of Q clocks. The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 359 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.2.5 BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE The EUSART module has the capability of sending the special Break character sequences that are required by the LIN/J2602 bus standard. The Break character transmit consists of a Start bit, followed by twelve ‘0’ bits and a Stop bit. The Frame Break character is sent whenever the SENDB and TXEN bits (TXSTAx<3> and TXSTAx<5>) are set while the Transmit Shift Register is loaded with data. Note that the value of data written to TXREGx will be ignored and all ‘0’s will be transmitted. The SENDB bit is automatically reset by hardware after the corresponding Stop bit is sent. This allows the user to preload the transmit FIFO with the next transmit byte following the Break character (typically, the Sync character in the LIN/J2602 specification). Note that the data value written to the TXREGx for the Break character is ignored. The write simply serves the purpose of initiating the proper sequence. The TRMT bit indicates when the transmit operation is active or Idle, just as it does during normal transmission. See Figure 21-10 for the timing of the Break character sequence. 21.2.5.1 Break and Sync Transmit Sequence The following sequence will send a message frame header made up of a Break, followed by an Auto-Baud Sync byte. This sequence is typical of a LIN/J2602 bus master. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Configure the EUSART for the desired mode. Set the TXEN and SENDB bits to set up the Break character. Load the TXREGx with a dummy character to initiate transmission (the value is ignored). Write ‘55h’ to TXREGx to load the Sync character into the transmit FIFO buffer. After the Break has been sent, the SENDB bit is reset by hardware. The Sync character now transmits in the preconfigured mode. When the TXREGx becomes empty, as indicated by the TXxIF, the next data byte can be written to TXREGx. 21.2.6 RECEIVING A BREAK CHARACTER The Enhanced USART module can receive a Break character in two ways. The first method forces configuration of the baud rate at a frequency of 9/13 of the typical speed. This allows for the Stop bit transition to be at the correct sampling location (13 bits for Break versus Start bit and 8 data bits for typical data). The second method uses the auto-wake-up feature described in Section 21.2.4 “Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break Character”. By enabling this feature, the EUSART will sample the next two transitions on RXx/DTx, cause an RCxIF interrupt and receive the next data byte followed by another interrupt. Note that following a Break character, the user will typically want to enable the Auto-Baud Rate Detect feature. For both methods, the user can set the ABDEN bit once the TXxIF interrupt is observed. FIGURE 21-10: Write to TXREGx SEND BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE Dummy Write BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx (pin) Start Bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 11 Stop Bit Break TXxIF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg. Empty Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) SENDB Sampled Here Auto-Cleared SENDB bit (Transmit Shift Reg. Empty Flag) DS39974A-page 360 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.3 Once the TXREGx register transfers the data to the TSR register (occurs in one TCY), the TXREGx is empty and the TXxIF flag bit is set. The interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the interrupt enable bit, TXxIE. TXxIF is set regardless of the state of enable bit, TXxIE; it cannot be cleared in software. It will reset only when new data is loaded into the TXREGx register. EUSART Synchronous Master Mode The Synchronous Master mode is entered by setting the CSRC bit (TXSTAx<7>). In this mode, the data is transmitted in a half-duplex manner (i.e., transmission and reception do not occur at the same time). When transmitting data, the reception is inhibited and vice versa. Synchronous mode is entered by setting bit, SYNC (TXSTAx<4>). In addition, enable bit, SPEN (RCSTAx<7>), is set in order to configure the TXx and RXx pins to CKx (clock) and DTx (data) lines, respectively. While flag bit, TXxIF, indicates the status of the TXREGx register, another bit, TRMT (TXSTAx<1>), shows the status of the TSR register. TRMT is a read-only bit which is set when the TSR is empty. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit, so the user must poll this bit in order to determine if the TSR register is empty. The TSR is not mapped in data memory so it is not available to the user. The Master mode indicates that the processor transmits the master clock on the CKx line. Clock polarity is selected with the TXCKP bit (BAUDCONx<4>). Setting TXCKP sets the Idle state on CKx as high, while clearing the bit sets the Idle state as low. This option is provided to support Microwire devices with this module. 21.3.1 To set up a Synchronous Master Transmission: 1. EUSART SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION 2. The EUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in Figure 21-3. The heart of the transmitter is the Transmit (Serial) Shift Register (TSR). The shift register obtains its data from the Read/Write Transmit Buffer register, TXREGx. The TXREGx register is loaded with data in software. The TSR register is not loaded until the last bit has been transmitted from the previous load. As soon as the last bit is transmitted, the TSR is loaded with new data from the TXREGx (if available). FIGURE 21-11: Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRG16 bit, as required, to achieve the required baud rate. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits, SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TXxIE. If 9-bit transmission is required, set bit, TX9. Enable the transmission by setting bit, TXEN. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit, TX9D. Start transmission by loading data to the TXREGx register. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 RC7/CCP10/PMA4/RX1/ DT1/RP18 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 bit 7 bit 0 bit 1 bit 7 Word 2 Word 1 RC6/CCP9/PMA5/TX1/CK1/ RP17 (TXCKP = 0) RC6/CCP9/PMA5/TX1/CK1/ RP17 (TXCKP = 1) Write to TXREG1 Reg Write Word 1 Write Word 2 TX1IF bit (Interrupt Flag) TRMT bit TXEN bit Note: ‘1’ ‘1’ Sync Master mode, SPBRGx = 0; continuous transmission of two 8-bit words. This example is equally applicable to EUSART2 (RPn1/TX2/CK2 and RPn2/RX2/DT2). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 361 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 21-12: SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (THROUGH TXEN) RC7/CCP10/PMA4/RX1/DT1/ RP18 Pin bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 6 bit 7 RC6/CCP9/PMA5/TX1/CK1/ RP17 Pin Write to TXREG1 reg TX1IF bit TRMT bit TXEN bit Note: This example is equally applicable to EUSART2 (RPn1/TX2/CK2 and RPn2/RX2/DT2). TABLE 21-7: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF PIR1 PMPIF(1) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF PIE1 PMPIE(1) ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE IPR1 PMPIP(1) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCIP SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D RCSTAx TXREGx TXSTAx BAUDCONx EUSARTx Transmit Register CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D ABDOVF RCIDL RXDTP TXCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN CCP10OD CCP9OD U2OD U1OD SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator High Byte SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Low Byte ODCON2 — — — — Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master transmission. Note 1: These pins are only available on 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 362 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.3.2 EUSART SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION Once Synchronous mode is selected, reception is enabled by setting either the Single Receive Enable bit, SREN (RCSTAx<5>), or the Continuous Receive Enable bit, CREN (RCSTAx<4>). Data is sampled on the RXx pin on the falling edge of the clock. If enable bit, SREN, is set, only a single word is received. If enable bit, CREN, is set, the reception is continuous until CREN is cleared. If both bits are set, then CREN takes precedence. To set up a Synchronous Master Reception: 1. 2. Initialize the SPBRGHx:SPBRGx registers for the appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRG16 bit, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits, SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. FIGURE 21-13: 3. 4. 5. 6. Ensure bits, CREN and SREN, are clear. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RCxIE. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. If a single reception is required, set bit, SREN. For continuous reception, set bit, CREN. 7. Interrupt flag bit, RCxIF, will be set when reception is complete and an interrupt will be generated if the enable bit, RCxIE, was set. 8. Read the RCSTAx register to get the ninth bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. 9. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREGx register. 10. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing bit, CREN. 11. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. SYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION (MASTER MODE, SREN) Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 RC7/CCP10/PMA4/ RX1/DT1/RP18 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 RC6/CCP9/PMA5/TX1/ CK1/RP17 (TXCKP = 0) RC6/CCP9/PMA5/TX1/ CK1/RP17 (TXCKP = 1) Write to SREN bit SREN bit CREN bit ‘0’ ‘0’ RC1IF bit (Interrupt) Read RCREG1 Note: Timing diagram demonstrates Sync Master mode with bit, SREN = 1, and bit, BRGH = 0. This example is equally applicable to EUSART2 (RPn1/TX2/CK2 and RPn2/RX2/DT2). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 363 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 21-8: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION Name INTCON Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF (1) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF PIE1 (1) PMPIE ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE IPR1 PMPIP(1) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP PIR1 PMPIF PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCIP SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D RCSTAx RCREGx TXSTAx BAUDCONx EUSARTx Receive Register CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D ABDOVF RCIDL RXDTP TXCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN CCP10OD CCP9OD U2OD U1OD SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator High Byte SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Low Byte ODCON2 — — — — Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master reception. Note 1: These pins are only available on 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 364 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.4 e) EUSART Synchronous Slave Mode Synchronous Slave mode is entered by clearing bit, CSRC (TXSTAx<7>). This mode differs from the Synchronous Master mode in that the shift clock is supplied externally at the CKx pin (instead of being supplied internally in Master mode). This allows the device to transfer or receive data while in any low-power mode. 21.4.1 To set up a Synchronous Slave Transmission: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. EUSART SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMISSION The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes is identical, except in the case of Sleep mode. If two words are written to the TXREGx, and then the SLEEP instruction is executed, the following will occur: 6. a) 7. b) c) d) The first word will immediately transfer to the TSR register and transmit. The second word will remain in the TXREGx register. Flag bit, TXxIF, will not be set. When the first word has been shifted out of TSR, the TXREGx register will transfer the second word to the TSR and flag bit, TXxIF, will now be set. TABLE 21-9: Name If enable bit, TXxIE, is set, the interrupt will wake the chip from Sleep. If the global interrupt is enabled, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. 8. Enable the synchronous slave serial port by setting bits, SYNC and SPEN, and clearing bit, CSRC. Clear bits, CREN and SREN. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, TXxIE. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set bit, TX9. Enable the transmission by setting enable bit, TXEN. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in bit, TX9D. Start transmission by loading data to the TXREGx register. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMISSION Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF PIR1 PMPIF(1) ADIF RC1IF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF PIE1 PMPIE(1) ADIE RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE IPR1 PMPIP(1) ADIP RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCIP SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D RCSTAx TXREGx TXSTAx BAUDCONx EUSARTx Transmit Register CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D ABDOVF RCIDL RXDTP TXCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator High Byte SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Low Byte Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave transmission. Note 1: These pins are only available on 44-pin devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 365 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 21.4.2 EUSART SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION To set up a Synchronous Slave Reception: 1. The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes is identical, except in the case of Sleep, or any Idle mode and bit, SREN, which is a “don’t care” in Slave mode. 2. 3. 4. 5. If receive is enabled by setting the CREN bit prior to entering Sleep or any Idle mode, then a word may be received while in this low-power mode. Once the word is received, the RSR register will transfer the data to the RCREGx register. If the RCxIE enable bit is set, the interrupt generated will wake the chip from the low-power mode. If the global interrupt is enabled, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. 6. 7. 8. 9. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits, SYNC and SPEN, and clearing bit, CSRC. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit, RCxIE. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit, RX9. To enable reception, set enable bit, CREN. Flag bit, RCxIF, will be set when reception is complete. An interrupt will be generated if enable bit, RCxIE, was set. Read the RCSTAx register to get the ninth bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCREGx register. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing bit, CREN. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are set. TABLE 21-10: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE PIR1 PMPIF(1) ADIF RC1IF PIE1 PMPIE(1) ADIE IPR1 PMPIP(1) ADIP PIR3 SSP2IF PIE3 IPR3 RCSTAx RCREGx TXSTAx BAUDCONx Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCIP SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D EUSARTx Receive Register CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D ABDOVF RCIDL RXDTP TXCKP BRG16 — WUE ABDEN SPBRGHx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator High Byte SPBRGx EUSARTx Baud Rate Generator Low Byte Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave reception. Note 1: These pins are only available on 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 366 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 22.0 10/12-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (A/D) MODULE The Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter module in the PIC18F47J13 family of devices has 10 inputs for the 28-pin devices and 13 inputs for the 44-pin devices. This module allows conversion of an analog input signal to a corresponding 10 or 12-bit digital number. The module has these registers: • • • • • • • A/D Control Register 0 (ADCON0) A/D Control Register 1 (ADCON1) A/D Port Configuration Register 0 (ANCON0) A/D Port Configuration Register 1 (ANCON1) A/D Result Registers (ADRESH and ADRESL) A/D Trigger Register (ADCTRIG) Configuration Register 3 High (ADCSEL, CONFIG3H<1>) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. The ADCON0 register, shown in Register 22-1, controls the operation of the A/D module. The ADCON1 register, shown in Register 22-2, configures the A/D clock source, programmed acquisition time and justification. The ANCON0 and ANCON1 registers, in Register 22-1 and Register 22-2, configure the functions of the port pins. The ADCSEL Configuration bit (CONFIG3H<1>) sets the module for 10 or 12-bit conversions. The 10-Bit Conversion mode is useful for applications that favor conversion speed over conversion resolution. Preliminary DS39974A-page 367 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 22-1: R/W-0 ADCON0: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 0 (ACCESS FC2h) R/W-0 VCFG1 VCFG0 R/W-0 CHS3 (2) R/W-0 CHS2 (2) R/W-0 CHS1 (2) R/W-0 CHS0 (2) R/W-0 R/W-0 GO/DONE ADON bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 VCFG1: Voltage Reference Configuration bit (VREF- source) 1 = VREF- (AN2) 0 = AVSS(4) bit 6 VCFG0: Voltage Reference Configuration bit (VREF+ source) 1 = VREF+ (AN3) 0 = AVDD(4) bit 5-2 CHS<3:0>: Analog Channel Select bits(2) 0000 = Channel 00 (AN0) 0001 = Channel 01 (AN1) 0010 = Channel 02 (AN2) 0011 = Channel 03 (AN3) 0100 = Channel 04 (AN4) 0101 = Channel 05 (AN5)(1) 0110 = Channel 06 (AN6)(1) 0111 = Channel 07 (AN7)(1) 1000 = Channel 08 (AN8) 1001 = Channel 09 (AN9) 1010 = Channel 10 (AN10) 1011 = Channel 11 (AN11) 1100 = Channel 12 (AN12) 1101 = (Reserved) 1110 = VDDCORE 1111 = VBG Absolute Reference (~1.2V)(3) bit 1 GO/DONE: A/D Conversion Status bit When ADON = 1: 1 = A/D conversion is in progress 0 = A/D is Idle bit 0 ADON: A/D On bit 1 = A/D Converter module is enabled 0 = A/D Converter module is disabled Note 1: 2: 3: 4: x = Bit is unknown These channels are not implemented on 28-pin devices. Performing a conversion on unimplemented channels will return random values. For best accuracy, the band gap reference circuit should be enabled (ANCON1<7> = 1) at least 10 ms before performing a conversion on this channel. On 44-pin, QFN devices, AVDD and AVSS reference sources are intended to be externally connected to VDD and VSS levels. Other package types tie AVDD and AVSS to VDD and VSS internally. DS39974A-page 368 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 22-2: ADCON1: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 1 (ACCESS FC1h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ADFM ADCAL ACQT2 ACQT1 ACQT0 ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 ADFM: A/D Result Format Select bit 1 = Right justified 0 = Left justified bit 6 ADCAL: A/D Calibration bit 1 = Calibration is performed on the next A/D conversion 0 = Normal A/D Converter operation bit 5-3 ACQT<2:0>: A/D Acquisition Time Select bits 111 = 20 TAD 110 = 16 TAD 101 = 12 TAD 100 = 8 TAD 011 = 6 TAD 010 = 4 TAD 001 = 2 TAD 000 = 0 TAD bit 2-0 ADCS<2:0>: A/D Conversion Clock Select bits 110 = FOSC/64 101 = FOSC/16 100 = FOSC/4 011 = FRC (clock derived from A/D RC oscillator)(1) 010 = FOSC/32 001 = FOSC/8 000 = FOSC/2 Note 1: x = Bit is unknown If the A/D FRC clock source is selected, a delay of one TCY (instruction cycle) is added before the A/D clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed before starting a conversion. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 369 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 22-3: CONFIG3H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 3 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300005h) U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 R/WO-1 U-0 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 — — — — MSSPMSK — ADCSEL IOL1WAY bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Program the corresponding Flash Configuration bit to ‘1’ bit 3 MSSPMSK: MSSP 7-Bit Address Masking Mode Enable bit 1 = 7-Bit Address Masking mode is enabled 0 = 5-Bit Address Masking mode is enabled bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 ADCSEL: A/D Converter Mode bit 1 = 10-Bit Conversion mode is enabled 0 = 12-Bit Conversion mode is enabled bit 0 IOL1WAY: IOLOCK One Way Set Enable bit 1 = IOLOCK bit (PPSCON<0>) can be set once, provided the unlock sequence has been completed. Once set, the Peripheral Pin Select registers cannot be written to a second time. 0 = IOLOCK bit (PPSCON<0>) can be set and cleared as needed, provided the unlock sequence has been completed DS39974A-page 370 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY The ANCON0 and ANCON1 registers are used to configure the operation of the I/O pin associated with each analog channel. Setting any one of the PCFG bits configures the corresponding pin to operate as a digital only I/O. Clearing a bit configures the pin to operate as an analog input for either the A/D Converter or the comparator module. All digital peripherals are disabled and digital inputs read as ‘0’. As a rule, I/O pins that are multiplexed with analog inputs default to analog operation on device Resets. In order to correctly perform A/D conversions on the VBG band gap reference (ADCON0<5:2> = 1111), the reference circuit must be powered on first. The VBGEN bit in the ANCON1 register allows the firmware to manually REGISTER 22-4: request that the band gap reference circuit should be enabled. For best accuracy, firmware should allow a settling time of at least 10 ms prior to performing the first acquisition on this channel after enabling the band gap reference. The reference circuit may already have been turned on if some other hardware module (such as the on-chip voltage regulator, comparators or HLVD) has already requested it. In this case, the initial turn-on settling time may have already elapsed and firmware does not need to wait as long before measuring VBG. Once the acquisition is complete, firmware may clear the VBGEN bit, which will save a small amount of power if no other modules are still requesting the VBG reference. ANCON0: A/D PORT CONFIGURATION REGISTER 0 (BANKED F48h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PCFG7(1) PCFG6(1) PCFG5(1) PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 Note 1: x = Bit is unknown PCFG<7:0>: Analog Port Configuration bits (AN7-AN0) 1 = Pin configured as a digital port 0 = Pin configured as an analog channel – digital input disabled and reads ‘0’ These bits are only available only on 44-pin devices. REGISTER 22-5: ANCON1: A/D PORT CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 (BANKED F49h) R/W-0 R U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 VBGEN r — PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: r = Reserved bit R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 VBGEN: 1.2V Band Gap Reference Enable bit 1 = 1.2V band gap reference is powered on 0 = 1.2V band gap reference is turned off to save power (if no other modules are requesting it) bit 6 Reserved: Always maintain as ‘0’ for lowest power consumption bit 5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 PCFG<12:8>: Analog Port Configuration bits (AN12-AN8) 1 = Pin configured as a digital port 0 = Pin configured as an analog channel – digital input disabled and reads ‘0’ 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 371 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY Each port pin associated with the A/D Converter can be configured as an analog input or as a digital I/O. The ADRESH and ADRESL registers contain the result of the A/D conversion. When the A/D conversion is complete, the result is loaded into the ADRESH:ADRESL register pair, the GO/DONE bit (ADCON0<1>) is cleared and the A/D Interrupt Flag bit, ADIF, is set. The analog reference voltage is software selectable to either the device’s positive and negative supply voltage (AV DD and AV SS ), or the voltage and level on the RA3/AN3/C1INB/VREF + RA2/AN2/C2INB/C1IND/C3INB/VREF -/CVREF pins. The A/D Converter has a unique feature of being able to operate while the device is in Sleep mode. To operate in Sleep, the A/D conversion clock must be derived from the A/D’s internal RC oscillator. A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state. This forces the A/D module to be turned off and any conversion in progress is aborted. The value in the ADRESH:ADRESL register pair is not modified for a Power-on Reset (POR). These registers will contain unknown data after a POR. The output of the sample and hold is the input into the converter, which generates the result via successive approximation. Figure 22-1 provides the block diagram of the A/D module. FIGURE 22-1: A/D BLOCK DIAGRAM CHS<3:0> 1111 VBG 1110 VDDCORE/VCAP 1100 AN12 1011 AN11 1010 1001 1000 AN10 AN9 AN8 0111 AN7(1) 0110 AN6(1) 0101 AN5(1) VAIN (Input Voltage) 10/12-Bit A/D Converter 0100 0011 0010 VCFG<1:0> Reference Voltage 0001 VDD(2) 0000 AN4 AN3 AN2 AN1 AN0 VREF+ VREFVSS(2) Note 1: Channels, AN5, AN6 and AN7, are not available on 28-pin devices. 2: I/O pins have diode protection to VDD and VSS. DS39974A-page 372 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY After the A/D module has been configured as desired, the selected channel must be acquired before the conversion is started. The analog input channels must have their corresponding TRIS bits selected as inputs. To determine acquisition time, see Section 22.1 “A/D Acquisition Requirements”. After this acquisition time has elapsed, the A/D conversion can be started. An acquisition time can be programmed to occur between setting the GO/DONE bit and the actual start of the conversion. 2. Configure A/D interrupt (if desired): • Clear ADIF bit • Set ADIE bit • Set GIE bit Wait the required acquisition time (if required). Start conversion: • Set GO/DONE bit (ADCON0<1>) Wait for A/D conversion to complete, by either: • Polling for the GO/DONE bit to be cleared 3. 4. 5. The following steps should be followed to do an A/D conversion: 1. Configure the A/D module: • Configure the required ADC pins as analog pins using ANCON0, ANCON1 • Set voltage reference using ADCON0 • Select A/D input channel (ADCON0) • Select A/D acquisition time (ADCON1) • Select A/D conversion clock (ADCON1) • Turn on A/D module (ADCON0) FIGURE 22-2: OR • Waiting for the A/D interrupt Read A/D Result registers (ADRESH:ADRESL); clear bit, ADIF, if required. For the next conversion, go to Step 1 or Step 2, as required. The A/D conversion time per bit is defined as TAD. A minimum Wait of 2 TAD is required before the next acquisition starts. 6. 7. ANALOG INPUT MODEL VDD RS VAIN ANx CPIN 5 pF Sampling Switch VT = 0.6V RIC 1k VT = 0.6V SS RSS ILEAKAGE ±100 nA CHOLD = 25 pF VSS Legend: CPIN = Input Capacitance VT = Threshold Voltage ILEAKAGE = Leakage Current at the pin due to various junctions = Interconnect Resistance RIC = Sampling Switch SS = Sample/Hold Capacitance (from DAC) CHOLD RSS = Sampling Switch Resistance 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary VDD 1 2 3 4 Sampling Switch (k) DS39974A-page 373 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 22.1 A/D Acquisition Requirements For the A/D Converter to meet its specified accuracy, the charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed to fully charge to the input channel voltage level. The analog input model is illustrated in Figure 22-2. The source impedance (RS) and the internal sampling switch (RSS) impedance directly affect the time required to charge the capacitor, CHOLD. The sampling switch (RSS) impedance varies over the device voltage (VDD). The source impedance affects the offset voltage at the analog input (due to pin leakage current). The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 2.5 k for 10-bit conversions and 1 k for 12-bit conversions. After the analog input channel is selected (changed), the channel must be sampled for at least the minimum acquisition time before starting a conversion. EQUATION 22-1: CHOLD Rs Conversion Error VDD Temperature = = = = 25 pF 2.5 k 1/2 LSb 3V Rss = 2 k 85C (system max.) ACQUISITION TIME = Amplifier Settling Time + Holding Capacitor Charging Time + Temperature Coefficient = TAMP + TC + TCOFF EQUATION 22-2: VHOLD or TC Equation 22-3 provides the calculation of the minimum required acquisition time, TACQ. This calculation is based on the following application system assumptions: When the conversion is started, the holding capacitor is disconnected from the input pin. Note: TACQ To calculate the minimum acquisition time, Equation 22-1 may be used. This equation assumes that 1/2 LSb error is used (1,024 steps for the 10-bit A/D). The 1/2 LSb error is the maximum error allowed for the A/D to meet its specified resolution. A/D MINIMUM CHARGING TIME = (VREF – (VREF/2048)) • (1 – e(-TC/CHOLD(RIC + RSS + RS))) = -(CHOLD)(RIC + RSS + RS) ln(1/2048) EQUATION 22-3: CALCULATING THE MINIMUM REQUIRED ACQUISITION TIME TACQ = TAMP + TC + TCOFF TAMP = 0.2 s TCOFF = (Temp – 25°C)(0.02 s/°C) (85°C – 25°C)(0.02 s/°C) 1.2 s Temperature coefficient is only required for temperatures > 25°C. Below 25°C, TCOFF = 0 s. TC = -(CHOLD)(RIC + RSS + RS) ln(1/2048) s -(25 pF) (1 k + 2 k + 2.5 k) ln(0.0004883) s 1.05 s TACQ = 0.2 s + 1.05 s + 1.2 s 2.45 s DS39974A-page 374 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 22.2 TABLE 22-1: Selecting and Configuring Automatic Acquisition Time The ADCON1 register allows the user to select an acquisition time that occurs each time the GO/DONE bit is set. When the GO/DONE bit is set, sampling is stopped and a conversion begins. The user is responsible for ensuring the required acquisition time has passed between selecting the desired input channel and setting the GO/DONE bit. This occurs when the ACQT<2:0> bits (ADCON1<5:3>) remain in their Reset state (‘000’) and is compatible with devices that do not offer programmable acquisition times. If desired, the ACQT bits can be set to select a programmable acquisition time for the A/D module. When the GO/DONE bit is set, the A/D module continues to sample the input for the selected acquisition time, then automatically begins a conversion. Since the acquisition time is programmed, there may be no need to wait for an acquisition time between selecting a channel and setting the GO/DONE bit. In either case, when the conversion is completed, the GO/DONE bit is cleared, the ADIF flag is set and the A/D begins sampling the currently selected channel again. If an acquisition time is programmed, there is nothing to indicate if the acquisition time has ended or if the conversion has begun. 22.3 Selecting the A/D Conversion Clock The A/D conversion time per bit is defined as TAD. The A/D conversion requires 11 TAD per 10-bit conversion and 13 TAD per 12-bit conversion. The source of the A/D conversion clock is software selectable. There are seven possible options for TAD: • • • • • • • 2 TOSC 4 TOSC 8 TOSC 16 TOSC 32 TOSC 64 TOSC Internal RC Oscillator TAD vs. DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCIES AD Clock Source (TAD) Maximum Device Frequency (MHz)(3) Operation ADCS<2:0> 10-Bit Mode 12-Bit Mode 2 TOSC 000 2.86 2.5 4 TOSC 100 5.71 5 8 TOSC 001 11.43 10 16 TOSC 101 22.86 20 32 TOSC 010 45.71 40 64 TOSC 110 48 48 RC(2) 011 Note 1: 2: 3: 22.4 1 (1) 1(1) The RC source has a typical TAD time of 4 s. For device frequencies above 1 MHz, the device must be in Sleep mode for the entire conversion or the A/D accuracy may be out of specification. Maximum conversion speeds are achieved at the bolded device frequencies. Configuring Analog Port Pins The ANCON0, ANCON1 and TRISA registers control the operation of the A/D port pins. The port pins needed as analog inputs must have their corresponding TRIS bits set (input). If the TRIS bit is cleared (output), the digital output level (VOH or VOL) will be converted. The A/D operation is independent of the state of the CHS<3:0> bits and the TRIS bits. Note 1: When reading the PORT register, all pins configured as analog input channels will read as cleared (a low level). Pins configured as digital inputs will convert an analog input. Analog levels on a digitally configured input will be accurately converted. 2: Analog levels on any pin defined as a digital input may cause the digital input buffer to consume current out of the device’s specification limits. For correct A/D conversions, the A/D conversion clock (TAD) must be as short as possible but greater than the minimum TAD (see parameter 130 in Table 30-32 for more information). Table 22-1 provides the resultant TAD times derived from the device operating frequencies and the A/D clock source selected. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 375 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 22.5 A/D Conversions 22.6 Figure 22-3 displays the operation of the A/D Converter after the GO/DONE bit has been set and the ACQT<2:0> bits are cleared. A conversion is started after the following instruction to allow entry into Sleep mode before the conversion begins. Figure 22-4 displays the operation of the A/D Converter after the GO/DONE bit has been set. The ACQT<2:0> bits are set to ‘010’ and are selecting a 4 TAD acquisition time before the conversion starts. Clearing the GO/DONE bit during a conversion will abort the current conversion. The A/D Result register pair will NOT be updated with the partially completed A/D conversion sample. This means the ADRESH:ADRESL registers will continue to contain the value of the last completed conversion (or the last value written to the ADRESH:ADRESL registers). After the A/D conversion is completed or aborted, a 2 TAD Wait is required before the next acquisition can be started. After this Wait, acquisition on the selected channel is automatically started. Note: The GO/DONE bit should NOT be set in the same instruction that turns on the A/D. REGISTER 22-6: Use of the Special Event Triggers A/D conversion can be started by the Special Event Trigger of any of these modules: • ECCP2 – Requires CCP2M<3:0> bits (CCP2CON<3:0>) set at ‘1011’ • CTMU – Requires the setting of the CTTRIG bit (CTMUCONH<0>) • Timer1 Overflow • RTCC Alarm To start an A/D conversion: • The A/D module must be enabled (ADON = 1) • The appropriate analog input channel selected • The minimum acquisition period is set in one of these ways: - Timing provided by the user - Selection made of an appropriate TACQ time With these conditions met, the trigger sets the GO/DONE bit and the A/D acquisition starts. If the A/D module is not enabled (ADON = 0), the module ignores the Special Event Trigger. Note: With an ECCP2 trigger, Timer1 or Timer3 is cleared. The timers reset to automatically repeat the A/D acquisition period with minimal software overhead (moving ADRESH:ADRESL to the desired location). If the A/D module is not enabled, the Special Event Trigger is ignored by the module, but the timer’s counter resets. ADCTRIG: A/D TRIGGER REGISTER (BANKED EB8h) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — — — — TRIGSEL1 TRIGSEL0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1-0 TRIGSEL<1:0>: Special Trigger Select bits 11 = Selects the special trigger from the RTCC 10 = Selects the special trigger from the Timer1 01 = Selects the special trigger from the CTMU 00 = Selects the special trigger from the ECCP2 DS39974A-page 376 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 22-3: A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT<2:0> = 000, TACQ = 0) TCY - TAD TAD1 TAD2 TAD3 TAD4 TAD5 TAD6 TAD7 TAD8 TAD9 TAD10 TAD11 b4 b1 b0 b6 b7 b2 b9 b8 b3 b5 Conversion starts Holding capacitor is disconnected from analog input (typically 100 ns) Set GO/DONE bit Next Q4: ADRESH/ADRESL are loaded, GO/DONE bit is cleared, ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is connected to analog input. FIGURE 22-4: A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT<2:0> = 010, TACQ = 4 TAD) TAD Cycles TACQT Cycles 1 2 3 Automatic Acquisition Time 4 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Conversion starts (Holding capacitor is disconnected) Set GO/DONE bit (Holding capacitor continues acquiring input) 22.7 2 Next Q4: ADRESH:ADRESL are loaded, GO/DONE bit is cleared, ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is reconnected to analog input. A/D Converter Calibration The A/D Converter in the PIC18F47J13 family of devices includes a self-calibration feature, which compensates for any offset generated within the module. The calibration process is automated and is initiated by setting the ADCAL bit (ADCON1<6>). The next time the GO/DONE bit is set, the module will perform an offset calibration and store the result internally. Thus, subsequent offsets will be compensated. The calibration process assumes that the device is in a relatively steady-state operating condition. If A/D calibration is used, it should be performed after each device Reset or if there are other major changes in operating conditions. Example 22-1 provides an example of a calibration routine. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 377 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 22.8 mode clock source until the conversion has been completed. If desired, the device may be placed into the corresponding power-managed Idle mode during the conversion. Operation in Power-Managed Modes The selection of the automatic acquisition time and A/D conversion clock is determined in part by the clock source and frequency while in a power-managed mode. If the power-managed mode clock frequency is less than 1 MHz, the A/D RC clock source should be selected. If the A/D is expected to operate while the device is in a power-managed mode, the ACQT<2:0> and ADCS<2:0> bits in ADCON1 should be updated in accordance with the power-managed mode clock that will be used. After the power-managed mode is entered (either of the power-managed Run modes), an A/D acquisition or conversion may be started. Once an acquisition or conversion is started, the device should continue to be clocked by the same power-managed EXAMPLE 22-1: SAMPLE A/D CALIBRATION ROUTINE BCF BSF BSF BSF CALIBRATION BTFSC BRA BCF TABLE 22-2: Operation in Sleep mode requires the A/D RC clock to be selected. If bits, ACQT<2:0>, are set to ‘000’ and a conversion is started, the conversion will be delayed one instruction cycle to allow execution of the SLEEP instruction and entry to Sleep mode. The IDLEN and SCS bits in the OSCCON register must have already been cleared prior to starting the conversion. ANCON0,PCFG0 ADCON0,ADON ADCON1,ADCAL ADCON0,GO ;Make Channel 0 analog ;Enable A/D module ;Enable Calibration ;Start a dummy A/D conversion ; ;Wait for the dummy conversion to finish ; ;Calibration done, turn off calibration enable ;Proceed with the actual A/D conversion ADCON0,GO CALIBRATION ADCON1,ADCAL SUMMARY OF A/D REGISTERS Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE PIR1 PMPIF(1) ADIF RC1IF PIE1 PMPIE(1) ADIE IPR1 PMPIP(1) ADIP Bit 1 Bit 0 INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF TX1IF SSP1IF CCP1IF TMR2IF TMR1IF RC1IE TX1IE SSP1IE CCP1IE TMR2IE TMR1IE RC1IP TX1IP SSP1IP CCP1IP TMR2IP TMR1IP PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP HLVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP — — — — — — ADCTRIG ADRESH A/D Result Register High Byte ADRESL A/D Result Register Low Byte TRIGSEL1 TRIGSEL0 ADCON0 VCFG1 VCFG0 CHS3 CHS3 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE ADON ANCON0 PCFG7(1) PCFG6(1) PCFG5(1) PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 ADCON1 ADFM ADCAL ACQT2 ACQT1 ACQT0 ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 ANCON1 VBGEN r — PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 P2M1 P2M0 DC2B1 DC2B0 CCP2M3 CCP2M2 CCP2M1 CCP2M0 CCP2CON PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 — RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 TRISA TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 — TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’, r = reserved. Shaded cells are not used for A/D conversion. Note 1: These bits are only available on 44-pin devices. DS39974A-page 378 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 23.0 COMPARATOR MODULE 23.1 The analog comparator module contains three comparators that can be independently configured in a variety of ways. The inputs can be selected from the analog inputs and two internal voltage references. The digital outputs are available at the pin level and can also be read through the control register. Multiple output and interrupt event generation is also available. Figure 23-1 provides a generic single comparator from the module. Registers The CMxCON registers (Register 23-1) select the input and output configuration for each comparator, as well as the settings for interrupt generation. The CMSTAT register (Register 23-2) provides the output results of the comparators. The bits in this register are read-only. Key features of the module are: • • • • • Independent comparator control Programmable input configuration Output to both pin and register levels Programmable output polarity Independent interrupt generation for each comparator with configurable interrupt-on-change FIGURE 23-1: COMPARATOR SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM COUTx (CMSTAT<2:0>) CCH<1:0> CxINB 0 CxINC 1 CxIND 2 VIRV 3 Interrupt Logic CMxIF EVPOL<1:0> CREF COE VIN- CxINA 0 CVREF 1 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. VIN+ Cx Polarity Logic CON CPOL Preliminary CxOUT DS39974A-page 379 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 23-1: CMxCON: COMPARATOR CONTROL 1/2/3 REGISTER (1, ACCESS FD2h; 2, FD1h; 3, BANKED F25h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 CON: Comparator Enable bit 1 = Comparator is enabled 0 = Comparator is disabled bit 6 COE: Comparator Output Enable bit 1 = Comparator output is present on the CxOUT pin (assigned in the PPS module) 0 = Comparator output is internal only bit 5 CPOL: Comparator Output Polarity Select bit 1 = Comparator output is inverted 0 = Comparator output is not inverted bit 4-3 EVPOL<1:0>: Interrupt Polarity Select bits 11 = Interrupt generation on any change of the output(1) 10 = Interrupt generation only on high-to-low transition of the output 01 = Interrupt generation only on low-to-high transition of the output 00 = Interrupt generation is disabled bit 2 CREF: Comparator Reference Select bit (non-inverting input) 1 = Non-inverting input connects to the internal CVREF voltage 0 = Non-inverting input connects to the CxINA pin bit 1-0 CCH<1:0>: Comparator Channel Select bits 11 = Inverting input of comparator connects to VIRV (0.6V) 10 = Inverting input of comparator connects to the CxIND pin 01 = Inverting input of comparator connects to the CxINC pin 00 = Inverting input of comparator connects to the CxINB pin Note 1: The CMxIF is automatically set any time this mode is selected and must be cleared by the application after the initial configuration. DS39974A-page 380 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 23-2: CMSTAT: COMPARATOR STATUS REGISTER (ACCESS F70h) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R-1 R-1 R-1 — — — — — COUT3 COUT2 COUT1 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 COUT<3:1>: Comparator x Status bits (For example, COUT3 gives the status for Comparator 3.) If CPOL (CMxCON<5>) = 0 (non-inverted polarity): 1 = Comparator VIN+ > VIN0 = Comparator VIN+ < VINIf CPOL = 1 (inverted polarity): 1 = Comparator VIN+ < VIN0 = Comparator VIN+ > VIN- 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39974A-page 381 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 23.2 Comparator Operation 23.3 Comparator Response Time A single comparator is shown in Figure 23-2, along with the relationship between the analog input levels and the digital output. When the analog input at VIN+ is less than the analog input, VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital low level. When the analog input at VIN+ is greater than the analog input, VIN-, the output of the comparator is a digital high level. The shaded areas of the output of the comparator, in Figure 23-2, represent the uncertainty due to input offsets and response time. Response time is the minimum time, after selecting a new reference voltage or input source, before the comparator output has a valid level. The response time of the comparator differs from the settling time of the voltage reference. Therefore, both of these times must be considered when determining the total response to a comparator input change. Otherwise, the maximum delay of the comparators should be used (see Section 30.0 “Electrical Characteristics”). FIGURE 23-2: SINGLE COMPARATOR 23.4 VIN+ + VIN- – Figure 23-3 provides a simplified circuit for an analog input. Since the analog pins are connected to a digital output, they have reverse biased diodes to VDD and VSS. The analog input, therefore, must be between VSS and VDD. If the input voltage deviates from this range, by more than 0.6V in either direction, one of the diodes is forward biased and a latch-up condition may occur. A maximum source impedance of 10 k is recommended for the analog sources. Any external component connected to an analog input pin, such as a capacitor or a Zener diode, should have very little leakage current. Output VINVIN+ Output FIGURE 23-3: Analog Input Connection Considerations COMPARATOR ANALOG INPUT MODEL VDD VT = 0.6V RS < 10k Comparator Input AIN CPIN 5 pF VA RIC VT = 0.6V ILEAKAGE ±100 nA VSS Legend: DS39974A-page 382 CPIN VT ILEAKAGE RIC RS VA = = = = = = Input Capacitance Threshold Voltage Leakage Current at the pin due to various junctions Interconnect Resistance Source Impedance Analog Voltage Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 23.5 Comparator Control and Configuration Each comparator has up to eight possible combinations of inputs: up to four external analog inputs and one of two internal voltage references. Both comparators allow a selection of the signal from pin, CxINA, or the voltage from the comparator reference (CVREF) on the non-inverting channel. This is compared to either CxINB, CxINC, CxIND, CTMU or the microcontroller’s fixed internal reference voltage (VIRV, 0.6V nominal) on the inverting channel. Table 23-1 provides the comparator inputs and outputs tied to fixed I/O pins. TABLE 23-1: Comparator 1 2 3 23.5.1 COMPARATOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS Input or Output I/O Pin C1INA (VIN+) RA0 C1INB (VIN-) RA3 C1INC (VIN-) RA5 C1IND (VIN-) RA2 C1OUT Remapped RPn C2INA(VIN+) RA1 C2INB(VIN-) RA2 C2INC (VIN-) RB2 The external reference is used when CREF = 0 (CMxCON<2>) and VIN+ is connected to the CxINA pin. When external voltage references are used, the comparator module can be configured to have the reference sources externally. The reference signal must be between VSS and VDD, and can be applied to either pin of the comparator. The comparator module also allows the selection of an internally generated voltage reference (CVREF) from the comparator voltage reference module. This module is described in more detail in Section 23.0 “Comparator Module”. The reference from the comparator voltage reference module is only available when CREF = 1. In this mode, the internal voltage reference is applied to the comparator’s VIN+ pin. Note: 23.5.2 C2IND (VIN-) RC2 C2OUT Remapped RPn C3INA(VIN+) RB3 C3INB(VIN-) RA2 C3INC (VIN-) RB1 C3IND (VIN-) RB0 C3OUT Remapped RPn The comparator input pin selected by CCH<1:0> must be configured as an input by setting both the corresponding TRIS bits and PCFG bits in the ANCON1 register. COMPARATOR ENABLE AND OUTPUT SELECTION The comparator outputs are read through the CMSTAT register. The CMSTAT<0> reads the Comparator 1 output, CMSTAT<1> reads the Comparator 2 output and CMSTAT<2> reads the Comparator 3 output. These bits are read-only. The comparator outputs may also be directly output to the RPn I/O pins by setting the COE bit (CMxCON<6>). When enabled, multiplexers in the output path of the pins switch to the output of the comparator. By default, the comparator’s output is at logic high whenever the voltage on VIN+ is greater than on VIN-. The polarity of the comparator outputs can be inverted using the CPOL bit (CMxCON<5>). The uncertainty of each of the comparators is related to the input offset voltage and the response time given in the specifications, as discussed in Section 23.2 “Comparator Operation”. COMPARATOR ENABLE AND INPUT SELECTION Setting the CON bit of the CMxCON register (CMxCON<7>) enables the comparator for operation. Clearing the CON bit disables the comparator, minimizing current consumption. The CCH<1:0> bits in the CMxCON register (CMxCON<1:0>) direct either one of three analog input pins, or the Internal Reference Voltage (VIRV), to the comparator, VIN-. Depending on the comparator operating mode, either an external or internal voltage reference may be used. The analog signal present at VIN- is compared to the signal at VIN+ and the digital output of the comparator is adjusted accordingly. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 383 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 23.6 When EVPOL<1:0> = 11, the comparator interrupt flag is set whenever there is a change in the output value of either comparator. Software will need to maintain information about the status of the output bits, as read from CMSTAT<1:0>, to determine the actual change that occurred. The CMxIF bits (PIR2<6:5>) are the Comparator x Interrupt Flags. The CMxIF bits must be reset by clearing them. Since it is also possible to write a ‘1’ to this register, a simulated interrupt may be initiated. Comparator Interrupts The comparator interrupt flag is set whenever any of the following occurs: • Low-to-high transition of the comparator output • High-to-low transition of the comparator output • Any change in the comparator output The comparator interrupt selection is done by the EVPOL<1:0> bits in the CMxCON register (CMxCON<4:3>). Table 23-2 provides the interrupt generation corresponding to comparator input voltages and EVPOL bit settings. In order to provide maximum flexibility, the output of the comparator may be inverted using the CPOL bit in the CMxCON register (CMxCON<5>). This is functionally identical to reversing the inverting and non-inverting inputs of the comparator for a particular mode. Both the CMxIE bits (PIE2<6:5>) and the PEIE bit (INTCON<6>) must be set to enable the interrupt. In addition, the GIE bit (INTCON<7>) must also be set. If any of these bits are clear, the interrupt is not enabled, though the CMxIF bits will still be set if an interrupt condition occurs. An interrupt is generated on the low-to-high or high-tolow transition of the comparator output. This mode of interrupt generation is dependent on EVPOL<1:0> in the CMxCON register. When EVPOL<1:0> = 01 or 10, the interrupt is generated on a low-to-high or high-tolow transition of the comparator output. Once the interrupt is generated, it is required to clear the interrupt flag by software. TABLE 23-2: Figure 23-3 provides a simplified diagram of the interrupt section. COMPARATOR INTERRUPT GENERATION CPOL EVPOL<1:0> 00 01 0 10 11 00 01 1 10 11 DS39974A-page 384 Comparator Input Change COUTx Transition Interrupt Generated VIN+ > VIN- Low-to-High No VIN+ < VIN- High-to-Low No VIN+ > VIN- Low-to-High Yes No VIN+ < VIN- High-to-Low VIN+ > VIN- Low-to-High No VIN+ < VIN- High-to-Low Yes VIN+ > VIN- Low-to-High Yes VIN+ < VIN- High-to-Low Yes VIN+ > VIN- High-to-Low No VIN+ < VIN- Low-to-High No VIN+ > VIN- High-to-Low No VIN+ < VIN- Low-to-High Yes VIN+ > VIN- High-to-Low Yes VIN+ < VIN- Low-to-High No VIN+ > VIN- High-to-Low Yes VIN+ < VIN- Low-to-High Yes Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 23.7 Comparator Operation During Sleep 23.8 A device Reset forces the CMxCON registers to their Reset state. This forces both comparators and the voltage reference to the OFF state. When a comparator is active and the device is placed in Sleep mode, the comparator remains active and the interrupt is functional, if enabled. This interrupt will wake-up the device from Sleep mode when enabled. Each operational comparator will consume additional current. To minimize power consumption while in Sleep mode, turn off the comparators (CON = 0) before entering Sleep. If the device wakes up from Sleep, the contents of the CMxCON register are not affected. TABLE 23-3: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARATOR MODULE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF PIR5 — — CM3IF INTCON Effects of a Reset Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF — BCL1IF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF TMR8IF TMR6IF TMR5IF TMR5GIF TMR1GIF PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE PIE5 — — CM3IE TMR8IE TMR6IE TMR5IE TMR5GIE TMR1GIE IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP HLVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP IPR5 — — CM3IP TMR8IP TMR6IP TMR5IP TMR5GIP TMR1GIP CMxCON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 CVRCON CVREN CVROE CVRR CVRSS CVR3 CVR2 CVR1 CVR0 CMSTAT — — — — — COUT3 COUT2 COUT1 ANCON0 PCFG7(1) PCFG6(1) PCFG5(1) PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 ANCON1 VBGEN — — PCFG12 PCFG11 PCFG10 PCFG9 PCFG8 TRISA TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 — TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not related to comparator operation. Note 1: These bits are not implemented on 28-pin devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 385 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 386 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 24.0 COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE MODULE The comparator voltage reference is a 16-tap resistor ladder network that provides a selectable reference voltage. Although its primary purpose is to provide a reference for the analog comparators, it may also be used independently of them. FIGURE 24-1: Figure 24-1 provides a block diagram of the module. The resistor ladder is segmented to provide two ranges of CVREF values and has a power-down function to conserve power when the reference is not being used. The module’s supply reference can be provided from either device VDD/VSS or an external voltage reference. COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE BLOCK DIAGRAM VREF+ VDD CVRSS = 1 8R CVRSS = 0 CVR<3:0> R CVREN R R 16-to-1 MUX R 16 Steps R CVREF R R CVRR VREF- 8R CVRSS = 1 CVRSS = 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 387 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 24.1 Configuring the Comparator Voltage Reference The comparator voltage reference module is controlled through the CVRCON register (Register 24-1). The comparator voltage reference provides two ranges of output voltage, each with 16 distinct levels. The range to be used is selected by the CVRR bit (CVRCON<5>). The primary difference between the ranges is the size of the steps selected by the CVREF Selection bits (CVR<3:0>), with one range offering finer resolution. The equations used to calculate the output of the comparator voltage reference are as follows: EQUATION 24-1: The comparator reference supply voltage can come from either VDD and VSS, or the external VREF+ and VREF- that are multiplexed with RA2 and RA3. The voltage source is selected by the CVRSS bit (CVRCON<4>). The settling time of the comparator voltage reference must be considered when changing the CVREF output (see Table 30-2 in Section 30.0 “Electrical Characteristics”). CALCULATING OUTPUT OF THE COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE When CVRR = 1 and CVRSS = 0: CVREF = ((CVR<3:0>)/24) x (AVDD - AVSS) When CVRR = 0 and CVRSS = 0: CVREF = (CVRSRC/4) + ((CVR<3:0>)/32) x (AVDD - AVSS) When CVRR = 1 and CVRSS = 1: CVREF = ((CVR<3:0>)/24) x ((VREF+) – VREF-) When CVRR = 0 and CVRSS = 1: CVREF = (CVRSRC/4) + ((CVR<3:0>)/32) x ((VREF+) – VREF-) REGISTER 24-1: CVRCON: COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER (F53h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CVREN CVROE(1) CVRR CVRSS CVR3 CVR2 CVR1 CVR0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 CVREN: Comparator Voltage Reference Enable bit 1 = CVREF circuit is powered on 0 = CVREF circuit is powered down bit 6 CVROE: Comparator VREF Output Enable bit(1) 1 = CVREF voltage level is also output on the RA2/AN2//C2INB/C1IND/C3INB/VREF-/CVREF pin 0 = CVREF voltage is disconnected from the RA2/AN2//C2INB/C1IND/C3INB/VREF-/CVREF pin bit 5 CVRR: Comparator VREF Range Selection bit 1 = 0 to 0.667 CVRSRC with CVRSRC/24 step size (low range) 0 = 0.25 CVRSRC to 0.75 CVRSRC with CVRSRC/32 step size (high range) bit 4 CVRSS: Comparator VREF Source Selection bit 1 = Comparator reference source, CVRSRC = (VREF+) – (VREF-) 0 = Comparator reference source, CVRSRC = AVDD – AVSS bit 3-0 CVR<3:0>: Comparator VREF Value Selection bits (0 (CVR<3:0>) 15) When CVRR = 1: CVREF = ((CVR<3:0>)/24) (CVRSRC) When CVRR = 0: CVREF = (CVRSRC/4) + ((CVR<3:0>)/32) (CVRSRC) Note 1: CVROE overrides the TRIS bit setting. DS39974A-page 388 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 24.2 The RA2 pin can be used as a simple D/A output with limited drive capability. Due to the limited current drive capability, a buffer must be used on the voltage reference output for external connections to VREF. See Figure 24-2 for an example buffering technique. Voltage Reference Accuracy/Error The full range of voltage reference cannot be realized due to the construction of the module. The transistors on the top and bottom of the resistor ladder network (see Figure 24-1) keep CVREF from approaching the reference source rails. The voltage reference is derived from the reference source; therefore, the CVREF output changes with fluctuations in that source. The tested absolute accuracy of the voltage reference can be found in Section 30.0 “Electrical Characteristics”. 24.3 24.4 When the device wakes up from Sleep through an interrupt or a Watchdog Timer time-out, the contents of the CVRCON register are not affected. To minimize current consumption in Sleep mode, the voltage reference should be disabled. Connection Considerations The voltage reference module operates independently of the comparator module. The output of the reference generator may be connected to the RA2 pin if the CVROE bit is set. Enabling the voltage reference output onto RA2 when it is configured as a digital input will increase current consumption. Connecting RA2 as a digital output with CVRSS enabled will also increase current consumption. FIGURE 24-2: Operation During Sleep 24.5 Effects of a Reset A device Reset disables the voltage reference by clearing bit, CVREN (CVRCON<7>). This Reset also disconnects the reference from the RA2 pin by clearing bit, CVROE (CVRCON<6>) and selects the high-voltage range by clearing bit, CVRR (CVRCON<5>). The CVR value select bits are also cleared. COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE OUTPUT BUFFER EXAMPLE PIC18F47J13 CVREF Module R(1) Voltage Reference Output Impedance Note 1: TABLE 24-1: Name + – RA2 CVREF Output R is dependent upon the Comparator Voltage Reference Configuration bits, CVRCON<5> and CVRCON<3:0>. REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH COMPARATOR VOLTAGE REFERENCE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 CVRCON CVREN CVROE CVRR CVRSS CVR3 CVR2 CVR1 CVR0 CM1CON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 CM2CON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 CM3CON CON COE CPOL EVPOL1 EVPOL0 CREF CCH1 CCH0 TRISA ANCON0 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 — TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 PCFG7(1) PCFG6(1) PCFG5(1) PCFG4 PCFG3 PCFG2 PCFG1 PCFG0 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’, r = reserved. Shaded cells are not used with the comparator voltage reference. Note 1: These bits are only available on 44-pin devices. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 389 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 390 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 25.0 HIGH/LOW VOLTAGE DETECT (HLVD) The High/Low-Voltage Detect (HLVD) module can be used to monitor the absolute voltage on VDD or the HLVDIN pin. This is a programmable circuit that allows the user to specify both a device voltage trip point and the direction of change from that point. The High/Low-Voltage Detect Control register (Register 25-1) completely controls the operation of the HLVD module. This allows the circuitry to be “turned off” by the user under software control, which minimizes the current consumption for the device. Figure 25-1 provides a block diagram for the HLVD module. If the module detects an excursion past the trip point in that direction, an interrupt flag is set. If the interrupt is enabled, the program execution will branch to the interrupt vector address and the software can then respond to the interrupt. REGISTER 25-1: HLVDCON: HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS F85h) R/W-0 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 VDIRMAG BGVST IRVST HLVDEN HLVDL3(1) HLVDL2(1) HLVDL1(1) HLVDL0(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 VDIRMAG: Voltage Direction Magnitude Select bit 1 = Event occurs when the voltage equals or exceeds the trip point (HLVDL<3:0>) 0 = Event occurs when the voltage equals or falls below the trip point (HLVDL<3:0>) bit 6 BGVST: Band Gap Reference Voltages Stable Status Flag bit 1 = Indicates internal band gap voltage references is stable 0 = Indicates internal band gap voltage reference is not stable bit 5 IRVST: Internal Reference Voltage Stable Flag bit 1 = Indicates that the voltage detect logic will generate the interrupt flag at the specified voltage range 0 = Indicates that the voltage detect logic will not generate the interrupt flag at the specified voltage range and the HLVD interrupt should not be enabled bit 4 HLVDEN: High/Low-Voltage Detect Power Enable bit 1 = HLVD is enabled 0 = HLVD is disabled bit 3-0 HLVDL<3:0>: Voltage Detection Limit bits(1) 1111 = External analog input is used (input comes from the HLVDIN pin) 1110 = Maximum setting . . . 0000 = Minimum setting Note 1: See Table 30-8 in Section 30.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for specifications. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 391 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY The module is enabled by setting the HLVDEN bit. Each time the module is enabled, the circuitry requires some time to stabilize. The IRVST bit is a read-only bit that indicates when the circuit is stable. The module can generate an interrupt only after the circuit is stable and IRVST is set. trip point voltage. The “trip point” voltage is the voltage level at which the device detects a high or low-voltage event, depending on the configuration of the module. When the supply voltage is equal to the trip point, the voltage tapped off of the resistor array is equal to the internal reference voltage generated by the voltage reference module. The comparator then generates an interrupt signal by setting the HLVDIF bit. The VDIRMAG bit determines the overall operation of the module. When VDIRMAG is cleared, the module monitors for drops in VDD below a predetermined set point. When the bit is set, the module monitors for rises in VDD above the set point. 25.1 The trip point voltage is software programmable to any one of 16 values. The trip point is selected by programming the HLVDL<3:0> bits (HLVDCON<3:0>). Additionally, the HLVD module allows the user to supply the trip voltage to the module from an external source. This mode is enabled when bits, HLVDL<3:0>, are set to ‘1111’. In this state, the comparator input is multiplexed from the external input pin, HLVDIN. This gives users flexibility because it allows them to configure the HLVD interrupt to occur at any voltage in the valid operating range. Operation When the HLVD module is enabled, a comparator uses an internally generated reference voltage as the set point. The set point is compared with the trip point, where each node in the resistor divider represents a FIGURE 25-1: HLVD MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM (WITH EXTERNAL INPUT) Externally Generated Trip Point VDD VDD HLVDL<3:0> HLVDCON Register HLVDEN 16-to-1 MUX HLVDIN VDIRMAG Set HLVDIF Internal Voltage Reference 1.2V Typical DS39974A-page 392 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 25.2 HLVD Setup 25.4 To set up the HLVD module: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Disable the module by clearing the HLVDEN bit (HLVDCON<4>). Write the value to the HLVDL<3:0> bits that select the desired HLVD trip point. Set the VDIRMAG bit to detect one of the following: • High voltage (VDIRMAG = 1) • Low voltage (VDIRMAG = 0) Enable the HLVD module by setting the HLVDEN bit. Clear the HLVD Interrupt Flag, HLVDIF (PIR2<2>), which may have been set from a previous interrupt. If interrupts are desired, enable the HLVD interrupt by setting the HLVDIE and GIE/GIEH bits (PIE2<2> and INTCON<7>). HLVD Start-up Time The internal reference voltage of the HLVD module, specified in electrical specification parameter D420 (see Table 30-8 in Section 30.0 “Electrical Characteristics”), may be used by other internal circuitry, such as the Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR). If the HLVD or other circuits using the voltage reference are disabled to lower the device’s current consumption, the reference voltage circuit will require time to become stable before a low or high-voltage condition can be reliably detected. This start-up time, TIRVST, is an interval that is independent of device clock speed. It is specified in electrical specification, parameter 36 (Table 30-15). The HLVD interrupt flag is not enabled until TIRVST has expired and a stable reference voltage is reached. For this reason, brief excursions beyond the set point may not be detected during this interval. Refer to Figure 25-2 or Figure 25-3. An interrupt will not be generated until the IRVST bit is set. 25.3 Current Consumption When the module is enabled, the HLVD comparator and voltage divider are enabled, and will consume static current. The total current consumption, when enabled, is specified in electrical specification parameter, D022B (IHLVD) (Section 30.2 “DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F47J13 Family (Industrial)”). Depending on the application, the HLVD module does not need to operate constantly. To decrease the current requirements, the HLVD circuitry may only need to be enabled for short periods where the voltage is checked. After doing the check, the HLVD module may be disabled. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 393 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 25-2: LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT OPERATION (VDIRMAG = 0) CASE 1: HLVDIF may not be Set VDD VHLVD HLVDIF Enable HLVD TIRVST IRVST Internal Reference is Stable HLVDIF Cleared in Software CASE 2: VDD VHLVD HLVDIF Enable HLVD TIRVST IRVST Internal Reference is Stable HLVDIF Cleared in Software HLVDIF Cleared in Software, HLVDIF Remains Set since HLVD Condition still Exists DS39974A-page 394 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 25-3: HIGH-VOLTAGE DETECT OPERATION (VDIRMAG = 1) CASE 1: HLVDIF may not be Set VHLVD VDD HLVDIF Enable HLVD TIRVST IRVST HLVDIF Cleared in Software Internal Reference is Stable CASE 2: VHLVD VDD HLVDIF Enable HLVD TIRVST IRVST Internal Reference is Stable HLVDIF Cleared in Software HLVDIF Cleared in Software, HLVDIF Remains Set since HLVD Condition still Exists 25.5 FIGURE 25-4: Applications In many applications, it is desirable to have the ability to detect a drop below, or rise above, a particular threshold. TYPICAL HIGH/ LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT APPLICATION For general battery applications, Figure 25-4 provides a possible voltage curve. VA VB Voltage Over time, the device voltage decreases. When the device voltage reaches voltage, VA, the HLVD logic generates an interrupt at time, TA. The interrupt could cause the execution of an ISR, which would allow the application to perform “housekeeping tasks” and perform a controlled shutdown before the device voltage exits the valid operating range at TB. The HLVD, thus, would give the application a time window, represented by the difference between TA and TB, to safely exit. Time TA TB Legend: VA = HLVD trip point VB = Minimum valid device operating voltage 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 395 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 25.6 Operation During Sleep 25.7 When enabled, the HLVD circuitry continues to operate during Sleep. If the device voltage crosses the trip point, the HLVDIF bit will be set and the device will wake-up from Sleep. Device execution will continue from the interrupt vector address if interrupts have been globally enabled. TABLE 25-1: Effects of a Reset A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state. This forces the HLVD module to be turned off. REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT MODULE Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 HLVDCON VDIRMAG BGVST IRVST HLVDEN HLVDL3 HLVDL2 HLVDL1 HLVDL0 INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE INT0IE RBIE TMR0IF INT0IF RBIF PIR2 OSCFIF CM2IF CM1IF — BCL1IF HLVDIF TMR3IF CCP2IF PIE2 OSCFIE CM2IE CM1IE — BCL1IE HLVDIE TMR3IE CCP2IE IPR2 OSCFIP CM2IP CM1IP — BCL1IP HLVDIP TMR3IP CCP2IP Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the HLVD module. DS39974A-page 396 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 26.0 • • • • • Control of edge sequence Control of response to edges Time measurement resolution of 1 nanosecond High-precision time measurement Time delay of external or internal signal asynchronous to system clock • Accurate current source suitable for capacitive measurement CHARGE TIME MEASUREMENT UNIT (CTMU) The Charge Time Measurement Unit (CTMU) is a flexible analog module that provides accurate differential time measurement between pulse sources, as well as asynchronous pulse generation. By working with other on-chip analog modules, the CTMU can be used to precisely measure time, measure capacitance, measure relative changes in capacitance or generate output pulses with a specific time delay. The CTMU is ideal for interfacing with capacitive-based sensors. The CTMU works in conjunction with the A/D Converter to provide up to 13 channels for time or charge measurement, depending on the specific device and the number of A/D channels available. When configured for time delay, the CTMU is connected to one of the analog comparators. The level-sensitive input edge sources can be selected from four sources: two external inputs, Timer1 or Output Compare Module 1. The module includes the following key features: • Up to 13 channels available for capacitive or time measurement input • On-chip precision current source • Four-edge input trigger sources • Polarity control for each edge source FIGURE 26-1: Figure 26-1 provides a block diagram of the CTMU. CTMU BLOCK DIAGRAM CTMUCONH:CTMUCONL EDGEN EDGSEQEN EDG1SEL<1:0> EDG1POL EDG2SEL<1:0> EDG2POL CTED1 CTED2 CTMUICON ITRIM<5:0> IRNG<1:0> EDG1STAT EDG2STAT Edge Control Logic TGEN IDISSEN Current Source Current Control Timer1 CTMU Control Logic Pulse Generator ECCP1 A/D Converter CTPLS Comparator 2 Input Comparator 2 Output 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 397 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 26.1 CTMU Operation The CTMU works by using a fixed current source to charge a circuit. The type of circuit depends on the type of measurement being made. In the case of charge measurement, the current is fixed and the amount of time the current is applied to the circuit is fixed. The amount of voltage read by the A/D is then a measurement of the capacitance of the circuit. In the case of time measurement, the current, as well as the capacitance of the circuit, is fixed. In this case, the voltage read by the A/D is then representative of the amount of time elapsed from the time the current source starts and stops charging the circuit. If the CTMU is being used as a time delay, both capacitance and current source are fixed, as well as the voltage supplied to the comparator circuit. The delay of a signal is determined by the amount of time it takes the voltage to charge to the comparator threshold voltage. 26.1.1 THEORY OF OPERATION The operation of the CTMU is based on the following equation for charge: I=C• dV dT More simply, the amount of charge measured in coulombs in a circuit is defined as current in amperes (I) multiplied by the amount of time in seconds that the current flows (t). Charge is also defined as the capacitance in farads (C) multiplied by the voltage of the circuit (V). It follows that: I t = C V. The CTMU module provides a constant, known current source. The A/D Converter is used to measure (V) in the equation, leaving two unknowns: capacitance (C) and time (t). The above equation can be used to calculate capacitance or time, by either the relationship using the known fixed capacitance of the circuit: t = C V I or by: C = I t V using a fixed time that the current source is applied to the circuit. 26.1.2 CURRENT SOURCE At the heart of the CTMU is a precision current source, designed to provide a constant reference for measurements. The level of current is user selectable across three ranges or a total of two orders of magnitude, with the ability to trim the output in ±2% increments (nominal). The current range is selected by the IRNG<1:0> bits (CTMUICON<1:0>), with a value of ‘01’ representing the lowest range. DS39974A-page 398 Current trim is provided by the ITRIM<5:0> bits (CTMUICON<7:2>). These six bits allow trimming of the current source in steps of approximately 2% per step. Note that half of the range adjusts the current source positively and the other half reduces the current source. A value of ‘000000’ is the neutral position (no change). A value of ‘100001’ is the maximum negative adjustment (approximately -62%) and ‘011111’ is the maximum positive adjustment (approximately +62%). 26.1.3 EDGE SELECTION AND CONTROL CTMU measurements are controlled by edge events occurring on the module’s two input channels. Each channel, referred to as Edge 1 and Edge 2, can be configured to receive input pulses from one of the edge input pins (CTED1 and CTED2), Timer1 or Output Compare Module 1. The input channels are levelsensitive, responding to the instantaneous level on the channel rather than a transition between levels. The inputs are selected using the EDG1SEL and EDG2SEL bit pairs (CTMUCONL<3:2> and <6:5>). In addition to source, each channel can be configured for event polarity using the EDGE2POL and EDGE1POL bits (CTMUCONL<7,4>). The input channels can also be filtered for an edge event sequence (Edge 1 occurring before Edge 2) by setting the EDGSEQEN bit (CTMUCONH<2>). 26.1.4 EDGE STATUS The CTMUCONL register also contains two status bits: EDG2STAT and EDG1STAT (CTMUCONL<1:0>). Their primary function is to show if an edge response has occurred on the corresponding channel. The CTMU automatically sets a particular bit when an edge response is detected on its channel. The level-sensitive nature of the input channels also means that the status bits become set immediately if the channel’s configuration is changed and is the same as the channel’s current state. The module uses the edge status bits to control the current source output to external analog modules (such as the A/D Converter). Current is only supplied to external modules when only one (but not both) of the status bits is set, and shuts current off when both bits are either set or cleared. This allows the CTMU to measure current only during the interval between edges. After both status bits are set, it is necessary to clear them before another measurement is taken. Both bits should be cleared simultaneously, if possible, to avoid re-enabling the CTMU current source. In addition to being set by the CTMU hardware, the edge status bits can also be set by software. This is also the user’s application to manually enable or disable the current source. Setting either one (but not both) of the bits enables the current source. Setting or clearing both bits at once disables the source. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 26.1.5 INTERRUPTS The CTMU sets its interrupt flag (PIR3<2>) whenever the current source is enabled, then disabled. An interrupt is generated only if the corresponding interrupt enable bit (PIE3<2>) is also set. If edge sequencing is not enabled (i.e., Edge 1 must occur before Edge 2), it is necessary to monitor the edge status bits and determine which edge occurred last and caused the interrupt. 26.2 CTMU Module Initialization The following sequence is a general guideline used to initialize the CTMU module: 1. Select the current source range using the IRNG bits (CTMUICON<1:0>). 2. Adjust the current source trim using the ITRIM bits (CTMUICON<7:2>). 3. Configure the edge input sources for Edge 1 and Edge 2 by setting the EDG1SEL and EDG2SEL bits (CTMUCONL<3:2> and <6:5>). 4. Configure the input polarities for the edge inputs using the EDG1POL and EDG2POL bits (CTMUCONL<7,4>). The default configuration is for negative edge polarity (high-to-low transitions). 5. Enable edge sequencing using the EDGSEQEN bit (CTMUCONH<2>). By default, edge sequencing is disabled. 6. Select the operating mode (Measurement or Time Delay) with the TGEN bit (CTMUCONH<4>). The default mode is Time/Capacitance Measurement. 7. Discharge the connected circuit by setting the IDISSEN bit (CTMUCONH<1>). After waiting a sufficient time for the circuit to discharge, clear IDISSEN. 8. Disable the module by clearing the CTMUEN bit (CTMUCONH<7>). 9. Enable the module by setting the CTMUEN bit. 10. Clear the Edge Status bits: EDG2STAT and EDG1STAT (CTMUCONL<1:0>). Both bits should be cleared simultaneously, if possible, to avoid re-enabling the CTMU current source. 11. Enable both edge inputs by setting the EDGEN bit (CTMUCONH<3>). Depending on the type of measurement or pulse generation being performed, one or more additional modules may also need to be initialized and configured with the CTMU module: • Edge Source Generation: In addition to the external edge input pins, both Timer1 and the Output Compare/PWM1 module can be used as edge sources for the CTMU. • Capacitance or Time Measurement: The CTMU module uses the A/D Converter to measure the voltage across a capacitor that is connected to one of the analog input channels. • Pulse Generation: When generating system clock, independent output pulses, the CTMU module uses Comparator 2 and the associated comparator voltage reference. 26.3 The CTMU requires calibration for precise measurements of capacitance and time, as well as for accurate time delay. If the application only requires measurement of a relative change in capacitance or time, calibration is usually not necessary. An example of this type of application would include a capacitive touch switch, in which the touch circuit has a baseline capacitance, and the added capacitance of the human body changes the overall capacitance of a circuit. If actual capacitance or time measurement is required, two hardware calibrations must take place: the current source needs calibration to set it to a precise current, and the circuit being measured needs calibration to measure and/or nullify all other capacitance other than that to be measured. 26.3.1 CURRENT SOURCE CALIBRATION The current source on board the CTMU module has a range of ±62% nominal for each of three current ranges. Therefore, for precise measurements, it is possible to measure and adjust this current source by placing a high-precision resistor, RCAL, onto an unused analog channel. An example circuit is shown in Figure 26-2. The current source measurement is performed using the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Calibrating the CTMU Module Preliminary Initialize the A/D Converter. Initialize the CTMU. Enable the current source by setting EDG1STAT (CTMUCONL<0>). Issue a time delay for voltage across RCAL to stabilize and the ADC sample/hold capacitor to charge. Perform A/D conversion. Calculate the present source current using I = V/ RCAL, where RCAL is a high-precision resistance and V is measured by performing an A/D conversion. DS39974A-page 399 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY The CTMU current source may be trimmed with the trim bits in CTMUICON using an iterative process to get an exact desired current. Alternatively, the nominal value without adjustment may be used; it may be stored by the software for use in all subsequent capacitive or time measurements. To calculate the optimal value for RCAL, the nominal current must be chosen. For example, if the A/D Converter reference voltage is 3.3V, use 70% of full scale or 2.31V as the desired approximate voltage to be read by the A/D Converter. If the range of the CTMU current source is selected to be 0.55 A, the resistor value needed is calculated as RCAL = 2.31V/0.55 A, for a value of 4.2 MΩ. Similarly, if the current source is chosen to be 5.5 A, RCAL would be 420,000Ω, and 42,000Ω if the current source is set to 55 A. FIGURE 26-2: A value of 70% of full-scale voltage is chosen to make sure that the A/D Converter is in a range that is well above the noise floor. Keep in mind that if an exact current is chosen that is to incorporate the trimming bits from CTMUICON, the resistor value of RCAL may need to be adjusted accordingly. RCAL may also be adjusted to allow for available resistor values. RCAL should be of the highest precision available, keeping in mind the amount of precision needed for the circuit that the CTMU will be used to measure. A recommended minimum would be 0.1% tolerance. The following examples show one typical method for performing a CTMU current calibration. Example 26-1 demonstrates how to initialize the A/D Converter and the CTMU. This routine is typical for applications using both modules. Example 26-2 demonstrates one method for the actual calibration routine. CTMU CURRENT SOURCE CALIBRATION CIRCUIT PIC18F47J13 Current Source CTMU A/D Converter ANx RCAL DS39974A-page 400 A/D MUX Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY EXAMPLE 26-1: SETUP FOR CTMU CALIBRATION ROUTINES #include <p18cxxx.h> /**************************************************************************/ /*Setup CTMU *****************************************************************/ /**************************************************************************/ void setup(void) { //CTMUCON - CTMU Control register CTMUCONH = 0x00; //make sure CTMU is disabled CTMUCONL = 0x90; //CTMU continues to run when emulator is stopped,CTMU continues //to run in idle mode,Time Generation mode disabled, Edges are blocked //No edge sequence order, Analog current source not grounded, trigger //output disabled, Edge2 polarity = positive level, Edge2 source = //source 0, Edge1 polarity = positive level, Edge1 source = source 0, //CTMUICON - CTMU Current Control Register CTMUICON = 0x01; //0.55uA, Nominal - No Adjustment /**************************************************************************/ //Setup AD converter; /**************************************************************************/ TRISA=0x04; //set channel 2 as an input // Configured AN2 as an analog channel // ANCON0 ANCON0 = 0xFB; // ANCON1 ANCON1 = 0x1F; // ADCON1 ADCON1bits.ADFM=1; ADCON1bits.ADCAL=0; ADCON1bits.ACQT=1; ADCON1bits.ADCS=2; // // // // // ADCON0 ADCON0bits.VCFG0 =0; ADCON0bits.VCFG1 =0; ADCON0bits.CHS=2; // Vref+ = AVdd // Vref- = AVss // Select ADC channel ADCON0bits.ADON=1; // Turn on ADC Result format 1= Right justified Normal A/D conversion operation Acquisition time 7 = 20TAD 2 = 4TAD 1=2TAD Clock conversion bits 6= FOSC/64 2=FOSC/32 } 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 401 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY EXAMPLE 26-2: CURRENT CALIBRATION ROUTINE #include "p18cxxx.h" #define COUNT 500 #define DELAY for(i=0;i<COUNT;i++) #define RCAL .027 #define ADSCALE 1023 #define ADREF 3.3 int main(void) { int i; int j = 0; //index for loop unsigned int Vread = 0; double VTot = 0; float Vavg=0, Vcal=0, CTMUISrc = 0; //@ 8MHz = 125uS. //R value is 4200000 (4.2M) //scaled so that result is in //1/100th of uA //for unsigned conversion 10 sig bits //Vdd connected to A/D Vr+ //float values stored for calcs //assume CTMU and A/D have been setup correctly //see Example 25-1 for CTMU & A/D setup setup(); CTMUCONHbits.CTMUEN = CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT CTMUCONLbits.EDG2STAT for(j=0;j<10;j++) { CTMUCONHbits.IDISSEN DELAY; CTMUCONHbits.IDISSEN 1; = 0; = 0; = 1; = 0; CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 1; //Enable the CTMU // Set Edge status bits to zero //drain charge on the circuit //wait 125us //end drain of circuit DELAY; CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 0; //Begin charging the circuit //using CTMU current source //wait for 125us //Stop charging circuit PIR1bits.ADIF = 0; ADCON0bits.GO=1; while(!PIR1bits.ADIF); //make sure A/D Int not set //and begin A/D conv. //Wait for A/D convert complete Vread = ADRES; PIR1bits.ADIF = 0; VTot += Vread; //Get the value from the A/D //Clear A/D Interrupt Flag //Add the reading to the total } Vavg = (float)(VTot/10.000); Vcal = (float)(Vavg/ADSCALE*ADREF); CTMUISrc = Vcal/RCAL; //Average of 10 readings //CTMUISrc is in 1/100ths of uA } DS39974A-page 402 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 26.3.2 CAPACITANCE CALIBRATION There is a small amount of capacitance from the internal A/D Converter sample capacitor as well as stray capacitance from the circuit board traces and pads that affect the precision of capacitance measurements. A measurement of the stray capacitance can be taken by making sure the desired capacitance to be measured has been removed. The measurement is then performed using the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Initialize the A/D Converter and the CTMU. Set EDG1STAT (= 1). Wait for a fixed delay of time, t. Clear EDG1STAT. Perform an A/D conversion. Calculate the stray and A/D sample capacitances: C OFFSET = C STRAY + C AD = I t V This measured value is then stored and used for calculations of time measurement or subtracted for capacitance measurement. For calibration, it is expected that the capacitance of CSTRAY + CAD is approximately known. CAD is approximately 4 pF. An iterative process may need to be used to adjust the time, t, that the circuit is charged to obtain a reasonable voltage reading from the A/D Converter. The value of t may be determined by setting COFFSET to a theoretical value, then solving for t. For example, if CSTRAY is theoretically calculated to be 11 pF, and V is expected to be 70% of VDD or 2.31V, then t would be: (4 pF + 11 pF) • 2.31V/0.55 A or 63 s. See Example 26-3 for a typical routine for CTMU capacitance calibration. where I is known from the current source measurement step, t is a fixed delay and V is measured by performing an A/D conversion. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 403 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY EXAMPLE 26-3: CAPACITANCE CALIBRATION ROUTINE #include "p18cxxx.h" #define #define #define #define #define #define COUNT 25 ETIME COUNT*2.5 DELAY for(i=0;i<COUNT;i++) ADSCALE 1023 ADREF 3.3 RCAL .027 //@ 8MHz INTFRC = 62.5 us. //time in uS //for unsigned conversion 10 sig bits //Vdd connected to A/D Vr+ //R value is 4200000 (4.2M) //scaled so that result is in //1/100th of uA int main(void) { int i; int j = 0; //index for loop unsigned int Vread = 0; float CTMUISrc, CTMUCap, Vavg, VTot, Vcal; //assume CTMU and A/D have been setup correctly //see Example 25-1 for CTMU & A/D setup setup(); CTMUCONHbits.CTMUEN = 1; CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 0; CTMUCONLbits.EDG2STAT = 0; for(j=0;j<10;j++) { CTMUCONHbits.IDISSEN = 1; DELAY; CTMUCONHbits.IDISSEN = 0; CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 1; // Enable the CTMU // Set Edge status bits to zero //drain charge on the circuit //wait 125us //end drain of circuit DELAY; CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 0; //Begin charging the circuit //using CTMU current source //wait for 125us //Stop charging circuit PIR1bits.ADIF = 0; ADCON0bits.GO=1; while(!PIR1bits.ADIF); //make sure A/D Int not set //and begin A/D conv. //Wait for A/D convert complete Vread = ADRES; PIR1bits.ADIF = 0; VTot += Vread; //Get the value from the A/D //Clear A/D Interrupt Flag //Add the reading to the total } Vavg = (float)(VTot/10.000); Vcal = (float)(Vavg/ADSCALE*ADREF); CTMUISrc = Vcal/RCAL; CTMUCap = (CTMUISrc*ETIME/Vcal)/100; //Average of 10 readings //CTMUISrc is in 1/100ths of uA } DS39974A-page 404 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 26.4 Measuring Capacitance with the CTMU There are two separate methods of measuring capacitance with the CTMU. The first is the absolute method, in which the actual capacitance value is desired. The second is the relative method, in which the actual capacitance is not needed, rather an indication of a change in capacitance is required. 26.4.1 ABSOLUTE CAPACITANCE MEASUREMENT For absolute capacitance measurements, both the current and capacitance calibration steps found in Section 26.3 “Calibrating the CTMU Module” should be followed. Capacitance measurements are then performed using the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Initialize the A/D Converter. Initialize the CTMU. Set EDG1STAT. Wait for a fixed delay, T. Clear EDG1STAT. Perform an A/D conversion. Calculate the total capacitance, CTOTAL = (I * T)/V, where I is known from the current source measurement step (see Section 26.3.1 “Current Source Calibration”), T is a fixed delay and V is measured by performing an A/D conversion. Subtract the stray and A/D capacitance (COFFSET from Section 26.3.2 “Capacitance Calibration”) from CTOTAL to determine the measured capacitance. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 26.4.2 CAPACITIVE TOUCH SENSE USING RELATIVE CHARGE MEASUREMENT An application may not require precise capacitance measurements. For example, when detecting a valid press of a capacitance-based touch sense button, detecting a relative change of capacitance is of interest. In this type of application, when the touch sense pad is not being pressed, the total capacitance is the capacitance of the combination of the board traces, the A/D Converter, etc. A larger voltage will be measured by the A/D Converter. When the touch sense pad is pressed, the total capacitance is larger due to the addition of the capacitance of the human body, therefore, a smaller voltage will be measured by the A/D Converter. Detecting capacitance changes is easily accomplished with the CTMU using these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Initialize the A/D Converter and the CTMU. Set EDG1STAT. Wait for a fixed delay. Clear EDG1STAT. Perform an A/D conversion. The voltage measured by performing the A/D conversion is an indication of the relative capacitance. Note that in this case, no calibration of the current source or circuit capacitance measurement is needed. See Example 26-4 for a sample software routine for a capacitive touch switch. Preliminary DS39974A-page 405 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY EXAMPLE 26-4: ROUTINE FOR CAPACITIVE TOUCH SWITCH #include "p18cxxx.h" #define #define #define #define COUNT 500 DELAY for(i=0;i<COUNT;i++) OPENSW 1000 TRIP 300 #define HYST 65 //@ 8MHz = 125uS. //Un-pressed switch value //Difference between pressed //and un-pressed switch //amount to change //from pressed to un-pressed #define PRESSED 1 #define UNPRESSED 0 int main(void) { unsigned int Vread; unsigned int switchState; int i; //storage for reading //assume CTMU and A/D have been setup correctly //see Example 25-1 for CTMU & A/D setup setup(); CTMUCONHbits.CTMUEN = 1; CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 0; CTMUCONLbits.EDG2STAT = 0; // Enable the CTMU // Set Edge status bits to zero CTMUCONHbits.IDISSEN = 1; DELAY; CTMUCONHbits.IDISSEN = 0; //drain charge on the circuit //wait 125us //end drain of circuit CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 1; DELAY; CTMUCONLbits.EDG1STAT = 0; //Begin charging the circuit //using CTMU current source //wait for 125us //Stop charging circuit PIR1bits.ADIF = 0; ADCON0bits.GO=1; while(!PIR1bits.ADIF); //make sure A/D Int not set //and begin A/D conv. //Wait for A/D convert complete Vread = ADRES; //Get the value from the A/D if(Vread < OPENSW - TRIP) { switchState = PRESSED; } else if(Vread > OPENSW - TRIP + HYST) { switchState = UNPRESSED; } } DS39974A-page 406 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 26.5 Measuring Time with the CTMU Module Time can be precisely measured after the ratio (C/I) is measured from the current and capacitance calibration step by following these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Initialize the A/D Converter and the CTMU. Set EDG1STAT. Set EDG2STAT. Perform an A/D conversion. Calculate the time between edges as T = (C/I) * V, where I is calculated in the current calibration step (Section 26.3.1 “Current Source Calibration”), C is calculated in the capacitance calibration step (Section 26.3.2 “Capacitance Calibration”) and V is measured by performing the A/D conversion. FIGURE 26-3: It is assumed that the time measured is small enough that the capacitance, CAD + CEXT, provides a valid voltage to the A/D Converter. For the smallest time measurement, always set the A/D Channel Select register (AD1CHS) to an unused A/D channel; the corresponding pin for which is not connected to any circuit board trace. This minimizes added stray capacitance, keeping the total circuit capacitance close to that of the A/D Converter itself (4-5 pF). To measure longer time intervals, an external capacitor may be connected to an A/D channel and this channel selected when making a time measurement. TYPICAL CONNECTIONS AND INTERNAL CONFIGURATION FOR TIME MEASUREMENT PIC18F47J13 CTMU CTED1 EDG1 CTED2 EDG2 Current Source A/D Voltage ANX A/D Converter CAD CEXT 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 407 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 26.6 An example use of the external capacitor feature is interfacing with variable capacitive-based sensors, such as a humidity sensor. As the humidity varies, the pulse-width output on CTPLS will vary. An example use of the CTDIN feature is interfacing with a digital sensor. The CTPLS output pin can be connected to an input capture pin and the varying pulse width measured to determine the sensor’s output in the application. Creating a Delay with the CTMU Module A unique feature on board the CTMU module is its ability to generate system clock independent output pulses based on either an external voltage or an external capacitor value. When using an external voltage, this is accomplished using the CTDIN input pin as a trigger for the pulse delay. When using an external capacitor value, this is accomplished using the internal comparator voltage reference module and Comparator 2 input pin.The pulse is output onto the CTPLS pin. To enable this mode, set the TGEN bit. To use this feature: 1. 2. 3. See Figure 26-4 for an example circuit. When CTMUDS (ODCON3<0>) is cleared, the pulse delay is determined by the output of Comparator 2, and when it is set, the pulse delay is determined by the input of CTDIN. CDELAY is chosen by the user to determine the output pulse width on CTPLS. The pulse width is calculated by T = (CDELAY/I)*V, where I is known from the current source measurement step (Section 26.3.1 “Current Source Calibration”) and V is the internal reference voltage (CVREF). FIGURE 26-4: If CTMUDS is cleared, initialize Comparator 2. If CTMUDS is cleared, initialize the comparator voltage reference. Initialize the CTMU and enable time delay generation by setting the TGEN bit. Set EDG1STAT. 4. When CTMUDS is cleared, as soon as CDELAY charges to the value of the voltage reference trip point, an output pulse is generated on CTPLS. When CTMUDS is set, as soon as CTDIN is set, an output pulse is generated on CTPLS. TYPICAL CONNECTIONS AND INTERNAL CONFIGURATION FOR PULSE DELAY GENERATION PIC18F47J13 CTEDG1 EDG1 CTMU CTPLS Current Source Comparator C2INB CDELAY C2 1 0 CVREF CTMUDS DS39974A-page 408 Preliminary CTDIN 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 26.7 26.7.1 Operation During Sleep/Idle Modes 26.8 SLEEP MODE AND DEEP SLEEP MODES When the device enters any Sleep mode, the CTMU module current source is always disabled. If the CTMU is performing an operation that depends on the current source when Sleep mode is invoked, the operation may not terminate correctly. Capacitance and time measurements may return erroneous values. 26.7.2 IDLE MODE The behavior of the CTMU in Idle mode is determined by the CTMUSIDL bit (CTMUCONH<5>). If CTMUSIDL is cleared, the module will continue to operate in Idle mode. If CTMUSIDL is set, the module’s current source is disabled when the device enters Idle mode. In this case, if the module is performing an operation when Idle mode is invoked, the results will be similar to those with Sleep mode. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Effects of a Reset on CTMU Upon Reset, all registers of the CTMU are cleared. This leaves the CTMU module disabled; its current source is turned off and all configuration options return to their default settings. The module needs to be re-initialized following any Reset. If the CTMU is in the process of taking a measurement at the time of Reset, the measurement will be lost. A partial charge may exist on the circuit that was being measured, and should be properly discharged before the CTMU makes subsequent attempts to make a measurement. The circuit is discharged by setting and then clearing the IDISSEN bit (CTMUCONH<1>) while the A/D Converter is connected to the appropriate channel. Preliminary DS39974A-page 409 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 26.9 The CTMUCONH and CTMUCONL registers (Register 26-1 and Register 26-2) contain control bits for configuring the CTMU module edge source selection, edge source polarity selection, edge sequencing, A/D trigger, analog circuit capacitor discharge and enables. The CTMUICON register (Register 26-3) has bits for selecting the current source range and current source trim. Registers There are three control registers for the CTMU: • CTMUCONH • CTMUCONL • CTMUICON REGISTER 26-1: CTMUCONH: CTMU CONTROL REGISTER HIGH (ACCESS FB3h) R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CTMUEN — CTMUSIDL TGEN EDGEN EDGSEQEN IDISSEN CTTRIG bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 CTMUEN: CTMU Enable bit 1 = Module is enabled 0 = Module is disabled bit 6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 CTMUSIDL: Stop in Idle Mode bit 1 = Discontinue module operation when device enters Idle mode 0 = Continue module operation in Idle mode bit 4 TGEN: Time Generation Enable bit 1 = Enables edge delay generation 0 = Disables edge delay generation bit 3 EDGEN: Edge Enable bit 1 = Edges are not blocked 0 = Edges are blocked bit 2 EDGSEQEN: Edge Sequence Enable bit 1 = Edge 1 event must occur before Edge 2 event can occur 0 = No edge sequence is needed bit 1 IDISSEN: Analog Current Source Control bit 1 = Analog current source output is grounded 0 = Analog current source output is not grounded bit 0 CTTRIG: CTMU Special Event Trigger bit 1 = CTMU Special Event Trigger is enabled 0 = CTMU Special Event Trigger is disabled DS39974A-page 410 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 26-2: CTMUCONL: CTMU CONTROL REGISTER LOW (ACCESS FB2h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-x R/W-x EDG2POL EDG2SEL1 EDG2SEL0 EDG1POL EDG1SEL1 EDG1SEL0 EDG2STAT EDG1STAT bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 EDG2POL: Edge 2 Polarity Select bit 1 = Edge 2 is programmed for a positive edge response 0 = Edge 2 is programmed for a negative edge response bit 6-5 EDG2SEL<1:0>: Edge 2 Source Select bits 11 = CTED1 pin 10 = CTED2 pin 01 = ECCP1 output compare module 00 = Timer1 module bit 4 EDG1POL: Edge 1 Polarity Select bit 1 = Edge 1 is programmed for a positive edge response 0 = Edge 1 is programmed for a negative edge response bit 3-2 EDG1SEL<1:0>: Edge 1 Source Select bits 11 = CTED1 pin 10 = CTED2 pin 01 = ECCP1 output compare module 00 = Timer1 module bit 1 EDG2STAT: Edge 2 Status bit 1 = Edge 2 event has occurred 0 = Edge 2 event has not occurred bit 0 EDG1STAT: Edge 1 Status bit 1 = Edge 1 event has occurred 0 = Edge 1 event has not occurred 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS39974A-page 411 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 26-3: CTMUICON: CTMU CURRENT CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS FB1h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ITRIM5 ITRIM4 ITRIM3 ITRIM2 ITRIM1 ITRIM0 IRNG1 IRNG0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-2 ITRIM<5:0>: Current Source Trim bits 011111 = Maximum positive change (+62% typ.) from nominal current 011110 . . . 000001 = Minimum positive change (+2% typ.) from nominal current 000000 = Nominal current output specified by IRNG<1:0> 111111 = Minimum negative change (-2% typ.) from nominal current . . . 100010 100001 = Maximum negative change (-62% typ.) from nominal current bit 1-0 IRNG<1:0>: Current Source Range Select bits 11 = 100 Base current 10 = 10 Base current 01 = Base current level (0.55 A nominal) 00 = Current source disabled REGISTER 26-4: ODCON3: PERIPHERAL OPEN-DRAIN CONTROL REGISTER 3 (BANKED F40h) R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 CTMUDS — — — — — SPI2OD SPI1OD bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7 CTMUDS: CTMU Pulse Delay Enable bit 1 = Pulse delay input for CTMU enabled on pin RA1 bit 6-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 SPI2OD: SPI2 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled bit 0 SPI1OD: SPI1 Open-Drain Output Enable bit 1 = Open-drain capability is enabled 0 = Open-drain capability is disabled DS39974A-page 412 Preliminary x = Bit is unknown 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 26-1: Name REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CTMU MODULE Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 — CTMUSIDL TGEN EDGEN CTMUCONH CTMUEN Bit 2 Bit 1 EDGSEQEN IDISSEN Bit 0 CTTRIG CTMUCONL EDG2POL EDG2SEL1 EDG2SEL0 EDG1POL EDG1SEL1 EDG1SEL0 EDG2STAT EDG1STAT CTMUICON ITRIM5 ITRIM4 ITRIM3 ITRIM2 ITRIM1 ITRIM0 IRNG1 IRNG0 PIR3 SSP2IF BCL2IF RC2IF TX2IF TMR4IF CTMUIF TMR3GIF RTCCIF PIE3 SSP2IE BCL2IE RC2IE TX2IE TMR4IE CTMUIE TMR3GIE RTCCIE IPR3 SSP2IP BCL2IP RC2IP TX2IP TMR4IP CTMUIP TMR3GIP RTCCIP CTMUDS — — — — — SPI2OD SPI1OD ODCON3 Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used during CTMU module. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 413 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 414 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 27.0 SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE CPU PIC18F47J13 family devices include several features intended to maximize reliability and minimize cost through elimination of external components. These are: • Oscillator Selection • Resets: - Power-on Reset (POR) - Power-up Timer (PWRT) - Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) - Brown-out Reset (BOR) • Interrupts • Watchdog Timer (WDT) • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) • Two-Speed Start-up • Code Protection • In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) 27.1.1 CONSIDERATIONS FOR CONFIGURING THE PIC18F47J13 FAMILY DEVICES Unlike some previous PIC18 microcontrollers, PIC18F47J13 family devices do not use persistent memory registers to store configuration information. The Configuration registers, CONFIG1L through CONFIG4H, are implemented as volatile memory. Immediately after power-up, or after a device Reset, the microcontroller hardware automatically loads the CONFIG1L through CONFIG4L registers with configuration data stored in nonvolatile Flash program memory. The last four words of Flash program memory, known as the Flash Configuration Words (FCW), are used to store the configuration data. Table 27-1 provides the Flash program memory, which will be loaded into the corresponding Configuration register. The oscillator can be configured for the application depending on frequency, power, accuracy and cost. All of the options are discussed in detail in Section 3.0 “Oscillator Configurations”. When creating applications for these devices, users should always specifically allocate the location of the FCW for configuration data. This is to make certain that program code is not stored in this address when the code is compiled. A complete discussion of device Resets and interrupts is available in previous sections of this data sheet. In addition to their Power-up and Oscillator Start-up Timers provided for Resets, the PIC18F47J13 family of devices has a configurable Watchdog Timer (WDT), which is controlled in software. The four Most Significant bits (MSb) of the FCW, corresponding to CONFIG1H, CONFIG2H, CONFIG3H and CONFIG4H, should always be programmed to ‘1111’. This makes these FCWs appear to be NOP instructions in the remote event that their locations are ever executed by accident. The inclusion of an internal RC oscillator also provides the additional benefits of a Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) and Two-Speed Start-up. FSCM provides for background monitoring of the peripheral clock and automatic switchover in the event of its failure. Two-Speed Start-up enables code to be executed almost immediately on start-up, while the primary clock source completes its start-up delays. All of these features are enabled and configured by setting the appropriate Configuration register bits. 27.1 Configuration Bits The Configuration bits can be programmed to select various device configurations. The configuration data is stored in the last four words of Flash program memory; Figure 6-1 depicts this. The configuration data gets loaded into the volatile Configuration registers, CONFIG1L through CONFIG4H, which are readable and mapped to program memory, starting at location 300000h. The four MSbs of the CONFIG1H, CONFIG2H, CONFIG3H and CONFIG4H registers are not implemented, so writing ‘1’s to their corresponding FCW has no effect on device operation. To prevent inadvertent configuration changes during code execution, the Configuration registers, CONFIG1L through CONFIG4L, are loaded only once per power-up or Reset cycle. User’s firmware can still change the configuration by using self-reprogramming to modify the contents of the FCW. Modifying the FCW will not change the active contents being used in the CONFIG1L through CONFIG4H registers until after the device is reset. Table 27-2 provides a complete list of the Configuration bits and Device IDs. A detailed explanation of the various bit functions is provided in Register 27-1 through Register 27-6. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 415 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 27-1: MAPPING OF THE FLASH CONFIGURATION WORDS TO THE CONFIGURATION REGISTERS Configuration Register (Volatile) Configuration Register Address Flash Configuration Byte Address 300000h XXXF8h CONFIG1L CONFIG1H 300001h XXXF9h CONFIG2L 300002h XXXFAh CONFIG2H 300003h XXXFBh CONFIG3L 300004h XXXFCh CONFIG3H 300005h XXXFDh CONFIG4L 300006h XXXFEh CONFIG4H 300007h XXXFFh TABLE 27-2: CONFIGURATION BITS AND DEVICE IDs File Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Default/ Unprog. Value(1) 300000h CONFIG1L DEBUG XINST STVREN CFGPLLEN PLLDIV2 PLLDIV1 PLLDIV0 WDTEN 1111 1111 300001h CONFIG1H —(2) —(2) —(2) —(2) — CP0 — — 1111 -1-- 300002h CONFIG2L IESO FCMEN CLKOEC 300003h CONFIG2H —(2) —(2) —(2) SOSCSEL1 SOSCSEL0 —(2) WDTPS3 FOSC2 FOSC1 FOSC0 1111 1111 WDTPS2 WDTPS1 WDTPS0 1111 1111 300004h CONFIG3L DSWDTPS3 DSWDTPS2 DSWDTPS1 DSWDTPS0 DSWDTEN DSBOREN RTCOSC DSWDTOSC 1111 1111 300005h CONFIG3H —(2) —(2) —(2) —(2) MSSPMSK PLLSEL ADCSEL IOL1WAY 1111 1111 300006h CONFIG4L WPCFG WPFP6 WPFP5 WPFP4 WPFP3 WPFP2 WPFP1 WPFP0 1111 1111 300007h CONFIG4H —(2) —(2) —(2) —(2) — — WPEND WPDIS 1111 --11 3FFFFEh DEVID1 DEV2 DEV1 DEV0 REV4 REV3 REV2 REV1 REV0 xx1x xxxx(3) 3FFFFFh DEVID2 DEV10 DEV9 DEV8 DEV7 DEV6 DEV5 DEV4 DEV3 0101 10x1(3) Legend: Note 1: 2: 3: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented. Shaded cells are unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Values reflect the unprogrammed state as received from the factory and following Power-on Resets. In all other Reset states, the configuration bytes maintain their previously programmed states. The value of these bits in program memory should always be programmed to ‘1’. This ensures that the location is executed as a NOP if it is accidentally executed. See Register 27-9 and Register 27-10 for DEVID values. These registers are read-only and cannot be programmed by the user. DS39974A-page 416 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 27-1: CONFIG1L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300000h) R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 DEBUG XINST STVREN CFGPLLEN PLLDIV2 PLLDIV1 PLLDIV0 WDTEN bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 DEBUG: Background Debugger Enable bit 1 = Background debugger is disabled; RB6 and RB7 are configured as general purpose I/O pins 0 = Background debugger is enabled; RB6 and RB7 are dedicated to In-Circuit Debug bit 6 XINST: Extended Instruction Set Enable bit 1 = Instruction set extension and Indexed Addressing mode are enabled 0 = Instruction set extension and Indexed Addressing mode are disabled bit 5 STVREN: Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset Enable bit 1 = Reset on stack overflow/underflow is enabled 0 = Reset on stack overflow/underflow is disabled bit 4 CFGPLLEN: PLL Enable bit 1 = PLL is disabled until firmware sets the PLLEN bit at run time (OSCTUNE<6>) 0 = PLL is enabled at start-up bit 3-1 PLLDIV<2:0>: Oscillator Selection bits Divider must be configured to provide a 4 MHz input into the 96 MHz PLL. These bits have no effect on 4x PLL operation. 111 = No divide – oscillator is used directly (4 MHz input) 110 = Oscillator divided by 2 (8 MHz input) 101 = Oscillator divided by 3 (12 MHz input) 100 = Oscillator divided by 4 (16 MHz input) 011 = Oscillator divided by 5 (20 MHz input) 010 = Oscillator divided by 6 (24 MHz input) 001 = Oscillator divided by 10 (40 MHz input) 000 = Oscillator divided by 12 (48 MHz input) bit 0 WDTEN: Watchdog Timer Enable bit 1 = WDT is enabled 0 = WDT is disabled (control is placed on the SWDTEN bit) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 417 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 27-2: CONFIG1H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300001h) U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 U-0 R/WO-1 U-1 U-1 — — — — — CP0 — — bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Program the corresponding Flash Configuration bit to ‘1’ bit 3 Unimplemented: Maintain as ‘0’ bit 2 CP0: Code Protection bit 1 = Program memory is not code-protected 0 = Program memory is code-protected bit 1-0 Unimplemented: Maintain as ‘1’ REGISTER 27-3: CONFIG2L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300002h) R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 IESO FCMEN CLKOEC SOSCSEL1 SOSCSEL0 FOSC2 FOSC1 FOSC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IESO: Two-Speed Start-up (Internal/External Oscillator Switchover) Control bit 1 = Two-Speed Start-up is enabled 0 = Two-Speed Start-up is disabled bit 6 FCMEN: Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Enable bit 1 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is enabled 0 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor is disabled bit 5 CLKOEC: CLKO Enable Configuration bit (Applicable only when the FOSC<2:1> bits are configured for EC or ECPLL mode.) 1 = CLKO output signal is active on the RA6 pin 0 = CLKO output is disabled bit 4-3 SOSCSEL<1:0>: T1OSC/SOSC Power Selection Configuration bits 11 = High-power T1OSC/SOSC circuit is selected 10 = Digital (SCLKI) mode is enabled 01 = Low-power T1OSC/SOSC circuit is selected 00 = Reserved bit 2-0 FOSC<2:0>: Oscillator Selection bits 111 = ECPLL oscillator with PLL software controlled; CLKO on RA6 110 = EC oscillator with CLKO on RA6 101 = HSPLL oscillator with PLL software controlled 100 = HS oscillator 011 = INTOSCPLLO, internal oscillator with PLL software controlled; CLKO on RA6; port function on RA7 010 = INTOSCPLL, internal oscillator with PLL software controlled; port function on RA6 and RA7 001 = INTOSCO internal oscillator block (INTRC/INTOSC) with CLKO on RA6; port function on RA7 000 = INTOSC internal oscillator block (INTRC/INTOSC); port function on RA6 and RA7 DS39974A-page 418 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 27-4: CONFIG2H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300003h) U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 — — — — WDTPS3 WDTPS2 WDTPS1 WDTPS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Program the corresponding Flash Configuration bit to ‘1’ bit 3-0 WDTPS<3:0>: Watchdog Timer Postscale Select bits 1111 = 1:32,768 1110 = 1:16,384 1101 = 1:8,192 1100 = 1:4,096 1011 = 1:2,048 1010 = 1:1,024 1001 = 1:512 1000 = 1:256 0111 = 1:128 0110 = 1:64 0101 = 1:32 0100 = 1:16 0011 = 1:8 0010 = 1:4 0001 = 1:2 0000 = 1:1 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 419 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 27-5: R/WO-1 DSWDTPS3 CONFIG3L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 3 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300004h) R/WO-1 (1) R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 DSWDTPS2(1) DSWDTPS1(1) DSWDTPS0(1) DSWDTEN(1) DSBOREN RTCOSC DSWDTOSC(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 DSWDTPS<3:0>: Deep Sleep Watchdog Timer Postscale Select bits(1) The DSWDT prescaler is 32. This creates an approximate base time unit of 1 ms. 1111 = 1:2,147,483,648 (25.7 days) 1110 = 1:536,870,912 (6.4 days) 1101 = 1:134,217,728 (38.5 hours) 1100 = 1:33,554,432 (9.6 hours) 1011 = 1:8,388,608 (2.4 hours) 1010 = 1:2,097,152 (36 minutes) 1001 = 1:524,288 (9 minutes) 1000 = 1:131,072 (135 seconds) 0111 = 1:32,768 (34 seconds) 0110 = 1:8,192 (8.5 seconds) 0101 = 1:2,048 (2.1 seconds) 0100 = 1:512 (528 ms) 0011 = 1:128 (132 ms) 0010 = 1:32 (33 ms) 0001 = 1:8 (8.3 ms) 0000 = 1:2 (2.1 ms) bit 3 DSWDTEN: Deep Sleep Watchdog Timer Enable bit(1) 1 = DSWDT is enabled 0 = DSWDT is disabled bit 2 DSBOREN: “F” Device Deep Sleep BOR Enable bit, “LF” Device VDD BOR Enable bit For “F” Devices: 1 = VDD sensing BOR is enabled in Deep Sleep 0 = VDD sensing BOR circuit is always disabled For “LF” Devices: 1 = VDD sensing BOR circuit is always enabled 0 = VDD sensing BOR circuit is always disabled bit 1 RTCOSC: RTCC Reference Clock Select bit 1 = RTCC uses T1OSC/T1CKI as the reference clock 0 = RTCC uses INTRC as the reference clock bit 0 DSWDTOSC: DSWDT Reference Clock Select bit(1) 1 = DSWDT uses INTRC as the reference clock 0 = DSWDT uses T1OSC/T1CKI as the reference clock Note 1: Functions are not available on “LF” devices. DS39974A-page 420 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 27-6: CONFIG3H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 3 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300005h) U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 — — — — MSSPMSK PLLSEL ADCSEL IOL1WAY bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Program the corresponding Flash Configuration bit to ‘1’ bit 3 MSSPMSK: MSSP 7-Bit Address Masking Mode Enable bit 1 = 7-Bit Address Masking mode is enabled 0 = 5-Bit Address Masking mode is enabled bit 2 PLLSEL: PLL Circuit Selection bit 1 = 4x PLL circuit is selected 0 = 96 MHz PLL circuit is selected bit 1 ADCSEL: A/D Converter Mode bit 1 = 10-Bit Conversion mode is enabled 0 = 12-Bit Conversion mode is enabled bit 0 IOL1WAY: IOLOCK One-Way Set Enable bit 1 = IOLOCK bit (PPSCON<0>) can be set once, provided the unlock sequence has been completed; once set, the Peripheral Pin Select registers cannot be written to a second time 0 = IOLOCK bit (PPSCON<0>) can be set and cleared as needed, provided the unlock sequence has been completed REGISTER 27-7: CONFIG4L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 4 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300006h) R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 WPCFG WPFP6 WPFP5 WPFP4 WPFP3 WPFP2 WPFP1 WPFP0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 WPCFG: Write/Erase Protect Configuration Region Select bit (valid when WPDIS = 0) 1 = Configuration Words page is not erase/write-protected unless WPEND and WPFP<5:0> settings include the Configuration Words page(1) 0 = Configuration Words page is erase/write-protected, regardless of WPEND and WPFP<5:0>(1) bit 6-0 WPFP<6:0>: Write/Erase Protect Page Start/End Location bits Used with the WPEND bit to define which pages in Flash will be erase/write-protected. Note 1: The “Configuration Words page” contains the FCWs and is the last page of implemented Flash memory on a given device. Each page consists of 1,024 bytes. For example, on a device with 64 Kbytes of Flash, the first page is 0 and the last page (Configuration Words page) is 63 (3Fh). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 421 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 27-8: CONFIG4H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 4 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300007h) U-1 U-1 U-1 U-1 U-0 U-0 R/WO-1 R/WO-1 — — — — — — WPEND WPDIS bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit WO = Write-Once bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Program the corresponding Flash Configuration bit to ‘1’ bit 3-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 WPEND: Write-Protect Disable bit 1 = Flash pages, WPFP<6:0> to (Configuration Words page), are erase/write-protected 0 = Flash pages 0 to WPFP<6:0> are erase/write-protected bit 0 WPDIS: Write-Protect Disable bit 1 = WPFP<5:0>, WPEND and WPCFG bits are ignored; all Flash memory may be erased or written 0 = WPFP<5:0>, WPEND and WPCFG bits are enabled; erase/write-protect is active for the selected region(s) REGISTER 27-9: DEVID1: DEVICE ID REGISTER 1 FOR PIC18F47J13 FAMILY DEVICES (BYTE ADDRESS 3FFFFEh) R R R R R R R R DEV2 DEV1 DEV0 REV4 REV3 REV2 REV1 REV0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 DEV<2:0>: Device ID bits These bits are used with DEV<10:3> bits in Device ID Register 2 to identify the part number. See Register 27-10. bit 4-0 REV<4:0>: Revision ID bits These bits are used to indicate the device revision. DS39974A-page 422 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 27-10: DEVID2: DEVICE ID REGISTER 2 FOR PIC18F47J13 FAMILY DEVICES (BYTE ADDRESS 3FFFFFh) R R R R R R R R DEV10 DEV9 DEV8 DEV7 DEV6 DEV5 DEV4 DEV3 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown DEV<10:3>: Device ID bits These bits are used with the DEV<2:0> bits in the Device ID Register 1 to identify the part number. DEV<10:3> (DEVID2<7:0>) DEV<2:0> (DEVID1<7:5>) Device 0101 1001 111 PIC18F47J13 0101 1001 101 PIC18F46J13 0101 1001 011 PIC18F27J13 0101 1001 001 PIC18F26J13 0101 1011 111 PIC18LF47J13 0101 1011 101 PIC18LF46J13 0101 1011 011 PIC18LF27J13 0101 1011 001 PIC18LF26J13 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 423 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 27.2 Watchdog Timer (WDT) PIC18F47J13 family devices have both a conventional WDT circuit and a dedicated, Deep Sleep capable Watchdog Timer. When enabled, the conventional WDT operates in normal Run, Idle and Sleep modes. This data sheet section describes the conventional WDT circuit. The dedicated, Deep Sleep capable WDT can only be enabled in Deep Sleep mode. This timer is described in Section 4.6.4 “Deep Sleep Watchdog Timer (DSWDT)”. The conventional WDT is driven by the INTRC oscillator. When the WDT is enabled, the clock source is also enabled. The nominal WDT period is 4 ms and has the same stability as the INTRC oscillator. The 4 ms period of the WDT is multiplied by a 16-bit postscaler. Any output of the WDT postscaler is selected by a multiplexer, controlled by the WDTPS bits in Configuration Register 2H. Available periods range from about 4 ms to 135 seconds (2.25 minutes depending on voltage, temperature and WDT postscaler). The WDT and postscaler are cleared FIGURE 27-1: SWDTEN whenever a SLEEP or CLRWDT instruction is executed, or a clock failure (primary or Timer1 oscillator) has occurred. Note 1: The CLRWDT and SLEEP instructions clear the WDT and postscaler counts when executed. 2: When a CLRWDT instruction is executed, the postscaler count will be cleared. 27.2.1 CONTROL REGISTER The WDTCON register (Register 27-11) is a readable and writable register. The SWDTEN bit enables or disables WDT operation. This allows software to override the WDTEN Configuration bit and enable the WDT only if it has been disabled by the Configuration bit. LVDSTAT is a read-only status bit that is continuously updated and provides information about the current level of VDDCORE. This bit is only valid when the on-chip voltage regulator is enabled. WDT BLOCK DIAGRAM Enable WDT INTRC Control WDT Counter INTRC Oscillator Wake-up from Power-Managed Modes 128 Programmable Postscaler 1:1 to 1:32,768 CLRWDT All Device Resets Reset WDT Reset WDT WDTPS<3:0> 4 SLEEP DS39974A-page 424 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY REGISTER 27-11: WDTCON: WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER (ACCESS FC0h) R/W-1 R-x R-x R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 REGSLP LVDSTAT(2) ULPLVL VBGOE DS(2) ULPEN ULPSINK SWDTEN(1) bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 REGSLP: Voltage Regulator Low-Power Operation Enable bit 1 = On-chip regulator enters low-power operation when device enters Sleep mode 0 = On-chip regulator is active even in Sleep mode bit 6 LVDSTAT: Low-Voltage Detect Status bit(2) 1 = VDDCORE > 2.45V nominal 0 = VDDCORE < 2.45V nominal bit 5 ULPLVL: Ultra Low-Power Wake-up Output bit (not valid unless ULPEN = 1) 1 = Voltage on RA0 > ~0.5V 0 = Voltage on RA0 < ~0.5V bit 4 VBGOE: Band Gap Reference Voltage (VBG) Output Enable bit 1 = Band gap reference output is enabled on the RA1 pin 0 = Band gap reference output is disabled bit 3 DS: Deep Sleep Wake-up Status bit (used in conjunction with RCON, POR and BOR bits to determine Reset source)(2) 1 = If the last exit from Reset was caused by a normal wake-up from Deep Sleep 0 = If the last exit from Reset was not due to a wake-up from Deep Sleep bit 2 ULPEN: Ultra Low-Power Wake-up Module Enable bit 1 = Ultra low-power wake-up module is enabled; ULPLVL bit indicates the comparator output 0 = Ultra low-power wake-up module is disabled bit 1 ULPSINK: Ultra Low-Power Wake-up Current Sink Enable bit 1 = Ultra low-power wake-up current sink is enabled (if ULPEN = 1) 0 = Ultra low-power wake-up current sink is disabled bit 0 SWDTEN: Software Controlled Watchdog Timer Enable bit(1) 1 = Watchdog Timer is on 0 = Watchdog Timer is off Note 1: 2: This bit has no effect if the Configuration bit, WDTEN, is enabled. Not available on devices where the on-chip voltage regulator is disabled (“LF” devices). TABLE 27-3: Name RCON WDTCON SUMMARY OF WATCHDOG TIMER REGISTERS Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 IPEN — CM RI TO PD POR BOR REGSLP LVDSTAT ULPLVL VBGOE DS ULPEN ULPSINK SWDTEN Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Watchdog Timer. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 425 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 27.3 On-Chip Voltage Regulator Note 1: The on-chip voltage regulator is only available in parts designated with an “F”, such as PIC18F26J13. The on-chip regulator is disabled on devices with “LF” in their part number. 2: The VDDCORE/VCAP pin must never be left floating. On “F” devices, it must be connected to a capacitor of size, CEFC, to ground. On “LF” devices, VDDCORE/VCAP must be connected to a power supply source between 2.0V and 2.7V. The digital core logic of the PIC18F47J13 family devices is designed on an advanced manufacturing process, which requires 2.0V to 2.7V. The digital core logic obtains power from the VDDCORE/VCAP power supply pin. However, in many applications it may be inconvenient to run the I/O pins at the same core logic voltage, as it would restrict the ability of the device to interface with other higher voltage devices, such as those run at a nominal 3.3V. Therefore, all PIC18F47J13 family devices implement a dual power supply rail topology. The core logic obtains power from the VDDCORE/VCAP pin, while the general purpose I/O pins obtain power from the VDD pin of the microcontroller, which may be supplied with a voltage between 2.15V to 3.6V (“F” device) or 2.0V to 3.6V (“LF” device). This dual supply topology allows the microcontroller to interface with standard 3.3V logic devices, while running the core logic at a lower voltage of nominally 2.5V. In order to make the microcontroller more convenient to use, an integrated 2.5V low dropout, low quiescent current linear regulator has been integrated on the die inside PIC18F47J13 family devices. This regulator is designed specifically to supply the core logic of the device. It allows PIC18F47J13 family devices to effectively run from a single power supply rail, without the need for external regulators. The on-chip voltage regulator is always enabled on “F” devices. The VDDCORE/VCAP pin simultaneously serves as the regulator output pin and the core logic supply power input pin. A capacitor should be connected to the VDDCORE/VCAP pin to ground and is necessary for regulator stability. For example connections for PIC18F and PIC18LF devices, see Figure 27-2. On “LF” devices, the on-chip regulator is always disabled. This allows the device to save a small amount of quiescent current consumption, which may be DS39974A-page 426 advantageous in some types of applications, such as those which will entirely be running at a nominal 2.5V. On “LF” devices, the VDDCORE/VCAP pin still serves as the core logic power supply input pin, and therefore, must be connected to a 2.0V to 2.7V supply rail at the application circuit board level. On these devices, the I/O pins may still optionally be supplied with a voltage between 2.0V to 3.6V, provided that VDD is always greater than, or equal to, VDDCORE/VCAP. For example connections for PIC18F and PIC18LF devices, see Figure 27-2. Note: In parts designated with an “LF”, such as PIC18LF47J13, VDDCORE must never exceed VDD. The specifications for core voltage and capacitance are listed in Section 30.3 “DC Characteristics: PIC18F47J13 Family (Industrial)”. 27.3.1 VOLTAGE REGULATOR TRACKING MODE AND LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTION On “F” devices, the on-chip regulator provides a constant voltage of 2.5V nominal to the digital core logic. The regulator can provide this level from a VDD of about 2.5V, all the way up to the device’s VDDMAX. It does not have the capability to boost VDD levels below 2.5V. When the VDD supply input voltage drops too low to regulate 2.5V, the regulator enters Tracking mode. In Tracking mode, the regulator output follows VDD, with a typical voltage drop of 100 mV or less. The on-chip regulator includes a simple Low-Voltage Detect (LVD) circuit. This circuit is separate and independent of the High/Low-Voltage Detect (HLVD) module described in Section 25.0 “High/Low Voltage Detect (HLVD)”. The on-chip regulator LVD circuit continuously monitors the VDDCORE voltage level and updates the LVDSTAT bit in the WDTCON register. The LVD detect threshold is set slightly below the normal regulation set point of the on-chip regulator. Application firmware may optionally poll the LVDSTAT bit to determine when it is safe to run at the maximum rated frequency, so as not to inadvertently violate the voltage versus frequency requirements provided by Figure 30-1. The VDDCORE monitoring LVD circuit is only active when the on-chip regulator is enabled. On “LF” devices, the Analog-to-Digital Converter and the HLVD module can still be used to provide firmware with VDD and VDDCORE voltage level information. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 27-2: CONNECTIONS FOR THE ON-CHIP REGULATOR PIC18FXXJ13 Devices (Regulator Enabled): 3.3V PIC18FXXJ13 VDD VDDCORE/VCAP CF VSS PIC18LFXXJ13 Devices (Regulator Disabled): 2.5V PIC18LFXXJ13 VDD VDDCORE/VCAP VSS OR 2.5V 3.3V PIC18LFXXJ13 VDD VDDCORE/VCAP VSS 27.3.2 ON-CHIP REGULATOR AND BOR When the on-chip regulator is enabled, PIC18F47J13 family devices also have a simple brown-out capability. If the voltage supplied to the regulator is inadequate to maintain a minimum output level, the regulator Reset circuitry will generate a Brown-out Reset (BOR). This event is captured by the BOR flag bit (RCON<0>). The operation of the BOR is described in more detail in Section 5.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)” and Section 5.4.1 “Detecting BOR”. The brown-out voltage levels are specific in Section 30.1 “DC Characteristics: Supply Voltage PIC18F47J13 Family (Industrial)”. 27.3.3 POWER-UP REQUIREMENTS The on-chip regulator is designed to meet the power-up requirements for the device. If the application does not use the regulator, then strict power-up conditions must be adhered to. While powering up, VDDCORE should not exceed VDD by 0.3 volts. 27.3.4 OPERATION IN SLEEP MODE When enabled, the on-chip regulator always consumes a small incremental amount of current over IDD. This includes when the device is in Sleep mode, even though the core digital logic does not require much power. To provide additional savings in applications where power resources are critical, the regulator can be configured to automatically enter a lower quiescent draw Standby mode whenever the device goes into Sleep mode. This feature is controlled by the REGSLP bit (WDTCON<7>, Register 27-11). If this bit is set upon entry into Sleep mode, the regulator will transition into a lower power state. In this state, the regulator still provides a regulated output voltage necessary to maintain SRAM state information, but consumes less quiescent current. Substantial Sleep mode power savings can be obtained by setting the REGSLP bit, but device wake-up time will increase in order to insure the regulator has enough time to stabilize. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 427 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY The Two-Speed Start-up feature helps to minimize the latency period, from oscillator start-up to code execution, by allowing the microcontroller to use the INTRC oscillator as a clock source until the primary clock source is available. It is enabled by setting the IESO Configuration bit. When enabled, Resets and wake-ups from Sleep mode cause the device to configure itself to run from the internal oscillator block as the clock source, following the time-out of the Power-up Timer after a Power-on Reset is enabled. This allows almost immediate code execution while the primary oscillator starts and the OST is running. Once the OST times out, the device automatically switches to PRI_RUN mode. Two-Speed Start-up should be enabled only if the primary oscillator mode is HS or HSPLL (Crystal-Based) modes. Since the EC and ECPLL modes do not require an Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) delay, Two-Speed Start-up should be disabled. In all other power-managed modes, Two-Speed Start-up is not used. The device will be clocked by the currently selected clock source until the primary clock source becomes available. The setting of the IESO bit is ignored. 27.4 Two-Speed Start-up FIGURE 27-3: TIMING TRANSITION FOR TWO-SPEED START-UP (INTRC TO HSPLL) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q1 INTRC OSC1 TOST(1) TPLL(1) 1 PLL Clock Output 2 n-1 n Clock Transition CPU Clock Peripheral Clock Program Counter PC Wake from Interrupt Event PC + 2 PC + 4 PC + 6 OSTS bit Set Note 1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale. 27.4.1 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR USING TWO-SPEED START-UP While using the INTRC oscillator in Two-Speed Start-up, the device still obeys the normal command sequences for entering power-managed modes, including serial SLEEP instructions (refer to Section 4.1.4 “Multiple Sleep Commands”). In practice, this means that user code can change the SCS<1:0> bit settings or issue SLEEP instructions before the OST times out. This would allow an application to briefly wake-up, perform routine “housekeeping” tasks and return to Sleep before the device starts to operate from the primary oscillator. User code can also check if the primary clock source is currently providing the device clocking by checking the status of the OSTS bit (OSCCON<3>). If the bit is set, the primary oscillator is providing the clock. Otherwise, the internal oscillator block is providing the clock during wake-up from Reset or Sleep mode. DS39974A-page 428 27.5 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the microcontroller to continue operation in the event of an external oscillator failure by automatically switching the device clock to the internal oscillator block. The FSCM function is enabled by setting the FCMEN Configuration bit. When FSCM is enabled, the INTRC oscillator runs at all times to monitor clocks to peripherals and provide a backup clock in the event of a clock failure. Clock monitoring (shown in Figure 27-4) is accomplished by creating a sample clock signal, which is the INTRC output divided by 64. This allows ample time between FSCM sample clocks for a peripheral clock edge to occur. The peripheral device clock and the sample clock are presented as inputs to the clock monitor latch. The clock monitor is set on the falling edge of the device clock source but cleared on the rising edge of the sample clock. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 27-4: FSCM BLOCK DIAGRAM Clock Monitor Latch (edge-triggered) Peripheral Clock INTRC Source ÷ 64 (32 s) 488 Hz (2.048 ms) S Q C Q The FSCM will detect failures of the primary or secondary clock sources only. If the internal oscillator block fails, no failure would be detected, nor would any action be possible. Clock Failure Detected Clock failure is tested for on the falling edge of the sample clock. If a sample clock falling edge occurs while the clock monitor is still set, and a clock failure has been detected (Figure 27-5), the following results: • The FSCM generates an oscillator fail interrupt by setting bit, OSCFIF (PIR2<7>); • The device clock source is switched to the internal oscillator block (OSCCON is not updated to show the current clock source – this is the fail-safe condition); and • The WDT is reset. During switchover, the postscaler frequency from the internal oscillator block may not be sufficiently stable for timing-sensitive applications. In these cases, it may FIGURE 27-5: be desirable to select another clock configuration and enter an alternate power-managed mode. This can be done to attempt a partial recovery or execute a controlled shutdown. See Section 4.1.4 “Multiple Sleep Commands” and Section 27.4.1 “Special Considerations For Using Two-speed Start-up” for more details. 27.5.1 FSCM AND THE WATCHDOG TIMER Both the FSCM and the WDT are clocked by the INTRC oscillator. Since the WDT operates with a separate divider and counter, disabling the WDT has no effect on the operation of the INTRC oscillator when the FSCM is enabled. As already noted, the clock source is switched to the INTRC clock when a clock failure is detected; this may mean a substantial change in the speed of code execution. If the WDT is enabled with a small prescale value, a decrease in clock speed allows a WDT time-out to occur and a subsequent device Reset. For this reason, Fail-Safe Clock Monitor events also reset the WDT and postscaler, allowing it to start timing from when execution speed was changed and decreasing the likelihood of an erroneous time-out. FSCM TIMING DIAGRAM Sample Clock Oscillator Failure Device Clock Output Clock Monitor Output (Q) Failure Detected OSCFIF Clock Monitor Test Note: Clock Monitor Test Clock Monitor Test The device clock is normally at a much higher frequency than the sample clock. The relative frequencies in this example have been chosen for clarity. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 429 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 27.5.2 EXITING FAIL-SAFE OPERATION The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor condition is terminated by either a device Reset or by entering a power-managed mode. On Reset, the controller starts the primary clock source specified in Configuration Register 2H (with any required start-up delays that are required for the oscillator mode, such as the OST or PLL timer). The INTRC oscillator provides the device clock until the primary clock source becomes ready (similar to a Two-Speed Start-up). The clock source is then switched to the primary clock (indicated by the OSTS bit in the OSCCON register becoming set). The FSCM then resumes monitoring the peripheral clock. The primary clock source may never become ready during start-up. In this case, operation is clocked by the INTRC oscillator. The OSCCON register will remain in its Reset state until a power-managed mode is entered. 27.5.3 FSCM INTERRUPTS IN POWER-MANAGED MODES By entering a power-managed mode, the clock multiplexer selects the clock source selected by the OSCCON register. FSCM of the power-managed clock source resumes in the power-managed mode. If an oscillator failure occurs during power-managed operation, the subsequent events depend on whether or not the oscillator failure interrupt is enabled. If enabled (OSCFIF = 1), code execution will be clocked by the INTRC multiplexer. An automatic transition back to the failed clock source will not occur. If the interrupt is disabled, subsequent interrupts while in Idle mode will cause the CPU to begin executing instructions while being clocked by the INTRC source. 27.5.4 POR OR WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP The FSCM is designed to detect oscillator failure at any point after the device has exited Power-on Reset (POR) or low-power Sleep mode. When the primary device clock is either the EC or INTRC modes, monitoring can begin immediately following these events. For HS or HSPLL modes, the situation is somewhat different. Since the oscillator may require a start-up time considerably longer than the FSCM sample clock time, a false clock failure may be detected. To prevent this, the internal oscillator block is automatically configured as the device clock and functions until the primary clock is stable (the OST and PLL timers have timed DS39974A-page 430 out). This is identical to Two-Speed Start-up mode. Once the primary clock is stable, the INTRC returns to its role as the FSCM source. Note: The same logic that prevents false oscillator failure interrupts on POR, or wake-up from Sleep, will also prevent the detection of the oscillator’s failure to start at all following these events. This can be avoided by monitoring the OSTS bit and using a timing routine to determine if the oscillator is taking too long to start. Even so, no oscillator failure interrupt will be flagged. As noted in Section 27.4.1 “Special Considerations For Using Two-speed Start-up”, it is also possible to select another clock configuration and enter an alternate power-managed mode while waiting for the primary clock to become stable. When the new power-managed mode is selected, the primary clock is disabled. 27.6 Program Verification and Code Protection For all devices in the PIC18F47J13 family of devices, the on-chip program memory space is treated as a single block. Code protection for this block is controlled by one Configuration bit, CP0. This bit inhibits external reads and writes to the program memory space. It has no direct effect in normal execution mode. 27.6.1 CONFIGURATION REGISTER PROTECTION The Configuration registers are protected against untoward changes or reads in two ways. The primary protection is the write-once feature of the Configuration bits, which prevents reconfiguration once the bit has been programmed during a power cycle. To safeguard against unpredictable events, Configuration bit changes resulting from individual cell level disruptions (such as ESD events) will cause a parity error and trigger a device Reset. This is seen by the user as a Configuration Mismatch (CM) Reset. The data for the Configuration registers is derived from the FCW in program memory. When the CP0 bit is set, the source data for device configuration is also protected as a consequence. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 27.7 In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) PIC18F47J13 family microcontrollers can be serially programmed while in the end application circuit. This is simply done with two lines for clock and data, and three other lines for power, ground and the programming voltage. This allows customers to manufacture boards with unprogrammed devices and then program the microcontroller just before shipping the product. This also allows the most recent firmware or a custom firmware to be programmed. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 27.8 In-Circuit Debugger When the DEBUG Configuration bit is programmed to a ‘0’, the In-Circuit Debugger functionality is enabled. This function allows simple debugging functions when used with MPLAB® IDE. When the microcontroller has this feature enabled, some resources are not available for general use. Table 27-4 lists the resources required by the background debugger. TABLE 27-4: DEBUGGER RESOURCES I/O Pins: RB6, RB7 Stack: TOSx registers reserved. Preliminary DS39974A-page 431 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NOTES: DS39974A-page 432 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 28.0 INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY The PIC18F47J13 family of devices incorporate the standard set of 75 PIC18 core instructions, as well as an extended set of 8 new instructions for the optimization of code that is recursive or that utilizes a software stack. The extended set is discussed later in this section. 28.1 Standard Instruction Set The standard PIC18 MCU instruction set adds many enhancements to the previous PIC® MCU instruction sets, while maintaining an easy migration from these PIC MCU instruction sets. Most instructions are a single program memory word (16 bits), but there are four instructions that require two program memory locations. Each single-word instruction is a 16-bit word divided into an opcode, which specifies the instruction type and one or more operands, which further specify the operation of the instruction. The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped into four basic categories: • • • • Byte-oriented operations Bit-oriented operations Literal operations Control operations The PIC18 instruction set summary in Table 28-2 lists byte-oriented, bit-oriented, literal and control operations. Table 28-1 shows the opcode field descriptions. Most byte-oriented instructions have three operands: 1. 2. 3. The file register (specified by ‘f’) The destination of the result (specified by ‘d’) The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) The file register designator, ‘f’, specifies which file register is to be used by the instruction. The destination designator, ‘d’, specifies where the result of the operation is to be placed. If ‘d’ is zero, the result is placed in the WREG register. If ‘d’ is one, the result is placed in the file register specified in the instruction. All bit-oriented instructions have three operands: 1. 2. 3. The file register (specified by ‘f’) The bit in the file register (specified by ‘b’) The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) The literal instructions may use some of the following operands: • A literal value to be loaded into a file register (specified by ‘k’) • The desired FSR register to load the literal value into (specified by ‘f’) • No operand required (specified by ‘—’) The control instructions may use some of the following operands: • A program memory address (specified by ‘n’) • The mode of the CALL or RETURN instructions (specified by ‘s’) • The mode of the table read and table write instructions (specified by ‘m’) • No operand required (specified by ‘—’) All instructions are a single word, except for four double-word instructions. These instructions were made double-word to contain the required information in 32 bits. In the second word, the 4 MSbs are ‘1’s. If this second word is executed as an instruction (by itself), it will execute as a NOP. All single-word instructions are executed in a single instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the program counter is changed as a result of the instruction. In these cases, the execution takes two instruction cycles with the additional instruction cycle(s) executed as a NOP. The double-word instructions execute in two instruction cycles. One instruction cycle consists of four oscillator periods. Thus, for an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz, the normal instruction execution time is 1 s. If a conditional test is true, or the program counter is changed as a result of an instruction, the instruction execution time is 2 s. Two-word branch instructions (if true) would take 3 s. Figure 28-1 shows the general formats that the instructions can have. All examples use the convention ‘nnh’ to represent a hexadecimal number. The Instruction Set Summary, shown in Table 28-2, lists the standard instructions recognized by the Microchip MPASMTM Assembler. Section 28.1.1 “Standard Instruction Set” provides a description of each instruction. The bit field designator, ‘b’, selects the number of the bit affected by the operation, while the file register designator, ‘f’, represents the number of the file in which the bit is located. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 433 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 28-1: OPCODE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Field Description a RAM Access bit: a = 0: RAM location in Access RAM (BSR register is ignored) a = 1: RAM bank is specified by BSR register bbb Bit address within an 8-bit file register (0 to 7). BSR Bank Select Register. Used to select the current RAM bank. C, DC, Z, OV, N ALU Status bits: Carry, Digit Carry, Zero, Overflow, Negative. d Destination Select bit: d = 0: store result in WREG d = 1: store result in file register f dest Destination: either the WREG register or the specified register file location. f 8-bit Register file address (00h to FFh), or 2-bit FSR designator (0h to 3h). fs 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the source address. fd 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the destination address. GIE Global Interrupt Enable bit. k Literal field, constant data or label (may be either an 8-bit, 12-bit or a 20-bit value). label Label name. mm The mode of the TBLPTR register for the table read and table write instructions. Only used with table read and table write instructions: * No change to register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) *+ Post-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) *- Post-Decrement register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) Pre-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) +* n The relative address (2’s complement number) for relative branch instructions or the direct address for Call/Branch and Return instructions. PC Program Counter. PCL Program Counter Low Byte. PCH Program Counter High Byte. PCLATH Program Counter High Byte Latch. PCLATU Program Counter Upper Byte Latch. PD Power-Down bit. PRODH Product of Multiply High Byte. PRODL Product of Multiply Low Byte. s Fast Call/Return Mode Select bit: s = 0: do not update into/from shadow registers s = 1: certain registers loaded into/from shadow registers (Fast mode) TBLPTR 21-bit Table Pointer (points to a program memory location). TABLAT 8-bit Table Latch. TO Time-out bit. TOS Top-of-Stack. u Unused or Unchanged. WDT Watchdog Timer. WREG Working register (accumulator). x Don’t care (‘0’ or ‘1’). The assembler will generate code with x = 0. It is the recommended form of use for compatibility with all Microchip software tools. zs 7-bit offset value for Indirect Addressing of register files (source). 7-bit offset value for Indirect Addressing of register files (destination). zd { } Optional argument. [text] Indicates an Indexed Address. (text) The contents of text. [expr]<n> Specifies bit n of the register indicated by the pointer expr. Assigned to. < > Register bit field. In the set of. italics User-defined term (font is Courier New). DS39974A-page 434 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 28-1: GENERAL FORMAT FOR INSTRUCTIONS Byte-oriented file register operations 15 10 9 OPCODE Example Instruction 8 7 d 0 a f (FILE #) ADDWF MYREG, W, B d = 0 for result destination to be WREG register d = 1 for result destination to be file register (f) a = 0 to force Access Bank a = 1 for BSR to select bank f = 8-bit file register address Byte to Byte move operations (2-word) 15 12 11 0 OPCODE 15 f (Source FILE #) 12 11 MOVFF MYREG1, MYREG2 0 f (Destination FILE #) 1111 f = 12-bit file register address Bit-oriented file register operations 15 12 11 9 8 7 0 OPCODE b (BIT #) a f (FILE #) BSF MYREG, bit, B b = 3-bit position of bit in file register (f) a = 0 to force Access Bank a = 1 for BSR to select bank f = 8-bit file register address Literal operations 15 8 7 0 OPCODE k (literal) MOVLW 7Fh k = 8-bit immediate value Control operations CALL, GOTO and Branch operations 15 8 7 0 OPCODE 15 n<7:0> (literal) 12 11 GOTO Label 0 n<19:8> (literal) 1111 n = 20-bit immediate value 15 8 7 OPCODE 15 S 0 n<7:0> (literal) 12 11 CALL MYFUNC 0 n<19:8> (literal) 1111 S = Fast bit 15 11 10 OPCODE 15 0 n<10:0> (literal) 8 7 OPCODE 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. BRA MYFUNC 0 n<7:0> (literal) Preliminary BC MYFUNC DS39974A-page 435 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 28-2: PIC18F47J13 FAMILY INSTRUCTION SET Mnemonic, Operands 16-Bit Instruction Word Description Cycles MSb LSb Status Affected Notes BYTE-ORIENTED OPERATIONS ADDWF ADDWFC ANDWF CLRF COMF CPFSEQ CPFSGT CPFSLT DECF DECFSZ DCFSNZ INCF INCFSZ INFSNZ IORWF MOVF MOVFF f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, a f, d, a f, a f, a f, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a fs, fd MOVWF MULWF NEGF RLCF RLNCF RRCF RRNCF SETF SUBFWB f, a f, a f, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, d, a f, a f, d, a SUBWF SUBWFB f, d, a f, d, a SWAPF TSTFSZ XORWF f, d, a f, a f, d, a Note 1: 2: 3: 4: Add WREG and f Add WREG and Carry bit to f AND WREG with f Clear f Complement f Compare f with WREG, Skip = Compare f with WREG, Skip > Compare f with WREG, Skip < Decrement f Decrement f, Skip if 0 Decrement f, Skip if Not 0 Increment f Increment f, Skip if 0 Increment f, Skip if Not 0 Inclusive OR WREG with f Move f Move fs (source) to 1st word fd (destination) 2nd word Move WREG to f Multiply WREG with f Negate f Rotate Left f through Carry Rotate Left f (No Carry) Rotate Right f through Carry Rotate Right f (No Carry) Set f Subtract f from WREG with Borrow Subtract WREG from f Subtract WREG from f with Borrow Swap Nibbles in f Test f, Skip if 0 Exclusive OR WREG with f 1 1 1 1 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1 2 ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N Z Z, N None None None C, DC, Z, OV, N None None C, DC, Z, OV, N None None Z, N Z, N None 1, 2 1, 2 1,2 2 1, 2 4 4 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2 1, 2, 3, 4 4 1, 2 1, 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0010 0010 0001 0110 0001 0110 0110 0110 0000 0010 0100 0010 0011 0100 0001 0101 1100 1111 0110 0000 0110 0011 0100 0011 0100 0110 0101 1 1 0101 11da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2 0101 10da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 01da 00da 01da 101a 11da 001a 010a 000a 01da 11da 11da 10da 11da 10da 00da 00da ffff ffff 111a 001a 110a 01da 01da 00da 00da 100a 01da ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff None None 1, 2 C, DC, Z, OV, N C, Z, N 1, 2 Z, N C, Z, N Z, N None 1, 2 C, DC, Z, OV, N 1 0011 10da ffff ffff None 1 (2 or 3) 0110 011a ffff ffff None 1 0001 10da ffff ffff Z, N 4 1, 2 When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as an input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’. If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, d = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. If the Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. DS39974A-page 436 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 28-2: PIC18F47J13 FAMILY INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED) 16-Bit Instruction Word Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles MSb LSb Status Affected Notes BIT-ORIENTED OPERATIONS BCF BSF BTFSC BTFSS BTG f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a f, b, a Bit Clear f Bit Set f Bit Test f, Skip if Clear Bit Test f, Skip if Set Bit Toggle f 1 1 1 (2 or 3) 1 (2 or 3) 1 1001 1000 1011 1010 0111 bbba bbba bbba bbba bbba ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff None None None None None 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 1 (2) 2 1 (2) 2 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1110 1101 1110 1110 1111 0000 0000 1110 1111 0000 1111 0000 0000 1101 0000 0000 0010 0110 0011 0111 0101 0001 0100 0nnn 0000 110s kkkk 0000 0000 1111 kkkk 0000 xxxx 0000 0000 1nnn 0000 0000 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn kkkk kkkk 0000 0000 kkkk kkkk 0000 xxxx 0000 0000 nnnn 1111 0001 nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn nnnn kkkk kkkk 0100 0111 kkkk kkkk 0000 xxxx 0110 0101 nnnn 1111 000s None None None None None None None None None None 2 2 1 1, 2 1, 2 3, 4 3, 4 1, 2 CONTROL OPERATIONS BC BN BNC BNN BNOV BNZ BOV BRA BZ CALL n n n n n n n n n n, s CLRWDT DAW GOTO — — n NOP NOP POP PUSH RCALL RESET RETFIE — — — — n s Branch if Carry Branch if Negative Branch if Not Carry Branch if Not Negative Branch if Not Overflow Branch if Not Zero Branch if Overflow Branch Unconditionally Branch if Zero Call Subroutine 1st word 2nd word Clear Watchdog Timer Decimal Adjust WREG Go to Address 1st word 2nd word No Operation No Operation Pop Top of Return Stack (TOS) Push Top of Return Stack (TOS) Relative Call Software Device Reset Return from Interrupt Enable RETLW RETURN SLEEP k s — Return with Literal in WREG Return from Subroutine Go into Standby mode Note 1: 2: 3: 4: 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 TO, PD C None None None None None None All GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk None 0000 0000 0001 001s None 0000 0000 0000 0011 TO, PD 4 When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as an input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’. If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, d = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. If the Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 437 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TABLE 28-2: PIC18F47J13 FAMILY INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED) 16-Bit Instruction Word Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles MSb LSb Status Affected Notes LITERAL OPERATIONS ADDLW ANDLW IORLW LFSR k k k f, k MOVLB MOVLW MULLW RETLW SUBLW XORLW k k k k k k Add Literal and WREG AND Literal with WREG Inclusive OR Literal with WREG Move literal (12-bit) 2nd word to FSR(f) 1st word Move Literal to BSR<3:0> Move Literal to WREG Multiply Literal with WREG Return with Literal in WREG Subtract WREG from Literal Exclusive OR Literal with WREG 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 0000 0000 0000 1110 1111 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1011 1001 1110 0000 0001 1110 1101 1100 1000 1010 kkkk kkkk kkkk 00ff kkkk 0000 kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N Z, N None 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 None None None None None None None None None None None None C, DC, Z, OV, N Z, N DATA MEMORY PROGRAM MEMORY OPERATIONS TBLRD* TBLRD*+ TBLRD*TBLRD+* TBLWT* TBLWT*+ TBLWT*TBLWT+* Note 1: 2: 3: 4: Table Read 2 Table Read with Post-Increment Table Read with Post-Decrement Table Read with Pre-Increment Table Write 2 Table Write with Post-Increment Table Write with Post-Decrement Table Write with Pre-Increment When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as an input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’. If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, d = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. If the Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. DS39974A-page 438 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 28.1.1 STANDARD INSTRUCTION SET ADDLW ADD Literal to W ADDWF ADD W to f Syntax: ADDLW Syntax: ADDWF Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (W) + (f) dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z k Operands: 0 k 255 Operation: (W) + k W Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0000 1111 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are added to the 8-bit literal ‘k’ and the result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Encoding: 0010 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: ADDLW 01da ffff ffff Add W to register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 15h Before Instruction W = 10h After Instruction W = 25h f {,d {,a}} Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWF Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = Note: REG, 0, 0 17h 0C2h 0D9h 0C2h All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s). 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 439 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY ADDWFC ADD W and Carry bit to f ANDLW AND Literal with W Syntax: ADDWFC Syntax: ANDLW Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] f {,d {,a}} Operation: (W) + (f) + (C) dest Status Affected: N,OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0010 Description: 00da Operands: 0 k 255 Operation: (W) .AND. k W Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: ffff ffff Add W, the Carry flag and data memory location ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed in data memory location ‘f’. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 0000 1011 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are ANDed with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. k Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: ANDLW Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = 05Fh A3h 03h Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWFC Before Instruction Carry bit = REG = W = After Instruction Carry bit = REG = W = DS39974A-page 440 REG, 0, 1 1 02h 4Dh 0 02h 50h Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY ANDWF AND W with f BC Branch if Carry Syntax: ANDWF Syntax: BC Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] f {,d {,a}} Operation: (W) .AND. (f) dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0001 Description: Operands: -128 n 127 Operation: if Carry bit is ‘1’, (PC) + 2 + 2n PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 01da ffff ffff 1110 Description: The contents of W are ANDed with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination ANDWF Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = REG, 0, 0 Words: 1 Cycles: nnnn 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Carry PC If Carry PC 17h C2h 02h C2h 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. nnnn If No Jump: Q1 Example: 0010 If the Carry bit is ’1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. n Preliminary BC 5 = address (HERE) = = = = 1; address (HERE + 12) 0; address (HERE + 2) DS39974A-page 441 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY BCF Bit Clear f BN Branch if Negative Syntax: BCF Syntax: BN Operands: 0 f 255 0b7 a [0,1] f, b {,a} Operation: 0 f<b> Status Affected: None Encoding: 1001 Description: Operands: -128 n 127 Operation: if Negative bit is ‘1’, (PC) + 2 + 2n PC Status Affected: None Encoding: bbba ffff ffff 1110 Description: Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is cleared. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BCF Before Instruction FLAG_REG = C7h After Instruction FLAG_REG = 47h DS39974A-page 442 FLAG_REG, 0110 nnnn nnnn If the Negative bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Q Cycle Activity: Decode n If No Jump: 7, 0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Negative PC If Negative PC Preliminary BN Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 1; address (Jump) 0; address (HERE + 2) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY BNC Branch if Not Carry BNN Branch if Not Negative Syntax: BNC Syntax: BNN n n Operands: -128 n 127 Operands: -128 n 127 Operation: if Carry bit is ‘0’, (PC) + 2 + 2n PC Operation: if Negative bit is ‘0’, (PC) + 2 + 2n PC Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 Description: 0011 nnnn nnnn If the Carry bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. Encoding: 1110 Description: The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. nnnn nnnn The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: 0111 If the Negative bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation If No Jump: Example: If No Jump: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Carry PC If Carry PC BNC Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Negative PC If Negative PC Preliminary BNN Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) DS39974A-page 443 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY BNOV Branch if Not Overflow BNZ Branch if Not Zero Syntax: BNOV Syntax: BNZ n n Operands: -128 n 127 Operands: -128 n 127 Operation: if Overflow bit is ‘0’, (PC) + 2 + 2n PC Operation: if Zero bit is ‘0’, (PC) + 2 + 2n PC Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 Description: 0101 nnnn nnnn If the Overflow bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. Encoding: 1110 Description: The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. nnnn nnnn The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: 0001 If the Zero bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation If No Jump: If No Jump: Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Overflow PC If Overflow PC DS39974A-page 444 BNOV Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Zero PC If Zero PC Preliminary BNZ Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (Jump) 1; address (HERE + 2) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY BRA Unconditional Branch BSF Bit Set f Syntax: BRA Syntax: BSF Operands: -1024 n 1023 Operands: Operation: (PC) + 2 + 2n PC Status Affected: None 0 f 255 0b7 a [0,1] Operation: 1 f<b> Status Affected: None Encoding: n 1101 Description: 0nnn nnnn nnnn Add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Encoding: 1000 Description: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: bbba ffff ffff Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is set. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity: Decode f, b {,a} Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction PC BRA Jump = address (HERE) = address (Jump) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BSF Before Instruction FLAG_REG After Instruction FLAG_REG 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary FLAG_REG, 7, 1 = 0Ah = 8Ah DS39974A-page 445 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY BTFSC Bit Test File, Skip if Clear BTFSS Bit Test File, Skip if Set Syntax: BTFSC f, b {,a} Syntax: BTFSS f, b {,a} Operands: 0 f 255 0b7 a [0,1] Operands: 0 f 255 0b<7 a [0,1] Operation: skip if (f<b>) = 0 Operation: skip if (f<b>) = 1 Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 1011 Description: bbba ffff ffff If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘0’, then the next instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘0’, then the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. Encoding: 1010 Description: bbba ffff ffff If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘1’, then the next instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘1’, then the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip: If skip: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE FALSE TRUE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If FLAG<1> PC If FLAG<1> PC DS39974A-page 446 BTFSC : : FLAG, 1, 0 = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (TRUE) 1; address (FALSE) Example: HERE FALSE TRUE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If FLAG<1> PC If FLAG<1> PC Preliminary BTFSS : : FLAG, 1, 0 = address (HERE) = = = = 0; address (FALSE) 1; address (TRUE) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY BTG Bit Toggle f BOV Branch if Overflow Syntax: BTG f, b {,a} Syntax: BOV Operands: 0 f 255 0b<7 a [0,1] Operands: -128 n 127 Operation: if Overflow bit is ‘1’, (PC) + 2 + 2n PC Status Affected: None Operation: (f<b>) f<b> Status Affected: None Encoding: 0111 Description: Encoding: bbba ffff ffff 1110 Description: Bit ‘b’ in data memory location ‘f’ is inverted. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BTG PORTC, 1(2) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. nnnn Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation 4, 0 Before Instruction: PORTC = 0111 0101 [75h] After Instruction: PORTC = 0110 0101 [65h] nnnn Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 0100 If the Overflow bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. n Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Overflow PC If Overflow PC Preliminary BOV Jump = address (HERE) = = = = 1; address (Jump) 0; address (HERE + 2) DS39974A-page 447 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY BZ Branch if Zero CALL Subroutine Call Syntax: BZ Syntax: CALL k {,s} n Operands: -128 n 127 Operands: Operation: if Zero bit is ‘1’, (PC) + 2 + 2n PC 0 k 1048575 s [0,1] Operation: Status Affected: None (PC) + 4 TOS, k PC<20:1>; if s = 1 (W) WS, (STATUS) STATUSS, (BSR) BSRS Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 Description: 0000 nnnn nnnn If the Zero bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Encoding: 1st word (k<7:0>) 2nd word(k<19:8>) Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data No operation If No Jump: Example: HERE Before Instruction PC After Instruction If Zero PC If Zero PC DS39974A-page 448 BZ address (HERE) = = = = 1; address (Jump) 0; address (HERE + 2) kkkk0 kkkk8 Subroutine call of entire 2-Mbyte memory range. First, return address (PC+ 4) is pushed onto the return stack. If ‘s’ = 1, the W, STATUS and BSR registers are also pushed into their respective shadow registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS. If ‘s’ = 0, no update occurs (default). Then, the 20-bit value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>. CALL is a two-cycle instruction. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Jump = k7kkk kkkk 110s k19kkk Description: Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Decode 1110 1111 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’<7:0>, Push PC to stack Read literal ’k’<19:8>, Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE Before Instruction PC = After Instruction PC = TOS = WS = BSRS = STATUSS = Preliminary CALL THERE,1 address (HERE) address (THERE) address (HERE + 4) W BSR STATUS 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY CLRF Clear f Syntax: CLRF Operands: 0 f 255 a [0,1] f {,a} Operation: 000h f, 1Z Status Affected: Z Encoding: 0110 Description: 101a ffff ffff Clears the contents of the specified register. CLRWDT Clear Watchdog Timer Syntax: CLRWDT Operands: None Operation: 000h WDT, 000h WDT postscaler, 1 TO, 1 PD Status Affected: TO, PD Encoding: 0000 Words: 1 Cycles: 1 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q Cycle Activity: Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: CLRF Before Instruction FLAG_REG After Instruction FLAG_REG FLAG_REG,1 = 5Ah = 00h 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 0100 Words: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation Process Data No operation Example: Q1 0000 CLRWDT instruction resets the Watchdog Timer. It also resets the postscaler of the WDT. Status bits, TO and PD, are set. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 0000 Description: Preliminary CLRWDT Before Instruction WDT Counter After Instruction WDT Counter WDT Postscaler TO PD = ? = = = = 00h 0 1 1 DS39974A-page 449 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY COMF Complement f CPFSEQ Compare f with W, Skip if f = W Syntax: COMF Syntax: CPFSEQ Operands: 0 f 255 a [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W), skip if (f) = (W) (unsigned comparison) Status Affected: None f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: f dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0001 Description: 11da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are complemented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Encoding: Description: If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register ‘f’ Example: COMF Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = W = 13h 13h ECh Q3 Process Data REG, 0, 0 ffff ffff Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q4 Words: 1 Write to destination Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register ‘f’ Q3 Process Data Q4 No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation No No No operation operation operation Example: HERE NEQUAL EQUAL Before Instruction PC Address W REG After Instruction If REG PC If REG PC DS39974A-page 450 001a If ‘f’ = W, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Words: 0110 f {,a} Preliminary Q4 No operation Q4 No operation No operation CPFSEQ REG, 0 : : = = = HERE ? ? = = = W; Address (EQUAL) W; Address (NEQUAL) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY CPFSGT Compare f with W, Skip if f > W CPFSLT Compare f with W, Skip if f < W Syntax: CPFSGT Syntax: CPFSLT Operands: 0 f 255 a [0,1] Operands: 0 f 255 a [0,1] Operation: (f) –W), skip if (f) > (W) (unsigned comparison) Operation: (f) –W), skip if (f) < (W) (unsigned comparison) Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0110 f {,a} 010a ffff ffff Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of the W by performing an unsigned subtraction. Encoding: 0110 Description: If the contents of ‘f’ are greater than the contents of WREG, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q2 Read register ‘f’ Q3 Process Data Q4 No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 No No No operation operation operation No No No operation operation operation Q4 No operation Example: HERE NGREATER GREATER Before Instruction PC W After Instruction If REG PC If REG PC Address (HERE) ? = = W; Address (GREATER) W; Address (NGREATER) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. ffff Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: CPFSGT REG, 0 : : = = ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If skip: Q4 No operation No operation 000a Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If the contents of ‘f’ are less than the contents of W, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. f {,a} Preliminary HERE NLESS LESS Before Instruction PC W After Instruction If REG PC If REG PC CPFSLT REG, 1 : : = = Address (HERE) ? < = = W; Address (LESS) W; Address (NLESS) DS39974A-page 451 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY DAW Decimal Adjust W Register DECF Decrement f Syntax: DAW Syntax: DECF f {,d {,a}} Operands: None Operands: Operation: If [W<3:0> > 9] or [DC = 1], then (W<3:0>) + 6 W<3:0>; else (W<3:0>) W<3:0> 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (f) – 1 dest Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z Encoding: If [W<7:4> > 9] or [C = 1], then (W<7:4>) + 6 W<7:4>; C =1; else (W<7:4>) W<7:4> Status Affected: 0000 Description: C Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 DAW adjusts the eight-bit value in W, resulting from the earlier addition of two variables (each in packed BCD format) and produces a correct packed BCD result. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register W Process Data Write W Example 1: A5h 0 0 DS39974A-page 452 Decrement register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: DECF Before Instruction CNT = Z = After Instruction CNT = Z = 05h 1 0 Example 2: Before Instruction W = C = DC = After Instruction W = C = DC = ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. DAW Before Instruction W = C = DC = After Instruction W = C = DC = ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). 0111 Description: 01da CNT, 1, 0 01h 0 00h 1 CEh 0 0 34h 1 0 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY DECFSZ Decrement f, Skip if 0 DCFSNZ Decrement f, Skip if Not 0 Syntax: DECFSZ f {,d {,a}} Syntax: DCFSNZ Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (f) – 1 dest, skip if result = 0 Operation: (f) – 1 dest, skip if result 0 Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 0010 Description: 11da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). Encoding: 0100 Description: If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Q2 Q3 Q4 Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination If skip: If skip: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation DECFSZ GOTO CNT, 1, 1 LOOP Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: CONTINUE HERE ZERO NZERO Before Instruction TEMP After Instruction TEMP If TEMP PC If TEMP PC Address (HERE) CNT – 1 0; Address (CONTINUE) 0; Address (HERE + 2) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Q1 No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 No operation Before Instruction PC = After Instruction CNT = If CNT = PC = If CNT PC = 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode HERE ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity: Example: ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 1 11da The contents of register ‘f’ are decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is not ‘0’, the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Words: f {,d {,a}} Preliminary DCFSNZ : : TEMP, 1, 0 = ? = = = = TEMP – 1, 0; Address (ZERO) 0; Address (NZERO) DS39974A-page 453 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY GOTO Unconditional Branch INCF Increment f Syntax: GOTO k Syntax: INCF Operands: 0 k 1048575 Operands: Operation: k PC<20:1> Status Affected: None 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (f) + 1 dest Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z Encoding: 1st word (k<7:0>) 2nd word(k<19:8>) 1110 1111 1111 k19kkk k7kkk kkkk kkkk0 kkkk8 Description: GOTO allows an unconditional branch anywhere within entire 2-Mbyte memory range. The 20-bit value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>. GOTO is always a two-cycle instruction. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Encoding: 0010 Description: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read literal ‘k’<7:0>, No operation Read literal ‘k’<19:8>, Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: GOTO THERE After Instruction PC = Address (THERE) ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: INCF Before Instruction CNT = Z = C = DC = After Instruction CNT = Z = C = DC = DS39974A-page 454 10da If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Q Cycle Activity: Decode f {,d {,a}} Preliminary CNT, 1, 0 FFh 0 ? ? 00h 1 1 1 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY INCFSZ Increment f, Skip if 0 INFSNZ Syntax: INCFSZ Syntax: INFSNZ 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] f {,d {,a}} Increment f, Skip if Not 0 f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operands: Operation: (f) + 1 dest, skip if result = 0 Operation: (f) + 1 dest, skip if result 0 Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 0011 Description: 11da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’. (default) Encoding: 0100 Description: 10da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If the result is not ‘0’, the next instruction which is already fetched is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip: If skip: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE NZERO ZERO Before Instruction PC = After Instruction CNT = If CNT = PC = If CNT PC = INCFSZ : : CNT, 1, 0 Example: Before Instruction PC = After Instruction REG = If REG PC = If REG = PC = Address (HERE) CNT + 1 0; Address (ZERO) 0; Address (NZERO) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. HERE ZERO NZERO Preliminary INFSNZ REG, 1, 0 Address (HERE) REG + 1 0; Address (NZERO) 0; Address (ZERO) DS39974A-page 455 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY IORLW Inclusive OR Literal with W IORWF Inclusive OR W with f Syntax: IORLW k Syntax: IORWF Operands: 0 k 255 Operands: Operation: (W) .OR. k W Status Affected: N, Z 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (W) .OR. (f) dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0000 1001 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are ORed with the eight-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Encoding: 0001 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: IORLW Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = 00da ffff ffff Inclusive OR W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 35h 9Ah BFh f {,d {,a}} Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: IORWF Before Instruction RESULT = W = After Instruction RESULT = W = DS39974A-page 456 Preliminary RESULT, 0, 1 13h 91h 13h 93h 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY LFSR Load FSR MOVF Move f Syntax: LFSR f, k Syntax: MOVF Operands: 0f2 0 k 4095 Operands: Operation: k FSRf 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Status Affected: None Operation: f dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 1110 1111 1110 0000 00ff k7kkk k11kkk kkkk Description: The 12-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the file select register pointed to by ‘f’. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Encoding: 0101 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ MSB Process Data Write literal ‘k’ MSB to FSRfH Decode Read literal ‘k’ LSB Process Data Write literal ‘k’ to FSRfL Example: After Instruction FSR2H FSR2L 03h ABh 00da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are moved to a destination dependent upon the status of ‘d’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the 256-byte bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. LFSR 2, 3ABh = = f {,d {,a}} Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write W Example: MOVF Before Instruction REG W After Instruction REG W 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary REG, 0, 0 = = 22h FFh = = 22h 22h DS39974A-page 457 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY MOVFF Move f to f MOVLB Move Literal to Low Nibble in BSR Syntax: MOVFF fs,fd Syntax: MOVLW k Operands: 0 fs 4095 0 fd 4095 Operands: 0 k 255 Operation: k BSR Status Affected: None Operation: (fs) fd Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (destin.) Encoding: 1100 1111 Description: ffff ffff ffff ffff ffffs ffffd The contents of source register ‘fs’ are moved to destination register ‘fd’. Location of source ‘fs’ can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data space (000h to FFFh) and location of destination ‘fd’ can also be anywhere from 000h to FFFh. 2 Cycles: 2 kkkk kkkk The eight-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the Bank Select Register (BSR). The value of BSR<7:4> always remains ‘0’ regardless of the value of k7:k4. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write literal ‘k’ to BSR MOVLB 5 Example: The MOVFF instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register Words: 0001 Description: Either source or destination can be W (a useful special situation). MOVFF is particularly useful for transferring a data memory location to a peripheral register (such as the transmit buffer or an I/O port). 0000 Before Instruction BSR Register = After Instruction BSR Register = 02h 05h Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ (src) Process Data No operation Decode No operation No operation Write register ‘f’ (dest) No dummy read Example: MOVFF Before Instruction REG1 REG2 After Instruction REG1 REG2 DS39974A-page 458 REG1, REG2 = = 33h 11h = = 33h 33h Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY MOVLW Move Literal to W MOVWF Move W to f Syntax: MOVLW k Syntax: MOVWF Operands: 0 k 255 Operands: Operation: kW 0 f 255 a [0,1] Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 Description: 1110 kkkk kkkk The eight-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Operation: (W) f Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: After Instruction W = MOVLW f {,a} 111a ffff ffff Move data from W to register ‘f’. Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the 256-byte bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 5Ah 5Ah Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: MOVWF Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary REG, 0 4Fh FFh 4Fh 4Fh DS39974A-page 459 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY MULLW Multiply Literal with W MULWF Multiply W with f Syntax: MULLW Syntax: MULWF Operands: 0 f 255 a [0,1] Operation: (W) x (f) PRODH:PRODL Status Affected: None k Operands: 0 k 255 Operation: (W) x k PRODH:PRODL Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 Description: 1101 kkkk kkkk An unsigned multiplication is carried out between the contents of W and the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The 16-bit result is placed in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. PRODH contains the high byte. Encoding: 0000 Description: W is unchanged. None of the Status flags are affected. 1 Cycles: 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write registers PRODH: PRODL MULLW = = = = = = 0C4h E2h ? ? If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: E2h ADh 08h Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write registers PRODH: PRODL Example: Before Instruction W REG PRODH PRODL After Instruction W REG PRODH PRODL DS39974A-page 460 ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Decode Before Instruction W PRODH PRODL After Instruction W PRODH PRODL ffff Note that neither Overflow nor Carry is possible in this operation. A Zero result is possible but not detected. Q Cycle Activity: Example: 001a An unsigned multiplication is carried out between the contents of W and the register file location ‘f’. The 16-bit result is stored in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. PRODH contains the high byte. Both W and ‘f’ are unchanged. None of the Status flags are affected. Note that neither Overflow nor Carry is possible in this operation. A Zero result is possible but not detected. Words: f {,a} Preliminary MULWF REG, 1 = = = = C4h B5h ? ? = = = = C4h B5h 8Ah 94h 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY NEGF Negate f Syntax: NEGF Operands: 0 f 255 a [0,1] f {,a} Operation: (f) + 1 f Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0110 Description: 110a ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 1 1 Syntax: NOP Operands: None Operation: No operation Status Affected: None 0000 1111 ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Cycles: No Operation Encoding: Location ‘f’ is negated using two’s complement. The result is placed in the data memory location ‘f’. Words: NOP 0000 xxxx Description: No operation. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 0000 xxxx 0000 xxxx Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation No operation Example: None. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: NEGF Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = REG, 1 0011 1010 [3Ah] 1100 0110 [C6h] 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 461 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY POP Pop Top of Return Stack PUSH Push Top of Return Stack Syntax: POP Syntax: PUSH Operands: None Operands: None Operation: (TOS) bit bucket Operation: (PC + 2) TOS Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0110 Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0101 Description: The TOS value is pulled off the return stack and is discarded. The TOS value then becomes the previous value that was pushed onto the return stack. This instruction is provided to enable the user to properly manage the return stack to incorporate a software stack. Description: The PC + 2 is pushed onto the top of the return stack. The previous TOS value is pushed down on the stack. This instruction allows implementing a software stack by modifying TOS and then pushing it onto the return stack. Words: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation POP TOS value No operation POP GOTO NEW Example: Q2 Q3 Q4 PUSH PC + 2 onto return stack No operation No operation Example: Before Instruction TOS Stack (1 level down) = = 0031A2h 014332h After Instruction TOS PC = = 014332h NEW DS39974A-page 462 Q1 Decode Preliminary PUSH Before Instruction TOS PC = = 345Ah 0124h After Instruction PC TOS Stack (1 level down) = = = 0126h 0126h 345Ah 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY RCALL Relative Call RESET Reset Syntax: RCALL Syntax: RESET n Operands: -1024 n 1023 Operands: None Operation: (PC) + 2 TOS, (PC) + 2 + 2n PC Operation: Reset all registers and flags that are affected by a MCLR Reset. Status Affected: None Status Affected: All Encoding: 1101 Description: 1nnn nnnn nnnn Subroutine call with a jump up to 1K from the current location. First, return address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the stack. Then, add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a two-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Encoding: 0000 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation 1111 Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Start reset No operation No operation Example: Q2 1111 This instruction provides a way to execute a MCLR Reset in software. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 0000 Description: After Instruction Registers = Flags* = RESET Reset Value Reset Value PUSH PC to stack No operation Example: No operation HERE RCALL Jump Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction PC = Address (Jump) TOS = Address (HERE + 2) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 463 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY RETFIE Return from Interrupt RETLW Return Literal to W Syntax: RETFIE {s} Syntax: RETLW k Operands: s [0,1] Operands: 0 k 255 Operation: (TOS) PC, 1 GIE/GIEH or PEIE/GIEL; if s = 1, (WS) W, (STATUSS) STATUS, (BSRS) BSR, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged Operation: k W, (TOS) PC, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged Status Affected: None Status Affected: Encoding: 0000 Description: 0000 0001 Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: kkkk kkkk W is loaded with the eight-bit literal ‘k’. The program counter is loaded from the top of the stack (the return address). The high address latch (PCLATH) remains unchanged. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 000s Return from interrupt. Stack is popped and Top-of-Stack (TOS) is loaded into the PC. Interrupts are enabled by setting either the high or low-priority global interrupt enable bit. If ‘s’ = 1, the contents of the shadow registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS, are loaded into their corresponding registers, W, STATUS and BSR. If ‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers occurs (default). 1100 Description: GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL. Encoding: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data POP PC from stack, write to W No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation POP PC from stack Set GIEH or GIEL No operation 0000 No operation Example: RETFIE After Interrupt PC W BSR STATUS GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL DS39974A-page 464 No operation No operation 1 = = = = = TOS WS BSRS STATUSS 1 CALL TABLE ; ; ; ; : TABLE ADDWF PCL ; RETLW k0 ; RETLW k1 ; : : RETLW kn ; Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = Preliminary W contains table offset value W now has table value W = offset Begin table End of table 07h value of kn 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY RETURN Return from Subroutine RLCF Rotate Left f through Carry Syntax: RETURN {s} Syntax: RLCF Operands: s [0,1] Operands: Operation: (TOS) PC; if s = 1, (WS) W, (STATUSS) STATUS, (BSRS) BSR, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (f<n>) dest<n + 1>, (f<7>) C, (C) dest<0> Status Affected: C, N, Z Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 Description: Encoding: 0000 0001 001s 0011 Description: Return from subroutine. The stack is popped and the top of the stack (TOS) is loaded into the program counter. If ‘s’= 1, the contents of the shadow registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS, are loaded into their corresponding registers, W, STATUS and BSR. If ‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers occurs (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation Process Data POP PC from stack No operation No operation No operation No operation 01da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the left through the Carry flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity: Decode f {,d {,a}} register f C Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Example: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination RETURN After Instruction: PC = TOS Example: Before Instruction REG = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary RLCF REG, 0, 0 1110 0110 0 1110 0110 1100 1100 1 DS39974A-page 465 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY RLNCF Rotate Left f (No Carry) RRCF Rotate Right f through Carry Syntax: RLNCF Syntax: RRCF Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (f<n>) dest<n + 1>, (f<7>) dest<0> Operation: Status Affected: N, Z (f<n>) dest<n – 1>, (f<0>) C, (C) dest<7> Status Affected: C, N, Z Encoding: 0100 Description: f {,d {,a}} 01da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the left. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Encoding: 0011 Description: If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). Cycles: 1 Q1 Decode Q2 Read register ‘f’ Example: Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = DS39974A-page 466 RLNCF Q3 Process Data Q4 Write to destination Words: 1 Cycles: register f 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination REG, 1, 0 1010 1011 ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the right through the Carry flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). C Q Cycle Activity: ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. register f 1 00da If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: f {,d {,a}} Example: RRCF Before Instruction REG = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = 0101 0111 Preliminary REG, 0, 0 1110 0110 0 1110 0110 0111 0011 0 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY RRNCF Rotate Right f (No Carry) SETF Set f Syntax: RRNCF Syntax: SETF Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operands: 0 f 255 a [0,1] Operation: (f<n>) dest<n – 1>, (f<0>) dest<7> Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0100 Description: f {,d {,a}} 00da Operation: FFh f Status Affected: None Encoding: ffff ffff 0110 Description: The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the right. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). 1 Cycles: 1 Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example 1: RRNCF Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = Example 2: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ SETF Before Instruction REG After Instruction REG REG,1 = 5Ah = FFh REG, 1, 0 1101 0111 1110 1011 RRNCF Before Instruction W = REG = After Instruction W = REG = ffff Q Cycle Activity: Example: Q1 ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. register f Words: 100a The contents of the specified register are set to FFh. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank will be selected, overriding the BSR value. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, then the bank will be selected as per the BSR value (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. f {,a} REG, 0, 0 ? 1101 0111 1110 1011 1101 0111 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 467 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY SLEEP Enter Sleep Mode SUBFWB Subtract f from W with Borrow Syntax: SLEEP Syntax: SUBFWB Operands: None Operands: Operation: 00h WDT, 0 WDT postscaler, 1 TO, 0 PD 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (W) – (f) – (C) dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Status Affected: TO, PD Encoding: 0000 Encoding: 0000 0000 0011 0101 Description: The Power-Down status bit (PD) is cleared. The Time-out status bit (TO) is set. The Watchdog Timer and its postscaler are cleared. Description: 1 Cycles: 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation Process Data Go to Sleep Example: SLEEP Before Instruction TO = ? ? PD = After Instruction 1† TO = 0 PD = † If WDT causes wake-up, this bit is cleared. DS39974A-page 468 ffff ffff Subtract register ‘f’ and Carry flag (borrow) from W (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Q Cycle Activity: Decode 01da If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). The processor is put into Sleep mode with the oscillator stopped. Words: f {,d {,a}} Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example 1: SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 3 W = 2 C = 1 After Instruction REG = FF W = 2 C = 0 Z = 0 N = 1 ; result is negative Example 2: SUBFWB REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 2 W = 5 C = 1 After Instruction REG = 2 W = 3 C = 1 Z = 0 N = 0 ; result is positive SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 Example 3: Before Instruction REG = 1 W = 2 C = 0 After Instruction REG = 0 W = 2 C = 1 Z = 1 ; result is zero N = 0 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY SUBLW Subtract W from Literal SUBWF Subtract W from f Syntax: SUBLW k Syntax: SUBWF Operands: 0 k 255 Operands: Operation: k – (W) W Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W) dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0000 1000 kkkk kkkk Description: W is subtracted from the eight-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Encoding: 0101 Description: Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example 1: Before Instruction W = C = After Instruction W = C = Z = N = Example 2: Before Instruction W = C = After Instruction W = C = Z = N = Example 3: Before Instruction W = C = After Instruction W = C = Z = N = SUBLW SUBLW ; result is positive SUBLW ; result is zero 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination SUBWF REG, 1, 0 Example 1: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = 02h 03h ? FFh 0 0 1 ; (2’s complement) ; result is negative Example 2: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = Example 3: Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. ffff Subtract W from register ‘f’ (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Words: 02h ? 00h 1 1 0 ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. 02h 02h 11da If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). 01h ? 01h 1 0 0 f {,d {,a}} Preliminary 3 2 ? 1 2 1 0 0 ; result is positive SUBWF REG, 0, 0 2 2 ? 2 0 1 1 0 SUBWF ; result is zero REG, 1, 0 1 2 ? FFh ;(2’s complement) 2 0 ; result is negative 0 1 DS39974A-page 469 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY SUBWFB Subtract W from f with Borrow SWAPF Swap f Syntax: SUBWFB Syntax: SWAPF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W) – (C) dest Operation: Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z (f<3:0>) dest<7:4>, (f<7:4>) dest<3:0> Status Affected: None Encoding: 0101 Description: f {,d {,a}} 10da ffff ffff Subtract W and the Carry flag (borrow) from register ‘f’ (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Encoding: 0011 Description: If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register ‘f’ Example 1: SUBWFB Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = Example 2: Q4 Write to destination If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination REG, 1, 0 19h 0Dh 1 (0001 1001) (0000 1101) 0Ch 0Dh 1 0 0 (0000 1011) (0000 1101) ffff Example: SWAPF Before Instruction REG = After Instruction REG = REG, 1, 0 53h 35h ; result is positive SUBWFB REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W = C = Z = N = Example 3: 1Bh 1Ah 0 (0001 1011) (0001 1010) 1Bh 00h 1 1 0 (0001 1011) SUBWFB Before Instruction REG = W = C = After Instruction REG = W C Z N Q3 Process Data ffff If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 10da The upper and lower nibbles of register ‘f’ are exchanged. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed in register ‘f’ (default). = = = = DS39974A-page 470 ; result is zero REG, 1, 0 03h 0Eh 1 (0000 0011) (0000 1101) F5h (1111 0100) ; [2’s comp] (0000 1101) 0Eh 0 0 1 ; result is negative Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TBLRD Table Read TBLRD Table Read (Continued) Syntax: TBLRD ( *; *+; *-; +*) Example 1: TBLRD Operands: None Operation: if TBLRD *, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) TABLAT; TBLPTR – No Change if TBLRD *+, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) TABLAT; (TBLPTR) + 1 TBLPTR if TBLRD *-, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) TABLAT; (TBLPTR) – 1 TBLPTR if TBLRD +*, (TBLPTR) + 1 TBLPTR; (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) TABLAT Before Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR MEMORY(00A356h) After Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR Example 2: Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0000 0000 0000 TBLRD Before Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR MEMORY(01A357h) MEMORY(01A358h) After Instruction TABLAT TBLPTR *+ ; = = = 55h 00A356h 34h = = 34h 00A357h +* ; = = = = AAh 01A357h 12h 34h = = 34h 01A358h 10nn nn=0 * =1 *+ =2 *=3 +* This instruction is used to read the contents of Program Memory (P.M.). To address the program memory, a pointer called Table Pointer (TBLPTR) is used. The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR has a 2-Mbyte address range. TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte of Program Memory Word TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte of Program Memory Word The TBLRD instruction can modify the value of TBLPTR as follows: • no change • post-increment • post-decrement • pre-increment Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation (Read Program Memory) No operation No operation (Write TABLAT) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 471 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TBLWT Table Write TBLWT Table Write (Continued) Syntax: TBLWT ( *; *+; *-; +*) Example 1: TBLWT *+; Operands: None Operation: if TBLWT*, (TABLAT) Holding Register; TBLPTR – No Change if TBLWT*+, (TABLAT) Holding Register; (TBLPTR) + 1 TBLPTR if TBLWT*-, (TABLAT) Holding Register; (TBLPTR) – 1 TBLPTR if TBLWT+*, (TBLPTR) + 1 TBLPTR; (TABLAT) Holding Register Status Affected: Example 2: None Encoding: Description: Before Instruction TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A356h HOLDING REGISTER (00A356h) = FFh After Instructions (table write completion) TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A357h HOLDING REGISTER (00A356h) = 55h 0000 0000 0000 11nn nn=0 * =1 *+ =2 *=3 +* This instruction uses the 3 LSBs of TBLPTR to determine which of the 8 holding registers the TABLAT is written to. The holding registers are used to program the contents of Program Memory (P.M.). (Refer to Section 6.0 “Memory Organization” for additional details on programming Flash memory.) TBLWT +*; Before Instruction TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01389Ah HOLDING REGISTER (01389Ah) = FFh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Bh) = FFh After Instruction (table write completion) TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01389Bh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Ah) = FFh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Bh) = 34h The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR has a 2-Mbyte address range. The LSb of the TBLPTR selects which byte of the program memory location to access. TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte of Program Memory Word TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte of Program Memory Word The TBLWT instruction can modify the value of TBLPTR as follows: • • • • no change post-increment post-decrement pre-increment Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Q3 Q4 No No No operation operation operation No No No No operation operation operation operation (Write to (Read Holding TABLAT) Register) DS39974A-page 472 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY TSTFSZ Test f, Skip if 0 XORLW Exclusive OR Literal with W Syntax: TSTFSZ f {,a} Syntax: XORLW k Operands: 0 f 255 a [0,1] Operands: 0 k 255 Operation: (W) .XOR. k W Status Affected: N, Z Operation: skip if f = 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: Encoding: 0110 Description: 011a ffff ffff If ‘f’ = 0, the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed, making this a two-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. 0000 1010 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are XORed with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: Before Instruction W = After Instruction W = XORLW 0xAF B5h 1Ah Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE NZERO ZERO Before Instruction PC After Instruction If CNT PC If CNT PC TSTFSZ : : CNT, 1 = Address (HERE) = = = 00h, Address (ZERO) 00h, Address (NZERO) 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 473 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY XORWF Exclusive OR W with f Syntax: XORWF Operands: 0 f 255 d [0,1] a [0,1] Operation: (W) .XOR. (f) dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0001 Description: f {,d {,a}} 10da ffff ffff Exclusive OR the contents of W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in the register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f 95 (5Fh). See Section 28.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: XORWF Before Instruction REG = W = After Instruction REG = W = DS39974A-page 474 REG, 1, 0 AFh B5h 1Ah B5h Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 28.2 A summary of the instructions in the extended instruction set is provided in Table 28-3. Detailed descriptions are provided in Section 28.2.2 “Extended Instruction Set”. The opcode field descriptions in Table 28-1 (page 434) apply to both the standard and extended PIC18 instruction sets. Extended Instruction Set In addition to the standard 75 instructions of the PIC18 instruction set, the PIC18F47J13 family of devices also provide an optional extension to the core CPU functionality. The added features include eight additional instructions that augment Indirect and Indexed Addressing operations and the implementation of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing for many of the standard PIC18 instructions. Note: The additional features of the extended instruction set are enabled by default on unprogrammed devices. Users must properly set or clear the XINST Configuration bit during programming to enable or disable these features. The instructions in the extended set can all be classified as literal operations, which either manipulate the File Select Registers or use them for Indexed Addressing. Two of the instructions, ADDFSR and SUBFSR, each have an additional special instantiation for using FSR2. These versions (ADDULNK and SUBULNK) allow for automatic return after execution. 28.2.1 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SYNTAX Most of the extended instructions use indexed arguments, using one of the File Select Registers and some offset to specify a source or destination register. When an argument for an instruction serves as part of Indexed Addressing, it is enclosed in square brackets (“[ ]”). This is done to indicate that the argument is used as an index or offset. The MPASM™ Assembler will flag an error if it determines that an index or offset value is not bracketed. The extended instructions are specifically implemented to optimize re-entrant program code (that is, code that is recursive or that uses a software stack) written in high-level languages, particularly C. Among other things, they allow users working in high-level languages to perform certain operations on data structures more efficiently. These include: When the extended instruction set is enabled, brackets are also used to indicate index arguments in byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions. This is in addition to other changes in their syntax. For more details, see Section 28.2.3.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands”. • Dynamic allocation and deallocation of software stack space when entering and leaving subroutines • Function Pointer invocation • Software Stack Pointer manipulation • Manipulation of variables located in a software stack TABLE 28-3: The instruction set extension and the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode were designed for optimizing applications written in C. The user may likely never use these instructions directly in the assembler. The syntax for these commands is provided as a reference for users who may be reviewing code that has been generated by a compiler. Note: In the past, square brackets have been used to denote optional arguments in the PIC18 and earlier instruction sets. In this text and going forward, optional arguments are denoted by braces (“{ }”). EXTENSIONS TO THE PIC18 INSTRUCTION SET 16-Bit Instruction Word Mnemonic, Operands ADDFSR ADDULNK CALLW MOVSF f, k k MOVSS zs, zd PUSHL k SUBFSR SUBULNK f, k k zs, fd Description Cycles MSb Add Literal to FSR Add Literal to FSR2 and Return Call Subroutine using WREG Move zs (source) to 1st word fd (destination) 2nd word Move zs (source) to 1st word zd (destination) 2nd word Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement FSR2 Subtract Literal from FSR Subtract Literal from FSR2 and return 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. 1 2 2 2 LSb Status Affected None None None None 1 1110 1110 0000 1110 1111 1110 1111 1110 1000 1000 0000 1011 ffff 1011 xxxx 1010 ffkk 11kk 0001 0zzz ffff 1zzz xzzz kkkk kkkk kkkk 0100 zzzz ffff zzzz zzzz kkkk 1 2 1110 1110 1001 1001 ffkk 11kk kkkk None kkkk None 2 Preliminary None None DS39974A-page 475 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 28.2.2 EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ADDFSR Add Literal to FSR ADDULNK Syntax: ADDFSR f, k Syntax: ADDULNK k Operands: 0 k 63 f [ 0, 1, 2 ] Operands: 0 k 63 Operation: Operation: FSR(f) + k FSR(f) FSR2 + k FSR2, (TOS) PC Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 1000 ffkk kkkk Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Add Literal to FSR2 and Return Encoding: 1110 Description: Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to FSR Example: After Instruction FSR2 = 03FFh Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to FSR No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation 0422h Example: Note: kkkk This may be thought of as a special case of the ADDFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates only on FSR2. ADDFSR 2, 0x23 Before Instruction FSR2 = 11kk The instruction takes two cycles to execute; a NOP is performed during the second cycle. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 1000 The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the contents of FSR2. A RETURN is then executed by loading the PC with the TOS. ADDULNK 0x23 Before Instruction FSR2 = PC = 03FFh 0100h After Instruction FSR2 = PC = 0422h (TOS) All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s). DS39974A-page 476 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY CALLW Subroutine Call Using WREG MOVSF Move Indexed to f Syntax: CALLW Syntax: MOVSF [zs], fd Operands: None Operands: Operation: (PC + 2) TOS, (W) PCL, (PCLATH) PCH, (PCLATU) PCU 0 zs 127 0 fd 4095 Operation: ((FSR2) + zs) fd Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 Description 0000 0001 0100 First, the return address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the return stack. Next, the contents of W are written to PCL; the existing value is discarded. Then, the contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are latched into PCH and PCU, respectively. The second cycle is executed as a NOP instruction while the new next instruction is fetched. Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (destin.) Description: Unlike CALL, there is no option to update W, STATUS or BSR. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 1110 1111 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Read WREG Push PC to stack No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation The contents of the source register are moved to destination register ‘fd’. The actual address of the source register is determined by adding the 7-bit literal offset ‘zs’, in the first word, to the value of FSR2. The address of the destination register is specified by the 12-bit literal ‘fd’ in the second word. Both addresses can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data space (000h to FFFh). Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Before Instruction PC = PCLATH = PCLATU = W = After Instruction PC = TOS = PCLATH = PCLATU = W = CALLW Decode address (HERE) 10h 00h 06h 001006h address (HERE + 2) 10h 00h 06h 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. zzzzs ffffd If the resultant source address points to an Indirect Addressing register, the value returned will be 00h. Decode HERE 0zzz ffff The MOVSF instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. Q Cycle Activity: Example: 1011 ffff Q2 Q3 Determine Determine source addr source addr No operation Q4 Read source reg No operation No dummy read Example: MOVSF Before Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h REG2 After Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h REG2 Preliminary Write register ‘f’ (dest) [0x05], REG2 = 80h = = 33h 11h = 80h = = 33h 33h DS39974A-page 477 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY MOVSS Move Indexed to Indexed PUSHL Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement FSR2 Syntax: MOVSS [zs], [zd] Syntax: PUSHL k Operands: 0 zs 127 0 zd 127 Operands: 0k 255 Operation: k (FSR2), FSR2 – 1 FSR2 Status Affected: None Operation: ((FSR2) + zs) ((FSR2) + zd) Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (dest.) 1110 1111 Description 1011 xxxx 1zzz xzzz zzzzs zzzzd The contents of the source register are moved to the destination register. The addresses of the source and destination registers are determined by adding the 7-bit literal offsets, ‘zs’ or ‘zd’, respectively, to the value of FSR2. Both registers can be located anywhere in the 4096-byte data memory space (000h to FFFh). Encoding: Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Words: 1 Cycles: Q1 Decode Q2 Q3 Determine Determine source addr source addr Determine dest addr Example: kkkk 1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read ‘k’ Process data Write to destination Example: PUSHL 0x08 Before Instruction FSR2H:FSR2L Memory (01ECh) = = 01ECh 00h After Instruction FSR2H:FSR2L Memory (01ECh) = = 01EBh 08h Q4 Read source reg Write to dest reg MOVSS [0x05], [0x06] Before Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h Contents of 86h After Instruction FSR2 Contents of 85h Contents of 86h DS39974A-page 478 Determine dest addr kkkk Q Cycle Activity: Q Cycle Activity: Decode 1010 The 8-bit literal ‘k’ is written to the data memory address specified by FSR2. FSR2 is decremented by 1 after the operation. This instruction allows users to push values onto a software stack. The MOVSS instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. If the resultant source address points to an Indirect Addressing register, the value returned will be 00h. If the resultant destination address points to an Indirect Addressing register, the instruction will execute as a NOP. 1110 Description: = 80h = 33h = 11h = 80h = 33h = 33h Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY SUBFSR Subtract Literal from FSR SUBULNK Syntax: SUBFSR f, k Syntax: SUBULNK k Operands: 0 k 63 Operands: 0 k 63 f [ 0, 1, 2 ] Operation: Operation: FSRf – k FSRf FSR2 – k FSR2, (TOS) PC Status Affected: None Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 1001 ffkk kkkk Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Encoding: 1110 Description: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Before Instruction FSR2 = After Instruction FSR2 = SUBFSR 2, 0x23 1001 11kk kkkk The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the contents of the FSR2. A RETURN is then executed by loading the PC with the TOS. The instruction takes two cycles to execute; a NOP is performed during the second cycle. Q Cycle Activity: Example: Subtract Literal from FSR2 and Return This may be thought of as a special case of the SUBFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates only on FSR2. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: 03FFh 03DCh Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation Example: 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary SUBULNK 0x23 Before Instruction FSR2 = PC = 03FFh 0100h After Instruction FSR2 = PC = 03DCh (TOS) DS39974A-page 479 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 28.2.3 Note: BYTE-ORIENTED AND BIT-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS IN INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE Enabling the PIC18 instruction set extension may cause legacy applications to behave erratically or fail entirely. In addition to eight new commands in the extended set, enabling the extended instruction set also enables Indexed Literal Offset Addressing (Section 6.6.1 “Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”). This has a significant impact on the way that many commands of the standard PIC18 instruction set are interpreted. When the extended set is disabled, addresses embedded in opcodes are treated as literal memory locations: either as a location in the Access Bank (a = 0) or in a GPR bank designated by the BSR (a = 1). When the extended instruction set is enabled and a = 0, however, a file register argument of 5Fh or less is interpreted as an offset from the pointer value in FSR2 and not as a literal address. For practical purposes, this means that all instructions that use the Access RAM bit as an argument – that is, all byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost half of the core PIC18 instructions – may behave differently when the extended instruction set is enabled. When the content of FSR2 is 00h, the boundaries of the Access RAM are essentially remapped to their original values. This may be useful in creating backward-compatible code. If this technique is used, it may be necessary to save the value of FSR2 and restore it when moving back and forth between C and assembly routines in order to preserve the Stack Pointer. Users must also keep in mind the syntax requirements of the extended instruction set (see Section 28.2.3.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands”). Although the Indexed Literal Offset mode can be very useful for dynamic stack and pointer manipulation, it can also be very annoying if a simple arithmetic operation is carried out on the wrong register. Users who are accustomed to the PIC18 programming must keep in mind that, when the extended instruction set is enabled, register addresses of 5Fh or less are used for Indexed Literal Offset Addressing. Representative examples of typical byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode are provided on the following page to show how execution is affected. The operand conditions shown in the examples are applicable to all instructions of these types. DS39974A-page 480 28.2.3.1 Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands When the extended instruction set is enabled, the file register argument, ‘f’, in the standard byte-oriented and bit-oriented commands is replaced with the literal offset value, ‘k’. As already noted, this occurs only when ‘f’ is less than or equal to 5Fh. When an offset value is used, it must be indicated by square brackets (“[ ]”). As with the extended instructions, the use of brackets indicates to the compiler that the value is to be interpreted as an index or an offset. Omitting the brackets, or using a value greater than 5Fh within the brackets, will generate an error in the MPASM Assembler. If the index argument is properly bracketed for Indexed Literal Offset Addressing, the Access RAM argument is never specified; it will automatically be assumed to be ‘0’. This is in contrast to standard operation (extended instruction set disabled), when ‘a’ is set on the basis of the target address. Declaring the Access RAM bit in this mode will also generate an error in the MPASM Assembler. The destination argument ‘d’ functions as before. In the latest versions of the MPASM Assembler, language support for the extended instruction set must be explicitly invoked. This is done with either the command line option, /y, or the PE directive in the source listing. 28.2.4 CONSIDERATIONS WHEN ENABLING THE EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET It is important to note that the extensions to the instruction set may not be beneficial to all users. In particular, users who are not writing code that uses a software stack may not benefit from using the extensions to the instruction set. Additionally, the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode may create issues with legacy applications written to the PIC18 assembler. This is because instructions in the legacy code may attempt to address registers in the Access Bank below 5Fh. Since these addresses are interpreted as literal offsets to FSR2 when the instruction set extension is enabled, the application may read or write to the wrong data addresses. When porting an application to the PIC18F47J13 family, it is very important to consider the type of code. A large, re-entrant application that is written in C and would benefit from efficient compilation will do well when using the instruction set extensions. Legacy applications that heavily use the Access Bank will most likely not benefit from using the extended instruction set. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY ADD W to Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) BSF Bit Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) Syntax: ADDWF Syntax: BSF [k], b Operands: 0 k 95 d [0,1] Operands: 0 f 95 0b7 Operation: (W) + ((FSR2) + k) dest Operation: 1 ((FSR2) + k)<b> Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Status Affected: None ADDWF Encoding: [k] {,d} 0010 Description: 01d0 kkkk kkkk The contents of W are added to the contents of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Encoding: 1000 bbb0 kkkk kkkk Description: Bit ‘b’ of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’, is set. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Q Cycle Activity: Example: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read ‘k’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWF Before Instruction W OFST FSR2 Contents of 0A2Ch After Instruction W Contents of 0A2Ch BSF Before Instruction FLAG_OFST FSR2 Contents of 0A0Ah After Instruction Contents of 0A0Ah [OFST] ,0 [FLAG_OFST], 7 = = 0Ah 0A00h = 55h = D5h = = = 17h 2Ch 0A00h = 20h = 37h SETF Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) = 20h Syntax: SETF [k] Operands: 0 k 95 Operation: FFh ((FSR2) + k) Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 1000 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by ‘k’, are set to FFh. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read ‘k’ Process Data Write register Example: SETF Before Instruction OFST FSR2 Contents of 0A2Ch After Instruction Contents of 0A2Ch 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary [OFST] = = 2Ch 0A00h = 00h = FFh DS39974A-page 481 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 28.2.5 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS WITH MICROCHIP MPLAB® IDE TOOLS The latest versions of Microchip’s software tools have been designed to fully support the extended instruction set for the PIC18F47J13 family. This includes the MPLAB C18 C Compiler, MPASM assembly language and MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE). When selecting a target device for software development, MPLAB IDE will automatically set default Configuration bits for that device. The default setting for the XINST Configuration bit is ‘1’, enabling the extended instruction set and Indexed Literal Offset Addressing. For proper execution of applications developed to take advantage of the extended instruction set, XINST must be set during programming. DS39974A-page 482 To develop software for the extended instruction set, the user must enable support for the instructions and the Indexed Addressing mode in their language tool(s). Depending on the environment being used, this may be done in several ways: • A menu option or dialog box within the environment that allows the user to configure the language tool and its settings for the project • A command line option • A directive in the source code These options vary between different compilers, assemblers and development environments. Users are encouraged to review the documentation accompanying their development systems for the appropriate information. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 29.0 DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT 29.1 The PIC® microcontrollers and dsPIC® digital signal controllers are supported with a full range of software and hardware development tools: • Integrated Development Environment - MPLAB® IDE Software • Compilers/Assemblers/Linkers - MPLAB C Compiler for Various Device Families - HI-TECH C for Various Device Families - MPASMTM Assembler - MPLINKTM Object Linker/ MPLIBTM Object Librarian - MPLAB Assembler/Linker/Librarian for Various Device Families • Simulators - MPLAB SIM Software Simulator • Emulators - MPLAB REAL ICE™ In-Circuit Emulator • In-Circuit Debuggers - MPLAB ICD 3 - PICkit™ 3 Debug Express • Device Programmers - PICkit™ 2 Programmer - MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer • Low-Cost Demonstration/Development Boards, Evaluation Kits, and Starter Kits MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software The MPLAB IDE software brings an ease of software development previously unseen in the 8/16/32-bit microcontroller market. The MPLAB IDE is a Windows® operating system-based application that contains: • A single graphical interface to all debugging tools - Simulator - Programmer (sold separately) - In-Circuit Emulator (sold separately) - In-Circuit Debugger (sold separately) • A full-featured editor with color-coded context • A multiple project manager • Customizable data windows with direct edit of contents • High-level source code debugging • Mouse over variable inspection • Drag and drop variables from source to watch windows • Extensive on-line help • Integration of select third party tools, such as IAR C Compilers The MPLAB IDE allows you to: • Edit your source files (either C or assembly) • One-touch compile or assemble, and download to emulator and simulator tools (automatically updates all project information) • Debug using: - Source files (C or assembly) - Mixed C and assembly - Machine code MPLAB IDE supports multiple debugging tools in a single development paradigm, from the cost-effective simulators, through low-cost in-circuit debuggers, to full-featured emulators. This eliminates the learning curve when upgrading to tools with increased flexibility and power. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 483 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 29.2 MPLAB C Compilers for Various Device Families The MPLAB C Compiler code development systems are complete ANSI C compilers for Microchip’s PIC18, PIC24 and PIC32 families of microcontrollers and the dsPIC30 and dsPIC33 families of digital signal controllers. These compilers provide powerful integration capabilities, superior code optimization and ease of use. For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE debugger. 29.3 HI-TECH C for Various Device Families For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE debugger. The compilers include a macro assembler, linker, preprocessor, and one-step driver, and can run on multiple platforms. MPASM Assembler The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal macro assembler for PIC10/12/16/18 MCUs. The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel® standard HEX files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines and generated machine code and COFF files for debugging. The MPASM Assembler features include: MPLINK Object Linker/ MPLIB Object Librarian The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable objects created by the MPASM Assembler and the MPLAB C18 C Compiler. It can link relocatable objects from precompiled libraries, using directives from a linker script. The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and modification of library files of precompiled code. When a routine from a library is called from a source file, only the modules that contain that routine will be linked in with the application. This allows large libraries to be used efficiently in many different applications. The object linker/library features include: The HI-TECH C Compiler code development systems are complete ANSI C compilers for Microchip’s PIC family of microcontrollers and the dsPIC family of digital signal controllers. These compilers provide powerful integration capabilities, omniscient code generation and ease of use. 29.4 29.5 • Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many smaller files • Enhanced code maintainability by grouping related modules together • Flexible creation of libraries with easy module listing, replacement, deletion and extraction 29.6 MPLAB Assembler, Linker and Librarian for Various Device Families MPLAB Assembler produces relocatable machine code from symbolic assembly language for PIC24, PIC32 and dsPIC devices. MPLAB C Compiler uses the assembler to produce its object file. The assembler generates relocatable object files that can then be archived or linked with other relocatable object files and archives to create an executable file. Notable features of the assembler include: • • • • • • Support for the entire device instruction set Support for fixed-point and floating-point data Command line interface Rich directive set Flexible macro language MPLAB IDE compatibility • Integration into MPLAB IDE projects • User-defined macros to streamline assembly code • Conditional assembly for multi-purpose source files • Directives that allow complete control over the assembly process DS39974A-page 484 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 29.7 MPLAB SIM Software Simulator 29.9 The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator allows code development in a PC-hosted environment by simulating the PIC MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs on an instruction level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from a comprehensive stimulus controller. Registers can be logged to files for further run-time analysis. The trace buffer and logic analyzer display extend the power of the simulator to record and track program execution, actions on I/O, most peripherals and internal registers. The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator fully supports symbolic debugging using the MPLAB C Compilers, and the MPASM and MPLAB Assemblers. The software simulator offers the flexibility to develop and debug code outside of the hardware laboratory environment, making it an excellent, economical software development tool. 29.8 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System is Microchip’s next generation high-speed emulator for Microchip Flash DSC and MCU devices. It debugs and programs PIC® Flash MCUs and dsPIC® Flash DSCs with the easy-to-use, powerful graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE), included with each kit. The emulator is connected to the design engineer’s PC using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target with either a connector compatible with incircuit debugger systems (RJ11) or with the new highspeed, noise tolerant, Low-Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS) interconnection (CAT5). The emulator is field upgradable through future firmware downloads in MPLAB IDE. In upcoming releases of MPLAB IDE, new devices will be supported, and new features will be added. MPLAB REAL ICE offers significant advantages over competitive emulators including low-cost, full-speed emulation, run-time variable watches, trace analysis, complex breakpoints, a ruggedized probe interface and long (up to three meters) interconnection cables. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger System MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger System is Microchip's most cost effective high-speed hardware debugger/programmer for Microchip Flash Digital Signal Controller (DSC) and microcontroller (MCU) devices. It debugs and programs PIC® Flash microcontrollers and dsPIC® DSCs with the powerful, yet easyto-use graphical user interface of MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE). The MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger probe is connected to the design engineer's PC using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target with a connector compatible with the MPLAB ICD 2 or MPLAB REAL ICE systems (RJ-11). MPLAB ICD 3 supports all MPLAB ICD 2 headers. 29.10 PICkit 3 In-Circuit Debugger/ Programmer and PICkit 3 Debug Express The MPLAB PICkit 3 allows debugging and programming of PIC® and dsPIC® Flash microcontrollers at a most affordable price point using the powerful graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE). The MPLAB PICkit 3 is connected to the design engineer's PC using a full speed USB interface and can be connected to the target via an Microchip debug (RJ-11) connector (compatible with MPLAB ICD 3 and MPLAB REAL ICE). The connector uses two device I/O pins and the reset line to implement in-circuit debugging and In-Circuit Serial Programming™. The PICkit 3 Debug Express include the PICkit 3, demo board and microcontroller, hookup cables and CDROM with user’s guide, lessons, tutorial, compiler and MPLAB IDE software. Preliminary DS39974A-page 485 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 29.11 PICkit 2 Development Programmer/Debugger and PICkit 2 Debug Express 29.13 Demonstration/Development Boards, Evaluation Kits, and Starter Kits The PICkit™ 2 Development Programmer/Debugger is a low-cost development tool with an easy to use interface for programming and debugging Microchip’s Flash families of microcontrollers. The full featured Windows® programming interface supports baseline (PIC10F, PIC12F5xx, PIC16F5xx), midrange (PIC12F6xx, PIC16F), PIC18F, PIC24, dsPIC30, dsPIC33, and PIC32 families of 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit microcontrollers, and many Microchip Serial EEPROM products. With Microchip’s powerful MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE) the PICkit™ 2 enables in-circuit debugging on most PIC® microcontrollers. In-Circuit-Debugging runs, halts and single steps the program while the PIC microcontroller is embedded in the application. When halted at a breakpoint, the file registers can be examined and modified. A wide variety of demonstration, development and evaluation boards for various PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs allows quick application development on fully functional systems. Most boards include prototyping areas for adding custom circuitry and provide application firmware and source code for examination and modification. The PICkit 2 Debug Express include the PICkit 2, demo board and microcontroller, hookup cables and CDROM with user’s guide, lessons, tutorial, compiler and MPLAB IDE software. 29.12 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal, CE compliant device programmer with programmable voltage verification at VDDMIN and VDDMAX for maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display (128 x 64) for menus and error messages and a modular, detachable socket assembly to support various package types. The ICSP™ cable assembly is included as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program PIC devices without a PC connection. It can also set code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3 connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable. The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and optimized algorithms for quick programming of large memory devices and incorporates an MMC card for file storage and data applications. DS39974A-page 486 The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs, temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232 interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional EEPROM memory. The demonstration and development boards can be used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom circuits and for learning about various microcontroller applications. In addition to the PICDEM™ and dsPICDEM™ demonstration/development board series of circuits, Microchip has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software for analog filter design, KEELOQ® security ICs, CAN, IrDA®, PowerSmart battery management, SEEVAL® evaluation system, Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate sensing, plus many more. Also available are starter kits that contain everything needed to experience the specified device. This usually includes a single application and debug capability, all on one board. Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com) for the complete list of demonstration, development and evaluation kits. Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 30.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Absolute Maximum Ratings(†) Ambient temperature under bias.............................................................................................................-40°C to +125°C Storage temperature .............................................................................................................................. -65°C to +150°C Voltage on any digital only I/O pin or MCLR with respect to VSS (except VDD) ........................................... -0.3V to 6.0V Voltage on any combined digital and analog pin with respect to VSS (except VDD)........................ -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V) Voltage on VDDCORE with respect to VSS ................................................................................................... -0.3V to 2.75V Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS ........................................................................................................... -0.3V to 4.0V Total power dissipation (Note 1) ...............................................................................................................................1.0W Maximum current out of VSS pin ...........................................................................................................................300 mA Maximum current into VDD pin ..............................................................................................................................250 mA Maximum output current sunk by any PORTB, PORTC and RA6 I/O pin...............................................................25 mA Maximum output current sunk by any PORTA (except RA6), PORTD and PORTE I/O pin......................................8 mA Maximum output current sourced by any PORTB, PORTC and RA6 I/O pin .........................................................25 mA Maximum output current sourced by any PORTA (except RA6), PORTD and PORTE I/O pin ................................8 mA Maximum current sunk byall ports .......................................................................................................................200 mA Maximum current sourced by all ports ..................................................................................................................200 mA Note 1: Power dissipation is calculated as follows: PDIS = VDD x {IDD – IOH} + {(VDD – VOH) x IOH} + (VOL x IOL) † NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS39974A-page 487 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY FIGURE 30-1: PIC18F47J13 FAMILY VDD FREQUENCY GRAPH (INDUSTRIAL) 4.0V 3.6V Voltage (VDD) 3.5V 3.0V Valid Operating Range 2.5V 2.35V 2.15V 48 MHz 8 MHz 0 Frequency PIC18LF47J13 FAMILY VDDCORE FREQUENCY GRAPH (INDUSTRIAL)(1) FIGURE 30-2: 3.00V Voltage (VDDCORE) 2.75V 2.75V Valid Operating Range 2.50V 2.35V 2.25V 2.00V 0 Note 1: 48 MHz 8 MHz Frequency VDD and VDDCORE must be maintained so that VDDCORE VDD. DS39974A-page 488 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 30.1 DC Characteristics: Supply Voltage PIC18F47J13 Family (Industrial) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C TA +85°C for industrial PIC18F47J13 Family Param No. Symbol Characteristic Min Typ Max Units Conditions D001 VDD Supply Voltage 2.15 — 3.6 V PIC18F4XJ13, PIC18F2XJ13 D001A VDD Supply Voltage 2.0 — 3.6 V PIC18LF4XJ13, PIC18LF2XJ13 D001B VDDCORE External Supply for Microcontroller Core 2.0 — 2.75 V PIC18LF4XJ13, PIC18LF2XJ13 D001C AVDD Analog Supply Voltage VDD – 0.3 — VDD + 0.3 V D001D AVSS Analog Ground Potential VSS – 0.3 — VSS + 0.3 V D002 VDR RAM Data Retention Voltage(1) 1.5 — — V D003 VPOR VDD Start Voltage to Ensure Internal Power-on Reset Signal — — 0.7 V D004 SVDD VDD Rise Rate to Ensure Internal Power-on Reset Signal 0.05 — — D005 VBOR VDDCORE Brown-out Reset Voltage — 2.0 2.15 V PIC18F4XJ13, PIC18F2XJ13 only D006 VDSBOR VDD Brown-out Reset Voltage — 1.8 — V DSBOREN = 1 on “LF” device or “F” device in Deep Sleep Note 1: This is the limit to which VDDCORE can be lowered in Sleep mode, or during a device Reset, without losing RAM data. 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary See Section 5.3 “Power-on Reset (POR)” for details V/ms See Section 5.3 “Power-on Reset (POR)” for details DS39974A-page 489 PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 30.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F47J13 Family (Industrial) PIC18LF47J13 Family Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C TA +85°C for industrial PIC18F47J13 Family Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C TA +85°C for industrial Param No. Device Typ Max Units Conditions Power-Down Current (IPD)(1) – Sleep mode PIC18LFXXJ13 PIC18LFXXJ13 PIC18FXXJ13 PIC18FXXJ13 0.1 1.6 A -40°C 0.2 1.6 A +25°C 0.8 7.0 A +60°C 2.1 11.5 A +85°C 0.2 2.0 A -40°C 0.5 2.0 A +25°C 1.4 9.0 A +60°C 3.2 15.0 A +85°C 3.0 6.0 A -40°C 3.8 6.0 A +25°C 4.7 9.0 A +60°C 6.4 18.5 A +85°C 3.3 9.0 A -40°C 4.2 9.0 A +25°C 5.5 12.0 A +60°C 7.8 22.0 A +85°C VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V Sleep mode, REGSLP = 1 VDD = 2.15V VDDCORE = 10 F Capacitor VDD = 3.3V VDDCORE = 10 F Capacitor Power-Down Current (IPD)(1) – Deep Sleep mode PIC18FXXJ13 PIC18FXXJ13 Note 1: 2: 3: 2 25 nA -40°C 9 100 nA +25°C 72 250 nA +60°C 262 1000 nA +85°C 17 50 nA -40°C 53 150 nA +25°C 186 400 nA +60°C 503 2000 nA +85°C VDD = 2.15V, VDDCORE = 10 F Capacitor Deep Sleep mode VDD = 3.3V, VDDCORE = 10 F Capacitor The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in a high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS, and all features that add delta current are disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. All features that add delta current are disabled (such as WDT). The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD/VSS; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled unless otherwise specified. Low-power Timer1 with standard, low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost. DS39974A-page 490 Preliminary 2010 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC18F47J13 FAMILY 30.2 DC Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current PIC18F47J13 Family (Industrial) (Continued) PIC18LF47J13 Family Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C TA +85°C for industrial PIC18F47J13 Family Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C TA +85°C for industrial Param No. Device Typ Max Units Conditions 5.5 14.2 A -40°C 5.8 14.2 A +25°C Supply Current (IDD)(2) PIC18LFXXJ13 7.9 19.0 A +85°C 8.4 16.5 A -40°C 8.5 16.5 A +25°C 11.3 25.0 A +85°C PIC18FXXJ13 23.7 60.0 A -40°C 27.8 60.0 A +25°C PIC18LFXXJ13 Note 1: 2: 3: 34.0 70.0 A +85°C PIC18FXXJ13 26.1 70.0 A -40°C 29.6 70.0 A +25°C 36.2 96.0 A +85°C PIC18LFXXJ13 0.87 1.5 mA -40°C 0.91 1.5 mA +25°C 0.95 1.6 mA +85°C PIC18LFXXJ13 1.23 2.0 mA -40°C 1.24 2.0 mA +25°C 1.25 2.0 mA +85°C PIC18FXXJ13 0.99 2.4 mA -40°C 1.02 2.4 mA +25°C +85°C 1.06 2.6 mA PIC18FXXJ13 1.31 2.6 mA -40°C 1.25 2.6 mA +25°C 1.26 2.7 mA +85°C VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0V VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V VDD = 2.15V VDDCORE = 10 F Capacitor FOSC = 31 kHz RC_RUN mode, Internal RC Oscillator, INTSRC = 0 VDD = 3.3V VDDCORE = 10 F Capacitor VDD = 2.0V, VDDCORE = 2.0 VDD = 2.5V, VDDCORE = 2.5V VDD = 2.15V, VDDCORE = 10 F capacitor FOSC = 4 MHz, RC_RUN mode, Internal RC Oscillator VDD = 3.3V, VDDCORE = 10 F capacitor The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in a high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS, and all features that add delta current are disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 oscillator, BOR, etc.). The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also